GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Common)
File info: application/pdf · 1132 pages · 20.36MB
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Common)
SH-080779ENG-AM
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual - Mitsubishi Electric ...
programmable controller system, refer to the User's Manual for the CPU module. In this manual, the safety precautions are ranked as " WARNING" and ...
Full PDF Document
If the inline viewer fails, it will open the original document in compatibility mode automatically. You can also open the file directly.
Extracted Text
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Common)
-SW1DND-GXW2-E -SW1DNC-GXW2-E
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
(Always read these instructions before using this product.)
Before using this product, thoroughly read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual and pay careful attention to safety and handle the products properly. The precautions given in this manual are concerned with this product. For the safety precautions of the programmable controller system, refer to the User's Manual for the CPU module. In this manual, the safety precautions are ranked as " WARNING" and " CAUTION".
WARNING
Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in death or severe injury.
CAUTION
Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in minor or moderate injury or property damage.
Note that the CAUTION level may lead to serious consequences according to the circumstances. Always follow the precautions of both levels because they are important for personal safety.
Please save this manual to make it accessible when required and always forward it to the end user.
[Design Instructions]
WARNING
When data change, program change, or status control is performed from a personal computer to a running programmable controller, create an interlock circuit outside the programmable controller to ensure that the whole system always operates safely. Furthermore, for the online operations performed from a personal computer to a programmable controller CPU, the corrective actions against a communication error due to such as a cable connection fault should be predetermined as a system.
[Security Precautions]
WARNING
To maintain the security (confidentiality, integrity, and availability) of the programmable controller and the system against unauthorized access, denial-of-service (DoS) attacks, computer viruses, and other cyberattacks from external devices via the network, take appropriate measures such as firewalls, virtual private networks (VPNs), and antivirus solutions.
[Startup/Maintenance Instructions]
CAUTION
The online operations performed from a personal computer to a running programmable controller CPU (Program change when a programmable controller CPU is RUN, operating status changes such as forced input/output operation and RUN-STOP switching, and remote control operation) must be executed after the manual has been carefully read and the safety has been ensured. When changing a program while a programmable controller CPU is RUN, it may cause a program corruption in some operating conditions. Fully understand the precautions described in Section 15.9 before use.
The positioning test functions of OPR, JOG, inching or positioning data for QD75/LD75 positioning module must be executed with the programmable controller set to STOP after the manual has been carefully read and the safety has been ensured. Specially when executing the function on the network system, ensure the safety thoroughly since the machinery whose operation cannot be checked by an operator may be activated. The operation failure may cause the injury or machine damage.
A - 1
CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT
(1) MELSEC programmable controller ("the PRODUCT") shall be used in conditions; i) where any problem, fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT, if any, shall not lead to any major or serious accident; and ii) where the backup and fail-safe function are systematically or automatically provided outside of the PRODUCT for the case of any problem, fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT.
(2) The PRODUCT has been designed and manufactured for the purpose of being used in general industries. MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC SHALL HAVE NO RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY AND ALL RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY BASED ON CONTRACT, WARRANTY, TORT, PRODUCT LIABILITY) FOR ANY INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONS OR LOSS OR DAMAGE TO PROPERTY CAUSED BY the PRODUCT THAT ARE OPERATED OR USED IN APPLICATION NOT INTENDED OR EXCLUDED BY INSTRUCTIONS, PRECAUTIONS, OR WARNING CONTAINED IN MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC USER'S, INSTRUCTION AND/OR SAFETY MANUALS, TECHNICAL BULLETINS AND GUIDELINES FOR the PRODUCT. ("Prohibited Application") Prohibited Applications include, but not limited to, the use of the PRODUCT in; � Nuclear Power Plants and any other power plants operated by Power companies, and/or any other cases in which the public could be affected if any problem or fault occurs in the PRODUCT. � Railway companies or Public service purposes, and/or any other cases in which establishment of a special quality assurance system is required by the Purchaser or End User. � Aircraft or Aerospace, Medical applications, Train equipment, transport equipment such as Elevator and Escalator, Incineration and Fuel devices, Vehicles, Manned transportation, Equipment for Recreation and Amusement, and Safety devices, handling of Nuclear or Hazardous Materials or Chemicals, Mining and Drilling, and/or other applications where there is a significant risk of injury to the public or property. Notwithstanding the above restrictions, Mitsubishi Electric may in its sole discretion, authorize use of the PRODUCT in one or more of the Prohibited Applications, provided that the usage of the PRODUCT is limited only for the specific applications agreed to by Mitsubishi Electric and provided further that no special quality assurance or fail-safe, redundant or other safety features which exceed the general specifications of the PRODUCTs are required. For details, please contact the Mitsubishi Electric representative in your region.
(3) Mitsubishi Electric shall have no responsibility or liability for any problems involving programmable controller trouble and system trouble caused by DoS attacks, unauthorized access, computer viruses, and other cyberattacks.
A - 2
REVISIONS
Print date Jul. 2008 Jan. 2009
Jul. 2009
Oct. 2009
Manual number*1 SH(NA)-080779ENG-A SH(NA)-080779ENG-B
SH(NA)-080779ENG-C
SH(NA)-080779ENG-D
Revision
First edition
Model Addition Q00UJ, Q00U, Q01U, Q10UDH, Q10UDEH, Q20UDH, Q20UDEH, FX series
Addition MANUALS, Section 2.1, Section 2.1.2, Section 2.1.3, Section 2.1.5, Section 2.1.6, Section 2.1.7, Section 2.1.8, Section 2.3, Section 3.2.8, Section 5.2, Section 12.8, Section 13.2, Section 14.5, Section 14.6, Section 14.7, Section 15.2.2, Section 15.3, Section 15.4, Section 17.1.2, Section 17.4.3, Section 17.4.4, Appendix 6
Correction GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL, Section 1.3, Section 2.1.4, Section 2.3, Section 2.5, Section 3.2.1, Section 3.2.2, Section 3.2.3, Section 3.2.4, Section 3.2.6, Section 3.3.1, Section 3.3.4, Section 4.1.6, Section 4.1.7, Section 4.2.1, Section 4.3, Section 4.3.1, Section 4.3.5, Section 4.4, Section 4.4.1, Section 4.5.2, Section 4.5.3, Section 4.6, Section 4.6.1, Section 4.7, Section 6.1, Section 6.1.1, Section 6.2, Section 6.2.1, Section 7.1.2, Section 7.2.2, Section 7.2.4, Section 8.1.2, Section 9.1.1, Section 9.1.2, Section 10.1.2, Section 10.2, Section 10.3, Section 11.1.1, Section 11.2.3, Section 11.3, Section 11.8.1, Section 12.2, Section 12.5, Section 12.9.1, Section 12.9.5, Section 13.1.1, Section 14.1, Section 14.3, Section 15.5.4, Section 16.1, Section 16.3, Section 16.5, Section 17.4.1, Section 17.4.2, Section 18.3.2, Chapter 19, Appendix 1, Appendix 2, Appendix 3, Appendix 4, Appendix 5, Appendix 7, Appendix 8, Appendix 9.3
Model Addition Q00J, Q00, Q01
Addition Section 4.1.4, Section 7.2.4, Section 10.3.2, Section 10.3.3, Section 10.3.4, Section 10.3.5, Section 11.1.2, Section 12.9.3, Section 12.10, Section 15.2.1, Section 15.2.2, Section 15.2.3, Section 16.5, Section 18.6.1, Chapter 19
Correction MANUALS, GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL, Section 1.3, Section 2.3, Section 2.5, Section 3.2.1, Section 3.2.8, Section 4.1.1, Section 4.1.8, Section 4.2.1, Section 4.3.1, Section 4.3.5, Section 4.4, Section 4.6, Section 4.8, Section 5.2, Section 6.1.1, Section 7.1.2, Section 7.2.2, Section 7.2.3, Section 7.3, Section 7.4.2, Section 8.2, Section 9.1.1, Section 9.2.1, Section 9.2.2, Section 10.3.1, Section 10.3.6, Section 11.1, Section 11.2.3, Section 11.4, Section 11.9, Section 12.1, Section 12.1.5, Section 12.5, Section 12.9.1, Section 12.9.4, Section 12.9.6, Section 12.11, Section 14.2.2, Section 14.7, Section 15.1, Section 15.2, Section 16.2, Section 16.4, Section 17.2, Section 18.3, Section 18.4, Section 18.6, Section 20.2, Section 20.3, Section 21.2, Section 22.2.2, Appendix 1, Appendix 2, Appendix 4, Appendix 5, Appendix 6, Appendix 7, Appendix 8, Appendix 9, Appendix 10
Modification Section 4.1.4 to 4.1.7 Section 4.1.5 to 4.1.8, Section 4.6.4 Section 4.7, Section 4.7 to 4.8 Section 4.8 to 4.9, Section 7.2.4 to 7.2.5 Section 7.2.5 to 7.2.6, Section 10.2 to 10.3 Section 10.1 to 10.2, Section 11.1.2 Section 11.2.3, Section 11.9.3 to 11.9.5 Section 11.9.4 to 11.9.6, Section 12.10 Section 12.11, Section 14.2.3 to 14.2.4 Section 14.2.2 to 14.2.3, Section 15.1.1 Section 15.2, Section 15.1.2 Section 15.4, Section 15.2 to 15.5 Section 16.1 to 16.4, Chapter 16 to 17 Chapter 17 to 18, Chapter 18 to 19 Chapter 20 to 21, Appendix 7 Appendix 6, Appendix 10 Appendix 8
Deletion Section 3.3.5, Section 4.4.1
Addition Appendix 13
Correction GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL, Section 1.3.1, Section 1.3.6, Section 2.1, Section 4.1.7, Section 6.1, Section 10.1.1, Section 10.3, Section 11.8.1, Section 11.8.2, Section 12.2, Section 20.3.2, Section 21.1, Section 21.2, Appendix 1.2, Appendix 1.6, Appendix 4.2, Appendix 4.3, Appendix 4.4, Appendix 4.5, Appendix 4.9, Appendix 4.10, Appendix 4.14, Appendix 7, Appendix 8, Appendix 10.1, Appendix 12
A - 3
Print date Jan. 2010
Apr. 2010
Manual number*1 SH(NA)-080779ENG-E
SH(NA)-080779ENG-F
Revision
Model Addition
L02, L26-BT
Addition
CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT, Section 3.3.4, Section 13.2, Section 16.6, Section 18.4.5, Section 18.6.1, Section 18.7, Appendix 10.7, Appendix 14
Correction
MANUALS, GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL, Section 1.3, Section 2.1, Section 2.2, Section 2.3, Section 2.4, Section 3.2.7, Section 4.1.1, Section 4.1.3, Section 4.1.7, Section 4.1.8, Section 4.3, Section 4.5.1, Section 4.5.5, Section 4.6, Section 6.1, Section 6.2, Section 6.3, Section 6.4, Section 7.1.2, Section 7.2.6, Section 7.3, Section 9.1.2, Section 9.4.2, Section 10.1, Section 10.2, Section 10.3, Section 11.2.1, Section 11.2.3, Section 11.3, Section 11.5, Section 11.7, Section 11.8.1, Section 11.8.2, Section 12.1, Section 12.1.2, Section 12.1.4, Section 12.2, Section 12.3, Section 12.5, Section 12.6, Section 12.8, Section 12.8.2, Section 12.9.1, Section 12.9.2, Section 12.9.4, Section 12.9.5, Section 12.9.6, Section 12.10.2, Section 12.10.3, Section 12.10.4, Section 12.11, Section 12.11.1, Section 12.11.2, Section 13.3.1, Section 13.3.2, Section 13.3.3, Section 14.1.2, Section 14.5, Section 14.7, Section 15.1, Section 15.2, Section 15.2.1, Section 15.2.3, Section 16.1, Section 16.4.1, Section 16.4.2, Section 16.4.3, Section 16.4.4, Section 17.1, Section 17.2, Section 17.3, Section 17.4, Section 17.5, Section 18.1.1, Section 18.1.2, Section 18.1.3, Section 18.1.4, Section 18.4.1, Section 18.4.3, Section 18.5, Section 18.5.2, Section 18.5.3, Section 18.6, Section 19.3, Section 19.4.1, Section 19.4.2, Section 19.5.3, Section 19.6, Section 19.8, Section 21.1, Section 21.2, Appendix 1, Appendix 1.1, Appendix 1.3, Appendix 1.4, Appendix 1.5, Appendix 1.6, Appendix 1.7.1, Appendix 1.8, Appendix 2.1, Appendix 2.2, Appendix 2.3, Appendix 2.4, Appendix 4.2, Appendix 4.9, Appendix 4.13, Appendix 5, Appendix 6, Appendix 7, Appendix 8.1, Appendix 9, Appendix 10, Appendix 10.1, Appendix 10.2, Appendix 10.3, Appendix 10.4, Appendix 10.5, Appendix 10.6, Appendix 10.7, Appendix 12
Model Addition
Q50UDEH, Q100UDEH, LJ72GF15-T2
Addition
Section 4.1.8, Section 6.1.1, Section 6.1.2, Section 6.2.1, Section 12.12, Section 18.1.4, Section 18.4, Appendix 4.13, Appendix 10.8
Correction
MANUALS, GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL, Section 1.1, Section 1.2, Section 1.3.1, Section 2.1.1, Section 2.1.2, Section 2.1.3, Section 2.1.8, Section 2.3, Section 2.5, Section 3.2, Section 3.4, Section 3.5, Section 4.1.2, Section 4.6, Section 4.6.3, Section 4.8, Section 4.8.5, Section 6.1, Section 6.1.1, Section 6.4, Section 10.1.1, Section 11.1.1, Section 11.2.3, Section 11.3, Section 11.4, Section 11.5, Section 11.6, Section 11.7, Section 12.4.1, Section 12.6, Section 12.8, Section 12.9.1, Section 12.9.2, Section 12.9.6, Section 11.2.3, Section 14.1.2, Section 14.2.2, Section 16.1, Section 16.4.2, Section 16.4.3, Section 17.1, Section 17.2, Section 17.3, Section 17.6, Section 18.1, Section 18.3, Section 18.4, Section 18.5.3, Section 18.7, Section 18.7.2, Section 20.1, Section 20.3.2, Section 21.1, Section 21.2, Chapter 22, Appendix 1.1, Appendix 1.6, Appendix 2, Appendix 4.1, Appendix 4.2, Appendix 4.5, Appendix 4.9, Appendix 4.13, Appendix 5, Appendix 6, Appendix 7, Appendix 10, Appendix 12, Appendix 13
Modification
Section 18.4 to 18.6 Section 18.5 to 18.7, Appendix 4.13 to 4.14 Appendix 4.14 to 4.15
A - 4
Print date Sept. 2010
Jan. 2011 Mar. 2011
Manual number*1 SH(NA)-080779ENG-G
SH(NA)-080779ENG-H SH(NA)-080779ENG-I
Revision
Model Addition QJ72LP25, QJ72BR15
Addition Section 16.2.2, Section 17.7, Section 18.8, Appendix 2.3, Appendix 15
Correction
GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL, Section 1.2, Section 1.3.1, Section 1.3.2, Section 1.3.4, Section 1.3.5, Section 1.3.8, Section 2.1, Section 2.1.2, Section 2.1.4, Section 2.1.6, Section 2.1.7, Section 2.2, Section 2.2.1, Section 2.3, Section 3.2.1, Section 3.2.2, Section 3.2.3, Section 3.2.4, Section 3.2.6, Section 3.3, Section 3.3.4, Section 3.3.5, Section 4.1.1, Section 4.1.2, Section 4.1.3, Section 4.1.7, Section 4.1.8, Section 4.2.1, Section 4.2.5, Section 4.5.3, Section 4.5.5, Section 4.6, Section 4.6.1, Section 4.7, Section 4.8, Section 4.8.5, Section 4.9, Section 6.1.1, Section 6.2, Section 6.2.1, Section 9.1.2, Section 9.2.1, Section 9.2.2, Section 10.1, Section 10.1.1, Section 10.2, Section 10.3, Section 10.3.1, Section 10.3.2, Section 10.3.3, Section 10.3.4, Section 10.3.5, Section 11.1, Section 11.1.1, Section 11.2, Section 11.2.1, Section 11.2.2, Section 11.2.3, Section 11.3, Section 11.4, Section 11.5, Section 11.6, Section 11.7.1, Section 11.7.2, Section 11.8.1, Section 11.8.2, Section 11.9, Section 12.1, Section 12.1.3, Section 12.1.4, Section 12.1.5, Section 12.2, Section 12.3, Section 12.4, Section 12.8, Section 12.9.1, Section 12.9.5, Section 12.12, Section 13.1, Section 13.1.1, Section 13.2, Section 13.2.1, Section 14.1.1, Section 14.1.2, Section 14.2.1, Section 14.2.2, Section 14.3, Section 15.1.2, Section 15.2, Section 17.1, Section 17.2, Section 17.3, Section 17.4, Section 17.7, Section 18.1.1, Section 18.1.4, Section 18.2.5, Section 18.2.7, Section 18.2.8, Section 18.3, Section 18.4, Section 18.4.4, Section 18.4.5, Section 18.4.6, Section 18.5.1, Section 18.5.3, Section 18.6.2, Section 18.6.3, Section 18.6.4, Section 18.7, Section 21.2, Appendix 1.1, Appendix 1.2, Appendix 1.6, Appendix 2.1, Appendix 2.2, Appendix 2.4, Appendix 2.5, Appendix 4.2, Appendix 4.5, Appendix 4.12, Appendix 4.14, Appendix 4.15, Appendix 6.1, Appendix 6.2, Appendix 7, Appendix 8, Appendix 9, Appendix 10.1, Appendix 10.2, Appendix 10.3, Appendix 10.4, Appendix 10.5, Appendix 10.6, Appendix 10.7, Appendix 10.9, Appendix 12, Appendix 15
Modification Appendix 4.6.3 Appendix 4.6.2, Appendix 2.3 Appendix 2.4
Addition TERMS, Section 3.3, Section 4.1, Section 12.5, Section 14.1, Section 14.3.4, Section 20.4, Appendix 16
Correction MANUALS, GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL, Section 1.3, Section 2.1.1, Section 2.1.3, Section 2.2, Section 2.3, Section 3.2.5, Section 3.2.6, Section 4.1.2, Section 4.2.1, Section 4.2.2, Section 4.2.3, Section 4.2.4, Section 4.2.5, Section 4.2.7, Section 4.2.8, Section 4.3.1, Section 4.3.5, Section 4.7.1, Section 4.8, Section 6.1.2, Section 8.2, Section 9.4.1, Section 9.4.2, Section 10.1.1, Section 10.2, Section 11.8, Section 12.1.5, Section 12.1.6, Section 12.2, Chapter 14, Section 16.3, Section 18.1.1, Section 18.7, Section 19.1.1, Section 19.1.3, Section 20.2, Section 20.3.1, Section 20.3.2, Section 21.2, Appendix 1.1, Appendix 1.4, Appendix 1.8, Appendix 4, Appendix 7, Appendix 12, Appendix 15, Appendix 16
Modification Section 4.1 to 4.9 Section 4.2 to 4.10, Section 12.5 Section 12.6, Section 14.1 to 14.7 Section 14.2 to 14.8
Addition Section 4.9, Section 16.6, Section 20.1, Section 20.3, Section 20.4, Section 20.5, Section 20.6, Section 20.11,
Correction MANUALS, GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL, Section 1.1, Section 1.3.1, Section 1.3.3, Section 2.2, Section 2.3, Section 3.3, Section 4.2.1, Section 4.2.2, Section 4.2.3, Section 4.2.4, Section 4.3.2, Section 4.6.1, Section 4.7.1, Section 6.1.1, Section 6.2, Section 6.4, Section 10.1, Section 10.2, Section 10.3, Section 11.1.1, Section 12.1.5, Section 12.7.1, Section 12.9.1, Section 14.1.2, Section 14.6.2, Section 15.1.2, Section 15.3, Section 16.6.3, Section 18.4, Section 18.6.3, Section 20.5.7, Section 20.8.1, Section 21.2, Appendix 1.1, Appendix 1.6, Appendix 4, Appendix 7, Appendix 10, Appendix 12, Appendix 13, Appendix 16, Appendix 17
Modification Section 20.1 Section 20.2, Section 20.2 Section 20.9, Section 20.3.1 Section 20.7, Section 20.3.2 Section 20.10, Section 20.4 Section 20.8, Appendix 15 and 16 Appendix 16 and 17
A - 5
Print date Jul. 2011
Sept. 2011
Manual number*1 SH(NA)-080779ENG-J
SH(NA)-080779ENG-K
Revision
Model Addition L02-P, L26-PBT
Addition Section 2.1.9, Section 3.4.1, Section 4.1.2, Section 5.2, Section 5.3, Section 10.1.2, Section 12.10.4, Section 20.5.1, Section 20.5.2, Section 20.5.3, Section 20.5.8, Section 20.5.12, Section 20.5.13, Section 20.5.14, Section 20.5.15, Section 20.5.16, Section 20.5.18, Appendix 1.2
Correction MANUALS, GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL, TERMS, Section 1.3.1, Section 1.3.2, Section 1.3.3, Section 1.3.6, Section 2.1, Section 2.2, Section 2.3, Section 2.5, Section 3.1, Section 3.3, Section 3.4, Section 4.1, Section 4.1.1, Section 4.2.1, Section 4.2.2, Section 4.2.3, Section 4.2.7, Section 4.2.8, Section 4.3.1, Section 4.11, Section 4.11.2, Section 6.1.1, Section 9.1.1, Section 9.2.2, Section 9.4.2, Section 10.1, Section 10.1.1, Section 10.1.3, Section 10.2, Section 10.3.1, Section 10.3.2, Section 10.3.3, Section 10.3.4, Section 11.6, Section 12.1, Section 12.1.5, Section 12.1.6, Section 12.9.1, Section 12.9.6, Section 12.10.1, Section 12.10.2, Section 12.10.3, Section 13.3, Section 16.6, Section 16.6.1, Section 16.6.2, Section 16.6.3, Section 16.6.4, Section 16.6.5, Section 16.6.8, Section 17.1, Section 17.5, Section 18.1.1, Section 18.4, Section 18.5.1, Section 18.6.2, Section 20.1, Section 20.3, Section 20.4, Section 20.5.2, Section 20.5.3, Section 20.5.13, Section 20.5.18, Section 20.5.4, Section 20.5.5, Section 20.5.6, Section 20.5.9, Section 20.5.11, Section 20.10, Section 20.11, Section 21.1, Section 21.2, Appendix 1.1, Appendix 1.7, Appendix 4.2, Appendix 4.5, Appendix 4.10, Appendix 4.13, Appendix 4.16, Appendix 4.18, Appendix 6.1, Appendix 6.2, Appendix 7, Appendix 10.9, Appendix 12
Modification Section 2.1.9 Section 2.1.10, Section 3.4.6 and Section 3.4.7 Section 3.4.3 and Section 3.4.4, Section 4.1.2 Section 4.1.3, Section 5.2 Section 5.4, Section 10.1.2 Section 10.1.3, Section 12.10.4 Section 12.10.5, Section 20.5.1 to Section 20.5.4 Section 20.5.4 to Section 20.5.7, Section 20.5.5 to Section 20.5.7 Section 20.5.9 to Section 20.5.11, Section 20.5.8 Section 20.5.17, Appendix 1.2 to Appendix 1.8 Appendix 1.3 to Appendix 1.9
Deletion Section 3.4.2, Section 3.4.3, Section 3.4.5, Section 3.4.6
Addition Section 2.1.10, Section 9.5, Section 11.9, Section 20.3.1
Correction TERMS, Section 1.3.1, Section 2.1, Section 3.2.6, Section 3.4, Section 4.2.7, Section 4.2.8, Section 4.6.5, Section 6.2, Section 9.1.2, Section 9.2.1, Section 9.4.2, Section 11.1.1, Section 12.1.3, Section 12.2, Section 18.1.1, Section 20.2, Section 20.3, Section 20.4, Section 20.5.4, Section 20.5.5, Section 20.5.6, Section 20.5.9, Section 20.5.11, Section 20.5.12, Section 20.5.14, Section 20.11, Appendix 4.3, Appendix 4.6, Appendix 4.16, Appendix 5.1, Appendix 6.1, Appendix 7, Appendix 8, Appendix 10, Appendix 12, Appendix 13.1, Appendix 13.2
Modification Section 2.1.10 Section 2.1.11, Section 11.9 Section 11.10
Deletion Section 6.2.2
A - 6
Print date Nov. 2011
Jan. 2012
Manual number*1 SH(NA)-080779ENG-L
SH(NA)-080779ENG-M
Revision
Addition Section 1.3.7, Section 4.3.5, Section 6.2.2, Section 6.2.3, Section 6.2.4, Section 6.5, Section 6.6, Chapter 22, Appendix 4.16, Appendix 18
Correction MANUALS, GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL, TERMS, Section 1.1, Section 1.3.1, Section 1.3.2, Section 1.3.3, Section 1.3.6, Section 2.1, Section 2.1.7, Section 2.1.10, Section 3.2.1, Section 4.2.7, Section 4.2.8, Section 4.7.1, Section 6.1.2, Section 6.2, Section 6.4, Section 9.3.1, Section 9.3.2, Section 9.4.2, Section 10.1, Section 10.2, Section 11.1, Section 11.2.1, Section 11.3, Section 11.8.1, Section 11.9, Section 12.1.3, Section 12.1.6, Section 12.2, Section 12.11.1, Section 13.1, Section 13.2, Section 14.1.1, Section 15.1.2, Section 16.4.3, Section 18.5.1, Section 18.5.2, Section 18.5.3, Section 18.5.4, Section 18.5.5, Section 18.7, Section 20.1, Section 21.2, Appendix 1.1, Appendix 1.3, Appendix 1.6, Appendix 1.7, Appendix 2.2, Appendix 2.3, Appendix 2.4, Appendix 4.1, Appendix 4.3, Appendix 4.5, Appendix 4.6, Appendix 4.11, Appendix 4.17, Appendix 4.19, Appendix 7, Appendix 8.1, Appendix 9, Appendix 12, Appendix 15, Appendix 17
Modification Section 1.3.7 to Section 1.3.9 Section 1.3.8 to Section 1.3.10, Section 4.3.5 Section 4.3.6, Appendix 2.1 to Appendix 2.2 Appendix 2.2 to Appendix 2.3, Appendix 2.3 Appendix 2.1, Appendix 4.16 to Appendix 4.18 Appendix 4.17 to Appendix 4.19
Model Addition FX3GC
Addition Section 18.4.2
Correction Section 1.3.1, Section 2.1.3, Section 2.1.7, Section 2.1.10, Section 2.3, Section 3.4.1, Section 4.2.8, Section 6.1.1, Section 6.2.1, Section 6.2.2, Section 11.1.1, Section 11.9, Section 12.1, Section 12.1.6, Section 12.9.6, Section 18.4, Section 18.4.4, Section 18.4.6, Section 18.4.7, Section 20.5.2, Section 21.2, Appendix 4.17, Appendix 7, Appendix 10.1, Appendix 10.7, Appendix 12
Modification Section 18.4.2 to Section 18.4.6 Section 18.4.3 to Section 18.4.7
Deletion Section 4.7.3
A - 7
Print date May 2012
Sept. 2012
Manual number*1 SH(NA)-080779ENG-N
SH(NA)-080779ENG-O
Revision
Model Addition
Q02PH, Q06PH, Q12PH, Q12PRH, Q25PH, Q25PRH
Addition
Section 6.2, Section 9.4, Section 11.5, Section 12.11.2, Section 17.2, Section 20.5.1, Section 20.5.4, Section 20.5.6, Appendix 4.20, Appendix 10.5, Appendix 10.6, Appendix 11.2
Correction
GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL, TERMS, Section 1.3.1, Section 1.3.2, Section 1.3.3, Section 2.1.7, Section 2.1.10, Section 2.2, Section 2.2.1, Section 2.3, Section 2.4, Section 3.2.1, Section 3.2.2, Section 3.2.5, Section 3.2.6, Section 3.2.7, Section 3.3, Section 3.4.1, Section 4.2.1, Section 4.2.2, Section 4.2.7, Section 4.2.8, Section 4.3.2, Section 4.3.6, Section 4.5, Section 4.6.5, Section 4.7.1, Section 4.10.4, Section 4.11.1, Section 5.2, Section 5.3, Section 6.1, Section 6.1.1, Section 6.2.2, Section 6.2.4, Section 6.3, Section 6.3.1, Section 6.5, Section 6.7, Section 7.2.2, Section 9.1.1, Section 9.1.2, Section 9.2.2, Section 9.5.2, Section 10.1, Section 10.1.1, Section 10.1.2, Section 10.2, Section 11.1.1, Section 11.3, Section 11.4, Section 12.1.6, Section 12.2, Section 12.9.1, Section 12.9.6, Section 12.10.3, Section 14.1.2, Section 14.3, Section 14.4, Section 14.6.2, Section 17.1, Section 17.3, Section 18.1.1, Section 18.1.4, Section 18.6.3, Section 18.6.4, Section 18.7, Section 18.8, Section 20.1, Section 20.5.7, Section 20.5.8, Section 20.5.9, Section 20.5.12, Section 20.10, Section 20.11, Section 21.1, Section 21.2, Appendix 1.1, Appendix 1.3, Appendix 1.7, Appendix 2.3, Appendix 2.4, Appendix 2.5, Appendix 4.1, Appendix 4.2, Appendix 4.4, Appendix 4.5, Appendix 4.10, Appendix 4.17, Appendix 5, Appendix 6.1, Appendix 6.2, Appendix 7, Appendix 8, Appendix 10, Appendix 10.2, Appendix 10.3, Appendix 10.4, Appendix 10.7, Appendix 10.8, Appendix 10.9, Appendix 11, Appendix 12, Appendix 13, Appendix 14, Appendix 17
Modification
Section 6.2 to Section 6.6 Section 6.3 to Section 6.7, Section 9.4 to Section 9.5 Section 9.5 to Section 9.6, Section 11.5 to Section 11.10 Section 11.6 to Section 11.11, Section 17.2 to Section 17.7 Section 17.3 to Section 17.8, Section 20.5.1 to Section 20.5.2 Section 20.5.2 to Section 20.5.3, Section 20.5.3 Section 20.5.5, Section 20.5.4 to Section 20.5.18 Section 20.5.7 to Section 20.5.21, Appendix 10.5 to Appendix 10.9 Appendix 10.7 to Appendix 10.11
Addition
Section 1.3.7, Section 6.3.2, Section 12.1.6
Correction
MANUALS, GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL, TERMS, Section 1.3.1, Section 3.2.2, Section 3.3, Section 4.2.1, Section 4.2.7, Section 4.2.8, Section 4.5, Section 4.6.5, Section 4.7.1, Section 5.2, Section 5.3, Section 6.1.1, Section 6.3.1, Section 6.3.3, Section 6.3.4, Section 6.5, Section 9.1.1, Section 10.1.1, Section 10.1.2, Section 10.2, Section 10.3.1, Section 10.3.2, Section 10.3.3, Section 10.3.4, Section 10.3.5, Section 11.2.2, Section 12.1, Section 12.1.4, Section 12.1.7, Section 12.9.1, Section 12.9.6, Section 12.10.5, Section 15.2, Section 16.4.3, Section 16.4.4, Section 16.4.5, Section 18.4, Section 18.6, Section 18.6.2, Section 18.6.3, Section 18.7, Section 21.1, Section 21.2, Appendix 1.6, Appendix 7, Appendix 10.11, Appendix 11, Appendix 12
Modification
Section 1.3.7 to Section 1.3.10 Section 1.3.8 to Section 1.3.11, Section 6.3.2 to Section 6.3.4 Section 6.3.3 to Section 6.3.5
A - 8
Print date Feb. 2013
May 2013 Sept. 2013
Manual number*1 SH(NA)-080779ENG-P
SH(NA)-080779ENG-Q SH(NA)-080779ENG-R
Revision
Model Addition
Q03UDV, Q04UDV, Q06UDV, Q13UDV, Q26UDV, L02S, L06, L26, LJ72MS15
Addition
Section 1.3.9, Section 1.3.10, Section 4.11, Section 13.1, Section 13.5, Section 18.3.2, Section 18.7, Appendix 13
Correction
GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL, Section 1.3.1, Section 1.3.2, Section 1.3.7, Section 1.3.8, Section 2.1, Section 2.2, Section 2.3, Section 2.4, Section 3.1, Section 3.2.1, Section 3.2.2, Section 3.2.3, Section 3.2.5, Section 3.2.8, Section 4.2.2, Section 4.2.8, Section 4.5, Section 4.8, Section 4.12.1, Section 6.1, Section 6.1.1, Section 6.3, Section 6.3.1, Section 6.3.2, Section 6.3.3, Section 6.3.5, Section 6.4 Section 9.1.1, Section 9.3.1, Section 9.3.2, Section 9.4, Section 10.1.1, Section 10.1.2, Section 11.2.2, Section 11.5.3, Section 11.7, Section 11.8, Section 11.9.1, Section 11.10, Section 12.1, Section 12.1.7, Section 12.5, Section 12.8, Section 12.10.2, Section 12.10.5, Section 12.11.1, Section 12.11.2, Section 13.1, Section 13.2, Section 13.3, Section 14.2, Section 14.3, Section 14.6, Section 14.6.1, Section 14.6.2, Section 14.6.3, Section 15.1, Section 15.2, Section 15.3, Section 16.2.1, Section 16.3.1, Section 16.3.2, Section 16.3.3, Section 16.4.2, Section 16.4.5, Section 16.6.2, Section 16.6.3, Section 16.6.4, Section 16.7, Section 17.4, Section 17.7, Section 18.1.1, Section 18.1.4, Section 18.3, Section 18.4, Section 18.4.2, Section 18.5.1, Section 18.5.2, Section 18.5.3, Section 18.5.4, Section 18.5.5, Section 18.6.1, Section 18.6.2, Section 18.6.3, Section 19.4.1, Section 20.5.8, Section 20.10, Section 21.2, Section 22.1.1, Appendix 1.1, Appendix 1.7, Appendix 2.2, Appendix 2.3, Appendix 2.4, Appendix 2.5, Appendix 4.2, Appendix 4.3, Appendix 4.5, Appendix 4.13, Appendix 4.15, Appendix 6.2, Appendix 7, Appendix 10, Appendix 10.2, Appendix 10.3, Appendix 10.4, Appendix 10.5, Appendix 10.6, Appendix 10.7, Appendix 10.8, Appendix 10.9, Appendix 10.10, Appendix 10.11, Appendix 10.12, Appendix 12
Modification Section 1.3.9 to Section 1.3.11 Section 1.3.11 to Section 1.3.13, Section 4.11 Section 4.12, Section 13.1 to Section 13.3 Section 13.2 to Section 13.4, Section 18.3.2 to Section 18.3.3 Section 18.3.3 to Section 18.3.4, Section 18.7 to Section 18.9 Section 18.8 to Section 18.10, Appendix 13 to Appendix 18 Appendix 14 to Appendix 19
Model Addition
L02S-P, L06-P, L26-P, FX3S
Addition
Section 1.3.10, Section 6.1.3
Correction
MANUALS, GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL, TERMS, Section 1.3.1, Section 1.3.8, Section 1.3.9, Section 1.3.11, Section 2.1, Section 2.1.3, Section 2.1.5, Section 2.1.6, Section 2.1.7, Section 2.1.10, Section 2.3, Section 2.4, Section 3.2.1, Section 4.2.1, Section 4.2.8, Section 4.7.2, Section 4.8, Section 4.11.3, Section 6.1.1, Section 6.3.1, Section 6.3.2, Section 6.3.3, Section 6.3.4, Section 7.1.2, Section 9.2.1, Section 9.5, Section 11.2.1, Section 11.2.2, Section 11.9.1, Section 11.10, Section 12.1, Section 12.8, Section 12.9.1, Section 12.9.6, Section 12.11.1, Section 12.11.2, Section 13.4.1, Section 13.4.3, Section 15.1, Section 15.2, Section 15.3, Section 16.7, Section 17.1, Section 17.4, Section 17.7, Section 18.7, Section 21.2, Appendix 1.1, Appendix 2.1, Appendix 2.2, Appendix 2.3, Appendix 2.4, Appendix 2.5, Appendix 4.2, Appendix 6.1, Appendix 7, Appendix 10, Appendix 12, Appendix 13, Appendix 15, Appendix 16, Appendix 18
Modification
Section 1.3.10 to Section 1.3.13 Section 1.3.11 to Section 1.3.14, Section 6.3.4 Section 4.13, Section 6.3.5 Section 6.3.4
Correction
MANUALS, Section 1.3.1, Section 1.3.6, Section 1.3.10, Section 1.3.11, Section 3.2.8, Section 4.2.8, Section 6.1.3, Section 6.3.1, Section 9.1.1, Section 10.1.1, Section 10.1.2, Section 12.2, Section 14.6, Section 14.8, Section 15.1.4, Section 15.9.1, Section 15.9.2, Section 15.10.3, Section 17.6.3, Section 19.1.2, Appendix 7, Appendix 12, Appendix 18
A - 9
Print date Dec. 2013
Mar. 2014 Jun. 2014 Sept. 2014
Dec. 2014 Mar. 2015 Jun. 2015 Dec. 2015
Manual number*1 SH(NA)-080779ENG-S
SH(NA)-080779ENG-T SH(NA)-080779ENG-U SH(NA)-080779ENG-V
SH(NA)-080779ENG-W SH(NA)-080779ENG-X SH(NA)-080779ENG-Y SH(NA)-080779ENG-Z
Revision
Correction GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL, Section 1.3.1, Section 1.3.7, Section 2.3, Section 3.2.2, Section 3.4.1, Section 4.1.3, Section 4.2.1, Section 4.2.2, Section 4.2.3, Section 4.2.5, Section 4.2.8, Section 4.4, Section 4.7.1, Section 4.10, Section 4.13, Section 6.1, Section 6.1.1, Section 6.3.2, Section 6.3.3, Section 6.3.4, Section 9.5.2, Section 10.3.1, Section 10.3.5, Section 12.1, Section 12.2, Section 14.1.1, Section 14.2.1, Section 14.9, Section 14.9.1, Section 14.9.2, Section 15.1.7, Section 15.9.5, Section 17.1.2, Section 17.2, Section 17.7, Section 19.6, Section 21.7, Section 21.8, Appendix 2.2, Appendix 2.3, Appendix 2.4, Appendix 7, Appendix 8, Appendix 10, Appendix 10.2, Appendix 10.3, Appendix 10.4, Appendix 10.8, Appendix 10.9, Appendix 10.10, Appendix 10.12, Appendix 12, Appendix 13
Correction GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL, Section 1.3.1, Section 3.2.1, Section 3.4, Section 4.2.1, Section 10.1.1, Section 14.2.1, Section 14.2.2, Section 14.3, Section 14.7, Section 14.8.1, Section 14.8.2, Section 14.10.2, Section 17.6.1, Section 17.6.2, Appendix 2.4, Appendix 4.5, Appendix 7, Appendix 12, Appendix 13, Appendix 15, Appendix 16, Appendix 18
Correction GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL, Section 1.3.1, Section 1.3.8, Section 1.3.11, Section 2.1.1, Section 2.2, Section 2.2.1, Section 2.3, Section 3.2.4, Section 4.2.8, Section 6.1.1, Section 7.2, Section 9.1.1, Section 11.1, Section 11.5.6, Section 12.1, Section 12.2, Section 15.10.3, Section 17.6.3, Section 21.4, Section 21.4.5, Appendix 7, Appendix 10.1, Appendix 12, Appendix 13
Addition Section 9.3.3
Correction GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL, Section 1.3.1, Section 9.2.2, Section 9.4, Section 10.2, Section 12.2, Section 14.2.2, Section 14.3, Section 14.11, Section 15.1, Section 15.1.2, Section 15.1.3, Section 15.1.7, Section 15.10.5, Section 17.1.1, Section 17.6.1, Section 19.7, Section 20.1, Section 21.4, Appendix 1.7, Appendix 2.2, Appendix 2.5, Appendix 4.5, Appendix 4.6, Appendix 4.17, Appendix 7, Appendix 8, Appendix 12, Appendix 14
Addition Section 14.9.3, Section 17.9
Correction GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL, Section 1.3.1, Section 1.3.14, Section 4.13, Section 6.1.1, Section 6.1.2, Section 12.2, Section 14.3, Section 14.9.1, Section 14.9.2, Section 15.1.3, Section 15.1.4, Section 15.10.4, Section 19.1.1, Section 19.1.2, Section 21.8, Appendix 7, Appendix 12
Correction GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL, Section 1.3.7, Section 1.3.11, Section 3.2.5, Section 6.3.2, Section 6.3.3, Section 12.2, Section 15.1.2, Section 15.11.2, Section 21.4, Appendix 2.3, Appendix 7, Appendix 12
Correction Section 1.3.1, Section 1.3.10, Section 3.3, Section 6.1.1, Section 6.3.4, Section 7.4.2, Section 17.3, Section 21.2.7, Appendix 7, Appendix 12, Appendix 13
Addition Section 4.13.2, Section 9.6.2
Correction
GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL, Section 1.3.1, Section 1.3.3, Section 3.1, Section 4.13, Section 6.3.2, Section 6.3.3, Section 9.2.1, Section 9.2.2, Section 9.6, Section 10.1.2, Section 12.2, Section 21.4, Appendix 7, Appendix 12, Appendix 13
A - 10
Print date Feb. 2016 Jun. 2016
Sept. 2016 Dec. 2016
Mar. 2017 Jul. 2017
Jan. 2018 Jun. 2018 Dec. 2018
Jun. 2019
Manual number*1 SH(NA)-080779ENG-AA SH(NA)-080779ENG-AB
SH(NA)-080779ENG-AC SH(NA)-080779ENG-AD
SH(NA)-080779ENG-AE SH(NA)-080779ENG-AF
SH(NA)-080779ENG-AG SH(NA)-080779ENG-AH SH(NA)-080779ENG-AI
SH(NA)-080779ENG-AJ
Revision
Correction Section 12.2, Section 15.1.5, Appendix 12
Addition Section 14.9.4
Correction GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL, Section 3.1, Section 3.2.1, Section 4.2.1, Section 11.4, Section 11.11, Section 14.2.2, Section 14.9, Section 14.9.1, Section 14.9.2, Section 14.9.3, Section 14.9.4, Section 14.10.2, Section 19.5, Appendix 7, Appendix 12, Appendix 13, Appendix 15, Appendix 16, Appendix 18
Correction GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL, Section 4.2.3, Section 4.2.5, Section 4.2.7, Section 4.3.6, Section 4.6.1, Section 6.1.1, Section 6.1.3, Section 15.1.4, Section 15.2, Section 21.5.1, Appendix 7, Appendix 10.4, Appendix 10.5, Appendix 12
Addition Section 1.3.11, Section 4.12.4, Section 6.1.4, Section 21.5
Correction Section 1.3.1, Section 4.2.7, Section 4.3.2, Section 4.7.1, Section 4.12.2, Section 6.1.1, Section 11.5.7, Section 11.5.8, Section 15.1.7, Section 15.9.6, Section 16.1, Section 17.4, Appendix 7, Appendix 10, Appendix 10.2, Appendix 10.3, Appendix 10.4, Appendix 10.5, Appendix 10.6, Appendix 10.7, Appendix 10.8, Appendix 10.9, Appendix 10.10, Appendix 10.12, Appendix 12
Modification Section 1.3.11 to Section 1.3.14 Section 1.3.12 to Section 1.3.15, Section 21.5 to Section 21.10 Section 21.6 to Section 21.11
Correction Section 4.12, Section 4.12.2, Section 4.12.4, Section 16.1, Section 17.4, Appendix 7, Appendix 10.1, Appendix 10.2, Appendix 10.3, Appendix 10.4, Appendix 10.5, Appendix 10.6, Appendix 10.8, Appendix 10.9, Appendix 12, Appendix 13
Addition Section 3.4.3
Correction Section 1.3.1, Section 1.3.6, Section 1.3.11, Section 2.4, Section 6.1.1, Section 6.1.4, Section 14.10.2, Section 14.11, Section 21.1.1, Section 21.5, Appendix 2.5, Appendix 7, Appendix 12, Appendix 16, Appendix 18
Modification Section 3.4.3 Section 3.4.4
Correction GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL, Section 1.3.4, Section 21.1.1, Appendix 2.3, Appendix 2.5, Appendix 12
Correction SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, Section 1.3.5, Section 1.3.7, Section 6.1, Appendix 1.7, Appendix 7, Appendix 12, Appendix 13
Addition Section 9.1.3, Section 15.1.6
Correction Section 1.3.1, Section 1.3.2, Section 1.3.3, Section 4.2.7, Section 4.3.2, Section 4.3.6, Section 14.2.1, Appendix 1.7, Appendix 7, Appendix 12
Modification Section 15.1.6 to Section 15.1.7 Section 15.1.7 to Section 15.1.8
Correction Section 1.3.7, Section 6.3.2, Section 11.5.18, Section 14.2.2, Section 14.6, Section 15.1, Appendix 7, Appendix 10.1, Appendix 12
A - 11
Print date Dec. 2019
Jun. 2020
Dec. 2020
Manual number*1 SH(NA)-080779ENG-AK
SH(NA)-080779ENG-AL
SH(NA)-080779ENG-AM
Revision
Addition Appendix 21
Correction Section 14.8.2, Appendix 2.5
Correction GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL, Section 2.1.1, Section 2.1.2, Section 2.1.8, Section 3.2.1, Section 4.2.1, Section 11.11, Section 14.2.2, Section 14.10.2, Section 14.13.1, Appendix 15, Appendix 16, Appendix 18, Appendix 21
Correction SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT, Section 15.1.4
*1 : The manual number is written at the bottom left of the back cover.
Japanese Manual Version SH-080730-AZ
This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind, nor does it confer any patent licenses. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual.
2008 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION
A - 12
INTRODUCTION
Thank you for purchasing the engineering software, MELSOFT series. Before using the product, thoroughly read this manual to develop full familiarity with the functions and performance to ensure correct use.
CONTENTS
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 1 CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 2 REVISIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 3 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 13 CONTENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 13 MANUALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 27 GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 35 TERMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 38
1
OVERVIEW
1.1 Product Overview
1 - 2
1.2 Features
1 - 4
1.3 List of Functions
1 - 9
1.3.1 1.3.2 1.3.3 1.3.4 1.3.5 1.3.6 1.3.7 1.3.8 1.3.9 1.3.10 1.3.11 1.3.12 1.3.13 1.3.14 1.3.15
List of functions common to Simple project and Structured project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 9 List of functions for editing in Ladder Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 23 List of functions for editing SFC diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 26 List of functions for editing SFC block list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 27 List of functions for editing in Structured Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 28 List of functions for editing in Structured Ladder/FBD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 29 List of functions for CC IE Field Configuration window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 32 List of functions for CC-Link Configuration window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 34 List of functions for AnyWireASLINK Configuration window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 35 List of Ethernet Configuration window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 36 List of CC-Link IEF Basic Configuration window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 37 List of functions for the Sensor/Device Monitor screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 37 List of functions for GX Simulator2 screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 38 List of functions for I/O system setting screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 39 List of functions for predefined protocol support function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 40
2
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
2.1 Connection from USB/Serial Port
2 - 2
2.1.1 2.1.2 2.1.3 2.1.4
USB cables (compatible with QCPU (Q mode), LCPU, and communication head module) . . . . 2 - 4 USB cables and function expansion boards (compatible with FX3U/FX3UC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 5 USB cables (compatible with FX3S, FX3G and FX3GC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 5 RS-232 cables (compatible with QCPU (Q mode), LCPU, and remote I/O module) . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 6
A - 13
2.1.5 2.1.6 2.1.7
2.1.8 2.1.9 2.1.10 2.1.11
Converters/cables for RS-232 connection (compatible with FXCPU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 6 Connection using function expansion boards (compatible with FXCPU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 7 Connection using RS-232 cables and function expansion boards (special adapters) (compatible with FXCPU). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 9 Converters/cables for USB connection (compatible with FXCPU). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 12 Connection via AJ65BT-R2N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 12 Function expansion board (special adapter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 13 Connection via GOT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 13
2.2 Connection from I/F Boards
2 - 14
2.2.1 I/F boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 15
2.3 Interfaces and Connectable Modules
2 - 16
2.4 System Configuration with Memory Card on Personal Computer
2 - 20
2.5 Supported Programming Languages
2 - 21
3
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
3.1 Starting and Exiting GX Works2
3 - 2
3.2 Screen Configuration and Basic Operations
3 - 3
3.2.1 3.2.2 3.2.3 3.2.4 3.2.5 3.2.6 3.2.7 3.2.8
Main frame configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 3 Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 5 Work windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 11 Docking windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 17 Navigation window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 20 Status bar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 23 Changing colors and fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 24 Customizing shortcut keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 27
3.3 Selecting Language
3 - 30
3.4 Help Function
3 - 32
3.4.1 3.4.2 3.4.3 3.4.4
Displaying GX Works2 help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 32 Displaying operating manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 35 Connecting to MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC FA Global Website . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 36 Checking version of GX Works2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 36
4
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
4.1 GX Works2 Project Management
4 - 2
4.1.1 4.1.2 4.1.3
Workspace format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 2 Single file format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 4 Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 5
4.2 Project Operations
4 - 9
4.2.1 4.2.2 4.2.3 4.2.4 4.2.5 4.2.6
Creating projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 9 Opening existing projects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 12 Saving projects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 14 Saving projects with compression and decompressing projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 16 Deleting projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 19 Closing projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 20
A - 14
4.2.7 4.2.8
Verifying project data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 20 Changing programmable controller type of projects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 28
4.3 Operations of Programmable Controller CPU Data
4 - 34
4.3.1 4.3.2 4.3.3 4.3.4 4.3.5 4.3.6
Adding new data to project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 34 Copying/pasting data in projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 36 Changing project data names. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 38 Deleting project data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 38 Merging data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 39 Displaying/editing properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 42
4.4 Operations of Intelligent Function Module Data
4 - 45
4.5 Changing Project Types
4 - 46
4.6 Managing Project Revisions
4 - 47
4.6.1 4.6.2 4.6.3 4.6.4 4.6.5
Registering revision information (creating backup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 47 Displaying revision list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 48 Restoring backup projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 49 Deleting revision information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 51 Verifying revisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 51
4.7 Utilizing Projects and Data in Other Formats
4 - 53
4.7.1 4.7.2
Opening projects in other formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 56 Reading ASC format data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 59
4.8 Saving Projects in Other Formats
4 - 60
4.9 Starting GX Developer from GX Works2
4 - 61
4.10 Setting Security for Projects
4 - 62
4.10.1 4.10.2 4.10.3 4.10.4 4.10.5
Setting/resetting security of projects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 65 Managing (adding/deleting/changing) users. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 66 Logging in projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 69 Changing access authority of access level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 70 Considerations for using the security function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 71
4.11 Setting Security Key
4 - 72
4.11.1 4.11.2 4.11.3
Managing security key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 73 Locking project with security key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 78 Considerations of security keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 79
4.12 Protecting POUs in Projects
4 - 80
4.12.1 4.12.2 4.12.3 4.12.4
Managing (setting/unlocking/deleting) block passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 81 Setting/changing block passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 82 Unlocking block passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 83 Considerations for a block password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 84
4.13 Managing Profiles
4 - 88
4.13.1 Registering profiles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 88 4.13.2 Deleting profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 90
5
EDITING PROGRAMS
5.1 Programming
5 - 2
A - 15
5.2 Label Programming
5 - 2
5.3 Considerations for Using Label Projects
5 - 4
5.3.1 5.3.2 5.3.3 5.3.4 5.3.5
Editing programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 4 Writing programs to programmable controller CPU (Write to PLC/Online program change). . . . 5 - 6 Reading programs from programmable controller CPU (Read from PLC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 7 Verifying programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 8 Monitoring programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 8
5.4 Converting/Compiling Projects
5 - 9
6
SETTING PARAMETERS
6.1 Setting PLC Parameters
6 - 2
6.1.1 6.1.2 6.1.3 6.1.4
PLC parameter item list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 4 Checking duplications of X/Y assignment among parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 18 Setting open setting on Ethernet Configuration window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 20 Setting the station information in the CC-Link IEF Basic configuration window. . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 28
6.2 Setting Redundant Parameters
6 - 36
6.3 Setting Network Parameters
6 - 37
6.3.1 6.3.2 6.3.3 6.3.4
Network parameter item list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 40 Setting station information on CC IE Field Configuration window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 46 Setting station information on CC-Link Configuration window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 59 Checking devices assigned to CC-Link modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 69
6.4 Setting Remote Password
6 - 73
6.5 Checking Parameters
6 - 75
6.6 Outputting Parameters to CSV Files
6 - 76
6.7 Setting default parameters
6 - 78
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
7.1 Device Memory
7 - 2
7.1.1 7.1.2
Features of device memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 2 List of devices selectable on the Input Devices screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 3
7.2 Setting Device Memory
7 - 5
7.2.1 7.2.2 7.2.3 7.2.4 7.2.5 7.2.6
Setting device values in units of points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 7 Setting device values by specifying device range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 8 Setting character strings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 11 Setting same value simultaneously . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 12 Changing display format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 13 Changing the number of rows/columns on device memory editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 14
7.3 Searching Devices
7 - 15
7.4 Writing/Reading Device Memory Data
7 - 16
7.4.1 7.4.2
Writing/reading data to/from programmable controller CPUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 16 Writing/reading data to/from Excel files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 17
A - 16
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
8.1 Device Initial Values
8 - 2
8.1.1 8.1.2 8.1.3
Feature of device initial values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 2 List of applicable devices for device initial values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 3 Procedure for setting device initial values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 4
8.2 Setting Device Initial Values
8 - 5
9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
9.1 Device Comments
9 - 2
9.1.1 9.1.2 9.1.3
Global device comments/local device comments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 2 List of device comment applicable devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 8 Changing text size on the device comment editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 10
9.2 Creating Device Comments
9 - 11
9.2.1 9.2.2
Creating comments on the device comment editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 11 Creating comments on the ladder editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 13
9.3 Deleting Device Comments
9 - 15
9.3.1 9.3.2 9.3.3
Deleting comments of all devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 15 Deleting comments of devices being displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 15 Deleting unused device comments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 15
9.4 Extending Number of Points of Device Comment
9 - 16
9.5 Utilizing Sample Comments
9 - 17
9.5.1 9.5.2
Utilizing sample comments of special relays/special registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 17 Utilizing sample comments of intelligent function modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 18
9.6 Writing/Reading Device Comments to CSV Files
9 - 19
9.6.1 9.6.2 9.6.3
Writing/reading device comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 19 Writing/Reading local device comments in a batch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 22 CSV file format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 24
10 SEARCH/REPLACE
10.1 Cross Reference
10 - 2
10.1.1 10.1.2 10.1.3
Creating/displaying cross reference information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 2 Setting conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 9 Filtering display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 11
10.2 Displaying Device List
10 - 13
10.3 Search/Replacement
10 - 16
10.3.1 10.3.2 10.3.3 10.3.4 10.3.5 10.3.6
Searching/replacing devices/labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 17 Searching/replacing instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 22 Searching/replacing character strings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 24 Changing contacts between open contact and closed contact. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 26 Batch replacing devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 28 Displaying results and error logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 30
A - 17
11 PRINTING
11.1 Print Function
11 - 2
11.2 Setting Printer
11 - 4
11.3 Batch Printing Project Data
11 - 5
11.3.1 Setting printer for batch print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 7
11.4 Page Set Up for Batch Print
11 - 8
11.5 Setting Details of Batch Print
11 - 10
11.5.1 11.5.2 11.5.3 11.5.4 11.5.5 11.5.6 11.5.7 11.5.8 11.5.9 11.5.10 11.5.11 11.5.12 11.5.13 11.5.14 11.5.15 11.5.16 11.5.17 11.5.18 11.5.19 11.5.20 11.5.21
Setting common items (batch-print setting for user library data) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 10 Setting batch print for cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 12 Setting batch print for PLC parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 13 Setting batch print for redundant parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 14 Setting batch print for network parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 15 Setting batch print for program settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 16 Setting batch print for ladder programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 17 Setting batch print for MELSAP3 programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 20 Setting batch print for MELSAP-L programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 22 Setting batch print for ST programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 24 Setting batch print for Structured Ladder/FBD programs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 25 Setting batch print for FB/FUN programs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 26 Setting batch print for labels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 28 Setting batch print for device comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 29 Setting batch print for device memory data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 30 Setting batch print for device initial values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 31 Setting batch print for TC setting values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 32 Setting batch print for device list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 33 Setting batch print for cross reference information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 35 Setting batch print for statements/notes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 36 Setting batch print for product information list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 37
11.6 Displaying Batch Print Preview
11 - 38
11.7 Printing Data Displayed on Screen
11 - 39
11.8 Setting Print Details for Data Displayed on Screen
11 - 40
11.8.1 Setting print details for ladder programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 40 11.8.2 Setting print details for device initial values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 42
11.9 Previewing Print Images
11 - 43
11.10 Printing Examples
11 - 44
11.11 Considerations for Printing
11 - 52
12 SETTING OPTIONS
12.1 Basic Operations 12.2 Option Setting List
12 - 2 12 - 4
A - 18
13 USING LIBRARIES
13.1 Libraries
13 - 2
13.1.1 FB libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 3 13.1.2 User libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 4
14 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
14.1 Setting Connection Destinations
14 - 2
14.1.1 14.1.2 14.1.3
Transfer setup screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 3 Creating connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 6 Specifying connection destination for regular use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 7
14.2 Accessing Programmable Controller CPU Directly
14 - 8
14.2.1 Connecting with serial/USB cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 8 14.2.2 Accessing by Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 12
14.3 Accessing Programmable Controller CPU Via Networks
14 - 15
14.4 Accessing Programmable Controller CPU in Multiple CPU System
14 - 22
14.5 Accessing Redundant CPUs
14 - 25
14.5.1 14.5.2 14.5.3
Considerations for routing intelligent function module on extension base unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 27 Operation when system switching occurs on Redundant CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 28 Operation when communication error occurs during monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 29
14.6 Accessing Programmable Controller CPU via Ethernet Board
14 - 33
14.7 Accessing Programmable Controller CPU via G4 Module
14 - 35
14.8 Setting for Access via Serial Communication Module
14 - 36
14.8.1 Connection on a 1:1 basis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 36 14.8.2 Connection on a 1:n basis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 37
14.9 Setting for Access via GOT (GOT Transparent Function)
14 - 40
14.9.1 14.9.2 14.9.3 14.9.4
Accessing programmable controller CPU via GOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 41 Accessing programmable controller CPU via serial communication module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 44 Accessing programmable controller CPU via CC-Link IE Controller Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 46 Accessing programmable controller CPU via CC-Link IE Field Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 48
14.10 Accessing Programmable Controller CPU via Phone Line
14 - 50
14.10.1 14.10.2 14.10.3
Setting TEL data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 58 Connecting/disconnecting line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 64 Setting options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 71
14.11 Considerations of Communication with Programmable Controller CPU
14 - 72
15 WRITING/READING DATA
15.1 Writing or Reading Data to/from Programmable Controller CPU
15 - 2
15.1.1 15.1.2 15.1.3 15.1.4
Setting write/read range of program (program file). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 7 Setting write/read range of device data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 8 Setting range of device comment to be written/read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 11 Writing/reading intelligent function module data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 14
A - 19
15.1.5 15.1.6 15.1.7 15.1.8
Symbolic information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 19 Reading the remaining steps for Online program change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 22 Specifying target to write device comments to programmable controller CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 23 Considerations for writing/reading data to/from programmable controller CPU. . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 24
15.2 Verifying Data on Programmable Controller CPU against Data on Personal Computer
15 - 29
15.3 Deleting Programmable Controller CPU Data
15 - 34
15.4 Copying Program Memory Data to ROM
15 - 35
15.5 Writing/Reading/Deleting PLC User Data
15 - 36
15.6 Transferring Data to Program Memory in Batch
15 - 38
15.7 Latch Data Backup
15 - 40
15.7.1 Backing up latch data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 40 15.7.2 Deleting backup data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 41
15.8 Backing up/Restoring Data
15 - 42
15.8.1 Backing up data to memory card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 42 15.8.2 Restoring backup data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 44
15.9 Online Program Change
15 - 45
15.9.1 15.9.2 15.9.3 15.9.4 15.9.5 15.9.6
Performing Online program change during conversion/compile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 46 Performing Online program change in units of files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 53 Online program change starting from pointer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 55 Considerations for Online program change of rise, fall, or SCJ instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 56 Considerations of Online program change of SFC programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 59 Considerations of each programmable controller series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 60
15.10 Calculating Memory Size
15 - 66
15.10.1 15.10.2 15.10.3 15.10.4 15.10.5
Offline calculation and Online calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 66 Setting target data for memory size calculation (QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 66 Confirming result of memory size calculation (QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 67 Confirming result of memory size calculation (FXCPU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 70 Considerations of calculating memory size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 72
15.11 Writing/Reading Data to/from Memory Cards
15 - 73
15.11.1 Writing/reading data to/from ATA/SRAM/SD memory cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 74 15.11.2 Writing/reading data to/from SD memory cards (batch save/batch load function) . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 77
15.12 Reading Data of Local Devices
15 - 79
16 PROTECTING DATA
16.1 Functions to Protect Data
16 - 2
16.2 Registering/Changing Password (QCPU (Q mode))
16 - 3
16.2.1 16.2.2 16.2.3
Registering/changing password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 - 4 Canceling password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 - 6 Unlocking password temporarily . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 - 7
16.3 Registering/Changing Password (File Password 32)
16 - 8
16.3.1 16.3.2 16.3.3
Registering/changing password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 - 9 Canceling password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 - 11 Unlocking password temporarily . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 - 12
A - 20
16.4 Registering/Changing Keyword (FXCPU)
16 - 14
16.4.1 16.4.2 16.4.3
Registering/changing keyword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 - 14 Canceling keyword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 - 16 Unlocking keyword temporarily. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 - 17
16.5 Locking with Security Key
16 - 18
17 MONITORING
17.1 Monitoring Function
17 - 2
17.1.1 Starting/stopping monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 - 2 17.1.2 Monitoring status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 - 4
17.2 Monitoring Programs
17 - 7
17.3 Batch Monitoring Devices/Buffer Memory
17 - 8
17.4 Monitoring Program List
17 - 12
17.5 Monitoring Interrupt Program List
17 - 15
17.6 Registering and Monitoring Devices
17 - 16
17.6.1 17.6.2 17.6.3 17.6.4
Registering and monitoring devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 - 16 Registering devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 - 19 Changing display format (decimal/hexadecimal) of current values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 - 23 Writing/reading data to/from CSV file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 - 25
17.7 Monitoring Intelligent Function Modules
17 - 26
17.8 Starting/Stopping Monitoring All Windows
17 - 26
17.9 Using Realtime Monitor Function
17 - 27
18 SIMULATING PROGRAMS
18.1 Simulation Function
18 - 2
18.1.1 Safety and handling considerations of the simulation function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 2 18.1.2 Functions available for simulation function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 2
18.2 Starting/Stopping Simulation
18 - 4
18.2.1 18.2.2 18.2.3
Saving device memory/buffer memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 6 Reading device memory/buffer memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 6 List of device memory/buffer memory that can be saved/read. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 7
18.3 Checking unsupported instructions/devices
18 - 9
19 DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
19.1 Changing Current Values
19 - 2
19.1.1 Changing current value of devices/labels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 2 19.1.2 Changing current value of buffer memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 5
19.2 Registering/Canceling Forced Input/Output
19 - 7
19.2.1 Registering/canceling forced input to/output from QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 7 19.2.2 Registering/canceling forced input to/output from remote I/O module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 9
A - 21
19.3 Device Test with Execution Condition
19 - 10
19.3.1 19.3.2 19.3.3
Registering device test with execution condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 10 Checking/disabling registration of device test with execution condition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 12 Batch disabling device test with execution condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 13
19.4 Sampling Trace
19 - 14
19.4.1 19.4.2 19.4.3 19.4.4 19.4.5 19.4.6 19.4.7 19.4.8
Opening sampling trace screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 14 Setting executing condition of sampling trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 15 Registering devices/labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 19 Executing sampling trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 22 Saving trace data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 26 Applicable devices/labels for sampling trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 30 Considerations when performing sampling trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 32 Compatibility with sampling trace data in GX Developer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 32
19.5 Measuring Scan Time
19 - 33
19.6 Debugging Programs with Simulation Function
19 - 35
19.6.1 19.6.2 19.6.3 19.6.4 19.6.5 19.6.6 19.6.7 19.6.8 19.6.9
Debugging procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 38 Setting break points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 39 Setting break devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 43 Setting skip ranges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 45 Executing program one step at a time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 47 Executing program until condition is satisfied . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 47 Canceling step execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 48 Setting options for step execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 49 Stopping step execution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 50
19.7 Using CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool
19 - 51
20 OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
20.1 Remote Operation of Programmable Controller CPU 20.2 Operating Redundant CPUs 20.3 Formatting Programmable Controller CPU Memory 20.4 Clearing Programmable Controller Memory 20.5 Arranging Programmable Controller Memory 20.6 Setting Clock on Programmable Controller CPU 20.7 Registering/Canceling Display Module Menu 20.8 Start Ethernet Adapter Module Configuration Tool
20 - 2 20 - 6 20 - 8 20 - 10 20 - 13 20 - 14 20 - 16 20 - 18
21 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
21.1 Diagnosing Programmable Controller CPU
21 - 2
21.1.1
21.1.2 21.1.3
Diagnosing QCPU (Q mode), LCPU, communication head module, and remote I/O module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 2
Diagnosing FXCPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 9
Error icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 10
A - 22
21.1.4 Online operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 11
21.2 Diagnosing MELSECNET
21 - 14
21.2.1 21.2.2 21.2.3 21.2.4 21.2.5 21.2.6 21.2.7 21.2.8
Network test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 16 Loop test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 18 Setting verification test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 19 Station order check test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 21 Communication test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 22 Error history monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 24 Network monitor details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 25 Monitoring other station information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 26
21.3 Diagnosing CC-Link IE Controller Network
21 - 28
21.3.1 21.3.2 21.3.3 21.3.4
Communication test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 32 IP communication test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 33 Link start/stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 34 Logging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 36
21.4 Diagnosing CC-Link IE Field Network
21 - 38
21.4.1 21.4.2 21.4.3 21.4.4 21.4.5 21.4.6 21.4.7
Communication test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 43 IP communication test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 44 Cable test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 45 Link start/stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 46 Network event history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 47 Reserved station function enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 49 Temporary error invalid station setting/restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 50
21.5 Diagnosing CC-Link IE Field Network Basic
21 - 51
21.6 Diagnosing CC-Link and CC-Link/LT
21 - 53
21.6.1 21.6.2 21.6.3 21.6.4 21.6.5
Monitoring line (host station/other stations) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 53 Loop test/transmission speed test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 59 Displaying logs of station information (status logging) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 61 Creating check sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 63 Starting/stopping data link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 65
21.7 Diagnosing Ethernet
21 - 66
21.7.1 21.7.2 21.7.3 21.7.4
Q series-compatible E71/L series-compatible E71 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 66 Ethernet Built-in CPU, FXCPU with Ethernet adapter connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 72 PING test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 79 Loopback test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 84
21.8 Executing Sensor/Device Monitoring
21 - 88
21.9 System Monitor
21 - 89
21.9.1 Checking module's detailed information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 99 21.9.2 Checking details of error history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 102
21.10 Changing Modules Online
21 - 104
21.11 Built-in I/O Module Tools
21 - 106
21.11.1 21.11.2 21.11.3
Positioning monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 106 High-speed counter monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 107 I/O monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 108
A - 23
22 SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
22.1 I/O System Setting Function
22 - 2
22.1.1
22.1.2 22.1.3
Differences between conventional debugging and debugging with I/O system setting function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 - 2
Conditions and sequence actions for simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 - 4
Timing chart input and device value input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 - 6
22.2 Operating Procedure of I/O System Setting Function
22 - 7
22.3 Screen Configuration of I/O System Setting Function
22 - 8
22.4 Setting by Inputting Device Values
22 - 10
22.4.1 Setting conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 - 11 22.4.2 Setting sequence actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 - 13
22.5 Setting Using Timing Charts
22 - 15
22.5.1 22.5.2 22.5.3 22.5.4 22.5.5 22.5.6 22.5.7 22.5.8 22.5.9
Setting in timing chart format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 - 16 Screen configuration of Edit Timing Chart Format screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 - 17 Registering devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 - 18 Setting timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 - 19 Setting number of scans of timing chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 - 22 Utilizing timing chart data of existing applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 - 23 Displaying list of registered devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 - 24 Exchanging display positions of devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 - 25 Changing display format of devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 - 26
22.6 Performing I/O System Setting Function
22 - 27
22.6.1 Executing simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 - 27 22.6.2 Disabling simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 - 27
22.7 Monitoring I/O System Setting
22 - 28
22.7.1 Starting/stopping monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 - 28 22.7.2 Changing current value of devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 - 29
22.8 Operating I/O System Setting Files
22 - 30
22.8.1 22.8.2 22.8.3
Creating I/O system setting files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 - 30 Opening existing I/O system setting files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 - 30 Saving I/O system setting files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 - 30
APPENDIX
Appendix 1
List of Toolbars and Shortcut Keys
App - 2
Appendix 1.1 Appendix 1.2 Appendix 1.3 Appendix 1.4 Appendix 1.5 Appendix 1.6 Appendix 1.7 Appendix 1.8 Appendix 1.9
Common toolbars and shortcut keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App - 2 "Navigation Window" toolbar icons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App - 6 Toolbar icons and shortcut keys for setting labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App - 7 Toolbar icons and shortcut keys for setting device memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App - 8 Toolbar icons and shortcut keys for verification result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App - 9 Toolbar icons and shortcut keys for executing sampling trace. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App - 9 Toolbar icons and shortcut keys for program editors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App - 10 Toolbar icons and shortcut keys for I/O system setting function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App - 20 Shortcut keys for operating intelligent function module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App - 21
Appendix 2
Simulation Function
App - 22
A - 24
Appendix 2.1 Appendix 2.2 Appendix 2.3 Appendix 2.4 Appendix 2.5
Supported CPU functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 22 Supported devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 25 Supported instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 41 Enable/disable setting of parameter items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 49 Restrictions and considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 53
Appendix 3
ASCII Code Table
App - 61
Appendix 4
Considerations of GX Works2 and Differences with GX Developer
App - 62
Appendix 4.1 Appendix 4.2 Appendix 4.3 Appendix 4.4 Appendix 4.5 Appendix 4.6 Appendix 4.7 Appendix 4.8 Appendix 4.9 Appendix 4.10 Appendix 4.11 Appendix 4.12 Appendix 4.13 Appendix 4.14 Appendix 4.15 Appendix 4.16 Appendix 4.17 Appendix 4.18 Appendix 4.19 Appendix 4.20
Before using GX Works2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 62 Supported CPU modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 63 Unsupported features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 64 Supported project types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 65 Programming languages supported by each project type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 66 Using device comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 70 Using device memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 70 Using device initial values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 70 Using search/replace function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 71 Using online function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 72 Using monitoring/debugging function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 73 Using printing function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 73 Copying saved project data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 74 Using PLC type change function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 74 Using program check function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 74 Using IC memory card function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 74 Compatibility with GX Developer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 75 Compatibility with GX IEC Developer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 76 Key operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 76 Program titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 77
Appendix 5
Compatibility with Projects Created with Existing Applications
App - 78
Appendix 5.1
Application compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 78
Appendix 6
Compatibility of Data Read from Programmable Controller CPU
App - 81
Appendix 6.1 Appendix 6.2
Application compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 81 Data compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 85
Appendix 7
Compatibility with Existing Applications
App - 90
Appendix 8
Considerations When Saving Projects in GX Developer Format
App - 107
Appendix 8.1
ST instruction table for GX Works2 and GX Developer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 108
Appendix 9
Character Strings that cannot be Used for Label Names and Data Names
App - 110
Appendix 10 Restrictions When Changing Programmable Controller Type
App - 113
Appendix 10.1 Appendix 10.2 Appendix 10.3 Appendix 10.4 Appendix 10.5 Appendix 10.6 Appendix 10.7 Appendix 10.8 Appendix 10.9 Appendix 10.10
Common restrictions when changing programmable controller series/types . . . .App - 114 Restrictions when changing to QnUD(H)CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 116 Restrictions when changing to Q00U, Q00UJ, Q01U, or Q02U . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 121 Restrictions when changing to QnUDE(H)CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 129 Restrictions when changing to High-speed Universal model QCPU . . . . . . . . . .App - 133 Restrictions when changing to Redundant CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 137 Restrictions when changing to Process CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 139 Restrictions when changing to High Performance model QCPU . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 141 Restrictions when changing to Basic model QCPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 145 Restrictions when changing to LCPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .App - 151
A - 25
Appendix 10.11 Appendix 10.12
Restrictions when changing between QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU and CC IE Field head module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App - 160
Restrictions when changing to FXCPU (FXCPU FXCPU). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App - 161
Appendix 11 Instruction Conversion Lists
App - 162
Appendix 11.1 Appendix 11.2
Instruction conversion for Universal model QCPU CPU other than Universal model QCPU conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App - 162
Instruction conversion for Redundant CPU CPU other than Redundant CPU conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App - 164
Appendix 12 Functions Added Since Previous Versions
App - 166
Appendix 13 Supported Versions of Modules
App - 193
Appendix 14 Procedure to Use GX Works2 Unsupported Programmable Controller Type
App - 196
Appendix 14.1 Appendix 14.2
Installing GX Developer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App - 196
Utilizing programs of GX Works2 unsupported programmable controller type in GX Works2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App - 199
Appendix 15 Considerations of Installation
App - 200
Appendix 16 USB Driver Installation
App - 203
Appendix 17 Considerations When Using English Version of GX Works2
App - 204
Appendix 17.1 Appendix 17.2
Data to which double byte character and half-width Japanese kana character are applicable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App - 205
Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App - 208
Appendix 18 Considerations for Selecting Project Language
App - 210
Appendix 19 Modifying Instructions of Projects in Other Formats
App - 213
Appendix 19.1 Appendix 19.2 Appendix 19.3 Appendix 19.4 Appendix 19.5 Appendix 19.6 Appendix 19.7 Appendix 19.8
Replacing instruction names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App - 214 Adding devices/labels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App - 215 Changing positions of devices/labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App - 217 Changing arguments to constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App - 218 Changing label data types to double-precision real number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App - 219 Changing label data types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App - 221 Changing number of array elements of array data type labels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App - 222 Changing label data type to array data type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . App - 223
Appendix 20 Considerations When Using Projects Created in PX Developer
App - 225
Appendix 21 Troubleshooting
App - 227
INDEX
TRADEMARKS
A - 26
MANUALS
Related manuals are separately issued according to the purpose of their functions in GX Works2. Related manuals
The manuals related to this product are shown below. Refer to the following tables when ordering required manuals.
1) Operation of GX Works2
Manual name
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Common) Explains the system configuration of GX Works2 and the functions common to Simple project and Structured project such as parameter setting, operation method for the online function. (Sold separately)
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project) Explains methods for such as creating and monitoring programs in Simple project of GX Works2. (Sold separately)
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project, Function Block)
Explains methods for such as creating function blocks, pasting function blocks to sequence programs,
and operating FB library in Simple project of GX Works2.
(Sold separately)
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Structured Project) Explains methods for such as creating and monitoring programs in Structured project of GX Works2. (Sold separately)
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Intelligent Function Module)
Explains methods of intelligent function module for such as parameter setting, monitoring programs,
and predefined protocol support function in GX Works2.
(Sold separately)
GX Works2 Beginner's Manual (Simple Project)
Explains fundamental methods for such as creating, editing, and monitoring programs in Simple project
for users inexperienced with GX Works2.
(Sold separately)
GX Works2 Beginner's Manual (Structured Project)
Explains fundamental methods for such as creating, editing, and monitoring programs in Structured
project for users inexperienced with GX Works2.
(Sold separately)
Manual number (Model code)
SH-080779ENG (13JU63)
(this manual)
SH-080780ENG (13JU64)
SH-080984ENG (13JU72)
SH-080781ENG (13JU65)
SH-080921ENG (13JU69)
SH-080787ENG (13JZ22)
SH-080788ENG (13JZ23)
2) Structured programming
Manual name
MELSEC-Q/L/F Structured Programming Manual (Fundamentals)
Explains the programming methods, types of programming languages, and other information required
to create structured programs.
(Sold separately)
MELSEC-Q/L Structured Programming Manual (Common Instructions) Explains the specifications and functions of common instructions such as sequence instructions, basic instructions, and application instructions, that can be used in structured programs. (Sold separately)
MELSEC-Q/L Structured Programming Manual (Application Functions)
Explains the specifications and functions of application functions that can be used in structured
programs.
(Sold separately)
MELSEC-Q/L Structured Programming Manual (Special Instructions)
Explains the specifications and functions of special instructions such as module dedicated instruction,
PID control instruction, and built-in I/O function dedicated instruction, that can be used in structured
programs.
(Sold separately)
FXCPU Structured Programming Manual [Device & Common] Explains the devices and parameters provided in GX Works2 for structured programming. (Sold separately)
FXCPU Structured Programming Manual [Basic & Applied Instruction] Explains the sequence instructions provided in GX Works2 for structured programming. (Sold separately)
FXCPU Structured Programming Manual [Application Functions] Explains the application functions provided in GX Works2 for structured programming. (Sold separately)
Manual number (Model code)
SH-080782ENG (13JW06)
SH-080783ENG (13JW07)
SH-080784ENG (13JW08)
SH-080785ENG (13JW09)
JY997D26001 (09R925)
JY997D34701 (09R926)
JY997D34801 (09R927)
A - 27
3) Operation of iQ Works
Manual name
Let's start iQ Works Version 2
Explains fundamental methods for such as managing the system using MELSOFT Navigator and using
system labels for users inexperienced with GX Works2.
(Sold separately)
Manual number (Model code)
SH-081261ENG (13JZ79)
4) iQ Sensor Solution
Manual name
iQ Sensor Solution Reference Manual Explains the operation methods for online functions in iQ Sensor Solution.
(Sold separately)
Manual number (Model code)
SH-081133ENG (13JV28)
5) CC-Link IE Field Network Basic
Manual name
CC-Link IE Field Network Basic Reference Manual Explains the operation methods for online functions in CC-Link IE Field Network Basic. (Sold separately)
Manual number (Model code)
SH-081684ENG (13JX62)
The Operating Manuals are included on the DVD-ROM and CD-ROM of the software package in a PDF file format. Manuals in printed form are sold separately for single purchase. Order a manual by quoting the manual number (model code) listed in the table above.
A - 28
Purpose of this manual
This manual explains the functions that are common to Simple project and Structured project, including system configuration, parameter settings, and operation methods for online functions of GX Works2. Manuals for reference are listed in the following table according to their purpose. For information such as the content and number of each manual, refer to the list of 'Related manuals'.
1) Installation of GX Works2 and USB driver
Purpose
GX Works2 Installation Instructions
Learning the operating
environment and installation
Details
method
Learning a USB driver installation method
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Common
Details
2) Operation of GX Works2
Purpose
GX Works2 Beginner's Manual
Simple Project
Structured Project
Common
Learning all functions of GX Works2
Outline
Learning the project types and available languages in GX Works2
Outline
Learning the basic operations
and operating procedures when
creating a simple project for the
Details
first time
Learning the basic operations
and operating procedures when
creating a structured project for
Details
the first time
Learning the operations of
available functions regardless of
Details
project type.
Learning the functions and operation methods for programming
Outline
Learning the operations and operating procedures when creating function blocks (FB) in Simple project.
Learning data setting methods for intelligent function module
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual
Simple Project
Function Block
Structured Project
Intelligent Function Module
Details
Details
Details
Details
A - 29
Simple Project
3) Operations in each programming language For details of instructions used in each programming language, refer to the section 4 and the section 5 on the following pages.
Purpose
GX Works2 Beginner's Manual
Simple Project
Structured Project
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual
Simple Project
Structured Project
Ladder Diagram
Sequential Function Chart
Outline
*1 Outline
Details Details
Structured Text
Outline
Details
Ladder Diagram
Structured Project
Sequential Function Chart
Structured Ladder/ FBD
Outline
*1 Outline
Outline
Details Details
Details
Structured Text *1 : MELSAP3 and FX series SFC only
Outline
Details
A - 30
4) Details of instructions in each programming language (for QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU)
Purpose
MELSEC-Q/L/F Structured
Programming Manual
MELSEC-Q/L Structured Programming Manual
MELSEC-Q/L Programming
Manual
MELSEC-Q/L/QnA Programming Manual
Fundamentals
Common Instructions
Special Instructions
Application Functions
Common Instruction
PID Control Instructions
SFC
Learning details
of programmable
All languages
controller CPU error codes, special relays,
Details
and special
registers
Learning the
types and details
of common
Details
instructions
Using Ladder Diagram
Learning the types and details of instructions for intelligent function modules
Learning the types and details of instructions for network modules
Learning the
types and details
of instructions for
Details
the PID control
function
Using Sequential Function Chart
Learning details of specifications, functions, and instructions of SFC (MELSAP3)
Details
Learning the
fundamentals for
creating a structured
Details
program
Learning the
types and details
of common
Details
instructions
Learning the
types and details
Using
of instructions for
Structured intelligent
Outline
Ladder/ function modules
FBD or
Structured Learning the
Text
types and details
of instructions for
Outline
network modules
Learning the
types and details
of instructions for the PID control
Outline
Details
function
Learning the
types and details
of application
Details
functions
Manual for
module to be used �
Details Details
Details Details
A - 31
5) Details of instructions in each programming language (for FXCPU)
Purpose
MELSEC-Q/L/F Structured
Programming Manual
FXCPU Structured Programming Manual
Fundamentals
Device & Common
Basic & Applied Instruction
Application Functions
Using Ladder Diagram
Learning the types and details of basic/ application instructions, descriptions of devices and parameters
Using
Learning details of
Sequential specifications,
Function functions, and
Chart
instructions of SFC
Learning the
fundamentals for
creating a
Details
structured program
Using Structured Ladder/ FBD or Structured Text
Learning the descriptions of devices, parameters, and error codes
Learning the types and details of sequence instructions
Details Details
Learning the types
and details of
application
Details
instructions
FXCPU Programming Manual
FX0, FX0S, FX0N, FX1, FXU, FX2C
FX1S, FX1N, FX3S, FX3G,
FX2N, FX1NC,
FX3U,
FX2NC
FX3GC, FX3UC
Details
Details
Details
Details
Details
Details
A - 32
How to read this manual
Supported CPU Supported programmable controller CPUs are shown in icons under the section title.
Screen display Describes the screen display procedure. Follow the and select [(menu)] to open the screen. *Screen display may differ depending on the CPU type. In that case, typical example is described.
Display contents Describes the display contents on the screen.
Reference location leads to the reference
location and reference manual.
Section title Clarifies the section of currently open page.
Chapter heading Index on the right of the page number clarifies the chapter of currently open page.
Screen button Describes the buttons in the screen.
6.1 Setting PLC Parameter
Operating procedure
Describes the operating procedure of the function.
A - 33
The following table explains the CPU module icons that indicate the function availability.
QCPU (Q mode)
Q CPU
*1
Q CPU
Q CPU
LCPU L CPU
*1
L CPU
L CPU
Icon
Remote I/O
Communication head module
Remote
Head
*1
�
Head
Remote
Head
FXCPU FX
*1
FX
FX
Description
Normal icons indicate that the corresponding function is available. Icons with * (asterisk) symbol indicate that the corresponding function is available with restrictions such as CPU types.
Icons with � symbol indicate that the corresponding function is not available.
This manual also uses the following columns:
This indicates notes requiring attention or useful functions relating to the information given on the same page.
Restrictions
This indicates restrictions relating to the information given on the same page.
Symbols used in this manual The following shows the symbols used in this manual with descriptions and examples.
1 2 3 4
5
No.
Symbol
Description
[ ]
Menu name on a menu bar
Toolbar icon
(Underline)
Screen name
Tab name in a screen
" "
Item name in a screen
Button on a screen
�
Keyboard key
A - 34
6
Example [Project]
Q Parameter Setting screen <<PLC System>>
"Timer Limit Setting"
button
GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS IN THIS MANUAL
The following are the generic terms/abbreviations of such as software packages and programmable controller CPUs used in this manual.
Generic term and abbreviation
GX Works2 Existing application
GX Developer
GX IEC Developer
GX Simulator
GX Configurator
MELSOFT Navigator
iQ Works iQ AppPortal GX Simulator2 Personal computer Q series L series FX series Basic model QCPU High Performance model QCPU Process CPU Redundant CPU
Universal model QCPU
QnUD(H)CPU QnUDE(H)CPU High-speed Universal model QCPU Built-in Ethernet port QCPU Built-in Ethernet port LCPU QCPU (Q mode) LCPU FXCPU RCPU CPU module Ethernet Built-in CPU Display module
Description
Generic product name for SWnDND-GXW2-E and SWnDNC-GXW2-E (n: version) � Generic product name for SWnD5C-GPPW-E, SWnD5C-GPPW-EA, SWnD5C-GPPW-EV, and SWnD5C-GPPW-EVA (n: version) Product name for SWnD5C-MEDOC3 (n: version) Generic product name for SWnD5C-LLT-E, SWnD5C-LLT-EA, SWnD5C-LLT-EV, and SWnD5C-LLT-EVA (n: version) Generic product name for GX Configurator-AD/DA/SC/CT/TC/TI/FL/PT/AS/QP Product name for the integrated development environment included in SWnDNC-IQWK and SWnDND-IQWK (MELSOFT iQ Works) (n: version) Abbreviation for MELSOFT iQ Works Generic product name for SWnDND-IQAPL-M (n: version) Abbreviation for GX Works2 simulation function Generic term for personal computer on which Windows� operates Abbreviation for Mitsubishi Electric programmable controller MELSEC-Q series Abbreviation for Mitsubishi Electric programmable controller MELSEC-L series Abbreviation for Mitsubishi Electric programmable controller MELSEC-F series Generic term for Q00J, Q00, and Q01
Generic term for Q02, Q02H, Q06H, Q12H, and Q25H
Generic term for Q02PH, Q06PH, Q12PH, and Q25PH Generic term for Q12PRH and Q25PRH Generic term for Q00UJ, Q00U, Q01U, Q02U, Q03UD, Q03UDE, Q03UDV, Q04UDH, Q04UDEH, Q04UDV, Q06UDH, Q06UDEH, Q06UDV, Q10UDH, Q10UDEH, Q13UDH, Q13UDEH, Q13UDV, Q20UDH, Q20UDEH, Q26UDH, Q26UDEH, Q26UDV, Q50UDEH, and Q100UDEH Generic term for Q03UD, Q04UDH, Q06UDH, Q10UDH, Q13UDH, Q20UDH, and Q26UDH Generic term for Q03UDE, Q04UDEH, Q06UDEH, Q10UDEH, Q13UDEH, Q20UDEH, Q26UDEH, Q50UDEH, and Q100UDEH
Generic term for Q03UDV, Q04UDV, Q06UDV, Q13UDV, and Q26UDV
Generic term for QnUDE(H)CPUand High-speed Universal model QCPU
Generic term for L02,L02-P,L06,L06-P,L26,L26-P,L26-BT,L26-PBT
Generic term for Basic model QCPU, High Performance model QCPU, Process CPU, Redundant CPU, and Universal model QCPU Generic term for L02S, L02S-P, L02, L02-P, L06, L06-P, L26, L26-P, L26-BT, and L26-PBT Generic term for FX0S, FX0, FX0N, FX1, FX1S, FX1N, FX1NC, FXU, FX2C, FX2N, FX2NC, FX3S, FX3G,FX3GC, FX3U, and FX3UC Generic term for R04, R08, R16, R32, and R120 Generic term for QCPU (Q mode), LCPU, and FXCPU Generic term for Built-in Ethernet port QCPU and Built-in Ethernet port LCPU A module with LCD to be mounted to LCPU
A - 35
Generic term and abbreviation
Description
Base unit/Block
Generic term for the following: � base unit � a composition of modules from the power supply module to the END cover in MELSEC-L series
FXGP(WIN)
Abbreviation for SW0PC-FXGP/WIN-E
C24
Generic term for QJ71C24, QJ71C24-R2, QJ71C24N, QJ71C24N-R2, QJ71C24N-R4, LJ71C24, and LJ71C24-R2
ACPU
Generic term for A2A, A2A-S1, A3A, A2AP21/R21, A2AP21/R21-S1, A3AP21/R21, A2U, A2U-S1, A3U, A4U, A2US, A2US-S1, A2USH-S1, Q02(H)-A, and Q06H-A
QnACPU
Generic term for Q2AS, Q2AS-S1, Q2ASH, Q2ASH-S1, Q2A, Q3A, and Q4A
Q series C24
Generic term for QJ71C24, QJ71C24-R2, QJ71C24N, QJ71C24N-R2, and QJ71C24N-R4
CC-Link IE Controller Network module
Generic term for QJ71GP21-SX and QJ71GP21S-SX
CC-Link IE Field Network master/local module
Generic term for QJ71GF11-T2, LJ71GF11-T2
CC IE Field head module
Generic term for LJ72GF15-T2
SSCNET III/H head module
Generic term for LJ72MS15
Communication head module
Generic term for CC IE Field head module and SSCNET III/H head module
CC-Link IE
Generic term for CC-Link IE Controller Network and CC-Link IE Field Network
MELSECNET/H network Generic term for QJ71LP21, QJ71LP21-25, QJ71LP21S-25, QJ71LP21G, QJ71BR11,
module
QJ72LP25-25, QJ72LP25G, QJ72BR15, and QJ71NT11B
QJ72LP25
Generic term for QJ72LP25-25 and QJ72LP25G
Remote I/O module
Generic term for QJ72LP25 and QJ72BR15
Ethernet adapter module Generic term for NZ2GF-ETB
Ethernet adapter
Generic term for FX3U-ENET-ADP
Q series-compatible E71 Generic term for QJ71E71-100, QJ71E71-B5, QJ71E71-B2, and QJ71E71
QE71
Generic term for AJ71QE71, AJ71QE71-B5, A1SJ71QE71-B2, A1SJ71QE71-B5, AJ71QE71N-T, A1SJ71QE71N-T, AJ71QE71N-B5, A1SJ71QE71N-B5, AJ71QE71N-B2, A1SJ71QE71N-B2, AJ71QE71N-B5T, A1SJ71QE71N-B5T, AJ71QE71N3-T, and A1SJ71QE71N3-T
Generic term for AJ71E71-S3, A1SJ71E71-B2-S3, A1SJ71E71-B5-S3, AJ71E71N-B2, A series-compatible E71 AJ71E71N-B5T, A1SJ71E71N-B2, A1SJ71E71N-B5T, AJ71E71N-T, A1SJ71E71N-T,
AJ71E71N-B5, A1SJ71E71N-B5, AJ71E71N3-T, and A1SJ71E71N3-T
L series-compatible E71 Generic term for LJ71E71-100
Ethernet module
Generic term for Q series-compatible E71, QE71, A series-compatible E71, and L series-compatible E71
CC-Link master/local module
Generic term for QJ61BT11, QJ61BT11N, and LJ61BT11
Q series CC-Link
Generic term for QJ61BT11 and QJ61BT11N
CC-Link bridge module Abbreviation for AJ65SBT-CLB CC-Link - CC-Link/LT bridge module
CC-LinkAnyWireASLINK bridge module
Generic term for NZ2AW1C2AL
CC-Link IE Field Network-CC-Link bridge Generic term for NZ2GF-CCB module
CC-Link IE Field Network high-speed counter module
Generic term for NZ2GFCF-D62PD2
CC-Link IE Field NetworkAnyWireASLINK bridge module
Generic term for NZ2AW1GFAL
A - 36
Generic term and abbreviation
Description
Simple motion module
Generic term for QD77MS2, QD77MS4, QD77MS16, QD77GF4, QD77GF8, QD77GF16, LD77MH4, and LD77MH16
G4 module
Generic term for AJ65BT-G4(-S3) peripheral connection module and AJ65BT-R2N CC-Link system RS-232 interface module
QA extension base unit Generic term for QA1S65B, QA1S68B, QA65, and QA68B
LA1S extension base unit
Generic term for LA1S51B, LA1S65B, and LA1S68B
CC-Link IE Field Network communication Generic term for GT15-J71GF13-T2 unit
MELSECNET/H board
Generic term for Q81BD-J71LP21-25, Q80BD-J71LP21S-25, Q80BD-J71LP21G, Q80BD-J71LP2125, Q80BD-J71BR11
CC-Link IE Controller Network board
Generic term for Q81BD-J71GP21S-SX, Q81BD-J71GP21-SX, Q80BD-J71GP21S-SX, Q80BDJ71GP21-SX Abbreviation for CC-Link IE Controller Network interface board
CC-Link IE Field Network board
Generic term for Q81BD-J71GF11-T2, Q80BD-J71GF11-T2 Abbreviation for CC-Link IE Field Network interface board
Ethernet board
Generic term for Ethernet cards for personal computer and Ethernet interface boards
CC-Link board
Generic term for CC-Link Ver.1 board and CC-Link Ver.2 board
CC-Link Ver.1 board
Generic term for A80BD-J61BT11 and A80BD-J61BT13
CC-Link Ver.2 board
Generic term for Q81BD-J61BT11, Q80BD-J61BT11N
GOT
Generic term for Mitsubishi Electric Graphic Operation Terminal GOT1000 series, GOT-A900 series, and GOT-F900 series
MELSAP3
Abbreviation for the SFC function in MELSAP3 display format
MELSAP-L
Generic term for the SFC function in MELSAP-L (instruction format) and MELSAP-L (start conditions format)
SFC
Generic term for MELSAP3, MELSAP-L, and FX series SFC
MELSOFT Library
Generic term for components (FB library, sample programs, drawing data) which provide easy operation of programmable controller related modules and GOTs, and various devices that are connected to them Contact your local Mitsubishi Electric sales office or representative to obtain components of MELSOFT Library.
Windows� 8 or later
Generic term for Windows� 8, Windows� 8.1, and Windows� 10
A - 37
TERMS
The following are the terms used in this manual.
Term Execution program
Actual device
Common instruction
Special instruction Simple project
Without labels With labels Structured project Project without labels Project with labels Project with security New project creation with data read from programmable controller CPU Direct connection Slave station Redundant system Connective system Target system System A System B Control system
Standby system Backup mode
Separate mode
Debug mode iQSS-compatible device Profile
Description A compiled program created in a project with labels A program that can be executed on a programmable controller CPU An actual device assigned to label after compiling a project with labels, or a device that is not described using a label Generic term for sequence instructions, basic instructions, application instructions, data link instructions, multiple CPU dedicated instructions, and multiple CPU high-speed transmission dedicated instructions Generic term for module dedicated instructions, PID control instructions, socket communication function instructions, built-in I/O function instructions, and data logging function instructions Generic term for projects created using Ladder Diagram/Sequential Function Chart/Structured Text Generic term for projects created without selecting "Use Label" when creating new projects Generic term for projects created with selecting "Use Label" when creating new projects Generic term for projects created using Ladder Diagram/Sequential Function Chart/Structured Text/Structured Ladder/FBD Generic term for Simple projects that do not use labels Generic term for Simple projects that use labels and Structured projects Generic term for projects whose securities are set
A function to create a new project with data read from a programmable controller CPU without opening a project
A connection method using a USB/serial/Ethernet port of a programmable controller CPU Stations other than the master station (local stations, remote I/O stations, remote device stations, intelligent device stations, etc.) A system configured using Redundant CPUs A Redundant CPU selected on the Transfer Setup screen The other Redundant CPU connected to the connective system with a tracking cable A system to which system A connector for tracking cable is connected in the redundant system A system to which system B connector for tracking cable is connected in the redundant system A system that performs program operation, system control, and network communication in the redundant system A backup system to continue system control in case of a module failure or an error in the control system in the redundant system A mode for normal operation of the redundant system A mode for maintaining a system (partial modification of a program, replacement of modules mounted on the main base unit) without stopping the control during an operation of the redundant system A mode for performing a debug using a single system prior to a redundant system operation A device that supports iQ Sensor Solution A data in which iQSS-compatible device information (such as module models) is stored
A - 38
1
2
3
4
1 - 2 1 - 4 1 - 9
5
6
7
8
1 - 1
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
SETTING PARAMETERS
EDITING PROGRAMS
List of Functions
1.3
Features
1.2
Product Overview
1.1
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
OVERVIEW
1 OVERVIEW
This chapter explains an overview of GX Works2.
1 OVERVIEW
1.1 Product Overview
GX Works2 is a programming tool for designing, debugging, and maintaining programs on Windows�. GX Works2 has improved functionality and operability, with easier-to-use features compared to existing GX Developer.
Main functions of GX Works2
GX Works2 can manage programs and parameters in units of projects for each programmable controller CPU. The following explains the main functions. Programming
Programs can be created in a Simple project in a similar way with existing GX Developer. Structured programming in a Structured project is also available with GX Works2.
Setting parameters Programmable controller parameter and network parameter can be set with GX Works2. Intelligent function module parameter can be set as well.
Writing/reading data to/from a programmable controller CPU Created sequence programs can be written to/read from a programmable controller CPU using the Read from PLC/Write to PLC function. Also, using the Online program change function, the sequence programs can be changed even when the programmable controller CPU is in RUN.
Reading data Writing data
1 - 2
1.1 Product Overview
Monitoring/debugging
1
Created sequence programs can be written to the programmable controller CPU and device value at
operation can be monitored online/offline.
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
2
Programs can be monitored and debugged.
3
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
Diagnostics
The current error status and error history of the programmable controller CPU can be diagnosed.
Using the diagnostics function, the recovery work is completed in a short time. Using the System monitor function (for QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU), detailed information on such as
4
intelligent function modules can be obtained. This helps to shorten the recovery work time at error
occurrence.
Diagnosing the programmable controller CPU status (PLC diagnostics screen)
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
5
Diagnosing the
programmable controller
CPU status
EDITING PROGRAMS
6
SETTING PARAMETERS
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
1 - 3
1 OVERVIEW
1.2 Features
This section explains the features of GX Works2.
Project types in GX Works2
In GX Works2, the project type can be selected from either of Simple project or Structured project. Simple project
The Simple project creates sequence programs using instructions for programmable controller CPU. Programs in a Simple project can be created in a similar way to existing GX Developer. Programming without labels and label programming are supported as in GX Developer.
Program file Program MAIN
Program SUB1 Program SUB2
Programs are created using programmable controller CPU instructions. Created programs can be operated as sequence programs.
Programming in a similar way with existing GX Developer is possible.
Structured project
In a Structured project, programs can be created by structured programming. By segmenting a whole control process program into common program parts, highly manageable and usable programming (structured programming) is possible. Only label programming is supported.
POU
Program file
Function block 1 Function block 2
Function 1 Function 2
Program block A Program block B Program block C Program block D Program block E
Program MAIN
Program SUB1
Sequence programs are created by combining POUs (Program Organization Units).
1 - 4
1.2 Features
Programming using labels
1
OVERVIEW
Using the label programming, programs can be created without regard for the device numbers. By compiling a program created with the label programming, devices are automatically assigned and the program becomes available as an actual program.
Created global labels can be utilized for other programs.
2
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
3
Created labels can be utilized for other programs.
4
In addition, global labels can be registered as system labels and be shared within iQ Works compliant products (GX Works2, MT Developer2, and GT Designer3). For details of system labels, refer to the following manual. (iQ Works Beginner's Manual)
5
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
EDITING PROGRAMS
6
SETTING PARAMETERS
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
1 - 5
1 OVERVIEW
Enhanced use of program assets
Projects created with existing GX Developer can be utilized in a Simple project. Utilizing the past assets improves the efficiency of program design.
<GX Developer>
<GX Works2>
Project created with GX Developer
Can be used in GX Works2.
Sharing Program Organization Unit (POU) registered as libraries
In a Structured project, programs, global labels, and structures frequently used can be registered as user libraries. Utilizing these user libraries reduces time required for creating programs.
Library file
Project A Project B Project C Project D
1 - 6
1.2 Features
Wide variety of programming languages
1
The wide variety of programming languages available with GX Works2 enables to select the optimum programming language according to control.
OVERVIEW
<Ladder Diagram>
<Sequential Function Chart>
Programming similar to existing GX Developer
Programming to clarify the procedure
2
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
<Structured Ladder> Programming a ladder diagram graphically
3
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
<Structured Text>
Programming in a text language similar to
C language
4
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
EDITING PROGRAMS
5
ST programs can be used on the ladder editor of GX Works2 using the Inline structured text function.
6
SETTING PARAMETERS
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
1 - 7
1 OVERVIEW
Other features
Offline debugging Offline debugging using the simulation function is possible with GX Works2. This enables debugging to ensure the normal operation of created sequence programs without connecting GX Works2 to the programmable controller CPU.
Simulation function
Connecting to the programmable controller is unnecessary.
Without connecting to the programmable controller CPU, programs can be monitored and debugged in the same way with debugging by the programmable controller CPU.
The screen layout can be customized to the user's preference
Use dockable windows to change the screen layout of GX Works2.
Screen layout can be changed.
1 - 8
1.3 List of Functions
1.3 List of Functions
1
OVERVIEW
This section shows the list of functions of GX Works2.
The functions are divided into common functions available (Project, Online, Debug, Diagnostics, Tool,
Window, and Help) and functions used for each editing or setting target (Edit, Find/Replace, Compile,
and View). For (Simple), (FB), (Structured), (Intelligent), and (iQSS) indicated in the Reference column, refer to
2
the following manuals respectively:
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
(Simple) ... GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project)
(FB)
... GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project, Function Block)
(Structured) ... GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Structured Project)
(Intelligent) ... GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Intelligent Function Module)
(iQSS)
... iQ Sensor Solution Reference Manual
3
1.3.1
List of functions common to Simple project and Structured project
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
This section explains the functions common to Simple project and Structured project.
4
List of common functions
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
The following tables show functions that are available regardless of the type of editing or setting target.
New Open Close Save Save As Compress/Unpack
Compress Unpack Delete Verify Project Revision Revision Entry Revision List Change PLC Type
Change Project Type
Project (common function)
Reference
Create a new project. Open an existing project.
Section 4.2.1
5
Section 4.2.2
Close the open project.
Section 4.2.6
EDITING PROGRAMS
Save the project. Name and save the project.
Section 4.2.3
�
Compress and save a project. Decompress a compressed project.
Section 4.2.4
6
Delete an existing project.
Section 4.2.5
Verify between two project data.
Section 4.2.7
SETTING PARAMETERS
�
Register the project change history.
Section 4.6.1
Display the list of project change history.
Section 4.6.2
Change the programmable controller CPU type.
Section 4.2.8
Change the project type from Simple project (without labels) to
7
Simple project (with labels), or from Simple project (with labels) Section 4.5
to Structured project.
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
1.3.1 List of functions common to Simple project and Structured project
1 - 9
1 OVERVIEW
Project (common function)
Object
New
Add data to the project.
Rename
Rename the selected data.
Delete
Delete the selected data.
Copy
Copy the selected data.
Paste
Paste the copied data.
Set as Default Connection
Specify data in selected connection destination as a connection destination for regular use.
Property
Display the selected data properties.
Intelligent Function Module
New Module
Add new intelligent function module data.
Delete Module
Delete intelligent function module data.
Property
Display properties of the intelligent function module data.
Save the Positioning Module Data
Save data of the positioning module selected on the Project view to a file.
Read from the Positioning Module Data
Read data from the positioning module and apply it to the positioning module selected on the Project view.
Save GX Configurator-QP Data
Save the positioning module data in GX Configurator-QP format.
Import GX Configurator-QP Data
Read a project created with GX Configurator-QP.
Intelligent Function Module Parameter Display a list of set/unset parameters of the intelligent function
List
module.
Save/Read FX Special Module Data
Read new FX Special Module Data
Read a data created with the setting tool for special module (intelligent function module), and add new data.
Save FX Special Module Data
Save a data of the special module (intelligent function module) selected on the Project view in the format of the setting tool.
Read from FX Special Module Data
Read a data created with the setting tool for a special module (intelligent function module), and reflect it to the positioning module selected on the Project view.
Open Other Data
Open Other Project
Open a project created with GX Developer.
Read ASC Format File
Read an ASC format file.
Export to GX Developer Format File
Save the open project in GX Developer format.
Library
Create
Create a new library.
Install
For Simple projects (with labels), import an FB library to the project. For Structured projects, import a created library to the project.
Export FB to Library (Project)
Export FBs to other project
Deinstall
Delete the library from the project.
Reload
Update the library imported to the project.
Rename
Rename the library.
Open
Enable editing of the library.
Close
Disable editing of the library.
Change Password
Set a password for the library.
Save As
Name and save the project.
Save
Save the library file.
Help
Display help information of the library.
Reference �
Section 4.3.1 Section 4.3.3 Section 4.3.4 Section 4.3.2 Section 14.1.3 Section 4.3.6
�
(Intelligent)
�
(Intelligent)
� Section 4.7.1 Section 4.7.2 Section 4.8
� (Structured)
(FB) (Structured)
(FB)
(Structured)
1 - 10
1.3.1 List of functions common to Simple project and Structured project
1.3 List of Functions
Project (common function)
1
Reference
Security
�
Change Password
Change the password of the current login user.
Section 4.10.2
OVERVIEW
User Management
Manage user information of the project. Add/delete a user, or change the user information.
Section 4.10.1 Section 4.10.2
Data Security Setting Soft Security Key Management
Set the access authorization of each user related to reading/ writing data.
Manage the security key which is used to lock or unlock a programmable controller CPU.
Section 4.10.4 Section 4.11
2
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Print
Batch print multiple data in the project.
Section 11.3
Print Preview
Display the print preview of data to be batch printed.
Section 11.6
Print Window
Print the open screen.
Section 11.7
Print Window Preview
Display the print preview of the open screen.
Section 11.9
Printer Setup (Recently used files 1 to 4)
Change the printer settings.
Section 11.2
3
Display the recently used GX Works2 project paths, and open the selected project.
�
Start GX Developer
Start GX Developer from GX Works2.
Section 4.9
Exit
Exit GX Works2.
Section 3.1
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
Undo Redo Cut Copy Paste
Edit (common function) Restore the previous processing status. Restore the processing deleted with [Undo]. Cut the selected data. Copy the selected data. Paste the cut or copied data at the cursor position.
Reference
4
�
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Cross Reference Device List
Find/Replace (common function) Display the usage of selected device or label. Display the usage of devices.
Reference
Section 10.1
5
Section 10.2
Find Device
Search a device/label in the program.
Section 10.3.1
EDITING PROGRAMS
Find Instruction Find Contact or Coil
Search an instruction. Section 10.3.2
Search a contact or coil corresponding to the specified device.
Find String
Search a string.
Section 10.3.3
Replace Device Replace Instruction
Replace a device/label in the program. Replace an instruction.
Section 10.3.1 Section 10.3.2
6
Replace String
Replace a string.
Section 10.3.3
Change Open/Close Contact
Change an open contact to a closed contact, or change a closed contact to an open contact.
Section 10.3.4
Device Batch Replace Register to Device Batch Replace
Batch-replace devices with the specified device. Section 10.3.5
Register selected devices on the Device Batch Replace screen.
SETTING PARAMETERS
Build Online Program Change Rebuild All
Compile (common function)
Reference
7
Convert/compile a program being edited.
Write sequence programs to a programmable controller CPU after the conversion/compilation.
Section 5.4
Convert/compile all programs in the project.
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
1.3.1 List of functions common to Simple project and Structured project
1 - 11
1 OVERVIEW
View (common function)
Reference
Toolbar
�
Toolbar name Display All
Display/hide each toolbar. Display/hide all toolbars.
Section 3.2.2
Statusbar
Display/hide the status bar.
Section 3.2.6
Color and Font
Set the display color for characters such as labels and device comments on the work window.
Section 3.2.7
Docking Window
�
Navigation
Display/hide the Navigation window.
Section 3.2.5
Element Selection
Display/hide the Element Selection window. Select a part such as function block and function on the window for utilizing it to a program.
(FB) (Structured)
Output
Display/hide the Output window. The conversion (compilation) result is displayed.
(Simple) (Structured)
Cross Reference
Display/hide the Cross Reference window. The devices/labels used in the project are displayed.
Section 10.1
Device List
Display/hide the Device List window. The usage of selected device is displayed.
Section 10.2
Device Reference
Display/hide the Device Reference window. Assignments of CC-Link refresh devices and link devices are displayed.
Display/hide the Device Reference window. Assignments of AnyWireASLINK refresh devices and I/O devices are displayed.
Section 6.3.4 (Intelligent)
Watch 1 to 4
Display/hide the Watch window. The monitoring result is displayed.
Section 17.6
Intelligent Function Module Monitor
�
Module 1 to 10 Intelligent Function Module Guidance
Display/hide the Intelligent Function Module Monitor window. Display/hide the Intelligent Function Module Guidance window.
(Intelligent)
Find/Replace
Display/hide the Find/Replace window. The search/replace result is displayed.
Section 10.3
Debug
�
Break Point
Display/hide the Break Point window.
Section 19.6.2
Break Device
Display/hide the Break Device window.
Section 19.6.3
Skip Range
Display/hide the Skip Range window.
Section 19.6.4
Reset the Window Position to its Default
Return the display positions of the dockable windows to their default.
Section 3.2.4
1 - 12
1.3.1 List of functions common to Simple project and Structured project
1.3 List of Functions
Online (common function)
1
Reference
Read from PLC Write to PLC
Read data from the programmable controller CPU. Write data to the programmable controller CPU.
Section 15.1
OVERVIEW
Verify with PLC
Verify a project being edited against the data on the programmable controller CPU.
Section 15.2
Remote Operation Redundant Operation
Remotely control RUN/PAUSE/STOP of the programmable controller CPU from GX Works2.
Remotely control the system switch, operation mode change, or memory copy on the Redundant CPU from GX Works2.
Section 20.1 Section 20.2
2
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Password/Keyword
�
New
Set a password/keyword to the programmable controller CPU.
Section 16.2.1 Section 16.3.1 Section 16.4.1
Delete
Cancel the password/keyword set to the programmable controller CPU.
Section 16.2.2
Section 16.3.2 Section 16.4.2
3
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
Disable
Temporarily unlock the password/keyword set to the programmable controller CPU.
Section 16.2.3 Section 16.3.3 Section 16.4.3
Soft Security Key Management
Manage the security key which is used to lock or unlock the programmable controller CPU.
Section 16.5
PLC Memory Operation Format PLC Memory
Format the programmable controller CPU memory.
�
Section 20.3
4
Clear PLC Memory
Clear the programmable controller CPU memory.
Section 20.4
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Arrange PLC Memory
Arrange the programmable controller CPU memory.
Section 20.5
Delete PLC Data
Delete data on the programmable controller CPU.
Section 15.3
PLC User Data
�
Read
Read the programmable controller CPU user data.
Write Delete
Write the programmable controller CPU user data. Delete the programmable controller CPU user data.
Section 15.5
5
Export to ROM Format
Copy the program memory data on the programmable controller CPU to ROM.
Section 15.4
EDITING PROGRAMS
Program Memory Batch Download
Transfer the content of program cache memory to program memory in batch.
Section 15.6
Latch Data Backup
�
Backup
Back up device memory/file register/error history data to the standard ROM.
Section 15.7.1
6
Delete Backup Data
Delete the backup data on the programmable controller CPU. Section 15.7.2
PLC Module Change
�
SETTING PARAMETERS
Create Backup Data
Back up data on the programmable controller CPU to the memory card.
Section 15.8.1
Restore
Restore the backup data to another programmable controller CPU.
Section 15.8.2
Set Clock
Set the clock on the programmable controller CPU.
Section 20.6
7
Register/Cancel Display Module Menu
Register/cancel menus to operate intelligent function module using the LCPU display module menu.
Section 20.7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
1.3.1 List of functions common to Simple project and Structured project
1 - 13
1 OVERVIEW
Online (common function)
Monitor
Monitor Mode
Switch the mode of the open window to "Monitor Mode" during monitoring.
Monitor (Write Mode)
Switch the mode of the open window to "Monitor (Write Mode)" during monitoring.
Start Monitoring (All Windows)
Start monitoring the programs of all open windows.
Stop Monitoring (All Windows)
Stop monitoring the programs of all open windows.
Start Monitoring
Start monitoring the program of the open window.
Stop Monitoring
Stop monitoring the program of the open window.
Change Value Format (Decimal)
Display the current device value in decimal in program monitoring.
Change Value Format (Hexadecimal)
Display the current device value in hexadecimal in program monitoring.
Device/Buffer Memory Batch
Monitor device/buffer memory in batch.
Program List
Monitor the processing time of programs being executed.
Interrupt Program List
Monitor the number of executions of interrupt programs.
Change Instance (Function Block)
Select an instance of the function block to be monitored.
SFC All Block Batch Monitoring SFC Auto Scroll Watch Start Watching
Stop Watching
Insert Next Object Display Format of Bit Device
Number Display
ON/OFF Display
Symbol Display Register to Watch Local Device Batch Read + Save CSV
Batch monitor all blocks in the SFC program. Scroll the screen to display active steps automatically when they are out of the screen during monitoring.
Start monitoring the current values of registered devices/labels and intelligent function module. Stop monitoring the current values of registered devices/labels and intelligent function module. Insert the next device/label right after the selected row of device/label.
Switch the display format of the current value of bit device to the number display (1/0). Switch the display format of the current value of bit device to the 'ON/OFF' display. Switch the display format of the current value of bit device to the symbol display (/). Register the selected devices/labels to the Watch window. Read local device data from the programmable controller CPU and saves them on a personal computer in CSV format.
Reference �
(Simple)
Section 17.8 Section 17.2 Section 17.1
(Simple) (Structured) Section 17.3 Section 17.4 Section 17.5
(FB) (Structured)
(Simple) �
Section 17.6
Section 15.12
1 - 14
1.3.1 List of functions common to Simple project and Structured project
1.3 List of Functions
Debug (common function)
1
Reference
Start/Stop Simulation
Start/stop simulation.
Section 18.2
OVERVIEW
Instructions Unsupported by Simulation
Display a list of the instructions and devices used in the program that is not supported by the simulation function.
Section 18.3
Modify Value
For ladder and SFC (Zoom) programs, change the ON/OFF status and values of devices and labels used in the program.
Section 19.1
Forced Input Output Registration/ Cancellation
Register/cancel the forced input/output of the device 'X'/'Y'.
Section 19.2
2
Device Test with Execution Condition
�
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Register
Register the device test with execution condition.
Section 19.3.1
Registration Check/Disable
Check/disable the registration of device test with execution condition.
Section 19.3.2
Batch Disable
Batch disable the device test with execution condition in batch. Section 19.3.3
Sampling Trace Open Sampling Trace
Display the Sampling Trace screen.
� Section 19.4.1
3
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
Scan Time Measurement
Measure the scan time of a desired section.
Section 19.5
Step Execution
�
Stop
Stop the step execution.
Section 19.6.9
Cancel
Cancel the step execution.
Section 19.6.7
Break Execution
Execute the break execution.
Section 19.6.6
Step Execution Execution Option
Execute the step execution.
Section 19.6.5
4
Display the "Execution Option" screen of the step execution. Section 19.6.8
Break Setting
�
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Set/Cancel Break Point
Set a break point at the cursor position, or cancel the set break point.
Enable/Disable Break Point Cancel All Break Points Break Point Window Cancel All Break Devices Break Device Window
Enable/disable the break point at the cursor position. Cancel all break points. Display the Break Point window. Cancel all break devices. Display the Break Device window.
Section 19.6.2
5
Section 19.6.3
EDITING PROGRAMS
Skip Setting
�
Set/Cancel Skip Range
Set a skip range, or cancel the set skip range.
Enable/Disable Skip Range Cancel All Skip Ranges Skip Range Window
Enable/disable the skip range at the cursor position. Cancel all skip ranges. Display the Skip Range window.
Section 19.6.4
6
SETTING PARAMETERS
Diagnostics (common function)
Reference
PLC Diagnostics
Diagnose the operating status of the programmable controller CPU.
Section 21.1
Ethernet Diagnostics
Diagnose Ethernet.
Section 21.7
CC IE Control Diagnostics CC IE Field Diagnostics
Diagnose CC-Link IE Controller Network. Diagnose CC-Link IE Field Network.
Section 21.3 Section 21.4
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
CC-Link IEF Basic Diagnostics
Diagnose CC-Link IE Field Network Basic.
Section 21.5
MELSECNET Diagnostics
Diagnose MELSECNET/10(H).
Section 21.2
CC-Link Diagnostics
Diagnose CC-Link and CC-Link/LT.
Section 21.6
Sensor/Device Monitor
Monitor the status of iQSS-compatible devices
Section 21.8 (iQSS)
System Monitor Online Module Change
Monitor the system status of the programmable controller CPU. Section 21.9
8
Change modules online.
Section 21.10
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
1.3.1 List of functions common to Simple project and Structured project
1 - 15
1 OVERVIEW
Tool (common function)
Reference
IC Memory Card
�
Read IC Memory Card Write IC Memory Card
Read data from the IC memory card. Write data to the IC memory card.
Section 15.11.1
Read from IC Memory Card (Edit and Data Copy)
Write to IC Memory Card (Edit and Data Copy)
Read data saved by the batch save function of programmable controller CPU from the IC memory card.
Write data to the IC memory card in the format which can be used for the batch load function of programmable controller CPU.
Section 15.11.2
Check Program
Check programs of the project without labels and display errors.
(Simple)
Check Parameter
Check parameters and display errors.
Section 6.5
Clear All Parameters
Delete all selected parameters.
Section 6.7
Check Device Duplication of Global Label
Check duplications of devices assigned to global labels, and display the result.
(Simple) (Structured)
Device/Label Automatic-Assign Setting
Set device range to be automatically assigned to a label.
(Simple) (Structured)
Block Password
Set a block password to data.
Section 4.12
Confirm Memory Size
Calculate the size of files to be written to the programmable controller CPU.
Section 15.10
Delete Unused Device Comment
Delete unused device comments in the project.
Section 9.3.3
Merge Data
Merge ladder programs or device comment data.
Section 4.3.5
Set TEL Data/Connect via Modem
�
Line Connection Line Disconnection
Connect the line. Disconnect the line.
Section 14.10.2
AT Command Registration
Register a modem between a personal computer and a serial communication module, or a personal computer and an FXCPU.
Section 14.10.1
Phone Book
Set phone numbers of targets such as remote access targets.
Options
Set options for TEL data.
Section 14.10.3
Logging Configuration Tool
Start CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool.
Section 19.7
Realtime Monitor Function
Start the Realtime Monitor function of GX LogViewer.
Section 17.9
Ethernet Adapter Module Configuration Tool Start the Ethernet adapter module configuration tool.
Section 20.8
Built-in I/O Module Tool
�
Positioning Monitor
Display the Positioning Monitor screen.
High-Speed Counter Monitor
Display the High-Speed Counter Monitor screen.
Section 21.11
I/O Monitor
Display the I/O Monitor screen.
Check Intelligent Function Module Parameter
�
Check Auto Refresh Duplication
Check duplications of devices set in the Auto refresh function and display the result.
(Intelligent)
1 - 16
1.3.1 List of functions common to Simple project and Structured project
1.3 List of Functions
Tool (common function)
1
Reference
Intelligent Function Module Tool
�
Analog Module
�
OVERVIEW
Offset/Gain Setting
Configure the offset/gain setting of the analog module.
Q61LD Two-Point Calibration Setting
Configure the Q61LD two-point calibration setting.
Q61LD Default Setting
Configure the Q61LD default setting.
2
Create Wave Output Data
Create waveform output data.
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Create Conversion Characteristics Table
Create a conversion characteristics table.
Free Operation Function Setting
Set the operation expression data.
Temperature Input Module
�
Offset/Gain Setting
Register 2-point Sensor Compensation Value
Configure the offset/gain setting of the temperature input module.
Register the 2-point sensor compensation value of the temperature input module.
3
(Intelligent)
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
Temperature Control Module
�
Auto Tuning
Execute the auto tuning function of the temperature control module.
Sensor Correction Function
Execute the sensor correction function of the temperature control module.
Counter Module
�
4
Preset
Execute the preset function of the counter module.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
QD75/LD75 Positioning Module
�
Positioning Monitor
Execute the positioning monitor.
Positioning Test
Execute the positioning test.
Wave Trace
Execute the wave trace.
Location Trace Serial Communication Module
Execute the location trace. �
5
�
Circuit Trace
Execute the circuit trace.
(Intelligent)
EDITING PROGRAMS
Predefined Protocol Support Function
�
�
Serial Communication Module
Start the predefined protocol support function of serial communication module.
Ethernet Module Built-in/Adapter Serial
Start the predefined protocol support function of Ethernet module.
Start the predefined protocol support function of built-in/ adapter serial.
(Intelligent)
6
SETTING PARAMETERS
Built-in Ethernet
Start the predefined protocol support function of built-in Ethernet.
Language Selection
Select a language used in the project.
Section 3.3
Profile Management
�
Register Delete
Register the connected device profile to GX Works2. Delete the connected device profile from GX Works2.
Section 4.13.1 Section 4.13.2
7
Key Customize
Change the settings of the shortcut keys.
Section 3.2.8
Options
Set various options.
Chapter 12
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
1.3.1 List of functions common to Simple project and Structured project
1 - 17
1 OVERVIEW
Cascade Tile Vertically Tile Horizontally Arrange Icons Close All (Switch to other window)
Other Window
Window (common function) Cascade windows. Tile windows vertically. Tile windows horizontally. Arrange the icons at the bottom of the window. Close all open windows. Display the open window. Display the list of open windows. Also, open or arrange specified windows.
Help (common function)
GX Works2 Help
Display the GX Works2 Help screen.
Operating Manual
GX Works2 Beginner's Manual (Simple Project)
GX Works2 Beginner's Manual (Structured Project)
Operating Manual Common
Operating Manual (Simple Project)
Display the operating manuals.
Operating Manual (Structured Project)
Operating Manual (Intelligent Function Module)
Operating Manual (Simple Project, Function Block)
Connection to MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC FA Global Website
Open the MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC FA Global Website.
About
Display product information such as the version.
Reference
Section 3.2.3
Reference Section 3.4.1
�
Section 3.4.2
Section 3.4.3 Section 3.4.4
1 - 18
1.3.1 List of functions common to Simple project and Structured project
1.3 List of Functions
List of functions for setting labels
1
The following table shows the functions for setting and editing labels.
OVERVIEW
Edit (function for label setting)
Reference
Delete
Delete the selected data.
�
Select All
Select all items.
New Declaration (Before)
Add a row above the cursor position.
2
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
New Declaration (After) Delete Row
Add a row below the cursor position. Delete the row at the cursor position.
(Simple) (Structured)
Read from CSV File
Read label settings from the CSV file.
Write to CSV File
Write label settings to the CSV file.
System Label
�
Reservation to Register System Label
Reserve the selected global label for registration as a system label.
3
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
Reservation to Release System Label Import System Label
Reserve the selected global label for deregistration of system label.
Import the system label information and apply it to global labels.
(Simple) (Structured)
Reflect to System Label Database
Apply the registration-reserved/deregistration-reserved global labels to the system label data base.
Check Update of System Label
Apply system label information changed in another project to
Database
global labels.
�
4
Execute Verification Synchronous with System Label
Resolve a mismatch when system label information contains it.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Sort
�
Class
Label Name
Data Type Constant Device
Sort the labels in ascending/descending order with the selected
(Simple)
5
item.
(Structured)
Address
EDITING PROGRAMS
Comment
Remark
Unused label list
Extract and display unused labels. Extracted unused labels can be deleted in batch.
(Simple)
(Structured)
6
SETTING PARAMETERS
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
1.3.1 List of functions common to Simple project and Structured project
1 - 19
1 OVERVIEW
List of functions for editing device comments
The following table shows functions for editing device comments.
Edit (function for editing device comments)
Delete
Delete the selected data.
Select All
Select all data being displayed.
Import from Sample Comment
Special Relay/Special Register
Utilize sample comments of SM/SD.
Intelligent Function Module
Utilize sample comments of intelligent function module device.
Clear All (All Devices)
Delete all device comment data.
Clear All (All Displayed Devices)
Delete all device comment data being displayed.
Read from CSV File
Read device comments from the CSV file.
Write to CSV File
Write device comments to the CSV file.
Hide Bit Specification Information
Hide the bit-specified word device comment of the selected row.
Show Bit Specification Information
Display the bit-specified word device comment of the selected row.
Cut The Range including Hidden Bit Specification Information
Cut data including hidden bit-specified comment.
Copy The Range including Hidden Bit Specification Information
Copy data including hidden bit-specified comment.
Paste The Range including Hidden Bit Specification Information
Paste data including hidden bit-specified comment.
Reference � � �
Section 9.5.1 Section 9.5.2 Section 9.3.1 Section 9.3.2 Section 9.6
Section 9.2.1
Text Size Bigger Smaller
View (function for editing device comments)
Enlarge the text display size on the device comment editor. Reduce the text display size on the device comment editor.
Reference �
Section 9.1.3
1 - 20
1.3.1 List of functions common to Simple project and Structured project
1.3 List of Functions
List of functions for setting device memory
1
The following tables show the functions for setting device memory.
OVERVIEW
Delete Insert Row Input Device Paste Text FILL
Edit (function for setting device memory)
Reference
Delete the selected data.
�
Insert a row at the cursor position. Enter a device.
Section 7.2
Section 7.2.2
2
Enter a character string.
Section 7.2.3
Set the same value to consecutive devices simultaneously.
Section 7.2.4
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Find Device Cell
Find/Replace (function for setting device memory) Search for a device.
Display Mode Binary Octal Decimal Hexadecimal Float String String (ASCII only)
Register 16-bit 32-bit 64-bit
Setup
View (function for setting device memory)
Display data in binary. Display data in octal. Display data in decimal. Display data in hexadecimal. Display data in real number. Display data in character string. Display data in ASCII string.
Display data in units of words. Display data in units of double words. Display data in units of 64 bits. Change the number of rows or columns in the editor.
Reference Section 7.3
Reference
3
�
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
Section 7.2.5
4
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
�
Section 7.2.5
Section 7.2.6
5
Tool (function for setting device memory)
Reference
EDITING PROGRAMS
Read Device Memory from PLC Write Device Memory to PLC
Read device memory data from the programmable controller CPU.
Write device memory data to the programmable controller CPU.
Section 7.4.1
Read from Excel File Write to Excel File
Read data from an Excel file. Write data to an Excel file.
Section 7.4.2
6
List of functions for verification result
The following tables show the functions for verification result.
Write to CSV File
Edit (function for verification result) Write verification result to a CSV file.
Reference Section 4.2.7
7
SETTING PARAMETERS
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
Next Unmatch Previous Unmatch
Find/Replace (function for verification result) Move to the next mismatched data. Move to the previous mismatched data.
Reference Section 4.2.7
Return to Result List
Close Detail Result Close All Detail Result
View (function for verification result)
Return to the <<Verify Result List>> tab from the <<Detail Verify Result>> tab.
Close the <<Detail Verify Result>> tab being displayed. Close all <<Detail Verify Result>> tabs being displayed.
Reference
8
Section 4.2.7
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
1.3.1 List of functions common to Simple project and Structured project
1 - 21
1 OVERVIEW
List of functions for executing sampling trace
The following tables show the functions for executing sampling trace.
Result Position Move to Trigger Point
Switching Display Items Device Address Comment Data Types Radix
Timing Chart Scale Narrow Scale Wide Scale
Trend Graph Scale Narrow Scale Wide Scale Initial Display
Additional Information Time Program Name
View (function for executing sampling trace) Display the trigger position. Display/hide the display item titles.
Enlarge/reduce the timing chart scale. Enlarge/reduce the trend graph scale. Display/hide the additional information.
Reference � � �
Section 19.4.3
� Section 19.4.4
�
Section 19.4.4
� Section 19.4.2 Section 19.4.4
Debug (function for executing sampling trace)
Sampling Trace
Open Sampling Trace
Display the Sampling Trace screen.
Trace Setting
Display the screen on which the sampling trace conditions are set.
Start Trace
Start sampling trace.
Stop Trace
Suspend sampling trace.
Execute Manual Trigger
Generate a trigger at any given timing.
Reference �
Section 19.4.1
Section 19.4.2
Section 19.4.4 � �
Register Trace
Write trace settings to a programmable controller CPU.
(Select this to start tracing by using a sequence program. A trace starts when the trace start command (SM801) is executed after selecting "Register Trace".)
Forced Execution Registration Effective Enable to execute the sampling trace from the peripherals.
Display Trace Buffer Condition
Display trace data storage status.
Export CSV Data
Save the trace data (trace settings + results) on the personal computer in CSV file format.
Read from PLC
Read the sampling trace data (trace settings + results) from the programmable controller CPU.
Write to PLC
Write the trace data (trace settings + results) to the programmable controller CPU.
Delete All Data
Delete all information including the device data registered and the sampling trace result displayed on the Sampling Trace screen.
Section 19.4.4 Section 19.4.5
�
1 - 22
1.3.1 List of functions common to Simple project and Structured project
1.3 List of Functions
1.3.2 List of functions for editing in Ladder Diagram
1
OVERVIEW
The following tables show the functions for the ladder editor.
Edit (function for editing in Ladder Diagram)
Reference
Continuous Paste Delete
Increment the device number of device in the cut/copied ladder
block and paste it consecutively.
2
Delete the selected data.
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Restore After Ladder Conversion
Return the ladder program being edited to the last converted status.
Insert Row
Insert a row at the cursor position.
Delete Row Insert Column Delete Column NOP Batch Insert
Delete the row at the cursor position.
Insert a column at the cursor position. Delete the column at the cursor position.
(Simple)
3
Insert an NOP in front of the ladder block at the cursor position.
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
NOP Batch Delete
Batch-delete NOPs in the program being edited.
Edit Line
Enter a line at the cursor position.
Delete Line
Delete the line at the cursor position.
Change TC Setting
Batch-change timer/counter setting values used in the program.
Ladder Edit Mode Read Mode
Switch the mode of the open window to "Read Mode".
�
4
Write Mode Read Mode (All Windows)
Switch the mode of the open window to "Write Mode". Switch the mode of all open windows to "Read Mode".
(Simple)
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Write Mode (All Windows)
Switch the mode of all open windows to "Write Mode".
Ladder Symbol
�
Open Contact
Insert at the cursor position.
Close Contact
Insert at the cursor position.
5
Open Branch
Insert at the cursor position.
Close Branch
Insert at the cursor position.
EDITING PROGRAMS
Coil Application Instruction
Insert Insert
at the cursor position. at the cursor position.
(Simple)
Vertical Line
Insert at the cursor position.
6
Horizontal Line
Insert at the cursor position.
Delete Vertical Line
Insert at the cursor position.
SETTING PARAMETERS
Delete Horizontal Line
Insert at the cursor position.
Pulse Contact Symbol
�
Rising Pulse
Insert at the cursor position.
Falling Pulse
Insert at the cursor position.
7
Rising Pulse Branch
Insert at the cursor position.
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
Falling Pulse Branch
Insert at the cursor position.
Rising Pulse Close
Insert at the cursor position.
Falling Pulse Close
Insert at the cursor position.
(Simple)
Rising Pulse Close Branch
Insert at the cursor position.
Falling Pulse Close Branch
Insert at the cursor position.
8
Invert Operation Results
Insert at the cursor position.
Operation Result Rising Pulse
Insert at the cursor position.
Operation Result Falling Pulse
Insert at the cursor position.
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
1.3.2 List of functions for editing in Ladder Diagram
1 - 23
1 OVERVIEW
Edit (function for editing in Ladder Diagram)
Inline Structured Text
Insert Inline Structured Text Box
Insert an inline structured text box.
Display Template
Insert a template corresponds to the instruction, function, or control syntax.
Mark Template (Left)
Set an argument of the template in the selected status from the left by selecting the menu each time.
Mark Template (Right)
Set an argument of the template in the selected status from the right by selecting the menu each time.
Edit FB Instance
Rename an FB instance name.
Documentation
Device Comment
Edit device comments.
Statement
Edit statements.
Note
Edit notes.
Statement/Note Batch Edit
Batch-edit the statements/notes in the program.
Easy Edit
Connect Line to Right-Side Symbol
Connect a horizontal line to the instruction or the line at the right of the cursor position.
Connect Line to Left-Side Symbol
Connect a horizontal line to the instruction or the line at the left of the cursor position.
Enter/Delete HLine Rightward
Enter/delete a line at the right of the cursor position.
Enter/Delete HLine Leftward
Enter/delete a line at the left of the cursor position.
Enter/Delete VLine Downward
Enter/delete a line at the downward of the cursor position.
Enter/Delete VLine Upward
Enter/delete a line at the upward of the cursor position.
Switch Open/Close Contact
Switch between an open contact and a closed contact.
Switch Statement/Note Type
Change the type of the statement/note.
Instruction Partial Edit
Display the Enter Symbol screen in which the first argument is in the selected status.
Edit List for Ladder Block
Display/edit the ladder block in list format.
Read from CSV File
Read a list format program from a CSV file and display it as a ladder program.
Write to CSV File
Write a ladder program to a CSV file in list format.
Reference �
(Simple)
(Structured)
(FB) �
Chapter 9 (Simple)
�
(Simple)
Section 10.3.4
(Simple)
Find/Replace (function for editing in Ladder Diagram)
Change Module I/O No.
Replace the start module I/O number of the buffer memory address instruction.
Switch Statement/Note Type
Change the type (PLC/Peripheral) of a statement/note.
Line Statement List
Display a list of line statements used in the program.
Jump
Move the cursor to the specified step position.
Jump to Next Ladder Block Start
Move the cursor from the current position to the start of the next ladder block.
Jump to Previous Ladder Block Start
Move the cursor from the current position to the start of the previous ladder block.
Next Device
Move the cursor to the same device as the one at the cursor position.
Next Contact
Move the cursor to the contact where the same device as the one at the cursor position is used.
Next Coil
Move the cursor to the coil where the same device as the one at the cursor position is used.
Back
Return the cursor to the previous position before the [Next Device]/[Next Contact]/[Next Coil] function execution.
Reference (Simple)
1 - 24
1.3.2 List of functions for editing in Ladder Diagram
1.3 List of Functions
View (function for editing in Ladder Diagram)
1
Reference
Comment
Display device comments or label comments.
Chapter 9
Statement
Display statements.
OVERVIEW
Note
Display notes.
Display Lines of Monitored Current Value
Open the Options screen and display/hide the lines of monitored current value.
Display Format for Device Comment
Open the Options screen and set the display format for device comment.
2
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Display Ladder Block
Hide Ladder Block
Hide the ladder block at the cursor position.
Display Ladder Block
Display the hidden ladder block at the cursor position.
Hide All Ladder Block Display All Ladder Block Device Display Device Display
Hide all ladder blocks. Display all hidden ladder blocks.
Display the device assigned by compilation.
(Simple)
3
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
Batch Device Display
Batch-change the label display on the program editors to the device display.
Cancel All Device Display
Cancel the device display on the program editors, and display data in the format at the time of data entry.
Display Compile Result Zoom
Display the compilation result of the program on the inline structured text box in a list format.
Change the display magnification of the ladder program.
4
Text Size
�
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Bigger Smaller
Enlarge the text display size on the editing screen. Reduce the text display size on the editing screen.
(Simple)
Open Other Window
�
Open Reference Window
Open the reference window of the ladder editor.
Update Reference Window
Apply the most recent ladder program to the reference window. (Simple)
5
Open Reference Source Window
Display the source of the referenced ladder editor.
Tile FB Horizontally
Tile the ladder editor and the function block program editor horizontally.
(FB)
EDITING PROGRAMS
Open Label Setting Open Zoom SFC Block
Open the Local Label Setting screen for the program being edited.
Display the SFC diagram of the Zoom editor window.
(Simple)
Move SFC Cursor Up
Move the cursor on the SFC diagram upward.
�
6
Down
Move the cursor on the SFC diagram downward.
SETTING PARAMETERS
Left Right
Move the cursor on the SFC diagram to the left. Move the cursor on the SFC diagram to the right.
(Simple)
Open Instruction Help
Display the Instruction Help screen.
ST Monochrome Display
Switch the text color (color or monochrome) in inline structured text boxes.
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
Online (function for editing in Ladder Diagram)
Monitor
Monitor Condition Setting
Set a condition to start monitoring.
Monitor Stop Condition Setting
Set a condition to stop monitoring.
Entry Ladder Monitor
Register and monitor ladder blocks.
Delete All Entry Ladder
Delete all registered ladder blocks.
Reference �
(Simple)
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
1.3.2 List of functions for editing in Ladder Diagram
1 - 25
1 OVERVIEW
1.3.3 List of functions for editing SFC diagrams
The following tables show the functions for editing SFC diagrams.
Delete Arrange SFC
Edit (function for editing SFC diagrams) Delete the selected data. Redisplay the SFC diagram.
Insert Row
Insert a row at the cursor position.
Delete Row
Delete the row at the cursor position.
Insert Column
Insert a column at the cursor position.
Delete Column
Delete the column at the cursor position.
Edit Line
Vertical Line Segment
Insert at the cursor position.
Selection Divergence
Insert at the cursor position.
Simultaneous Divergence
Insert at the cursor position.
Selection Convergence
Insert at the cursor position.
Simultaneous Convergence
Insert at the cursor position.
Delete Line
Delete the line at the cursor position.
Change TC Setting Ladder Edit Mode
Read Mode Write Mode Read Mode (All Windows)
Batch-change timer/counter setting values used in the program.
Switch the mode of the open window to "Read Mode". Switch the mode of the open window to "Write Mode". Switch the mode of all open windows to "Read Mode".
Write Mode (All Windows) SFC Step Attribute
No Attribute Stored Coil Stored Operation (without Transition Check)
Switch the mode of all open windows to "Write Mode".
Set the step attribute to No Attribute. Set the step attribute to Stored Coil. Set the step attribute to Stored Operation (SE).
Stored Operation (with Transition Check)
Set the step attribute to Stored Operation (ST).
Reset
Reset the step attribute.
SFC Symbol
[STEP] Step
Insert at the cursor position.
[B] Block Start Step (with END Check)
[BS] Block Start Step (without END Check)
Insert Insert
at the cursor position. at the cursor position.
[JUMP] Jump
Insert at the cursor position.
[END] END Step
Insert at the cursor position.
[DUMMY] Dummy Step
Insert at the cursor position.
[TR] Transition
Insert at the cursor position.
[--D] Selection Divergence
Insert at the cursor position.
[==D] Simultaneous Divergence
Insert at the cursor position.
[--C] Selection Convergence
Insert at the cursor position.
[==C] Simultaneous Convergence
Insert at the cursor position.
[ | ] Vertical Line Sort SFC Step No.
Insert at the cursor position.
Sort the SFC step/transition numbers in ascending/descending order.
Reference (Simple) � (Simple) � (Simple) � (Simple) �
(Simple)
� (Simple)
1 - 26
1.3.3 List of functions for editing SFC diagrams
1.3 List of Functions
Edit (function for editing SFC diagrams)
1
Reference
Documentation
�
SFC Step/Transition Comment
Change to the SFC step/transition comment editing mode.
(Simple)
OVERVIEW
Jump Find Jump Step Change SFC Step No.
Find/Replace (function for editing SFC diagrams) Move the cursor to the specified position. Move to the jump source step. Replace the SFC step number.
Reference
(Simple)
2
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Convert Block
Compile (function for editing SFC diagrams) Convert a single block.
Reference (Simple)
Program Display
View (function for editing SFC diagrams) Display MELSAP-L programs.
Reference
3
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
SFC Step/Transition Comment
Display the SFC step/transition comments.
Zoom
Change the display magnification ratio of the SFC diagram.
Text Size
Bigger
Enlarge the text display size on the editing screen.
Smaller SFC Row Setting Open SFC Blocklist
Reduce the text display size on the editing screen. Set the number of rows of SFC diagram. Display the SFC block list screen.
(Simple)
4
MELSAP3 Display
Display SFC in MELSAP3 format.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
MELSAP-L (Instruction Format) Display
Display SFC in MELSAP-L (instruction format).
MELSAP-L (Start Conditions Format) Display
Display SFC in MELSAP-L (start conditions format).
Open Zoom/Start Destination Block
Display the Zoom editor window or the start destination block.
Back to Start SFC Block Open Header
Display the SFC block of the start source. Open the Local Label Setting screen for the program being
�
5
edited.
Reset the Window Position to its Default
Return the display position of the SFC diagram editor window and the Zoom editor window to the initial status.
(Simple)
EDITING PROGRAMS
Online (function for editing in SFC diagrams)
Monitor
Monitor Condition Setting
Set a condition to start monitoring.
Monitor Stop Condition Setting
Set a condition to stop monitoring.
Reference
�
6
(Simple)
SETTING PARAMETERS
1.3.4 List of functions for editing SFC block list
The following tables show the functions for editing SFC block list.
Find/Replace (function for editing SFC block list)
Jump
Move the cursor to the specified block number.
Find Block No.
Search for a block number.
Block Information Find Device
Search for a device.
SFC Block List Comment Device Display Open SFC Body Open Header
View (function for editing SFC block list) Display comments of the SFC block list. Display devices. Open the SFC diagram. Display the label setting editor.
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
7
Reference (Simple)
Reference
8
(Simple)
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
1.3.4 List of functions for editing SFC block list
1 - 27
1 OVERVIEW
1.3.5 List of functions for editing in Structured Text
The following tables show the functions for the ST editor.
Delete List Operands Display Template Mark Template (Left) Mark Template (Right)
Edit (function for editing in Structured Text)
Delete the selected data.
Display the screen for inserting a label by selecting an existing label.
Insert a template corresponds to the instruction, function, or control syntax.
Set an argument of the template in the selected status from the left by selecting the menu each time.
Set an argument of the template in the selected status from the right by selecting the menu each time.
Reference �
(Structured)
Find/Replace (function for editing in Structured Text)
Jump
Jump to the specified line.
Bookmark
Toggle Bookmark
Set a bookmark at the cursor line. The bookmark is deleted when one is already set at the cursor line.
Bookmark List
Jump to the specified bookmark from the bookmark list.
Next Bookmark
Display the next bookmark position.
Previous Bookmark
Display the previous bookmark position.
Delete All Bookmarks
Cancel all bookmarks.
Reference (Structured)
�
(Structured)
Display Compile Result Zoom
Set Zoom Factor Increase Zoom Decrease Zoom Zoom Header/Body Header Body
Open Header
ST Monochrome Display
View (function for editing in Structured Text) Display the compilation result in a list format.
Change the display size of the program.
Open the label setting editor in the selected POU. Open the program editor in the selected POU. Open the Local Label Setting screen for the program being edited. Switch the text color (color or monochrome) in an ST editor.
Reference (Structured)
� (Structured)
�
(Structured)
Online (function for editing in Structured Text)
Monitor
Start Monitoring
Start monitoring with the split window format that displays monitor data of numeric value and character strings.
Start Monitor (bit type only)
Start monitoring only bit type devices/labels.
Reference �
(Structured)
1 - 28
1.3.5 List of functions for editing in Structured Text
1.3 List of Functions
1.3.6 List of functions for editing in Structured Ladder/FBD
1
OVERVIEW
The following tables show the functions for the Structured Ladder/FBD editor.
Edit (function for editing in Structured Ladder/FBD)
Reference
Delete Select Mode Interconnect Mode
Delete the selected data. Use this to place a contact and coil. Use this to draw a line.
�
2
(Structured)
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Guided Mode
�
Guided Editing
Use this to edit using a keyboard.
Overwrite Mode
In the guided mode, overwrite an element entered at the cursor position.
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
Insert Mode Line Mode Auto Comment
In the guided mode, insert an element entered at the cursor
position.
3
In the guided mode, use this to draw a line.
In the guided mode, add a comment entry field at the top of the added ladder block.
(Structured)
Auto Connect
Specify and connect the start and end points to draw a line.
Recalculate Line
Arrange a line automatically to redraw it.
Insert Row
Insert a row into the ladder program being edited.
Insert Column
Insert a column into the ladder program being edited.
4
New Ladder Block List
�
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Top
Insert a new ladder block at the start of all ladder blocks.
Before After
Insert a new ladder block in front of the ladder block being edited.
Insert a new ladder block after the ladder block being edited.
(Structured)
Bottom Input Instruction
Insert a new ladder block at the end of all ladder blocks. Open the Input Instruction screen.
5
Ladder Symbol
�
Open Contact
Insert at the cursor position.
EDITING PROGRAMS
Close Contact
Insert at the cursor position.
Coil
Insert at the cursor position.
Jump
Insert at the cursor position.
6
Return
Insert at the cursor position.
Open Branch
Insert at the cursor position.
SETTING PARAMETERS
Close Branch
Insert at the cursor position.
Input Label Output Label Horizontal Line Segment Vertical Line Segment
Insert Insert Insert Insert
at the cursor position. at the cursor position. at the cursor position. at the cursor position.
(Structured)
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
Rising Pulse
Insert at the cursor position.
Falling Pulse
Insert at the cursor position.
Rising Pulse Close
Insert at the cursor position.
Falling Pulse Close Comment
Insert at the cursor position. Insert a comment entry field at the cursor position.
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
1.3.6 List of functions for editing in Structured Ladder/FBD
1 - 29
1 OVERVIEW
Ladder Symbol Ladder Block Label Left Power Rail
List Operands Number of Pins
Increment
Delete Ladder Block List Signal Configuration
Configure
Toggle
Edit (function for editing in Structured Ladder/FBD)
Display the Ladder Block screen. Display/hide the left power rail. Display the screen for inserting a label by selecting an existing label.
Increase the number of arguments of functions and function blocks. Decrease the number of arguments of functions and function blocks. Display a list of ladder blocks in a program.
Set the type of a contact and a coil. Change the contact and coil type per execution in the following order. � Contact: Open Contact Close Contact � Coil: Normal Negation Set Reset
Reference �
(Structured) (Structured)
�
(Structured)
�
(Structured)
Jump
Find/Replace (function for editing in Structured Ladder/FBD) Jump to the specified ladder block number.
Reference (Structured)
View (function for editing in Structured Ladder/FBD)
View Mode
Label
Display variables by its entered format.
Device
Display devices/addresses in device format. Devices assigned to labels are displayed in device format.
Address
Display devices/addresses in address format. Devices assigned to labels are displayed in address format.
Comment
Display devices/addresses in device comment. Labels are displayed in label comment.
Change Label-Device-Address Mode
Switch the display item in the order of labels, devices, and addresses.
Change Label-Comment Mode
Switch the display item in the order of labels and comments.
Change I/O Label-Comment Mode
Switch the display item in the order of input/output labels and comments.
Add Label Display Items
Device
Display devices assigned to labels.
Address
Display addresses assigned to labels.
Label Comment
Display label comments assigned to labels.
Device Comment
Display device comments correspond to devices or addresses.
All Device Display
Batch-change all labels on the program editors to the device display.
Cancel All Device Display
Cancel the device display on the program editors, and display data in the format at the time of data entry.
Grid
Show a grid on the screen being edited to display the start/end positions of a line.
Print Wrap Position
Display the wrapping position for printing.
Display Compile Result
Display the compilation result in a list format.
Zoom
Set Zoom Factor
Increase Zoom
Change the display size of the program.
Decrease Zoom
Reference �
(Structured)
� (Structured)
1 - 30
1.3.6 List of functions for editing in Structured Ladder/FBD
1.3 List of Functions
View (function for editing in Structured Ladder/FBD)
1
Reference
Zoom Header/Body
�
Header
Open the label setting editor in the selected POU.
OVERVIEW
Body Open Header
Open the program editor in the selected POU.
Open the Local Label Setting screen for the program being edited.
(Structured)
2
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
3
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
4
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
5
EDITING PROGRAMS
6
SETTING PARAMETERS
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
1.3.6 List of functions for editing in Structured Ladder/FBD
1 - 31
1 OVERVIEW
1.3.7 List of functions for CC IE Field Configuration window
The following tables show the functions for the CC IE Field Configuration window.
CC IE Field Configuration (function on the CC IE Field Configuration window)
Change Module
Replace General CC IE Field Module
Replace the general-purpose CC IE Field module to a specific module.
Change to General CC IE Field Module
Change the specific module to a general-purpose CC IE Field module.
Change Transmission Path Method
Line/Star
Change the transmission path method to line or star.
Ring
Change the transmission path method to ring.
Supplementary Setting
Set the link scan mode setting, loopback function setting, block data assurance per station, and operation setting for returning.
Equal Assignment
Assign the number of link device points of all stations equally.
Identical Point Assignment
Assign the equal number of link device points based on the total number of set stations.
Open System Configuration
Open AnyWireASLINK Configuration
Set the AnyWireASLINK Configuration of AnyWireASLINK sensor devices connected to a CC-Link IE Field NetworkAnyWireASLINK bridge module.
Check
System Configuration
Check whether the set equipment configuration of CC-Link IE Field Network is correct.
Online
Detect Now
Apply the actual system configuration to the CC IE Field Configuration window. (Automatic detection of connected devices)
Verification of the Configuration with the Verify a CC IE Field configuration currently displayed in GX
Connected Module
Works2 with the actual system configuration.
Parameter Processing of Slave Station Perform the parameter processing on a slave station.
Command Execution of Slave Station Perform commands on a slave station.
Backup Slave Station
Backup parameters of a selected slave station to a memory card.
Restore Slave Station
Restore backed up parameters of a slave station.
Close with Discarding the Setting
Discard the settings and close the CC IE Field Configuration window.
Close with Reflecting the Setting
Apply the settings and close the CC IE Field Configuration window.
Reference �
Section 6.3.2 �
Section 6.3.2
� (iQSS)
� Section 6.3.2
�
Section 6.3.2
(iQSS) �
Section 6.3.2
Copy Paste Select All Delete
Edit (function on the CC IE Field Configuration window) Copy the information of the slave station of the selected row. Paste the copied slave station to the last row of the list of stations. Select all cells on the list of stations. Delete the slave station of the selected row.
Reference Section 6.3.2
1 - 32
1.3.7 List of functions for CC IE Field Configuration window
1.3 List of Functions
View (function on the CC IE Field Configuration window)
Docking Window
Module List
Display/hide the Module List window of CC-Link IE Field Network.
Output
Display/hide the Output window.
Supplementary Information
Display/hide the Supplementary Information window.
Object Name Display
Display/hide the object name in the list of stations.
1
Reference �
Section 6.3.2
2
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
3
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
4
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
5
EDITING PROGRAMS
6
SETTING PARAMETERS
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
1.3.7 List of functions for CC IE Field Configuration window
1 - 33
1 OVERVIEW
1.3.8 List of functions for CC-Link Configuration window
The following tables show the functions for the CC-Link Configuration window.
CC-Link Configuration (function on the CC-Link Configuration window)
Change Module
Replace General CC-Link Module
Replace the general-purpose CC-Link module to a specific module.
Change to General CC-Link Module
Change the specific module to a general-purpose CC-Link module.
Open System Configuration
Open AnyWireASLINK Configuration
Display the AnyWireASLINK Configuration of AnyWireASLINK sensor devices connected to a CC-Link-AnyWireASLINK bridge module.
Check
System Configuration
Check whether the set equipment configuration of CC-Link is correct.
Online
Detect Now
Apply the actual system configuration to the CC-Link Configuration window. (Automatic detection of connected devices)
Verification of the Configuration with the Connected Module
Verify the CC-Link Configuration window being displayed against an actual system configuration. (Automatic detection of system configuration)
Parameter Processing of Slave Station Perform the parameter processing on a slave station.
Command Execution of Slave Station Perform commands on a slave station.
Backup Slave Station
Backup the parameter of the selected slave station to the memory card.
Restore Slave Station
Restore the backup parameter of the slave station.
Close with Discarding the Setting
Discard the settings and close the CC-Link Configuration window.
Close with Reflecting the Setting
Apply the settings and close the CC-Link Configuration window.
Reference �
Section 6.3.3 �
(iQSS) �
Section 6.3.3 �
Section 6.3.3
(iQSS) �
Section 6.3.3
Copy Paste Select All Delete
Edit (function on the CC-Link Configuration window) Copy the information of the slave station of the selected row. Paste the copied slave station to the last row of the list of stations. Select all cells on the list of stations. Delete the slave station of the selected row.
Reference
Section 6.3.3
� Section 6.3.3
Docking Window Module List Output
Verify Result
View (function on the CC-Link Configuration window)
Display/hide the Module List window of CC-Link. Display/hide the Output window. Display/hide the Verify Result window displayed when the Verification of the Configuration with the Connected Module function is executed.
Reference �
Section 6.3.3
1 - 34
1.3.8 List of functions for CC-Link Configuration window
1.3 List of Functions
1.3.9
List of functions for AnyWireASLINK Configuration window 1
OVERVIEW
The following tables show the functions for the AnyWireASLINK Configuration window.
AnyWireASLINK Configuration (function on the AnyWireASLINK Configuration window)
Reference
Change Module
Replace General AnyWireASLINK Module
Replace the general-purpose AnyWireASLINK module to a specific module.
�
2
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Change to General AnyWireASLINK Module
Change the specific module to a general-purpose AnyWireASLINK module.
(Intelligent)
Address Auto-Input
Enter the address of the slave module automatically.
Check
�
System Configuration Online
Check whether the set equipment configuration of AnyWireASLINK is correct.
(Intelligent)
3
�
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
Apply the actual system configuration to the AnyWireASLINK
Detect Now
Configuration window. (Automatic detection of connected
devices)
Verification of the Configuration with the Connected Module
Verify the AnyWireASLINK Configuration window being displayed against an actual system configuration. (Automatic detection of system configuration)
(Intelligent)
Parameter Processing of Slave Module Perform the parameter processing on a slave module.
4
Backup Slave Module
Backup the parameter of the selected slave module to the memory card.
(iQSS)
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Restore Slave Module
Restore the backup parameter of the slave module.
Close with Discarding the Setting
Discard the settings and close the AnyWireASLINK Configuration window.
�
Close with Saving the Setting
Apply the settings and close the AnyWireASLINK Configuration window.
(Intelligent)
5
Edit (function on the AnyWireASLINK Configuration window)
Reference
Copy
Copy the information of the slave module of the selected row.
EDITING PROGRAMS
Paste Select All
Paste the copied slave module to the last row of list of modules. �
Select all cells on the list of modules.
Delete
Delete the slave module of the selected row. View (function on the AnyWireASLINK Configuration window)
6
Reference
Docking Window
SETTING PARAMETERS
Module List
Display/hide the Module List window of AnyWireASLINK.
Output Verify Result
Display/hide the Output window.
Display/hide the Verify Result window displayed when the Verification of the Configuration with the Connected Module function is executed.
�
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
1.3.9 List of functions for AnyWireASLINK Configuration window
1 - 35
1 OVERVIEW
1.3.10 List of Ethernet Configuration window
The following tables show the functions for the Ethernet Configuration window.
Ethernet Configuration (function on the Ethernet Configuration window)
Change Module
Replace General SLMP Module
Replace a general SLMP module to a specific Ethernet device.
Change to General SLMP Module
Change a specific Ethernet device to a general SLMP module.
Check
System Configuration
Check whether the set equipment configuration of Ethernet is correct.
Online
Detect Now
Apply the actual system configuration to the Ethernet Configuration window. (Automatic detection of connected devices)
Communication Setting Reflection of Ethernet Device
Apply the communication setting set on the Ethernet Configuration window to the Ethernet device.
Parameter Processing of Ethernet Device
Perform the parameter processing on an Ethernet device.
Backup Ethernet Device
Backup parameters of the selected Ethernet devices to the memory card.
Restore Ethernet Device
Restore the backup parameters of Ethernet devices.
Close with Discarding the Setting
Discard the settings and close the Ethernet Configuration window.
Close with Reflecting the Setting
Apply the settings and close the Ethernet Configuration window.
Reference �
Section 6.1.3 �
Section 6.1.3 �
Section 6.1.3
(iQSS)
� Section 6.1.3
Copy Paste Select All Delete
Edit (function on the Ethernet Configuration window) Copy the information of the Ethernet device of the selected row. Paste the copied Ethernet device to the last row of list of device. Select all cells on the list of modules. Delete the Ethernet device of the selected row.
Reference Section 6.1.3
Docking Window Module List Output
View (function on the Ethernet Configuration window)
Display/hide the Module List window of Ethernet. Display/hide the Output window.
Reference Section 6.1.3
1 - 36
1.3.10 List of Ethernet Configuration window
1.3 List of Functions
1.3.11 List of CC-Link IEF Basic Configuration window
1
OVERVIEW
The following tables show the functions for the CC-Link IEF Basic Configuration window.
CC-Link IEF Basic Configuration (function on the CC-Link IEF Basic Configuration window)
Reference
Change Module
�
Replace CC-Link IEF Basic Connected Module
Replace a CC-Link IEF Basic module with a specific module.
2
Section 6.1.4
Change to CC-Link IEF Basic Connected Module
Change a specific module to a CC-Link IEF Basic module.
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Link Scan Setting
Set the time out time and the number of times to detect the disconnection of a slave station.
Section 6.1.4
Check
�
System Configuration
Check whether the equipment configuration in a set CC-Link IE Field Network Basic is correct.
Section 6.1.4
3
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
Online
�
Detect Now
Apply the actual system configuration to the CC-Link IEF Basic Configuration window. (Automatic detection of connected devices)
Section 6.1.4
Communication Setting Reflection of Slave Station
Apply the communication setting set in the CC-Link IEF Basic Configuration window to slave stations.
(Basic)
Parameter Processing of Slave Station Perform the parameter processing on a slave station.
(Basic)
4
Close with Discarding the Setting
Discard the settings and close the CC-Link IEF Basic Configuration window.
�
Close with Reflecting the Setting
Apply the settings and close the CC-Link IEF Basic Configuration window.
Section 6.1.4
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Copy
Paste Select All Delete
Edit (function on the CC-Link IEF Basic Configuration window)
Reference
Copy the information of the CC-Link IEF Basic device of the selected row.
5
Paste the copied CC-Link IEF Basic module to the last row in the station list.
Section 6.1.4
Select all cells on the list of stations.
Delete the CC-Link IEF Basic device of the selected row.
EDITING PROGRAMS
Docking Window
View (function on the CC-Link IEF Basic Configuration window)
Reference
6
Module List
Display/hide the Module List window of CC-Link IEF Basic.
Section 6.1.4
Output
Display/hide the Output window.
SETTING PARAMETERS
1.3.12 List of functions for the Sensor/Device Monitor screen
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
The following tables show the functions for the Sensor/Device Monitor screen.
Sensor/Device Monitor (function on the Sensor/Device Monitor screen)
Reference
Open System Configuration
�
Set the AnyWireASLINK Configuration of AnyWireASLINK sensor
Open AnyWireASLINK Configuration
devices connected to a CC-Link IE Field NetworkAnyWireASLINK bridge module or a CC-Link-AnyWireASLINK
(iQSS)
8
bridge module.
Close
Close the Sensor/Device Monitor screen.
�
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
1.3.11 List of CC-Link IEF Basic Configuration window
1 - 37
1 OVERVIEW
View (function on the Sensor/Device Monitor screen)
Docking Window
Monitoring Information
Display/hide the Monitor Information window.
Reference �
Online (function on the Sensor/Device Monitor screen of CC-Link IE Field Network)
Parameter Processing of Slave Station
Perform the parameter processing on a slave station.
Command Execution of Slave Station
Perform commands on a slave station.
Start Monitoring
Start monitoring sensors and equipment.
Stop Monitoring
Stop monitoring sensors and equipment.
Reference (iQSS)
Online (function on the Sensor/Device Monitor screen of CC-Link)
Parameter Processing of Slave Station
Perform the parameter processing on a slave station.
Command Execution of Slave Station
Perform commands on a slave station.
Backup Slave Station
Backup the parameter of the selected slave station to a memory card.
Restore Slave Station
Restore the backup parameter of the slave station.
Start Monitoring
Start monitoring sensors and equipment.
Stop Monitoring
Stop monitoring sensors and equipment.
Reference (iQSS)
Online (function on the Sensor/Device Monitor screen of AnyWireASLINK)
Parameter Processing of Slave Module
Perform the parameter processing on a slave module.
Backup Slave Module
Backup the parameter of the selected slave module to a memory card.
Restore Slave Module
Restore the backup parameter of the slave module.
Start Monitoring
Start monitoring sensors and equipment.
Stop Monitoring
Stop monitoring sensors and equipment.
Reference (iQSS)
Online (function on the Sensor/Device Monitor screen of Ethernet)
Parameter Processing of Ethernet Device Perform the parameter processing on an Ethernet device.
Backup Ethernet Device
Backup parameters of the selected Ethernet devices to the memory card.
Restore Ethernet Device
Restore the backup parameters of Ethernet devices.
Start Monitoring
Start monitoring sensors and equipment.
Stop Monitoring
Stop monitoring sensors and equipment
Reference (iQSS)
1.3.13 List of functions for GX Simulator2 screen
The following tables show the functions for the GX Simulator2 screen.
Tool (function on the GX Simulator2 screen)
Backup Device Memory in Simulation
Save
Save device memory/buffer memory in simulation temporarily.
Read
Read device memory/buffer memory saved temporarily.
I/O System Setting
Execute simulation with the I/O system setting.
Reference �
Section 18.2.1 Section 18.2.2 Section 22.1
Options (function on the GX Simulator2 screen)
Start in minimized status
Start the GX Simulator2 screen in the minimized status at starting simulation.
Save device memory at stop
Save device memory/buffer memory in simulation automatically at stopping simulation.
Reference Section 18.2 Section 18.2.1
1 - 38
1.3.13 List of functions for GX Simulator2 screen
1.3 List of Functions
1.3.14 List of functions for I/O system setting screen
1
OVERVIEW
The following tables show the functions for the I/O System Setting screen.
File (function for the I/O system setting)
Reference
New Open
Create a new I/O system setting. Open an existing I/O system setting.
Section 22.8.1
Section 22.8.2
2
Save
Save an I/O system setting.
�
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Save As
Name and save an I/O system setting.
Section 22.8.3
(Recently used I/O system setting files 1 to Display the recently used I/O system setting file names and
4)
open the selected I/O system setting file.
�
Execute I/O System Setting
Execute the I/O system setting and start simulation.
Section 22.6.1
Disable I/O System Setting Exit I/O System Settings
Disable execution of the I/O system setting. Exit the I/O system setting.
Section 22.6.2
�
3
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
Cut Copy Paste Delete Enable/Disable Setting
Enable All Disable All
Edit (function for the I/O system setting) Cut the selected data. Copy the selected data. Paste the cut or copied data at the cursor position. Delete the selected data.
Enable all I/O system settings. Disable all I/O system settings.
Reference
Section 22.4.2
�
4
�
Section 22.4
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Toolbar Statusbar
View (function for the I/O system setting) Display/hide the toolbar. Display/hide the status bar.
Reference
�
5
Online (function for the I/O system setting)
Reference
EDITING PROGRAMS
Target Simulator Setting
Set the target simulation with which the I/O system setting is executed.
Section 22.3
Start Monitoring Stop Monitoring
Start monitoring the I/O System Setting screen. Stop monitoring the I/O System Setting screen.
Window (function for the I/O system setting)
Section 22.7.1
6
Reference
Cascade
Cascade windows.
SETTING PARAMETERS
Tile Vertically Tile Horizontally
Tile windows on the I/O System Setting screen vertically.
Tile windows on the I/O System Setting screen horizontally.
�
Arrange Icons
Arrange the icons at the bottom of the I/O System Setting screen.
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
1.3.14 List of functions for I/O system setting screen
1 - 39
1 OVERVIEW
1.3.15 List of functions for predefined protocol support function
The following tables show the functions for the predefined protocol support function.
File (function of the predefined protocol support function)
New
Create a new protocol setting file.
Open
Open an existing protocol setting file.
Close
Close the open protocol setting file.
Save
Save the protocol setting file.
Save As
Name and save a protocol setting file.
Open Other Data
Serial Communication Module Format
Open a protocol setting file of serial communication module format.
Ethernet Module Format
Open a protocol setting file of Ethernet module format.
Built-in/Adapter Serial Format
Open a protocol setting file of built-in/adapter serial format.
Built-in Ethernet Format
Open a protocol setting file of built-in Ethernet format.
Print
Print such as protocol setting.
Exit
Exit the predefined protocol support function.
Reference (Intelligent)
Edit (function of the predefined protocol support function)
Add Protocol
Add a protocol.
Change to Editable Protocol
Change the protocol selected from the predefined protocol library to an editable one.
Protocol Detailed Setting
Set the protocol detailed setting such as the number of retries of protocol transmission and whether to clear operating system area (receive data area).
Add Receive Packet
Add a receive packet.
Delete
Delete the protocol.
Copy
Copy the protocol.
Paste
Paste the protocol.
Delete Multiple Protocols
Batch-delete multiple protocols.
Copy Multiple Protocols
Batch-copy multiple protocols.
Paste Multiple Protocols
Batch-paste multiple protocols.
Device Batch Setting
Batch-set devices used in the protocol.
Save User Protocol Library
Save the set protocol as a user protocol library.
Reference (Intelligent)
Module Read/Write (function of the predefined protocol support function)
Read from Module
Read protocol settings from the module.
Write to Module
Write registered protocol settings to the module.
Module Verification
Compare protocol settings being opened with those written in the module.
Reference (Intelligent)
Tool (function of the predefined protocol support function)
Setting Device List
Display the list of devices used in protocols.
Register Predefined Protocol Library
Import predefined protocol library provided by Mitsubishi Electric Corporation.
Reference (Intelligent)
1 - 40
1.3.15 List of functions for predefined protocol support function
1.3 List of Functions
Debugging Support Function (function of the predefined protocol support function)
1
Reference
Module Selection
Select a module to be debugged.
Protocol Execution Log State Monitor
Display the protocol execution logs and the protocol execution
OVERVIEW
results.
(Intelligent)
Monitor signals, communication error information, operation
setting switches, and protocol execution status of the Q series
C24N/L series C24 module.
2
Window (function of the predefined protocol support function)
Reference
Cascade
Cascade windows.
Tile Horizontally
Tile windows horizontally.
(Intelligent)
(Switch to other window)
Display the open window.
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
3
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
4
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
5
EDITING PROGRAMS
6
SETTING PARAMETERS
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
1.3.15 List of functions for predefined protocol support function
1 - 41
1 OVERVIEW
MEMO
1 - 42
1
OVERVIEW
2 SYSTEM
2
CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
This chapter explains the system configuration, configuration devices, and supported languages of GX Works2.
3
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
2.1
Connection from USB/Serial Port
4
2 - 2
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
2.2
Connection from I/F Boards
2 - 14
2.3
Interfaces and Connectable Modules
2 - 16
2.4
System Configuration with Memory Card on Personal
5
Computer
2 - 20
2.5
Supported Programming Languages
2 - 21
EDITING PROGRAMS
6
SETTING PARAMETERS
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
2 - 1
2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
2.1 Connection from USB/Serial Port
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
The following shows the possible system configuration for connecting to the programmable controller CPU using the USB/serial port of a personal computer. For ACPU, use GX Developer. For details of the use of ACPU, refer to Appendix 14.
GX Works2 (SW1DND-GXW2-E/ SW1DNC-GXW2-E)
Programmable controller direct connection (USB communication)
Programmable controller direct connection (Serial port communication)
*1 : Section 2.1.1 *2 : Section 2.1.2 *3 : Section 2.1.3 *4 : Section 2.1.4 *5 : Section 2.1.5 *6 : Section 2.1.6 *7 : Section 2.1.7 *8 : Section 2.1.8
*1 USB Cable
*2 USB Cable
*3 USB Cable
*4 QC30R2
*4 QC30R2
*5 Converter/Cable
*5 Converter/Cable
*7 Cable
*8 Converter/Cable
*8 Converter/Cable
*2
*4 RS-232 adapter
*6 *7
*6
QCPU (Q mode)/ Remote I/O module
LCPU/ Communication head module
FXCPU (FX3U/FX3UC)
FXCPU (FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC)
QCPU (Q mode)/ Remote I/O module
LCPU
FXCPU
FXCPU (FX1S/FX1N/FX2N/FX3S/ FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC) FXCPU (FX1S/FX1N/FX1NC/FX2N/ FX2NC/FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/ FX3U/FX3UC) FXCPU (FX0/FX0S/FX1S/FX0N/ FX1N/FX2N/FX1NC/FX2NC/ FX3U/FX3UC) FXCPU (FX1S/FX1N/FX2N/FX3U/ FX3UC)
2 - 2
2.1 Connection from USB/Serial Port
Via Serial communication
RS-232
1
QCPU (Q mode)/ Remote I/O module
C24
OVERVIEW
GX Works2 (SW1DND-GXW2-E/ SW1DNC-GXW2-E)
Via CC-Link(G4)
*1 Converter/Cable
LCPU/ CC IE Field head module
CC-Link
QCPU (Q mode)/ Remote I/O module
2
G4 module
LCPU/ CC IE Field head module
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Via MELSECNET/H
Converter/Cable
Via modem
Cable included in modem package
Remote station Remote module Modem
Control station
3
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
*1 : Section 2.1.9 *2 : Section 2.1.10 *3 : Section 2.1.11
Modem
Cable included in modem package
QCPU (Q mode)
C24
4
Via GOT
*3 Cable
GOT
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
LCPU
*2
FXCPU (FX1S/FX1N/FX1NC/FX2N/ FX2NC/FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/ FX3U/FX3UC)
QCPU (Q mode)/
Remote I/O module
5
LCPU/ CC IE Field head module
FXCPU
EDITING PROGRAMS
6
SETTING PARAMETERS
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
2 - 3
2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
2.1.1
USB cables (compatible with QCPU (Q mode), LCPU, and communication head module)
The following table shows USB cables available for QCPU (Q mode), LCPU, and communication head module.
Product name
USB cable
USB cable (A - B type plug)*1 USB cable (A - miniB type plug)*2
*1 : For QCPU (Q mode) only, except for Universal model QCPU. *2 : For Universal model QCPU/LCPU/communication head module only
Type
Using a USB cable for the first time Install the USB driver. (Appendix 16)
Considerations and restrictions For the considerations and restrictions when accessing a programmable controller CPU, refer to Section 14.11.
Using a USB/RS-232 conversion cable For checking the COM port number as connecting a personal computer to a programmable controller CPU using such as USB/RS-232 conversion cable, refer to the user's manual of each cable.
Configurations for USB connection
Only one programmable controller CPU can be connected to a personal computer using a USB cable. Connection to a programmable controller CPU is not applicable to the configuration examples below.
<Inapplicable configurations>
Connection to several programmable controller CPUs from the personal computer with several USB ports
USB cable
Programmable controller CPU
USB cable Programmable controller CPU
Connection to several programmable controller CPUs via USB hub
Programmable controller CPU
USB cable USB hub
USB cable
USB cable
Programmable controller CPU
2 - 4
2.1.1 USB cables (compatible with QCPU (Q mode), LCPU, and communication head module)
2.1.2
2.1 Connection from USB/Serial Port
USB cables and function expansion boards (compatible with 1
FX3U/FX3UC)
OVERVIEW
FX3U-USB-BD
USB cable (included)
2
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Using a USB cable for the first time � Install the USB driver.
3
FX-USB-AW/FX3U-USB-BD USER'S MANUAL - USB Driver Installation Edition
� GX Works2 selects data from the Connection Destination view on the Navigation window and assigns a serial COM port number.
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
Considerations and restrictions
� For the considerations and restrictions relating to FX3U-USB-BD, refer to the user's manual included.
� When "Operate Communication Setting" is selected on the <<PLC System (2)>> tab of PLC parameter, the
corresponding port cannot communicate with the programmable controller CPU. Write the setting in which "Operate Communication Setting" is cleared from the built-in programming port of the programmable controller CPU.
4
When the programmable controller type of the project is FX3U/FX3UC, the channel setting (CH1/CH2) combo box is
displayed. Select 'CH1' to confirm the setting.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
5
EDITING PROGRAMS
6
SETTING PARAMETERS
2.1.3
USB cables (compatible with FX3S, FX3G and FX3GC)
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
For details of cables, refer to the following manuals.
7
FX3S Series User's Manual- Hardware Edition
FX3G Series User's Manual- Hardware Edition
FX3GC Series User's Manual- Hardware Edition
Only one programmable controller CPU can be connected to a personal computer using a USB cable.
(Section 2.1.1 " Configurations for USB connection")
8
Using a USB cable for the first time Install the USB driver. (Appendix 16) GX Works2 selects data from the Connection Destination view on the Navigation window and configures a USB.
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
2.1.2 USB cables and function expansion boards (compatible with FX3U/FX3UC)
2 - 5
2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
2.1.4
RS-232 cables (compatible with QCPU (Q mode), LCPU, and remote I/O module)
The following table shows RS-232 cables whose operations have been confirmed at Mitsubishi Electric Corporation. LCPU can be connected with an RS-232 adapters (L6ADP-R2).
Model
QC30R2 (Personal computer connector: 9-pin D-sub connector)
Product name Mitsubishi Electric Corporation RS-232 cable
High-speed communication For high-speed communication (transmission speed: 115.2/57.6kbps), use a personal computer compatible with highspeed communication. When a communication error occurs, retry the communication after reducing the transmission speed setting.
2.1.5
Converters/cables for RS-232 connection (compatible with FXCPU)
Personal computer side (RS-232 cable)
F2-232CAB (25-pin D-sub25-pin D-sub)
F2-232CAB-1 (9-pin D-sub25-pin D-sub)
RS-232/RS-422 converter
Programmable controller CPU side (RS-422 cable)
For FX1/FXU/FX2C
FX-232AW
FX-422CAB (0.3 m) FX-422CAB-150 (1.5 m)
For FX0S/FX0/FX0N/FX1S/FX1N/FX1NC/FX2N/FX2NC/ FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC
F2-232CAB-2 (Half pitch25-pin D-sub)
AC30N2A(25-pin25-pin)
FX-232AWC
FX-422CAB0 (1.5 m)
� FX-232AWC-H
Transmission speed When connecting to FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC using FX-232AWC-H, select any of 9.6kbps, 19.2kbps, 38.4kbps, 57.6kbps, or 115.2kbps for the transmission speed. When connecting using FX-232AWC or FX-232AW, select either 9.6kbps or 19.2kbps for the transmission speed.
Connecting to FXCPU Be sure to use equipment shown in the table when connecting to FXCPU.
2 - 6
2.1.4 RS-232 cables (compatible with QCPU (Q mode), LCPU, and remote I/O module)
2.1 Connection from USB/Serial Port
Considerations for using RS-422 interface cables/converters
1
OVERVIEW
For the specifications of an RS-422 interface conversion cable/converter and the considerations for using them, please read the following instructions as well as the manuals of each product for correct handling.
Connecting/disconnecting the conversion cable/converter
When connecting/disconnecting a peripheral device, conversion cable or converter to/from the RS-
2
422 interface, be sure to touch a grounding strap or grounded metal to discharge static electricity
stored in the cable or in your body before the operation, regardless of whether electricity is being
supplied or not. After doing this, follow the procedure below.
Turn the programmable controller CPU OFF before connecting/disconnecting a conversion cable/
converter that receives 5VDC power supply from the RS-422 interface.
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Operation
3
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
1. Turn OFF the personal computer.
2. Turn OFF the conversion cable/converter. Ground the FG terminal if provided.
3. Connect/disconnect the conversion cable/converter to/from the personal computer and
the programmable controller CPU.
4. Turn ON the conversion cable/converter.
4
5. Turn ON the personal computer.
6. Start up the software package.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
2.1.6 Connection using function expansion boards (compatible
with FXCPU)
5
The following table shows the compatibility of FXCPU with function expansion boards.
EDITING PROGRAMS
Series
Function expansion board
FX3U, FX3UC (FX3UC-32MT-LT, FX3UC-32MT-LT-2 only)
FX3U-422-BD
FX3S, FX3G
FX3G-422-BD
6
FX2N
FX2N-422-BD
FX1S, FX1N
FX1N-422-BD
SETTING PARAMETERS
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
2.1.6 Connection using function expansion boards (compatible with FXCPU)
2 - 7
2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
PLC parameter When "Operate Communication Setting" is selected on the <<PLC System (2)>> tab of PLC parameter, the corresponding port cannot communicate with the programmable controller CPU. Write the setting in which "Operate Communication Setting" is cleared from the built-in programming port of the programmable controller CPU. When the programmable controller type of the project is FX3G/FX3GC or FX3U/FX3UC, the channel setting (CH1/CH2) combo box is displayed. Select 'CH1' to confirm the setting.
2 - 8
2.1.6 Connection using function expansion boards (compatible with FXCPU)
2.1 Connection from USB/Serial Port
2.1.7 Connection using RS-232 cables and function expansion
1
boards (special adapters) (compatible with FXCPU)
OVERVIEW
The following table shows the compatibility of RS-232 cables with function expansion boards and
special adapters according to the shape and pin configuration of the serial port of the personal
computer.
2
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Serial port shape of personal computer
Series
Function expansion board and special adapter
RS-232 cable
FX3U, FX3UC
FX3U-232-BD*1 Function expansion board (FX3U-***-BD)*2 + FX3U-232ADP
FX-232CAB-1
FX3G, FX3GC FX3S
FX3G-232-BD*3 FX3G-CNV-ADP*4 + FX3U-232ADP FX3G-232-BD FX3S-CNV-ADP + FX3U-232ADP
FX-232CAB-1
3
FX-232CAB-1
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
9-pin D-sub
FX2N
FX0N-232ADP + FX2N-CNV-BD FX2N-232-BD FX2NC-232ADP + FX2N-CNV-BD
F2-232CAB-1 FX-232CAB-1
FX1NC, FX2NC
FX0N-232ADP FX2NC-232ADP
F2-232CAB-1
FX-232CAB-1
4
FX0N-232ADP + FX1N-CNV-BD
F2-232CAB-1
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
FX1S, FX1N
FX1N-232-BD FX2NC-232ADP + FX1N-CNV-BD
FX-232CAB-1
FX3U, FX3UC
FX3U-232-BD*1 Function expansion board (FX3U-***-BD)*2 + FX3U-232ADP
FX-232CAB-2
FX3G, FX3GC
FX3G-232-BD*3 FX3G-CNV-ADP*4 + FX3U-232ADP
FX-232CAB-2
5
FX3S
FX3G-232-BD FX3S-CNV-ADP + FX3U-232ADP
FX-232CAB-2
EDITING PROGRAMS
Half pitch 14-pin
FX2N FX1NC, FX2NC
FX0N-232ADP + FX2N-CNV-BD FX2N-232-BD FX2NC-232ADP + FX2N-CNV-BD FX0N-232ADP FX2NC-232ADP
F2-232CAB-2
FX-232CAB-2
F2-232CAB-2
6
FX-232CAB-2
FX0N-232ADP + FX1N-CNV-BD
F2-232CAB-2
FX1S, FX1N
FX1N-232-BD FX2NC-232ADP + FX1N-CNV-BD
FX-232CAB-2
SETTING PARAMETERS
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
2.1.7 Connection using RS-232 cables and function expansion boards (special adapters) (compatible with FXCPU)
2 - 9
2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Serial port shape of personal computer
Series
Function expansion board and special adapter
FX3U, FX3UC
FX3U-232-BD*1 Function expansion board (FX3U-***-BD)*2 + FX3U-232ADP
FX3G, FX3GC
FX3G-232-BD*3 FX3G-CNV-ADP*4 + FX3U-232ADP
FX3S
FX3G-232-BD FX3S-CNV-ADP + FX3U-232ADP
25-pin D-sub
FX2N
FX0N-232ADP + FX2N-CNV-BD FX2N-232-BD
FX2NC-232ADP + FX2N-CNV-BD
FX1NC, FX2NC
FX0N-232ADP FX2NC-232ADP
FX0N-232ADP + FX1N-CNV-BD
FX1S, FX1N FX1N-232-BD
FX2NC-232ADP + FX1N-CNV-BD
*1 : For FX3UC series, only FX3UC-32MT-LT and FX3UC-32MT-LT-2 are connectable. *2 : '***' of function expansion boards (FX3U-***-BD) indicates 232, 485, 422, USB, CNV, or 8AV.
Function expansion board (FX3U-***-BD) is not required for FX3UC (D, DS, DSS) series. *3 : FX3GC series are not connectable. *4 : ADP (FX3G-CNV-ADP) for FX3U adapter connection is not required for FX3GC series.
RS-232 cable
F2-232CAB-1
F2-232CAB-1
F2-232CAB-1 F2-232CAB F2-232CAB-1 F2-232CAB F2-232CAB-1 F2-232CAB F2-232CAB-1
2 - 10
2.1.7 Connection using RS-232 cables and function expansion boards (special adapters) (compatible with FXCPU)
2.1 Connection from USB/Serial Port
1
PLC parameter
OVERVIEW
When "Operate Communication Setting" is selected on the <<PLC System (2)>> tab of PLC parameter, the
corresponding port cannot communicate with the programmable controller CPU. Write the setting in which "Operate
Communication Setting" is cleared from the built-in programming port of the programmable controller CPU.
When the programmable controller type of the project is FX3G/FX3GC or FX3U/FX3UC, the channel setting (CH1/CH2)
combo box is displayed. � FX3U/FX3UC (FX3UC-32MT-LT, FX3UC-32MT-LT-2) series
2
When using the first adapter of FX3U-232ADP which is connected to FX3U-232-BD or FX3U-CNV-BD, specify 'CH1'
and check the setting.
When using FX3U-232ADP which is connected to a board other than FX3U-CNV-BD, or when using the second
adapter of FX3U-232ADP which is connected to FX3U-CNV-BD, specify 'CH2' and check the setting.
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
� FX3UC (D, DS, DSS)/FX3GC series
When using the first adapter of FX3U-232ADP which is connected to FX3UC (D, DS, DSS) or FX3GC series, specify
'CH1' and check the setting.
When using the second adapter of FX3U-232ADP, specify 'CH2' and check the setting.
3
� FX3G series (14-/24-point type)
When using FX3G-232-BD, or when using the first adapter of FX3U-232ADP which is connected to FX3G-CNV-ADP,
specify 'CH1' and check the setting.
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
� FX3G series (40-/60-point type)
When using FX3G-232-BD, or when using the first adapter of FX3U-232ADP which is connected to FX3G-CNV-ADP,
specify 'CH1' and check the setting. In this case, when using the second adapter of FX3U-232ADP which is
connected to FX3G-CNV-ADP, specify 'CH2' and check the setting.
When using FX3G-232-BD and FX3U-232ADP which is connected to FX3G-CNV-ADP, specify 'CH1' and check the setting of FX3U-232ADP, and specify 'CH2' and check the setting of FX3G-232-BD.
4
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
5
EDITING PROGRAMS
6
SETTING PARAMETERS
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
2.1.7 Connection using RS-232 cables and function expansion boards (special adapters) (compatible with FXCPU)
2 - 11
2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
2.1.8
Converters/cables for USB connection (compatible with FXCPU)
FX-USB-AW
USB cable (included)
Using a USB cable for the first time � Install the USB driver. FX-USB-AW/FX3U-USB-BD USER'S MANUAL - USB Driver Installation Edition � GX Works2 selects data from the Connection Destination view on the Navigation window and assigns a serial COM port number.
Considerations and restrictions � For the considerations and restrictions relating to FX-USB-AW, refer to the user's manual included.
2.1.9 Connection via AJ65BT-R2N
Use an RS-232 cable complies with the RS-232 standard within 15m. For details, refer to the following manual. CC-Link System RS-232 Interface Module User's Manual (MELSOFT Connection Mode)
2 - 12
2.1.8 Converters/cables for USB connection (compatible with FXCPU)
2.1 Connection from USB/Serial Port
2.1.10 Function expansion board (special adapter)
1
OVERVIEW
Programmable controller side connector shape of cable
included in modem package
Series
Function expansion board and special adapter
FX3U, FX3UC
FX3U-232-BD*1 Function expansion board (FX3U-***-BD)*2 + FX3U-232ADP
2
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
FX3G, FX3GC
FX3G-232-BD*3 FX3G-CNV-ADP*4 + FX3U-232ADP
9-pin D-sub
FX3S
FX3G-232-BD FX3S-CNV-ADP + FX3U-232ADP
FX2N-232-BD
FX2N
FX2NC-232ADP + FX2N-CNV-BD
3
FX1NC, FX2NC
FX2NC-232ADP
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
FX1S, FX1N
FX1N-232-BD FX2NC-232ADP + FX1N-CNV-BD
FX2N
FX0N-232ADP + FX2N-CNV-BD
25-pin D-sub
FX1NC, FX2NC
FX0N-232ADP
FX1S, FX1N
FX0N-232ADP + FX1N-CNV-BD
*1 : For FX3UC series, only FX3UC-32MT-LT and FX3UC-32MT-LT-2 are connectable.
4
*2 : '***' of function expansion boards (FX3U-***-BD) indicates 232, 485, 422, USB, CNV, or 8AV.
Function expansion board (FX3U-***-BD) is not required for FX3UC (D, DS, DSS) series.
*3 : FX3GC series are not connectable.
*4 : ADP (FX3G-CNV-ADP) for FX3U adapter connection is not required for FX3GC series.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Set "MODEM Initialized" on the <<PLC System (1)>> tab of PLC parameter according to the modem.
For details, refer to Section 14.10.
5
EDITING PROGRAMS
SETTING PARAMETERS
6
2.1.11 Connection via GOT
7
The use of the transparent function of GOT enables the access to a programmable controller CPU via GOT. (Section 14.9)
8
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
2.1.10 Function expansion board (special adapter)
2 - 13
2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
2.2 Connection from I/F Boards
*1
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
*1 : CC IE Field head module only
The following shows the system configuration for connecting to a programmable controller CPU using an I/F board installed on the personal computer. For the methods how to install an I/F board, how to install the driver, and the supported programmable controller CPUs, refer to the manuals of each I/F board.
*1
MELSECNET/H board
Driver SW0DNC-MNETH-B
QCPU
Programmable controller on another station
GX Works2
(SW1DND-GXW2-E/ SW1DNC-GXW2-E)
CC-Link IE Controller Network board CC-Link IE Field Network board
Driver SW1DNC-MNETG-B
Driver SW1DNC-CCIEF-B
*1
CC-Link Ver.1 board
Driver SW4DNF-CCLINK-B
QCPU
Programmable controller on another station
QCPU
Programmable controller on another station
LCPU/ CC IE Field head module Programmable controller on another station
QCPU
Programmable controller on another station
*1 : Section 2.2.1
CC-Link Ver.2 board
Ethernet board Ethernet board built-in a personal computer/commercially available
Driver SW1DNC-CCBD2-B
Driver Driver supplied with commercially available Ethernet board
QCPU
Programmable controller on another station
LCPU
Programmable controller on another station
QCPU
Programmable controller on host/another station
LCPU Programmable controller on host/another station
FXCPU Programmable controller on host/another station
2 - 14
2.2 Connection from I/F Boards
2.2.1 I/F boards
1
OVERVIEW
This section explains applications of I/F boards. For details, refer to the manual of each I/F board.
MELSECNET/H board
2
� For accessing Process CPU, use SW0DNC-MNETH-B version E or later. � For accessing Redundant CPU, use SW0DNC-MNETH-B version K or later.
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
CC-Link Ver.1 board
� For accessing Process CPU, use SW4DNF-CCLINK-B version C or later.
3
� For accessing Redundant CPU, use SW4DNF-CCLINK-B version G or later.
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
4
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
5
EDITING PROGRAMS
6
SETTING PARAMETERS
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
2.2.1 I/F boards
2 - 15
2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
2.3 Interfaces and Connectable Modules
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
This section explains details of the modules that can be connected from the USB port, serial port, and each I/F board.
Modules connectable from USB port
The following table shows the modules that can be connected from the USB port. Q series, L series
Programmable controller series Q series L series
Module model
Q00UJ, Q00U, Q01U, Q02H, Q02PH, Q02U, Q03UD, Q03UDE, Q03UDV, Q04UDH, Q04UDEH, Q04UDV, Q06H, Q06PH, Q06UDH, Q06UDEH, Q06UDV, Q10UDH, Q10UDEH, Q12H, Q12PH, Q12PRH, Q13UDH, Q13UDEH, Q13UDV, Q20UDH, Q20UDEH, Q25H, Q25PH, Q25PRH, Q26UDH, Q26UDEH, Q26UDV, Q50UDEH, Q100UDEH
L02S, L02S-P, L02, L02-P, L06, L06-P, L26, L26-P, L26-BT, L26-PBT, LJ72GF15-T2, LJ72MS15
FX series
Module name
Connection route
Module model
Programmable controller main unit
FX-USB-AW*1
USB direct connection
FX0S, FX0, FX0N, FX1S, FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N, FX2NC, FX3U, FX3UC FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC
USB expansion board
USB direct connection*1
FX3U-USB-BD
*1 : As FXCPU uses the serial USB conversion driver software, specify the COM port number of the RS-232 in the connection destination setting.
2 - 16
2.3 Interfaces and Connectable Modules
Modules connectable from serial port
1
The following table shows the modules that can be connected from the serial port.
OVERVIEW
Programmable controller series
Module name
Module model
Q00J, Q00UJ, Q00, Q00U, Q01, Q01U, Q02(H), Q02PH, Q02U,
Programmable controller CPU Q03UD, Q04UDH, Q06H, Q06PH, Q06UDH, Q10UDH, Q12H,
module
Q12PH, Q12PRH, Q13UDH, Q20UDH, Q25H, Q25PH, Q25PRH,
2
Q26UDH
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Q series
Serial communication module*1
QJ71C24, QJ71C24-R2, QJ71C24N, QJ71C24N-R2, QJ71C24N-R4
MELSECNET/H network remote I/O module
QJ72LP25, QJ72BR15
G4 module
AJ65BT-G4-S3, AJ65BT-R2N
Programmable controller CPU L02S, L02S-P, L02*2, L02-P*2, L06*2, L06-P*2, L26*2, L26-P*2, L26-
3
L series
module
BT*2, L26-PBT*2
Serial communication module*1 LJ71C24, LJ71C24-R2
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
G4 module
AJ65BT-G4-S3, AJ65BT-R2N
FX series*3
Programmable controller main FX0S, FX0, FX0N, FX1, FX1S, FX1N, FX1NC, FXU, FX2C, FX2N, FX2NC,
unit
FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC
*1 : When accessing the programmable controller CPU from a personal computer via serial communication modules, note that
modules that can be connected to the personal computer are limited. Even if a module cannot be directly connected to the personal computer, it may be usable as the nth module in multi-drop
4
connection.
For details of the multi-drop connection, refer to the following manuals.
Q Corresponding Serial Communication Module User's Manual (Basic)
MELSEC-L Serial Communication Module User's Manual (Basic)
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
<Q series>
Model
QJ71C24N QJ71C24
QJ71C24N-R2 QJ71C24-R2
QJ71C24N-R4
Interface
CH1 CH2 CH1
RS-232 RS-422/485 RS-232
CH2 RS-232
CH1 RS-422/485 CH2 RS-422/485
1:1 system configuration
: Applicable �: Not applicable
Multi-drop connection
5
1st module
nth module
�
EDITING PROGRAMS
�
�
�
�
(Function version B or later)
�
�
�
�
�
6
�
�
�
SETTING PARAMETERS
<L series>
Model
Interface
1:1 system configuration
CH1 RS-232
LJ71C24
CH2 RS-422/485
�
CH1 RS-232
LJ71C24-R2
CH2 RS-232
*2 : Connectable only with an RS-232 adapter (L6ADP-R2). *3 : Connectable only with an RS-232 RS-422 conversion board/adapter.
: Applicable �: Not applicable
Multi-drop connection
1st module
nth module
7
�
�
�
�
�
�
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
2 - 17
2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Modules connectable from MELSECNET/H board
The following table shows the modules that can be connected from the MELSECNET/H board.
I/F board model
Q81BD-J71LP21-25 Q80BD-J71LP21S-25 Q80BD-J71LP21-25 Q80BD-J71LP21G Q80BD-J71BR11
Programmable controller series
Module model
Q series
QJ71LP21, QJ71LP21G, QJ71BR11, QJ71LP21-25, QJ71LP21S-25
Modules connectable from CC-Link IE Controller Network board
The following table shows the modules that can be connected from the CC-Link IE Controller Network board.
I/F board model
Q81BD-J71GP21S-SX Q81BD-J71GP21-SX Q80BD-J71GP21S-SX Q80BD-J71GP21-SX
Programmable controller series
Module model
Q series
QJ71GP21-SX, QJ71GP21S-SX
Modules connectable from CC-Link IE Field Network board
The following table shows the modules that can be connected from the CC-Link IE Field Network board.
I/F board model
Q81BD-J71GF11-T2 Q80BD-J71GF11-T2
Programmable controller series
Q series
L series
Module model
QJ71GF11-T2 LJ72GF15-T2, LJ71GF11-T2
Modules connectable from CC-Link Ver.1 board
The following table shows the modules that can be connected from the CC-Link Ver.1 board.
I/F board model
A80BD-J61BT11 A80BD-J61BT13
Programmable controller series
Q series
Module model QJ61BT11, QJ61BT11N
Modules connectable from the CC-Link Ver.2 board
The following table shows the modules that can be connected from the CC-Link Ver.2 board.
I/F board model
Q81BD-J61BT11 Q80BD-J61BT11N
Programmable controller series
Q series
L series
Module model
QJ61BT11, QJ61BT11N L26-BT, L26-PBT, LJ61BT11
2 - 18
2.3 Interfaces and Connectable Modules
Modules connectable from Ethernet board
1
The following table shows the modules that can be connected from the Ethernet board.
OVERVIEW
I/F board model
Programmable controller series
Module model
Ethernet board built-in a personal computer or commercially available
Q series L series
QJ71E71, QJ71E71-B2, QJ71E71-100, QJ71E71-B5,
Q03UDE, Q03UDV, Q04UDEH, Q04UDV, Q06UDEH, Q06UDV, Q10UDEH, Q13UDEH, Q13UDV, Q20UDEH,
2
Q26UDEH, Q26UDV, Q50UDEH, Q100UDEH
LJ71E71, L02, L02-P, L06, L06-P, L26, L26-P, L26-BT, L26-PBT
FX series
FX-ENET series
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
3
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
4
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
5
EDITING PROGRAMS
6
SETTING PARAMETERS
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
2 - 19
2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
2.4 System Configuration with Memory Card on Personal Computer
Q CPU L CPU ReFmXote HFeXad FX
This section explains the system configuration when accessing from the personal computer with the memory card on the personal computer.
Installing memory card into PC card slot When installing a Q series memory card into the PC card slot, the following adapter is required.
Product name PC card adapter
Model Q2MEM-ADP
manufacturer Mitsubishi Electric Corporation
Writing/reading data to/from memory card
Using the following functions, even if a memory card cannot be installed into the programmable controller CPU, data can be written or read by installing the memory card to personal computer.
: Applicable �: Not applicable
Function
PLC series Memory card Windows�XP Windows Vista� Reference
SRAM card*2
�
�
Q series*1 ATA card
IC memory card data write/read
Flash card
�
�
Section 15.11.1
Q series*3 L series*4
SD memory card
IC memory card data write/read (edit and data copy)
L series*4
SD memory card
Section 15.11.2
*1 : Not supported by Basic model QCPU, Q00UJ, Q00U, Q01U, and High-speed Universal model QCPU. *2 : When using a SRAM card, set the driver to CONFIG.NT.
(For details, refer to HELP of Windows�) When using an ATA card, Windows� recognizes it automatically. If the ATA card cannot be recognized, set the personal computer in "System" in Windows� Control Panel. If the driver for SRAM card is set to CONFIG.NT, cancel the setting.
*3 : For High-speed Universal model QCPU only *4 : Not supported by L02S and L02S-P.
2 - 20
2.5 Supported Programming Languages
2.5 Supported Programming Languages
1
OVERVIEW
Q CPU L CPU ReFmXote HFeXad FX
This section explains details of the programming languages supported by GX Works2.
Programming language
Description
: Supported �: Not supported
2
Simple project
Structured
without labels
with labels
project
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
A graphic language using ladder programs composed of contacts and
Ladder Diagram (LD)
coils. Ladder diagrams are created in a similar way to existing GX Developer. In projects with labels, the Inline structured text function can be used to
*1
edit ST programs on the ladder editor.
3
Structured Text (ST)
A text language with grammatical structure similar to C language.
�
*1
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
Sequential Function Chart (SFC)*2
A graphic language which defines the executing order or condition of a program.
*1
*1
Structured Ladder
A graphic language using ladder programs composed of contacts and coils.
�
�
Function
4
Block Diagram
A graphic language using ladder programs by connecting functions and/ or function blocks with lines.
�
�
(FBD)
*1 : Not supported by FXCPU.
*2 : For QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU, the display format of SFC can be selected from "MELSAP3", "MELSAP-L (Instruction Format)", and "MELSAP-L (Start Conditions Format)".
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
5
EDITING PROGRAMS
6
SETTING PARAMETERS
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
2 - 21
2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
MEMO
2 - 22
1
OVERVIEW
3 SCREEN
2
CONFIGURATION AND
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
BASIC OPERATIONS
3
This chapter explains the screen configuration and basic operations of GX Works2.
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
3.1
Starting and Exiting GX Works2
3.2
Screen Configuration and Basic Operations
3.3
Selecting Language
3.4
Help Function
4
3 - 2
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
3 - 3
3 - 30
3 - 32
5
EDITING PROGRAMS
6
SETTING PARAMETERS
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
3 - 1
3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
3.1 Starting and Exiting GX Works2
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
This section explains the operation methods for starting and exiting GX Works2.
Starting GX Works2
Start GX Works2.
Operating procedure
� Select [MELSOFT] [GX Works2]*1 [GX Works2] from Windows� Start*2.
*1 : Does not appear in Windows� 8 or later. *2 : Select [All apps] on the Start screen or [Start] [All Programs].
Exiting GX Works2
Exit GX Works2.
Operating procedure
� Select [Project] [Exit].
3 - 2
3.2 Screen Configuration and Basic Operations
3.2 Screen Configuration and Basic Operations
1
OVERVIEW
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
This section explains the main frame (basic screen) of GX Works2 that is displayed when it is started
up.
2
3.2.1 Main frame configuration
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
The following screen shows a main frame configuration on which a work window and docked windows
are displayed.
3
Screen display
Title bar Menu bar
Toolbar
Navigation window
4
Element Selection window
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Work window
5
Docked window
EDITING PROGRAMS
SETTING PARAMETERS
6
Status bar
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
3.2.1 Main frame configuration
3 - 3
3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
Display contents
Title bar Menu bar Toolbar
Name
Work window
Docking window Navigation
Element Selection
Output Cross Reference Device List
Device Reference
Watch 1 to 4 Intelligent Function Module Monitor 1 to 10 Find/Replace Debug Status bar
Description Display a project name. Display menu options for executing each function. Display tool buttons for executing each function. A main screen used for operations such as programming, parameter setting, and monitoring A sub screen to support operations performed on a work window Display contents of a project in tree format.
Display a list of functions (such as function blocks) used for programming.
Display compilation and check results (errors and warnings).
Display cross reference results. Display the device list. Display assignments of refresh devices and link devices specified for the CC-Link parameter. Display assignments of refresh devices and I/O devices specified for the AnyWireASLINK parameter. A screen used for monitoring and changing current device values.
Screens used for monitoring intelligent function modules.
A screen used for searching and replacing character strings in the project.
A screen used for setting the debug which uses the simulation function.
Display information about a project being edited.
Reference � �
Section 3.2.2
Section 3.2.3
Section 3.2.4
Section 3.2.5 GX Works2 Version 1
Operating Manual (Simple Project, Function Block)
(Structured Project) GX Works2 Version 1
Operating Manual (Simple Project) (Structured Project)
Section 10.1 Section 10.2
Section 6.3.4
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual
(Intelligent Function Module)
Section 17.6
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual
(Intelligent Function Module)
Section 10.3
Section 19.6.2 Section 19.6.3 Section 19.6.4 Section 3.2.6
When the focus point is not indicated on the screen To display the focus point, set the Windows Control Panel settings. (Example)
1) Open "Ease of Access Center" from Windows� Control Panel.
2) Select "Make the keyboard easier to use".
3) Select "Underline keyboard shortcuts and access keys".
3 - 4
3.2.1 Main frame configuration
3.2 Screen Configuration and Basic Operations
3.2.2 Toolbars
1
OVERVIEW
A toolbar is a block of on-screen buttons for executing frequently-used functions included in a menu. (Appendix 1) The toolbars to be displayed and their display positions on the screen can be set by the user.
Displaying/hiding toolbars
2
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Select a toolbar to be displayed.
Operating procedure
� Select [View] [Toolbar] [(toolbar name)].
3
The selected toolbar is displayed on the screen.
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
4
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
5
EDITING PROGRAMS
6
SETTING PARAMETERS
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
3.2.2 Toolbars
3 - 5
3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS Docking/floating toolbars
Switch the display format (docked/floating) of a toolbar. Floating a toolbar
Display a toolbar floating from the main frame.
Operation
� Drag a docked toolbar to the desired position for floating display.
Drag and drop
3 - 6
3.2.2 Toolbars
3.2 Screen Configuration and Basic Operations
Docking a toolbar
1
Display a toolbar docked to the main frame.
OVERVIEW
Operation
� Drag the title bar of a floating toolbar and drop it in the main frame.
2
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Drag and drop
3
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
4
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
EDITING PROGRAMS
5
Method for docking a toolbar at the original position To dock a floating toolbar back at the original position, double-click on the title bar of the toolbar.
6
SETTING PARAMETERS
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
3.2.2 Toolbars
3 - 7
3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
Displaying/hiding all toolbars
Display/hide all toolbars that are set to be displayed. The display setting of toolbar can be saved by performing the following operation.
Operating procedure
� Select [View] [Toolbar] [Display All].
The standard toolbars and all other toolbars are displayed.*1 The changes of toolbar positions and the display setting of displaying/hiding toolbars are maintained.
*1 : Inactive toolbars are included. Toolbars of inapplicable functions are grayed out.
<When the [Display All] function is enabled>
When the [Display All] function is disabled while all toolbars are displayed, only the active toolbars are displayed. <When the [Display All] function is disabled>
3 - 8
3.2.2 Toolbars
3.2 Screen Configuration and Basic Operations
Customizing toolbars
1
Set the types of tool buttons to be displayed on each toolbar.
OVERVIEW
Operating procedure
1. Select the Toolbar options button ( ) [Add or Remove Buttons].
A list of tool buttons is displayed.
2
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
3
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
2. Select the check box in front of the tool button to be displayed on the screen.
The selected tool buttons are displayed on the screen.
4
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
The toolbar configuration returns to the default when [Reset Toolbar] is selected.
5
Restrictions
EDITING PROGRAMS
Restrictions when customizing toolbars The type of tool buttons for the following toolbars cannot be set.
� Monitor status
� Debug function � Sampling trace
6
SETTING PARAMETERS
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
3.2.2 Toolbars
3 - 9
3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
Displaying editing screens with the toolbar
For Simple projects only, editing screens can be displayed with the toolbar.
Screen display
Select [View] [Toolbar] [Docking Window/Switch Project Data].
Data type
Operating procedure
1. Select a data type to be displayed.
2. Select a data name to be displayed.
The editing screen of the selected data name is displayed.
Data name
Display icon ( ) The editing screen of the selected data type and data name can be displayed by clicking .
3 - 10
3.2.2 Toolbars
3.2 Screen Configuration and Basic Operations
3.2.3 Work windows
1
OVERVIEW
A work window is a main screen used for operations such as programming, parameter setting, and monitoring in GX Works2.
Screen display
Tab
Tooltip
2
Scroll button
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Switching button
3
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
4
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Display contents
Item
Description
Become active when selected. The tab order can be changed by dragging and dropping tabs.
5
The window(s) can be closed from the menu displayed by right-clicking the tab. In the other way, the
active window can be closed by clicking on the tab.
Tab Right-click
EDITING PROGRAMS
6
Tooltip
Display a brief explanation when the cursor is placed on the selected tab.
SETTING PARAMETERS
Scroll button
Scroll the tab display to the left and right. Display hidden tabs.
Switching button
Display the list of windows being displayed. Select a data name displayed on the list to display its corresponding window on the top.
Display windows
Display screens such as the program editor, label setting editor, and monitoring screen.
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
3.2.3 Work windows
3 - 11
3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS Maximizing/minimizing screens
Maximize/minimize the screen size on the work window. Maximizing the screen
Operation
� Click the Maximize button ( ).
Click
3 - 12
3.2.3 Work windows
Minimizing the screen
Operation
� Click the Minimize button ( ).
3.2 Screen Configuration and Basic Operations
1
2
Click
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
3
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
4
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
5
EDITING PROGRAMS
6
SETTING PARAMETERS
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
Restoring the screen size Click to return the maximized/minimized screen to its previous size.
8
Click
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
3.2.3 Work windows
3 - 13
3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS Arranging screens
Arrange screens to display on the work window. Cascading screens
Operation
� Select [Window] [Cascade].
Tiling screens vertically
Operation
� Select [Window] [Tile Vertically].
3 - 14
3.2.3 Work windows
3.2 Screen Configuration and Basic Operations
Tiling screens horizontally
1
Operation
� Select [Window] [Tile Horizontally].
OVERVIEW
2
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
3
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
4
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Arranging icons (minimized windows) at the bottom of the work window
Operation
5
� Select [Window] [Arrange Icons].
EDITING PROGRAMS
6
SETTING PARAMETERS
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
3.2.3 Work windows
3 - 15
3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
Arranging/displaying windows
Display a list of open windows, and also open and arrange specified windows. This function is useful to display the desired window efficiently when multiple windows are open.
Screen display
Select [Window] [Other Window].
3 - 16
3.2.3 Work windows
3.2 Screen Configuration and Basic Operations
3.2.4 Docking windows
1
OVERVIEW
This section explains the operations common to dock windows.
Displaying/Hiding dockable windows
2
Display/hide a dockable window.
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Operating procedure
� Select [View] [Docking Window] [(target item)].
Docking/floating dockable windows
3
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
Switch the display format of a dockable window.
Docked display Display a dockable window docked to the main frame.
Floating display
Display a dockable window floating from the main frame.
4
Operation
� Drag the title bar of a floating dockable window and drop it to the guidance in the main
frame.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
5
EDITING PROGRAMS
Drag and drop
6
Drag a dockable window to the guidance.
A new tab appears after the window is docked.
The docked window is floated by dragging the title bar to the desired position.
SETTING PARAMETERS
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
3.2.4 Docking windows
3 - 17
3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
Operation of dockable windows Docked windows can be switched from docked to floating or vice versa by double-clicking the title bar. Dockable display
Double-click
Double-click
Floating display Changing the tab order
The tab order can be changed by dragging and dropping the desired tab to the left or right when multiple dockable windows are docked.
Drag and drop
The tab order is changed.
3 - 18
3.2.4 Docking windows
3.2 Screen Configuration and Basic Operations
Window minimized mode
1
Minimize a docked window as a tab. The window minimized mode can be set and disabled by the following procedure.
OVERVIEW
Operating procedure
� Click the window minimized mode switching icon ( / ).
2
Window minimized switching icon
Normal display
Window minimized mode
Docked window display in window minimized mode
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Only the tab is
Placing the cursor
displayed in
on the tab displays
3
window
the window.
minimized
mode.
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
The window is displayed normally
after disabling window minimized mode.
4
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Resetting positions of dockable windows
Return the display positions of the dockable windows to their default.
5
The status of display/hide and window minimize mode, and the display size can also be returned.
EDITING PROGRAMS
Operating procedure
� Select [View] [Docking Window] [Reset the Window Position to its Default].
The following message is displayed. Click the
button to perform the function.
6
SETTING PARAMETERS
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
3.2.4 Docking windows
3 - 19
3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
3.2.5 Navigation window
This section explains the Navigation window that displays the contents of a project in tree format. Operations such as creating new data and displaying editing screens can be performed on the Navigation window. (Chapter 4)
Screen display
Select [View] [Docking Window] [Navigation].
Title bar
Toolbar
Display contents
Title bar
Name
Toolbar
View selection area Project
User Library
Connection Destination
View selection area
Description Display a title of a view being displayed. Display tool buttons of functions to be executed on each view. Area for selecting a view to display. Display the Project view.
Display the User Library view.
Display the Connection Destination view.
Reference �
Appendix 1
� Section 4.2.1 GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Structured Project) Section 14.1.1
Color of characters on title bar when uncompiled data exist The compilation is not completed if the color of the characters on the title bar are red.
Uncompiled
3 - 20
3.2.5 Navigation window
Compiled
3.2 Screen Configuration and Basic Operations
Sorting data
1
Sort data displayed in tree format.
OVERVIEW
Operating procedure
1. Open a folder on the Navigation window and select the data for sorting.
2
2. Right-click and select [Sort] [(sort type)] from the shortcut menu.
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
The data displayed in tree format are sorted in the ascending order.
When the same operation is performed after sort execution, the sort order is switched between
ascending and descending.
The following table shows the sort types.
Type
Description
3
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
Execution Order*1
Sort data in the selected folder according to the execution order. When a program file is selected, tasks in the program file are sorted according to the execution order. When a task is selected, programs in the task are sorted according to the execution order.
Name
Sort the data in the selected folder according to the name.
Date Language*2
Sort the data in the selected folder according to the date modified.
4
Sort the data in the selected folder according to the programming language type.
POU Type*3
Sort the data in the selected folder according to the POU type.
*1 : SFC programs of Simple project, and program files and tasks of Structured project only *2 : Tasks, programs, and FB/FUN of Structured project only *3 : FB/FUN of Structured project only
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
5
EDITING PROGRAMS
6
SETTING PARAMETERS
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
3.2.5 Navigation window
3 - 21
3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS Expanding all uncompiled data
Expand all uncompiled data exist on the Project view and User Library view.
Operating procedure
1. Click on the toolbar. 2. Select [Expand All Uncompiled Data].
All uncompiled data are expanded and become selectable status.
Collapsing tree
Collapse tree on the Project view and User Library view.
Operating procedure
1. Click on the toolbar. 2. Select [Collapse All].
The tree is collapsed.
3 - 22
3.2.5 Navigation window
3.2.6 Status bar
3.2 Screen Configuration and Basic Operations
1
OVERVIEW
The status bar displays information about the current project at the bottom of the screen.
Connection time
Project language
Project type
Security information
Programmable Connection controller type destination
Cursor position
Insert/ Caps Num Overwrite Lock Lock
2
The following shows the information to be displayed.
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Item
Description
Connection time
Display the connection duration of the phone line.
Project language
Display the language set for the language selection.
Display the project type.
Project type
� Unlabeled : Simple project (without labels) � Simple : Simple project (with labels)
3
� Structured : Structured project
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
Security information
Display the login user name when security is set for the project.
Programmable controller type Display the programmable controller type of the project.
Display the set content of the Transfer Setup screen.
Connection destination
For Redundant CPU, the set content is displayed as shown below.
4
Cursor position Insert/Overwrite Caps Lock Num Lock
Display the cursor position in the editing screen. Display the current mode (insert or overwrite). Display the effective status of the Caps Lock. Display the effective status of the Num Lock.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Displaying/hiding status bar
5
Display/hide the status bar.
EDITING PROGRAMS
Operating procedure
� Select [View] [Statusbar].
A check mark is appended in front of the menu option and the status bar is displayed on the
6
screen.
SETTING PARAMETERS
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
3.2.6 Status bar
3 - 23
3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
3.2.7 Changing colors and fonts
Change the color and font settings on program editors and label editors.
Screen display
Select [View] [Color and Font].
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Item Target Font Setting
Auto (Based on system settings)
User settings
Color Setting Color Setting Items
Description
Select the change target work window.
Change font settings.
Select this to use the font settings in Windows�.
Select this to customize the font settings.
Click the
button to select the desired font.
�
Select the change target item and color.
2. Click the
button.
3 - 24
3.2.7 Changing colors and fonts
3.2 Screen Configuration and Basic Operations
Screen button
1
OVERVIEW
Displays the Font screen. The font type, style, and size can be customized. Some font styles and sizes, however, cannot be set depending on target work windows.
2
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
3
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
Displays the Color screen.
4
The color can be customized. The created color is added as "Custom" in the color selection field of
the Color and Font screen. Only one color can be added as "Custom".
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
5
EDITING PROGRAMS
6
Displays the Import Color and Font setting file screen.
Select "Color and Font setting file (*.gcs)" and click the
button to read the file.
SETTING PARAMETERS
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
3.2.7 Changing colors and fonts
3 - 25
3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
Displays the Export Color and Font setting file screen. Set a save destination and a file name for the color and font setting file (*.gcs). The content displayed on the Color and Font screen is saved on the file by clicking the button.
Resets the color and font settings to default.
Applies the changed color and font settings.
Font setting Some fonts may be displayed as garbled characters. Change the setting to another font if this happens.
3 - 26
3.2.7 Changing colors and fonts
3.2 Screen Configuration and Basic Operations
3.2.8 Customizing shortcut keys
1
OVERVIEW
Customize a shortcut key of each function. Customized shortcut keys can be registered as a template and utilized.
Screen display
2
Select [Tool] [Key Customize].
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
3
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
4
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
5
Setting shortcut keys
EDITING PROGRAMS
This function creates/changes/deletes a shortcut key.
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
6
Item Shortcut Key
Category Command Current Key
Press the keys to assign
Current
Description
SETTING PARAMETERS
�
Select a category from the group list categorized by window.
Select a function name whose shortcut key to be changed.
Display the shortcut key assigned to the selected command.
7
Specify a new shortcut key to be assigned. Input it by pressing a key(s) on
the keyboard.
Example) +
Display the menu name to which the entered shortcut key is assigned. When the key is already assigned to another function, the function name is displayed.
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
3.2.8 Customizing shortcut keys
3 - 27
3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
2. Click the
button.
The shortcut key is assigned. The assigned shortcut key is displayed in "Current Key".
3. Click the
button.
The shortcut key is created/changed.
Screen button
Deletes the shortcut key selected in "Current Key".
Displays the Enter Template Name screen. Register the assigned shortcut keys as a template with a desired name. The registered template is displayed in "Template".
Assigning shortcut keys Up to three shortcut keys can be assigned to one function. The shortcut key displayed on the top in "Current Key" is displayed on the menu.
Templates The maximum file name length for a template is 24 characters.
Shortcut key (+) for changing current value To prevent from pressing the + keys by mistake, changing the current value using the shortcut key can be invalid on the Option screen. Select "Disable Current Value Changing by Pressing Shift+Enter" in [Tool] [Option] "Monitor" "Common".
3 - 28
3.2.8 Customizing shortcut keys
3.2 Screen Configuration and Basic Operations
Registering templates
1
This function registers/deletes a template of shortcut keys.
OVERVIEW
Operating procedure
1. Set the item on the screen.
Item
Template
2
Description
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Select a template of shortcut keys from .
� Default Setting Change to the default setting.
� GPPA Format Setting
Batch change the shortcut key setting of ladder programming to the
same setting of GPPA. � GPPW Format Setting
3
Batch change the shortcut key setting of ladder programming and
SFC programming to the same setting of GX Developer.
� Setting of MEDOC Format Batch change the shortcut key setting of ladder programming to the same setting of MELSEC MEDOC.
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
2. Click the
button.
4
The selected template of shortcut keys is applied.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Screen button
Deletes a template selected in "Template".
5
Imports a pre-saved template file (*.gks) and adds it to "Template".
Saves a template selected in "Template" as a template file (*.gks).
EDITING PROGRAMS
Restrictions
Templates with "MEDOC Format Setting"
6
Any of the following symptoms occurs when the template with "MEDOC Format Setting" is imported to GX Works2
Version 1.95Z or earlier.
SETTING PARAMETERS
� Shortcut keys of the tool buttons on the "Ladder" toolbar are hidden.
� When the numeric key is pressed on the Find screen displayed by the simple search function, the display on the element selection field is changed.
� An operation according to the set shortcut keys is performed when a number is entered on the ladder editor, the
Enter VLine screen, the Enter HLine screen, the Delete VLine screen, or the Delete HLine screen.
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
3.2.8 Customizing shortcut keys
3 - 29
3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
3.3 Selecting Language
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
This section explains how to select a language used for project data (such as device comments, statements, and notes). By selecting a language of the project, data can be created in a language other than English. Data created in another language can be displayed without character corruption. For restrictions when selecting a project language, refer to Appendix 18.
Screen display
Select [Tool] [Language Selection]. < Before creating a new project >
< When editing a project >
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Item Project Language Save the project (Overwrite save)
Description Select the language of the project. Select this to save the project before changing the project language.
2. Click the
button.
The project data are displayed in the selected project language.
3 - 30
3.3 Selecting Language
1
Considerations when project language change is canceled If characters other than alphanumeric characters are used for data names and label names, the project language
OVERVIEW
change may be canceled. In such case, change data names or label names according to the error message displayed
on the Output window. In some cases, even after the project language is changed, characters other than the characters
of the selected language may be used. Change the characters other than those of the selected language.
For data names which causes the cancellation of project language change when characters other than alphanumeric characters are used, refer to Appendix 17.1.
2
Considerations when changing project language The project language change function does not change the characters on setting menus and screens.
To display characters on setting menus and screens in another language, use the specific version of GX Works2 that
supports the language.
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
3
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
4
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
5
EDITING PROGRAMS
6
SETTING PARAMETERS
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
3 - 31
3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
3.4 Help Function
This section explains the help function of GX Works2.
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
3.4.1 Displaying GX Works2 help
Use the GX Works2 help function to learn GX Works2 operations, understand functions, and check error codes of programmable controller CPU. The following items can be checked with the GX Works2 help function. � Help for operations � Help for instructions � Help for special relays/special registers � Help for CPU errors � Error codes for CPU module communication � Changes from GX Developer � List of shortcut keys � Registered Trademarks and Trademarks � FX manuals*1
*1 : For FXCPU, GX Works2 Help (for FXCPU) and Adobe� Reader� version 8 or later are required to view the help. For installing GX Works2 Help (for FXCPU), refer to the following section. Installing GX Works2 help for FXCPU
Screen display
Select [Help] [GX Works2 Help] ( ).
Tab
3 - 32
3.4.1 Displaying GX Works2 help
3.4 Help Function
1
Displaying GX Works2 help Enter a keyword in the keyword entry field on the standard toolbar of GX Works2, and press the key to display the help items searched by the keyword.
OVERVIEW
2
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Keyword entry field
The help items can also be displayed by the screen title by pressing the key with the selected screen such as
Navigation window, program editor, and Element Selection window of GX Works2. (Some screens do not support the
key function.)
For FXCPU, when a special relay (M) or a special register (D) is searched, the head of the section which describes the
special relay (M) or the special register (D) in the programming manual (PDF file) is displayed.
Instruction help
3
� Instructions which are supported by the instruction help function are: common instructions and application functions for QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU, and sequence instructions and application functions for FXCPU.
� The SFC editor is not supported by the instruction help function.
� Operators and ST control syntax are not supported by the instruction help function.
� When the selected instruction is corresponded by multiple items, the Result screen (for QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU) or the Help Reference screen (for FXCPU) is displayed. Double-click the item to display the help.
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
4
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
� When the selected instruction contains a special relay or special register, the Help References screen is displayed.
5
Select a keyword displayed and click the
button.
EDITING PROGRAMS
6
SETTING PARAMETERS
Error codes when communicating with CPU module
When an error whose error code is in the range between 4000H and 4C09H occurs while communicating with the CPU
module, the following pop-up screen is displayed on the right-bottom corner of the screen.
The pop-up help function is not supported by FXCPU.
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
3.4.1 Displaying GX Works2 help
3 - 33
3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
Operation of the help function for FXCPU � The "Add to Favorites" function on the Navigation window of GX Works2 help, and the "Keyword", "Search", "Favorites", and "History" functions under [View] [Navigation] are not supported by the help function for FXCPU. For the search function, display the programming manual (PDF) and use the search function of Adobe� Reader�. � If another PDF reader other than Adobe� Reader� is installed, the content of the help function may not be displayed. In this case, reinstall Adobe� Reader�. � Use the Adobe� Reader� version supported by operating system and Internet Explorer�. � When an Adobe� Reader� error occurs while using the help function, the error may be solved by restarting a personal computer.
Installing GX Works2 help for FXCPU
To install GX Works2 Help (for FXCPU), double-click "setup.exe" in the "Disk2\DocFX" folder on the DVD-ROM. *1
*1 : For GX Works2 Version 1.86Q or later and Version 1.568S or earlier, double-click "setup.exe" in the "DocFX" folder on the CD-ROM (Disc 2).
3 - 34
3.4.1 Displaying GX Works2 help
3.4 Help Function
Setting options for GX Works2 help function
1
Set options for "Startup", "Window", and "Tab" items of the GX Works2 help function.
OVERVIEW
Screen display
Select the GX Works2 help menu [Operation] [Options].
2
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
3
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
Operating procedure
� Set the items on the screen.
4
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Item
Description
Startup
�
Restore the previous status at the start Select this to activate the GX Works2 help function with the state of
of Help
previous operation.
Window
� Select this to set the GX Works2 help function in the task tray when the
5
Add help icon to the System Tray when window is minimized
GX Works2 help window is minimized. When this item is selected and the GX Works2 help window is minimized, the GX Works2 help function can be activated from the task
tray.
EDITING PROGRAMS
Select this to set a maximum number of windows to be displayed with
Set maximum number of window
the GX Works2 help function.
Enter a maximum number of windows.
Tab
�
6
Switch tab by rolling mouse wheel on Select this to switch tabs with the mouse wheel when the cursor is on
tab
the tab.*1
SETTING PARAMETERS
Specify tab size
Select this to specify the tab size. Enter a width and a height of the tab.
*1 : When the tab of FX manual is displayed in front, the tabs cannot be switched with the mouse wheel. Select a tab other than that of FX manual to switch tabs.
7
3.4.2 Displaying operating manuals
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
Display the operating manuals of GX Works2 Version 1.
Screen display
8
Select [Help] [Operating Manual] [(manual name)].
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
3.4.2 Displaying operating manuals
3 - 35
3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
3.4.3 Connecting to MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC FA Global Website
Open the MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC FA Global Website in a web browser. Make sure your personal computer connect to the Internet in advance.
Operating procedure
� Select [Help] [Connection to MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC FA Global Website].
3.4.4 Checking version of GX Works2
Display information such as the software version of GX Works2.
Operating procedure
� Select [Help] [About].
3 - 36
3.4.3 Connecting to MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC FA Global Website
1
OVERVIEW
4
PROJECT MANAGEMENT 2
This chapter explains basic operations and management of projects.
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
3
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
4.1
GX Works2 Project Management
4
4 - 2
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
4.2
Project Operations
4 - 9
4.3
Operations of Programmable Controller CPU Data
4 - 34
4.4
Operations of Intelligent Function Module Data
4 - 45
5
4.5
Changing Project Types
4 - 46
EDITING PROGRAMS
4.6
Managing Project Revisions
4 - 47
4.7
Utilizing Projects and Data in Other Formats
4 - 53
4.8
Saving Projects in Other Formats
6
4 - 60
SETTING PARAMETERS
4.9
Starting GX Developer from GX Works2
4 - 61
4.10 Setting Security for Projects
4 - 62
4.11 Setting Security Key 4.12 Protecting POUs in Projects
4 - 72
7
4 - 80
4.13 Managing Profiles
4 - 88
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
4 - 1
4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
4.1 GX Works2 Project Management
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
This section explains the management of GX Works2 projects. In GX Works2, created projects are saved in the workspace format or the single file format.
4.1.1 Workspace format
A workspace manages multiple projects at once. When configuring a system containing multiple programmable controller CPUs, a project needs to be created for each programmable controller CPU. However, projects in the same system can be managed by saving projects created in a single workspace in the workspace format. When using MELSOFT Navigator, save projects in the workspace format.
< System configuration example > First stage construction for company A < ABC alarm processing >
Ethernet
< XYZ control > MELSECNET/10(H)
4 - 2
< Conveyor control >
< Additional processing >
Batch-manage projects in the workspace format
< GX Works2 project management >
First stage construction for company A ABC alarm processing XYZ control Conveyor control Additional processing
Workspace Project
4.1.1 Workspace format
4.1 GX Works2 Project Management
Configuration of workspace and project
1
The following explains the configuration of GX Works2 workspace and project.
OVERVIEW
<Data in the GX Works2 data folder>
2
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
<Data in the Workspace 1 folder>
3
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
Save destination folder Workspace name folder
A folder specified for the save folder path when the project is saved. A folder corresponds to the workspace name specified when the project is saved.
4
Project name folder
A folder corresponds to the project name specified when the project is saved.
workspacelist.xml
A file created automatically when the project is saved.
projectlist.xml
A file created automatically when the project is saved.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Do not change or delete workspace configuration or project using an application such as Windows�
Explorer.
If a data name is changed or deleted using an application such as Windows� Explorer and projects
5
without containing actual data may remain in a project list of the function such as opening a project.
Those faulty projects can be deleted from the project list by selecting [Project] [Delete].
EDITING PROGRAMS
For copying GX Works2 project on Windows� Explorer, select either following operation to copy the
project without breaking the configuration of workspace and project.
� Copy the entire save destination folder ( above). � Copy the workspace name folder and "workspacelist.xml".
6
SETTING PARAMETERS
When "workspacelist.xml" ( above) or "projectlist.xml" ( above) does not exist in the folder by
performing the copy operation other than above, the copied workspaces/projects are not displayed in
"Workspace/Project List" on the Open screen.
However, note that the project can be opened forcibly by selecting "All Folders" for "Display" on the
Open screen and displaying all folders. When a file other than "workspacelist.xml" or "projectlist.xml" is missing, the project may not be
7
opened.
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
Restrictions
Opening a project forcibly by selecting "All Folders"
The following operations cannot be performed.
� Register, Restore, and Verify functions of project revision history
8
� Security user management
� Automatic project save
However, the above restrictions are invalidated by selecting [Project] [Save As], and saving the project.
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
4.1.1 Workspace format
4 - 3
4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
4.1.2 Single file format
The single file format is a format to handle project files as a single file. Projects are managed without being aware of the folder configuration and the file configuration by saving projects in the single file format. Operations such as changing project names, copying and pasting projects, and sending and receiving data, can easily be performed on Explorer.
<Single file format project (*.gxw)>
When using MELSOFT Navigator Projects saved in the single file format cannot be used in MELSOFT Navigator. Save projects in the workspace format.
4 - 4
4.1.2 Single file format
4.1 GX Works2 Project Management
4.1.3 Project
1
OVERVIEW
Project contents displayed on the Project view in tree format are as shown below.
Contents displayed on the view differs according to the types of programmable controller and project.
For (Simple), (Structured), and (Intelligent) indicated in the reference destinations, refer to the following
manuals respectively:
2
(Simple) ... GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project)
(Structured) ... GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Structured Project)
(Intelligent) ... GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Intelligent Function Module)
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
The following are examples for QCPU (Q mode).
<Simple project (without labels)>
Set various parameters. *4
3
*1
Make settings for the intelligent function modules. (Intelligent)
Set global device comments. *5
*2
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
Set an execution type of each program. *6
4
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Create programs.*7 (Simple)
Set local device comments. *5
Make settings for device memory. *8
*3
Set device initial values. *9
5
*1 : For FXCPU, "Special Module (Intelligent Function Module)" is displayed.
EDITING PROGRAMS
*2 : For FXCPU, execution types are not categorized. The only one category 'Execution Program' is displayed.
*3 : For FXCPU, this item is not displayed.
*4 : Chapter 6
*5 : Chapter 9
*6 : Section 6.1.1
6
*7 : For FXCPU, either of one ladder or one SFC can be created because FXCPU has only one execution program.
*8 : Chapter 7
*9 : Chapter 8
SETTING PARAMETERS
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
4.1.3 Project
4 - 5
4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
<Simple project (with labels)> *1
*2 *3
Set various parameters. *5
Make settings for the intelligent function modules. Set global device comments. *6 Set global labels. (Simple)
(Intelligent)
Set an execution type of each program. *7
Create programs.*8 (Simple)
Set local device comments. *6
Make settings for device memory. *9
*4
Set device initial values. *10
*1 : For FXCPU, "Special Module (Intelligent Function Module)" is displayed. *2 : For FXCPU, execution types are not categorized. The only one category 'Execution Program' is displayed. *3 : For FXCPU, Simple project (with labels), the 'Execution Program' can be divided into multiple programs. *4 : For FXCPU, this item is not displayed. *5 : Chapter 6 *6 : Chapter 9 *7 : Section 6.1.1 *8 : For FXCPU, program can be created only by Ladder Diagram. *9 : Chapter 7 *10 : Chapter 8
4 - 6
4.1.3 Project
4.1 GX Works2 Project Management
1
<Structured project> Set various parameters. *4
*1
Make settings for the intelligent function modules. (Intelligent)
Set global device comments. *5
Set global labels. (Structured)
*2
OVERVIEW
2
Set an execution type of each program. *6
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
3
Create programs. (Structured)
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
Set local device comments. *5
Make settings for device memory. *7
*3
Set device initial values. *8
4
*1 : For FXCPU, "Special Module (Intelligent Function Module)" is displayed.
*2 : For FXCPU, execution types are not categorized. The only one category 'Execution Program' is displayed.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
*3 : For FXCPU, this item is not displayed.
*4 : Chapter 6
*5 : Chapter 9
*6 : Section 6.1.1
*7 : Chapter 7
5
*8 : Chapter 8
EDITING PROGRAMS
6
SETTING PARAMETERS
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
4.1.3 Project
4 - 7
4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Program Setting On the Project view, an execution type of a program can be set by right-clicking the name of the program whose execution type is to be changed and selecting [Register Program] [Initial]/[Scan]/[Standby]/[Fixed Scan]/[Low Speed] from the shortcut menu, or dragging and dropping it. The execution type set on the Project view is applied to the program setting of the PLC parameter. (Program setting in PLC parameter Section 6.1.1)
Example) Set the execution type of MAIN to 'Scan Program' with the drag-and-drop operation.
<Project view>
<Setting screen for PLC parameter>
Drag & drop
The setting made in the Project view is applied.
4 - 8
4.1.3 Project
4.2 Project Operations
4.2 Project Operations
1
This section explains basic operations of GX Works2 such as creating, opening, and saving projects.
OVERVIEW
4.2.1 Creating projects
Configure the settings to create a new project.
Screen display
Select [Project] [New] ( ).
2
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
3
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
4
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Operating procedure
5
� Set the items on the screen.
Series
Item
Type
Project Type
Use Label Language
Description
EDITING PROGRAMS
Select the programmable controller series for the project.
Select the programmable controller type (programmable controller CPU model) used for the
project.
When a programmable controller type which is not supported by GX Works2 but is supported by GX Developer is selected, start GX Developer and create a new project. For a procedure
6
to use unsupported programmable controller type, refer to Appendix 14.
Select the type of the project to be created. Select "Simple Project" or "Structured Project".
Select this to create a project using labels when "Simple Project" is selected.
Select the language for the program data to be created when creating a new project.
SETTING PARAMETERS
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
4.2.1 Creating projects
4 - 9
4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Settings for when a new project cannot be created Set the access authority for a login user to the following folders to which the access authority has not been set. � The folder to which GX Works2 is installed. Example) C:\Program Files\MELSOFT � C:\Users\(login user name)\AppData\Local\MITSUBISHI\SWnDN-GPPW2 � The TEMP folder set by environment variable. Example) C:\Users\(login user name)\AppData\Local\Temp C:\Documents and Settings\(login user name)\Local Settings\Temp
If the access authority cannot be changed, right-click the GX Works2 program and select [Run as administrator]. To activate the program from the shortcut menu, open the property of the shortcut menu and select "Run this program as an administrator" under "Privilege Level" on the <<Compatibility>> tab. Changing data such as workspace name after creating a new project Do not change the storage location and names of folders/files of a created workspace/project using an application such as Windows� Explorer. For details of workspace/project configuration, refer to Section 4.1.1. Common pointer number setting for projects with labels When a project with labels is created, the last half of the device range of pointer (P) is set for "Common Pointer No." on the <<PLC System>> tab of PLC parameter. This range is set as a pointer range for the "Device/Label AutomaticAssign Setting" function. For details of the "Device/Label Automatic-Assign Setting" function, refer to the following manuals. GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project) GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Structured Project) Connection destination When creating a new project, the connection destination is set to the route set for "Current Connection" in the previously-edited project. Review the connection destination setting to change the previously-edited project and the connection destination. When creating a new project after installing GX Works2 for the first time, the setting is set to access the programmable controller CPU directly. Creating a new SFC project with FXCPU When 'SFC' is selected in "Language" with FXCPU, the Block Information Setting screen is displayed. When an SFC project is created with FXCPU, a ladder program needs to be created using ladder blocks to start up an initial step of the SFC program. Select "Ladder Block" in "Block Type", and create a startup ladder program using ladder blocks.
4 - 10
4.2.1 Creating projects
4.2 Project Operations
Creating new projects with data read from programmable controller CPU or 1
intelligent function module (New project creation with data read from
programmable controller CPU)
OVERVIEW
A new project can be created with data read from a programmable controller CPU or an intelligent
function module when the Read from PLC function is executed without creating a new project.
When a programmable controller type which is not supported by GX Works2 but is supported by GX Developer is selected, start GX Developer and create a new project. For a procedure to use
2
unsupported programmable controller types, refer to Appendix 14.
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Operating procedure
1. Start GX Works2 and select [Online] [Read from PLC].
The PLC Series Selection screen is displayed.
3
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
2. Set the item on the screen.
4
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Item PLC Series
Description Select the programmable controller series from which data are read.
3. Click the
button.
The Transfer Setup screen is displayed.
5
4. Set a communication route to access to the programmable controller CPU.
For the method for setting a connection destination, refer to Chapter 14. The Online Data Operation screen is displayed when the setting of connection destination is completed.
EDITING PROGRAMS
5. Execute the Read from PLC function on the Online Data Operation screen.
6
For the method for executing the Read from PLC function on the Online Data Operation screen, refer to Section 15.1.
SETTING PARAMETERS
Considerations when creating a new project with data read from programmable controller CPU When parameters are not read from the programmable controller CPU with data to create a new project, default
7
parameters are set.
Check the parameter setting.
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
Creating a new project with data read from intelligent function module For the function to create a new project with data read from programmable controller CPU, when an intelligent function
module is mounted on the same base unit as the connected programmable controller CPU, the project data are created
according to the mounted module configuration. Thus, the data of intelligent function modules whose parameters are
not written to the programmable controller CPU are also created.
This function is not supported by FXCPU. Creating a new project with data read from Redundant CPU
8
Data cannot be read from a Redundant CPU by specifying a system, such as "Control System", "Standby System",
"System A", or "System B" for "Target System" of redundant operation.
When reading data from the Redundant CPU by specifying the system, read data after creating a project.
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
4.2.1 Creating projects
4 - 11
4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
4.2.2 Opening existing projects
Read a project saved on a hard disk of personal computer.
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
Screen display
Select [Project] [Open] ( ).
< Opening a project in the workspace format >
< Opening a project in the single file format >
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Item Workspace Location
Workspace/Project List
Display
Workspace Name Project Name Title
Description
Enter the folder (drive/path) where the workspace is saved. The folder can be selected on the Browse For Folder screen by clicking the
button.
Select the workspace or project. The display is switched to the project list by double-clicking "Workspace".
Select this to display folders for GX Works2 projects only, folders for GX Developer projects only, or all folders. By selecting "All Folders" also displays workspace folders and project folders copied/moved by the application such as Windows� Explorer.
Display the selected workspace name.
Display the selected project name.
Display the title of the selected project.
2. Click the
button.
The specified project is displayed. When the GX Developer project is specified, GX Developer starts automatically and the project is displayed.
4 - 12
4.2.2 Opening existing projects
Screen button
Displays the Browse For Folder screen.
Switches to the Open screen in the single file format.
Switches to the Open screen in the workspace format.
4.2 Project Operations
1
2
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
Changing data such as workspace name
Do not change the storage location and names of folders/files of a created workspace/project using an application such
as Windows� Explorer. For details of workspace/project configuration, refer to Section 4.1.1.
3
Opening Structured projects When a Structured project is opened in later version of GX Works2 than the one used for saving the project, the Library Update Confirmation screen may be displayed. To modify the project and update the new instructions and/or application functions, select the corresponding check box(es).
All programs need to be compiled when instructions or application
4
functions are updated.
Compiling all programs changes the device assignment to labels.
Therefore, device values set before the program change remain on the
device-assigned labels.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Perform the following operations for a precautionary measure.
� For QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU
After writing data to the programmable controller CPU, reset the
programmable controller CPU, clear all device memories including latches, clear all file registers, and switch the programmable
5
controller CPU to RUN.
� For FXCPU After writing data to the programmable controller CPU, clear device memory using the PLC memory clear function,
EDITING PROGRAMS
and switch the programmable controller CPU to RUN.
(Section 20.4)
For the considerations for compiling all programs, refer to the following manuals.
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project)/(Structured Project) Opening projects being edited by other users
6
The project being edited can be opened by other users as a read-only project. Note that the following functions cannot
be used.
SETTING PARAMETERS
� Saving projects
� Project revision history
� Succeeding project revision when saving projects with a specific name
� Change PLC type function
� Security function Opening projects created in other languages
7
Characters in a project created in other languages may get garbled when it is opened.
Open screen
� The Open screen with the initial setting opens a project in the single file format.
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
Switch the screen by clicking the
button to open the existing project in the workspace
format.
� A programmable controller type and a title are not displayed on the Open screen in the single file format. � If the file save destination path is long, the "Look in" field may be left blank when opening a project in the single file
8
format. Even with the blank field, the selected folder/file can be opened normally.
Projects saved on the network drive or the removal storage device Do not open the project directly. Open it after saving it to the hard disk of the personal computer.
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
4.2.2 Opening existing projects
4 - 13
4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
4.2.3 Saving projects
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
Save a project on a personal computer or another data storage device. When saving a project, an iQ AppPortal information file can be output by setting the Project Property. (Section 4.3.6)
Saving projects under the specified name
Save the open project under the specified name.
Screen display
Select [Project] [Save As].
< Saving a project in the workspace format >
< Saving a project in the single file format >
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Item
Description
Save Location
Enter the folder (drive/path) where the workspace is saved. The folder can be selected in the Browse For Folder screen by clicking the
button.
Workspace/Project List
Select the workspace or project. The display is switched to the project list by double-clicking "Workspace".
Workspace Name
Enter the workspace name.
Project Name
Enter the project name.
Title
Enter the title of the project.
Include revisions*1 Include security*1
Select this to succeed and save the project revision information. (Section 4.6)
Select this to succeed and save the security information of the project. (Section 4.10)
*1 : This setting can be set only when saving the already existing project with another name.
2. Click the
button.
The project is saved in the specified folder under the specified workspace name, project name, and title.
4 - 14
4.2.3 Saving projects
Screen button
Displays the Browse For Folder screen.
Switches to the Save As screen in the single file format.
Switches to the Save As screen in the workspace format.
4.2 Project Operations
1
2
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
When saved workspace exists
When the saved workspace or project exists, a folder to which the workspace is saved can be specified from
"Workspace/Project List". Number of characters used for workspace name, project name, and title
3
The total number of characters used for the path name of the folder to which the project is saved, workspace name, and
project name should not exceed 200 characters.
A title can be entered within 128 characters.
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
Saving a project contains Structured Ladder programs
If multiple Structured Ladder editors are opened, the project may not be able to be saved.
In this case, start another GX Works2 and save the project by copying all data to the newly-created project.
(Section 4.3.2 "Copying/pasting data in projects") Save As screen
4
� The Save As screen with the initial setting saves a project in the single file format.
Switch the screen by clicking the
button to save the project in the workspace format.
� If the file save destination path is long, the "Save in" field may be left blank when saving a project in the single file format. Even with the blank field, the selected folder/file can be saved normally.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Saving projects
5
Overwrite and save the project being edited.
EDITING PROGRAMS
Operating procedure
� Select [Project] [Save] ( )
The data to be saved is overwritten on the existing project data.
6
SETTING PARAMETERS
Registering project revision when overwriting By setting the option, the Revision Entry screen for registering the project revision is displayed when overwriting the project.
To display the Revision Entry screen when overwriting the project, select [Tool] [Options] "Project" and then select "Revision is Registered when Save Project" in "Change History". In addition, the revision title can be
7
automatically set when overwriting by selecting "Automatically set revision titles".
(For details of project revision history Section 4.6)
Compilation status is not saved by overwriting data Performing compilation only and overwriting the project, and then opening the project again may cause the project to be in an uncompiled status. In this case, overwrite the uncompiled project without performing compilation to save the compilation status normally.
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
4.2.3 Saving projects
4 - 15
4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
4.2.4
Saving projects with compression and decompressing projects
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
Save projects with compression, and decompress projects saved with compression. Files can be saved with their sizes reduced by compressing the project. Files can also be saved by separating them in specific sizes. These functions produce easier project data passing. These functions are not compatible with commercially available file compression and decompression tools.
Saving projects with compression
Save a desired project with compression.
Screen display
Select [Project] [Compress/Unpack] [Compress].
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Item Choose a Workspace to Compress
Workspace Location
Workspace/Project List Workspace Name Project Name Choose a Destination Folder
Compressed File Name
Include revisions Split into volumes of the following size
Description
Enter the folder (drive/path) where the workspace is saved. The folder can be selected in the Browse For Folder screen by clicking the
button.
Select the workspace and project. Display the selected workspace name. Display the selected project name.
Enter the folder where the compressed file is saved, and the compressed file name. The compressed file name can be specified in the Compressed File Name screen
by clicking the
button.
Select this to succeed and save the project revision information. (Section 4.6)
Select this to save data in multiple compressed files. Specify the split size in the range from 1 to 999MB.
4 - 16
4.2.4 Saving projects with compression and decompressing projects
4.2 Project Operations
2. Click the
button.
1
The compressed project file (*.gwz) is saved in the specified folder.
OVERVIEW
Decompressing projects saved with compression
Decompress a project saved with compression.
2
Screen display
Select [Project] [Compress/Unpack] [Unpack].
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
3
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
4
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Operating procedure
5
1. Set the items on the screen.
EDITING PROGRAMS
Item Choose a File to Unpack
Compressed File Name
Choose a Destination Folder
Workspace Location
Workspace/Project List Workspace Name Project Name
Description
Enter the folder (drive/path) in which the compressed file to be decompressed is saved,
and the compressed file name.
6
The compressed file name can be specified in the Compressed File Name screen by
clicking the
button.
SETTING PARAMETERS
Enter the folder (drive/path) to which the project to be decompressed is saved.
The folder can be selected in the Browse For Folder screen by clicking the
button.
Select the workspace and project.
7
Enter the name of the workspace to which the decompressed project is saved.
Enter the name of the project to which the decompressed project is saved.
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
2. Click the
button.
The compressed project file is decompressed and saved in the specified folder.
Screen button
8
Decompresses a compressed project file and opens the project.
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
4.2.4 Saving projects with compression and decompressing projects
4 - 17
4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Decompressing compressed files A compressed file can also be decompressed on the Unpack screen which is displayed by double-clicking the compressed file (*.gwz) on Windows� Explorer.
Names of divided compressed files When a project is saved in divided compressed files, a number is automatically added after the extension in each name of the second or later compressed files as shown below.
Name of the first file Name of the second file Name of the third file Name of the fourth file Decompressing divided compressed files Select the first file (*.gwz) when decompressing a series of divided compressed files. To be decompressed, all of a series of divided files must be in the same folder.
4 - 18
4.2.4 Saving projects with compression and decompressing projects
4.2 Project Operations
4.2.5 Deleting projects
1
OVERVIEW
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
Delete a project saved on a personal computer or another data storage device.
Operating procedure
2
1. Select [Project] [Delete].
The Delete Project screen is displayed.
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
2. Select the project to be deleted.
3. Click the
button.
3
The selected project is deleted.
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
4
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
5
Deleting projects
EDITING PROGRAMS
� Once a project is deleted, it cannot be restored again.
� The open project cannot be deleted. Delete the project after closing it.
� Projects that can be deleted using this function are the projects saved in the workspace format only. Delete projects saved in the single file format using Windows� Explorer.
iQ AppPortal information file The iQ AppPortal information file (*.iqap) is not deleted even when deleting a project. Delete it by using Windows�
6
Explorer.
SETTING PARAMETERS
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
4.2.5 Deleting projects
4 - 19
4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
4.2.6 Closing projects
Close an open project.
Operating procedure
� Select [Project] [Close].
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
4.2.7 Verifying project data
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
Verify data of an open project against data of another project. Verification can be performed only when the programmable controller types and project types are the same. *1 This function is used to compare the contents of two projects or to locate program changes made in projects. To verify data against data on the programmable controller CPU, use the Verify with PLC function. (Section 15.2) The following data can be selected as verification targets for the project verification. � Programs � Parameters � Intelligent function module parameters (initial setting/auto refresh)*2 � Device comments � Device memory data � QD75/LD75 positioning module*2
*1 : For Q series, data can be verified when the type of two projects are the same. For L series, data can be verified when the type of two projects are the same.
*2 : Not supported by FXCPU.
Screen display
Select [Project] [Verify].
4 - 20
4.2.6 Closing projects
4.2 Project Operations
Operating procedure
1
1. Click the
button to set the verify destination project.
OVERVIEW
Verify Destination Project
Item Workspace Location
Workspace Name
Project Name Title
Description
Display the path to the workspace of the verify destination.
Display the workspace name of the verify destination.
This field will be blank when a project in the single file format is
2
specified for the verify destination project.
Display the project name of the verify destination.
Display the project title of the verify destination.
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
2. Set the items on the screen.
Item
Description
3
<<File Selection>>
Verify Source Verify
Display project data of verify source (data being edited). Selects the data in the project data list.
Display project data of verify destination (saved project data).
Destination Selects the data in the project data list.
Select SFC blocks in the SFC Block list.
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
4
<<SFC Block Selection>>*1,*2
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Select the parameter verification level.
<<Parameter>>*2
Verifying parameters
5
EDITING PROGRAMS
*1 : Simple projects only *2 : Not supported by FXCPU.
3. Click the
button.
6
The verification result is displayed on the Verify Result screen.
Checking verification result details
SETTING PARAMETERS
Screen button
Selects all the data displayed in the project data list.
7
Cancels the selection status of all the data selected in the project data list.
Updates the data displayed in the project data list.
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
4.2.7 Verifying project data
4 - 21
4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Verifying programs The verification function verifies the data created by the compilation. If the program is edited after the compilation, compile the program again before performing the verification.
Data names of verification target data When multiple data are selected for verification, verification is performed between the source and destination data with the same name. However, device comments are verified only when their data names are same. When only one source program is verified against one destination program, verification can be performed even with different names.
Security status of project Projects to which the security is set can be verified when both verify source data and verify destination data are not read-protected.
Verifying projects between different programmable controller types When the number of steps are different between the projects that have the same instructions, the verification results do not match. For counting the number of steps required for instructions, refer to the programming manual of each programmable controller CPU.
Verifying intelligent function module parameters (initial setting/auto refresh) Among modules without initial setting such as QD75/LD75 positioning modules, serial communication/modem interface modules, and AS-i master modules, only modules in which the auto refresh is set are the verification targets.
Verifying QD75/LD75 positioning modules One module each for verify source and verify destination can be selected. The following data can be selected as verification targets. � Parameter � Servo parameter (For QD75M/MH only) � Positioning data (Except for positioning comments and M code comments) � Block start data
4 - 22
4.2.7 Verifying project data
Verifying parameters
The verification level can be selected when verifying parameters.
4.2 Project Operations
1
OVERVIEW
2
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
The following table shows the verification details for each setting item.
Item User Setting Area Only All Area
Description Verify only the parameter area set by the user. Verify all the area including the parameter area set by the system.
Mismatch in the system setting area
3
When a mismatch is detected in the parameter area set by the system in the verification set to "All
Area", either of the following messages is displayed.
Take corrective action according to the message.
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
Message
Corrective action
A mismatch is detected in other than user setting area.
Write the parameters, having been written to the programmable controller CPU, to the programmable controller again.
4
When a mismatch is detected on the block number AFFF, perform the following
The header information of the
operation to reset the area which is set by the system.
parameter blocks is inconsistent.
� Select Project view Parameter Network Parameter Ethernet/CC IE/
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
MELSECNET. Click the
button on the displayed MELSECNET/CC IE/
Ethernet Module Configuration screen and write the parameters to the
programmable controller CPU.
This parameter block can't analyze.
Versions of GX Works2, GX Developer, or GX IEC Developer used to create the projects differ between the verify source and the verify destination.
5
The programmable controller CPU operation is not affected.
EDITING PROGRAMS
6
SETTING PARAMETERS
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
4.2.7 Verifying project data
4 - 23
4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Checking verification result details
Details of mismatched data can be checked on the <<Verify Result List>> tab on the Verify Result screen. Details of program verification result can be checked for ladder programs only.
Operating procedure
1. Double-click the row of the data to display the details of the Verify Result screen.
The following are screens of project with labels.
4 - 24
4.2.7 Verifying project data
4.2 Project Operations
2. Set the item on the screen.
1
Item
Description
OVERVIEW
Do not move cursor at [Next Select this to exclude a verification result which is unnecessary to find and in which
Unmatch]/[Previous Unmatch] devices are only reassigned to other devices when a program is compiled.
after changing background
When only devices automatically assigned to labels mismatch, the background color of
color when devices are within the verification result is changed to a different color from other rows.
the automatic-assign range for the row shows devices
The cursor is not placed when searching for the result using the [Next Unmatch] (
)/
2
unmatched*1, *2
[Previous Unmatch] ( ) function.
*1 : For projects with labels only *2 : For program files
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
3. Select [Find/Replace] [Next Unmatch] ( )/[Previous Unmatch] ( ).
The cursor can only be placed on the rows with mismatches.
3
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
Detail Verify Result tabs
� The tab order can be changed by dragging and dropping <<Detail Verify Result>> tabs.
� The screen returns from the <<Detail Verify Result>> tab to the <<Verify Result List>> tab by selecting [View]
[Return to Result List] ( ).
� The selected <<Detail Verify Result>> tab can be closed by selecting [View] [Close Detail Result] ( )/[Close All
4
Detail Result] ( ).
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Verifying device memory data Device memory data are verified with the actual values. Even when the display formats of data are different on the device memory editor, the verification result on the same value will be a match. For FXCPU, the verification result is as follows:
� a result of internal relay (M) verification includes special device M. � a result of data register (D) verification includes file register and special device D.
5
Devices to which a value is not set on the device memory editor Devices to which a value is not set on the device memory editor are verified as a value 0. Therefore, if 'device memory data to which devices are not set' and 'device memory data to which devices are entered without setting device values' are verified, the verification result will be a match.
< Device memory data to which devices are not set >
< Device memory data without setting device values >
EDITING PROGRAMS
6
Verify
< Verification result >
SETTING PARAMETERS
Direct input (DX) and direct output (DY)
When verifying device comments or device memory data, check the verification result with input (X)/output (Y) for direct input (DX)/direct output (DY).
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
Number of verification results displayed If the number of mismatches exceeds 1,000, up to 1,000 mismatch results are displayed and verification is suspended
after that.
For a ladder program of program (program file) and POU, since the function determines the difference of the number of
lines between the verify source and the verify target in the list format as a mismatch, the verification is canceled in the
middle of the process even before reaching 1,000 mismatches and the rest of the program is determined as a
mismatch. The remaining part needs to be verified again after modifying the mismatched data.
Copying verification results
8
Verification results can be copied and pasted to a text file. Select rows of verification result to be copied, and select
[Edit] [Copy].
The copied data are pasted on a text file as data separated by tabs.
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
4.2.7 Verifying project data
4 - 25
4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Jumping from verification result When "Enable calling function block and using inline ST" is selected under [Tool] [Options] "Compile" "Basic Setting", function block program items with no difference may be indicated as a mismatch on the Verify Result screen. In this case, check the mismatch part by any of the following methods. � Checking labels/devices set to input/output variables of function block Open the source program from which function blocks are called, and check labels/devices. � Checking mismatch parts with the program verification result Select items as shown below to verify programs.
Jumping from verification result of intelligent function module parameter (initial setting/auto refresh) When different modes are set to the verify destination and the verify source for auto refresh of temperature control module, jumping to verification result is not performed. For setting the auto refresh of temperature control module, refer to the following manual. GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Intelligent Function Module)
Block password to which the execution program protection setting is enabled In a verification result, whether program files are matched or mismatched cannot be checked on the <<Detail Verify Result>> tab but on the <<Verify Result List>> tab. To check the verification result of program files on the <<Detail Verify Result>> tab, refer to the following section.
(Section 4.12.4)
Checking method when verify source data are modified
Updated verify source data are displayed in the verification result. Therefore, the verification result of updated verify source data can be checked without executing the verification function again when mismatched data is modified. Even when a data name of verify source is changed, the changed data name is displayed in the verification result.
Operating procedure
1. Modify the verify source data.
2. Open the <<Verify Result List>> tab or the <<Detail Verify Result>> tab on the Verify
Result screen.
3. Double-click the modified data on the <<Verify Result List>> tab or the <<Detail
Verify Result>> tab.
The updated data is displayed in the verification result.
4 - 26
4.2.7 Verifying project data
Writing verification results to CSV files
Output data displayed on the Verify Result screen to a CSV file.
Operating procedure
1. Select [Edit] [Write to CSV File] ( ).
The Write to CSV File screen is displayed.
4.2 Project Operations
1
2
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
3
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
4
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
2. Enter a file name.
3. Click the
button.
5
The verification results are saved on a personal computer.
EDITING PROGRAMS
Formatting CSV file
The saved CSV file is displayed as shown below when it is opened by Excel. <Display of the Verify Result screen>
6
SETTING PARAMETERS
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
7
<CSV file>
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
4.2.7 Verifying project data
4 - 27
4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
4.2.8 Changing programmable controller type of projects
*1
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
Change the programmable controller type of a project being edited.
*1 : CC IE Field head module only
Screen display
Select [Project] [Change PLC Type].
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Item PLC Series PLC Type
Description Select the programmable controller series after change. Select the programmable controller type after change.
2. Click the
button.
The confirmation message is displayed. Click the
button to execute the function.
4 - 28
4.2.8 Changing programmable controller type of projects
4.2 Project Operations
1
Changing programmable controller type of projects which contain intelligent function modules (For QCPU (Q
OVERVIEW
mode)/LCPU/CC IE Field head module)
Basically intelligent function modules are deleted after the programmable controller series is changed, but certain
intelligent modules can be changed to those which are applicable to the programmable controller series after change.
For details of the shift of models of intelligent function modules associated with change of programmable controller
series, refer to the following section. Changing intelligent function modules between programmable controller series
2
To change the model of an intelligent function module, select a module name in "Module Name After Change" on the following screen displayed at changing the programmable controller type. To delete all intelligent function modules, select "Delete all after changing intelligent function module".
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
3
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
4
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Changing programmable controller type of projects which contain intelligent function modules (For FXCPU) After changing the programmable controller series, intelligent function module data is deleted.
List of modifications (For QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU/CC IE Field head module)
After the Change PLC Type function is completed, the following List of Modifications screen is displayed, and the
5
changes of the program and parameters can be checked.
The items in the following screen can be copied and pasted to the text file using the + and + keys.
EDITING PROGRAMS
6
SETTING PARAMETERS
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
4.2.8 Changing programmable controller type of projects
4 - 29
4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Restrictions on the Change PLC Type function execution For the restrictions on the Change PLC Type function execution for each programmable controller series, refer to Appendix 10.
Programs which use devices/labels for indexes in structure array labels After changing the programmable controller type from/to Universal model QCPU/LCPU, the program operation may be changed. Review the program where over 65,536 array elements are accessed.
Interruption of processing If the project of change source includes the data which is neither supported nor able to be modified by any editing operations with the project of the programmable controller type after change, the processing is interrupted. If this happens, modify the data first to correspond with the programmable controller type after change, and then execute the Change PLC Type function.
Execution failure of the Change PLC Type function The Change PLC Type function cannot be executed in the following cases: � During the execution of the monitoring function such as program monitoring and device/buffer memory batch monitoring. � Security is set for the open project and the user does not belong to the 'Administrators' group. � During the execution of the simulation function.
Data before changing the programmable controller type Restoring the data, after executing the Change PLC Type function, to the data before change is not possible. Execute the function after saving the project data. In addition, note that the project is in the unsaved status after the function execution.
Unsupported instructions, devices outside the range, and unsupported index settings created with project with labels The unsupported instructions, devices outside the range, and unsupported index settings created with the project with labels are not converted when performing PLC type change function regardless of its program language. After performing PLC type change, perform compilation and review the corresponding error location in the program.
4 - 30
4.2.8 Changing programmable controller type of projects
4.2 Project Operations
Changing intelligent function modules between programmable controller
1
series
OVERVIEW
Basically intelligent function modules are deleted after changing the programmable controller series,
but a part of intelligent modules can be changed to those which are applicable to the programmable
controller series after change.
The following table shows modules which can be changed.
2
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Module type
QCPU (Q mode)
Module name LCPU/CC IE Field head module
Q64AD Q68ADV Q68ADI Q64ADH
L60AD4
Analog
Q68ADV Q68ADI Q64ADH
L60ADVL8
3
L60ADIL8
L60AD4-2GH
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
Temperature control
Q62DAN Q64DAN Q68DAVN Q68DAIN Q64DAH
Q64TCTTN
Q64TCTTBWN
Q64TCRTN
L60DA4
L60TCTT4
4
L60TCTT4BW
L60TCRT4
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Q64TCRTBWN
L60TCRT4BW
Counter
QD62 QD62D
LD62 LD62D
QD75/LD75 positioning
QD75P1 QD75P2 QD75P4 QD75P1N QD75P2N QD75P4N QD75D1 QD75D2 QD75D4 QD75D1N QD75D2N QD75D4N
5
LD75P1 LD75P2 LD75P4 LD75D1 LD75D2 LD75D4
6
EDITING PROGRAMS
Serial communication/ Modem interface
QJ71C24N QJ71C24N-R2
LJ71C24 LJ71C24-R2
SETTING PARAMETERS
QD77MS2
LD77MS2
Simple motion
QD77MS4
LD77MS4
QD77MS16
LD77MS16
AnyWireASLINK interface
QJ51AW12AL
LJ51AW12AL
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
4.2.8 Changing programmable controller type of projects
4 - 31
4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Detailed replacement method screen for changing CPU to Universal model QCPU
In GX Works2 with the installed QnH -> QnU Conversion Support Tool, the methods for replacing instructions and parameters can be displayed from the List of Modifications screen when the programmable controller type is changed from Basic model QCPU or High Performance model QCPU to Universal model QCPU.
Operating procedure
1. Click the
button.
2. Specify the project before changing the
programmable controller type, and click
the
button.
The overview of the replacement method regarding instructions and parameters which are changed by the PLC type change function can be checked on the displayed Detailed replacement method screen. The Web browser is activated by clicking the link to check details of settings. Adobe� Reader� is required to view the detailed information.
3. Click the
button to
search the instruction/device to be replaced.
4 - 32
4.2.8 Changing programmable controller type of projects
4. Replace the instruction/device by following the
instruction on the <<Replacing Procedure>> tab.
4.2 Project Operations
1
2
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
3
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
4
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
5
EDITING PROGRAMS
6
SETTING PARAMETERS
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
4.2.8 Changing programmable controller type of projects
4 - 33
4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
4.3 Operations of Programmable Controller CPU Data
This section explains how to operate each data in a project.
4.3.1 Adding new data to project
Q CPU L CPU ReFmXote HFeXad FX
Add new data to a project. The data that can be added differs according to the type of programmable controller or project.
Screen display
Select [Project] [Object] [New].
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Item
Description
Data Type
Select the type of the data to be added.
Data Name
Enter the name of the data to be created.
Program Language
Select the programming language for creating programs. Selection is allowed only when the data type is any of the following:
� Program (program block), Function*1 or Function block*2.
Result Type*1
Set the data type of return value of the function.
Inherent Property*1
This item can be set when a function or function block is selected. For details of check box items, refer to the following manual. GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Structured Project)
*1 : For Structured projects only *2 : For Simple projects (with labels) and Structured projects only
4 - 34
4.3.1 Adding new data to project
4.3 Operations of Programmable Controller CPU Data
2. Click the
button.
1
The editing screen for the created data is displayed.
OVERVIEW
Number of characters for a data name
The numbers of characters shown in the following table can be used for data names according to the selectable data type.
2
However, some operators such as "-" and "*", and some instruction names such as "MOV", cannot be used. For details
of the characters which cannot be use for data names, refer to Appendix 9.
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Data type name
Number of characters
Program (program file), local device comment, device memory, and device initial value
8 characters
Other data types
32 characters
3
Maximum numbers of data types that can be created The table below indicates the maximum numbers of data types that can be created.
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
Data type name
Maximum number
Connection destination
128
SFC block in Simple project*1
320 (128 for Q00UJ/Q00U/Q01U/Q02U, 25 for FXCPU)
Program in FXCPU Simple project (with labels)
64
4
Other data (structures, global labels, etc.)
800
*1 : SFC of Simple projects (with labels) is not supported by FXCPU.
FXCPU For FXCPU, the data of device initial values cannot be created.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
5
EDITING PROGRAMS
6
SETTING PARAMETERS
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
4.3.1 Adding new data to project
4 - 35
4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
4.3.2 Copying/pasting data in projects
Utilize data of a project being edited or other projects.
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
Operating procedure
1. Select a data name to be copied on the Project view.
2. Select [Project] [Object] [Copy].
The selected data name is copied.
3. Select a folder to paste the data name on the Project view.
4. Select [Project] [Object] [Paste].
If the same data name exists in the folder where the data is to be pasted or when the data name cannot be used for the project of the folder where the data is to be pasted because of the different project languages, the Data Paste screen is displayed.
Select a folder
5. Enter a new name in the "Data Name After Paste" field, and click the
button.
The data name is pasted.
4 - 36
4.3.2 Copying/pasting data in projects
4.3 Operations of Programmable Controller CPU Data
1
Copying/pasting data
OVERVIEW
� Data between different projects can be copied and pasted only when their programmable controller types and project
types are the same.*1
*1 : For Q series, data can be copied/pasted when the type of two projects are the same. For L series, data can be copied/pasted when the type of two projects are the same.
� Multiple data can be copied by holding down the or key and selecting the data. � Data can be copied/pasted by right-clicking data to be copied/folder to be pasted and selecting [Copy]/[Paste] from
2
the shortcut menu, or by dragging and dropping the data from the data to be copied to the folder to be pasted.
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
� The program is in an uncompiled status after data are pasted. Compile the program again.
� For projects with security, only users whose access level is 'Administrators' can copy/paste data.
� Copying and pasting PLC parameter or network parameter only are not possible. If they are copied individually, the whole parameter files are copied and the files in the folder where the data is to be pasted are overwritten.
� Pasting of global label data is canceled when the maximum number of labels described below is exceeded. Adjust
the number of global labels in the copy destination and the copy source, and retry pasting data. � Global label (within a project): 20480
3
� Global label (within a user library): 20480
� Data locked with a block password cannot be copied. To copy the data, unlock the block password first.
Copying/pasting tasks in Structured project When tasks are pasted, the number of programs that can be set on the Task Setting screen may be exceeded. Compile the program and delete the unnecessary programs.
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
4
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
5
EDITING PROGRAMS
6
SETTING PARAMETERS
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
4.3.2 Copying/pasting data in projects
4 - 37
4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
4.3.3 Changing project data names
Change the data name of an open project.
Q CPU L CPU ReFmXote HFeXad FX
Operating procedure
1. Select the data name to be changed on the Project view.
2. Select [Project] [Object] [Rename].
3. Change the data name.
4. Press the key.
The selected data name is changed.
4.3.4 Deleting project data
Delete data in an open project.
Q CPU L CPU ReFmXote HFeXad FX
Operating procedure
1. Select the data name to be deleted on the Project view.
2. Select [Project] [Object] [Delete].
The selected data is deleted.
Deleting data � Multiple data can be selected and deleted. � When data under the POU are deleted, data under the Program Setting are deleted simultaneously.
4 - 38
4.3.3 Changing project data names
4.3 Operations of Programmable Controller CPU Data
4.3.5 Merging data
1
OVERVIEW
Q CPU L CPU ReFmXote HFeXad FX
Merge ladder programs or device comment data of multiple projects, and add them to a project.
When the programmable controller series of the projects are the same, data can be merged even if
data's programmable controller types or project types are different.
2
< Image of merging programs >
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Remove the END instructions, and merge ladder programs by the order of selection.
Order of selection on the Merge Data screen.
END instruction MAIN 1
END instruction MAIN 2
END instruction MAIN 3
MAIN
MAIN 1
3
MAIN 2 MAIN 3
END instruction appended
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
Screen display
Select [Tool] [Merge Data].
4
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
5
EDITING PROGRAMS
6
SETTING PARAMETERS
Operating procedure
7
1. Select the data type to be merged.
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
Item
Description
Data Type
Specify the data type to be merged.
Ladder Program
Select this to merge ladder programs.
Device Comment
Select this to merge device comments.
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
4.3.5 Merging data
4 - 39
4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
2. Set the items on the screen.
Item Source Data
Source Project Workspace Location
Workspace Name
Project Name Title
Source Data List
Target Data List Data Name after Merging
Data Name
Description �
Click the
button, and specify the source project.
Display the path to the workspace of the source project.
Display the workspace name of the source project. This field will be blank when a project in the single file format is specified for the source project.
Display the project name of the source project.
Display the project title of the source project.
Display programs or device comments of the source project. Select data to be merged. Programs which contain function blocks or inline structured text programs are not displayed.
Display data to be merged. Up to 128 data can be displayed. Data are merged in the displayed order.
�
Specify a data name after merging.
3. Click the
button.
Data of "Target Data List" are merged and added to the project.
Screen button
Adds data selected in "Source Data List" to "Target Data List".
Adds all data displayed in "Source Data List" to "Target Data List".
Deletes data selected in "Target Data List".
Deletes all data displayed in "Target Data List".
Displays the Set Range screen. Set the range of programs selected in "Target Data List". The range cannot be set when the source project or the target project is a project with labels.
4 - 40
4.3.5 Merging data
4.3 Operations of Programmable Controller CPU Data
1
Displays the Options screen. Select the processing for label/device comment duplication when merging programs or device comments of projects with labels.
OVERVIEW
< Program of project with labels >
< Device comment >
2
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
3
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
Data to be merged
� Data saved on a personal computer are merged. Save the project data being edited in order to merge them.
� If the merged data exceeds the program capacity, the data are merged within the program capacity.
Example) When merging three programs: MAIN1, MAIN2, and SUB3
In the setting of the following screen, the programs are merged from MAIN1. After merging MAIN1 and
MAIN2, if the result of merging SUB3 exceeds the program capacity, only MAIN1 and MAIN2 are merged.
4
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
5
Merging program data when the target project is a project without labels When the target project is a project without labels, data of program with labels are merged as a program of actual
devices. Furthermore, uncompiled programs in a project with labels of source project are not displayed in "Source Data
EDITING PROGRAMS
List".
Merging data during monitoring Data cannot be merged during monitoring. Stop monitoring to merge data.
Merging programs
When the programmable controller types of the source project and the target project are different, instructions and devices which cannot be used for the programmable controller type of the target project are merged as the way they
6
are.
Check the merged program for errors with the program check function or the compilation. For projects with labels, the local label settings are also merged when programs with labels are merged. However, since the global label settings are not merged, set labels after programs are merged, or copy the global label data from the source project.
SETTING PARAMETERS
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
4.3.5 Merging data
4 - 41
4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
4.3.6 Displaying/editing properties
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
Display data properties of folders, parameters, and programs. A title and/or comment can be set to each data.
Screen display
For property of project Click on the Project view.
For property of each data Select [Project] [Object] [Property] ( ).
<<Detail>>
<<Comment>>
Operating procedure
� Set the items on the screen.
Item
Description
Data Name
Display the data name.
Title*1, *2
Set a title for the data. (The number of applicable characters is 128 for a project and 32 for other data.)
Last Change*1
Display the date when the data was updated.
Comment*1
Set a comment for the data. Press the and keys for a line feed.
(The number of applicable characters is 5,120.)
MELSOFT iQ AppPortal information file output when saving project*3
Set the output type of an iQ AppPortal information file.
*1 : For FXCPU Simple project (with labels), "Title", "Last Change", and <<Comment>> tab are not supported by the property of "MAIN" under Project view "Program Setting" 'execution program'.
*2 : For titles of programs that are read from/written to a programmable controller CPU along with the program data, refer to Point in this section.
*3 : This item appears for the Project Property screen and the Property screen of User Library.
4 - 42
4.3.6 Displaying/editing properties
4.3 Operations of Programmable Controller CPU Data
1
OVERVIEW
Titles
Set titles are displayed on each view with a corresponding data name.
For SFC project without labels, a device comment of BL device corresponds to the SFC block becomes a title. When
the device comment of the reference target is read-protected by the security setting, the title is not displayed on the
view.
2
Titles of programs that are read from/written to a programmable controller CPU along with the program data are titles of
data created for each execution type in the program setting. Those titles are displayed on the Online Data Operation
screen when reading/writing data from/to a programmable controller CPU.
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
3
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
4
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
For ladder programs and ST programs created in a Simple project, program titles of the program setting and POU are linked. When the program title is set either in the program setting or POU, the title is reflected to the other title.
5
EDITING PROGRAMS
6
SETTING PARAMETERS
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
4.3.6 Displaying/editing properties
4 - 43
4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Properties of Structured projects Properties of the following data can be set for Structured projects in addition to those indicated above.
Data Task Function/Function block Library
Setting Priority and executing condition of a task Whether to use EN/ENO, or MC/MCR for EN control Path to a help file
For details, refer to the explanations of each function. (GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Structured Project))
Destinations for saving properties The 'titles' and 'comments' set to the data properties can be saved as symbolic information. (Section 15.1.5) When reading data from the programmable controller CPU, the symbolic information must be written to/read from the programmable controller CPU in order to restore the settings of the properties. When data are read without the symbolic information from the programmable controller CPU, the settings of the properties are not restored.
4 - 44
4.3.6 Displaying/editing properties
4.4 Operations of Intelligent Function Module Data
4.4 Operations of Intelligent Function Module Data
1
OVERVIEW
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
For the method for setting the intelligent function module data, refer to the following manual.
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Intelligent Function Module)
2
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
3
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
4
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
5
EDITING PROGRAMS
6
SETTING PARAMETERS
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
4 - 45
4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
4.5 Changing Project Types
Q CPU L CPU ReFmXote HFeXad FX
This section explains how to change the type of an open project. Using the method explained below, the type of a Simple project is changed from 'without labels' to 'with labels'. In addition, a Simple project 'with labels' can be changed to a Structured project. Changing from a Simple project 'with labels' to a Simple project 'without labels' or changing a Structured project to a Simple project is not supported.
Simple project
'without labels'
Simple project
'with labels'
*1
Structured project
*1 : Not supported by FXCPU.
Operating procedure
� Select [Project] [Change Project Type].
Changing project types When a Simple project (with labels) is changed to a Structured project, project data are stored in the following folder.
� SFC: Created under the Program folder.
� Function block: Created under the FB/FUN folder.
<Simple project (with labels)>
<Structured project>
Change the type of the project
Operation after changing project type When the project type is changed, programs are in the uncompiled status. Compile all programs again after changing the project type. (Section 5.4)
Created under the Program folder
Created under the FB/FUN folder
4 - 46
4.6 Managing Project Revisions
4.6 Managing Project Revisions
1
OVERVIEW
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
This section explains how to register a backup of the project with added revision information, and
restoring the registered backup data (content of the past project).
2
4.6.1 Registering revision information (creating backup)
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Create a backup of the project at the point of registration, and register it with the revision information.
3
Screen display
Select [Project] [Project Revision] [Revision Entry].
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
4
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
5
EDITING PROGRAMS
Operating procedure
� Set the items on the screen.
6
Item
Description
Revision No.
Display the revision number to be registered.
SETTING PARAMETERS
Date
Display "--/--/---- --:--:--" (month/date/year hour:minute:second).
User
Display the user name when using the project with security.
Title
Enter a title of the revision.
Comment
Enter comments for the revision.
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
4.6.1 Registering revision information (creating backup)
4 - 47
4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Revision number and the allowable number of revisions that can be registered A revision number for the registered revision is automatically assigned from 1 to 9999. The maximum number of revisions that can be registered is 100. If the number of the registered revisions is to be exceeded 100, delete unnecessary revisions. The deleted revision numbers are unused. If the revision number is to be exceeded 9999, delete all the revision data, or save the project with a different name without succeeding the revision information. (Section 4.2.3)
The allowable number of characters that can be entered for a title The maximum number of characters that can be entered for a title is 32.
The allowable number of characters that can be entered for a comment The maximum number of characters that can be entered for a comment is 256. A line feed is handled as 2 characters.
Registration of project revisions when overwriting and saving projects By setting the option, the Revision Entry screen for the project revision is displayed when overwriting and saving the project. Select [Tool] [Options] "Project", and then select "Revision is Registered when Save Project" in "Change History". In addition, the revision title can be automatically set when overwriting by selecting "Automatically set revision titles".
Registration of project revisions for projects with security For the projects with security, the revisions can be registered only when the user's access level is 'Administrators'.
Information for iQ AppPortal Information for iQ AppPortal is not registered for revision information.
4.6.2 Displaying revision list
Display registered revision information in the order of the revision number. The revision list is used for registering, restoring, deleting, and verifying backups.
Screen display
Select [Project] [Project Revision] [Revision List].
Display contents
No. Date User Title
Item
Description Display the revision numbers. Display the dates of revision registration. For the projects with security, display the user names who have registered the revisions. Display the titles of the revisions.
4 - 48
4.6.2 Displaying revision list
4.6 Managing Project Revisions
Screen button
1
Displays the detailed information of the revision which is selected in the list. "Title" and "Comment" can be edited.
OVERVIEW
2
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
3
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
Registers the project being edited as a revision. (Section 4.6.1)
Restores the backup data. (Section 4.6.3)
4
Deletes the revision information. (Section 4.6.4)
Verifies the revision with other revisions or the projects being edited. (Section 4.6.5)
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
5
Revision List screen Each column can be sorted in ascending/descending order by clicking on the column header.
EDITING PROGRAMS
4.6.3 Restoring backup projects
6
Restore the backup revision information. After restoring the backup, the project is in the status at the time of registering the revision information.
SETTING PARAMETERS
Operating procedure
1. Select the revision to be restored on the Revision List screen (Section 4.6.2).
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
4.6.3 Restoring backup projects
4 - 49
4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
2. Click the
button.
The revision information to be restored is displayed.
3. Confirm the revision information to be restored. Click the
button.
The backup of the selected revision information is restored. The revision number and title of the restored project are displayed on the title bar.
Revision number and title of the restored project.
The Revision List screen after restoring a project After project restoration, is displayed on the row of the restored project on the Revision List screen.
Access level to be able to use the restoring function when using the projects with security For the projects with security, the revisions can be restored only when the user's access level is 'Administrators'.
Revisions for the project with security If the project being edited is the project with security, the registered security in the revision is deactivated when the security is deactivated. When the revision is restored in such situation, since the project is restored without security, all users can access the project including the revision data. To protect the revision data after deactivating the security, delete the revision data in advance.
Considerations for restoring projects Register the revision of the project being edited before restoring a project. When the other revision is restored and overwritten without registering the revision of the project being edited, the project before restoration is overwritten.
4 - 50
4.6.3 Restoring backup projects
4.6 Managing Project Revisions
4.6.4 Deleting revision information
1
OVERVIEW
Delete the registered revision information.
Operating procedure
1. Select the revision information to be deleted on the Revision List screen
2
(Section 4.6.2).
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
3
2. Click the
button.
The message on the right is displayed.
4
3. Click the
button.
The selected revision information is deleted.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Revision number
The deleted revision numbers are unused.
5
Revisions being restored
The revision of the project which has been restored from the revision cannot be deleted. To delete the revision,
overwrite and save the project after restoring it.
EDITING PROGRAMS
4.6.5 Verifying revisions
6
SETTING PARAMETERS
Verify the revision information with other revision information or the project being edited. The following data can be selected as verification targets for the revision verification.
� Programs
� Parameters
� Intelligent function module parameters (initial setting/auto refresh)*1
7
� Device comments
� Device memory data
� QD75/LD75 positioning module*1
*1 : Not supported by FXCPU.
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
4.6.4 Deleting revision information
4 - 51
4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Operating procedure
1. Select the revision to be verified on the Revision List screen (Section 4.6.2).
When the verification function is performed selecting only one revision, the selected revision information is verified with the project being edited. To verify two revisions, select two revisions by holding down the key or key.
2. Click the
button.
The message as shown on the right is displayed. This message is displayed when verifying the selected revision information with the project being edited.
3. Click the
button.
The Revision Verification screen is displayed.
4. Select the data to be verified.
For details of setting items, refer to the project verification. (Section 4.2.7)
5. Click the
button.
The verification result is displayed on the Verify Result screen. For details of the Verify Result screen, refer to the project verification. (Section 4.2.7) The following is a screen of project with labels.
4 - 52
4.6.5 Verifying revisions
4.7 Utilizing Projects and Data in Other Formats
4.7 Utilizing Projects and Data in Other Formats
1
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
This section explains how to utilize projects created with GX Developer or GX IEC Developer, and files (ASCII files) created using the Export function of GX IEC Developer in GX Works2. Projects edited with GX Works2 can also be utilized in GX Developer.
2
Utilizing projects and data created with GX Developer or GX IEC Developer in GX Works2
Projects created with GX Developer or GX IEC Developer can be utilized in GX Works2 by using the 'Open Other Project' function. (Section 4.7.1)
3
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
Open Other Project function.
Project created with GX Developer
4
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
5
EDITING PROGRAMS
Project created with GX IEC Developer
Opened as a GX Works2 project. Open Other Project function.
6
SETTING PARAMETERS
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
4 - 53
4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT Utilizing files created using the Export function of GX IEC Developer
ASCII files created using the Export function of GX IEC Developer can be added as projects in GX Works2 by using the 'Read ASC Format File' function. (Section 4.7.2)
Read ASC Format File
Utilizing projects and data created with GX Works2 in GX Developer
Files created/edited in Simple project with GX Works2 can be utilized in GX Developer by using the 'Export to GX Developer Format File' function. (Section 4.8)
[Export to GX Developer Format File]
4 - 54
4.7 Utilizing Projects and Data in Other Formats
Storage of utilized data in GX Works2
1
OVERVIEW
Each project and data created with GX Developer or GX IEC Developer are stored in the areas shown in the table below with GX Works2. GX Developer projects are opened as Simple projects and GX IEC Developer projects, as Structured projects.
Comparison of projects and data storage locations between GX Developer and GX Works2
2
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
GX Developer
GX Works2 (Simple project)
GX Works2 (Structured project)
Parameter
Parameter
Parameter
Device Comment
Global Device Comment
Global Device Comment
Global variables
Global Label
Global Label
Program
Program
POU
3
FB
FB_Pool
FB/FUN
Structure
Structured Data Types
Structured Data Types
Device memory
Device Memory
Device Memory
Device initial value
Device Initial Value
Device Initial Value
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
Comparison of projects and data storage locations between GX IEC Developer and GX Works2
4
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
GX IEC Developer
GX Works2 (Structured project)
User Library
User Library
Parameter (Programmable controller parameter)
Parameter
DUT_Pool (Structure)
Structured Data Types
Global_Vars (Global variable)
Global Label
5
Task_Pool
POU
POU_Pool
POU
EDITING PROGRAMS
Security level of GX IEC Developer
The security level in the GX IEC Developer project is cleared after reading the project. When the GX IEC Developer project is read using GX Works2, the following Enter Password screen is
6
displayed.
SETTING PARAMETERS
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
Compatible applications
8
For 'Open Other Project' and 'Export to GX Developer Format File', the supported versions differ according to the CPU type. For the application compatibility, refer to Appendix 5.
4 - 55
4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
4.7.1 Opening projects in other formats
Q CPU L CPU Remote HFeXad FX
Open a project created with GX Developer or GX IEC Developer in GX Works2.
Screen display
Select [Project] [Open Other Data] [Open Other Project].
Operating procedure
� Specify the project, and click the
button.
Select '*.gpj' for a GX Developer project and '*.pro' for a GX IEC Developer project. The selected project is opened.
Considerations for opening projects in other formats
Status after opening a different format project with labels When a different format project with labels is opened, the project is in the uncompiled status. Compile all programs in the project before executing online operations such as writing data and monitoring. When a compilation error occurs, correct the corresponding program according to the programming manual.
When a programmable controller type of project which is created in GX Developer is not supported by GX Works2 Open the project by starting GX Developer.
Projects which contain FBD, SFC, IL, or MELSEC-IL programs created with GX IEC Developer FBD programs created with GX IEC Developer can be read with GX Works2 Version 1.56J or later as Structured Ladder/FBD programs. Projects which contain SFC, IL, or MELSEC-IL programs created with GX IEC Developer cannot be read with GX Works2.
4 - 56
4.7.1 Opening projects in other formats
4.7 Utilizing Projects and Data in Other Formats
Opening different format projects that contain SFC programs
1
� Block information data such as: block information devices, block titles and block statements, are set in the block data property.
OVERVIEW
� When a GX Developer format project, including a ladder block with an unconverted SFC program,
is opened by selecting [Open Other Project] in a version between 1.87R and 1.551Z of GX
Works2, the number added to the end of the block name may not be in sequence.
� When a GX Developer format project, including a ladder block with an unconverted SFC program,
2
is opened by selecting [Open Other Project] in a version 1.555D or later of GX Works2, the
program name is added in the block name.
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Opening different format projects that contain ST programs
Since the argument type or the number of arguments in some ST instruction is different between GX
Developer and GX Works2, an error may occur at compilation. When a compilation error occurs,
correct the instruction according to the structured programming manuals. Note that, however, programs can be compiled in GX Works2 by setting the following option.
3
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
� Select "Use Dedicated Instruction for GX Developer, GX IEC Developer" under [Tool] [Options] "Project" "Common Setting".
Setting common pointer number
When the common pointer number is not set in the PLC parameter setting of GX Developer, a
compilation error may occur at the compilation after opening the project in other format. In such case,
change "Common Pointer No." on the <<PLC System>> tab of PLC parameter or change the pointer
4
device range in the "Device/Label Automatic-Assign Setting" function.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Utilizing detailed settings for Write to PLC function
Values set in GX Developer are utilized to the secured steps for Online program change
(Section 15.1.1) and the writing range of device comment (Section 15.1.3) which are set
when writing data to programmable controller CPU.
Note that "PLC comment write format (CPU Format)" which is set along with the writing range of device comment in GX Developer is not utilized.
5
For a project in which the comment capacity is restricted by setting "PLC comment write format (CPU
Format)" in GX Developer, the comment capacity may be exceeded when data are written to a
programmable controller CPU using GX Works2.
In such a case, set "Comment Format (PLC Format)" (Section 15.1.3) or reduce the writing
range of device comment.
EDITING PROGRAMS
Utilizing option settings
6
GX Developer option setting "Copy source/display source of reference during comment edit" is
utilized to GX Works2 option setting "Program Editor" "All Editors" "Device Comment"
"Reference of Device Comment".
SETTING PARAMETERS
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
4.7.1 Opening projects in other formats
4 - 57
4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Opening a GX IEC Developer project When a GX IEC Developer project that contains a user library is opened, the following message may be displayed and the user library may not be read. If the following message is displayed, select [Project] [Library] [Install] in GX Works2 to obtain the user library.
When a GX IEC Developer project is read by selecting [Project] [Open Other Data] [Open Other Project], intelligent function module parameters are not reflected. When a GX Developer data name contains a character that cannot be used in GX Works2 A GX Developer project with a GX Works2 invalid character can be opened. Note that, however, the invalid character in the data is replaced by an underscore (_).*1 Change the data name after opening the project.
*1 : For FXCPU, data which contains invalid characters in its data name is not read.
Changing the number of columns of device memory editor The number of columns of device memory editor can be changed when opening GX Developer format project by selecting the following option. � [Tool] [Options] "Device Memory Editor" "Initial Value of Column Number" When selecting "Always Confirm", the number of columns of device memory editor can be changed at opening the Device Memory screen at the first time on the following screen. When setting "Auto" as a default, or always specify the same number of columns by selecting "Specify the number of column", set with option or select "Set the selected content in option" in advance.
4 - 58
4.7.1 Opening projects in other formats
4.7 Utilizing Projects and Data in Other Formats
4.7.2 Reading ASC format data
1
OVERVIEW
Q CPU L CPU ReFmXote HFeXad FX
Add ASC format data created in GX IEC Developer to a GX Works2 project being edited. Data can be added only when a new project is created or a project is opened in Structured project.
2
Screen display
Select [Project] [Open Other Data] [Read ASC Format File].
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
3
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
4
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Operating procedure
5
� Specify the file, and click the
button.
Select '*.asc' for the file. The specified data is added to the project.
EDITING PROGRAMS
Importing project data of different programmable controller type
6
Project data having a different programmable controller type can be imported to a project being edited.
The programmable controller type of the project being edited is not changed even when data with the different
programmable controller type are imported.
In this case, since instructions and devices not supported by the open project are also imported, compile the programs
to check and correct errors after importing data.
SETTING PARAMETERS
Importing data whose name already exists in the project
A number is appended in serial order (starting from one) to the end of the data name to be imported, and then the data
is added to the project.
7
Importing global labels
When the global labels are imported, the "Device" column of the global label may be blank. If the "Device" column is
blank, check the items on the <<Device>> tab of PLC parameter.
Importing FBD programs of GX IEC Developer Imported FBD programs are converted to Structured Ladder programs.
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
4.7.2 Reading ASC format data
4 - 59
4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
4.8 Saving Projects in Other Formats
*1
*2
Q CPU L CPU ReFmXote HFeXad
*3
FX
*1 : Not supported by High-speed Universal model QCPU *2 : Not supported by L02S, L02S-P, L06, L06-P, L26 and L26-P. *3 : Not supported by FX3S.
This section explains how to save a Simple project of GX Works2 in the GX Developer format.
Screen display
Select [Project] [Export to GX Developer Format File].
Operating procedure
1. Select the save destination of the GX Developer format project.
2. Enter the project name, and click the
button.
Considerations for saving projects For the restrictions other than the ones described below, refer to Appendix 8.
� Programs are saved in the uncompiled status.
� Data cannot be saved when the security access level is set to other than 'Administrators'. Change the access level before saving the data. (Section 4.10.4)
� The data with a block password cannot be saved. Unlock the block password before saving the data. (Section 4.12.3)
� Projects in which labels are used for FXCPU cannot be saved in the GX Developer format.
� When a GX Developer format project is saved to the folder in which a GX Developer format project with the same name exists, the previously saved project is overwritten. If the saving of the project failed, all data except for the data created by user will be deleted.
Considerations for handling projects in GX Developer
� Since the program is saved uncompiled, the program needs to be compiled when it is opened in GX Developer. For projects with labels, the compilation results and device assignment may be different from those of GX Works2.
� For a maintenance work on the same programmable controller CPU using both GX Developer and GX Works2, programming with actual devices is recommended.
4 - 60
4.9 Starting GX Developer from GX Works2
4.9 Starting GX Developer from GX Works2
1
OVERVIEW
Q CPU L CPU Remote HFeXad FX
Start a new GX Developer project from GX Works2.
GX Developer needs to be installed in advance to perform this function.
2
For details of GX Developer installation, refer to Appendix 14.
For details of GX Developer operation, refer to the following manual.
GX Developer Version 8 Operating Manual
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Operating procedure
� Select [Project] [Start GX Developer].
3
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
4
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
5
EDITING PROGRAMS
6
SETTING PARAMETERS
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
4 - 61
4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
4.10 Setting Security for Projects
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
This section explains how to set security for projects to protect the projects themselves and the data in projects.
Setting security not only restricts an access to projects but also prevents the data, such as POUs, device comments, and parameters, that are created by the user from erroneous modification and/or disclosure to unauthorized users.
This function cannot restrict writing/reading of data to/from a programmable controller CPU. Use the online password function to protect the data on a programmable controller CPU. (Chapter 16)
Access levels and access authority
An access to data can be restricted by setting an access level to the individual user. An access level is an operating authority given to a login user of the project. There are five access levels as shown below. The data that can be edited by a user having lower access level can also be edited by a user who has higher access level.
Higher Lower
Access level Administrators
Developers (Level 3) Developers (Level 2) Developers (Level 1)
Users
<Administrator level> All operations are possible.
Operating authority
<Developer level> Security setting, data access, and a part of operations are restricted.
<Operator level> Only access to project data is possible. Data cannot be read from the programmable controller CPU.
Example) The data with access authority of Developers (Level 2) can be edited by a login user whose access level is Developers (Level 2) or higher (Administrators, Developers (Level 3) or Developers (Level 2)).
4 - 62
4.10 Setting Security for Projects
Access authority applicable data
1
The following tables show the data to which access authority can be applied.
OVERVIEW
Simple project
: Applicable �: Not applicable
Parameter Intelligent Function Module
Items on Project view
Read �
Write
2
�
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Intelligent function module data
Global Device Comment
Global Label
�
�
Global label data
�
Program Setting Program file data
� �
� �
3
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
POU
�
�
Ladder program data
�
�
Program
Local Label
�
ST program data*1 Program Local Label
�
�
4
�
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
SFC program data
�
�
SFC block
�
�
Program
Local label*1
�
FB_Pool Program
�
�
5
Local label
�
Structured Data Types
�
�
EDITING PROGRAMS
Structure data
�
Local Device Comment
�
�
Comment data Device Memory
Device memory data
�
�
6
Device Initial Value*1
�
�
Device initial value data
�
�
*1 : Not supported by FXCPU.
SETTING PARAMETERS
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
4 - 63
4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Structured project
Items on Project view Parameter Intelligent Function Module
Intelligent function module data Global Device Comment Global Label
Global label data Program Setting
Program file data POU
Program Ladder program data*1 Program Local Label ST program data Program Local Label SFC program data*1 Program Local Label Structured Ladder/FBD program data Program Local Label
FB/FUN Program Local label
Structured Data Types Structure data
Local Device Comment Comment data
Device Memory Device memory data
Device Initial Value*1 Device initial value data
*1 : Not supported by FXCPU.
: Applicable �: Not applicable
Read
Write
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
4 - 64
4.10 Setting Security for Projects
4.10.1 Setting/resetting security of projects
1
OVERVIEW
Set security for an open project and reset the security.
Setting security for projects
2
Set security for a project.
Once security is set for a project, user authentication is required when the project is opened once
again. (Section 4.10.3)
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Screen display
Select [Project] [Security] [User Management].
3
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
4
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
5
Item
Description
EDITING PROGRAMS
User Name
Enter a user name in 1 to 20 characters, using alphabets, numerals, and/or symbols corresponding to the ASCII codes (Appendix 3) of 20H to 26H and 28H to 7EH. (Alphabets are case-sensitive.)
Access Level
Display 'Administrators'. (Fixed)
Password
Enter a password in 6 to 32 characters, using alphabets, numerals, and/or symbols
corresponding to the ASCII codes (Appendix 3) of 20H to 7EH. (Alphabets are casesensitive.)
6
Re-enter Password
Set the same password again for confirmation.
SETTING PARAMETERS
2. Click the
button.
Security is set for the project.
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
Setting security When security is set for a project, the project is in the status logged in by the set user (Administrators). The current login
user can be checked in the status bar. (Section 3.2.6)
Loss of login password
If a user forgets the login password, logging in to the project is disabled. Remember the password securely. If the user
whose access level is Developers (Level 3) or lower forgets the password, log in the project using the access level
'Administrators' and set the password again.
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
4.10.1 Setting/resetting security of projects
4 - 65
4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Resetting security of projects
Reset the set security of a project by deleting all users, and returns the project to the status without security. (Section 4.10.2)
4.10.2 Managing (adding/deleting/changing) users
Manage the registered status of users for a project with security. This function also adds/deletes/ changes users. This function is available only when a project is logged in by the user whose access level is 'Administrators' or 'Developers'.
Screen display
Select [Project] [Security] [User Management].
Display contents
Item Number of User Registrations User Name Access Level
Description Display the number of registered users and the maximum number of registrations. Display the registered user names. Display the access level of each registered user.
4 - 66
4.10.2 Managing (adding/deleting/changing) users
4.10 Setting Security for Projects
Screen button
1
Adds a user. (' Adding users')
OVERVIEW
Deletes a user selected in the list.
The current login user cannot be deleted. If registered users are only 'Administrators' and there are
2
no other users to be deleted, deletion of the current login user is possible.
If 'Administrators' level users are deleted, security is reset.
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Changes the information of the user selected in the list. (' Changing user information')
Changes the password of the user selected in the list. (' Changing passwords') The password of the current login user cannot be changed using this function. To change it, select
3
[Project] [Security] [Change Password].
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
Adding users
Add a user to a project with security.
A user whose access level is higher than that of the login user cannot be added.
4
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Operating procedure
1. Click the
button on the User
Management screen.
The User Addition screen is displayed.
5
EDITING PROGRAMS
6
SETTING PARAMETERS
2. Set the items on the screen.
Item User Name Access Level Password Re-enter Password
Description
Enter a user name in 1 to 20 characters, using alphabets, numerals, and/or symbols
corresponding to the ASCII codes (Appendix 3) of 20H to 26H and 28H to 7EH. (Alphabets are case-sensitive.)
7
Select the access level.
Enter a password in 6 to 32 characters, using alphabets, numerals, and/or symbols corresponding to the ASCII codes (Appendix 3) of 20H to 7EH. (Alphabets are casesensitive.)
Set the same password again for confirmation.
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
3. Click the
button.
8
The user is added. The added user is displayed in the User Management screen.
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
4.10.2 Managing (adding/deleting/changing) users
4 - 67
4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Changing user information
Change the user information (user name and access level) of registered users. The information of the login user and the user whose access level is higher than that of login user cannot be changed.
Operating procedure
1. Click the
button on the User
Management screen.
The Change User Data screen is displayed.
2. Set the items on the screen.
Setting items Section 4.10.1
3. Click the
button.
The user information is changed.
Changing passwords
Change the password of the user selected in the list on the User Management screen. The password of the login user and the user whose access level is higher than that of the login user cannot be changed. To change the password of the login user, use the Change password function by selecting [Project] [Security] [Change Password].
Operating procedure
1. Click the
button on the User
Management screen.
The Change Password screen is displayed.
2. Set "New Password" and "Re-enter Password".
3. Click the
button.
The password is changed.
4 - 68
4.10.2 Managing (adding/deleting/changing) users
4.10 Setting Security for Projects
4.10.3 Logging in projects
1
OVERVIEW
A user authentication procedure is required when opening a project with security.
Screen display
Screen display when a project with security is opened.
2
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
3
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
Operating procedure
4
1. Set the items on the screen.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Item User Name Password
Description Enter the user name registered to the project to be logged in. Enter the password.
2. Click the
button.
5
Login authentication is performed with the entered user name and password. The project is opened when the entry is confirmed to be correct.
EDITING PROGRAMS
Checking login status
The current login user can be checked in the status bar. (Section 3.2.6)
6
SETTING PARAMETERS
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
4.10.3 Logging in projects
4 - 69
4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
4.10.4 Changing access authority of access level
Set an authorization of displaying/saving data for each access level. The access authority of access levels higher than that of the login user cannot be changed. If the access level of the current login user is 'Users', changing the access authority is not allowed.
Screen display
Select [Project] [Security] [Data Security Setting].
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Item
Description
Access Object
Select one or more data for which access authority is changed.
Access Authority
Set 'enable/disable' of reading/writing data for each access level by moving the slider.*1
*1 : When multiple data are selected, the default access authority setting is displayed. Click the slider to set the displayed access authority as it is. The access authority will not be set by only selecting multiple data.
2. Click the
button.
Setting access authority The access authority can also be set by right-clicking on a single data of which access authority is to be changed on the Project view and selecting [Data Security Setting] from the shortcut menu. When multiple data are selected, the shortcut menu is invalid.
4 - 70
4.10.4 Changing access authority of access level
4.10 Setting Security for Projects
4.10.5 Considerations for using the security function
1
OVERVIEW
1) Read protected data
A name of read protected data is displayed in gray and cannot be opened.
On the screens of project verification and programmable controller verification, a lock mark icon is
appended. The following figures are an example for the case that "Parameter", programs and local labels of
2
"MAIN1", and programs of "MAIN2" are read protected.
<Project view>
<Project verification>
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
3
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
<Programmable controller verification>
4
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
2) Write protected data The write protected data can be opened as the read only data.
3) Properties of data
The properties of the read/write protected data can be displayed, but cannot be edited. 4) Device comment display on ladder editor and the Sampling Trace screen
5
If the data of the device comment is set as read protected, the device comment is not displayed on
ladder editor or the Sampling Trace screen.
EDITING PROGRAMS
5) Reading symbolic information from programmable controller CPU using project with
security
When symbolic information*1 is read from a programmable controller CPU, the security settings
(settings on the Data Security Setting screen) of the data, which are not included in the symbolic
6
information, are set to their default.
If the settings on the Data Security Setting screen are changed, make settings again after reading
SETTING PARAMETERS
data from the programmable controller CPU.
Note that the block password*2 is not set to default even when the symbolic information is read.
Therefore, setting a block password to each POU is recommended.
*1 : Symbolic information (Section 15.1.5)
*2 : Block password (Section 4.12)
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
4.10.5 Considerations for using the security function
4 - 71
4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
4.11 Setting Security Key
*1
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX *1 : High-speed Universal model QCPU only
This section explains how to control the access with a security key.
Security key
The security key locks/unlocks projects and a programmable controller CPU. The lock can only be unlocked with a security key, and therefore project data and data in a programmable controller CPU can be protected. For projects
Locked project can be accessed or edited only by the users who registered the security key on the personal computer. For programmable controller CPU The following files can be written to/read from the locked programmable controller only by the users who registered the security key on the personal computer. � Symbolic information � Program � Parameter � Intelligent function module parameter � Device comment
File writing/reading enabled
Key A
Data access/ editing enabled
Project data Key A
High-speed Universal model QCPU
Unable to access/ edit data
Key A
Unable to write/read files
Another user can unlock the locked project data or programmable controller CPU by importing/ exporting the security key.
Export
File writing/reading enabled
Key A
Data access/ editing enabled
Unlock
Key A Unlock Key A
Project data
High-speed Universal model QCPU
Import
Data access/ editing enabled
Unlock Key A File writing/reading enabled
4 - 72
4.11 Setting Security Key
4.11.1 Managing security key
1
OVERVIEW
Create a security key, and import/export/delete the security key.
Screen display
Select [Project] [Security] [Soft Security Key Management].
2
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
3
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
4
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Display contents
5
Item
Description
EDITING PROGRAMS
Key Information Registered in the Personal Computer
�
Name
Display the name of the security key.
Creation Date Lock Project
Display the date of creation of the security key. Display the lock applicability for the project.
6
Lock CPU
Display the lock applicability of the programmable controller CPU.
Expiration Date
Display the expiration date when an expiration date is set on the security key.
SETTING PARAMETERS
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
4.11.1 Managing security key
4 - 73
4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Screen button
Imports the security key. (" Importing security key")
Exports the security key. (" Exporting security key")
Creates a security key. (" Creating a security key")
Deletes the security key. (" Deleting security key")
Creating a security key
Create a security key.
Operating procedure
1. Click the
button.
The New screen is displayed.
2. Enter a name and click the
The security key is created.
button.
Considerations of created security key Created security keys can be registered only for the user who logged in the personal computer. The maximum number of security key registrations is 128 including created security keys and imported security keys for each login user of personal computer.
4 - 74
4.11.1 Managing security key
4.11 Setting Security Key
Importing security key
1
Import the security key which is exported previously to the personal computer.
OVERVIEW
Operating procedure
1. Click the
button.
The Import screen is displayed.
2
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
3
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
4
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
2. Select the security file to be imported, and click the
button.
The Password screen is displayed.
5
EDITING PROGRAMS
3. Enter the password set for the file when it was exported, and click the
6
button.
The security key is imported to the personal computer.
SETTING PARAMETERS
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
4.11.1 Managing security key
4 - 75
4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Exporting security key
Export the security key.
Operating procedure
1. Select the security key to be exported, and click the
The Export screen is displayed.
button.
2. Set the items on the screen.
Item Security Key Information
Name Password
Password
Password for Confirmation Detailed Setting
Expiration Date Operation Restriction
Lock Project
Lock CPU
Description � Display the name of the security key. � Enter a password for the security file to be exported. Set a password in 6 to 32 characters, using alphabets, numerals, and/or symbols corresponding to the ASCII codes (Appendix 3) of 20H to 7EH. Set the same password again for confirmation. � Set the expiration date of the security key. � Select whether to apply the security key setting to the project. Select whether to apply the security key setting to the programmable controller CPU.
4 - 76
4.11.1 Managing security key
3. Click the
button.
The Save as screen is displayed.
4.11 Setting Security Key
1
2
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
3
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
4. Enter a name of the file to be saved.
4
5. Click the
button.
The security key file is saved.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Considerations of exported security files The exported security files should be tightly controlled.
5
EDITING PROGRAMS
Deleting security key
Delete the security key registered on the personal computer.
Operating procedure
6
� Select the security key to be deleted, and click the
button.
The following confirmation message is displayed.
Click the
button to delete the security key.
SETTING PARAMETERS
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
Considerations when deleting security key The project cannot be opened if the security key which is used to lock the project is deleted.
8
Even when the security key with the same name is recreated after deleting the security key, it will not be the same
security key.
Take extra caution when deleting security keys.
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
4.11.1 Managing security key
4 - 77
4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
4.11.2 Locking project with security key
Lock the project with a security key.
Screen display
Select [Project] [Security] [Soft Security Key Management].
Display contents
Item Key Information Registered in the Personal Computer <<Project>>
Project Information Project Name Title Name
Security Key Information Name Creation Date
Explanation
Description
Display the information of selected security key. (Section 4.11.1)
Display the screen to lock/unlock the project. � Display the name of the project. Display the project title. � Display the name of the security key which is used to lock the project. Display the date of creation of the security key which is used to lock the project. Display the information when the cursor is placed on the button on the screen.
Operating procedure
1. Select the security key to lock the project from "Key Information Registered in the
Personal Computer".
2. Click the
button.
The project is locked with the selected security key.
Screen button
Unlocks the locked project.
4 - 78
4.11.2 Locking project with security key
4.11 Setting Security Key
4.11.3 Considerations of security keys
1
OVERVIEW
1) When GX Works2 is uninstalled Security keys are not deleted even when GX Works2 is uninstalled.
2) Security status
When the security key is "Execution Possible" at the point of opening the project, the security key
2
is handled under the authority of "Execution Possible" while the project is being opened.
For example, even when the security key of the opened project is deleted and the "Execution
Impossible" security key is imported, the security key is handled under the authority of "Execution
Possible" while the project is being opened.
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
3) Locking a project with security key
The security key set to the project becomes effective after saving the project.
4) Project locked with security key
3
The following operations cannot be performed.
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
� Write to PLC/Read from PLC/Verify with PLC function with symbolic information, programs,
parameters, intelligent function module parameters, or device comments when "Memory Card
(SD)" is specified for the target memory
� Online program change function when "Memory Card (SD)" is specified for the write target.
� Write to PLC function with parameters when "Memory Card (SD)" is specified for the target
4
memory of "Comment File Used in a Command" on the <<PLC File>> tab of PLC parameter.
� Write IC Memory Card function
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
5) CPU module locked with security key
The following operations cannot be performed.
� Backup data creation function of PLC Module Change
� Data restoration function of PLC Module Change
5
� Write PLC User Data/Read PLC User Data function with latch data backup file created with the
Latch Data Backup function
EDITING PROGRAMS
6
SETTING PARAMETERS
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
4.11.3 Considerations of security keys
4 - 79
4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
4.12 Protecting POUs in Projects
Q CPU L CPU ReFmXote HFeXad FX
This section explains how to set a block password to a POU in a project with labels. Setting a block password to a POU disables the access to program content. To access program content, the block password must be unlocked.
The following table shows the POUs to which a block password can be set.
Project type Simple project (without labels)
Simple project (with labels)
Structured project
POU to which a block password can be set
None
Function block
Program block Function block Function
Effective range of block passwords A block password is the function that protects POUs, not execution programs. To protect execution programs, use the security function or online password function. For High-speed Universal model QCPU, LCPU and FXCPU, however, whether to protect execution programs with a block password can be selected.
Considerations of project with security To set/unlock/delete a block password in a project with security, a user who has a security access authority to read/ write the program needs to log in. (Security Section 4.10)
Reading symbolic information from programmable controller CPU Even when the symbolic information is read from a programmable controller CPU, the set status of block password does not change.
Considerations when using FXCPU A memory cassette to which the execution program with a block password is written can be used on FX3U/FX3UC version 3.00 or later only.
4 - 80
4.12 Protecting POUs in Projects
4.12.1 Managing (setting/unlocking/deleting) block passwords
1
OVERVIEW
Manage the block password setting status of a POU. In addition, this function sets/unlocks/deletes a block password.
Screen display
2
Select [Tool] [Block Password].
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
3
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
4
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Display contents
Item
Description
POU Name Registration Status
Display POUs. Display the status of block password for each POU.
5
Screen button
EDITING PROGRAMS
Sets a block password to a POU. (Section 4.12.2)
Unlocks the block password set to the POU. (Section 4.12.3)
6
Deletes the registered block password. The block password of the POU must be unlocked before deleting it.
SETTING PARAMETERS
7
Selecting multiple POUs Multiple POUs of "Function Block List" can be selected and the password can be set/disabled in batch. The following is the consideration when the block password settings of selected POUs are different.
� POUs whose block password is different from the entered password are not unlocked.
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
4.12.1 Managing (setting/unlocking/deleting) block passwords
4 - 81
4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
4.12.2 Setting/changing block passwords
Set a block password to a POU.
Operating procedure
1. Select a POU to set a block password
on the Block Password screen and
click the
button.
The Change Block Password screen is displayed.
2. Set the items on the screen.
Item
Password
Re-enter Password Execution Program Protection Setting*1
Description
Enter a password in 6 to 32 characters, using alphabets, numerals, and/or symbols corresponding to the ASCII codes (Appendix 3) of 20H to 7EH. (Alphabets are casesensitive.)
Set the same password again for confirmation.
Select this to disable reading execution programs. Programs need to be compiled when selecting or unselecting it in FXCPU.
*1 : High-speed Universal model QCPU (first 5 digits of the serial number are "19012" or higher), LCPU (first 5 digits of the serial number are "18112" or higher) and FXCPU (version 3.00 or later of FX3U and FX3UC) support it.
3. Click the
button.
The block password is set to the selected POU. Lock of the POU by the block password becomes effective when the project is opened once again.
4 - 82
4.12.2 Setting/changing block passwords
4.12 Protecting POUs in Projects
1
Display on the Project view A POU with a block password is displayed on the Project view as shown below.
OVERVIEW
A lock mark is appended to the icon of
POU to which a block password is set.
2
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Changing block passwords To change a block password, simply set a new password for the POU to which a block password has already been set. However, the block password must be unlocked before changing it.
3
4.12.3 Unlocking block passwords
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
Unlock the block password set to a POU. The access to the of POUs is enabled by unlocking block passwords.
4
Operating procedure
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
1. Select a POU to unlock the block
password on the Block Password
screen and click the
button.
The Unlock Block Password screen is
5
displayed.
EDITING PROGRAMS
2. Set the item on the screen.
Item
Description
Password
Enter the block password to be unlocked.
6
3. Click the
button.
The block password of the selected POU is unlocked. The unlock of the POU by the block password is valid while the project is being opened. To lock the POU again, reopen the project.
SETTING PARAMETERS
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
4.12.3 Unlocking block passwords
4 - 83
4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
4.12.4 Considerations for a block password
Functions restricted in the execution program protection status
A project will be in the execution program protection status by enabling the execution program protection setting when setting a block password. By writing a project in the execution program protection status, a programmable controller CPU will also be in the same status. The following shows the functions restricted by High-speed Universal model QCPU, LCPU, and FXCPU in the execution program protection status. However, the functions can be used by the methods mentioned in "Avoidance of restrictions". For (Simple) and (Structured) indicated in the Reference column, refer to the following manuals respectively:
(Simple) ... GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project) (Structured) ... GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Structured Project)
GX Works2 functions
Function name
Limitations
Reference
Avoidance of restrictions
Verify
Unable to display the detailed result of program files.
Section 4.2.7
Verify Source: Unlock*1 (Section 4.12.3)
Verify Destination : Canceling the execution program protection status of a project
Change PLC Type
Unable to change to the programmable controller type for which the execution program protection setting of a block password is not supported.
Section 4.2.8
Canceling the execution program protection status of a project
Print/Print preview
Unable to print and display the print preview in the device display.
Section 11.5.7 Unlock*1 Section 11.5.8 (Section 4.12.3)
Write to PLC
Unable to write programs to an SD memory card by using the using the Write to PLC function.
Section 15.1
Canceling the execution program protection status of a project
Verify with PLC
Unable to display the detailed result of program files.
Section 15.2
Verify Source : Unlock*1 (Section 4.12.3)
Verify Destination: Canceling the execution program protection status of a programmable controller CPU
Online program change
Unable to perform Online program change (during conversion/compilationwith Build) when the protection status (enable or disable) for the execution program protection setting of a block password is set as follows;
Section 15.9.2
� Programmable controller CPU: disabled,
GX Works2: enabled
Write IC Memory Card*2
Unable to write data to an IC memory card.
Section 15.11.1
Canceling the execution program protection status of a
Write to IC Memory Card (Edit and Data Copy)*2
Unable to write (edit and copy) data to an IC memory card.
Section 15.11.2 project
Change TC Setting*2
Unable to change TC setting values when the protection status (enable or disable) for the execution program protection setting of a block password is set as follows;
� Programmable controller CPU: disabled, GX Works2: enabled
(Simple)
Device Display/Batch Device Display
Display Compile Result
Unable to display in the device display and the batch device display.
Unable to display the compilation result.
(Structured)
Unlock*1 (Section 4.12.3)
*1 : Unlock all block passwords to which the execution program protection setting was enabled. *2 : These functions are not supported by FXCPUs.
4 - 84
4.12.4 Considerations for a block password
4.12 Protecting POUs in Projects
Programmable controller CPU functions
1
Function name
Limitations
Reference Avoidance of restrictions
OVERVIEW
Unable to back up data to an SD memory card.
For details on this function, refer to the following
CPU Module Change
manual.
Function with SD Memory QnUCPU User's Manual (Function
-
Card
Explanation, Program Fundamentals) MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual
2
(Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Unable to use the data backup function of a
CPU module data backup/restoration function
CPU module.
For details on this function, refer to the following manual.
-
QnUCPU User's Manual (Function
Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
Unable to save projects in a batch.
3
Project data batch save/ load function
For details on this function, refer to the following manual. MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual
-
(Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
File transfer function (FTP Server)
Unable to execute the following commands to a program file.
� get
� mget
� rename
For details on this function, refer to the following manual. QnUCPU User's Manual (Communication via Built-in Ethernet Port) MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual (Built-In Ethernet Function)
4
-
Canceling the execution program protection status of a programmable controller CPU
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Unable to execute The SP.FTPPUT instruction to a program file.
5
File transfer function (FTP Client)
For details on this function, refer to the following manual.
-
MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual
(Built-In Ethernet Function)
EDITING PROGRAMS
Unable to execute the following commands from a target device to a program file.
File read
� 1824(File Copy) � 1827(File Open)
6
(Access from a module by � 1828(File Read)
-
using MC protocol)
For details on this function, refer to the following
manual.
MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference Manual
SETTING PARAMETERS
Unable to perform the following functions from a
GOT to a program file. � Backup
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
� Circuit monitor
File access from a GOT � SFC Monitor
-
� Ladder editing
For details on this function, refer to the following manual.
Manual for the GOT used
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
4.12.4 Considerations for a block password
4 - 85
4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Canceling the execution program protection status of a project
To cancel the execution program protection status of a project, all of the execution program protection settings need to be disabled.
Operating procedure
1. Unlock the block password. (Section 4.12.3)
2. Select a POU to disable the execution
program protection setting on the Block Password screen, and click the
button.
The Change Block Password screen is displayed.
3. Unselect the checkbox of "Execution
Program Protection Setting".
4. Click the
button.
Canceling the execution program protection status of a programmable controller CPU
To cancel the execution program protection status of a programmable controller CPU, all of the execution program protection settings in it need to be disabled.
Operating procedure
1. Read all programs from a programmable controller. (Section 15.1)
2. Unlock the block password. (Section 4.12.3)
3. Select a POU to disable the execution
program protection setting on the Block Password screen, and click the
button.
The Change Block Password screen is displayed.
4. Unselect the checkbox for "Execution
Program Protection Setting".
5. Click the
button.
6. Write all programs to a programmable controller. (Section 15.1)
7. Turn the programmable controller CPU OFF to ON, or reset it.
4 - 86
4.12.4 Considerations for a block password
4.12 Protecting POUs in Projects
Considerations for writing a program to a programmable controller
1
OVERVIEW
A project including a block password to which the execution program protection setting is enabled needs to be written to a programmable controller after completing the following functions. If the project is written before completing the following functions, an error occurs in GX Works2 or the programmable controller CPU.
GX Works2 functions
2
� Program memory batch transfer
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
� Online program change
� TC Settings change
Programmable controller CPU functions
� File access control by security key
� Backing up latch data to standard ROM
3
� Writing/Reading device data to standard ROM
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
� PLC module change by the SD memory card (restore)
� CPU module data restoration function
� Project data batch load
� IP address change function
� E-mail address registration/deletion of the E-mail send/receive function (SP.MLOPEADR instruction) (Only when back-up specification is enabled)
4
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
5
EDITING PROGRAMS
6
SETTING PARAMETERS
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
4.12.4 Considerations for a block password
4 - 87
4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
4.13 Managing Profiles
Q CPU L CPU ReFmXote HFeXad FX
Manage the registration status of GX Works2 profile (such as CSP+*1). Profiles are data in which the connected equipment information (such as module models) is stored. The connected modules are added to the module list on each configuration window by registering profiles. The previously registered connected equipment information is also updated. To register profiles, log on the personal computer as the user having the administrator authority, and close the project in advance.
*1 : For CSP+, refer to the homepage of CC-Link Partner Association (www.cc-link.org).
4.13.1 Registering profiles
Operating procedure
1. Select [Tool] [Profile Management] [Register].
The Register Profile screen is displayed.
2. Select the profile, and click the
button.
The profile is registered. The added module can be found in the module list on the configuration window when the project is opened next time. The following is the display of the CC-Link Configuration window.
A CC-Link module is added.
4 - 88
4.13.1 Registering profiles
4.13 Managing Profiles
1
OVERVIEW
Managing profiles A profile is managed by each personal computer, and shared within GX Works2 and other MELSOFT products. Therefore, a profile registered in GX Works2 is applied to other MELSOFT products.
Considerations for registering profiles
The profiles are the compressed files (such as *.zip, *.ipar, and *.cspp)
Register profiles without decompressing files. Considerations when using Windows� 7, Windows� 8, or Windows� 8.1
2
A profile may not be able to be registered to GX Works2 when using Windows� 7, Windows� 8, or Windows� 8.1. Set
the access authority for a login user to the following folders to which the access authority has not been set.
� The folder to which GX Works2 is installed.
Example) C:\Program Files\MELSOFT
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
If the access authority cannot be changed, right-click the GX Works2 program and select [Run as administrator]. To
activate the program from the shortcut menu, open the property of the shortcut menu and select "Run this program as
3
an administrator" under "Privilege Level" on the <<Compatibility>> tab.
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
4
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
5
EDITING PROGRAMS
6
SETTING PARAMETERS
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
4.13.1 Registering profiles
4 - 89
4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
4.13.2 Deleting profiles
Operating procedure
1. Select [Tool] [Profile Management] [Delete].
The Profile Delete screen is displayed.
2. Select the profile to be deleted, and click the
button.
4 - 90
4.13.2 Deleting profiles
1
OVERVIEW
5 EDITING PROGRAMS
2
This chapter explains the functions of the program editors used to edit sequence programs.
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
3
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
5.1
Programming
5.2
Label Programming
5.3
Considerations for Using Label Projects
5.4
Converting/Compiling Projects
4
5 - 2
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
5 - 2
5 - 4
5 - 9
5
EDITING PROGRAMS
6
SETTING PARAMETERS
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
5 - 1
5 EDITING PROGRAMS
5.1 Programming
Q CPU L CPU ReFmXote HFeXad FX
For programming in each project, refer to the following manuals: GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project) GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Structured Project)
5.2 Label Programming
Q CPU L CPU ReFmXote HFeXad FX
Programs can be standardized by using the label programming. This function is available when a new program is created with the selection of "Use Label". For projects without labels, the programming can be changed to the label programming by changing the project type. (Section 4.5)
Features of label programming
Since device assignment can be changed according to the equipment configuration by creating general-purpose programs with the label programming, the programs with labels can simply be utilized for other programs.
Programs can be created using labels without knowing the equipment configuration. Labels and actual devices are associated as the equipment configuration is determined. This
function allows easier creation of execution programs. By simply specifying a label assignment method, devices are assigned automatically with the
program compilation function without being aware of device names/device numbers. Debugging can be performed effectively by monitoring/debugging programs without
changing label names.
5 - 2
5.2 Label Programming
Terms used in label programming
1
The following are the terms used in the label programming.
OVERVIEW
Project view
Term
Description
Label project
New projects created with the selection of "Use Label" on the New Project screen. (Section 4.2.1)
Data of information such as programs, global labels, and local labels,
2
Symbolic information
required for label programming. (Section 15.1.5) These data are restored by writing/reading symbolic information to/
from a programmable controller CPU.
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Program
Program data written with applicable programming languages. For label projects, these are data included in symbolic information even when a program is created using devices only.
Programs executed on programmable controller CPUs.
Execution program
Devices are assigned to labels with compilation, and execution programs are created.
3
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
Actual device
Devices assigned to labels after compilation, or devices not written with labels.
Global label
Labels available for all program data when multiple program data are created in a project.
Local label
Labels available for each program data only. Labels and each program data are set one to one.
Device/label automaticassign setting
A setting of types and ranges of devices assigned to labels. GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project) GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Structured Project)
4
Compilation
An operation in which programs are converted to execution programs.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
The following is an image of writing/reading label project data to/from a programmable controller CPU
in GX Works2.
5
< Writing data to programmable controller CPU >
GX Works2 (Label project)
Symbolic information
EDITING PROGRAMS
Program
Program
Global label
Local label
Local label
6
Write to PLC
Programmable controller CPU
Execution program
Write to PLC
Write to PLC
Execution program
Symbolic information
SETTING PARAMETERS
Read from PLC
7
< Reading data from programmable controller CPU >
GX Works2 (Label project)
Symbolic information
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
Program Local label
Program Local label
Global label
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
5 - 3
5 EDITING PROGRAMS
5.3 Considerations for Using Label Projects
Q CPU L CPU ReFmXote HFeXad FX
This section explains the considerations for using label projects.
5.3.1 Editing programs
1) Label comments set on the label setting editor are displayed as comments to labels. Comments created on the device comment editor are not displayed. Up to 1024 characters can be set for label comments, however, the number of characters that can be displayed is 32.
2) When the same label is set for global label/local label, the label comment set for local label setting is displayed.
3) The index setting cannot be set when labels are used. Use actual devices to set the index setting.
Considerations when editing programs
1) When an instruction in which data are stored to multiple word devices is used as shown below, specify an array for the label in the storage destination of operation result. � Division (Storing values such as quotient and remainder of division) � Instructions such as the block data transfer instruction (BMOV)
[ Storage example when division is specified with array ]
a Setting
Label name Device type Number of elements Program
: Value_A : Array (word) : 2 : [/ D0 D1 Value_A]
b Operation result Operation result of [/ D0 D1 Value_A]
2 words required
Value_A[0] (Quotient)
Value_A[1] (Remainder)
5 - 4
5.3.1 Editing programs
5.3 Considerations for Using Label Projects
2) When setting arrays, be aware of device types and the number of elements in the data
1
storage destination.
If the setting is incorrect, the content of devices assigned to other labels may be overwritten.
OVERVIEW
[ Example of incorrect device type setting ]
a Setting
Label name
: Value_A
Device type
: Double word
Program
: [D* D0 D2 Value_A]
4 words required
2
b Operation result
Data register
Device range assigned to Value_A
Device range used by other labels
d [1] d [2] d [3] d [4] d [5]
Device range for storing operation result Overwritten device range
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
For the above example, assign 4 words to the label (Value_A) in the storage destination of
3
operation result.
To assign 4 words, set the following setting on the label setting editor.
Device type: Array (double word) Number of elements: 2
After compilation, the consecutive device ranges for 4 words are secured.
3) Do not overlap the device ranges which are stored as execution result of instruction when
assigning devices with global labels.
4
If the setting is incorrect, the content of devices assigned to other labels may be overwritten.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
[ Example of incorrect device setting ] a Setting
Label name Device type Number of elements Device Program
: Value_A : Array (Double word) : 2 : D100 : [D* D0 D2 Value_A]
Label name
: Value_B
4 words required
5
Device type
: Double word
Device
: D102
Program
: [* D10 D11 Value_B]
2 words required
EDITING PROGRAMS
b Operation result
Data register
Device set for Value_A
D100 D101
Device range for storing operation result
Device set for Value_B
D102 D103
Overwritten device range
D104
6
For the above example, assign the device of label (Value_B) to D104.
SETTING PARAMETERS
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
5.3.1 Editing programs
5 - 5
5 EDITING PROGRAMS
5.3.2
Writing programs to programmable controller CPU (Write to PLC/Online program change)
Writing symbolic information
1) In order to restore programs by reading symbolic information from the programmable controller CPU, write symbolic information. Symbolic information can be written by selecting the following item on the execution screen of Write to PLC/Online program change.
� Write to PLC: Symbolic Information
� Online program change: Write Symbolic Information to PLC
Note that symbolic information and execution programs can be written to separate memories. Specify the write destination memory for "Target Memory". The default setting of write destination memory for symbolic information can be changed in the option setting. Set "Setting for Save Destination of Symbolic Information to PLC" under [Tool] [Options] "Symbolic Information".
< Write to PLC > Symbolic information and all execution programs are selected when "Symbolic Information" is selected. The program which is consistent with the symbolic information can be written to the programmable controller CPU.
GX Works2 Symbolic information
Program 1 Local label
Program 2 Local label
< Online program change >
Programmable controller CPU
Execution program 1 Execution program 2
Perform the Write to PLC/Online program change operation on label program
Symbolic information
When the Write to PLC/Online program change operation is performed on execution programs only, program inconsistency occurs. This operation must be performed on both symbolic information and execution programs.
2) When writing data to a programmable controller CPU, the confirmation message asking "Do you want to overwrite?" may be displayed as corresponding to the execution programs. The symbolic information will not be written normally if "No" was selected. Perform the data write operation again, and complete the operation normally.
Writing execution programs only
1) When an area to store symbolic information cannot be secured on the programmable controller CPU, write execution programs only. Projects contain symbolic information must be kept securely on a personal computer.
2) Write execution programs without selecting the following item. � Write to PLC: Symbolic Information � Online program change: Write Symbolic Information to PLC
5 - 6
5.3.2 Writing programs to programmable controller CPU (Write to PLC/Online program change)
5.3 Considerations for Using Label Projects
5.3.3
Reading programs from programmable controller CPU (Read 1
from PLC)
OVERVIEW
Reading symbolic information
1) Execute the Read from PLC operation with a label project.
2
2) When reading data from a programmable controller CPU, specify the memory to which the symbolic information is stored for "Target Memory" of symbolic information.
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
3) Do not perform the Read from PLC operation on the symbolic information when the
symbolic information and the execution programs on the programmable controller CPU are
not consistent.
When the symbolic information is read with program inconsistency, the execution programs which are running on the programmable controller CPU cannot be restored. Check the date of the Write
3
to PLC operation which was performed on the symbolic information and the execution programs,
and prevent from performing the Read from PLC operation with program inconsistency. Date of the
data write operation can be checked with the column of "Last Change" on the Online Data
Operation screen for "Delete PLC Data".
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
4
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
The following are the considerations when symbolic information needs to be read with program inconsistency.
5
� Create backup data of symbolic information on a personal computer before performing the Read
from PLC operation.
EDITING PROGRAMS
Symbolic information on a personal computer will be overwritten with symbolic information on a
programmable controller CPU. To prevent from erasing the latest symbolic information, save the
project and create backup data of symbolic information.
� The following message is displayed when the Read from PLC operation is performed with
6
program inconsistency.
Follow the instruction described in the message.
SETTING PARAMETERS
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
5.3.3 Reading programs from programmable controller CPU (Read from PLC)
5 - 7
5 EDITING PROGRAMS Reading execution programs only
1) Do not read execution programs only. When only the execution programs needs to be read, read them with a project without labels. The following warning message is displayed when the execution programs created from the symbolic information are read with a project without labels.
5.3.4 Verifying programs
Symbolic information cannot be verified. The program verification operation can be performed on execution programs only.
5.3.5 Monitoring programs
Programs created with labels can be monitored. Programs with labels registered to the Watch window can be monitored.
5 - 8
5.3.4 Verifying programs
5.4 Converting/Compiling Projects
5.4 Converting/Compiling Projects
1
OVERVIEW
Q CPU L CPU ReFmXote HFeXad FX
This section explains how to convert/compile an edited project to convert it into the code executable
on the programmable controller CPU.
2
The type of conversion/compilation differs according to the project type as shown in the table below.
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Project type
Conversion/compilation type
Description
Build
Fix changes.
Simple project (without labels)
Online Program Change Rebuild All
Fix changes, and simultaneously, write the difference between the fixed
programs and the programs stored on the programmable controller CPU
to the programmable controller CPU.
3
Convert all programs.
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
Build
Convert and compile uncompiled data (programs, structures, labels and functions/function blocks).
Simple project (with labels)/ Structured project
Online Program Change
Convert and compile data, and simultaneously, write the difference between the fixed programs and the programs stored on the programmable controller CPU to the programmable controller CPU.
Rebuild All
Convert and compile all data (programs, structures, labels and functions/ function blocks).
4
For details, refer to the following manuals: Section 15.9 "Online Program Change" GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project) GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Structured Project)
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
5
EDITING PROGRAMS
6
SETTING PARAMETERS
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
5 - 9
5 EDITING PROGRAMS
MEMO
5 - 10
1
OVERVIEW
6
SETTING PARAMETERS 2
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
This chapter explains the setting items, operations on the setting screens, and common notes on parameter settings. For necessary information and details of settings, refer to the manuals of each module to be used.
3
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
6.1
Setting PLC Parameters
6.2
Setting Redundant Parameters
6.3
Setting Network Parameters
6.4
Setting Remote Password
6.5
Checking Parameters
6.6
Outputting Parameters to CSV Files
6.7
Setting default parameters
4
6 - 2
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
6 - 36
6 - 37
6 - 73
5
6 - 75
EDITING PROGRAMS
6 - 76
6 - 78
6
SETTING PARAMETERS
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
6 - 1
6 SETTING PARAMETERS
6.1 Setting PLC Parameters
This section explains how to set PLC parameters.
Screen display
Select Project view "Parameter" "PLC Parameter".
Display contents
Item Tab
Description The setting items are categorized under tabs according to their purpose. � The parameter setting status is displayed by different font colors of the tab names.
Font color Red Blue Magenta Dark blue
Setting status
Status that data is not set under the tab (Data must be set under the tab for operation.)
Status that data is set under the tab (A red tab name changes to blue after data is set.)
Default values (The user settings are not set under the tab.)
Values other than default values (A magenta tab name changes to dark blue after data is set.)
� Details of the setting items Section 6.1.1
6 - 2
6.1 Setting PLC Parameters
Screen button
1
Executes printing. (Section 11.7)
OVERVIEW
Executes print preview. (Section 11.9)
(Not supported by FXCPU)
2
Checks the X/Y setting made on the <<I/O Assignment>> tab of PLC parameter or in the network
parameter.
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Resets all setting items on the screen being open to their defaults.
Checks whether the user-set parameters on the screen being open are correct.
3
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
Considerations when changing PLC parameters For QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU, all programs need to be compiled when the following PLC parameters are changed.
� "Common Pointer No." and "Timer Limit Setting" on the <<PLC System>> tab
� "File Register" and "File for Local Device" on the <<PLC File>> tab � Settings on the <<Device>> tab
4
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Compiling all programs changes the device assignment to labels. Therefore, device values set before the program change remain on the device-assigned labels. Perform the following operations for a precautionary measure.
� For QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU
After writing data to the programmable controller CPU, reset the programmable controller CPU, clear all device memories including latches, clear all file registers, and switch the programmable controller CPU to RUN.
� For FXCPU After writing data to the programmable controller CPU, clear device memory using the PLC memory clear function,
5
and switch the programmable controller CPU to RUN.
EDITING PROGRAMS
(Section 20.4) For the considerations for compiling all programs, refer to the following manuals. GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project)/(Structured Project)
Function to apply the parameters of MELSOFT Navigator
� When GX Works2 is started up from MELSOFT Navigator, parameters that can be set by MELSOFT Navigator are
displayed with green background. � A parameter set by the function to apply the parameters of MELSOFT Navigator cannot be edited.
6
To edit it, select [Tool] [Options] "iQ Works Interaction" and select "Enable an editing of parameters set in
MELSOFT Navigator".
SETTING PARAMETERS
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
6 - 3
6 SETTING PARAMETERS
6.1.1 PLC parameter item list
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
The following table shows the applicable PLC parameter items for each programmable controller type. For details of each item, refer to the following manuals. (User's manuals and programming manuals of each CPU)
: Applicable �: Not applicable
Setting tab name
Communication Head Setting PLC Name PLC System*2 PLC File PLC RAS Boot File Program SFC Device I/O Assignment Multiple CPU Setting Built-in Ethernet Port Setting Ethernet Port Setting Built-in I/O Function Setting Serial Communication
Basic model QCPU
Q series
High Performance model QCPU/ Process CPU/
Universal model QCPU
Redund ant CPU
Remote I/O
module
L series
FX series
LCPU
Communication head module
FXCPU*1
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
*3
�
*4
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
*5
*5
�
�
�
�
�
�
*6
�
�
*4
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
*7
*8
�
�
�
�
�
Built-in Serial Setting
�
�
�
�
*9
�
�
Adapter Serial Setting
�
�
�
�
*4
�
�
Memory Capacity
�
�
�
�
�
�
Special Function Block
�
�
�
�
�
�
Positioning
�
�
�
�
�
�
Operation Setting
�
�
�
�
�
*1 : For FXCPU, PLC parameter setting items differ according to the programmable controller type. ( PLC parameter setting items for FXCPU)
*2 : For FXCPU, PLC System is separated into PLC System (1) and PLC System (2). *3 : Not supported by Q00UJ/Q00U/Q01U. *4 : Not supported by L02S/L02S-P. *5 : Not supported by Q00J/Q00UJ. *6 : For Built-in Ethernet port QCPU only *7 : For Q00/Q01 only *8 : For Q00UJ/Q00U/Q01U/Q02U/QnUD(H)CPU only *9 : For L02S/L02S-P only
6 - 4
6.1.1 PLC parameter item list
6.1 Setting PLC Parameters
PLC parameter setting items for QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU
1
1) PLC Name
OVERVIEW
Item
Description
Remarks
Label
Set a label (name and application) of the programmable controller CPU.
�
Comment
Set a comment for the label of the programmable controller CPU.
�
2
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
2) PLC System
Item
Description
Remarks
Timer Limit Setting
Set the time limit of the low-speed/high-speed timer.
�
Set the contacts for controlling RUN/PAUSE of the programmable
RUN-PAUSE Contacts
controller CPU. PAUSE contact only setting is not available. (RUN contact only or
�
3
RUN contact + PAUSE contact setting is available.)
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
Latch Data Backup Operation Valid Contact
Set the contact device for executing a latch data backup operation.
Set whether to back up all files on the standard RAM when executing a latch data backup operation.
Universal model QCPU/ LCPU only
High-speed Universal model QCPU only
Remote Reset
Set whether to allow a remote reset operation from GX Works2.
�
Output Mode at STOP to Set the status of output (Y) when the programmable controller is
RUN
switched from STOP to RUN.
�
4
Floating Point Arithmetic Processing
Set whether to perform floating-point processing in double precision.
High Performance model QCPU only
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Intelligent Function Module Setting
Set the interrupt pointer assignment of the module. Set the start I/O number and start SI number of the module.
�
Module Synchronization
Set whether to synchronize the start-up of the programmable controller CPU with that of the intelligent function module.
�
Built-in CC-Link Setting Set whether to set the built-in CC-Link.
L26-BT/L26-PBT only
5
Common Pointer No.
Set the start number of the common pointers used in the program.
Not applicable to Basic model QCPU
EDITING PROGRAMS
Points Occupied by Empty Slot
Set the number of points occupied by empty slots for the main base unit/extension base unit/block.
�
System Interrupt Settings
Set the start number of the interrupt counters. Set the execution interval for the interrupt pointers.
�
Set the fixed scan interval for high-speed interrupt pointers, high-
High Performance model QCPU/
6
speed I/O refresh, and high-speed buffer transfer.
Highspeed Universal
model QCPU only
SETTING PARAMETERS
Interrupt Program/Fixed Scan Program Setting
Set whether to perform high-speed execution of an interrupt program.
�
A-PLC Compatibility Setting
Set whether to use the MELSEC-A series special relays/special registers (SM1000/SD1000 to SM1299/SD1299).
Not applicable to Basic model QCPU/
Redundant CPU
Service Processing
Set the processing time and the number of times of service
Universal model QCPU/
7
Setting
processing.
LCPU only
PLC Module Change Setting
Set this to replace the CPU module using a memory card.
Universal model QCPU/ LCPU (except for L02S/
L02S-P) only
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
6.1.1 PLC parameter item list
6 - 5
6 SETTING PARAMETERS
3) PLC File
Item
Description Set the file register file to be used in the program.
File Register
Set whether to transfer data to the standard ROM when executing a latch data backup operation.
Comment File Used in a Command
Set the device comment file to be used in the program.
Initial Device Value
Set the device initial value file to be used on the programmable controller CPU.
File for Local Device
Set the local device file to be used in the program.
File used for SP.DEVST/ Set the device data ROM write/read instruction file to be used in the
S.DEVLD Instruction
program.
Remarks
�
Universal model QCPU(except for Highspeed Universal model
QCPU)/LCPU only
Not applicable to Basic model QCPU
�
Not applicable to Basic model QCPU
Universal model QCPU/ LCPU only
4) PLC RAS
Item
WDT (Watchdog Timer) Setting
Error Check Operating Mode When There is an Error
Operation History
Constant Scanning
Error History
Low Speed Program Execution Time Module Error History Collection (Intelligent Function Module)
Memory Check
Description Set the WDT of the programmable controller CPU. Set the WDT for an initial execution type program.
Set the WDT for a low-speed execution type program.
Set whether to detect specified errors. Set the programmable controller CPU operation mode when an error is detected.
Set whether to save the operation history of a CPU module.
Set the constant scan time. Set the storage destination for error histories of the programmable controller CPU.
Set the execution time of a low-speed program in every scan.
Set whether to collect the error history of the intelligent function module.
Set whether to check the memory of the program.
Remarks � �
High Performance model QCPU only
�
�
High-speed Universal model QCPU only*1
� High Performance model QCPU only High Performance model QCPU only
Universal model QCPU/ LCPU only
Process CPU/ Redundant CPU only
*1 : A CPU module whose function version is B and first five digits of the serial number are "19062" or higher.
6 - 6
6.1.1 PLC parameter item list
6.1 Setting PLC Parameters
5) Boot File
1
Item Boot Option
Boot File Setting
Description
Remarks
OVERVIEW
Set whether to clear the program memory when booting up.
Not applicable to Basic model QCPU
Set whether to write data in the memory card automatically to the standard ROM when booting up.
Not applicable to Basic model QCPU
Set the type, data name, transfer source drive, and transfer destination drive of the boot file.
Not applicable to Basic model QCPU
2
Set whether to boot up with the standard ROM.
Basic model QCPU only
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
6) Program
Item
Description
Remarks
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
Program
Set the file name and execution type (executing condition) for programs when several programs are written to the programmable controller CPU. Set the fixed scan interval (the execution interval of a fixed scan
Not applicable to Basic model QCPU
3
execution type program).
File Usability Setting button
Display the File Usability Setting screen.
Not applicable to Basic model QCPU
I/O Refresh Setting button
Display the I/O Refresh Setting screen.
High Performance
model QCPU only
4
7) SFC
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Item
SFC Program Start Mode
Start Conditions
Output Mode When the Block is Stopped
Description Set the start-up mode of an SFC program. Set the start-up condition of an SFC program. Set the SFC program output mode at block stop.
Remarks
�
�
�
5
EDITING PROGRAMS
6
SETTING PARAMETERS
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
6.1.1 PLC parameter item list
6 - 7
6 SETTING PARAMETERS
8) Device
Item Disable device write from external
Device Points
Latch (1) Start/End
Latch (2) Start/End
Local Device Start/End
Write Protection Start/ End File Register Extended Setting Indexing Setting for Device*2 Latch Interval Setting Pointer Extended Setting for AutomaticAssign Device
Description
Remarks
Set whether to prohibit device writing from an external device.
High-speed Universal model QCPU only*1
Set the number of points used for each device of the programmable controller CPU.
�
Set the latch range (start device number/end device number)
clearable with the RESET/L.CLR switch or a remote latch clear
�
operation.
Set the latch range (start device number/end device number) not
clearable with the RESET/L.CLR switch or a remote latch clear
�
operation.
Set the range (start device number/end device number) of devices used as a local device.
�
Set a device range to prohibit device writing from an external device High-speed Universal
(start device No./end device No.).
model QCPU only*1
Set the extended data register and extended link register.
Universal model QCPU/ LCPU only
Set the start number of Z to be 32-bit indexed, or use the index register ZZ for 32-bit index setting.
Universal model QCPU/ LCPU only
Set the device latch interval to be performed by the set interval or by High-speed Universal
each scan.
model QCPU only
Set whether to use the pointer extended setting. When using the pointer extended setting, set the extended points.
LCPU (L06/L06-P/L26/ L26-P/L26-BT/ L26-PBT) only
*1 : A CPU module whose function version is B and first five digits of the serial number are "19062" or higher. *2 : "Indexing Setting for ZR Device" is displayed for programmable controller CPUs other than high-speed universal
model QCPUs.
9) I/O Assignment
Item I/O Assignment Base Setting
Description Set the type, model, number of occupied I/O points, and start I/O number of each module mounted on the base unit/block.
Set the switch settings of the programmable controller CPU.
Set the switch settings of the intelligent function module. Set the model and the number of slots of the base unit, the model of the power supply module, and the model of the extension cable.
Remarks
�
Universal model QCPU/ LCPU only �
Not applicable to LCPU
6 - 8
6.1.1 PLC parameter item list
6.1 Setting PLC Parameters
10) Multiple CPU Setting
1
Item
Description
Remarks
OVERVIEW
No. of PLC
Set the number of programmable controller CPUs used in the multiple CPU system.
Set the operation mode of the multiple CPU system when a stop
error occurs in any of the programmable controller CPU No. 2 to No.
�
Operation Mode
4. The multiple CPU system stops when a stop error occurs in the CPU
2
No. 1.
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Host Station
Multiple CPU Synchronous Startup Setting
Set the CPU number for the host CPU. Select the CPU modules to be started up synchronously.
Universal model QCPU (excluding Q00UJ/ Q00U/Q01U/Q02U) only
Online Module Change
Set whether to allow Online module change in the multiple CPU system.
I/O Sharing When Using Set whether to retrieve the I/O status of the I/O module or intelligent
Multiple CPUs
function module controlled by other programmable controller CPUs.
Not applicable to Q00U/ Q01U/Q02U
�
3
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
Communication Area Setting (Refresh Setting)
Set the CPU shared memory to enable data sharing among multiple CPUs. (Usable devices: B, M, Y, D, W, R, and ZR)
�
Multiple CPU High Speed Transmission Area Setting
Set the user setting area, auto refresh, assignment confirmation, and system area.
Universal model QCPU (excluding Q00U/Q01U/
Q02U) only
4
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
5
EDITING PROGRAMS
6
SETTING PARAMETERS
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
6.1.1 PLC parameter item list
6 - 9
6 SETTING PARAMETERS
11) Built-in Ethernet Port Setting
Item
Description
Remarks
IP Address Setting
Set the IP address and the input format of the IP address.
Communication Data Code
Select the Binary code or ASCII code for communication.
Open Setting button/ Ethernet Conf. button
Set the protocol, open system, and host station port number.
� For High-speed Universal model QCPU/LCPU (except for L02S/ L02S-P) When selecting "Set Open Setting in Ethernet Configuration window", the Open Setting button is switched to the Ethernet Conf. button. Set the communication settings to the Ethernet device on the Ethernet Configuration window. The equipment configuration is displayed graphically.
Ethernet Built-in CPU only
FTP Setting button
Select whether to use the FTP function.
FTP Client Setting button
E-mail Setting button
Set a login name, password, and FTP server connection target settings (FTP server name, FTP server address).
Set a password, e-mail address, and mail server name.
LCPU (except for L02S/ L02S-P) only
DNS Setting button
Set the address of DNS server.
Time Setting button
Set whether to use the SNTP function, and set the timing of setting the time.
Ethernet Built-in CPU only
MELSOFT Connection Set whether to use the MELSOFT Connection Extended function, Extended Setting button and set a network number and a station number when using it.
High-speed Universal model QCPU only
CC-Link IEF Basic Setting button
Set whether to use CC-Link IE Field Network Basic, and set the network configuration setting and the refresh setting.
High-speed Universal model QCPU/Ethernet
Builtin LCPU only
Simple PLC Communication Setting
Set the communication pattern and the communication settings.
High-speed Universal model QCPU*1/
Ethernet Builtin LCPU*2 only
IP Packet Transfer Setting
Set whether to use the IP Packet Transfer function.
Universal model QCPU (except for Q00UJ/ Q00U/Q01U/Q02U)/
LCPU (except for L02S/ L02S-P) only
*1 : Modules with function version B and the first five digits of the serial number are '20042' or higher are supported. *2 : Modules with a serial number whose first five digits are '13042' or higher are supported.
6 - 10
6.1.1 PLC parameter item list
6.1 Setting PLC Parameters
12) Built-in I/O Function Setting
1
Item
Description
Remarks
OVERVIEW
Positioning
Set the parameters of the positioning axis 1 setting and positioning axis 2 setting.
High-speed Counter
Set the operation mode of high-speed counter CH1 setting and highspeed counter CH2 setting.
LCPU only
Input Signal
Set the input signal function, input response time, and interrupt processing condition.
2
Output Signal
Select the output signal function and error time output mode.
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
13) Serial Communication
Item
Description
Transmission Speed
Set the transmission speed.
Sum Check
Set the sum check.
Transmission Wait Time Set the transmission wait time.
Online Change
Set whether to allow Online program change.
Remarks
�
3
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
14) Built-in Serial Setting
Item
Select Function
Transmission Setting
Communication Speed Setting
Serial Communication Function
Predefined Protocol Support Function
Description Select the function to be used. Set the transmission setting of the communication protocol.
Set the communication speed.
Set the transmission wait time and online change.
Set the start device which stores the operation status of the communication protocol.
15) Adapter Serial Setting
Remarks
4
�
5
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Item
Adapter Type
Select Function
Transmission Setting
Communication Speed Setting
Station No. Setting (0 -- 31)
Serial Communication Function
Predefined Protocol Support Function
Description Select the adapter type to be used. Select the function to be used. Set the transmission setting of the communication protocol. Set the communication speed.
Set the station number for multi-drop connection.
Set the transmission wait time and online change. Set the start device which stores the operation status of the communication protocol.
Remarks
6
�
7
SETTING PARAMETERS
EDITING PROGRAMS
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
6.1.1 PLC parameter item list
6 - 11
6 SETTING PARAMETERS
PLC parameter setting items for communication head module
1) Communication Head Setting
Item
CC-Link IE Field Network Setting
SSCNET III/H Network Setting
Description Set the operation mode of the network.
Set the network number of the module. Set the station number of the module. Set whether to hold (store) the error history and system error history on a flash ROM at power OFF or reset.
Set the operation mode of the network. Set whether to hold (store) the error history and system error history on a flash ROM at power OFF or reset.
2) PLC Name
Item Label Comment
Description
Set a label (name and application) of the programmable controller CPU.
Set a comment for the label of the programmable controller CPU.
3) PLC System
Item Remote Reset
Description Set whether to allow a remote reset operation from GX Works2.
4) PLC RAS
Item
Module Error History Collection (Intelligent Function Module)
Description
Set whether to collect the error history of the intelligent function module.
5) Operation Setting
Item
Assignment Method
Forwarding Parameter between Devices
Description
Select the assignment method of devices to be transferred.
Set transmission source devices and transmission destination devices.
6) I/O Assignment
Item I/O Assignment
Description Set the type, model, number of occupied I/O points, and start I/O number of each module mounted on the base unit. Set the switch settings of the programmable controller CPU.
Set the switch settings of the intelligent function module.
Remarks CC IE Field head
module only
SSCNET III/H head module only
Remarks �
Remarks �
Remarks �
Remarks �
Remarks �
6 - 12
6.1.1 PLC parameter item list
6.1 Setting PLC Parameters
PLC parameter setting items for remote I/O module
1
1) PLC system
OVERVIEW
Item
Description
Remarks
Module Synchronization
Set whether to synchronize the start-up of the programmable controller CPU with that of the intelligent function module.
�
Points Occupied by Empty Slot
Set the number of points occupied by empty slots for the main base unit/extension base unit.
�
2
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
2) PLC RAS
Item
Description
Remarks
Error Check
Set whether to detect specified errors.
�
Operating Mode When Set the programmable controller CPU operation mode when an error
There is an Error
is detected.
�
3
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
3) Operation Setting
Item
Assignment Method
Forwarding Parameter between Devices
Description
Select the assignment method of devices to be transferred.
Set transmission source devices and transmission destination devices.
4) I/O Assignment
Remarks
�
4
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Item
Description
Remarks
Set the type, model, number of occupied I/O points, and start I/O
number of each module mounted on the base unit.
I/O Assignment
Set the switch settings of the programmable controller CPU.
�
Set the switch settings of the intelligent function module.
5
Base Setting
Set the model and the number of slots of the base unit, the model of the power supply module, and the model of the extension cable.
�
EDITING PROGRAMS
6
SETTING PARAMETERS
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
6.1.1 PLC parameter item list
6 - 13
6 SETTING PARAMETERS
Utilizing existing data to set parameters of multiple CPU Parameters for multiple CPU can be set by utilizing existing data by clicking the <<I/O Assignment>>/<<Multiple CPU Setting>> tab. Specify the project to be utilized, read the message, and then execute the function.
button on the
Reading mounting status of programmable controller CPU The mounting status of the programmable controller CPU can be read and overwritten to the current parameters by
clicking the function.
button on the <<I/O Assignment>> tab. Read the message and execute the
"Indexing Setting for ZR Device" on the <<Device>> tab. When "Use ZZ" is set for the 32-bit index setting, the ZZ device cannot be used or monitored independently in the program.
X0 [DMOV K0 ZR10ZZ0 ]
Usable
X1
[DMOV K0 ZZ0
]
Not usable
To confirm the current value of the ZZ device, specify Z and set the display format to 32-bit integer, on the Device/ Buffer Memory Batch Monitor screen.
Program settings Executing conditions set in the program setting of the PLC parameter are applied to "Program Setting" on the Project view. Program settings can also be set on the Project view. For details of program setting on the Project view, refer to Section 4.2.1
<Setting screen for PLC parameter>
<Project view>
6 - 14
Execution types set in the Program can be confirmed.
6.1.1 PLC parameter item list
6.1 Setting PLC Parameters
PLC parameter setting items for FXCPU
1
OVERVIEW
For FXCPU, PLC parameter setting items differ according to the programmable controller type. 1) PLC Name
Item Title
Description
Remarks
FX1, FX0N, FX1S, FX1N, FXU, FX2N, FX3S, FX3G,
2
Set a program title to be stored on the programmable controller CPU. FX3U, FX1NC, FX2C,
FX2NC, FX3GC, and FX3UC
only
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
2) PLC System (1)
Item
Description
Remarks
Battery Less Mode
Set this to operate the programmable controller CPU without the memory backup battery.
FX2N, FX3U, FX2NC, and FX3UC only
3
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
Battery Mode
Set this to operate the programmable controller CPU with the memory backup battery.
FX3G and FX3GC only
FX1S, FX1N, FX2N,
MODEM Initialized
Select the modem initialization command for the remote access to the FX3S, FX3G, FX3U, FX1NC,
programmable controller CPU.
FX2NC, FX3GC, and FX3UC
only
FX1S, FX1N, FX2N,
4
RUN Terminal Input
Select the input number to use the input (X) of the programmable controller CPU as the external RUN/STOP terminal.
FX3S, FX3G, FX3U, FX1NC, FX2NC, FX3GC, and FX3UC
only
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
3) PLC System (2)
Item
Description
Channel selection
Select a channel to be the connection target. Applicable to FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, and FX3UC only.
Operate Communication Setting
Set whether to enable the communication setting.
Protocol*1
Select the communication protocol.
Data Length*1
Select the data length.
Parity*1
Select the parity.
Stop Bit*1
Select the stop bit.
Transmission Speed*1
Select the transmission speed.
Header*1
Set the header.
Terminator*1
Set this to enable the terminator.
Control Line*1
Set this to enable the control line.
H/W Type*1
Select the cable type used in the communication.
Control Mode
Display the control mode.
Sum Check*1
Set this to add the sum check.
Transmission Control Procedure*1
Select the transmission control procedure.
Station Number Setting*1
Set the station number.
Time Out Judge Time*1
Set the timeout period.
*1 : Not applicable when "Operate Communication Setting" is OFF.
Remarks
5
6
FX1S, FX1N, FX2N, FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX1NC, FX2NC, and FX3UC only
7
8
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
SETTING PARAMETERS
EDITING PROGRAMS
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
6.1.1 PLC parameter item list
6 - 15
6 SETTING PARAMETERS
4) Device
Item Device
Set the latch range.
Description
Remarks
FX1, FXU, FX2N, FX3U, FX2C, FX2NC, and FX3UC only
5) Memory Capacity
Item
Memory Capacity*1
Symbolic Information Capacity*2
Description
Remarks
Select the memory capacity of the programmable controller CPU. Not applicable to FX0, FX0S, FX0N, and FX1S.
FX0S, FX0, FX1, FX0N, FX1S, FX1N, FXU, FX2N, FX3S, FX3G, FX3U, FX1NC, FX2C, FX2NC, FX3GC, and FX3UC only
� Display the symbolic information capacity of a built-in memory based
on the setting value of the memory capacity. � Display the symbolic information capacity of a memory cassette by FX3U and FX3UC only
clicking the
button.
Comments Capacity
Set the comment capacity. Not applicable to FX0 and FX0S.
File Register Capacity
Set the file register capacity. Not applicable to FX0, FX0S, and FX1.
Program Capacity Display the capacity for sequence programs.
Special Function Memory Capacity
Set whether to use the Special Function Block Settings, Positioning Instruction Settings, and Built-in CC-Link/LT. Applicable to FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, and FX3UC only.
FX0S, FX0, FX1, FX0N, FX1S, FX1N, FXU, FX2N, FX3S, FX3G, FX3U, FX1NC, FX2C, FX2NC, FX3GC, and FX3UC only
*1 : When the symbolic information is saved in a built-in memory or a memory cassette, the symbolic information is deleted by changing the memory capacity and writing the parameters. In this case, write the symbolic information again.
*2 : This item is not printed with the batch print function or the print window function.
6) Special Function Memory Capacity
Item Special Function Block
Positioning
Description
Set the initial value of special extension modules/blocks. Set the Built-in CC-Link/LT Setting.
Special Function Block Settings Set the initial value of BFM.
� Set the bias speed, max. speed, creep speed, zero return speed, acceleration time, deceleration time, and interruption input of DVIT instruction for each axis.
� Set the details of the positioning table for each axis.
Remarks FX3U and FX3UC only
FX3G, FX3U, FX3GC, and FX3UC only
6 - 16
6.1.1 PLC parameter item list
6.1 Setting PLC Parameters
7) Ethernet Port Setting
1
Item
Description
Remarks
OVERVIEW
Channel
Select whether to connect the Ethernet port, and if the port is connected, select a channel. Only FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, and FX3UC can be set.
IP Address Setting*1 Set the IP address and the input format of the IP address.
Communication Data Code
Select the Binary code or ASCII code for communication.
2
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Disable direct connection to MELSOFT
Do not respond to search for CPU on network
Set whether to disable the direct connection with MELSOFT.
FX3S, FX3G, FX3U, FX3GC, and FX3UC only
Disable to respond to the Find CPU function of MELSOFT Connection.
Open Setting button Set the protocol, open system, and host station port number.
3
Time Setting button
Set whether to use the SNTP function, and set the timing of setting the time.
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
Log Record Setting Set the storage location for error logs on the Log Record Setting
button
screen.
*1 : The IP address can be set not only on PLC parameter settings but also with the IP address change function. In this case, the settings of IP address change function will be given priority. FX3U-ENET-ADP User's Manual
4
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
5
EDITING PROGRAMS
6
SETTING PARAMETERS
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
6.1.1 PLC parameter item list
6 - 17
6 SETTING PARAMETERS
6.1.2 Checking duplications of X/Y assignment among parameters
Check duplications of X/Y assignment among parameters.
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
Screen display
Select Project view "Parameter" "PLC Parameter"
.
Display contents
XY No.
Item
Network
Type
I/O Assignment
Slot Module Type Points
Model Name
Duplication
Description Display the I/O number. Display the content set in the network parameter.
n: Slot number of the module (excluding Ethernet)
Display on Network column PLC network/CC IE (Slot n)
Remote I/O Net (Slot n) CC-Link (Slot n) Blank
Description MELSECNET, CC-Link IE MELSECNET/H (Remote Master) CC-Link Not set.
Display whether the I/O assignment setting is set in the PLC parameter.
Display on I/O Assignment column I/O Assignment Blank
Description I/O assignment is set. I/O assignment is not set.
Display the slot, module type, number of occupied I/O points, and model name when the I/O assignment setting is set in the PLC parameter. Display the I/O assignment status as shown in the table below when the I/O assignment setting in the PLC parameter is not set and X/Y devices are assigned in the network parameter.
Item "Slot" to "Points" "Model Name"
Description Assignment of X devices Assignment of Y devices
Display the module in which the first duplication is detected by parameter check.
Display on Duplication column
MNET/CC IE (Slot 1) to
MNET/CC IE (Slot 16)
CC-Link
Description
Network parameter of MELSECNET or CCLink IE (slot 1 to slot 16)
CC-Link remote I/O
6 - 18
6.1.2 Checking duplications of X/Y assignment among parameters
6.1 Setting PLC Parameters
Screen button
1
Writes data on the Acknowledge XY Assignment screen to a CSV file. (Section 6.6)
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
When a setting screen other than PLC parameter setting screen is being opened
2
When the MELSECNET/CC IE/Ethernet Module Configuration screen or the CC-Link Module Configuration screen is
displayed, since the setting is not completed, set data of the previous setting are checked for duplications.
Priority in the parameter check The following table shows the priority in when GX Works2 checks the parameter settings.
Priority
Display
1
I/O assignment
2
MELSECNET or CC-Link IE Controller Network (slot 16) network refresh parameter
3
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
3
MELSECNET or CC-Link IE Controller Network (slot 15) network refresh parameter
�
�
�
�
�
�
17
MELSECNET or CC-Link IE Controller Network (slot 1) network refresh parameter
18
CC-Link remote I/O
Refresh devices which are not displayed
4
Due to network specifications, the number of refresh devices which are set to the following stations in the CC-Link
parameter cannot be recognized in GX Works2. Therefore, they are not displayed on the Acknowledge XY Assignment
screen.
� Local station
� Sub-master station
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
5
EDITING PROGRAMS
6
SETTING PARAMETERS
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
6.1.2 Checking duplications of X/Y assignment among parameters
6 - 19
6 SETTING PARAMETERS
6.1.3 Setting open setting on Ethernet Configuration window
*1
*2
Q CPU L CPU Remote HFeXad FX
*1 : High-speed Universal model QCPU only *2 : Not supported by L02S and L02S-P.
Set the equipment configuration of Ethernet by dragging and dropping from the module list. Select "Set Open Setting in Ethernet Configuration window" on the <<Built-in Ethernet Port Setting>> tab of PLC parameter in advance.
For the online operations on the Ethernet Configuration window, refer to the following manual. iQ Sensor Solution Reference Manual
Screen display
Project view "Parameter" "PLC parameter" <<Built-in Ethernet Port Setting>> Click the button.
List of devices Device map area
6 - 20
6.1.3 Setting open setting on Ethernet Configuration window
6.1 Setting PLC Parameters
Operating procedure
1
OVERVIEW
1. Select an Ethernet device from the module list, and drag and drop it to the 'list of
devices' or 'device map area'.
An Ethernet device is added to the 'list of devices'. The added Ethernet device is displayed on the 'device map area'.
2
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Drag & Drop
3
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
2. Set the items on the screen.
4
Item
Description
No.
Display the connection number.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Model Name
Display the model name of Ethernet device.
Communication Method
This setting is not required for QCPUs (Q mode), LCPUs, head modules, remote I/O modules, and FXCPUs.
Protocol
Set the protocol for the open setting.
Fixed Buffer Send/Receive Setting
This setting is not required for QCPUs (Q mode), LCPUs, head modules, remote I/O modules, and FXCPUs.
5
PLC
�
EDITING PROGRAMS
IP Address
The IP address of the host station specified on the <<Built-in Ethernet Port Setting>> tab of PLC parameter is displayed.
Port No.
Set the port number of the host station set to open setting.
Sensor/Device MAC Address
�
A blank is displayed.
6
The MAC address is displayed when the configuration is detected by executing the
automatic detection of connected devices.
SETTING PARAMETERS
Host Name
Set the host name of Ethernet device.
IP Address
Set the IP address of Ethernet device.
Port No.
Set the port number of Ethernet device.
Sub-net Mask
Set the subnet mask of Ethernet device.
Default Gateway Existence Confirmation
Set the default gateway of Ethernet device.
7
This setting is not required for QCPUs (Q mode), LCPUs, head modules, remote I/O
modules, and FXCPUs.
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
3. Select [Close with Reflecting the Setting].
Exit the settings of the Ethernet Configuration window.
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
6.1.3 Setting open setting on Ethernet Configuration window
6 - 21
6 SETTING PARAMETERS
Screen button
Detect the actual system configuration automatically and apply it to the Ethernet Configuration window. (Automatic detection of connected devices) For operations and considerations for setting "device map area" by executing the automatic detection of connected devices, refer to the following manual. iQ Sensor Solution Reference Manual
/ Moves the position of the Ethernet device selected in the 'list of devices' up/down.
6 - 22
6.1.3 Setting open setting on Ethernet Configuration window
6.1 Setting PLC Parameters
Considerations when the selected status of "Set Open Setting in Ethernet
1
Configuration window" is changed
OVERVIEW
The following are the considerations when editing open setting by changing selected/cleared status.
Selecting the item
The open setting set on the Built-in Ethernet Port Open Setting screen is applied on the Ethernet
Configuration window automatically.
2
� The connections to which the open system is set are displayed as general-purpose Ethernet
modules on the Ethernet Configuration window.
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
� The open system unset connection numbers are not applied to the Ethernet Configuration window,
and the remaining connection numbers are moved forward to the location of the unset number.
Therefore, when the connection number is specified in the program, add the number of general-
purpose Ethernet modules which are moved forward so as to not shift the already set existing connection number.
3
� When the parameter is set on the Ethernet Configuration window, the file size of parameter to be
written to the programmable controller CPU increases.
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
Clearing the item
The open setting set on the Ethernet Configuration window is applied on the Built-in Ethernet Port
Open Setting screen automatically.
� For iQSS-compatible devices, the open system is changed to MC protocol, and only the protocol
4
and port number of the programmable controller are set to Built-in Ethernet Port Open Setting
screen.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Considerations for setting of the "IP Address" column of "PLC" on 'list of devices'
The following are the considerations when setting the "IP Address" column of "PLC" of 'list of devices'
5
on the Ethernet Configuration window.
EDITING PROGRAMS
When the IP address on the <<Built-in Ethernet Port Setting>> tab is changed
When the IP address of the host station is changed on the <<Built-in Ethernet Port Setting>> tab of
PLC parameter after setting the parameter on the Ethernet Configuration window, the IP address
does not match between the host station and the programmable controller CPU.
In this case, open the Ethernet Configuration window.
6
The "IP Address" column of "PLC" is changed to the IP address that has been set on the <<Built-in
Ethernet Port Setting>> tab.
SETTING PARAMETERS
When the automatic detection of connected devices is executed
When setting the configuration of the iQSS-compatible device by executing the automatic detection
of connected devices, the detected IP address is set to the "IP Address" column of "PLC". If the
iQSS-compatible device has been communicated with other programmable controller CPU, the different IP address as the host station is set.
7
In this case, set the same IP address on the "IP Address" column of "PLC" as the one set on the
<<Built-in Ethernet Port Setting>> tab.
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
6.1.3 Setting open setting on Ethernet Configuration window
6 - 23
6 SETTING PARAMETERS
Replacing general SLMP module
Replace a general SLMP module with a specific Ethernet device.
Operating procedure
1. Select the general SLMP module to be replaced in the 'list of devices' on the
Ethernet Configuration window.
2. Select [Ethernet Configuration] [Change Module] [Replace General SLMP
Module].
The Replace General SLMP Module screen is displayed.
List of modules to be replaced
3. Set the items on the screen.
Item Replacement Target
List of modules to be replaced
Replacement Candidate
Description
�
The general SLMP modules placed on the 'list of devices' are displayed. Select the check box(es) on the "No." column of the general SLMP module to be replaced. Two or more devices can be selected.
Select the Ethernet device to be replaced with.
6 - 24
6.1.3 Setting open setting on Ethernet Configuration window
6.1 Setting PLC Parameters
4. Click the
button.
1
The general SLMP module in the 'list of devices' is replaced with the Ethernet device selected for "Replacement Candidate". Also, the general SLMP module displayed on the 'device map area' is replaced with the Ethernet device selected for "Replacement Candidate".
OVERVIEW
2
The general SLMP module is replaced to the selected Ethernet device.
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
3
Screen button
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
Selects all devices displayed on "Replacement Target".
Cancels the selected status of all devices selected for "Replacement Target".
4
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Changing to general SLMP module
Change an Ethernet device to a general SLMP module.
Operating procedure
5
1. Select an Ethernet device to be changed in the 'list of devices' on the Ethernet
Configuration window.
EDITING PROGRAMS
2. Select [Ethernet Configuration] [Change Module] [Change to General SLMP
Module].
The Ethernet device is changed to the general SLMP module.
6
Checking system configuration of Ethernet
SETTING PARAMETERS
Check whether the equipment configuration of Ethernet is correct after setting the open setting on the Ethernet Configuration window.
Operating procedure
7
� Select [Ethernet Configuration] [Check] [System Configuration].
The system configuration of Ethernet is checked. Check the result of the system configuration check on the Output window.
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
6.1.3 Setting open setting on Ethernet Configuration window
6 - 25
6 SETTING PARAMETERS
Copying/pasting Ethernet devices
Copy/paste a selected Ethernet device.
Operating procedure
1. Select "No." or "Model Name" of the Ethernet device to be copied from the 'list of
devices'.
The corresponding row is selected.
Select "No." or "Model Name"
2. Select [Edit] [Copy].
The selected Ethernet device is copied.
3. Select [Edit] [Paste].
The copied Ethernet device is added to the last row of the 'list of devices'.
Deleting Ethernet devices
Delete a selected Ethernet device.
Operating procedure
1. Select "No." or "Model Name" of the Ethernet device to be deleted from the 'list of
devices'.
The corresponding row is selected.
Select "No." or "Model Name"
2. Select [Edit] [Delete].
The selected Ethernet device is deleted.
6 - 26
6.1.3 Setting open setting on Ethernet Configuration window
6.1 Setting PLC Parameters
Displaying/hiding Module List/Output window
1
Display/hide the Module List/Output window.
OVERVIEW
Operating procedure
� Select [View] [Docking Window] [Module List]/[Output].
2
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Displaying Module List/Output window The Module List/Output window can be displayed as a docked display/floating display. (Section 3.2.4 "Docking windows")
3
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
4
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
5
EDITING PROGRAMS
6
SETTING PARAMETERS
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
6.1.3 Setting open setting on Ethernet Configuration window
6 - 27
6 SETTING PARAMETERS
6.1.4
Setting the station information in the CC-Link IEF Basic configuration window
*1
*2
Q CPU L CPU Remote HFeXad FX
*1 : High-speed Universal model QCPU only *2 : Built-in Ethernet port LCPU only
Set the station information and the equipment configuration of CC-Link IE Field Network Basic.
Operating procedure
1. Select Project view "Parameter" "PLC parameter" <<Built-in Ethernet Port
Setting>>
2. Set the IP address, the subnet mask pattern, and the default router IP address in
"IP Address Setting".
3. Click the
button and select "Use the CC-Link IEF Basic" on
the "CC-Link IEF Basic Setting" screen.
4. Click the
button.
The CC-Link IEF Basic Configuration window is displayed.
List of stations
Device map area
6 - 28
6.1.4 Setting the station information in the CC-Link IEF Basic configuration window
6.1 Setting PLC Parameters
5. Select the module from the module list, and drag and drop it to the 'list of stations'
1
or 'device map area'.
The slave station (CC-Link IEF Basic module) is added to the 'list of stations'. The added module is displayed on the 'device map area'.
OVERVIEW
2
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Drag and drop
3
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
6. Set the items on the screen.
Item Connected Count List of stations
No. Model Name
STA#1
Description
4
Display the number of slave stations controlled by the master station (programmable controller CPU).
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Display a station on CC-Link IE Field Network Basic in a list format.
"0" is displayed for master station, and 'slave station number' is displayed for slave station.
Display the model name of the master station/slave station. When the module information
does not exist, "Module without profile" is displayed.
"0" is displayed for master station, and a number between 1 to 16 is displayed for a slave
5
station.
Station Type
Display the station type of the master station/slave station.
EDITING PROGRAMS
RX/RY Setting
Display the points of RX/RY, the start device number, and the end device number. Click the cell and select the number of occupied stations*1 displayed by clicking .
RWw/RWr Setting Display the points of RWw/RWr, the start device number, and the end device number.
Group No.
Set the group number.
6
Display the setting status of a reserved station for a slave station.
RSVD STA
Click the cell and change the setting displayed by clicking .
SETTING PARAMETERS
IP Address
Set the IP address of a slave station.
Sub-net Mask
Set the subnet mask of a slave station.
MAC Address
The MAC address is displayed when the configuration is detected by executing the automatic detection of connected devices.
Comment
Display the information set to comment 1 on the Property screen.
7
Device map area
Display the equipment configuration of CC-Link IEF Basic graphically.
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
*1 : The number of points used differs depending on the number of occupied stations.
1 station: RX/RY 64 points, RWw/RWr 32 points
2 stations: RX/RY 128 points, RWw/RWr 64 points
3 stations: RX/RY 192 points, RWw/RWr 96 points
4 stations: RX/RY 256 points, RWw/RWr 128 points
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
6.1.4 Setting the station information in the CC-Link IEF Basic configuration window
6 - 29
6 SETTING PARAMETERS
7. Click [Close with Reflecting the Setting].
Exit the settings on the CC-Link IEF Basic Configuration window.
Screen button
Detect the actual system configuration automatically and apply it to the CC-Link IEF Basic Configuration window. (Automatic detection of connected devices) For operations and considerations for setting "device map area" by executing the automatic detection of connected devices, refer to the following manual. CC-Link IE Field Network Basic Reference Manual
Sets some items on the Link Scan Setting screen. ( Setting the link scan setting)
/ Moves the position of the module selected in the 'list of stations' up/down.
Setting for a CC-Link IEF Basic connected module When a non-Mitsubishi device or a device which is not displayed on the module list is used, drag and drop a CC-Link IEF Basic connected module. A CC-Link IEF Basic connected module can be replaced with a specific module by registering a profile. (Section 4.13.1) ( Replacing a CC-Link IEF Basic connected module)
Display of a module name on the 'device map area' "Object Name" on the Properties screen is displayed for each module name on the 'device map area'.
6 - 30
6.1.4 Setting the station information in the CC-Link IEF Basic configuration window
6.1 Setting PLC Parameters
Replacing a CC-Link IEF Basic connected module
1
Replace a CC-Link IEF Basic module with another one.
OVERVIEW
Operating procedure
1. Select a CC-Link IEF Basic connected module to be replaced in the 'list of stations'
on the CC-Link IEF Basic configuration window.
2
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
2. Select [CC-Link IEF Basic Configuration] [Change Module] [Replace CC-Link
IEF Basic Connected Module].
The Replace CC-Link IEF Basic Connected Module screen is displayed.
3
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
List of modules to be replaced
4
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
5
EDITING PROGRAMS
3. Set the items on the screen.
Item
Description
6
Replacement Target
Display the station type and the points for the RX/RY setting of the module selected on the CC-Link IEF Basic configuration window.
SETTING PARAMETERS
List of modules to be replaced
Display modules with the same condition as the one selected for "Replacement Target". Select the checkbox(es) on the "Station No." column of the module to be replaced. Two or more modules can be selected.
Replacement Candidate
Select a module to be replaced with.
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
6.1.4 Setting the station information in the CC-Link IEF Basic configuration window
6 - 31
6 SETTING PARAMETERS
4. Click the
button.
The CC-Link IEF Basic connected module in the list of stations is replaced with the module selected for "Replacement Candidate". The CC-Link IEF Basic connected module displayed on the 'device map area' is replaced with the module selected for "Replacement Candidate".
The CC-Link IEF Basic connected module is replaced to the selected device.
Screen button
Selects all devices displayed on "Replacement Target".
Cancels the selected status of all devices selected for "Replacement Target".
Changing to a CC-Link IEF Basic connected module
Change a module of a slave station to a CC-Link IEF Basic connected module.
Operating procedure
1. Select a module to be changed in the 'list of stations' on the CC-Link IEF Basic
configuration window.
2. Select [CC-Link IEF Basic Configuration] [Change Module] [Change to CC-
Link IEF Basic Connected Module].
The module is changed to the CC-Link IEF Basic connected module.
6 - 32
6.1.4 Setting the station information in the CC-Link IEF Basic configuration window
6.1 Setting PLC Parameters
Setting the link scan setting
1
Set the time out time and the number of retries to detect the disconnection of a slave station.
OVERVIEW
Screen display
Click the
button on the CC-Link IEF Basic Configuration window.
2
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
3
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Item
Slave Station Disconnect Detected Setting
�
Description
4
Time-out period (10 to 65535) Set the timeout time for slave station disconnection detection.
Counts
Set the number of retries for slave station disconnection detection. Click the cell and change the setting by clicking .
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Slave Station Disconnect Detected Image Diagram Display
The operation image regarding the slave station disconnection detection period is
displayed. Refer to this at the setting of "Time-out Period".
5
2. Click the
button.
The settings are applied to the CC-Link IEF Basic Configuration window.
EDITING PROGRAMS
Checking system configuration of CC-Link IEF Basic
6
Check whether the equipment configuration of CC-Link IEF Basic is correct after setting the station
information on the CC-Link IEF Basic Configuration window.
SETTING PARAMETERS
Operating procedure
� Select [CC-Link IEF Basic Configuration] [Check] [System Configuration].
The system configuration of CC-Link IEF Basic is checked.
7
Check the result of the system configuration check on the Output window.
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
6.1.4 Setting the station information in the CC-Link IEF Basic configuration window
6 - 33
6 SETTING PARAMETERS
Copying/pasting modules
Copy/paste a selected module.
Operating procedure
1. Select "No." or "Model Name" of the module to be copied on the 'list of stations'.
The corresponding row is selected.
Select "No." or "Model Name"
2. Select [Edit] [Copy].
The selected module is copied.
3. Select [Edit] [Paste].
The copied module is added to the last row of the 'list of stations'.
Deleting module
Delete a selected module.
Operating procedure
1. Select "No." or "Model Name" of the module to be deleted on the 'list of stations'.
The corresponding row is selected.
Select "No." or "Model Name"
2. Select [Edit] [Delete].
The selected module is deleted.
6 - 34
6.1.4 Setting the station information in the CC-Link IEF Basic configuration window
6.1 Setting PLC Parameters
Displaying/hiding Module List/Output window
1
Display/hide the Module List/Output window.
OVERVIEW
Operating procedure
� Select [View] [Docking Window] [Module List]/[Output].
2
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Displaying Module List/Output window The Module List/Output window can be displayed as a docked display/floating display. (Section 3.2.4 "Docking windows")
3
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
4
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
5
EDITING PROGRAMS
6
SETTING PARAMETERS
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
6.1.4 Setting the station information in the CC-Link IEF Basic configuration window
6 - 35
6 SETTING PARAMETERS
6.2 Setting Redundant Parameters
This section explains how to set redundant parameters.
*1
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
*1 : Redundant CPU only
Screen display
Select Project view "Parameter" "Redundant Parameters".
Screen button
For the screen buttons, refer to Section 6.1.
Redundant parameter setting items
1) Operation mode setting
Item Start Mode Setting
Standby System Watch Setting
Debug Mode Setting Backup Mode Setting
Description Set the device status when the system is powered ON or reset. Set whether to check errors on the standby system. If an error occurs, the error can be checked with the PLC diagnostics function. Set whether to start an operation in the debug mode. Set whether to check the operating status consistency.
2) Tracking setting
Item Tracking Device Setting Tracking Characteristics Setting
Description Select a setting method for the tracking device. Set the tracking transfer mode.
6 - 36
6.3 Setting Network Parameters
6.3 Setting Network Parameters
1
OVERVIEW
This section explains how to set the network parameters.
Only the parameter settings of the following network are supported for LCPU and FXCPU.
LCPU : CC-Link IE Field Network, Ethernet, and CC-Link
FXCPU: CC-Link
2
Ethernet/CC-Link IE/MELSECNET parameter setting
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Screen display
Select Project view "Parameter" "Network Parameter" "Ethernet/CC IE/MELSECNET"/
"CC IE Field" .
3
The screen below is a screen for MELSECNET/CC-Link IE/Ethernet module configuration.
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
4
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
5
Screen button
EDITING PROGRAMS
(Not supported by LCPU)
Displays the Interlink Transmission Parameters screen.
Checks the I/O assignment setting set in the PLC parameter and the status of X/Y devices assigned
6
in the network parameter. (Section 6.1.2)
Displays the Routing Information screen.
SETTING PARAMETERS
Displays the Assignment Image screen of the refresh parameters.
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
6 - 37
6 SETTING PARAMETERS
(Redundant CPU only)
Displays the Group Setting screen.
Displays the Help - Network Setting screen for network range assignment.
Deletes the set parameters.
Checks whether the set parameters are correct.
Executes printing. (Section 11.7)
Executes print preview. (Section 11.9)
6 - 38
6.3 Setting Network Parameters
CC-Link parameter setting
1
OVERVIEW
Screen display
Select Project view "Parameter" "Network Parameter" "CC-Link". The following is an example of setting screen when QCPU (Q mode) is selected.
2
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
3
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
4
Screen button
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Executes printing. (Section 11.7)
Executes print preview. (Section 11.9)
5
(Not supported by FXCPU)
Displays the details of the I/O assignment settings. (Section 6.1)
EDITING PROGRAMS
Deletes the set parameters.
6
Checks whether the set parameters are correct.
SETTING PARAMETERS
Function to apply the parameters of MELSOFT Navigator
� Parameter items which can be set from MELSOFT Navigator are displayed in green when GX Works2 is started from
MELSOFT Navigator. � Parameters which are set by the function to apply the parameters of MELSOFT Navigator cannot be edited. To edit,
7
select "Enable an editing of parameters set in MELSOFT Navigator" under [Tool] [Options] "iQ Works
Interaction".
Number of columns displayed on the CC-Link Module Configuration screen (QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU only) A number of columns can be changed by selecting 4 or 2 columns for "Display number of columns for CC-Link list setting" under [Tool] [Options] "Parameter".
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
6 - 39
6 SETTING PARAMETERS
6.3.1 Network parameter item list
*1
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
*1 : CC IE Field head module only
The following table shows the applicable network parameter types for each programmable controller type. For details of each item, refer to the following manuals. (User's manuals and reference manuals of each module)
: Applicable : Not applicable
Network type
Basic model QCPU
Q series
High Performance model QCPU/ Process CPU/
Redundant CPU
Universal model QCPU
Remote I/O module
L series
FX series
LCPU
CC IE Field head module
FXCPU
CC-Link IE Controller Network*1
�
�
�
�
CC-Link IE Field Network
�
�
�
�
�
MELSECNET/10
�
�
�
�
MELSECNET/H
�
�
�
�
MELSECNET/H Remote I/O
�
�
�
�
�
Ethernet
�
�
CC-Link
*2
*1 : CC-Link IE Controller Network modules with the function version D and a serial number whose first 5 digits are '10041' or higher are supported. For Process CPU and Redundant CPU, CC-Link IE Controller Network modules with a serial number whose first five digits are '10042' or higher is required.
*2 : Supported by FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, and FX3UC only.
6 - 40
6.3.1 Network parameter item list
6.3 Setting Network Parameters
CC-Link IE setting
1
Item
Description
OVERVIEW
Network Type
Specify the network type (CC-Link IE) whose parameters are to be set.
Start I/O No.
Set the start I/O number.
Network No.
Set the network number.
Total Stations
Set the total number of (slave) stations.
2
Group No.*1
Set the group number.
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Station No.
Set the station number of a module.
Mode
Set the mode.
Specify I/O Master Station*1
Set the I/O master station.
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
Network Range Assignment/
Specify Reserved Station*1
Specify the reserved station.
3
Network
Equal Assignment Assign the number of link device points of all stations equally.
Configuration Settings (Common parameters)
Identical Point Assignment
Shared Group Setting*2
Assign the equal number of link device points based on the total number of set stations. Set the shared group of the group cyclic function.
Supplementary Set the link scan mode setting, loopback function setting, block data assurance per
Setting
station, and operation setting for returning.
4
Network Operation Settings*3
Set the parameter name, data link faulty station setting, output setting during CPU STOP, IP address setting, and other settings.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Refresh Parameters
Set refresh parameters.
Interrupt Settings
Set the device code, detection method, interrupt condition, interrupt (SI) number, and other settings.
Specification method for station number
Set whether to set a station number by program or by parameter. The station number can be specified by program only when the normal station or the local station is selected in a project for Universal model QCPU/LCPU.
5
Operate with parameter of host/ master station*4
Set whether to operate link device points and assignments of the slave station with the parameter set on the host station or the parameter set on the master station. This item can be set for sub-master station only.
EDITING PROGRAMS
Redundant Setting
Set the system B mode.
*1 : For CC-Link IE Controller Network only
*2 : For CC-Link IE Controller Network of Universal model QCPU only
*3 : For CC-Link IE Controller Network of Universal model QCPU (except for Q00UJ/Q00U/Q01U/Q02U), IP address setting only
6
*4 : For CC-Link IE Field Network only
SETTING PARAMETERS
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
6.3.1 Network parameter item list
6 - 41
6 SETTING PARAMETERS
MELSECNET/10 and MELSECNET/H setting
Item
Description
Network Type
Specify the network type (MELSECNET/10 mode or MELSECNET/H mode) whose parameters are to be set.
Start I/O No.
Set the start I/O number.
Network No.
Set the network number.
Total Stations
Set the total number of (slave) stations.
Group No.
Set the group number.
Mode
Set the mode.
Specify I/O Master Station
Set the I/O master station.
Network Range Assignment (Common parameters)
Specify Reserved Station
Specify the reserved station.
Equal Assignment Assign the number of link device points of all stations equally.
Identical Point Assignment
Assign the equal number of link device points based on the total number of set stations.
Supplementary Setting
Set the transient setting, low-speed cyclic setting, and other settings.
Station Inherent Parameters
Set station inherent parameters.
Refresh Parameters
Set refresh parameters.
Interrupt Settings
Set the device code, detection method, interrupt condition, interrupt (SI) number, and other settings.
Operation at reconnection*1
Set whether to operate the station as a control station or a normal station when the line is reconnected.
Baud Rate Setting*1
Set the baud rate on modules that support the twist bus.
Redundant Setting
Set the system B mode.
*1 : For MELSECNET/H (control station) and MELSECNET/H extended mode (control station) only
6 - 42
6.3.1 Network parameter item list
6.3 Setting Network Parameters
MELSECNET/H Remote I/O setting
1
Item
Description
OVERVIEW
Network Type
Set "MELSECNET/H (remote master)".
Start I/O No.
Set the start I/O number.
Network No.
Set the network number.
Total Stations
Set the total number of (slave) stations.
2
Mode
Set the mode.
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Network Range Assignment (Common parameters)
Specify Reserved Station
Specify the reserved station.
Equal Assignment Assign the number of link device points of all stations equally.
Supplementary Setting
Set the constant scan time and the maximum number of return stations in one link scan.
Refresh Parameters Interrupt Settings
Set refresh parameters.
3
Set the device code, detection method, interrupt condition, interrupt (SI) number, and
other settings.
Redundant Setting
Set the system B mode.
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
Ethernet setting
Item
Description
4
Network Type
Specify "Ethernet".
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Start I/O No.
Set the start I/O number.
Network No.
Set the network number.
Group No.
Set the group number.
Station No.
Set the station number.
Mode
Set the mode.
5
Operation Setting
Set the common items for the module.
Initial Setting
� Set data communication timer values. � Set IP addresses for DNS servers.
EDITING PROGRAMS
Open Setting
Set parameters required for the open processing.
Router Relay Parameter
Set parameters for the router relay function of Ethernet.
Station No. IP Information
Set information to link network number and station number with IP address for
communication target station or relay station when communicating with another station programmable controller CPU via Ethernet.
6
FTP Parameters*1
Set FTP parameters such as the login name, password, command input monitoring timer, and PLC monitoring timer.
SETTING PARAMETERS
General Setting Set the password, e-mail address, and inquiry interval for receiving mails.
Mail Server Name Set the SMTP server, POP server, and IP addresses for both servers.
E-mail Setting*1
Send Mail Address Setting
News Setting
Set addresses of send mail. Set the notifying condition.
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
Interrupt Settings*1
Set the device code, detection method, interrupt condition, interrupt (SI) number, and other settings.
Redundant Setting*2
Set the system B, system switching settings when communication error occurs, and other settings.
*1 : Not supported by remote I/O module.
*2 : The redundant setting cannot be set when "Ethernet (Extension Base)" is selected. (Different IP addresses cannot be
assigned to each system.)
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
6.3.1 Network parameter item list
6 - 43
6 SETTING PARAMETERS
QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU CC-Link setting
Item
Description
Number of Modules
Set the number of CC-Link master/local modules.
Set the station information in the CCLink configuration window
Select this to set station information on the CC-Link Configuration window.
Start I/O No.
Set the start I/O number.
Operation Setting
Set the Parameter Name, Data Link Faulty Station Setting, Case of CPU Stop Setting, Number of Occupied Stations, Expanded Cyclic Setting, Block Data Assurance per Station, and Auto Detect Setting of the Connected Device.
Type
Set the station type such as a master/local/standby master station.
Station No.*1
Set the station number.
Master Station Data Link Type
The setting is fixed to "PLC Parameter Auto Start" for the master station.
Mode
Set the mode.
Transmission Speed*1
Set the transmission speed.
Total Module Connected
Set the total number of remote stations, local stations, intelligent device stations, and/or standby master stations connected to the master station.
Remote Input (RX)
Remote Output (RY) Remote Register (RWr)
Set the devices to refresh the data of RX, RY, RWr, and RWw.
Remote Register (RWw)
Ver.2 Remote Input (RX)
Ver.2 Remote Output (RY) Ver.2 Remote Register (RWr)
Set the devices to refresh the data of RX, RY, RWr, and RWw for the remote network additional mode.
Ver.2 Remote Register (RWw)
Special Relay (SB) Special Register (SW)
Set the devices to refresh the data of SB and SW.
Retry Count
Set the number of retries in case a communication error occurs.
Automatic Reconnection Station Count
Set the number of remote stations, local stations, intelligent device stations, and/or standby master stations that can be returned to the system in one link scan.
Standby Master Station No.
Specify the station number of the standby master station.
PLC Down Select
Specify the data link status when an error occurs on the programmable controller CPU on the master station.
Scan Mode Setting
Specify whether to synchronize the link scan with the sequence scan.
Delay Time Setting
Set the link scan interval delay time.
Station Information Setting/ CC-Link Configuration Setting*2
The setting screen and the setting items differ according to the selected/cleared status of "Set the station information in the CC-Link configuration window".
� Cleared Set station information on the CC-Link Station Information screen. Set the settings such as the station type and the number of occupied stations. A number of rows can be changed by selecting 16 or 8 rows for "Display number of rows for CC-Link station information" under [Tool] [Options] "Parameter".
� Selected Set station information on the CC-Link Configuration window. In addition to the setting items on the CC-Link Station Information screen, settings such as the module type are set. The equipment configuration is displayed graphically.
Remote Device Station Initial Setting
Set the target station number and procedure registration (such as operating condition and executing condition).
Interrupt Settings*3
Set the device code, detection method, interrupt condition, interrupt (SI) number, and other settings.
*1 : For LCPU and CC IE Field head module only.
*2 : With the station information set on the CC-Link Configuration window, only the corresponding setting items on the CCLink Station Information screen are printed when executing the batch print or print window function. The equipment configuration on the CC-Link Configuration window is not printed.
*3 : Not supported by CC IE Field head module and remote I/O module.
6 - 44
6.3.1 Network parameter item list
6.3 Setting Network Parameters
FXCPU CC-Link setting
1
This parameter setting is supported by FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, and FX3UC only.
OVERVIEW
Item
Description
Connection Block
Select "Set" to set a CC-Link master block.
Special Function Block No. Operation Setting
Specify the special function block number (0 to 7).
Set the Parameter Name, Data Link Disorder Station, and Case of CPU Stop Setting.
2
Type
This setting is fixed to "Master Station" when "Set" is selected for "Connection Block".
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Master Station Data Link Type
This setting is fixed to "PLC Parameter Auto Start" when "Set" is selected for "Connection Block".
Mode
Set the mode.
Total Module Connected Retry Count
Set the total number of remote I/O stations, remote device stations, and/or intelligent
device stations (including reserve stations) connected to the master station.
Set the number of retries in case a communication error occurs.
3
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
Automatic Reconnection Station Count
Set the number of remote I/O stations, remote device stations, and/or intelligent device stations that can be returned to the system in one link scan.
PLC Down Select
Specify the data link status when an error occurs on the programmable controller CPU on the master station.
Set the station type, exclusive counts, and other settings.
Station Information Setting
A number of rows can be changed by selecting 16 or 8 rows for "Display number of
Remote Device Station Initial Setting
rows for CC-Link station information" under [Tool] [Options] "Parameter".
Set the target station number and procedure registration (such as operating condition and executing condition).
4
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
5
EDITING PROGRAMS
6
SETTING PARAMETERS
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
6.3.1 Network parameter item list
6 - 45
6 SETTING PARAMETERS
6.3.2
Setting station information on CC IE Field Configuration window
Q CPU L CPU ReFmXote HFeXad FX
Network configuration and equipment configuration of CC-Link IE Field Network can be set when "CC IE Field (Master Station)", "CC IE Field (Sub-Master Station)", or "CC IE Field (Motion Master Station)" is set in the CC-Link IE Field Network parameter. Select "Set the network configuration setting in the CC IE Field Configuration window" on the MELSECNET/CC-Link IE/Ethernet Module Configuration screen in advance.
Screen display
Click the Configuration screen.
button on the MELSECNET/CC-Link IE/Ethernet Module
List of stations
Device map area
Operating procedure
1. Select the module from the module list, and drag and drop it to the 'list of stations'
or 'device map area'.
The slave station is added to the 'list of stations'. The added module is displayed on the 'device map area'.
Drag and drop
6 - 46
6.3.2 Setting station information on CC IE Field Configuration window
6.3 Setting Network Parameters
2. Set the items on the screen.
1
Item Mode Setting Assignment Method Link Scan Time (Approx.) List of stations
Module No.
Model Name
Station No.
Station Type
RX/RY Setting
RWw/RWr Setting
Refresh Device
Reserved/Error Invalid Station Alias Comment Station-specific mode setting Device map area
Description
OVERVIEW
Select the mode by clicking .
Specify the assignment method by clicking .
Display the approximate value of link scan time.
Display the list of stations which configure CC-Link IE Field Network.
2
"0" is displayed for master station, and 'slave station number' is displayed for slave station.
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Display the module type of master station/slave station. When the module information does not exist, "Module without profile" is displayed. Set this item after registering the profile.
"0" is displayed for master station, and a number between 1 to 120 is displayed for a slave station.
Display the station type of master station/slave station. Click the cell and select the station type displayed by clicking .
3
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
Set the RX/RY assignment for each slave station. Set RX/RY in 16-point unit.
Set the RWw/RWr assignment for each slave station. Set RWw/RWr in 4-point unit.
Display devices of the CPU module to which link devices of master/local module are link-
refreshed.
This item is displayed only when the refresh parameter is set.
4
Display the setting status of reserved station/error invalid station for slave station.
Click the cell and change the setting by clicking .
Display the device name.
Display the information set to comment 1 on the Property screen.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Display the station-specific mode of the module.
Display the equipment configuration of CC-Link IE Field Network graphically.
5
3. Select [CC IE Field Configuration] [Close with Reflecting the Setting].
Exit the settings of the CC IE Field Configuration window.
EDITING PROGRAMS
Screen button
/
6
Moves the position of the module selected in the 'list of stations' up/down. The station number does
not change even when the position of the module is moved.
SETTING PARAMETERS
*1
Detect the actual system configuration automatically and apply it to the CC IE Field Configuration
window. (Automatic detection of connected devices)
For operations and considerations of setting station information and equipment configuration with the automatic detection of connected devices, refer to the following manual.
7
iQ Sensor Solution Reference Manual
*1 : Supported by the following CPU modules.
� High-speed Universal model QCPUs (function version is B and the first five digits of the serial number are '17052'
or higher)
� LCPUs
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
6.3.2 Setting station information on CC IE Field Configuration window
6 - 47
6 SETTING PARAMETERS
*1
Read the station information and equipment configuration from the actual system configuration, and
verify with the CC IE Field configuration currently displayed in GX Works2.
For the procedure for verifying system configuration with a connected device and its considerations,
refer to the following manual.
iQ Sensor Solution Reference Manual
*1 : Supported by the following CPU modules.
� High-speed Universal model QCPUs (function version is B and the first five digits of the serial number are '17052'
or higher)
Considerations when the selected status of "Set the network configuration setting in the CC IE Field configuration window" is changed The following are the considerations when editing the network configuration by changing selected/cleared status.
� Selecting the item The network configuration of "CC IE Field (Master Station)" or "CC IE Field (Sub-Master Station)" set on the MELSECNET/CC-Link IE/Ethernet Module Configuration screen is set on the CC IE Field Configuration window automatically. Note that, all modules of the network configuration are changed to general-purpose CC IE Field modules. The file size of parameter to be written to the programmable controller CPU increases.
� Clearing the item The network configuration set on the CC IE Field Configuration window is set on the MELSECNET/CC-Link IE/ Ethernet Module Configuration screen automatically.
Setting general-purpose CC IE Field modules When a non-Mitsubishi module or a module which is not displayed on the module list is used, drag and drop a generalpurpose CC IE Field module. A general-purpose CC IE Field module can be replaced with a specific module by registering a profile. (Section 4.13.1), ( Replacing general-purpose CC IE Field module)
Display of module name on the 'device map area' "Object Name" on the Properties screen is displayed for each module name on the 'device map area'.
6 - 48
6.3.2 Setting station information on CC IE Field Configuration window
6.3 Setting Network Parameters
Replacing general-purpose CC IE Field module
1
Replace a general-purpose CC IE Field module of slave station with a specific module.
OVERVIEW
Operating procedure
1. Select the general-purpose CC IE Field module to be replaced in the 'list of stations'
on the CC IE Field Configuration window.
2
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
2. Select [CC IE Field Configuration] [Change Module] [Replace General CC IE
Field Module].
The Replace General CC IE Field Module screen is displayed.
3
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
List of modules to be replaced
4
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
5
EDITING PROGRAMS
3. Set the items on the screen.
Item
Description
Replacement Target Station Type
� Display the station type selected on the CC IE Field Configuration window.
6
SETTING PARAMETERS
List of modules to be replaced
Display modules with the same condition as the one selected for "Replacement Target". Select the check box(es) on the "Station Number" column of the module to be replaced. Two or more modules can be selected.
Replacement Candidate
Select the module to be replaced with.
Replace the object name of
replacement target module to Click the checkbox when replacing the object name of a replacement target module to
the model name selected in replacement candidate
the model name selected from "Replacement Candidate".
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
6.3.2 Setting station information on CC IE Field Configuration window
6 - 49
6 SETTING PARAMETERS
4. Click the
button.
The general-purpose CC IE Field module in the list of stations is replaced with the module selected for "Replacement Candidate". The general-purpose CC IE Field module displayed on the 'device map area' is replaced with the module selected for "Replacement Candidate".
The general-purpose module is replaced with the selected module.
Screen button
Selects all modules displayed on "Replacement Target".
Cancels the selected status of all modules selected for "Replacement Target".
Replacing to general-purpose CC IE Field module
Replace a module of slave station to a general-purpose CC IE Field module.
Operating procedure
1. Select a module to be replaced in the 'list of stations' on the CC IE Field
Configuration window.
2. Select [CC IE Field Configuration] [Change Module] [Change to General CC IE
Field Module].
The module is changed to the corresponding general-purpose CC IE Field module.
Changing transmission path method
Change the transmission path method to line/star or ring.
Operating procedure
� Select [CC IE Field Configuration] [Change Transmission Path Method] [Line/
Star]/[Ring].
The transmission path method is changed to the selected transmission path method.
Transmission path method and loopback function setting The change of transmission path method and the loopback function setting on the CC IE Field Supplementary Setting screen are linked. When line/star is selected, the loopback function setting is disabled. When ring is selected, the loopback function setting is enabled.
6 - 50
6.3.2 Setting station information on CC IE Field Configuration window
6.3 Setting Network Parameters
Setting supplementary functions
1
Set the link scan mode setting, loopback function setting, block data assurance per station, and operation setting for returning.
OVERVIEW
Operating procedure
1. Select [CC-IE Field Configuration] [Supplementary Setting].
2
The CC IE Field Supplementary Setting screen is displayed.
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
3
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
4
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
2. Set the items on the screen.
5
Item
Description
EDITING PROGRAMS
Link Scan Mode Setting
Set the link scan mode.
Loopback Function Setting
Set whether to use the loopback function. Select this item when the transmission path method is ring.
Block Data Assurance per Station
Set whether to assure block data per station for link refreshes between the CPU module and the master/local module. Select this when including a remote device station in the network configuration.
6
Operation Setting for Returning
Set whether to operate the station as a master station or a sub-master station when the station is reconnected.
SETTING PARAMETERS
3. Click the
button.
The settings are applied to the CC IE Field Configuration window.
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
Transmission path method and loopback function setting
The change of transmission path method and the loopback function setting on the CC IE Field Supplementary Setting
screen are linked.
When "Use" is cleared for the loopback function setting, line/start is selected for the setting under [CC IE Field
Configuration] [Change Transmission Path Method]. When "Use" is selected for the loopback function setting, ring is selected for the setting under [CC IE Field
8
Configuration] [Change Transmission Path Method].
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
6.3.2 Setting station information on CC IE Field Configuration window
6 - 51
6 SETTING PARAMETERS
Assigning link devices equally
Assign link device points of all stations equally.
Operating procedure
1. Select [CC IE Field Configuration] [Equal Assignment].
The Equal Assignment screen is displayed.
2. Set the items on the screen.
Item RX/RY Equal Assignment
Start Station End Station Start No. Total Points Assigned RWw/RWr Equal Assignment Start Station End Station Start No. Total Points Assigned
Description
Set the start station number to be assigned equally. Set the last station number to be assigned equally. Set the start number of the link device to be assigned equally. Set the total number of link device points to be assigned equally.
Set the start station number to be assigned equally. Set the last station number to be assigned equally. Set the start number of the link device to be assigned equally. Set the total number of link device points to be assigned equally.
3. Click the
button.
Link devices are assigned equally to the slave stations within the set range.
6 - 52
6.3.2 Setting station information on CC IE Field Configuration window
6.3 Setting Network Parameters
Assign the equal number of link device points
1
Assign the equal number of link device points based on the total number of set stations.
OVERVIEW
Operating procedure
1. Select [CC IE Field Configuration] [Identical Point Assignment].
The Identical Point Assignment screen is displayed.
2
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
3
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
2. Enter the number of points to be assigned.
4
3. Click the
button.
The equal number of points is assigned per stations.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Checking system configuration of CC-Link IE Field Network
5
Check whether the equipment configuration of CC IE Field is correct after setting the network configuration on the CC IE Field Configuration window.
EDITING PROGRAMS
Operating procedure
� Select [CC IE Field Configuration] [Check] [System Configuration].
The system configuration of CC-Link IE Field Network is checked.
6
Check the result of the system configuration check on the Output window.
SETTING PARAMETERS
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
6.3.2 Setting station information on CC IE Field Configuration window
6 - 53
6 SETTING PARAMETERS
Performing parameter processing of slave station
Perform the processing relates to parameters of slave stations. The applicable parameter processing differs according to the target slave station. The setting status and setting values of the Parameter Processing of Slave Station screen can be saved in the CSV file format.
Considerations when performing parameter processing Check the following before performing the parameter processing. � The network parameter of master station matches with the start I/O number of PLC parameter. � The network parameter of programmable controller CPU matches with the actual CC IE Field configuration.
Operating procedure
1. Select a module to which parameters are applied from the 'list of stations' on the
CC IE Field Configuration window.
2. Select [CC IE Field Configuration] [Online] [Parameter Processing of Slave
Station].
The Parameter Processing of Slave Station screen is displayed. The following is a screen of NZ2GF2B1-16D.
6 - 54
6.3.2 Setting station information on CC IE Field Configuration window
6.3 Setting Network Parameters
3. Set the items on the screen.
1
Item
Description
OVERVIEW
Target Module Information
Display the slave stations on which the parameter processing is performed.
Method selection
Select a processing to be performed from the list displayed by clicking .
Parameter Information Process Option
Display the parameters of the slave station. The selected parameters are the targets of the selected process to be executed.
Set this for the processing selected for "Method selection".
2
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
4. Click the
button.
The parameter processing is performed.
Screen button
3
Selects all parameters of "Parameter Information".
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
Cancels the selected status of all the parameters selected for "Parameter Information".
Deletes all values displayed in the "Read Value" column of "Parameter Information".
4
Deletes all values displayed in the "Write Value" column of "Parameter Information".
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Imports the selected status and writing values of "Parameter Information" saved in the CSV file format in advance.
5
Saves the selected status and writing values of "Parameter Information" in the CSV file format.
EDITING PROGRAMS
6
SETTING PARAMETERS
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
6.3.2 Setting station information on CC IE Field Configuration window
6 - 55
6 SETTING PARAMETERS
Performing commands for slave stations
Perform commands for slave stations. Applicable commands differ according to the target slave station.
Operating procedure
1. Select a module on which a command is performed from the 'list of stations' on the
CC IE Field Configuration window.
2. Select [CC IE Field Configuration] [Online] [Command Execution of Slave
Station].
The Command Execution of Slave Station screen is displayed. The following is a screen of NZ2GF2B1-16D.
3. Set the items on the screen.
Item Target Module Information Method selection
Command Setting
Description Display the information of target module on which the command is performed.
Select a processing to be performed from the list displayed by clicking . Set the writing values set for the processing selected for "Method selection". For details, refer to the manual of the slave station being used.
4. Select the
button.
The command processing is performed. The result of the processing is displayed on "Execution Result".
6 - 56
6.3.2 Setting station information on CC IE Field Configuration window
6.3 Setting Network Parameters
Copying/pasting modules
1
Copy/paste a selected module.
OVERVIEW
Operating procedure
1. Select "Module No." or "Model Name" of the CC-Link module to be copied from the
'list of stations'.
2
The corresponding row is selected.
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Select "Module No."
or "Model Name".
3
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
2. Select [Edit] [Copy].
The selected module is copied.
3. Select [Edit] [Paste].
4
The copied module is added to the last row of the 'list of stations'.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Selected status of modules All cells on the 'list of stations' can be selected by selecting [Edit] [Select All].
5
Deleting modules
EDITING PROGRAMS
Delete a selected module.
Operating procedure
1. Select "Module No." or "Model Name" of the module to be deleted from the 'list of
6
stations'.
The corresponding row is selected.
SETTING PARAMETERS
Select "Module No."
7
or "Model Name".
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
2. Select [Edit] [Delete].
The selected module is deleted.
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
6.3.2 Setting station information on CC IE Field Configuration window
6 - 57
6 SETTING PARAMETERS
Displaying/hiding Module List/Output/Supplementary Information window
Display/hide the Module List/Output/Supplementary Information window.
Operating procedure
� Select [View] [Docking Window] [Module List]/[Output]/[Supplementary
Information].
Displaying Module List/Output/Supplementary Information window The Module List/Output/Supplementary Information window can be displayed as a docked display/floating display. (Section 3.2.4 "Docking windows")
Displaying/hiding the object name in the list of stations
Display/hide the object name in the list of stations.
Operating procedure
� Select [View] [Object Name Display].
6 - 58
6.3.2 Setting station information on CC IE Field Configuration window
6.3 Setting Network Parameters
6.3.3 Setting station information on CC-Link Configuration
1
window
OVERVIEW
*1
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
*1 : CC IE Field head module only
Station information and equipment configuration of CC-Link can be set when master station or master
2
station (duplex function) is set in the CC-Link network parameter.
Select "Set the station information in the CC-Link configuration window" on the CC-Link network
parameter screen in advance.
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Screen display
Click the
button on the network parameter screen of CC-Link.
3
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
List of stations
4
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Device map area
5
EDITING PROGRAMS
Operating procedure
6
1. Select a module from the module list, and drag and drop it to the 'list of stations' or
'device map area'.
A slave station is added to the 'list of stations'. The added module is displayed on the 'device map area'.
SETTING PARAMETERS
7
Drag and drop
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
6.3.3 Setting station information on CC-Link Configuration window
6 - 59
6 SETTING PARAMETERS
2. Set the items on the screen.
Item Mode Setting TX Speed Link Scan Time (Approx.) List of stations
Module No./Station No.
Model Name
Station Type
Version
# of STA Occupied Expanded Cyclic Setting Remote Station Points Reserved/Err Invalid STA
Intelligent Buffer Selection (decimal-word unit)
Station-specific mode setting Device map area
Description
Select the mode by clicking .
Select the transmission speed by clicking .
Display the approximate value of link scan time.
Display the list of stations which configure CC-Link network.
Display the number of slave stations and station numbers set to the master station. "0/0" is displayed for master station, and 'slave station number/station number' is displayed for slave station. Example: For a module set as the 3rd module of the slave station and its station number is 6: 3/6
Display the module type of master station/slave station. When the module information does not exist, "Module without profile" is displayed.
Display the station type of master station/slave station. Click the cell and select the station type displayed by clicking .
Display the module version of slave station. Click the cell and select the version displayed by clicking .
Display the number of occupied stations of slave station. Click the cell and select the number of occupied stations displayed by clicking .
Display the expanded cyclic setting of slave station.
Display the number of remote station points of slave station.
Display the setting status of reserved station/error invalid station for slave station. Click the cell and change the setting displayed by clicking .
Display buffer memory for Send/Receive/Auto when the salve station is an intelligent device station. Click the cell and enter the value.
Display the setting when the station-specific mode setting is supported by the slave station. Click the cell and select the station-specific mode displayed by clicking .
Display the equipment configuration of CC-Link network graphically.
3. Select [Close with Reflecting the Setting].
Exit the settings of the CC-Link Configuration window.
Screen button
Detect the actual system configuration automatically and apply it to the CC-Link Configuration window. (Automatic detection of connected devices) For operations and considerations of setting station information and equipment configuration with the automatic detection of connected devices, refer to the following manual. iQ Sensor Solution Reference Manual
Reads the station information and the equipment configuration from the actual system configuration, and verify them against the CC-Link Configuration window being displayed. For the operating procedure and the considerations when verifying the connected equipment and the actual system configuration, refer to the following manual. iQ Sensor Solution Reference Manual
/ Moves the position of the module selected in the 'list of stations' up/down.
6 - 60
6.3.3 Setting station information on CC-Link Configuration window
6.3 Setting Network Parameters
1
Considerations when the selected status of "Set the station information in the CC-Link configuration window" is changed
OVERVIEW
The following are the considerations when editing the station information by changing selected/cleared status.
� Selecting the item The station information set on the CC-Link Station Information screen is set on the CC-Link Configuration window
automatically. Note that, all modules of the station information are changed to general-purpose CC-Link modules. The file size of
2
parameter to be written to the programmable controller CPU increases.
� Clearing the item
The station information set on the CC-Link Configuration window is set on the CC-Link Station Information screen
automatically.
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Setting general-purpose CC-Link modules When a non-Mitsubishi module or a module which is not displayed on the module list is used, drag and drop a general-
purpose CC-Link module. A general-purpose CC IE Field module can be replaced with a specific module by registering a profile.
3
(Section 4.13.1)
( Replacing general-purpose CC-Link module)
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
Display of module name on the 'device map area' "Object Name" on the Properties screen is displayed for each module name on the 'device map area'.
Transmission speed of Q series CC-Link master/local module
Change the transmission speed with the transmission speed/mode setting switch on the module.
The transmission speed selected on the CC-Link Configuration window is not applied to the module if the Write to PLC
operation is performed.
4
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
5
EDITING PROGRAMS
6
SETTING PARAMETERS
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
6.3.3 Setting station information on CC-Link Configuration window
6 - 61
6 SETTING PARAMETERS
Replacing general-purpose CC-Link module
Replace a general-purpose CC-Link module of slave station with a specific module. A description of link device is displayed on the CC-Link Device Reference window by replacing a general-purpose CC-Link module with a specific module.
Operating procedure
1. Select a general-purpose CC-Link module to be replaced in the 'list of stations' on
the CC-Link Configuration window.
2. Select [CC-Link Configuration] [Change Module] [Replace General CC-Link
Module].
The Replace General CC-Link Module screen is displayed.
List of modules to be replaced
3. Set the items on the screen.
Item Replacement Target
List of modules to be replaced
Replacement Candidate
Description
Display the version, the number of occupied stations, station type, and expanded cyclic setting of the module selected on the CC-Link Configuration window.
Display modules with the same condition as the module selected for "Replacement Target". Select the check box(es) on the "Station Number" column of the module to be replaced. Two or more modules can be selected.
Select a module to be replaced with.
6 - 62
6.3.3 Setting station information on CC-Link Configuration window
6.3 Setting Network Parameters
4. Click the
button.
1
The general-purpose CC-Link module in the list of stations is replaced with the module selected for "Replacement Candidate". The general-purpose CC-Link module displayed on the 'device map area' is replaced with the selected module.
OVERVIEW
2
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
The general-purpose module is replaced with the selected module.
Screen button
3
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
Selects all modules displayed on "Replacement Target".
Cancels the selected status of all modules selected for "Replacement Target".
4
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Changing to general-purpose CC-Link module
Change a module of slave station to a general-purpose CC-Link module.
Operating procedure
5
1. Select a module to be changed in the 'list of stations' on the CC-Link Configuration
window.
EDITING PROGRAMS
2. Select [CC-Link Configuration] [Change Module] [Change to General CC-Link
Module].
The module is changed to the corresponding general-purpose CC-Link module.
6
Checking system configuration of CC-Link
SETTING PARAMETERS
Check whether the equipment configuration of CC-Link is correct after setting the station information on the CC-Link Configuration window.
Operating procedure
7
� Select [CC-Link Configuration] [Check] [System Configuration].
The system configuration of CC-Link is checked. Check the result of the system configuration check on the Output window.
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
6.3.3 Setting station information on CC-Link Configuration window
6 - 63
6 SETTING PARAMETERS
Performing parameter processing of slave station
Perform the processing relates to parameters of slave stations. The applicable parameter processing differs according to the target slave station. The setting status and setting values of the Parameter Processing of Slave Station screen can be saved in the CSV file format.
Considerations when performing parameter processing Check the following before performing the parameter processing. � The network parameter of master station matches with the start I/O number of PLC parameter. � The network parameter of programmable controller CPU matches with the actual CC-Link configuration. � A refresh device is set on the CC-Link parameter of programmable controller CPU.
Operating procedure
1. Select a module to which parameters are applied from the 'list of stations' on the
CC-Link Configuration window.
2. Select [CC-Link Configuration] [Online] [Parameter Processing of Slave
Station].
The Parameter Processing of Slave Station screen is displayed. The following is a screen of FR-A720-0.4K.
6 - 64
6.3.3 Setting station information on CC-Link Configuration window
6.3 Setting Network Parameters
3. Set the items on the screen.
1
Item Target Module Information
Method selection
Parameter Information Display only selectable parameters
Process Option
OVERVIEW
Description
Display the information of target equipment on which the parameter processing is performed.
Select a processing to be performed from the list displayed by clicking .
Select the parameter(s) to perform the processing and enter settings such as a writing value.
2
Select this to display only parameters to which the processing selected for "Method selection" can be performed.
Set this for the processing selected for "Method selection".
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
4. Click the
button.
The parameter processing is performed.
3
Screen button
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
Selects all parameters of "Parameter Information".
Cancels the selected status of all the parameters selected for "Parameter Information".
4
Deletes all values displayed in the "Read Value" column of "Parameter Information".
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Deletes all values displayed in the "Write Value" column of "Parameter Information".
Imports the selected status and writing values of "Parameter Information" saved in the CSV file
5
format in advance.
Saves the selected status and writing values of "Parameter Information" in the CSV file format.
EDITING PROGRAMS
6
SETTING PARAMETERS
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
6.3.3 Setting station information on CC-Link Configuration window
6 - 65
6 SETTING PARAMETERS
Performing commands for slave stations
Perform commands for slave stations. Applicable commands differ according to the target slave station.
Considerations when performing commands Check the following before performing commands. � The programmable controller CPU set as a connection target is in STOP status. � The network parameter of master station matches with the start I/O number of PLC parameter. � The network parameter of programmable controller CPU matches with the actual CC-Link configuration. � A refresh device is set on the CC-Link parameter of programmable controller CPU.
Operating procedure
1. Select a module on which a command is performed from the 'list of stations' on the
CC-Link Configuration window.
2. Select [CC-Link Configuration] [Online] [Command Execution of Slave
Station].
The Command Execution of Slave Station screen is displayed. The following is a screen of FR-A720-0.4K.
3. Set the items on the screen.
Item
Description
Target Module Information Display the information of target module on which the command is performed.
Method selection
Select a processing to be performed from the list displayed by clicking .
Command Setting
Set the writing values for the processing selected for "Method selection".
4. Click the
button.
The command processing is performed. The result of the processing is displayed on "Execution Result".
6 - 66
6.3.3 Setting station information on CC-Link Configuration window
6.3 Setting Network Parameters
Copying/pasting modules
1
Copy/paste a selected module.
OVERVIEW
Operating procedure
1. Select "Module No./Station No." or "Model Name" of the module to be copied from
the 'list of stations'.
2
The corresponding row is selected.
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Select "Module No.
/Station No." or
"Model Name".
3
2. Select [Edit] [Copy].
The selected module is copied.
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
3. Select [Edit] [Paste].
The copied module is added to the last row of the 'list of stations'.
4
Deleting modules
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Delete a selected module.
Operating procedure
1. Select "Module No./Station No." or "Model Name" of the module to be deleted from
5
the 'list of stations'.
The corresponding row is selected.
EDITING PROGRAMS
Select "Module No. /Station No." or
6
"Model Name".
SETTING PARAMETERS
2. Select [Edit] [Delete].
The selected module is deleted.
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
6.3.3 Setting station information on CC-Link Configuration window
6 - 67
6 SETTING PARAMETERS
Displaying/hiding Module List/Output window
Display/hide the Module List/Output window.
Operating procedure
� Select [View] [Docking Window] [Module List]/[Output].
Displaying Module List/Output window The Module List/Output window can be displayed as a docked display/floating display. (Section 3.2.4 "Docking windows")
6 - 68
6.3.3 Setting station information on CC-Link Configuration window
6.3 Setting Network Parameters
6.3.4 Checking devices assigned to CC-Link modules
1
Display refresh devices assigned to CC-Link modules. Set the CC-Link parameters in advance.
*1
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX *1 : CC IE Field head module only
2
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Screen display
Select [View] [Docking Window] [Device Reference] ( ). List of slave stations
< When "Display Detailed Configuration Information" is cleared >
3
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
List of
< When "Display Detailed Configuration Information" is selected >
slave stations
4
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
List of link devices
5
< When "Display Detailed Configuration Information" is cleared >
EDITING PROGRAMS
6
List of link devices
< When "Display Detailed Configuration Information" is selected >
SETTING PARAMETERS
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
6.3.4 Checking devices assigned to CC-Link modules
6 - 69
6 SETTING PARAMETERS
Operating procedure
� Set the items on the screen.
Item
Master/Local Start I/O No.
Slave Station List Link Device List Display Detailed Configuration Information
Setting status Select the start I/O number of master station or local station from the list displayed by clicking to display the list of slave stations or link devices.
Select this to switch the display between the list of slave stations and the list of link device stations.
Select this to display the detailed information of the list of slave stations or list of link devices.
Display contents
Item Slave Station List
List of slave stations
Link Device List List of link device stations
Description
Displayed when "Slave Station List" is selected.
Display the information of the slave stations and the range of the refresh devices assigned to the host station. When "Display Detailed Configuration Information" is selected, the range of the buffer memory is also displayed. When refresh devices are not assigned, the cells of the refresh device range will be blank.
Displayed when "Link Device List" is selected.
Display the assignment status of refresh devices on the host station and link devices on the target station. When "Display Detailed Configuration Information" is selected, link devices and buffer memory are also displayed on the host station side. The "Explanation" column will be blank when profile is not registered.
Screen button
Opens the screen to set the display options.
Select the item for "Module Name/Object Name" and "Buffer Memory Display Format" by clicking ,
and click the
button.
6 - 70
6.3.4 Checking devices assigned to CC-Link modules
6.3 Setting Network Parameters
Opens the screen to set the purpose and the output format of CSV file output.
Set "Application", "Output Data Range", and "Label Output Format", and click the
1
button.
OVERVIEW
2
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
3
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
When "Output CSV file for global label" is selected for "Use", the output CSV file can be imported on
the Global Label Setting screen.
(GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project))
4
(GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Structured Project))
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
5
EDITING PROGRAMS
6
SETTING PARAMETERS
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
6.3.4 Checking devices assigned to CC-Link modules
6 - 71
6 SETTING PARAMETERS
Display content of Device Reference window All items are displayed on the Device Reference window when the station information is set on the CC-Link Configuration window. When the station information is set on the CC-Link Station Information screen, the model name or object name of the target module is not displayed. When a local station, master station (duplex function), or standby master station is set for the type, the assignment status of refresh devices is not displayed.
Checking refresh devices supported by master station and local station With a CC-Link configuration containing a local station, when checking refresh devices supported by refresh devices which are set on the master station, open the project of the local station and check them on the Device Reference window. Example: When checking refresh devices of local station which supports refresh device D2008 of the master station
< Project of master station >
< Project of local station >
The value of RWw3 is refreshed by the value of D2008. The value of D3008 is refreshed by the value of RWr3.
When a value is stored to D2008 on the master station, a value is stored to D3008 on the local station.
Displaying list of link devices � The selected slave station can be displayed on top of the cell by right-clicking 'list of link devices' and selecting [Select Slave Station] from the shortcut menu.
Select the station number 7 of the slave station.
The station number 7 is displayed at the top.
� The Device/Buffer Memory Batch Monitor screen is displayed by right-clicking a refresh device or buffer memory selected from the 'list of link devices' and selecting [Device/Buffer Memory Batch] from the shortcut menu. For details of the device/buffer memory batch monitoring, refer to Section 17.3.
6 - 72
6.3.4 Checking devices assigned to CC-Link modules
6.4 Setting Remote Password
6.4 Setting Remote Password
1
OVERVIEW
*1
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
*1 : CC IE Field head module only
This section explains how to set a password to prevent illegal access from remote users to the QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU via a Q series-compatible E71 module, C24 module, or Ethernet Built-in CPU.
2
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Screen display
Select Project view "Parameter" "Remote Password". The following is an example of setting screen when QCPU (Q mode) is selected.
3
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
4
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Operating procedure
5
1. Set the items on the screen.
EDITING PROGRAMS
Item
Description
Password
Set the password.
Model Name Start XY
Set the model of the routing programmable controller CPU or module. For the programmable controller CPU, select "Ethernet Built-in CPU".
Set the start I/O number.
6
SETTING PARAMETERS
Password Active Module Setting
Condition
Set the details when selecting "Ethernet Built-in CPU" or "QJ71E71".
User connection No. valid setting Set whether to enable the remote password for the user connection No. 1 to No. 16.
System connection valid setting Set whether to enable the remote password for the system connections.
2. Click the
button.
7
The Password Confirmation screen is displayed.
3. Enter the set password again.
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
6 - 73
6 SETTING PARAMETERS
4. Click the
button.
The remote password setting ends. To set the password on the programmable controller CPU, write the parameter to the programmable controller CPU using the Write to PLC function. (Section 15.1)
Modules that support remote password setting For the modules that support the remote password setting and the details of the remote password setting, refer to the user's manual of the programmable controller CPU, Q series-compatible E71 module or C24 module to be used.
Characters for password Enter the password in 4 characters, using alphabets, numerals, and symbols corresponding to ASCII codes 20H to 7EH (Appendix 3).
6 - 74
6.5 Checking Parameters
6.5 Checking Parameters
1
OVERVIEW
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
This section explains how to check errors in the PLC parameter and the network parameter which are
set in the project. The result of the parameter check is displayed on the Output window.
2
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Screen display
Select [Tool] [Check Parameter].
<QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU>
<FXCPU>
3
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
4
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Item
Description
5
Check Target
Select the items for the check parameter.
2. Click the
button.
The check parameter is performed, and the result is displayed on the Output window.
EDITING PROGRAMS
6
SETTING PARAMETERS
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
6 - 75
6 SETTING PARAMETERS
6.6 Outputting Parameters to CSV Files
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
The following parameters can be written to CSV files. I/O assignment setting
Project view "Parameter" "PLC Parameter" <<I/O Assignment>> Acknowledge XY assignment
Project view "Parameter" "PLC Parameter" Project view "Parameter" "Network Parameter" "(network parameter)"
Operating procedure
1. Click the
button.
The confirmation message for writing data is displayed.
< I/O assignment setting >
2. Click the
button.
The Write to CSV file screen is displayed.
3. Enter a file name of the data to be saved.
4. Click the
button.
Parameters are saved to a CSV file.
6 - 76
6.6 Outputting Parameters to CSV Files
CSV file format
1
OVERVIEW
The following is an image of the saved CSV file opened with Excel. � Example of CSV file for I/O assignment setting
< I/O Assignment setting >
2
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
3
< CSV file >
I/O assignment
Detailed setting
� Example of CSV file for acknowledge XY assignment
< Acknowledge XY Assignment screen >
Switch setting
4
Basic setting
5
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
EDITING PROGRAMS
6
< CSV file >
SETTING PARAMETERS
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
Details of CSV file The following explains the details of CSV file format.
� The file format is Unicode (including UTF-16, Little Endian, and BOM).
� The delimiter of items is a tab (\t).
� Each item is enclosed in double quotation marks ("). � If the item contains double quotation marks ("), the double quotation marks in the item are
8
expressed as two double quotation marks ("").
� A line feed is set at the end of the line.
The line feed code is LF.
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
6 - 77
6 SETTING PARAMETERS
6.7 Setting default parameters
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
This section explains how to set default parameters to the PLC parameter or the network parameter in batch.
Screen display
Select [Tool] [Clear All Parameters]. The following is an example of setting screen when QCPU (Q mode) is selected.
Operating procedure
1. Set the item on the screen.
Select Data
Item
Description Select the parameter to which default parameters are set.
2. Click the
button.
Default parameters are set to the selected parameter.
6 - 78
1
OVERVIEW
7 SETTING DEVICE
2
MEMORY
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
This chapter explains the settings of the device memory.
3
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
7.1
Device Memory
7.2
Setting Device Memory
7.3
Searching Devices
7.4
Writing/Reading Device Memory Data
4
7 - 2
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
7 - 5
7 - 15
7 - 16
5
EDITING PROGRAMS
6
SETTING PARAMETERS
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
7 - 1
7 SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
7.1 Device Memory
This section explains the features of the device memory.
Q CPU L CPU ReFmXote HFeXad FX
7.1.1 Features of device memory
Device memory is the function that reads/writes data from/to the device memory on a programmable controller CPU. Read
The function batch-reads device memory data from a programmable controller CPU to GX Works2. The read data can be used to check the status of the device memory on a programmable controller CPU as well as for offline debugging. Write The function batch-writes device memory data from GX Works2 to a programmable controller CPU. The current values of the device memory on a programmable controller CPU can be batch changed.
7 - 2
7.1.1 Features of device memory
7.1 Device Memory
7.1.2 List of devices selectable on the Input Devices screen
1
OVERVIEW
QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU
: Can be edited : Display only �: Not supported
Category
Input
Device type
Symbol X
Display/edit
2
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Output
Y
Internal relay
M
Latch relay
L
Annunciator
F
Edge relay
V
Step relay
S
3
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
Link relay
B
Link special relay
SB
Current value
T
Timer
Contact
TS
�
Internal user device
Coil
TC
�
Counter
Current value
C
Contact
CS
4
�
Coil
CC
�
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Current value
ST
Retentive timer
Contact
STS
�
Coil
STC
�
Data register
D
Link register
W
5
Link special register
SW
Direct input
DX
�
EDITING PROGRAMS
Direct output
DY
�
Special relay
SM
Internal system device
Special register
SD
Link input Link output
J\X J\Y
6
Link register
J\W
Link direct device
Link special register
J\SW
SETTING PARAMETERS
Link relay
J\B
Link special relay
J\SB
File register
File register
R*1 ZR*1,*2
�
7
Index register
Index register
Z
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
Intelligent function module device
Intelligent function module device
U\G
*1 : Not supported by Q00J/Q00UJ.
*2 : For Universal model QCPU/LCPU, the device cannot be used when '0k' is set for "Device points" of file register (ZR(R)) under "File Register Extended Setting" on the <<Device>> tab of PLC parameter.
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
7.1.2 List of devices selectable on the Input Devices screen
7 - 3
7 SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
FXCPU
: Can be edited : Display only �: Not supported
Category
Device type
Display/edit
Symbol
FX0 FX0S
FX0N
FX1
FX1S
FX1N FX1NC
FXU FX2C
FX2N FX2NC
FX3S
FX3G FX3GC
FX3U FX3UC
Input
X
Output
Y
Internal relay
M
Internal user device
State Timer
S
T
Counter*1
C
Data register
D
File register
D
�
�
Internal system device
Special relay
M
Special data register D
Extended register
R
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
Extended file register
ER
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
*1 : 32-bit counter (C200 and later) is not supported.
7 - 4
7.1.2 List of devices selectable on the Input Devices screen
7.2 Setting Device Memory
7.2 Setting Device Memory
1
OVERVIEW
Q CPU L CPU ReFmXote HFeXad FX
This section explains how to set a device and device value.
Screen display
2
Select Project view "Device Memory" "(data name)".
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
3
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
4
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Device number display area
Device value display area
5
EDITING PROGRAMS
6
SETTING PARAMETERS
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
7 - 5
7 SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
Inserting rows Select [Edit] [Insert Row] to insert a blank row at the cursor position.
[Edit] [Insert Row]
Cutting/copying/pasting character strings in units of rows To paste a character string in units of rows, select the desired cell(s) and paste the character string. If a row is selected, pasting is not possible.
Cutting/copying/pasting character strings in units of cells To paste a character string in units of cells, if the selected cell(s) is in the row where a device is not entered, pasting is not possible.
Copying device memory Device memory data of the selected range can be copied and pasted to Excel. Data can also be copied and pasted to device memory from Excel. When a value other than 0 is pasted as a bit device, it is replaced to 1. When copying data and moving cursor on Excel before pasting the copied data on GX Works2, the value different from the copied data may be pasted. In this case, copy and paste the data without moving the cursor on Excel.
Deleting devices If a deletion is executed after selecting a cell, the device value clears to '0'. If a deletion is executed after selecting a row, the selected row (device) is deleted.
<Deletion in units of cells>
[Edit] [Delete]
<Deletion in units of rows>
[Edit] [Delete]
The device values are set to "0".
The selected rows are deleted.
7 - 6
7.2 Setting Device Memory
7.2.1 Setting device values in units of points
1
OVERVIEW
Set a device and device value in units of points. Create a new device memory in advance. (Section 4.3.1)
Example) Set the following values.
'Device: D0, Device value: 12'
2
Operating procedure
1. Select the cell to which a device value is set.
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
3 2. Enter 'D0' for a device.
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
3. Press the key.
The entered device is set in the device number display area.
4
In this example, 'D0' is set in the device number display area and
the value is displayed in the device value display area.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
4. Enter '12' for a device value.
'12' is set as the device value of device 'D0'.
5
EDITING PROGRAMS
6
SETTING PARAMETERS
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
7.2.1 Setting device values in units of points
7 - 7
7 SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
7.2.2 Setting device values by specifying device range
Setting device values by specifying a device range on the Input Device screen
Set device values by specifying a device range on the Input Device screen. Example) Set the following values. 'Device: D, range: 0 to 50, display format: decimal number'
Operating procedure
1. Select the cell to which a device value is set.
2. Select [Edit] [Input Device] ( ).
The Input Device screen is displayed.
3. Set the items on the screen.
Item
Device
Module Start*1 Network No.*1 Range
All Address Display Mode BIN OCT DEC HEX FLOAT String String (ASCII only)
Description Select the device name. For devices that can be edited, refer to Section 7.1.2.
Display when U\G or J\ is selected in the "Device" field. Enter the start XY address or network number.
Select the range of devices to be set. Select this to target all of the selected devices. Select this to target the devices in the specified range. Select the display format of device values. Select this to display device values in binary numbers. Select this to display device values in octal numbers. Select this to display device values in decimal numbers. Select this to display device values in hexadecimal numbers. Select this to display device values in real numbers. Select this to display device values in character strings. Select this to display device values in ASCII strings.
7 - 8
7.2.2 Setting device values by specifying device range
7.2 Setting Device Memory
1
Item
Description
Register
Select the display size of device values.
16-bit
Select this to display the display size of device values in words.
OVERVIEW
32-bit
Select this to display the display size of device values in double words. Specify the device range in multiples of two.
64-bit
Select this to display the display size of device values in double-precision real
numbers. Specify the device range in multiples of four.
2
Device Value
Enter a value to set device values simultaneously.
*1 : Not supported by FXCPU.
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
4. Click the
button.
Devices in the range from D0 to D50 are registered to cells and the values are displayed.
3
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
4
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
5. Enter a device value to each cell.
5
The entered values are set.
EDITING PROGRAMS
6
SETTING PARAMETERS
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
7.2.2 Setting device values by specifying device range
7 - 9
7 SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
Setting device values by specifying a device range on the cell
Set device values by specifying a device range on the cell. Example) Set the following values. 'Device: D, range: 20 to 40, display format: decimal number'
Operating procedure
1. Select a cell to which the device value is set.
2. Enter the device range.
3. Click the button.
Devices from D20 to D140 are registered to the cells and the values are displayed.
Display format of bit device and word device The following table shows the display format of bit device and word device when the device range is specified on the cell.
Device Bit device Word device
Value 0 0
Display format Binary Decimal
Display size � 16 bits
Device registration when only the start address or the end address is specified A device range can be specified by specifying the start address or the end address only.
� When only the start address is specified (Example: Specify 'D0-' for the device range) Devices from 'D0' to the last valid address are registered to the cells.
� When only the end address is specified (Example: Specify '-D100' for the device range) Devices from 'D0 to D100' are registered to the cells.
Abbreviating device name When specifying a device range on the cell, only the end address can be abbreviated. For example, when a device range is specified with 'D0-100', the devices in the range of 'D0-D100' are registered.
Specifying R devices (This function is not supported by FXCPU.) When R device is specified, it is changed to ZR device and registered.
7 - 10
7.2.2 Setting device values by specifying device range
7.2 Setting Device Memory
7.2.3 Setting character strings
1
OVERVIEW
Set a character string to a device. Set "Display Mode" to 'String' in advance. (Section 7.2.5)
Operating procedure
2
1. Select a range of cells to which a character string is set.
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
3
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
2. Select [Edit] [Paste Text].
The Paste Text screen is displayed.
4
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
5
EDITING PROGRAMS
3. Enter a character string, and click the
button.
The entered character string is set to the selected cells or row.
6
SETTING PARAMETERS
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
7
Entering character strings When "Register" is '16-bit', '32-bit', or '64-bit', the maximum number of characters that can be entered to one cell is 2, 4, or 8 respectively.
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
7.2.3 Setting character strings
7 - 11
7 SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
7.2.4 Setting same value simultaneously
Set the same value to consecutive devices.
Operating procedure
1. Select devices to which a value is to be set.
2. Select [Edit] [Fill] ( ).
The FILL screen is displayed.
3. Set the items on the screen.
Item Data Format
BIN OCT DEC HEX Device Value
Description Select the data format of device values. Select this to set device values in binary numbers. Select this to set device values in octal numbers. Select this to set device values in decimal numbers. Select this to set device values in hexadecimal numbers. Enter a value set to devices simultaneously.
4. Click the
button.
The specified device value is set to devices simultaneously.
Setting the same value simultaneously Device values can also be set simultaneously by selecting a range, right-clicking it on the device memory editor, and selecting [FILL] from the shortcut menu.
7 - 12
7.2.4 Setting same value simultaneously
7.2 Setting Device Memory
7.2.5 Changing display format
1
OVERVIEW
Switching display format
Switch the device value display format for each cell on the device memory editor.
Operating procedure
2
� Select [View] [Display Mode] [Binary/Octal/Decimal/Hexadecimal/Float/String/
String (ASCII)].
Device values are displayed in the selected display format.
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
3
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
4
Switching display size in 16-bit/32-bit/64-bit
Switch the device value display size in 16-bit/32-bit/64-bit for each cell on the device memory editor.
5
Operating procedure
� Select [View] [Register] [16-bit/32-bit/64-bit].
Device values are displayed in the selected display size (16 bits, 32 bits, or 64 bits).
6
EDITING PROGRAMS
SETTING PARAMETERS
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
7.2.5 Changing display format
7 - 13
7 SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
7.2.6
Changing the number of rows/columns on device memory editor
Change the number of rows/columns on the device memory editor.
Screen display
Select [View] [Setup].
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Item Number of Columns
Auto Specify the number of columns (1 - 255) Row 4096 Rows Specify the number of rows (16 - 655360) Additional Safety Inquiry
Description Set the number of columns on the editor. Select this to set the number of columns to 16. Select this to set the desired number of columns on the editor. Setting range: 1 to 255 Set the number of rows on the editor. Select this to set the number of rows to 4096. Select this to set the desired number of rows on the editor. Setting range: 16 to 655360 Select this to display the confirmation message when device deletion is executed.
2. Click the
button.
The set number of rows/columns are displayed.
Number of columns When "Number of Columns" is set to "Auto", the device values are displayed in 10 columns or 16 columns according to the specified devices. For FXCPU, the device values of X and Y are displayed in 8 columns.
Considerations for changing rows and columns When a value smaller than the current value is set for "Number of Columns" or "Row", a confirmation message is displayed and the data on the device memory editor is discarded. When a value larger than the current value is set for "Number of Columns", the sequence of devices registered to the device memory editor do not change by the setting of "Number of Columns".
7 - 14
7.2.6 Changing the number of rows/columns on device memory editor
7.3 Searching Devices
7.3 Searching Devices
1
OVERVIEW
Q CPU L CPU ReFmXote HFeXad FX
This section explains how to search for a device set in the device memory.
Screen display
2
Select [Find/Replace] [Find Device Cell].
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
3
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Item
Description
Find what
Enter the device to be searched for.
4
Direction
Up Down
Select this to perform searching in the upward direction from the cursor position. Select this to perform searching in the downward direction from the cursor position.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
2. Click the
button.
The cursor moves to the found device.
5
EDITING PROGRAMS
6
SETTING PARAMETERS
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
7 - 15
7 SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
7.4 Writing/Reading Device Memory Data
Q CPU L CPU ReFmXote HFeXad FX
This section explains how to write/read device memory data being edited to/from a programmable controller CPU or Excel file.
7.4.1 Writing/reading data to/from programmable controller CPUs
Write/read device memory data to/from a programmable controller CPU. To write/read device memory data in units of files, refer to the online Write to PLC/Read from PLC function. (Section 15.1)
Screen display
Select [Tool] [Write Device Memory to PLC]/[Read Device Memory from PLC].
<Writing device memory>
<Reading device memory>
Operating procedure
� Set the item on the screen.
Range
Item
Selected Devices
All Devices
Description
Select the write/read range.
Select this to write/read data in the specified range to/from a programmable controller CPU.
Select this to write/read all data in the device memory being edited to/from a programmable controller CPU.
7 - 16
7.4.1 Writing/reading data to/from programmable controller CPUs
7.4 Writing/Reading Device Memory Data
7.4.2 Writing/reading data to/from Excel files
1
OVERVIEW
Write/read device memory data to/from an Excel file.
Screen display
Select [Tool] [Write to Excel File]/[Read from Excel File].
2
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
3
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
4
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Operating procedure
1. Enter a file name or select the file to be opened.
The Save As screen or Open screen is displayed.
5
2. Click the
or
button.
Data are saved to the specified destination, or the file is opened from the specified location.
EDITING PROGRAMS
Compatible Excel version
6
Microsoft Office Excel 97 or later version is compatible with the data write/read operations.
SETTING PARAMETERS
Reading data When data are read from an Excel file, they are read with the saved setting of "Number of Columns".
The following are regarded as errors and processed as explained.
� Unsupported devices Deleted
� Invalid value Set to '0'.
� Invalid display format Displayed in decimal numbers. Reading/writing data of which display size is 32-bit/64-bit
7
Cells set the display size to 32-bit/64-bit are merged and written to an Excel file.
If the number of merged cells exceeds '32767', cells from '32768' onwards are not merged. Instead, they are written to
the file and the character strings "<<32-bit>>"/" <<64-bit>>" are added to them.
When reading the Excel file back to the device memory again, do not unmerge the cells or edit the character strings
"<<32-bit>>"/" <<64-bit>>".
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
7.4.2 Writing/reading data to/from Excel files
7 - 17
7 SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
MEMO
7 - 18
8 - 1
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
SETTING PARAMETERS
EDITING PROGRAMS
7
6
4
8 - 2 8 - 5
5
Setting Device Initial Values
8.2
Device Initial Values
8.1
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
OVERVIEW
This chapter explains how to set, edit, and delete device initial values.
3
VALUES
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL 2
8
1
8 SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
8.1 Device Initial Values
This section explains the device initial values.
Q CPU L CPU ReFmXote HFeXad FX
8.1.1 Feature of device initial values
The device initial values are device values used for the sequence program operation when the programmable controller turns RUN. When the device initial values are set, the initial setting program is unnecessary. When device initial values are not set
The initial setting program is necessary. Example)
When device initial values are set Example)
The initial setting program is unnecessary.
8 - 2
8.1.1 Feature of device initial values
8.1 Device Initial Values
8.1.2 List of applicable devices for device initial values
1
OVERVIEW
The following table shows the list of devices which can be used as device initial values.
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Category Internal user device Internal system device
Device name Timer
Retentive timer Counter
Data register Link register Link special register Special register
Device
T
ST
2
C
D
W
SW
SD
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
File register
Intelligent function module device
File register Intelligent function module device
R*1,*2, ZR*2
3
U\G
Link direct device
Link register Link special register
J\W J\SW
*1 : When the R device is specified to utilize the device memory data, the ZR device value is utilized for the R device. *2 : Not applicable to Q00UJ.
4
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
5
EDITING PROGRAMS
6
SETTING PARAMETERS
7
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
8
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
8.1.2 List of applicable devices for device initial values
8 - 3
8 SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
8.1.3 Procedure for setting device initial values
The following flow chart shows the procedure for setting the device initial values.
Start
Select [Project] [Object] [New] to add the device initial value data.
Set the device range to be used for device initial values.
Select [Project] [Object] [New] to create the device memory data.
Set the device values within the range of the device initial value.
Click the
button
to set the device values
of the device memory as
device initial values.
Operations on the Device Initial Value screen
Operations on the Device Memory screen
Perform settings on the <<PLC File>> tab of PLC parameter to use the device initial values.
Select [Online] [Write to PLC] to write the device initial values and the parameter to the programmable controller CPU.
Completed
8 - 4
8.1.3 Procedure for setting device initial values
8.2 Setting Device Initial Values
8.2 Setting Device Initial Values
1
OVERVIEW
Q CPU L CPU ReFmXote HFeXad FX
This section explains how to set device values set in the device memory as device initial values.
Create a new device initial value data in advance. (Section 4.3.1)
2
Screen display
Select Project view "Device Initial Value" "(data name)".
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
3
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS
Range setting
4
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
5
EDITING PROGRAMS
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
6
Item
Description
Range setting
Set the range for device initial values.
SETTING PARAMETERS
Points
Set the number of points of each device. Up to 8,000 points of devices can be set within a range.
Start
Specify the start device of the range to be set.
End
Specify the end device of the range to be set.
Comment
Enter a comment in the set device range. (Up to 32 characters)
7
Setting Method
Start/End Points/Start
Select this to set the range for device initial values by start or end device. Select this to set the range for device initial values by device points or start device.
SETTING DEVICE MEMORY
2. Select the data name to be utilized from in "Device Memory Diversion", and click
the
button.
The device value in the set range is set as a device initial value.
8
3. Click the
button.
SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES
8 - 5
8 SETTING DEVICE INITIAL VALUES Screen button
Executes printing. (Section 11.7)
Executes print preview. (Section 11.9)
Displays the Print Setting (Device Initial Value) screen. (Section 11.8.2)
Using device initial values If the device values with set ranges are used as the initial values when activating the programmable controller CPU, specify the file name to be used for the initial values on the <<PLC File>> tab of PLC parameter.
Device range The device range that can be set for device initial values is the range set on the <<Device>> tab of PLC parameter.
8 - 6
9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
9 SETTING DEVICE
10
COMMENTS
SEARCH/REPLACE
This chapter explains the operation methods for setting, editing, and deleting device comments.
11
PRINTING
9.1
Device Comments
12
9 - 2
SETTING OPTIONS
9.2
Creating Device Comments
9 - 11
9.3
Deleting Device Comments
9 - 15
9.4
Extending Number of Points of Device Comment
9 - 16
13
9.5
Utilizing Sample Comments
9 - 17
9.6
Writing/Reading Device Comments to CSV Files
9 - 19
USING LIBRARIES
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
15
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
9 - 1
9 SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
9.1 Device Comments
Q CPU L CPU ReFmXote HFeXad FX
This section explains the general concept of device comments and the setting availability.
9.1.1 Global device comments/local device comments
Device comment is categorized into global device comment and local device comment.
Global device comments
A global device comment is a device comment created automatically when a new project is created. Global device comments are set to use common device comment data among multiple programs. Global device comments can be set even when there is only one program.
A global device comment name is fixed to COMMENT. Global device comments can be changed to local device comments.
<Image that is created with only global device comments>
COMMENT Global device comment
Sequence program MAIN Sequence program SUB1 Sequence program SUB2
9 - 2
9.1.1 Global device comments/local device comments
9.1 Device Comments
Local device comments
9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
A local device comment is a device comment created by the user.
No local device comment exists when a new project is created.
Create a local device comment if necessary. (Section 4.3.1)
Local device comments are used in association with each program.
Device comments are set under the same name as sequence programs. For Structured projects, device comments are set under the same data name as the program file name.
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
Display example when local device comments are set.
11
PRINTING
<Image of a project created with only local device comments>
12
MAIN Local device comment
Sequence program MAIN
SETTING OPTIONS
SUB1 Local device comment
Sequence program SUB1
SUB2 Local device comment
Sequence program SUB2
13
USING LIBRARIES
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
15
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
9.1.1 Global device comments/local device comments
9 - 3
9 SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
Writing device comments to a programmable controller CPU Up to the following number of device comments can be written to the programmable controller CPU. Per device: 32k points Total number of device comments: 64k points When the number of set device comments exceeds the number of points that can be written to the programmable controller CPU, set the range when writing device comments to the programmable controller CPU. (Section 15.1.3)
Data name of global device comments A global device comment is displayed as "COMMENT" in the screen for Write to PLC/Read from PLC.
Setting local device comments with data names different from the sequence program name Multiple local device comments can be created with data names different from the sequence program name. In this case, however, the comments are not related to the sequence program. To make the comments relate to the sequence program, the comments should have the same data names as the program name. This is useful for cases, such as when switching comments between Japanese and English in the same program.
MAIN Local device comment MAIN-J Local device comment MAIN-E Local device comment
Sequence program MAIN
Not related to the sequence program. If data names are changed to 'MAIN', comments are applied.
Global device comments/local device comments Global device comments/local device comments correspond respectively to common comments/comments by program in GX Developer.
Device comments for Basic model QCPU Global device comments are not supported by Basic model QCPU. A local device comment for Basic model QCPU is fixed to "MAIN". When an SFC program is created, the SFC program "MAIN-SFC" also refers to a local device comment "MAIN".
<Image of an SFC program for Basic model QCPU>
MAIN Local device comment
MAIN-SFC program MAIN program
Character limit when writing global device comments to FXCPU For FXCPU, up to 32 characters of global device comments can be written as a project data, however, only up to 16 characters can be written to the programmable controller CPU.
Local device comments for FXCPU For FXCPU, local device comments cannot be written to a programmable controller CPU. If local device comments needs to be written, create comments as global device comments, or change local device comments to global device comments. When changing a local device comment to a global device comment, change its data name to "COMMENT". (Section 4.3.3)
Difference between device comment and label comment A device comment is a comment appended to a device, and it is 'data' to be read from/write to a programmable controller CPU. A label comment is a comment appended to a defined label. A label comment is not applied to a device comment even when a program is compiled.
9 - 4
9.1.1 Global device comments/local device comments
9.1 Device Comments
Displaying device comments on program editors
9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
Device comments can be displayed on program editors.
The following are the settings to display device comments.
Displaying device comments on the ladder editor or Zoom editor Select [View] [Comment].
Device comments are displayed on the device on the ladder editor or the Zoom editor. For labels, label comments are displayed. The device comments that are assigned to the labels are
10
not displayed.
SEARCH/REPLACE
For details of ladder editor and Zoom editor, refer to the following manual.
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project)
Displaying device comments on Structured Ladder/FBD editor
When [Label] is selected in [View Mode], select [View] [Add Label Display Items] [Device Comment].
11
The device comment is displayed on the device or address on the Structured Ladder/FBD editor.
The device comments of the devices which are assigned to the labels are not be displayed.
PRINTING
For details of Structured Ladder/FBD editor, refer to the following manual.
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Structured Project)
Displaying device comments on tooltips
12
Select "Device Comment" under [Tool] [Options] "Program Editor" "Ladder/SFC"/"Structured
Ladder/FBD/ST"*1 "Tool hint display items". Device comments are displayed on tooltips.
*1 : For Simple project (with labels), select "ST" instead of "Ladder/SFC"/"Structured Ladder/FBD/ST".
SETTING OPTIONS
13
USING LIBRARIES
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
15
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
9.1.1 Global device comments/local device comments
9 - 5
9 SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
Specifying device comments to be displayed in program
When both global and local device comments are set, specify the comment to be displayed by the following method.
Operation
� Set the device comment to be referenced by selecting [Tool] [Options] "Program
Editor" "All Editors" "Device Comment". Example) When different device comments are set for the same device (M)
Global device comment (COMMENT)
Local device comment (MAIN)
When the reference of the device M in the sequence program MAIN is set to the global device comment
<Option>
The display differs as shown below according to the option setting.
When the reference of the device M in the sequence program MAIN is set to the global device comment <Option>
<Sequence program MAIN>
<Sequence program MAIN>
The global device comment, 'Initial Start 1', is displayed as a device comment for M1.
The local device comment, 'Stop Device 1', is displayed as a device comment for M1.
When the reference of the device M in the sequence program MAIN is set to the PLC parameter setting
<Option>
<Device>
<Sequence program MAIN>
The local device comment, 'Stop Device 1', is displayed for local device M1, and the global device comment, 'Initial Start 2', is displayed for global device M2.
9 - 6
9.1.1 Global device comments/local device comments
9.1 Device Comments
9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
Specifying device comments for "Specify the Reference/Reflection" in batch The following operations can be performed to set "Specify the Reference/Reflection".
By clicking the
/
/
button, the "Reference/Reflection Target for Device
Comment" settings of all device comments of program selected for "Program/Program File Name" are set to "Global"/
"Local"/"PLC Parameter Setting".*1
By clicking the
button, the setting of "Specify the Reference/Reflection" of the selected program is
applied to all programs.
*1 : Only devices with which the range of local devices can be specified on the <<Device>> tab of PLC parameter can be set.
Device comment to be referenced is not set If a comment does not exist in the device comment set for "Specify the Reference/Reflection", the other device
comment can be displayed by setting the option.*1 Select [Tool] [Options] "Program Editor" "All Editors" "Device Comment", and select "Reference/Reflect the other, when device comment is not set.".
*1 : Except for when 'PLC Parameter Setting' is set for "Specify the Reference/Reflection".
SEARCH/REPLACE
10 11
PRINTING
12
SETTING OPTIONS
13
USING LIBRARIES
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
15
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
9.1.1 Global device comments/local device comments
9 - 7
9 SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
9.1.2 List of device comment applicable devices
The following table shows device types and comment setting availability.
: Applicable / �: Not applicable
Category
Device name
Internal user device
Input Output Internal relay Latch relay Annunciator Edge relay Step relay Link relay Link special relay State Timer Retentive timer Counter Data register Link register Link special register Direct input Direct output
Special relay Internal system device
Special register
Link direct device
Link input Link output Link register Link special register Link relay Link special relay
Symbol
X Y M L F V S B SB S T ST C D W SW DX DY SM M SD D J\X J\Y J\W J\SW J\B J\SB
Bit specification*1
� � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � �
QCPU (Q mode)/ LCPU � � � �
FXCPU
� � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � �
R
*2
*3
File register
File register
ZR
*2
�
(RAM) File register
D
�
�
Index register
Index register
Z, ZZ
�
�
�
Intelligent function Intelligent function
module device
module device
U\G
*4
Nesting
Nesting
N
�
�
�
Pointer
P
�
Pointer
Interrupt pointer
I
�
9 - 8
9.1.2 List of device comment applicable devices
9.1 Device Comments
Category
Device name
Symbol
Bit
QCPU (Q mode)/
specification*1
LCPU
Network number specified device
J
�
SFC block device
BL*5
�
Step relay
Other
(Step relay with a
BL\S
�
block specification)
SFC transition device
BL\TR
�
I/O number specified device
U
�
*1 : Bit-specified word device comment is applicable to Universal model QCPU/LCPU only. *2 : Not applicable to Q00J/Q00UJ. *3 : R (extended register) is applicable to FX3G/FX3GC or FX3U/FX3UC only *4 : Applicable to FX3U/FX3UC only *5 : For projects with labels, comments of the BL device are not applied to the block titles.
FXCPU � � � �
*4
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
SEARCH/REPLACE
9 10 11
PRINTING
Device comment creation supported range in the multiple CPU system configuration for QCPU (Q mode) Device comments can be created in the following ranges, corresponding to the buffer memory of the programmable controller CPU (3E00H to 3E30H) in a multiple CPU system.
Supported range U0(\G0) to U1FF(\G65535) U3E0(\G0) to U3FF(\G65535)
Unsupported range U200(\G0) to U3DF(\G65535)
12
SETTING OPTIONS
Screen to display bit-specified comments Bit-specified word device comments can be displayed only on device comment editors, ladder editors, the Cross Reference window, the Watch window, and the Sampling Trace screen.
13
USING LIBRARIES
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
15
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
9.1.2 List of device comment applicable devices
9 - 9
9 SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
9.1.3 Changing text size on the device comment editor
Text display size can be changed on the device comment editor.
Operating procedure
� Select [View] [Text Size] [Bigger]/[Smaller].
The changed text size is applied to all open device comment editors. The text display size can be changed by selecting the [Bigger]/[Smaller] button each time.
Considerations when enlarging the text size Comment text may be truncated when the text size is enlarged. In this case, adjust the column width or text size to display correctly.
9 - 10
9.1.3 Changing text size on the device comment editor
9.2 Creating Device Comments
9.2 Creating Device Comments
9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
Q CPU L CPU ReFmXote HFeXad FX
This section explains how to create device comments, which make it easy to understand content of
program processing.
10
9.2.1 Creating comments on the device comment editor
SEARCH/REPLACE
Create device comments for each device on the same screen.
When creating local device comments, create a new device comment in advance. (Section 4.3.1)
11
Screen display
PRINTING
Creating global device comments Select Project view "Global Device Comment".
Creating local device comments
Select Project view "Local Device Comment" "(data name)".
12
SETTING OPTIONS
13
USING LIBRARIES
Operating procedure
� Set the items on the screen.
Item
Description
Device Name
Specify the device to be edited.
Comment*1,*2
Enter a device comment for each device.
Include the bit specification information in editing
Display the setting status of the option "Execute the operation including the hidden bit specification information"*3.
*1 : For Universal model QCPU/LCPU, the entry field for bit-specified word device comment can be expanded/ collapsed by clicking a column of "Device Name".
*2 : The line wrapping of the device comment for display on the ladder editor and Zoom editor can be checked on "Preview".
*3 : The option "Execute the operation including the hidden bit specification information" is set as follows: Select [Tool] [Options] "Device Comment Editor", and select "Execute the operation including the hidden bit specification information".
WRITING/READING DATA
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
14 15 16
PROTECTING DATA
9.2.1 Creating comments on the device comment editor
9 - 11
9 SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
Screen button
(Universal model QCPU/LCPU only)
Displays all entry fields for bit-specified word device comment.
(Universal model QCPU/LCPU only)
Hides all entry fields for bit-specified word device comment.
Limit for the number of characters to be entered Enter each device comment within 32 characters. The limit for the number of characters to be entered can be switched between 16 characters and 32 characters. (Section 12.2)
Cutting/copying/pasting device comments for word devices which support bit-specified word device comments For Universal model QCPU/LCPU, device comments including bit-specified word device comments can be cut/copied/ pasted by the following option. � Select [Tool] [Options] "Device Comment Editor", and select "Execute the operation including the hidden bit specification information". Also, device comments including bit-specified word device comments can be cut/copied/pasted by the following menus. � [Edit] [Cut The Range including Hidden Bit Specification Information] � [Edit] [Copy The Range including Hidden Bit Specification Information] � [Edit] [Paste The Range including Hidden Bit Specification Information]
Restrictions
Range selection of entry fields for bit-specified word device comment When a range is selected with entry fields for bit-specified word device comment are collapsed, the last entry field for bit-specified word device comment becomes out of the range selection. To select the last entry field for bit-specified word device comment, expand the entry fields and select the range.
9 - 12
9.2.1 Creating comments on the device comment editor
9.2 Creating Device Comments
9.2.2 Creating comments on the ladder editor
9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
SEARCH/REPLACE
Modify and add device comments.
Creating device comments in device comment editing mode
10
Example: Set 'Result of module A' to D1 and 'Initial setting is completed' to D2.
Operating procedure
1. Select [Edit] [Documentation] [Device Comment] ( ).
The mode changes to the device comment editing mode.
11 2. Move the cursor to the device comment
entry position.
PRINTING
3. Press the key.
The Input Device Comment screen is displayed.
12
SETTING OPTIONS
4. Enter a device comment.
The line wrapping of the device comment for display can be checked when the comment is entered.
13
5. Click the
button.
The entered device comment is displayed as shown at the right.
USING LIBRARIES
14
Limit for the number of characters to be entered Enter each device comment within 32 characters.
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
The limit for the number of characters to be entered can be switched between 16 characters and 32 characters. (Section 12.2)
Disabling the device comment editing mode Select the same menu option again and clear the check box from the item displayed on the screen.
Target of applying device comment change
Device comments changed or added on the ladder editor are applied to global device comments. To apply changes to local device comments, specify the reflection target for "Reference/Reflection Target for Device
15
WRITING/READING DATA
Comment" under [Tool] [Options] "Program Editor" "All Editors" "Device Comment".
Editing status of Input Device Comment screen The cursor is in the "Device/Label Comment" field (editing status) when the Input Device Comment screen is displayed. The comment can be edited directly. For copying comments repeatedly, it is useful to set the "Device/Label Comment" field to be displayed in selecting
status using the following option.
Select [Tool] [Options] "Program Editor" "Ladder/SFC" "Enter ladder", and select "Do not leave the Device/ Label Comment field editing status".
16
PROTECTING DATA
9.2.2 Creating comments on the ladder editor
9 - 13
9 SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
Creating device comments in the ladder editing mode
Device comments can be added/modified on the created ladder program on the ladder editing screen. Example: Set the comment 'Indication of initial start.' for X1.
Operating procedure
� Enter ';;X1=Indication of initial start' on the
ladder editor.
The entered comment is added as a device comment.
Entering comments following element entry Using the method explained below, a comment can be entered following an element entry in ladder editing mode. Click in the Enter Symbol screen, or select [Tool] [Options] "Program Editor" "Ladder/SFC" "Enter ladder" and select "Enter label comment and device comment".
Target of applying device comment change Device comments changed or added on the ladder editor are applied to global device comments. To apply changes to local device comments, specify the reflection target for "Reference/Reflection Target for Device Comment" under [Tool] [Options] "Program Editor" "All Editors" "Device Comment".
Considerations when entering device comments in the ladder editing mode When entering device comments in the ladder editing mode, do not enter device comments to devices which are out of the range of device points set on the <<Device>> tab of PLC parameter because they cannot be deleted.
9 - 14
9.2.2 Creating comments on the ladder editor
9.3 Deleting Device Comments
9.3 Deleting Device Comments
9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
Q CPU L CPU ReFmXote HFeXad FX
This section explains how to delete device comments.
10
9.3.1 Deleting comments of all devices
SEARCH/REPLACE
Delete comments of all devices on the device comment editor being displayed.
Operating procedure
11
� Select the device comment editor [Edit] [Clear All (All Devices)].
All device comments set on the device comment editor are deleted.
PRINTING
9.3.2 Deleting comments of devices being displayed
12
Delete comments of devices being displayed on the device comment editor.
SETTING OPTIONS
Operating procedure
� Select the device comment editor [Edit] [Clear All (All Displayed Devices)].
All comments of devices being displayed on the device comment editor are deleted.
13
USING LIBRARIES
9.3.3 Deleting unused device comments
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
Delete device comments which are not used in the project.
14
Operating procedure
� Select [Tool] [Delete Unused Device Comment].
The device comments are deleted and the result is displayed.
15
Device comments that cannot be deleted using the Delete Unused Device Comment function The device comments which are set to the following devices cannot be deleted.
WRITING/READING DATA
� SM
� SD
� Jn\SB
� Jn\SW
� BL � BLn\S
16
� BLn\TR
PROTECTING DATA
9.3.1 Deleting comments of all devices
9 - 15
9 SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
9.4 Extending Number of Points of Device Comment
Q CPU L CPU ReFmXote HFeXad FX
The number of points of device comment can be extended by changing the mode from the standard mode to the extended mode. Device comment can be set within the extended number of points in the project.
The following table shows the number of points of device comment that can be set in the standard mode and the extended mode.
Item Number of points of device comment per device Number of points of device comment per file
Standard mode 32k points
1024k points
Extended mode 192k points 2048k points
Operating procedure
� Select "Extended mode" under [Tool] [Options] "Device Comment Editor".
Writing/reading device comments to/from a programmable controller CPU
� Regardless of the standard mode or the extended mode, up to the following number of device comments can be written to the programmable controller CPU. Per device: 32k points Total number of device comments: 64k points When the number of set device comments exceeds the number of points that can be written to the programmable controller CPU, set the range when writing device comments to the programmable controller CPU. (Section 15.1.3)
� When merging device comments which are read from the programmable controller CPU and device comments in the project, 32k or more points of device comments which are set in the extended mode are not deleted. However, when do not merge them, 32k or more points of device comments which are set in the extended mode are deleted because the device comments are replaced with that in the programmable controller CPU. When merging device comments, select "Merge device comment with the project data at time of PLC read" under [Tool] [Option] "PLC Read/Write".
When changing the mode from the extended mode to the standard mode Select "Standard mode" under [Tool] [Options] "Device Comment Editor" to change the mode from the extended mode to the standard mode. Note that, however, when the number of points which exceeds the number of points that can be set in the standard mode is set, the mode cannot be changed. Delete the exceeded device comments and change the mode.
Considerations for saving GX Developer format project [Export to GX Developer Format File] under [Project] cannot be performed when the extended mode is set. Save the GX Developer format project after changing the mode to the standard mode.
9 - 16
9.5 Utilizing Sample Comments
9.5 Utilizing Sample Comments
9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
This section explains how to set a sample comment of special relays/special registers and intelligent function modules automatically. Open the device comment editor in advance.
10
9.5.1
Utilizing sample comments of special relays/special registers
SEARCH/REPLACE
Q CPU L CPU ReFmXote HFeXad FX
Utilize sample comments of special relays/special registers.
11
Operating procedure
PRINTING
� Select [Edit] [Import from Sample Comment] [Special Relay/Special Register].
The sample comments of special relays/special registers are set on the device comment editor
being edited.
12
SETTING OPTIONS
13
USING LIBRARIES
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
Project language and sample comments to be utilized
When the project language is changed, sample comments with the language selected for the project language are utilized.
15
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
9.5.1 Utilizing sample comments of special relays/special registers
9 - 17
9 SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
9.5.2 Utilizing sample comments of intelligent function modules
Q CPU L CPU ReFmXote HFeXad FX
Utilize sample comments of intelligent function module devices and input/output signals.
Operating procedure
1. Select [Edit] [Import from Sample
Comment] [Intelligent Function Module].
2. Select modules whose sample comments are utilized.
3. Click the
button.
The sample comments of intelligent function module devices are set on the device comment editor being edited. For Universal model QCPU/LCPU, bit-specified word device comments can also be utilized.
Utilizing sample comments
� Sample comments can also be utilized by right-clicking any position on the device comment editor, and selecting [Import from Sample Comment] from the shortcut menu.
� For data protected by security, device comments cannot be utilized.
� When the project language is changed, sample comments of the selected project language are utilized.
Number of characters displayed on device comment editor The sample comments are displayed with the number of characters set in "Device Comment Editor" under [Tool] [Options].
Considerations when utilizing sample comments When utilizing sample comments of intelligent function module, the data size may exceed the memory capacity of the programmable controller CPU and data may not be written to a programmable controller CPU. In this case, delete unnecessary sample comments.
9 - 18
9.5.2 Utilizing sample comments of intelligent function modules
9.6 Writing/Reading Device Comments to CSV Files
9.6 Writing/Reading Device Comments to CSV Files
9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
Q CPU L CPU ReFmXote HFeXad FX
This section explains how to write/read device comment data to a CSV file.
10
9.6.1 Writing/reading device comments
SEARCH/REPLACE
This section explains the writing/reading device comments to/from the CSV file. The local device comments can be written/read in a batch. (Section 9.6.2)
11
Writing device comment data
Write device comment data to a CSV file.
PRINTING
Operating procedure
1. Select [Edit] [Write to CSV File].
12
The confirmation message for writing data is displayed.
SETTING OPTIONS
13
USING LIBRARIES
2. Click the
button.
The Write to CSV File screen is displayed.
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
15
WRITING/READING DATA
3. Enter a file name of the data to be saved.
4. Click the
button.
Device comment data is saved in the CSV file.
9.6.1 Writing/reading device comments
16
9 - 19
PROTECTING DATA
9 SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
Reading device comment data
Read device comment data from a CSV file.
Operating procedure
1. Select [Edit] [Read from CSV File].
The Read from CSV File screen is displayed.
2. Select a file to be read.
3. Click the
button.
The confirmation message for reading data is displayed.
4. Click the
button.
Device comment data is read from the CSV file.
Device comment data for which an error message is displayed when reading data An error message is displayed on the Output window if the following data is included when reading device comment data.
� Device comment data of devices which are not supported by the programmable controller type of the project.
� Bit-specified device comments (For programmable controller type whose project does not support bit-specified comments.)
Reading of device comment data is suspended when the number of error messages exceeds 100.
Reading device comment data whose number of characters exceeds the applicable amount When a device comment whose number of characters exceeds applicable amount is set on the device comment editor, a warning message is displayed on the Output window and characters exceeded the applicable amount are deleted.
9 - 20
9.6.1 Writing/reading device comments
9.6 Writing/Reading Device Comments to CSV Files
Setting extended settings
9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
Set settings such as selecting target devices for writing/reading device comment data.
Screen display
Select the
button on the confirmation message for writing/reading data.
10
< When reading device comment data >
SEARCH/REPLACE
11
PRINTING
SETTING OPTIONS
12
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Item
Description
Target Device Selection
Display all devices to which device comments can be set in a program.
Non-target
Display devices which are not to be written/read.
Target
Display devices which are to be written/read.
Read after deleting comment data of target device type*1
Select this to read devices after deleting set device comments.
*1 : This item can be selected only when reading data.
13
USING LIBRARIES
2. Click the
button.
Return to the confirmation message for writing/reading data.
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
Screen button
Moves devices selected for "Non-target" to "Target".
Moves all devices displayed on "Non-target" to "Target".
15
WRITING/READING DATA
Moves devices selected for "Target" to "Non-target".
Moves all devices displayed on "Target" to "Non-target".
16
Sets the setting items to the default.
PROTECTING DATA
9.6.1 Writing/reading device comments
9 - 21
9 SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
9.6.2 Writing/Reading local device comments in a batch
This section explains the writing/reading the local device comments in a batch by specifying the folder. This function is useful for cases, such as when switching comments between Japanese and English in the same program.
Writing data of the local device comments in a batch
Save the data of the local device comments in a batch to the specified folder. Even if there are the data of multiple local device comments, all the local device comments can be written in a batch to the CSV file just by specifying the folder. However, extended settings cannot be set.
Operating procedure
1. Select Project view "Local Device Comment". 2. Right-click and select [Batch Write to Folder] from the shortcut menu.
The Browse For Folder screen is displayed.
3. Select a folder in which the local device comments are to be stored.
4. Click the
button.
The CSV file for each local device comment is created in the folder.
9 - 22
9.6.2 Writing/Reading local device comments in a batch
9.6 Writing/Reading Device Comments to CSV Files
Reading data of the local device comments in a batch
9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
Read the data of the local device comments in a batch from the specified folder.
Even if there are the data of multiple local device comments, all the CSV files can be read in a batch
just by specifying the folder.
However, extended settings cannot be set.
Save only the CSV file of local device comment data to the folder specified for reading. The CSV files not containing the local device comments data will be read as an empty local device comment.
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
Operating procedure
1. Select Project view "Local Device Comment".
2. Right-click and select [Batch Read from Folder] from the shortcut menu.
11
The Browse For Folder screen is displayed.
PRINTING
12
SETTING OPTIONS
13
USING LIBRARIES
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
3. Select a file to be read.
14
4. Click the
button.
Multiple local device comments are read from the folder.
Device comment data for which an error message is displayed when reading data
15
An error message is displayed on the Output window if the following data is included when reading device comment
data.
WRITING/READING DATA
� Device comment data of devices which are not supported by the programmable controller type of the project.
� Bit-specified device comments (For programmable controller type whose project does not support bit-specified comments.)
Reading of device comment data is suspended when the number of error messages exceeds 100.
Reading device comment data whose number of characters exceeds the applicable amount
16
When a device comment whose number of characters exceeds applicable amount is set on the device comment editor,
a warning message is displayed on the Output window and characters exceeded the applicable amount are deleted.
PROTECTING DATA
9.6.2 Writing/Reading local device comments in a batch
9 - 23
9 SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
9.6.3 CSV file format
A title name of device comment editor and a title name of CSV file are linked. � Data of the column whose title matches with the title of the device comment editor are read to the
device comment editor. � Data of the column whose title does not match with the title of the device comment editor are not
read. � Data can be read even when the sorted order of CSV file does not match with the sorted order of the
device comment editor. The following is an image of the saved CSV file opened with Excel.
< Device comment editor >
< CSV file >
Details of CSV file The following indicates the details of CSV file format. � The file format is Unicode (including UTF-16, Little Endian, and BOM). � The delimiter of items is a tab (\t). � Each item is enclosed in double quotation marks ("). � If the item contains double quotation marks ("), the double quotation marks in the item are expressed as two double quotation marks (""). � A line feed is set at the end of the line. The line feed code is CR+LF. � A blank space is handled as a regular character.
< Image of device comments in CSV file >
9 - 24
9.6.3 CSV file format
9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
10 SEARCH/REPLACE
10
This chapter explains the operation methods for searching for/replacing the character strings used in programs.
SEARCH/REPLACE
11
PRINTING
10.1 Cross Reference 10.2 Displaying Device List 10.3 Search/Replacement
12
10 - 2
10 - 13
10 - 16
13
SETTING OPTIONS
USING LIBRARIES
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
15
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
10 - 1
10 SEARCH/REPLACE
10.1 Cross Reference
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
This section explains how to create and display the cross reference information, which shows a list of locations where devices/labels selected on the program editor/label setting editor are used. The Cross Reference window is displayed horizontally when it is docked on top or bottom of the main frame, and displayed vertically when it is docked on left or right of the main frame.
Target data for creating cross reference information
Cross reference information is created based on devices used in the following editors/parameters. � Ladder � SFC � ST � Structured Ladder/FBD � Global label � Local label � Structure � Multiple CPU refresh setting of PLC parameter � Simple PLC communication setting of PLC parameter � Refresh parameters of network parameter � Auto refresh setting of intelligent function module parameter � Block information of SFC program
10.1.1 Creating/displaying cross reference information
Create and display cross reference information of the label/device selected on the program editor/label setting editor.
Screen display
Select [View] [Docking Window] [Cross Reference] ( ). <<Cross Reference Information>>
10 - 2
10.1.1 Creating/displaying cross reference information
10.1 Cross Reference
Operating procedure
9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
1. Specify the conditions to create cross reference information as necessary.
By setting the conditions, the operation such as: searching for a label definition on the label setting
editor, displaying hierarchy of structure/array/FB, and displaying a start device and end device of
the instruction such as the DMOV instruction which uses two or more points of device, can be
performed. (Section 10.1.2)
10
2. Select a device/label on the program editor/label setting editor.
SEARCH/REPLACE
3. To specify the range to be searched, select a search location by clicking the
button of "Find in".
Two or more search locations can be selected.
11
Click to select a location from the list of previously searched locations. The location cannot be
entered directly.
This function is not supported by FXCPU.
PRINTING
12
SETTING OPTIONS
13
USING LIBRARIES
4. Click the
button.
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
The cross reference information is created and the result is displayed.
When the range to be searched is specified and "Find Label Definition" on the <<Condition
Setting>> tab is selected, the cross reference information of global labels, FBs, and structures is
also created other than the information of specified search location.
By pressing the key after selecting a row in the result list, or by double-clicking or right-
clicking the selected row and selecting [Jump] from the shortcut menu, the editor in which the
device/label is used opens and the corresponding device/label becomes in the selected status.
15
The following screen is a result of a Structured project in which "Display all items" and "Display
hierarchically" are selected on the <<Condition Setting>> tab.
WRITING/READING DATA
16
Attributes
PROTECTING DATA
10.1.1 Creating/displaying cross reference information
10 - 3
10 SEARCH/REPLACE
Display contents
Item
Description
Attributes
Display icons which indicate attributes of devices/labels. (' Icons to indicate attribute' in this section)
Device/Label
Display the device/label name.
Class*1,*2
Display the class of the device/label.
Label Data Type*1,*2
Display the data type of the device/label.
Constant*1,*2
Display the constant value set for VAR_GLOBAL_CONSTANT or VAR_CONSTANT.
Device*1
Display the device assigned to the label (automatically assigned device).
Address*2,*3
Display the address of the device/label.
Read/Write
Display whether Read or Write the device/label is.
Instruction*2,*4
Display the name of the instruction in which the device/label is used.
Ladder Symbol
For ladder programs, display elements of instruction in which devices are used.
Position
Display the position which identifies the location of the device/label. (' Position information' on the next page)
Project*3
Display the project name or the library name in which the device/label is used.
Program File Name*3
Display the program file name in which the device/label is used.
Task*3
Display the task name of the program registration destination in which the device/label is used.
Data Type
Display the type of data in which the device/label is used.
Data Name
Display the program or the data name registered in the program in which the device/label is used. Display the block name for SFC program.
Comment*2
Display the comments of the device/label.
System Label Name*1,*2
Display the system label name which corresponds to the global label. For devices/labels set for SFC block information, this column will be blank.
*1 : These items are not displayed in Simple project (without labels). *2 : Only when "Display all items" is selected on the <<Condition Setting>> tab. *3 : For Structured projects only *4 : For ladder programs and SFC (Zoom) programs only
Screen button
Prints the selected row. (Section 11.7) Prints all lists when a row is not selected.
Displays a print preview of the selected row. (Section 11.9) Displays a print preview of all lists when a row is not selected.
10 - 4
10.1.1 Creating/displaying cross reference information
10.1 Cross Reference
9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
Creating cross reference information
� Cross reference information can also be created by right-clicking a device/label on the program editor, and selecting [Cross Reference] from the shortcut menu.
Cross reference information can also be created based on all devices/labels by clicking the
button
without specifying devices/labels after the Cross Reference window is displayed.
� The maximum number of creation results of the cross reference information is 80,000. However, since the internal
10
data that are not displayed are included to the results, the number of results to be displayed in the cross reference
SEARCH/REPLACE
information may not reach 80,000. When "Auto-tracking" is selected on the <<Condition Setting>> tab, the maximum number of creation results of the cross reference information is 500.
When a search location is selected from the list When a program file name or an execution type is changed, the target program file may not be listed in "Find in". In this
case, cross reference information of the program files whose name matches is created.
Jump function The jump function cannot be used for the cross reference information of parameters, block information, and block start
11
steps.
Moving the focus
� (+) moves the focus between the editor and the Cross Reference window.
� (+)/+ (++) moves the cursor to the previous/next row.
PRINTING
Displaying comments
In a ladder/SFC project, comments specified in [Tool] [Options] "Program Editor" "All Editors" "Device
Comment" "Reference/Reflection Target for Device Comment" are displayed as device comments.
12
(Section 9.1.1)
SETTING OPTIONS
Searching cross reference information with label definitions The time to display the creation results of the cross reference information becomes longer when the number of results exceeds 80,000 substantially. When labels contain array elements exist, this symptom can be avoided by clearing the check box of "Display hierarchically" on the <<Condition Setting>> tab.
Searching label names which are combined with symbols of the timer device or counter device and device
number When a label name, which is combined with the following characters (device symbol + number), is entered to "Device/
13
Label" on the Cross Reference window, it will be searched as a device.
To display the cross reference information of the label, select "All Device/Label" in "Device/Label", enter the label name
to "Device/Label", and filter the cross reference information.
USING LIBRARIES
Device Timer device Counter device Retentive timer device
Symbol TS, TC, TN CS, CC, CN STS, STC, STN, SS, SC, SN
Example of label name
TS10
CC50
14
sn100
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
Restrictions
When "Create cross reference information after completion compile" is selected in the option setting
� When timer device (T) is specified as a search condition, devices of contact (TS), coil (TC), and current value (TN) also become search targets. When any of the timer devices: contact (TS), coil (TC), or current value (TN), is
15
specified, timer device (T) is also searched along with the specified device.
The same operation as above applies when specifying retentive timer device or counter device.
� When device/label which is not indexed is specified as a search condition, only devices/labels which are not indexed are searched.
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
10.1.1 Creating/displaying cross reference information
10 - 5
10 SEARCH/REPLACE
Icons to indicate attribute
The following table shows icons displayed according to the attribute of device/label. When the attribute is label, an icon is displayed with a combination of class and data type as shown in the display example.
Attribute Device Label
Class
Data type Label usage
Icon �
Description
Displayed when the attribute is device. � Displayed when the label class is VAR_GLOBAL. Displayed when the label class is VAR_INPUT. Displayed when the label class is VAR_OUTPUT. Displayed when the label class is VAR_IN_OUT. Displayed when the label data type is simple data type. Displayed when the label data type is function block. Displayed when the label data type is structure. Displayed when labels are used in a program.
Display example
�
Position information
The following position information is displayed according to the editor.
Type
Description
Example
Ladder editor
Step number
Step No. 5
ST editor
Number of lines
Row No. 2
SFC editor*1
SFC symbol and step number
SFC Step No. 3, Step No. 4
Structured Ladder/FBD editor
Ladder block number and grid position
2. (10. 2)
Label Setting screen, Structure Setting screen
Row number
1
Parameter
Name of parameter item to which devices are set
Auto Refresh
Block information of SFC program
Name of block information to which devices/ labels are set
Block START/END Bit
Inline structured text
STB step (number of lines)
STB 3 (Row No.2)
*1 : For the SFC block number, check the property of block (program) displayed in "Data Name". (For details of properties Section 4.3.6)
10 - 6
10.1.1 Creating/displaying cross reference information
10.1 Cross Reference
Displaying cross reference information
9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
Displaying cross reference information in uncompiled state
For a project with labels, cross reference information can be created based on the compilation result,
and it can be displayed even in an uncompiled state.
To display cross reference information in an uncompiled state, perform one of the following
operations. � Select "Fast Find" on the <<Condition Setting>> tab.
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
This item can be set for Simple projects (with labels) only.
For details of "Fast Find", refer to Section 10.1.2.
� Select [Tool] [Options] "Compile" "Basic Setting", select "Create cross reference
information after completion compile", and execute the compilation.
By setting this item, the cross reference information can be displayed quicker while the compilation
time gets longer.
11
Display after creation of cross reference information is completed
The icon on the bottom left of the screen changes according to the status of the displayed cross
reference information.
PRINTING
Icon
Status of cross reference information
Indicate the cross reference information is updated.
Indicate the project has been changed after the cross reference information is created.
Indicate the cross reference information cannot be used. For instance, cross reference information has not been created. Indicate the cross reference information created in past is displayed. (Only when "Fast Find" is selected.)
12
SETTING OPTIONS
� The data protected by security cannot be displayed. � If the program or the option setting is changed, the cross reference information does not
13
correspond with the program. In order to update the cross reference information, create it again.
USING LIBRARIES
� Each column can be sorted in ascending/descending order by clicking on the column header.
However, the sort cannot be performed if the structure/array/FB is displayed in the tree. To cancel
the display in the tree, clear "Display hierarchically" and "Display the last device of multiple points
device" on the <<Condition Setting>> tab.
Deleting data after compiling a program
14
When data is deleted after the program is compiled, the deleted data may be displayed as a search
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
result.
To display the most recent cross reference information, compile the program and create cross reference information again.
Searching for multiple word (such as DMOV instruction) in a ladder program
When a negative constant (example: K-1) is specified for device/label, an incorrect search result may
be displayed.
15
In this case, perform the search function by specifying all devices/labels, and check the search result.
WRITING/READING DATA
Searching for refresh device of CC-Link parameter For refresh devices (RX/RY) set in a local station or standby station of the CC-Link parameter, the
target of search is only the first 16 points of devices.
When the same name is used for label and device The Auto-tracking function of cross reference gives devices a priority to be searched.
To display cross reference information of label whose name is the same as that of device, search for 16
"All Device/Label" in "Device/Label". Then, enter a label name in the "Device/Label" column of
filtering condition, and execute the filtering display.
PROTECTING DATA
10.1.1 Creating/displaying cross reference information
10 - 7
10 SEARCH/REPLACE
Searching for BL devices When BLn is specified for the device to be searched, the block start steps for n block start are also searched. "BLOCK" (with END check) or "BLOCK-S" (without END check) is displayed in the "Instruction" column on the Cross Reference window.
Displaying/hiding columns
Columns in the screen can be displayed or hidden by right-clicking a column header of the cross reference information and selecting the items to be displayed or hidden from the shortcut menu.
Displaying devices/labels that use FB instance
To create the cross reference information from the devices/labels used in the function block, select the FB instance to create the cross reference information.
10 - 8
10.1.1 Creating/displaying cross reference information
10.1 Cross Reference
10.1.2 Setting conditions
9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
Conditions are set on the <<Condition Setting>> tab on the Cross Reference window. Whenever the condition is changed, the cross reference information needs to be recreated.
Screen display
10
Select the <<Condition Setting>> tab on the Cross Reference window.
SEARCH/REPLACE
11
Operating procedure
� Set the items on the screen.
Item
Description
Find Condition
�
Find label definition
Select this to search each label setting editor.
Find Constant (K,H)
Select this to search the constant (K and H).
Find Device other than the Head
Select this to search devices following the start device of digit-specified device/ multiple word device.
Specify find order*1
Specify the search order.
Display Condition
�
Display all items
Select this to display all items that can be created in the cross reference information.
Display hierarchically
Select this to display a structure/array/FB hierarchically.
Display the last device of multiple points device*2
Select this to display the start and last devices when a device which uses two or more points in a instruction is specified.
Find Mode
�
Auto-tracking*3, *4
Select this to create cross reference information of devices/labels selected on the editor automatically.
Auto-Tracking Only in Click/Key Operation
Select this to update cross reference information only when the cursor is moved by clicking the mouse or pressing the key. When this item is selected, the Auto-tracking function does not apply to the operations with the mouse wheel and the scroll bar.
Fast Find*5
Select this to display cross reference information more quickly. Only "Device/Label", "Device", "Instruction", "Ladder Symbol", "Position", and "Data Name" are displayed. ST programs, inline structured text programs, and the second hierarchy of function block in ladder programs are not searched. By selecting this item, the setting of "Create cross reference information after completion compile" under [Tool] [Options] [Compile] "Basic Setting" is disabled.
Explanation
Display the explanation of the condition item.
*1 : For QCPU (Q mode) excluding Basic model QCPU and LCPU only
*2 : For ladder programs and SFC (Zoom) programs only
*3 : The Auto-tracking does not function in the following cases. When the ladder editor is in device display. When the ladder editor is in edit line mode/delete line mode.
*4 : For projects with labels, this item can be selected when "Create cross reference information after completion compile" is selected under [Tool] [Options] [Compile] [Basic Setting], or when "Find Mode" is selected on the <<Condition Setting>> tab.
*5 : For Simple projects (with labels) only
WRITING/READING DATA
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
USING LIBRARIES
SETTING OPTIONS
PRINTING
12 13 14 15 16
PROTECTING DATA
10.1.2 Setting conditions
10 - 9
10 SEARCH/REPLACE
"Specify find order" on the <<Condition Setting>> tab The search order of the "Specify find order" function and the display order of search result are as follows. � When "Do not specify" is selected, data are searched in the order of data name. The search result is displayed in the order of parameters, programs, and labels. � When "Program Setting" is selected, data are searched in the order of program files set on the <<Program>> tab of PLC parameter. The search result is displayed in the order of local label and program, global labels, and parameters. Note that when "Fast Find" on the <<Condition Setting>> tab is selected or "Create cross reference information after completion compile" in the option setting is selected, "Do not specify" is set for "Specify find order".
Search order when "Program Setting" is selected. "Display the last device of multiple points device" on the <<Condition Setting>> tab The last device of the device which uses multiple device points in an instruction or refresh parameter can be displayed. Select "Display the last device of multiple points device" on the <<Condition Setting>> tab to display the last device. The start and last devices are displayed in a tree format as shown below.
"Auto-tracking" on the <<Condition Setting>> tab For ladder program, devices/labels of second and the following arguments of the instruction are also automatically tracked. To display cross reference information of second and the following arguments of the instruction during the Autotracking mode, perform the following operations. � For a project without labels, select from the "Device/Label" input column. � To search devices in a project with labels, select from the "Device" column of filtering condition. � To search labels, select from the "Device/Label" column of filtering condition.
"Find Mode" on the <<Condition Setting>> tab If "Find Mode" is selected, cross reference information is automatically created when the following operation is performed. � Changing a ladder or SFC (Zoom) program � Compiling a program � Adding/deleting program data � Reading data from a programmable controller CPU � Changing a programmable controller type
10 - 10
10.1.2 Setting conditions
10.1 Cross Reference
10.1.3 Filtering display
9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
Filter the created cross reference information. Elements cannot be filtered. The following is an example of display by filtering devices/labels with the condition 'D*'.
Operating procedure
10
1. Enter 'D*' in the filtering condition column under "Device/Label".
SEARCH/REPLACE
11
PRINTING
2. Press the key.
The data matching with the set filtering condition are displayed on the Cross Reference window.
12
SETTING OPTIONS
13
USING LIBRARIES
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
15
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
10.1.3 Filtering display
10 - 11
10 SEARCH/REPLACE
Filtering condition
Clicking enables to select a keyword from the list of previously entered keywords. For "Data Name" and "Program File Name", search results can also be selected from the list as well as previously entered keywords.
Tree display of filtering condition Only data whose components match with the filtering conditions are displayed in the tree format when filtering display is executed for the structure data names or the instance names of the function block.
Deleting filtering condition Filtering display of the column can be canceled by deleting keywords entered in each filtering condition column.
Keywords for filtering condition The wild card characters can be used in a filtering condition shown as below.
Example) When the filtering condition is set for the device/label column.
Wild card * ? [ ] [! ]
[ - ] #
Search target
Specifies any character string. Specifies any one character. Specifies any one of those characters.
Specifies any one of characters except for the characters in the bracket.
Specifies character strings within the range in the bracket.
Specifies any one-digit number.
Example *30* K4?30 [XY]8
K4X[!3]0
D[0-2] Local200#
Search Result ready301, K4X30, K1Y30, K4Y30
K4X30, K4Y30 X8, Y8
K4X40, K4Y50
D0, D1, D2 Local2001, Local2003
10 - 12
10.1.3 Filtering display
10.2 Displaying Device List
10.2 Displaying Device List
9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
This section explains how to display the usage of the specified devices.
Screen display
10
Select [Find/Replace] [Device List].
SEARCH/REPLACE
11
PRINTING
12
SETTING OPTIONS
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Device
Item
Find In
Display Option
Number of Find Points
All devices
Used devices
Unused devices 65536 Points 512 Points
Description
Enter a device to be searched for. Click to select a device from the list of previously searched devices.
Select a location to search for.
Click
to select a location to search for. Two or more search
locations can be selected.
After selecting the search location, click the location.
button to save the search
Click to select a location from the list of previously searched locations. The location cannot be entered directly.
Display all devices.
Display devices used in the program. Selected items are searched.
Display devices not used in the program.
Select this to set device points to be searched to 65536 points.
Select this to set device points to be searched to 512 points.
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
USING LIBRARIES
13 14 15
2. Click the
button.
Search result is displayed.
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
10 - 13
10 SEARCH/REPLACE
Display contents
Item Find Range Device Contact Coil (counts) Parameter*1
Comment
*1 : Not supported by FXCPU.
Description
Display the range of the devices searched.
The display can be switched by clicking the
/
button.
Display the device name.
Display '*' when the device is used as a contact.
Display '*' and the number of uses when the device is used as a coil.
Display '*' when the device is used as a parameter or an intelligent function module parameter.
Display the device comment set for reference/reflection target in the option setting. (Section 9.1.1 " Specifying device comments to be displayed in program") Specify a program for "Find In" to enter device comments.
Screen button
Prints the selected row. (Section 11.7) Prints all lists when a row is not selected.
Displays a print preview of the selected row. (Section 11.9) Displays a print preview of all lists when a row is not selected.
Deletes device comments which are not used in a program in device units.
Displaying/hiding columns
Columns can be displayed or hidden by right-clicking a column header of the search result and selecting the items to be displayed or hidden from the shortcut menu.
10 - 14
10.2 Displaying Device List
Considerations of search in device list
9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
The following shows the considerations of search in the device list.
Handling of coil instructions As output instructions, the following application instructions can also be the target of search. SET, RST, PLS, PLF, FF, SFT, SFTP, and MC
Searching for R devices and ZR devices
10
R devices and ZR devices are distinguished in the device list. Specify them separately when
searching for R devices or ZR devices.
SEARCH/REPLACE
Saved search locations
When the name of the program specified in the search location is changed, the program is not searched. In order to search the program with the changed name, specify the program in the search location.
11
Note that, however, when the program name is changed to the original name, the program is searched.
Confirming locations of devices The Cross Reference window can be opened from a used device displayed in the device list, and the location of the device can be confirmed.
PRINTING
To open the Cross Reference window, select a desired row in the device list and follow any of the following operations.
� Press the + keys or press the key.
� Double-click the row.
� Right-click the row and select [Cross Reference] from the shortcut menu.
12
SETTING OPTIONS
For the cross reference function, refer to Section 10.1.
Displaying comments
� When searching for data with a selection of one program, device comments specified for "Reference/Reflection Target for Device Comment" under [Tool] [Options] "Program Editor" "All Editors" "Device Comment" are displayed. (Section 9.1.1)
� When searching for data with a selection of two or more programs, global device comments are displayed.
13
USING LIBRARIES
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
15
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
10 - 15
10 SEARCH/REPLACE
10.3 Search/Replacement
Q CPU L CPU ReFmXote HFeXad FX
This section explains how to search for and replacing character strings, devices, labels, instructions, etc. in project data. If the All Find/All Replace function is executed, the details of the execution result are displayed.
Purposes of each search/replacement The following table shows the purposes of each search/replacement.
Function
Purpose
Find Device/Replace Device
Used for searching for/replacing a device or label in a program.
Find Instruction/Replace Instruction
Used for searching for/replacing an instruction in a program.
Find String/Replace String
Used for searching for/replacing a character string used in a program, label, and device comment.
Change Open/Close Contact
Used for switching the contact type of a specified device in a program from normal to negation, or from negation to normal.
Device Batch Replace
Used for searching for/replacing devices or labels in a program in batch.
Displaying the Find/Replace screen The Find/Replace screen can also be displayed by selecting [View] [Docking Window] [Find/Replace].
Replace function � The programs are in the uncompiled status after the Replace function is executed. Compile all the programs again.
� The Replace function cannot be executed during monitoring. Execute the function after monitoring is finished.
� The Replace function cannot be executed when a program is opened with the read-only mode. Execute the function after setting the data in editable mode by the setting such as resetting the security.
Searching/replacing labels One point of device can be replaced when searching/replacing labels.
Searching/replacing data in inline structured text box The search starts from the top of the program in the inline structured text box regardless of the cursor position.
Replacement of items corresponding to system labels The following items that correspond to system labels cannot be replaced.
� Relation with system label
� System label name
� Attribute
10 - 16
10.3.1 Searching/replacing devices/labels
Search/replace devices/labels in the program.
Screen display
Select [Find/Replace] [Find Device]/[Replace Device] ( ).
10.3 Search/Replacement
9
10
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
SEARCH/REPLACE
11
PRINTING
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Item
Description
Find In
Click the
button to select a location to search for. Two or more
search locations can be selected.
Click to select a location from the list of previously searched locations. The location cannot be entered directly.
Find Device
Enter a device/label to be searched for or a replacing device/label.
Replace Device
Click to select from the list of devices or labels entered previously.
Enter the number of points to be searched/replaced, counted from the device entered in the "Find Device" field. When a label is entered for "Find Device" or "Replace Device", enter 1.
Device Point
Click to select either hexadecimal or decimal for the value to be used.
Example) When X50 for "Find Device", X100 for "Replace Device", 3 for "Device Point", and "DEC" for entered value are set, the devices are replaced as shown below. X50X100, X51X101, X52X102
Find Direction
From Top Down
Select this to execute a search in the downward direction from the start of the program.
Select this to execute a search in the downward direction from the cursor position.
Up
Select this to execute a search in the upward direction from the cursor position.
Digit*1
Select this to execute a search for the entered device and digit-specified bit devices that include the entered device.
Option
Multiple word*1
Select this to execute a search for the entered device and the double-word format (double word/real number/indirect specification) word devices that include the entered device.
Consecutive search with enter key
Select this not to move the focus to the editor after the search/replace function. The searched/replaced position may not be highlighted.
Move
Select this to move a device comment of "Find Device" to "Replace Device".
Device Comment*2
Copy
Not to Change
Select this to copy a device comment of "Find Device" to "Replace Device". Select this not to move or copy a device comment of "Find Device".
*1 : For ladder programs, SFC (Zoom) programs, Structured Ladder/FBD programs, and ST programs only *2 : For ladder programs and SFC (Zoom) programs only
WRITING/READING DATA
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
USING LIBRARIES
SETTING OPTIONS
12 13 14 15 16
PROTECTING DATA
10.3.1 Searching/replacing devices/labels
10 - 17
10 SEARCH/REPLACE
2. Click the
button.
The cursor moves to the searched device.
Screen button
Searches for the character string entered in "Find String".
Batch searches for the character string entered in "Find String". The search result is also displayed. (Section 10.3.6)
Replaces the character string entered in "Find String" with the character string entered in "Replace String".
Batch replaces the character string entered in "Find String" with the character string entered in "Replace String". The replace result is also displayed. (Section 10.3.6)
10 - 18
10.3.1 Searching/replacing devices/labels
10.3 Search/Replacement
Examples of device search
9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
The following tables show examples of specification for device search operations. Example of device search (Option: None)
Device specification
Search result ( For ladder program )
M0
M0, K4M0, M0Z0, K4M0Z0
K4M0
K4M0, K4M0Z0
D0
D0, D0Z0, D0.1
D0.1
D0.1
J1\B0*1
J1\B0, J1\B0Z0, J1Z0\B0, J1Z0\B0Z0, J1\K4B0, J1\K4B0Z0, J1Z0\K4B0, J1Z0\K4B0Z0
*1 : Not supported by FXCPU.
Example of device search (Option: Digit)
SEARCH/REPLACE
10 11
Device specification
Search result ( For ladder program )
X0 to X3
K1X0
PRINTING
X0 to X0F
K4X0
X0 to X1F
K8X0
X0Z0
X0Z0, K1X0Z0, K4X0Z0, K8X0Z0
12
Example of device search (Option: Multiple word)
SETTING OPTIONS
Device specification
Search result ( For ladder program )
D0 to D1
DMOV K1 D0, EMOV E1 D0, DMOV K1 @D0
D0 to D9
BMOV D0 D100 K10
D0Z0 to D1Z0
DMOV K1 D0Z0
ZR0ZZ0 to ZR1ZZ0*1
DMOV K1 ZR0ZZ0
J1\W0 to J1\W1*1
DMOV K1 J1\W0
@D0 to @D1*1
DMOV K1 @D0
T0 to T1
DMOV K1 T0
T0Z0 to T1Z0
DMOV K1 T0Z0
*1 : Not supported by FXCPU.
USING LIBRARIES
13 14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
15
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
10.3.1 Searching/replacing devices/labels
10 - 19
10 SEARCH/REPLACE
Devices/labels that can be replaced or batch replaced
The following table shows the devices/labels that can be replaced or batch replaced.
: Replaceable �: Not replaceable
New device/label
Device (X0, D0)
Bit-specified word device
(D0.1*1)
Word device indirect
specification*2 (@D0)
Digit-specified bit device (K1X1)
Index setting (X0Z0)
Digit-specified bit device +
Index setting (K4X0Z0)
Index setting +
Bit-specified word device
(J1Z0\W0.1*2)
Label/ String (g_bool1)
Device (X0, D0)
�
�
Bit-specified
word device
�
(D0.1*1)
�
�
�
�
Word device
indirect specification*2
�
�
�
(@D0)
�
�
�
�
Digit-specified
bit device
�
�
�
(K1X1)
Old device/
Index setting (X0Z0)
�
�
�
label
Digit-specified
bit device
+
�
�
�
Index setting
(K4X0Z0)
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
Index setting
+
Bit-specified
�
�
�
word device
(J1Z0\W0.1*2)
�
�
�
�
Label/String (g_bool1)
*1 : Supported by FX3U and FX3UC only. *2 : Not supported by FXCPU.
10 - 20
10.3.1 Searching/replacing devices/labels
10.3 Search/Replacement
Searching/replacing devices/labels in inline structured text program
9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
The following explains the considerations when searching/replacing devices/labels in the inline structured text program.
Searching/replacing devices
Devices in the range specified for the parameter are searched. Devices out of the specified range are
not searched.
10
Searching/replacing labels
Both registered and unregistered labels are searched. All unregistered labels which are used at the label positions in the inline structured text program are searched. The following table shows the examples of label positions.
SEARCH/REPLACE
Label position Applicable label position Inapplicable label position
Example label1 MOV (label1, D0, D1); label1 (m1, m2)
Description Labels exist independently. Labels used at label positions in functions. Labels used at instruction positions.
11
PRINTING
Comments in inline structured text program
Strings which are recognized as comments are not searched.
The following table shows the examples of comments.
12
String
Example
Description
SETTING OPTIONS
String recognized as comment
(* D1 *) (* D1...
Strings between the comment start symbol and the end symbol.
Strings following the comment start symbol when the comment does not end with the end symbol.
String not recognized as comment
Device/label names
D1 *)
Strings in front of the comment end symbol when the comment start symbol is not used.
13
Device/label names are not case-sensitive.
USING LIBRARIES
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
15
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
10.3.1 Searching/replacing devices/labels
10 - 21
10 SEARCH/REPLACE
10.3.2 Searching/replacing instructions
Search/replace instructions.
Screen display
Select [Find/Replace] [Find Instruction] ( )/[Replace Instruction]/[Find Contact or Coil] ( ).
Element selection area
Device instruction input area
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Item
Description
Find In
Find Instruction
Replace With
Find Direction
Option
Click the
button to select a location to search for. Two or more
search locations can be selected.
Click to select a location from the list of previously searched locations. The location cannot be entered directly.
Element selection area Click to select an element to be searched for from the list.
Device instruction input area
Enter an instruction, device, or label to be searched for. Click to select from the list of instructions, devices, or labels entered previously.
Element selection area Click to select a replacing element from the list.
Device instruction input area
Enter a replacing instruction, device, or label. Click to select from the list of instructions, devices, or labels entered previously.
From Top
Select this to execute a search in the downward direction from the start of the program.
Down
Up
Consecutive search with enter key
Select this to execute a search in the downward direction from the cursor position.
Select this to execute a search in the upward direction from the cursor position.
Select this not to move the focus to the editor after the search/replace function. The searched/replaced position may not be highlighted.
2. Click the
button.
The cursor moves to the searched instruction.
Screen button
For the screen buttons, refer to Section 10.3.1.
10 - 22
10.3.2 Searching/replacing instructions
10.3 Search/Replacement
Examples of instruction search
9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
The following table shows the examples of instruction search.
Instruction specification
Search result
MOV
MOV, MOVP
MOVP
MOVP
MOV D0 K4Y0
MOV D0 K4Y0, MOVP D0Z1 K4Y0, MOV D0 K4Y0Z1, MOVP D0Z1 K4Y0Z1
MOVP D0 J1\W0*1
MOVP D0 J1\W0, MOVP D0Z1 J1\W0, MOVP D0 J1Z1\W0Z1, MOVP D0Z1 J1Z1\W0Z1
*1 : Not supported by FXCPU.
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
Considerations for searching for/replacing instructions
11
The following explains the considerations for searching for/replacing instructions.
PRINTING
Instruction search specifying a coil instruction As output instructions, the following application instructions can also be the target of search. SET, RST, PLS, PLF, FF, SFT, SFTP, and MC
Instruction replacement between a 16-bit (word) instruction and a 32-bit (double word)
instruction
12
When a 16-bit (word) instruction is replaced with a 32-bit (double word) instruction, and if a constant
is set for the device, the constant value is not sign-extended to a value in 32 bits.
Example
SETTING OPTIONS
[MOV H0FFFF D0] Replace MOV to DMOV
[MOV H0FFFF D0]
(-1)
(+32767) The value is not sign-extended
13
to -1(H0FFFFFFFF).
When a 32-bit instruction is replaced with a 16-bit instruction, and if a constant is set for the device, upper 16 bits are discarded.
USING LIBRARIES
Example
[DMOV K150000 D0] [DMOV H0FFFFFFFF D0]
Replace DMOV to MOV
[MOV K18928 D0]
14
[MOV H0FFFF D0]
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
Searching for NOP instructions and TRAN instructions
The NOP instructions used in the ladder programs and the TRAN instructions used in the transition condition of SFC
programs cannot be searched.
15
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
10.3.2 Searching/replacing instructions
10 - 23
10 SEARCH/REPLACE
10.3.3 Searching/replacing character strings
Search/replace character strings.
Screen display
Select [Find/Replace] [Find String]/[Replace String].
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Item
Description
Find In
Click the
button to select a location to search for. Two or
more search locations can be selected.
Click to select a location from the list of previously searched locations. The location cannot be entered directly.
Find String Replace String
Enter a character string to be searched for or a replacing character string.
Click to select a character string from the list of character strings entered previously.
From Top
Select this to execute a search in the downward direction from the start of the program.
Find Direction
Down
Select this to execute a search in the downward direction from the cursor position.
Up
Select this to execute a search in the upward direction from the cursor position.
Match case
Select this to execute a case-sensitive search.
Match whole word only
Select this to execute a search by matching whole word only. For details of the whole word, refer to Point in this section.
Option
Do not search comments in program
Select this to exclude line statements, PI statements, notes, and comments in programs from the search target.
Consecutive search with enter key
Select this not to move the focus to the editor after the search/replace function. The searched/replaced position may not be highlighted.
2. Click the
button.
The cursor moves to the searched character string.
Screen button
For the screen buttons, refer to Section 10.3.1.
10 - 24
10.3.3 Searching/replacing character strings
10.3 Search/Replacement
9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
Searching for NOP instructions and TRAN instructions The NOP instructions used in the ladder programs and the TRAN instructions used in the transition condition of SFC
programs cannot be searched.
Searching/replacing data by matching whole word only The whole word means a string separated by the break characters. The search/replace by matching whole word
searches for only the character strings which are completely match with the character string entered in "Find String". Break characters are shown as below.
10
� Space, tab, line feed
Example) Searching for a device comment 'abc ; def' by the following character strings.
SEARCH/REPLACE
String to be searched for
a abc bc abc ; def
Search result
Not selected
Selected
abc ; def
Nothing is found.
abc ; def
abc ; def
abc ; def
Nothing is found.
abc ; def
abc ; def
11
PRINTING
12
SETTING OPTIONS
13
USING LIBRARIES
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
15
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
10.3.3 Searching/replacing character strings
10 - 25
10 SEARCH/REPLACE
10.3.4
Changing contacts between open contact and closed contact
Change contact types from open contact to closed contact, and conversely, from closed contact to open contact.
Screen display
Select [Find/Replace] [Change Open/Close Contact].
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Find In
Item
Replace Device
Device Point
Find Direction
Option
From Top
Down Up Consecutive search with enter key
Description
Click the
button to select a location to search for. Two or more
search locations can be selected.
Click to select a location from the list of previously searched locations. The location cannot be entered directly.
Enter a device/label of which the contact type is to be changed between open contact and closed contact.
Click to select from the list of devices/labels entered previously.
Enter the number of points to be searched/replaced, counted from the device entered in the "Replace Device" field. When a label is entered for "Replace Device", enter 1.
Click Click to select either decimal or hexadecimal for the value to be entered.
Example) When X100 for "Replace Device", 3 for "Device Point" and "DEC" for entered value are set, the contact type is replaced between open contact and closed contact at X100, X101 and X102.
Select this to execute a search in the downward direction from the start of the program.
Select this to execute a search in the downward direction from the cursor position.
Select this to execute a search in the upward direction from the cursor position.
Select this not to move the focus to the editor after the search/replace function. The searched/replaced position may not be highlighted.
10 - 26
10.3.4 Changing contacts between open contact and closed contact
10.3 Search/Replacement
2. Click the
button.
9
The cursor moves to the searched device.
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
3. Click the
or
button to change the contact type.
The contact types are changed from open to closed contact and from close to open contact, and
the search for the next target devices continues.
10
If the
button is clicked, all contact types of searched devices are batch changed from
open to closed contact and from close to open contact.
SEARCH/REPLACE
Change open/closed contact function
For the ladder editor, the contact type at the cursor position can also be changed by selecting [Edit] [Easy Edit] [Switch Open/Close Contact] or pressing the + keys. Convert the program when this function is performed as
11
the program becomes unconverted status.
Operation applicability of the change open/closed contact function The following table shows the contacts whose contact types can be changed.
Replace Example
PRINTING
12
SETTING OPTIONS
13
USING LIBRARIES
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
15
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
10.3.4 Changing contacts between open contact and closed contact
10 - 27
10 SEARCH/REPLACE
10.3.5 Batch replacing devices
Batch replace devices with the specified device/label.
Screen display
Select [Find/Replace] [Device Batch Replace].
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Item
Description
Find In
Click the
button to select a location to search for. Two or more
search locations can be selected.
Click to select a location from the list of previously searched locations. The location cannot be entered directly.
Find Device
Enter a device/label to be replaced.
Replace Device
Enter a replacing device/label.
Points
Points:
Enter the number of points to be replaced, counted from the
device specified for "Find Device". When a label is entered for
"Find Device" or "Replace Device", enter 1.
Point format:Click to select either decimal or hexadecimal for the value
entered for "Points".
Point Format
Example) When X0 for "Find Device", X10 for "Replace Device", 5 for "Points", and "DEC" for "Point Format" are set, the devices are replaced as shown below: X0X10, X1X11, X2X12, X3X13, X4X14
Move
Select this to move a device comment of "Find Device" to "Replace Device".
Device Comment*1 Copy
Select this to copy a device comment of "Find Device" to "Replace Device".
Not to Change Select this not to move or copy a device comment of "Find Device".
*1 : For ladder programs and SFC (Zoom) programs only
2. Click the
button.
The devices/labels entered in "Find Device" are batch replaced with the devices/labels entered in "Replace Device".
10 - 28
10.3.5 Batch replacing devices
Screen button
Resets all setting items to default.
10.3 Search/Replacement
9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
SEARCH/REPLACE
Registering devices/labels in batch
10
Multiple devices can also be registered at once by selecting a range and dragging and dropping it from the ladder
editor.
Replacing devices in batch Batch replacement between 16-bit counter devices and 32-bit counter devices is not supported by FXCPU.
Devices that can be batch replaced For devices that can be replaced in batch, refer to Section 10.3.1.
11
PRINTING
12
SETTING OPTIONS
13
USING LIBRARIES
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
15
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
10.3.5 Batch replacing devices
10 - 29
10 SEARCH/REPLACE
10.3.6 Displaying results and error logs
After the All Find/All Replace function is executed, results and error logs are displayed.
Displaying results
Screen display
Click the
/
button in the respective Find/Replace windows <<Result>>.
Status
Search/replace results
Sub status bar
Display contents
Item Search/replace results
Target List Place
Position
Status Find/Replace Result Error Logs Find String Replace String Find In
Sub status bar
Description Display the character strings, locations, and positions which have been searched for or replaced. Display the character strings which match with the one in "Find/Replace String". Display the locations where the search/replace function is executed. Display the position information to specify the location where the search/replace function is executed. (' Position information' on the next page) Display the details of the search/replace results.
Display the number of character strings which have been searched for or replaced.
Display the number of error logs. Display the character strings specified in "Find String". Display the character strings specified in "Replace String". Display the location specified on the relevant Find/Replace window. Display the search/replace results.
10 - 30
10.3.6 Displaying results and error logs
10.3 Search/Replacement
Position information The following position information is displayed according to the editor.
Type
Description
Example
Ladder editor
Step number
2 Step*1
ST editor
Number of lines
(6)
SFC editor
SFC symbol and step number
Transition No. 0
Structured Ladder/FBD editor Ladder block number and grid position
2. (10. 2)
Device comment editor
Device name, start position
X1, 0 Column
Label Setting screen, Structure Setting screen, Device memory editor
Row, column
8 Row 1 Column
*1 : For project with labels and SFC (Zoom), parentheses are appended to the step number. (Example: (2) Step)
SEARCH/REPLACE
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
9 10 11
PRINTING
12
SETTING OPTIONS
13
USING LIBRARIES
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
15
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
10.3.6 Displaying results and error logs
10 - 31
10 SEARCH/REPLACE
Displaying error logs
Screen display
Click the
/
Log>>.
button in the respective Find/Replace windows <<Error
Status
Error logs
Display contents
Status Error logs
Item
Description Display the number of error logs, and the search location. Display the errors in search/replace results.
Jump function The jump function is used to jump from any row of search/replace results or logs to the corresponding character strings. To execute a jump, right-click on the selected row and select [Jump] from the shortcut menu, or double-click the selected line.
10 - 32
10.3.6 Displaying results and error logs
9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
11 PRINTING
10
This chapter explains how to print data such as sequence programs and devices created with GX Works2.
SEARCH/REPLACE
11
PRINTING
11.1 Print Function
12
11 - 2
SETTING OPTIONS
11.2 Setting Printer
11 - 4
11.3 Batch Printing Project Data 11.4 Page Set Up for Batch Print
11 - 5
11 - 8
13
USING LIBRARIES
11.5 Setting Details of Batch Print
11 - 10
11.6 Displaying Batch Print Preview
11 - 38
11.7 Printing Data Displayed on Screen
11 - 39
14
11.8
Setting Print Details for Data Displayed on Screen
11 - 40
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
11.9 Previewing Print Images
11 - 43
11.10 Printing Examples
11 - 44
11.11 Considerations for Printing
11 - 52
15
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
11 - 1
11 PRINTING
11.1 Print Function
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
This section explains the overview of print function and printable data.
Batch print and print window functions
The print functions are batch print function and print window function. Batch print function
A function to batch print multiple data in a project. Print window function
A function to print data displayed on the active window.
Printable and non-printable data
The following table shows the printable and non-printable data.
Data Cover PLC parameter Redundant parameter Network parameter Intelligent function module*1 Program setting Ladder SFC (MELSAP3) SFC (MELSAP-L)*1 ST*2 Structured Ladder/FBD*2 Function/Function block program*2 Label*2 Device comment Device memory Device initial value*1 Change TC Setting Device list Cross reference Statement/Note Project content list User library content list Product information list System monitor*1 Verification result *1 : Not supported by FXCPU. *2 : User library data can be printed.
Batch print � � �
: Printable �: Non-printable Print window � � � � � �
11 - 2
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
SEARCH/REPLACE
PRINTING
SETTING OPTIONS
11.1 Print Function
9
Print items on the batch print screen Data supported by the batch print function are displayed on the batch print screen in the order shown in the table on the previous page, and changed data are saved in the project. Therefore, when a project created in the old version of GX Works2 is opened in the new version, the listed order of the print items may be changed. Change the order of the print items with "Set Print Order".
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
11 - 3
USING LIBRARIES
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
WRITING/READING DATA
PROTECTING DATA
11 PRINTING
11.2 Setting Printer
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
This section explains how to set a printer. Print job output can be selected on the Printer Setup screen for batch print. For details, refer to Section 11.3.1.
Screen display
Select [Project] [Printer Setup].
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Item Name Paper
Size Source Orientation Portrait Landscape
Description Select the printer to be used. Set the paper size and paper feed method of the printer. Select the size of paper. Select the paper feed method. Set the page orientation. Select this to print the page in portrait mode. Select this to print the page in landscape mode.
2. Click the
button.
Printer settings Printer settings changed in GX Works2 are not saved.
Restrictions
Printing data using equipment such as other companies' PDF printers Some lines of a table may not be printed correctly.
11 - 4
11.3 Batch Printing Project Data
11.3 Batch Printing Project Data
9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
This section explains how to batch print project data.
A print preview can be displayed before printing data. For displaying a print preview, refer to Section 11.6.
10
Screen display
Select [Project] [Print].
SEARCH/REPLACE
11
PRINTING
12
SETTING OPTIONS
13
USING LIBRARIES
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Item Print Item Setting by Item
Description
Select the data to be printed. is displayed for items without data to be printed or items whose data is read-
protected by the security setting. is displayed for print items to which read-protected is set in the security setting.
Set details of print settings for each data. (Section 11.5)
15
WRITING/READING DATA
2. Click the
button.
Data of items selected under "Print Item" are printed in the order from the top.
16
PROTECTING DATA
11 - 5
11 PRINTING
Screen button
/
Moves the selected item up/down under "Print Item".
Displays the Print Setup screen. (Section 11.3.1)
Displays the Page Setup screen. (Section 11.4) Set a header/footer of the paper on which data is printed.
Displays a print preview of the item selected under "Print Item". (Section 11.6)
Using a function to print multiple pages on a single page When using the function to print multiple pages on a single page, data are printed in a group of print item. When data ends in the middle of the page, the next data will not be printed on the same page but will be printed on the new page. The following figure shows the example of printing two pages on a single page.
First page
Second page
Third page
Ladder program MAIN 1
Ladder program SUB 1
11 - 6
11.3 Batch Printing Project Data
11.3.1 Setting printer for batch print
9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
For batch print, the printer can also be set on the Print screen. Print job output can be selected in the printer setting for batch print. For notes and restrictions on printer setting, refer to Section 11.2.
Screen display
10
Select the
button on the Print screen.
SEARCH/REPLACE
11
PRINTING
12
SETTING OPTIONS
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
13
USING LIBRARIES
Item Name Paper
Size Source Orientation Portrait Landscape Print Job Output Method
Description Select the printer to be used. Set the paper size and paper feed method of the printer. Select the size of paper. Select the paper feed method. Set the page orientation. Select this to print the page in portrait mode. Select this to print the page in landscape mode. Select a method for print job output. Select whether to print all print items as one print job or to print each print item separately.
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
2. Click the
button.
15
WRITING/READING DATA
Printing with a PDF output printer
For a PDF output printer which outputs print results to files, files are created for each print job. The size of the files to be
created is depending on the printer driver.
16
PROTECTING DATA
11.3.1 Setting printer for batch print
11 - 7
11 PRINTING
11.4 Page Set Up for Batch Print
This section explains how to set the page setup for batch print.
Screen display
Select the Print Screen
.
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Item Paper
Size Source Orientation Margins (Unit: mm) Headers/Footers Page Number Format
Start at: Header
Footer
Description � Select the paper size. Select the paper feed method. Set the page orientation. Set spaces for top/bottom/right/left of the paper. � Select "Continue from previous page" or "Include chapter number" for the page numbers printed in header/footer. Set a page number for the first page to be printed when "Continue from Previous Page" is selected. Enter character strings to be printed in header or footer. Up to 512 characters including string patterns and line feeds can be entered in the header/footer. Note that a line feed is handled as two characters.
Click to display a list of string pattern.
Selected string pattern is entered at the cursor position.
2. Click the
button.
11 - 8
Screen button
Restores the default setting of header/footer.
11.4 Page Set Up for Batch Print
9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
SEARCH/REPLACE
Printing chapter numbers
10
By selecting "Include chapter number", page numbers are displayed with: the numbered item in "Print Item", the
numbered item in "Print", and the page number of each data. Even when there is no actual data to be printed in "Print
Item" or "Print", the numbers with the chapter number format will be assigned in order.
The following figure shows an example of page number assignment with the chapter number format.
3-2-1
11
Numbered item in "Print Item"
Numbered item in "Print"
Page number of each data
PRINTING
1
2
1
3
2
12
3
SETTING OPTIONS
USING LIBRARIES
When characters which exceed the maximum number of characters are entered to header/footer
When the project is opened in GX Works2 with a language different from the opened project data, characters which
exceed 512 characters may be displayed.
13
When characters which exceed 512 characters are entered to the header/footer, characters cannot be entered or
pasted; however, they can be deleted or cut.
Header and footer String patterns of header/footer may not function when a project created in GX Works2 in other language is opened, or
a project created in GX Works2 Version 1.64S or later is opened in GX Works2 Version 1.62Q or earlier.
When the string pattern of header and footer do not function, set the setting again.
<When a project created in GX Works2 Version 1.64S or later is opened in GX Works2 Version 1.62Q or earlier>
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
15
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
11 - 9
11 PRINTING
11.5 Setting Details of Batch Print
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
This section explains how to set items for the batch print function.
11.5.1
Setting common items (batch-print setting for user library data)
Set items to print user library data. Selected user library data names can be printed under the following print items. � ST � Structured Ladder/FBD � FB/FUN program � Label
Screen display
Select "Print all (Common setting)" in "Print Item" on the Print screen.
Operating procedure
� Set the items on the screen.
Item
Description
User library
�
Print user library*1
Select this to print user library data.
Do not print
Display data names which will not be printed
Print
Display data names to be printed. Data are printed in the order from the top.
Select data name display format
�
Display format
Select a display format of data name when ST, Structured Ladder/FBD, FB/FUN program, or label is selected.
*1 : This item cannot be selected for Simple project.
11 - 10
11.5.1 Setting common items (batch-print setting for user library data)
Screen button
Moves data selected in "Do not print" to "Print".
Moves all data in "Do not print" to "Print".
Moves data selected in "Print" to "Do not print".
Moves all data in "Print" to "Do not print".
/
Moves data selected in "Print" up/down.
11.5 Setting Details of Batch Print
9
10
11
SEARCH/REPLACE
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
PRINTING
Printing read protected data
When printing read protected data displayed on the field of "Do not print", enable the editing status of the user library for
editing.
For details of editing user library, refer to the following manual.
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Structured Project)
12
SETTING OPTIONS
13
USING LIBRARIES
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
15
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
11.5.1 Setting common items (batch-print setting for user library data)
11 - 11
11 PRINTING
11.5.2 Setting batch print for cover
Set items to print a cover.
Screen display
Select "Cover" in "Print Item" on the Print screen.
Operating procedure
� Set the items on the screen.
Item Print Selection Layout
Text
Font Font Size Font Style
Description
Select the item(s) to be printed.
Display print area of the item(s) selected for "Print Selection".
Enter text for each item to be printed. Text can be entered when "Title", "Comment", "Prepared By", and/or "Date" are selected for "Print Selection". A maximum of 200 characters can be set for each item. Note that a line feed is handled as two characters. The numbers of characters and lines that can be printed differ according to the size or font setting of print paper. Check the print image with the print preview function.
Set fonts for each item to be printed. Fonts can be set when "Title", "Comment", "Prepared By", and/or "Date" are selected for "Print Selection".
Select a font.
Select a font size.
Select a font style.
Screen button
Prints items selected in "Print Item".
Displays a print preview of items selected in "Print Item".
11 - 12
11.5.2 Setting batch print for cover
11.5 Setting Details of Batch Print
11.5.3 Setting batch print for PLC parameter
9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
Set items to print PLC parameter.
Screen display
Select "PLC Parameter" in "Print Item" on the Print screen.
10
The following is an example of setting screen when QCPU (Q mode) is selected.
SEARCH/REPLACE
11
PRINTING
12
SETTING OPTIONS
Operating procedure
� Set the item on the screen.
13
Item Print What
Description Select the item(s) of PLC parameter to be printed.
USING LIBRARIES
Screen button
For the screen buttons, refer to Section 11.5.2.
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
Selects all items.
Clears the selection of all items.
15
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
11.5.3 Setting batch print for PLC parameter
11 - 13
11 PRINTING
11.5.4 Setting batch print for redundant parameters
Set items to print redundant parameters.
Screen display
Select "Redundant Parameter" in "Print Item" on the Print screen.
Operating procedure
� Set the item on the screen.
Item Print what
Description Select the item(s) of redundant parameters to be printed.
Screen button
For the screen buttons, refer to Section 11.5.2.
11 - 14
11.5.4 Setting batch print for redundant parameters
11.5 Setting Details of Batch Print
11.5.5 Setting batch print for network parameter
9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
Set items to print the network parameter.
Screen display
Select "Network Parameter" in "Print Item" on the Print screen.
10
The following is an example of setting screen when QCPU (Q mode) is selected.
SEARCH/REPLACE
11
PRINTING
12
SETTING OPTIONS
Operating procedure
� Set the item on the screen.
13
Item Print What
Description Select the item(s) of network parameter to be printed.
USING LIBRARIES
Screen button
For the screen buttons, refer to Section 11.5.2.
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
15
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
11.5.5 Setting batch print for network parameter
11 - 15
11 PRINTING
11.5.6 Setting batch print for program settings
Set items to print program settings on the Navigation window.
Screen display
Select "Program setting" in "Print Item" on the Print screen.
Operating procedure
� Set the items on the screen.
Item
Description
Print selection
�
Program setting
Select this to print the list of program setting content.
Additional information Select this to print the titles of the list of program setting content.
Task setting*1
Select this to print tasks registered in the program setting.
Execution type
Select the execution types to be printed. Data are printed in the order from the top.
Program list
Select the programs to be printed. Data are printed in the order from the top.
Select data name
Items selected for "Execution type" and "Program list" are displayed.
Do not print
Display data names which will not be printed
Print
Display data names to be printed. Data are printed in the order from the top.
Additional information Append selected items to the task setting.
Print conditions
Set the conditions for printing.
Print title only for Select this to print only titles even when programs are not registered to the task. the task with no When this item is selected, only header, footer, and/or title are printed for each data on one program registered page.
*1 : This item cannot be selected for Simple project.
Screen button
For the screen buttons, refer to Section 11.5.1 and Section 11.5.2.
11 - 16
11.5.6 Setting batch print for program settings
11.5 Setting Details of Batch Print
11.5.7 Setting batch print for ladder programs
9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
Set items to print ladder programs.
Screen display
Select "Ladder" in "Print Item" on the Print screen.
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
11
PRINTING
12
SETTING OPTIONS
Operating procedure
� Set the items on the screen.
Item Select Program
Do Not Print Print Display Mode of Program*1 Additional Information
Device Comment
Statement/Note
Contact
Coil
Description
Display all data names of ladder program.
Display data names which will not be printed.
Display data names to be printed. Data are printed in the order from the top.
Select whether to print data in label display or device display.
Append selected items to the ladder program.
Select this to append device comments. For labels, label comments are appended. Set the number of comment rows and columns to be printed.
Select this to append statements and notes.
Select this to append contact usage destination. Set the print position and print range.
To specify the print range, click the the Device Range Setting (Contact) screen.
button, and set the device range on
Select this to append coil usage destination. Set a print range.
To specify the print range, click the the Device Range Setting (Coil) screen.
button, and set the device range on
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
USING LIBRARIES
13 14 15
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
11.5.7 Setting batch print for ladder programs
11 - 17
11 PRINTING
Item
Description
Print Conditions
Set the conditions for printing ladder programs.
Ladder Contact
Set the number of contacts to be printed.
Print NOPLF*2
Select this to print the NOPLF instructions. (Data will be printed on the new page at the NOPLF instruction in the program with or without this item is selected.)
Delete blank rows of contacts and specify the number of column
Select this to print programs with blank rows of contact usage destination closed up. When this item is selected, the number of columns of contact usage destination can be selected.
Delete blank rows above and under coil
Select this to print programs with blank rows of coil usage destination closed up.
Page break by ladder block
Select this to print data on the new page in ladder block unit. When this item is cleared, data is printed on the new page in ladder row unit.
Print ladder blocks include hidden ones*3
Select this to print hidden ladder blocks.
Print blank rows with no device comment
Select this to print blank rows which do not contain device comments.
Print lines in bold
Select this to print programs with bold lines.
Specify Print Range
�
Print Range
Set the ladder program print range. To specify the print range, select "Specify Range" and set a start step and an end step.
*1 : When a block password to which the execution program protection setting is enabled is set, the buttons,
,
,
,
, cannot be used in the device display.
Unlock all block passwords to use these
,
,
,
in
the device display.
*2 : Not supported by FXCPU.
*3 : For projects with labels, this item can be selected only when "Print in Label Display" is selected for "Display Mode of
Program".
Screen button
For the screen For the screen buttons, refer to Section 11.5.1 and Section 11.5.2.
Displays the Device Range Setting screen.
11 - 18
11.5.7 Setting batch print for ladder programs
11.5 Setting Details of Batch Print
Contact/coil usage destination
9
Contact usage destination and coil usage destination are output as shown below.
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
11
Indicates the number of steps of coil usage destination
Indicates the number of steps of contact usage destination
The following shows an example of contact usage destination.
Example) Contact usage destination of Y0
PRINTING
Open contact Source
The number of steps of Y0 used for source
12
SETTING OPTIONS
Destination Closed contact
The number of steps of Y0 used for destination
13
USING LIBRARIES
Printing examples with a setting of "Delete blank rows of contacts and specify the number of column"
The following examples show the difference of printing contact usage destination according to the
setting of "Delete blank rows of contacts and specify the number of column".
14
< Without the item selected (5 columns) >
< With the item selected (5 columns) >
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
15
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
11.5.7 Setting batch print for ladder programs
11 - 19
11 PRINTING
11.5.8 Setting batch print for MELSAP3 programs
Set items to print SFC (MELSAP3) programs.
Screen display
Select "MELSAP3" in "Print Item" on the Print screen.
Operating procedure
� Set the items on the screen.
Item
Description
Select Program
Display data names of SFC (MELSAP3) program.
Select Print Units*1
Select either "Program block" or "Program file".
Do Not Print
Display data names which will not be printed.
Print
Display data names to be printed. Data are printed in the order from the top.
Display Mode of Block List/ Action/Transition*2
Select whether to print data in label display or device display. This item can be selected only when "Block List" or "Action/Transition" is selected in "SFC Diagram Print Item".
SFC Diagram Print Item
Select the item(s) to be printed in SFC diagram.
SFC Diagram
Block List*3
Comment List Action/Transition
Select the item(s) to be printed.
Property (SFC Program)*3,*4
Note List
11 - 20
11.5.8 Setting batch print for MELSAP3 programs
11.5 Setting Details of Batch Print
Item
Description
Additional Information
Append selected item(s) to "SFC Diagram Print Item".
SFC Diagram
�
SFC Step/Transition Comment
Select this to append SFC steps/transition comments to the SFC diagram.
Action Input
Select this to append operation outputs to the SFC diagram.
Transition Conditions
Select this to append transition conditions to the SFC diagram.
Block List*4
�
SFC Block List Comment Select this to append SFC block list comments to the block list.
Start Destination Block Select this to append start destination block to the block list.
Action/Transition
�
Device Comment
Select this to append device comments to Action/Transition. For labels, label comments are appended. Set the numbers of rows and columns for comments to be printed.
Print Conditions
Set conditions for printing programs.
Number of Print Column of SFC Diagram
Specify the number of columns of SFC diagram to be printed on a single page. The program is printed with reducing the size to fit the specified number of columns on a single page.
Number of Action/Transition Contacts
Set the number of contacts to be printed.
Specify Print Range
�
Print Range*3
Set the SFC (MELSAP3) program print range. To specify the print range, select "Specify Range" and set a start block and an end block.
*1 : This item cannot be selected for Simple project. *2 : When a block password to which the execution program protection setting is enabled is set, the buttons,
,
,
,
, cannot be used in the device display.
Unlock all block passwords to use these
,
,
,
in
the device display.
*3 : For Structured projects, this item cannot be selected when "Program block" is selected for "Select print units".
*4 : Not supported by FXCPU.
SETTING OPTIONS
PRINTING
SEARCH/REPLACE
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
9 10 11 12 13
USING LIBRARIES
Screen button
For the screen buttons, refer to Section 11.5.1 and Section 11.5.2.
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
15
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
11.5.8 Setting batch print for MELSAP3 programs
11 - 21
11 PRINTING
11.5.9 Setting batch print for MELSAP-L programs
Set items to print SFC (MELSAP-L) programs. This setting is not supported by FXCPU.
Screen display
Select "MELSAP-L" in "Print Item" on the Print screen.
11 - 22
11.5.9 Setting batch print for MELSAP-L programs
11.5 Setting Details of Batch Print
Operating procedure
� Set the items on the screen.
Item
Description
Select Program
Display all data names of SFC (MELSAP-L) program.
Select print units*1
Select either "Program block" or "Program file".
Do Not Print
Display data names which will not be printed.
Print
Display data names to be printed. Data are printed in the order from the top.
SFC Diagram Print Item
Select the item(s) to be printed in SFC diagram.
SFC Diagram
Block List Comment List
Select the item(s) to be printed.
Property (SFC Program)
Additional Information
Append selected item(s) to "SFC Diagram Print Item".
SFC Diagram
�
SFC Step/Transition Comment
Select this to append SFC steps/transition comments to the SFC diagram.
Program
Select this to append programs to the SFC diagram.
Block List
�
SFC Block List Comment Select this to append SFC block list comments to the block list.
Start Destination Block Select this to append start destination block to the block list.
Print Conditions
Set conditions for printing programs.
Number of Print Column of SFC Diagram
Specify the number of columns of SFC diagram to be printed on a single page. The program is printed with reducing the size to fit the specified number of columns on a single page.
Specify Print Range
�
Print Range
Set the SFC (MELSAP-L) program print range. To specify the print range, select "Specify Range" and set a start step and an end step.
*1 : This item cannot be selected for Simple project.
SETTING OPTIONS
PRINTING
SEARCH/REPLACE
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
9 10 11 12 13
USING LIBRARIES
Screen button
For the screen buttons, refer to Section 11.5.1 and Section 11.5.2.
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
15
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
11.5.9 Setting batch print for MELSAP-L programs
11 - 23
11 PRINTING
11.5.10 Setting batch print for ST programs
Set items to print ST programs.
Screen display
Select "ST" in "Print Item" on the Print screen.
Operating procedure
� Set the items on the screen.
Item Select Program
Do Not Print Print Specify Print Range
Print Range
Description Display all data names of ST program. Display data names which will not be printed. Display data names to be printed. Data are printed in the order from the top. � Set the ST program print range. To specify the print range, select "Specify Range" and set a start line and an end line.
Screen button
For the screen buttons, refer to Section 11.5.1 and Section 11.5.2.
11 - 24
11.5.10 Setting batch print for ST programs
11.5 Setting Details of Batch Print
11.5.11 Setting batch print for Structured Ladder/FBD programs
9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
Set items to print Structured Ladder/FBD programs.
Screen display
Select "Structured Ladder/FBD" in "Print Item" on the Print screen.
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
11
PRINTING
12
SETTING OPTIONS
Operating procedure
� Set the items on the screen.
13
Item Select Program
Do Not Print Print
Description Display all data names of Structured Ladder/FBD program. Display data names which will not be printed. Display data names to be printed. Data are printed in the order from the top.
USING LIBRARIES
Screen button
14
For the screen buttons, refer to Section 11.5.1 and Section 11.5.2.
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
15
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
11.5.11 Setting batch print for Structured Ladder/FBD programs
11 - 25
11 PRINTING
11.5.12 Setting batch print for FB/FUN programs
Set items to print function and function block programs.
Screen display
Select "FB/FUN Program" in "Print Item" on the Print screen.
Operating procedure
� Set the items on the screen.
Item Print Selection
Function/FB Label Select Program
Do Not Print Print Additional Information
Device comment
Statement/Note
Contact
Coil
Description
�
Select this to print function/function block labels.
Display all data names of function/function block program.
Display data names which will not be printed.
Display data names to be printed. Data are printed in the order from the top.
Append selected items to the ladder program.
Select this to append device comments. For labels, label comments are appended. Set the number of comment rows and columns to be printed.
Select this to append statements and notes.
Select this to append contact usage destination. Set the print position and print range.
To specify the print range, click the the Device Range Setting (Contact) screen.
button, and set the device range on
Select this to append coil usage destination. Set a print range.
To specify the print range, click the the Device Range Setting (Coil) screen.
button, and set the device range on
11 - 26
11.5.12 Setting batch print for FB/FUN programs
11.5 Setting Details of Batch Print
Item
Description
Print Conditions
Set the conditions for printing ladder programs.
Ladder Contact
Set the number of contacts to be printed.
Print NOPLF*1
Select this to print the NOPLF instructions. (Data will be printed on the new page at the NOPLF instruction in the program with or without this item is selected.)
Delete blank rows of contacts and specify the number of column
Select this to print programs with blank rows of contact usage destination closed up. When this item is selected, the number of columns to be printed can be selected.
Delete blank rows above and under coil
Select this to print programs with blank rows of coil usage destination closed up.
Page break by ladder block
Select this to print data on the new page in ladder block unit. When this item is cleared, data is printed on the new page in ladder row unit.
Print ladder blocks include hidden ones*2
Select this to print hidden ladder blocks.
Print blank rows with no device comment
Select this to print blank rows which do not contain device comments.
Print lines in bold
Select this to print programs with bold lines.
Specify Print Range
�
Print Range
Set the ladder program print range. To specify the print range, select "Specify Range" and set a start step and an end step.
*1 : Not supported by FXCPU.
*2 : For projects with labels, this item can be selected only when "Print in Label Display" is selected for "Display Mode of Program".
PRINTING
SEARCH/REPLACE
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
9 10 11 12
SETTING OPTIONS
USING LIBRARIES
Screen button
For the screen buttons, refer to Section 11.5.1, Section 11.5.2, and Section 11.5.7.
13
Data to be printed in FB/FUN programs Data to be printed in FB/FUN programs are function blocks created in ladder programs and functions/function blocks created in ST programs or Structured Ladder/FBD programs. Display-prohibited programs are not displayed in "Select Program".
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
15
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
11.5.12 Setting batch print for FB/FUN programs
11 - 27
11 PRINTING
11.5.13 Setting batch print for labels
Set items to print label data.
Screen display
Select "Label" in "Print Item" on the Print screen.
Operating procedure
� Set the items on the screen.
Item Print Selection
Label List
Select Data Name Do Not Print Print
Description Display all data names of label. Select the label type(s) to be printed. Data are printed in the order from the top. The item is displayed in gray when data to be printed do not exist. Display items selected in "Label List". Display data names which will not be printed. Display data names to be printed. Data are printed in the order from the top.
Screen button
For the screen buttons, refer to Section 11.5.1 and Section 11.5.2.
11 - 28
11.5.13 Setting batch print for labels
11.5 Setting Details of Batch Print
11.5.14 Setting batch print for device comments
9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
Set items to print device comment data.
Screen display
Select "Device Comment" in "Print Item" on the Print screen.
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
11
PRINTING
12
SETTING OPTIONS
Operating procedure
� Set the items on the screen.
Item Print Selection
Device Comment List
Select Data Name Do Not Print Print Print Conditions Print include the device with no comment. *Available only when selecting print range in Specify Print Range option. Print title only for the device comment with no comment.
Specify Print Range
Description Display all data names of device comment. Select the device comment to be printed. Data are printed in the order from the top. The item is displayed in gray when data to be printed do not exist, or all data are read protected. Display items selected in "Device Comment List". Display data names which will not be printed. Display data names to be printed. Data are printed in the order from the top. �
Select this to print data including devices to which device comments are not registered.
Select this to print only titles of data to which device comments are not registered. When this item is selected, only header, footer, and/or title are printed for each data on one page. Set the device comment print range. To specify the print range, select "Specify Range" and set the device range by clicking the
button. Since direct inputs (DX) and direct outputs (DY) are device comments as same as inputs (X) and outputs (Y), they are not printed when "Whole Range" is selected. When printing direct inputs (DX) or direct outputs (DY), select "Specify Print Range", and set the device range.
WRITING/READING DATA
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
USING LIBRARIES
13 14 15 16
Screen button
For the screen buttons, refer to Section 11.5.1, Section 11.5.2, and Section 11.5.7.
PROTECTING DATA
11.5.14 Setting batch print for device comments
11 - 29
11 PRINTING
11.5.15 Setting batch print for device memory data
Set items to print device memory data.
Screen display
Select "Device Memory" in "Print Item" on the Print screen.
Operating procedure
� Set the items on the screen.
Item
Device Memory Selection
Do Not Print
Print
Print Conditions
Print rows that all device value are 0.
Print blank rows with no device set.
Print title only for the device memory with no device set.
Description Display all data names of device memory. Display data names which will not be printed. Display data names to be printed. Data are printed in the order from the top. �
Select this to print rows in which device values are all 0.
Select this to print rows in which devices are not set.
Select this to print only titles of device memory data in which devices to be printed are not set. When this item is selected, only header/footer/titles are printed on a single page per data.
Screen button
For the screen buttons, refer to Section 11.5.1 and Section 11.5.2.
11 - 30
11.5.15 Setting batch print for device memory data
11.5 Setting Details of Batch Print
11.5.16 Setting batch print for device initial values
9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
Set items to print device initial values. This setting is not supported by FXCPU.
Screen display
10
Select "Device Initial Value" in "Print Item" on the Print screen.
SEARCH/REPLACE
11
PRINTING
12
SETTING OPTIONS
Operating procedure
� Set the items on the screen.
Item
Description
Device Initial Value Selection Display all data names of device initial values.
Do Not Print
Display data names which will not be printed.
Print
Display data names to be printed. Data are printed in the order from the top.
Print Selection
�
Device Initial Value Range Select this to print specified range of device initial values.
Device Initial Value
Select this to print device initial values (device values).
Print Type
Select a bit unit for handling device initial values for printing.
Print Form
Select a data format of device initial value for printing.
Print Conditions
�
Print device that value is 0. Select this to print devices whose value is 0.
Print title only for the data Select this to print only titles of data to which the device initial value range is not set, or
that is not set device initial data which do not contain devices to be printed.
value and range.
When this item is selected, only header/footer/titles are printed on a single page per data.
Specify Print Range
Set the device initial value print range. To specify the print range, select "Specify Range" and set the device range by clicking the
button.
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
USING LIBRARIES
13 14 15
WRITING/READING DATA
Screen button
16
For the screen buttons, refer to Section 11.5.1, Section 11.5.2, and Section 11.5.7.
PROTECTING DATA
11.5.16 Setting batch print for device initial values
11 - 31
11 PRINTING
11.5.17 Setting batch print for TC setting values
Set items to print TC setting values.
Screen display
Select "TC Setting" in "Print Item" on the Print screen.
Operating procedure
� Set the items on the screen.
Item
Description
Select Program
Display all data names of ladder/MELSAP3/MELSAP-L programs.
Do Not Print
Display data names which will not be printed.
Print
Display data names to be printed. Data are printed in the order from the top.
Print Target Device
Select the item to be printed.
Timer setting value
Select this to print timer setting values. Labels to which timer is set as a data type are also printed.
Retentive timer setting value*1
Select this to print retentive timer setting values. Labels to which retentive timer is set as a data type are also printed.
Counter setting value
Select this to print counter setting values. Labels to which counter is set as a data type are also printed.
Additional Information
Append the selected item to the devices to be printed.
Device comment
Select this to append device comments. For labels, label comments are appended.
Print Conditions
�
Print title only for the program with no TC setting.
Select this to print only titles of programs which do not contain TC setting values. When this item is selected, only header/footer/titles are printed on a single page per data.
*1 : Not supported by FXCPU.
Screen button
For the screen buttons, refer to Section 11.5.1 and Section 11.5.2.
11 - 32
11.5.17 Setting batch print for TC setting values
11.5 Setting Details of Batch Print
11.5.18 Setting batch print for device list
9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
Set items to print the device list.
Screen display
Select "Device List" in "Print Item" on the Print screen.
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
11
PRINTING
Operating procedure
� Set the items on the screen.
Item
Find In
Find What All devices
Used devices
Unused devices Additional Information
Device Comment Print Conditions
Print title only when no find result returns.
Specify Print Range
Conditions for Whole Range Specification
Include ZR device
Include extension device (e.g. U0\G0, J1\X0) Conditions for Range Specification
Description
Set a search location of data to be printed.
Click the
button to select a search location.
A search location cannot be entered directly.
Set a search target for devices to be printed.
Select this to search all devices.
Select this to search devices used for contacts, coils, and parameters. Selected items are searched with the specified condition (AND or OR condition).
Select this to search devices which are not used.
Append the selected item(s) to the device list.
Select this to append device comments.
�
Select this to print only titles even when the program does not contain any devices. When this item is selected, only header/footer/titles are printed on a single page.
Set the device comment print range. To specify the print range, select "Specify Range" and set the device range for "Conditions for Range Specification".
�
Select this to include ZR devices in the print target when "Whole Range" is specified for "Specify Print Range".
Select this to include extended devices in the print target when "Whole Range" is specified for "Specify Print Range". (BLm\Sn and BLm\TRn devices are printed with or without this item is selected.)
Set a range of devices to be printed.
WRITING/READING DATA
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
USING LIBRARIES
SETTING OPTIONS
12 13 14 15 16
PROTECTING DATA
11.5.18 Setting batch print for device list
11 - 33
11 PRINTING
Screen button
For the screen buttons, refer to Section 11.5.1, Section 11.5.2, and Section 11.5.7.
11 - 34
11.5.18 Setting batch print for device list
11.5 Setting Details of Batch Print
11.5.19 Setting batch print for cross reference information
9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
Set items to print cross reference information created on the Cross Reference window.
Screen display
Select "Cross Reference" in "Print Item" on the Print screen.
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
11
PRINTING
12
SETTING OPTIONS
Operating procedure
� Set the items on the screen.
13
Item Specify Print Range
All
Selected Rows
Print Conditions Print title only when a cross reference information is not created.
Description � Select this to print all rows. Select this to print selected row(s). Select the row(s) to be printed on the Cross Reference window in advance. �
Select this to print only titles when the cross reference information is not created. When this item is selected, only header/footer/table titles are printed on a single page.
USING LIBRARIES
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
Screen button
For the screen buttons, refer to Section 11.5.2.
15
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
11.5.19 Setting batch print for cross reference information
11 - 35
11 PRINTING
11.5.20 Setting batch print for statements/notes
Set items to print statement/note data.
Screen display
Select "Statement/Note" in "Print Item" on the Print screen.
Operating procedure
� Set the items on the screen.
Item Select Program
Do Not Print Print Statement/Note Print Item Line Statement List Note List P Statement List I Statement List Print Conditions Print title only for the program with no Statement/Note.
Description Display all program names of ladder program. Display data names which will not be printed. Display data names to be printed. Data are printed in the order from the top. Selected items are printed.
Select the item(s) to be printed.
� Select this to print only titles of data in which statements/notes do not exist. When this item is selected, only header, footer, and/or title are printed for each data on one page.
Screen button
For the screen buttons, refer to Section 11.5.1 and Section 11.5.2.
11 - 36
11.5.20 Setting batch print for statements/notes
11.5 Setting Details of Batch Print
11.5.21 Setting batch print for product information list
9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
Set items to print the product information list created on the System Monitor screen. This setting is not supported by FXCPU.
Screen display
10
Select "Product Information List" in "Print Item" on the Print screen.
SEARCH/REPLACE
11
PRINTING
12
SETTING OPTIONS
Operating procedure
� Set the item on the screen.
13
USING LIBRARIES
Item Setting for Product Information List
File Name
Description
�
Set a product information list file to be printed.
Click the
button to select a product information list file.
A product information list file cannot be entered directly.
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
Screen button
For the screen buttons, refer to Section 11.5.2.
15
Printable product information list files Only the product information list files created on the System Monitor screen in GX Works2 can be printed. Product information list files created in GX Developer cannot be printed.
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
11.5.21 Setting batch print for product information list
11 - 37
11 PRINTING
11.6 Displaying Batch Print Preview
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
This section explains how to check the print image of each data.
Operating procedure
1. Select [Project] [Print Preview].
The Print screen is displayed. (Section 11.3)
2. Click the
button.
The Print Preview screen is displayed.
3. Select items in "Print Item" and "Data Name" to change the data and check the print
image.
4. Click the
button.
The print image of the selected data is displayed.
Screen button
Prints data.
/
Displays the previous page/next page.
/
Changes the display size of print image.
Displaying previous/next page in print preview
The range in which previous/next pages can be displayed by clicking the
/
data.
Use the "Jump Preview to" function to switch from the displayed preview data to another data.
button is within one
Page numbers displayed in footer When "Continue form previous page" is selected in the page setting, "[Insert page number here]" is displayed at the position where a page number is to be printed in the print preview.
11 - 38
11.7 Printing Data Displayed on Screen
11.7 Printing Data Displayed on Screen
9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
This section explains how to print data displayed on the screen.
The print image can be checked prior to the printing. For checking print images, refer to Section 11.9. 10
Screen display
Select [Project] [Print Window].
SEARCH/REPLACE
The Print Window function cannot be executed from the menu for the following data.
Execute the Print Window function as described below for each data.
Parameters
11
Click the screen.
button on the PLC parameter setting screen or the network parameter setting
PRINTING
Device initial value
Click the
button on the Device Initial Value screen.
Device list or cross reference
Select rows to be printed, and click the
button on each screen.
12
<Data other than intelligent function module>
<Intelligent function module>
SETTING OPTIONS
13
USING LIBRARIES
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
2. Click the
/
button.
15
Printing starts.
WRITING/READING DATA
Printer settings
Click the
or
button to make detailed settings for the printer.
Printing ladder program screens
16
When printing a ladder program screen, the Print Window (Ladder) screen is displayed. For SFC (Zoom) programs, the
Print Window (Ladder) screen is not displayed.
For details, refer to Section 11.8.1.
PROTECTING DATA
11 - 39
11 PRINTING
11.8 Setting Print Details for Data Displayed on Screen
Q CPU L CPU ReFmXote HFeXad FX
This section explains how to set print details. Print details can be set using ladder program and device initial setting.
11.8.1 Setting print details for ladder programs
Set print details such as print range and additional information of ladder program.
Screen display
Select [Project] [Print Window]/[Print Window Preview]. The following explains a setting operation for the Print Window function. Apply the same operation for the Print Window Preview function. <Option setting screen for Print Window>
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Item Additional Information
Device comment Statement/Note Contact
Coil Specified Print Range
Print Range
Description
Append selected items to the ladder program.
Select this to append device comments. Set the number of comment columns to be printed. The number of comment rows is fixed.
Select this to append statements and notes.
Select this to append contact usage destination. Set the print position and print range.
To specify the print range, click the on the Device Range Setting (Contact) screen.
button, and set the device range
Select this to append coil usage destination. Set the print range.
To specify the print range, click the on the Device Range Setting (Coil) screen.
button, and set the device range
�
Set the print range of ladder program. To specify the print range, select "Specified Range" and set a start step and an end step.
11 - 40
11.8.1 Setting print details for ladder programs
11.8 Setting Print Details for Data Displayed on Screen
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
2. Click the
button.
9
For the Print Window function, the Print Window screen is displayed. (Section 11.7) For the Print Window Preview function, the Print Window Preview screen is displayed. (Section 11.9)
Screen button
For the screen buttons, refer to Section 11.5.7.
10
Displays a print preview.
SEARCH/REPLACE
Contact/coil usage destination
For details of contact/coil usage destination, refer to Section 11.5.7.
11
PRINTING
12
SETTING OPTIONS
13
USING LIBRARIES
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
15
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
11.8.1 Setting print details for ladder programs
11 - 41
11 PRINTING
11.8.2 Setting print details for device initial values
Set print details such as print items and print range of device initial values.
Screen display
Click the
button on the Device Initial Value screen.
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Item Print Item
Device Initial Value Range Device Initial Value Device Initial Value Output Setting Print Range
Whole Range
Specified Range
Print Type Print Form Print Condition
Print device with value of zero
Description � Select this to print specified range of device initial values. Select this to print device initial values (device values). Set the items to print device initial values (device values). � Select this to print all devices registered as device values Select this to specify a the print range. The method to specify a range is the same as that of device initial value setting. (Section 8.2) Select a bit unit for handling device initial values at printing. Select a data format of device initial value at printing. �
Select this to print devices whose value is 0.
2. Click
the button.
11 - 42
11.8.2 Setting print details for device initial values
11.9 Previewing Print Images
11.9 Previewing Print Images
9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
This section explains how to check print images of data displayed on the screen.
Screen display
10
Select [Project] [Print Window Preview].
SEARCH/REPLACE
The Print Window Preview function cannot be executed from the menu for the following data. Execute the Print Window Preview function as described below for each data.
Parameters
Click the screen.
button on the PLC parameter setting screen or the network parameter setting
11
Device initial value
PRINTING
Click the
button on the Device Initial Value screen.
Device list or cross reference
Select rows to be printed, and click the
button on each screen.
12
<For Structured Ladder/FBD>
SETTING OPTIONS
13
USING LIBRARIES
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
15
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
11 - 43
11 PRINTING
11.10 Printing Examples
The following shows examples of printing.
Cover
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
PLC parameters
Redundant parameters
11 - 44
11.10 Printing Examples
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
11 - 45
PROTECTING DATA
WRITING/READING DATA
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
USING LIBRARIES
SETTING OPTIONS
PRINTING
Network parameters
Intelligent function modules Program setting
Program setting Task setting
SEARCH/REPLACE
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
11 PRINTING Programs
Ladder
SFC diagram (MELSAP3)
SFC block list ST
11 - 46
11.10 Printing Examples
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
11 - 47
PROTECTING DATA
WRITING/READING DATA
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
USING LIBRARIES
SETTING OPTIONS
PRINTING
Structured Ladder/FBD
Labels
Global labels
Local labels Function/function block labels
SEARCH/REPLACE
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
11 PRINTING
Structures
Structure devices
Structure devices (Devices are printed automatically after printing labels.)
Device comments Device memory data
11 - 48
11.10 Printing Examples
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
11 - 49
PROTECTING DATA
WRITING/READING DATA
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
USING LIBRARIES
SETTING OPTIONS
PRINTING
Device initial values
Device initial value ranges
Device initial values
TC setting values
Device list
SEARCH/REPLACE
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
11 PRINTING Cross reference Statements/Notes Project content list User library content list
11 - 50
11.10 Printing Examples
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
11 - 51
PROTECTING DATA
WRITING/READING DATA
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
USING LIBRARIES
SETTING OPTIONS
PRINTING
Product information list
Verification result
Verify result list
Detailed verify result
SEARCH/REPLACE
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
11 PRINTING
11.11 Considerations for Printing
The following explains the considerations for printing.
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
Common considerations of Batch Print and Print Window functions
Displaying print previews and printing data
Print preview display and printing cannot be executed in the following situations. � The print target data do not exist. � The print target screen is being monitored.
(Start printing after stopping the monitoring.)
Considerations of printing large volume data
Large volume data may not be printed at all or printed half way due to the limitations of printer driver or Windows� print spooler. In this case, print data by following the instructions described below.
� Separate the data by setting a print range with "Specify Print Range".
� Set the property of the printer from Windows� Control Panel. Example) Select "Devices and Printers" from Windows� Control Panel, open the property of the printer being used, and select "Print directly to the printer" on the Advanced tab on the property screen.
� Set "Output by Item" for the print job output on the Print Setup screen (Section 11.3.1). (For batch print only)
� Set "Output by Item" for the print job output on the Print screen displayed by clicking the
button or the
button. (For batch print only)
Printing SFC diagrams
When an SFC diagram is printed, the printout may be divided into multiple pages depending on the number of the branches and couplings, and the number of steps. A number that indicates the position is printed at top right of each page.
m
n SFC Block Data Name : 000 : Block
1/20/2010 (n,m)
SFC Block Data Name : 000 : Block
1/20/2010 (n,m)
SFC Block Data Name : 000 : Block
1/20/2010 (n,m)
SFC Block Data Name : 000 : Block
1/20/2010 (n,m)
11 - 52
11.11 Considerations for Printing
Printing hierarchically-displayed cross reference information
9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
Cross reference information is printed as shown below when "Display hierarchically" is selected on
the <<Condition Setting>> tab.
� "+" and "-" are not printed.
� Each hierarchy of device/label is displayed with indentation.
� When only the lower hierarchy of device/label is selected, the hierarchy above the selected
hierarchy is also printed.
10
� Data in the collapsed rows are not printed.
<Cross reference information displayed on screen>
SEARCH/REPLACE
11
<Printed cross reference information>
PRINTING
12
SETTING OPTIONS
13
USING LIBRARIES
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
Considerations for using the print function with 64-bit edition Windows� operating system
� When the print result is output with the Print or Print Window function, the Save As screen may not
be displayed in the foreground. Use + keys or + keys to bring the screen in the foreground.
� GX Works2 does not respond when the GX Works2 operation is performed while the Save As screen is displayed.
15
When the following screen is displayed, select "Wait for the program to respond". Do not select "Close the program". Unsaved data will be lost.
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
11 - 53
11 PRINTING
Considerations of Batch Print function
Uncompiled programs Uncompiled program are not printed or applied to the print preview. Print data or display the print preview after converting the program.
NOPLF instruction The NOPLF instruction is not supported by SFC (Zoom) programs.
Changing setting of "Ladder Contact" When the setting of "Ladder Contact", which is set for "Ladder" and "FB/FUN" selected in "Print Item", is changed to the amount less than the one set at the program creation, the program may not be displayed normally, the same phenomenon as when changing the setting of "Display Connection of Ladder Diagram" in the option setting. For details, refer to the following manual. GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project)
Number of printable rows The number of printable rows is limited for the following data. The rows that exceeded the limitation will not be printed. � For device comments and device list, 100,000 rows can be printed per data. � For device memory data and device initial values, 20,000 rows can be printed per data. � For TC setting values, 20,480 rows can be printed per data.
When character strings in header/footer overlap Overlapped character strings in header/footer are printed on top of each other in order of priority: right, center, left. The overlapped character string is overwritten by the character string which is given the priority. The following shows an example of overlapped character strings. <Setting example of overlapped character strings in header>
<Printing example of overlapped character strings in header>
Specifying device comment print range for FXCPU For FXCPU, an error occurs when the Device Range Setting screen is opened in GX Works2 Version 1.64S or later with a project created in GX Works2 Version 1.62Q or earlier, in which nesting (N)/ index register (V)/index register (Z) is specified for device comment print range. In this case, delete the device range setting for nesting (N)/index register (V)/index register (Z).
11 - 54
11.11 Considerations for Printing
Considerations of Print Window function
9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
Uncompiled programs
Uncompiled program are not printed or reflected to the print preview. Print data or display the print preview after converting the program.
NOPLF instruction
The NOPLF instruction is not supported.
10
Structured Ladder/FBD
If a bend point is created in a Structured Ladder/FBD program, it will be printed as shown below. If the bend point is unnecessary to be printed, delete it on the Structured Ladder/FBD editor. For details of bend points GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Structured Project)
SEARCH/REPLACE
Bend point
11
PRINTING
Page feed in ladder program If a ladder block or function block does not fit in one page, the page is automatically fed and the ladder block or function block is printed from the top of the next page.
12
SETTING OPTIONS
<Print result>
<First page>
<Second page>
13
USING LIBRARIES
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
Printing structure/label setting editor
15
WRITING/READING DATA
Since the screen width is adjusted automatically to fit the page size when the structure/label setting
editor is printed, the printing may be difficult to read depending on the column width of the screen.
In order to improve the printing quality, adjust the column width of the structure/label setting editor.
The visibility of the printing is increased by adjusting the column width to narrow. However, if the
words input into the Remark/Comment column are too long, or one cell is divided into multiple pages,
the content in that cell cannot be printed completely.
Printing intelligent function module data
16
When the print function is performed on the Print Window Preview screen while the positioning data of intelligent function module are displayed, the font size and the display position of the header may
be different from the normal display. Perform the print function on the Print Window screen.
PROTECTING DATA
11 - 55
11 PRINTING
MEMO
11 - 56
9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
12 SETTING OPTIONS
10
Option settings such as screen display format setting and detailed operation settings of each function are available.
SEARCH/REPLACE
11
PRINTING
12.1 Basic Operations 12.2 Option Setting List
12
12 - 2 12 - 4
13
SETTING OPTIONS
USING LIBRARIES
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
15
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
12 - 1
12 SETTING OPTIONS
12.1 Basic Operations
This section explains how to set options.
Screen display
Select [Tool] [Options].
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
Operating procedure
� Set the items on the screen.
When the cursor is placed on a setting item, an explanation of the item is displayed on the "Explanation" field.
Screen button
Restores the initial settings.
Restores the user default settings.
Stores the current settings as the user default and applies them to a new project.
12 - 2
12.1 Basic Operations
9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
Considerations when changing option settings All programs need to be compiled when the following option settings are changed.
� "Default Length of String Data Type" in "Label Setting Editor"
� Settings in "Compile"
Compiling all programs changes the device assignment to labels. Therefore, device values set before the program
change remain on the device-assigned labels. Perform the following operations for a precautionary measure.
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
� For QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU After writing data to the programmable controller CPU, reset the programmable controller CPU, clear all device memories including latches, clear all file registers, and switch the programmable controller CPU to RUN.
� For FXCPU After writing data to the programmable controller CPU, clear device memory using the PLC memory clear function, and switch the programmable controller CPU to RUN.
(Section 20.4) For the considerations for compiling all programs, refer to the following manuals.
11
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project)/(Structured Project)
PRINTING
12
SETTING OPTIONS
13
USING LIBRARIES
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
15
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
12 - 3
12 SETTING OPTIONS
12.2 Option Setting List
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
The following table shows the option setting items. For (Simple), (FB), (Structured) and (Intelligent) indicated in the Reference column, refer to the following manuals respectively.
(Simple) (FB) (Structured) (Intelligent)
... GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project) ... GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project, Function Block) ... GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Structured Project) ... GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Intelligent Function Module)
Project
Tree item Common Setting
Automatic Save
Change History
Item
Explanation
Default
Automatically change language according to system*1
Language setting will be automatically changed according to system when edit Ladder/SFC program (Statement and Note) or device comment.
Selected
Use Dedicated Instruction for GX Developer, GX IEC Developer
Dedicated Instruction for GX Developer, GX IEC Developer (Instructions that their name ends with '_M' and '_MD') can be used in the projects using the following function. Open Other Project, Read from PLC or PLC Type change.
Cleared
Connect directly to PLC on creating a new project
Select whether to connect to PLC directly on creating a new project. In a Ethernet built-in CPU, the connection target is USB. You are required to restart GX Works2 to enable the setting change.
Cleared
Save project after compiling
Select whether to save the project automatically after completing compiling. For simple project, this setting is valid only when 'Use Label' is checked.
Cleared
Save project after writing to PLC
Select whether to save the project automatically after writing to the programmable controller CPU.
Cleared
Save project after online change
Select whether to save the project automatically after completing online change to the programmable controller CPU. If the checkbox is checked before 'Save project after compiling', the operation is given to priority.
Cleared
Save project after changes in TC setting values are written to PLC
Select whether to save the project automatically after changes in TC setting values have been written to the programmable controller CPU.
Cleared
Revision is not Registered when Save Project
Revision is registered when Save Project
Select whether to register the revision after saving a project.
Selected Cleared
Display confirmation
Select whether to display a confirmation
message showing
message of the revision registration after Cleared
whether to register history saving a project.
Automatically set revision titles
Select whether to automatically set revision titles at revision registration after saving a project. Automatically-set titles can be changed on the Revision List window.
Cleared
Reference �
Section 4.7.1
� (Simple) (Structured) Section 15.1 Section 15.9.1 (Simple)
Section 4.2.3
12 - 4
12.2 Option Setting List
Tree item
All Editors
Device Comment
Program Editor
Structured Ladder/ Tool Hint FBD/ST
Item Program/Program File Name
Specify the Reference/ Reflection
Reference/reflect the other, when device comment is not set.
Monitored Value Class Device Address Device Comment Data Type Constant Value Label Comment Remark Tool Hint Display Format
Explanation
Default
Set a reference/reflection target of device comment of each program/program file. Set a reference/reflection target according to the local device range of PLC parameter when set to "PLC parameter setting". Within the local device range: local device comment Outside the local device range: global device comment
MAIN Global
The behavior of each device will be as follows:
1) Global/Local comment will be referred.
2) If comment does not exist, the behavior will be:
� specified to Global: refer Local comment.
� specified to Local: refer Global comment.
Cleared
Apply the current setting of reference/ reflection target for device comment to all � programs/program files.
Set all reference/reflection target to 'global' for device comment of selected � program/program file name.
Set a all reference/reflection target to
'local' for device comment of selected
�
program/program file name.
Set all reference/reflection targets for
device comment of target device of the
selected program/program file name to
"PLC parameter setting".
�
Target Device: Device can be specified
within the local device range in the device
setting of PLC parameter
Selected
Cleared
Selected
Select display item in tool hint when mouse cursor is placed over label/device name.
Cleared Selected Cleared
Cleared
Selected
Cleared
Select display lines on tool hint.
Multi Line
Reference Section 9.1.1 (Structured)
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
USING LIBRARIES
SETTING OPTIONS
PRINTING
SEARCH/REPLACE
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
12 - 5
12 SETTING OPTIONS
Tree item
Label
Program Editor
Structured Ladder/ FBD
FB/FUN
Item
Explanation
Default
Display label name/ comment of contact or coil Set display lines and characters per line. Cleared in multiline
Device
Select whether to display the device which is assigned to the label or corresponding to address at the same time when 'Label' is selected from View mode. * Users can neither edit the displayed device nor set them to the Find/Replace target at the same time.
Cleared
Address
Select whether to display the address which is assigned to the label or corresponding to device at the same time when 'Label' is selected from View mode. * Users can neither edit the displayed address nor set them to the Find/Replace target at the same time.
Cleared
Label Comment
Select whether to display the label comment which is assigned to the label at the same time when 'Label' is selected from View mode. * Users can neither edit the displayed label comment nor set them to the Find/ Replace target at the same time.
Cleared
Device Comment
Select whether to display device comment which is assigned to device or address when 'Label' is selected from View mode. Cannot display device comment which is assigned to label while using label. * Users can neither edit the displayed device comment nor set them to the Find/ Replace target at the same time.
Cleared
Declare new label name
Select whether to display the label registration/selection dialog when entering new labels.
Selected
Wrap instance name for function block
Select whether to wrap function block instance name at the function block width.
Cleared
Specify the number of enable characters for label name/comment
Specify the number of display characters of function or function block label.
Cleared
Automatic input/output labels
Select whether to add input/output label when function block or function is pasted.
Selected
Automatic ENO labels
Select whether to add ENO output label when function block or function is pasted.
Cleared
Add Automatic Output Variable to VAR_IN_OUT
Select whether to add output variable in VAR_IN_OUT when function block is pasted.
Cleared
Pin overwrites
Select whether to overwrite I/O label with
a grid line when ruling a grid line over
Selected
function or function block.
Double clicking opens header
Select whether a label editor is displayed when function or function block is double Selected clicked.
Double clicking opens body
Select whether a program editor is displayed when function or function block Cleared is double clicked.
Reference (Structured)
12 - 6
12.2 Option Setting List
Tree item
Structured Ladder/ Guided FBD
Program Editor
ST
Item Ladder Wrapping Return Contacts Open Structured Ladder/ FBD Editor in guided mode Allow hotkey repeater Enter label names after contacts and coils Auto Comment Block Width
Auto Indention
Instruction/label name prediction
Tabulator Length
Explanation
Default
Select whether to wrap ladder. The edited Selected
ladder shall be object after changing the
setting.
8
Set guided mode as default when open Structured Ladder/FBD editor.
Cleared
Select whether to display grid line ruling dialog at drawing lines.
Select whether to input label names or devices after entering contacts and coils.
Set the width of comment to be added in ladder block with grid numbers when adding ladder block.
Select whether to use the automatic indent when beginning a new line after entering ST control syntax such as IF or FOR, and when displaying template of inline structured text.
Select whether to display listed label names starting with the input character when a character is input.
Set tabulator length. It is not available with inline structured text.
Cleared Selected 8
Selected
Selected 4
Reference (Structured)
PRINTING
SEARCH/REPLACE
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
9 10 11 12
SETTING OPTIONS
13
USING LIBRARIES
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
15
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
12 - 7
12 SETTING OPTIONS
Program Editor
Tree item
Enter ladder Ladder/ SFC
Tool Hint
Item
Explanation
Default
Check duplicated coil
Select whether to check duplicated coils when entering instruction. Unconverted ladder is not the object for duplicated coil check.
Cleared
Enter label comment and device comment
Select whether to enter label comment or
device comment continuously after
Cleared
entering instructions.
Do not leave the Device/ Label Comment field editing status
Set whether to leave the Device/Label Comment field editing status after opening the comment input dialog. Able to edit comments if users uncheck this setting. Able to copy entire comments if users check this setting.
Cleared
Do not display note in ladder input window when edit coil instructions
Select whether to display note in ladder input window when edit coil instructions.
Cleared
Check special relay/ special register compatible with A-PLC
When A-PLC Compatible Setting of PLC Parameter setting has not be enabled at the time of instruction inputting, check whether to display a confirming message to input special relay/special register compatible with A-PLC. MELSAP-L is an exception.
Cleared
Display available instruction tool hints in entering instruction
Select whether to automatically display tool hint of instruction in entering instruction.
Selected
Display available instructions in entering instruction
Select whether to automatically display available instructions in entering instruction.
Selected
Display available labels in entering instruction
Select whether to automatically display available defined labels in entering instruction.
Selected
Monitored Value
Selected
Class Device Device Comment Data Type Constant Value Label Comment
Select display item in tool hint when mouse cursor is placed over label name. * Options for simple project (with label) or label program of structured project. * As for function block, devices are excluded from display target in tool hint.
Cleared Selected Selected Cleared Cleared Cleared
Remark
Cleared
Tool Hint Display Format
Select the number of display lines in tool hint. * Will be wrapped in 64 single-byte characters or 32 double-byte characters.
Multiple lines
Reference (Simple)
12 - 8
12.2 Option Setting List
Tree item Comment
Program Editor
Ladder
Ladder Diagram
Item
Explanation
Default
Device Comment
Select whether to display the label comment or the device comment at ladder editor.
Cleared
Statement
Select whether to display the statement comment at ladder editor.
Cleared
Note
Select whether to display the note comment at ladder editor.
Cleared
Device Comment Display Set the display rows and columns for
Format
label comment or device comment.
Row: 4 Column: 8
Copy device comment in copying ladder
Select whether to copy device comment in copying ladder. * Pasting will be executed by comment reference/reflection setting. * Pasting will not be executed between different PLC. * Copy or pasting will not be executed for protected comments.
Cleared
Display Connection of Ladder Diagram
Set the number of contacts. ([Program Editor] [SFC] [Zoom])
11 Contacts
Use the Switching Ladder Edit Mode (Read, Write, Monitor, Monitor (Write))
Select whether to switch Ladder Edit Mode (Read, Write, Monitor and Monitor (Write)). Will be the same operation as the ladder edit mode of GX Developer. * Unable to set when security setting is enabled.
Selected
Display labels and devices
Select whether to display labels, and devices assigned to label. (Exclude function block.) * Devices are excluded from Find/ Replace target. * Options for simple project (with label) or label program of structured project.
Cleared
Display STL instruction in contact format * Only applies to the FXCPU
Select whether to display STL instruction in contact format. This is valid for simple projects (Not using labels) only. Contact format ladder block display for STL instruction is not wrap displayed.
Cleared
Display Instruction Help at symbol error occurrence
Select whether to automatically display Instruction Help when symbol errors occur.
Selected
Open Undefined Label Registration dialog at ladder entry
Select whether to open Undefined Label Registration dialog when labels used at ladder entry are undefined.
Selected
Set initial value to '1' for Select whether to set initial value to '1'
Enter HLine/Delete HLine when Enter HLine/Delete HLine dialog is Cleared
dialog
opened.
Stop at the connection points (Instruction/Vertical Line) when enter or delete horizontal line.
Select whether to edit line by connection point (Instruction/Vertical Line) when Enter HLine/Delete HLine is executed.
Cleared
Reference (Simple)
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
USING LIBRARIES
SETTING OPTIONS
PRINTING
SEARCH/REPLACE
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
12 - 9
12 SETTING OPTIONS
Tree item Comment
SFC 1
Program Editor
SFC
SFC 2
Zoom
Item Block List Step/Transition
SFC Edit Area
Tile SFC and Zoom vertically
Arrange SFC Display Window Ratio MELSAP-L Label/Device Display Format Jump to start destination block
Leave comment or step No. selected
Open Zoom with New Window
Number of Action/ Transition Contacts
Explanation
Default
Display device comment on SFC block list.
Cleared
Display step/transition comment on SFC editor.
Cleared
Set SFC edit area when create SFC. Please change by "SFC Row Setting" after creating a SFC.
Col Number: 10 Line Number: 306
Select whether to tile Zoom windows at the cursor position on SFC when creating SFC diagram. Checking this option changes the [Open Zoom with New Window] option into unchecked.
Selected
Select the type of tile for SFC and ZOOM window.
Tile Vertically
Select window display ratio for SFC when Tile Vertically is selected.
30%
Set display lines for MELSAP-L program. 4
Set whether to jump to start destination block when cursor is moved to block start Cleared step.
Select whether to leave comment or step No. selected in Enter SFC Symbol screen when changing SFC symbol in MELSAP3. Block or symbol must be left selected in Enter SFC Symbol screen when newly entering SFC symbol.
Cleared
Select whether to open a new window for each Zoom or to change the display in the fixed window when opening Zoom. Checking this option changes the "Tile SFC and Zoom vertically" option into unchecked.
Cleared
Set the number of contacts.
Same as the "Ladder Diagram" setting
Reference (Simple)
12 - 10
Tree item Device Comment Editor Device Memory Editor Label Setting Editor Parameter
12.2 Option Setting List
Item
Explanation
Default
Number of Device Comment Edit/Display Characters
Set the number of input and display characters for device comment.
32
Extended setting
� When "Standard mode" is selected. Device comment up to 32K points per device can be registered. In total, up to 1024K points per file can be registered. Standard
� When "Extended mode" is selected. mode Device comment up to 192K points per device can be registered. In total, up to 2048K points per file can be registered.
Execute the operation including the hidden bit specification information *Only applies to Universal model QCPU and LCPU
Set whether to execute the Copy/Cut/ Paste operation including the hidden bit specification information.
Cleared
Always Confirm
Display the window which sets the editor column when opening the target device memory editor for the first time after reading PLC or opening other project.
Auto
Always set the column automatically when opening the target device memory editor for the first time after reading PLC or opening other project. Set 8, 10 and 16 columns automatically according to device type.
Always Confirm
Specify the Column Number
Always set the specified columns when opening the target device memory editor for the first time after reading PLC or opening other project.
Automatic copy and increment when inserting a row
Select whether to copy the texts in the upper row after incrementing it when inserting a row.
Selected
Copy data type/comment Select if the data type, comment, and
items
remark shall be object for auto copy.
Selected
Default Length of String Data Type
Set the default string length for string data type.
32
Display last blank row
Select whether to display last blank row. This setting is valid for global label and local label except the local label of function block, function and structured data type.
Cleared
Use user defined parameter * Only applies to the QCPU, LCPU
Display the User Defined Parameter Setting button and able to set it. Once the user set parameter is set, it will remain even after checking off the selection box.
Cleared
Display number of columns for CC-Link list setting * Only applies to the QCPU, LCPU
Select 4 columns or 2 columns to display number of columns in CC-Link list setting of network parameter. Please reopen the CC-Link list setting window to reflect changes.
4 Columns
Display number of rows for CC-Link station information
Select 16 rows or 8 rows to display number of rows in CC-Link station information of network parameter. Please reopen the CC-Link list setting window to reflect changes.
16 Rows
Reference Section 9.2.1 Section 9.4 Section 9.2.1
Section 4.7.1 Section 15.1.8
(Simple) (Structured)
� Section 6.3 Section 6.3.1
WRITING/READING DATA
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
USING LIBRARIES
SETTING OPTIONS
PRINTING
SEARCH/REPLACE
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
PROTECTING DATA
12 - 11
12 SETTING OPTIONS
Monitor
Tree item Common
Structured Ladder/FBD/ ST
Ladder/SFC
Item
Explanation
Default
Reference
Disable Current Value Changing by Pressing Shift+Enter
Select whether to disable the current value changing of bit device (bit label) of cursor position when executing ladder editor monitor/watch/intelligent function module monitor/device/buffer memory batch monitor by pressing [Shift]+[Enter] key. This setting will be saved when stopping GX Works2. Please stop this GX Works2 at last when multiple GX Works2 are running.
Cleared
Section 19.1
Start monitoring if converted or compiled program is opened during monitoring
Select whether to start monitoring automatically if other program is opened while monitor status bar is displayed. Unconverted or uncompiled program will not be monitored.
Cleared
Section 17.2
Display Format of Monitoring Value
Select whether to display monitored value in Decimal or Hexadecimal.
Decimal
Monitor buffer memory and link direct device * Only applies to the QCPU, LCPU, FX3U(C)
Select whether to monitor buffer memory and link direct device during monitoring. Scan time of PLC will be lengthened depending on the setting.
Cleared
Significant Characters
Set the number of displayable characters to monitor character-string data.
16
Verify with PLC setting before starting monitoring
� When "Always Verify with PLC" is selected. Verify with PLC before starting monitoring. However, do not verify if simulator is running, selecting uncompiled program's POU, or unchanged POU (Last verification status is held while editor is open).
� When "Not Always Verify with PLC" is selected. Start monitoring without verifying with PLC.
� When "Confirm whether to Verify with PLC" is selected. Show a confirmation box whether to verify with PLC before starting monitoring. However, the confirmation box will not be displayed and do not verify if simulator is running, selecting uncompiled program's POU, or unchanged POU (Last verification status is held while editor is open).
Confirm whether to Verify with PLC
(Structured)
Set automatic registration destination
Label and device of ladder block (Ladder) in cursor, action/transition step (SFC) will be registered to watch window while monitoring watch window. (Caution 1: Cursor move will be slow under the setting. 2: Select FB instance for function block.)
Not Specified
Section 17.6.2
12 - 12
Tree item Ladder Monitor SFC*2
12.2 Option Setting List
Item Display Format of Monitoring Value Monitor buffer memory and link direct device * Only applies to the QCPU, LCPU, FX3U(C) FXGP format Ladder monitor * Only applies to the FXCPU
Display monitored value by device/label name of contact/coil instruction
Display Lines for Monitoring Current Value
Watch Step Not Transferring within Watching Time
Program/Program File Name
Target All Blocks
Specify the Block Detail Setting
Stop Transition Watch Monitor when Detected
Monitor block start with new window
Explanation
Default
Select the display format of the monitored value in decimal or hexadecimal.
Decimal
Select whether to monitor buffer memory and link direct device during Laddermonitoring. Scan time of PLC will be lengthened depending on the setting.
Cleared
PLS/PLF instruction is displayed in GP(DOS) and FXGP(WIN) formats. If it is not checked, it is displayed in GX Developer form.
Cleared
In monitoring ladder, select whether to highlight contact/coil instruction based on the monitored value displayed by device/ label name.
Cleared
Select whether to display rows of the current value monitor during Laddermonitoring.
Show Always
Select whether to display a warning dialog when detect a step that does not transfer even if specified time passes while monitoring. It is excluded from the target of [Set as User Default] function.
Cleared
Select watch target program/program file. (SFC
It is excluded from the target of [Set as program
User Default] function.
name)
Specify watch target block. It is excluded from the target of [Set as User Default] function.
Selected
Specify watch target block. It is excluded from the target of [Set as User Default] function.
Cleared
Select whether to detect other step that does not transfer while displaying warning dialog.
Selected
Select whether to open a corresponding SFC window to monitor when the active step transfers to a block start step.
Cleared
Reference (Simple)
(Simple)
USING LIBRARIES
SETTING OPTIONS
PRINTING
SEARCH/REPLACE
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
9 10 11 12 13 14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
15
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
12 - 13
12 SETTING OPTIONS
Tree item PLC Read/Write
Item
Explanation
Default
Keep last file selection for Select whether to store file selection
PLC read/write dialog
status to PLC read/write dialog.
Selected
Turn PLC to STOP at time of PLC write after executing Rebuild All and do not execute remote RUN
Select whether to turn the PLC to STOP at the time of PLC write and not execute remote RUN because executing "Rebuild All" from the menu or icon changes the device assignment. PLC write cannot be executed in RUN with this option checked.
Cleared
Clear the device ranges
set in the Device/Label Automatic-Assign setting to 0 at time of PLC write after a Rebuild All operation * Recommended setting:
checked*3,*4 * Unnecessary for simple
After executing a Rebuild All, when labels are reassigned to new devices, values from the previous program will remain in the previously assigned devices. This setting automatically clears the device ranges in the Device/Label AutomaticAssign Setting.
projects (Do not use label)
Selected
Check the password in reading/writing/verifying/ deleting PLC*2
Select whether to check password in reading/writing/verifying/deleting PLC. Read user default at reading new PLC time. The label program of GX Developer check the password that does not pertain to this setting.
Selected
Check program cache memory when writing to PLC Universal Model QCPU(Except for Highspeed Universal model QCPU), LCPU only
Select whether to execute automatically check program cache memory when writing to program memory. Automatic recovery is enabled in Write to PLC, Online program change, TC setting change, Write title, and Password/ Keyword.
Cleared
Merge device comment with the project data at time of PLC read.
Select whether to merge the read device comments with the project data or replace the project data with the read device comments in reading from PLC. Device comments created in the extended mode will also be deleted if this option is disabled.
Selected
Show a completion message if the PLC read/ write window is automatically closed
Select whether to show the confirmation message if the PLC read/write operation is successfully finished and the window is automatically closed.
Selected
Reference
Section 15.1
Section 15.1.8 (Simple)
(Structured)
-
Manual of programmable controller CPU
Section 15.1.8
-
12 - 14
Tree item Online Change
Symbolic Information
12.2 Option Setting List
Item
Explanation
Default
Execute fall instruction * Only applies to the QCPU and LCPU
Select whether to execute fall instruction (LDF, LDFI, ANDF, ANDFI, ORF, ORFI, MEF, PLF, FCALLP, EFCALLP) at online change.
Cleared
Transfer program cache memory to program memory * Only applies to the QCPU and LCPU
Select whether to transfer the program cache memory to program memory when online change completed. * Message will be shown to confirm whether to transfer to or not if it is unchecked.
Selected
Execute online change based on relative step No. * Ladder Only * Only applies to the QCPU and LCPU
Select whether to execute online change based on relative step No. from pointer. Even if real step No. is different, online change is available as long as relative step No. from the pointer is corresponding.
Cleared
Execute online change by Compile * Enabled when 'Switch the Ladder Edit Mode' is set
Select whether to execute Online Program Change when ladder program or SFC program is edited and compiled. Will be enabled when 'Switch Ladder Edit Mode' is checked. ([Options] [Program Editor] [Ladder] [Ladder Diagram])
Cleared
Under booting, reflect
changes to boot source
during online program change * Except for Q00UJ/Q00U/
Select whether to reflect the changes to boot source after online program change.
Cleared
Q01UCPU, basic model
QCPU and FXCPU
Setting for Writing Symbolic Information to PLC
Set the writing format for symbolic information. The capacity will be optimized by high speed mode support version but be read only by 1.45X or later. The capacity will not be optimized by compatible mode but be read by 1.44W or previous. FXCPU support only high-speed mode.
High Speed Mode
Write symbolic information when Online Program Change is executed
Select whether to write symbolic information when Online Program Change is executed. The system writes the symbolic information when Online Program Change is executed if this option is enabled. * The write target of the symbolic information is grayed out if this option is enabled.
Cleared
In the Write to PLC window, keep the symbolic information selected status as a write target
Select whether to keep the symbolic information selected status when the Write to PLC is selected. * Symbolic information and all programs will be write target at time of PLC write when the option is enabled. Only program cannot be written.
Cleared
Setting for Save Destination of Symbolic Information to PLC
Set a PLC drive to store symbolic information. This setting can be changed when you connect to PLC. Program Memory/Device Memory will be selected in simulation mode if an unusable storage is specified. Default value will be set after changing PLC type.
Program Memory/ Device Memory
Reference
Section 15.9
Section 15.1.5 -
Section 15.1.5 Section 5.3.2
WRITING/READING DATA
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
USING LIBRARIES
SETTING OPTIONS
PRINTING
SEARCH/REPLACE
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
PROTECTING DATA
12 - 15
12 SETTING OPTIONS
Tree item Save Destination of Device Comment
Basic Setting Compile
Output Result
Item
Explanation
Default
Reference
Set save destination of device comment to the target memory of PLC data
Under device comment selected status, select whether to change the target memory of PLC data to the one specified by Save Destination of Device Comment.
Cleared
Save Destination of Device Comment
Set the target memory for device comment save destination. Able to change it later. In simulation mode, program/device memory will be selected if invalid destination is specified. * This setting will not be saved by 'Set as User Default' setting.
Program Memory/ Device Memory
Section 15.1.7
Enable calling function block and using inline ST
Enable calling function block from ladder to ST or vice versa, from ladder to Structured Ladder/FBD or vice versa, using inline ST in ladder, reducing steps when using function block. * Input label for VAR_IN_OUT remains equal to output label.
Selected
(Structured)
Do not execute duplicated coil check, ladder check and consistency (pair) check after Build or Online Program Change
Check when program check is not needed after Build or Online Program Change. It can reduce the compile time depending on the setting.
Selected
Do not target the SET instruction for duplicated coil check
Select whether to set the SET instruction as the target for duplicated coil check.
Cleared
(Simple) (Structured)
Use the same label name in global label and local label
Select whether to use the same label name in global label and local label. When the same label is selected, local label will be given priority.
Cleared
Create cross reference information after completion compile.
Creating cross reference information after compiling enables to reduce find time. The information can be found in uncompiled project. Specified find condition is treated as filter condition. The setting will be canceled if find mode is 'Fast Find'.
Cleared
Section 10.1.1
Stop Build
Disable Warning and Notification Message
Set the number of error and warning to stop the compile.
Error: 25 Warning: 100
Register warning codes to invalidate. The
registered warning codes shall not be
(No setting)
displayed in output window.
(Simple) (Structured)
Display the Use Status
Notification of Automatic-Assign Device in Output
The use status of device automaticassign is displayed in output window.
Selected
�
Result
12 - 16
12.2 Option Setting List
Compile
Tree item
Ladder/ SFC
Compile Condition
Compile Condition 1
Structured Ladder/ FBD/ST
Compile Condition 2
Compile Condition 3
Item
Explanation
Default
Make sure that the instruction is not used beyond the device range assigned by the label*2
Select whether to display warnings or not when ladder/SFC program instruction is using devices out of device range assigned by the labels in instruction. Able to detect instructions that may use devices out of range and may overwrite other label's value.
Cleared
Use lower-case device names as labels*5
Select whether to use device names typed with lower case characters as labels. Only the device name outside device range is valid for Inline Structured Text.
Cleared
Function Output Setting
Select whether to connect directly from the objective function output to other input.
Selected
Allow VAR_OUTPUT at FB call (ST)
Select whether to allow VAR_OUTPUT at FB call. Check: Able to specify VAR_OUTPUT as FB argument. (e.g. FBInst(FBVarOUT:= Variable);) Uncheck: Compile error C8015 returns if VAR_OUTPUT is specified as FB argument.
Selected
Add temporary variables as arguments to use macrocode
For FB call of ST or structured ladder from structured ladder, set whether to add temporary variables to input, I/O, or output argument to use macrocode.* Unable to add them depending on the programming language. Please refer to the appropriate manual. (Unable to add temporary variable in a structure.)
Cleared
(D)INT_TO_BOOL_E, (D)WORD_TO_BOOL_E, TIME_TO_BOOL_E
Selected
NOT_E
LIMITAION_E, MAXIMUM_E, MINIMUM_E
Check the box to generate code that holds the output (SET). When unchecked, the instruction word output will be treated as a coil (OUT).
Selected Selected
EQ_E, NE_E, GT_E, GE_E, LT_E, LE_E
Selected
AND_E, OR_E, XOR_E
Selected
User Defined Function with EN/ENO
Select whether to generate a code which keeps bit type output of the target function. (Codes keeping bit type are generated if output is in bit type array or in structure array, regardless of option setting.)
Selected
User Defined Function Block with EN/ENO
Select whether to generate a code which keeps bit type output of the target function block. (Codes keeping bit type are generated if output is in bit type array or in structure array, regardless of option setting.)
Cleared
Automatically assign each system device to output of functions that use EN/ ENO
Select whether to assign each system device to output functions of EN/ENO. Only functions enabled. (Function block is disabled.) Only checked functions at [Generate Code That Holds the Output of the Following] are enabled when the output is bit type.
Selected
Reference (Simple)
(Structured)
(Structured)
WRITING/READING DATA
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
USING LIBRARIES
SETTING OPTIONS
PRINTING
SEARCH/REPLACE
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
PROTECTING DATA
12 - 17
12 SETTING OPTIONS
Tree item
Item
Explanation
Default
Reference
Display Specification of Positioning Data
Set the range of positioning data to be displayed.
Data No.1 to 100
(Intelligent)
Intelligent Function Module*2
QD75/LD75 Type Positioning
Select whether to check an operation Confirm PLC operation status of programmable controller CPU status when writing a Data and allow to be written in the status of
STOP.
Display a confirmation message when writing to flash ROM
Select to display a confirmation message when writing to flash ROM.
Selected Selected
Section 15.1.4
Guidance
Display intelligent function Select whether to automatically display
module guidance
intelligent function module guidance.
Selected
(Intelligent)
iQ Works Interaction
Enable an editing of parameters set in MELSOFT Navigator
Select whether enabling or not editing parameters set by MELSOFT Navigator.
Selected
Section 6.1
System Label Setting*6
Use MELSOFT Navigator Option Information
Checking this option enables use of the option setting of MELSOFT Navigator. The option setting specified in MELSOFT Navigator at the time of opening this project is used.
Cleared
System Label Name Setting
Set how to name system labels. When system labels are entered, system label names are determined based on this setting at the time of project save.
Use global names directly
(Simple) Structured)
Display a message to confirm operation contents at the start of trace
Display a confirming message to start trace.
Selected
Sampling Trace
Display a message to
confirm discard of the trace result at the start of
Display a message to confirm discard of the trace result at the start of trace.
Selected
�
trace
Display a caution message in saving data as GX LogViewer format CSV file
Display a caution message about data changes in saving data as GX LogViewer Selected format CSV file.
*1 : Supported by Japanese version of GX Works2 only. *2 : Not supported by FXCPU. *3 : This setting is not required when the following operations are performed, and the programmable controller CPU is switched to RUN for
writing programs to programmable controller CPU after compiling programs. � For QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU: reset the programmable controller CPU, clear all device memories including latches, clear all file registers. � For FXCPU: perform the PLC memory clear function. *4 : 0 clear process may take a couple of minutes when a large amount of devices to be cleared exists. *5 : Not supported by Simple project. *6 : For FXCPU, this item is supported by FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, and FX3UC only.
Options supported by communication head module and remote I/O module The following option items are supported by projects for communication head module and remote I/O module. � Project � Parameter � PLC Read/Write � Intelligent Function Module
� iQ Works Interaction*1
*1 : For CC IE Field head module only
12 - 18
13 - 1
16
15
PROTECTING DATA
WRITING/READING DATA
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
USING LIBRARIES
SETTING OPTIONS
PRINTING
14
12
13 - 2
13
13.1 Libraries
11
This chapter explains the overview of library function in GX Works2.
10
13 USING LIBRARIES
SEARCH/REPLACE
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
9
13 USING LIBRARIES
13.1 Libraries
FB library and user library are the libraries of GX Works2. Work hours for creating programs can be reduced by using functions of library. This section explains the overview of libraries.
The following table shows the applicability of libraries according to the project type.
: Applicable �: Not applicable
Project type Simple project (without labels)
FB library �
Library
User library �
Simple project (with labels)
Section 13.1.1
�
Structured project
Section 13.1.1
Section 13.1.2
13 - 2
13.1 Libraries
13.1.1 FB libraries
9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
Q CPU L CPU ReFmXote HFeXad FX
FB libraries are the collection of function blocks prepared as MELSOFT Library and they can be used in
projects with labels.
Contact your local Mitsubishi Electric sales office or representative to obtain MELSOFT Library.
10
To use the FB library in a Structured project, import the library to a Simple project (with labels), and
change the project type to a Structured project by selecting [Project] [Change Project Type].
Programs can be created efficiently by using the FB libraries. The following shows an example of using the FB library of QD70 positioning module (QD70P4).
SEARCH/REPLACE
< Without FB libraries >
< With FB libraries >
11
PRINTING
12
SETTING OPTIONS
13
USING LIBRARIES
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
14
For details of using the FB libraries, refer to the following manual. GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project, Function Block)
15
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
13.1.1 FB libraries
13 - 3
13 USING LIBRARIES
13.1.2 User libraries
Q CPU L CPU ReFmXote HFeXad FX
User libraries are components which can be shared between multiple projects and they can be used in a Structured project only. User libraries are created by a user.
Frequently-used components are stored and reused for programming efficiency.
< Project 1 > Library
Program Global label
FB/FUN Structure
Edit Store
Library file
Program Global label
FB/FUN Structure
Reuse
< Project 2 > Library
Program Global label
FB/FUN Structure
Utilize
Global label Program setting
Task POU Program block
FB/FUN
Structure
The following data can be registered to user libraries. � Global labels � Structures � POUs (program blocks, functions, function blocks)
Global label Program setting
Task POU Program block
FB/FUN Structure
Library components can be used.
For details of using user libraries, refer to the following manual. GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Structured Project)
13 - 4
13.1.2 User libraries
9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
SEARCH/REPLACE
14 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE 10 CONTROLLER CPU
CONNECTION DESTINATION
11
This chapter explains how to set a connection destination for accessing a programmable controller CPU from GX Works2.
PRINTING
14.1 Setting Connection Destinations
12
14 - 2
SETTING OPTIONS
14.2 Accessing Programmable Controller CPU Directly
14 - 8
14.3 Accessing Programmable Controller CPU Via
Networks
14 - 15
13
14.4 Accessing Programmable Controller CPU in Multiple
CPU System
14 - 22
USING LIBRARIES
14.5 Accessing Redundant CPUs
14 - 25
14.6 Accessing Programmable Controller CPU via
Ethernet Board
14 - 33
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
14.7 Accessing Programmable Controller CPU via G4 Module
14 - 35
14.8 Setting for Access via Serial Communication Module 14 - 36
14.9 Setting for Access via GOT (GOT Transparent Function)
14 - 40
15
WRITING/READING DATA
14.10 Accessing Programmable Controller CPU via Phone
Line
14 - 50
14.11 Considerations of Communication with Programmable Controller CPU
14 - 72
16
PROTECTING DATA
14 - 1
14 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
14.1 Setting Connection Destinations
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
This section explains how to set communication routes, including the interfaces both on the personal computer and programmable controller CPU and the routing networks, for accessing a programmable controller CPU. Multiple connection destinations can be set in GX Works2. To set multiple connection destinations, create data for each connection destination on the New Data screen. (Section 14.1.2) The programmable controller type of the project should be the same as that of the programmable controller CPU to be accessed.
Screen display
Select Navigation window Connection Destination view "(connection destination data name)".
14 - 2
14.1 Setting Connection Destinations
14.1.1 Transfer setup screen
9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
Interfaces are displayed on the Transfer Setup screen as shown below and detailed settings of each interface can be configured.
PLC side I/F
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
PC side I/F
MELSECNET/10(H) Network route
11
PRINTING
Detailed setting display fields
SETTING OPTIONS
12 13
USING LIBRARIES
Detailed settings can be set for underlined items on the screen. Double-click these items to set the details. The items whose icons are displayed in yellow are items that have been already set.
PC side I/F Set the interface of the personal computer.
14
PLC side I/F Set the interface of the programmable controller CPU connected to the personal computer.
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
15
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
14.1.1 Transfer setup screen
14 - 3
14 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
Other Station Setting Select whether routing network exists or not. In addition, set the "Check at communication time" and "Retry times" as necessary.
Item
Description
No Specification
Specify this to access the programmable controller CPU directly connected to a personal computer.
Other Station (Single Network)*1
Specify this to access the programmable controller CPU on another station via only one kind of network (including a multi-tier system) such as CC-Link only, MELSECNET/10(H) only, CC-Link IE only, C24 module only and Ethernet only. Since Ethernet is regarded as equivalent to CC-Link IE and MELSECNET/10(H), specify "Single Network" for a mixed system in which Ethernet, CC-Link IE, and MELSECNET/10(H) are configured.
Other Station (Co-existence Network)*1,*2
Specify this to access the programmable controller CPU on another station via two kinds of network. This means the system that is configured with two different networks, such that from MELSECNET/10(H) to CC-Link master/local module or from Q series C24 module to MELSECNET/10(H).
*1 : When the host station is specified, select "No Specification". *2 : Not supported by FXCPU.
Network Communication Route Select the network type, network number, station number, and start I/O number of the network that is routed for accessing the programmable controller CPU on another station. The setting items differ according to the selected network type.
Co-existence Network Route*1 Select the network type, network number, station number, and start I/O number of the network to access. The setting items differ according to the selected network type.
Target system*1,*2 Specify the access target in the multiple CPU system or the redundant system.
*1 : Not supported by FXCPU. *2 : Not supported by LCPU.
14 - 4
14.1.1 Transfer setup screen
14.1 Setting Connection Destinations
Screen button
9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
Displays the Connection Channel List screen.
The connection destination can be set while checking network routes on the Connection Channel List
screen.
Since the route selected in the Connection Channel List screen is set automatically on the Transfer
10
Setup screen, the setting is easy even for a complex system.
The following is an example of setting screen when QCPU (Q mode) is selected.
SEARCH/REPLACE
Operation
1. Select a route on the Connection Channel
List screen.
2. Click the
/
button.
11
The selected route is displayed on the Transfer
Setup screen. Set the network number, station
number, and other settings depending on the
access target.
PRINTING
� "List mode"
12
List mode
Description
SETTING OPTIONS
Display All Routes
Display all routes supported by GX Works2.
Display Selected Routes
Specify the interfaces for "PC side I/F" and "PLC side I/F" on the Transfer Setup screen and select "Display Selected Routes" to display only accessible routes for "Other Station Setting" and "Network Communication Route" setting.
13
USING LIBRARIES
Changes the connection destination setting for the setting that connects a personal computer directly
to the programmable controller CPU to be accessed.
This function is useful to change the station specification from another station to host station.
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
Tests if the target programmable controller CPU set on the Transfer Setup screen can be accessed
normally.
If accessed normally, the model of the target programmable controller CPU module is displayed on
the "PLC Type" field, one of the detailed setting display fields. In addition, for the multiple CPU
system, the CPU number of the connection destination is displayed on the "Detail" field.
15
Shows the set connection channel in an illustration.
WRITING/READING DATA
/
Displays the Line Connection screen.
The screen is used to set the communication using a phone line. For details of the Line Connection screen setting, refer to Section 14.10.2.
16
PROTECTING DATA
14.1.1 Transfer setup screen
14 - 5
14 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
14.1.2 Creating connections
Create a new connection. Select Navigation window Connection Destination view, and perform the following operation.
Screen display
Select [Project] [Object] [New] ( ).
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Item
Data Name
Set as Default Connection
Description Enter the name of the connection to be created.
Select this to specify the connection destination to be created for regular use.
2. Click the
button.
The created connection destination is added to "All Connections" on the Connection Destination view.
14 - 6
14.1.2 Creating connections
14.1 Setting Connection Destinations
14.1.3 Specifying connection destination for regular use
9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
SEARCH/REPLACE
Specify a connection destination for regular use when multiple connection destinations are set.
Operating procedure
1. Select the connection destination data to be specified as for regular use from "All 10
Connections" on the Connection Destination view.
2. Select [Project] [Object] [Set as Default Connection].
The name of the selected connection destination data is set as the connection destination for regular use, and displayed on "Current Connection".
11
PRINTING
SETTING OPTIONS
12
is appended to the icon of data specified as the connection destination for regular use.
13
Connection destination setting The connection destination data can also be specified for regular use by dragging and dropping it from "All Connections" to "Current Connection".
14
USING LIBRARIES
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
15
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
14.1.3 Specifying connection destination for regular use
14 - 7
14 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
14.2 Accessing Programmable Controller CPU Directly
This section explains the setting method for accessing the programmable controller CPU directly connected to a personal computer.
14.2.1 Connecting with serial/USB cable
Q CPU L CPU ReFmXote Head FX
The following explains the setting for accessing the host programmable controller CPU from GX Works2 with serial/USB cable.
Host programmable controller CPU
When connecting directly to the programmable controller CPU.
14 - 8
14.2.1 Connecting with serial/USB cable
14.2 Accessing Programmable Controller CPU Directly
Connecting to QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU
9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
The following explains the setting for accessing the QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU on the host station.
Operation
1. Set "PC side I/F".
Section 14.1.1
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
2. Set "PLC side I/F".
11
Select the series of the programmable controller CPU to
be connected.
PRINTING
SETTING OPTIONS
12
3. Set "No Specification" for "Other Station Setting".
Set "Check at communication time" and "Retry times" as necessary.
13
USING LIBRARIES
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
15
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
14.2.1 Connecting with serial/USB cable
14 - 9
14 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
Connecting to FXCPU
The following explains the setting for accessing the FXCPU on the host station.
Operation
1. Set "PC side I/F".
Section 14.1.1
2. Set "PLC side I/F".
This setting is not required for the series other than FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, and FX3UC.
3. Set "No Specification" for "Other Station Setting".
Set "Check at communication time" and "Retry times" as necessary.
14 - 10
14.2.1 Connecting with serial/USB cable
14.2 Accessing Programmable Controller CPU Directly
9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
Lead time to display communication error When powering OFF the programmable controller CPU or resetting hardware during a program monitoring, displaying communication error will take time. Until the error is displayed, the "Connection Status" is displayed as "in execution" on the monitoring status bar. The lead time to display communication error can be calculated with the following formula. (Specified time of communication time check) � 3 � (Specified time of number of retries +1)
Example) When communication time check is specified as 30 seconds, and number of retries is specified to '0' (30 seconds) � 3 � (0 +1) equals 90 seconds, and the maximum of 90 seconds later, an error will be displayed.
When a communication error occurs in the functions listed below, an error message will be displayed at '0' time retry, regardless of the number of retries being set. � Intelligent function module monitor � Read from PLC
� Write to PLC � Verify with PLC � Online program change
� Delete PLC data � Read PLC user data � Write PLC user data
� Delete PLC user data � Monitor � Device/buffer memory batch monitoring
� Program list monitoring � Interrupt program monitoring � Entry Ladder Monitor
� Watch � SFC block list monitoring � SFC all block batch monitoring
� SFC active steps monitoring "PC side I/F" of FXCPU
For FXCPU, select the RS-232/USB with considering the description indicated in the table below.
Item
Description
RS-232 C (Including FX-USB-AW and FX3U-USB-BD)
Select this item when connecting using the RS-232 of a personal computer or when connecting to the USB of a personal computer with FX-USB-AW/ FX3U-USB-BD.
USB
Select this item when connecting the GOT2000 series and GOT1000 series USB to the USB of a personal computer directly using the transparent function or when connecting to the USB of a personal computer directly.
Communication speed with FXCPU The following table shows communication speed that FXCPU support.
Communication FX0
speed
FX0S
FX0N
FX1
FXU FX2C
FX1S
FX1N FX1NC
9.6kbps
19.2kbps
�
�
�
�
�
38.4kbps
�
�
�
�
�
�
57.6kbps
�
�
�
�
�
�
115.2kbps
�
�
�
�
�
�
FX2N FX2NC
� � �
FX3S
FX3G FX3GC
FX3U FX3UC
For connecting to FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, or FX3UC and communicating at 38.4kbps/57.6kbps/115.2kbps, the following adapter is required. FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC: FX-232AWC-H FX3U, FX3UC: FX-232AWC-H or FX-USB-AW
WRITING/READING DATA
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
USING LIBRARIES
SETTING OPTIONS
PRINTING
SEARCH/REPLACE
10 11 12 13 14 15 16
PROTECTING DATA
14.2.1 Connecting with serial/USB cable
14 - 11
14 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
14.2.2 Accessing by Ethernet
*1
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head
*2
FX
*1: Built-in Ethernet port QCPU only *2: FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, and FX3UC only
Access the Ethernet Built-in CPU or the FXCPU with Ethernet adapter from GX Works2 by Ethernet.
*1
Ethernet Built-in CPU (192.168.0.2) *1 : For details of the system consists of FXCPU and an Ethernet adapter, refer to the following manual. FX3U-ENET-ADP User's Manual
Operation
� Set the connection destination setting.
Item PC side I/F PLC side I/F
Description
Select an adapter*1 and a protocol. If there are multiple adapters, make sure that the adapter that is used for communication is selected. When there is only one adapter, it does not need to be specified. Since network number and station number are not used, the settings of network number and station number are not required.
Select the access method. ( Detailed settings of PLC side I/F)
*1 : When an adapter name is not displayed on the pull-down list of "Adapter", check the following: � Is the Ethernet adapter enabled? � Is the Ethernet cable connected to an Ethernet adapter properly?
14 - 12
14.2.2 Accessing by Ethernet
14.2 Accessing Programmable Controller CPU Directly
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
Detailed settings of PLC side I/F
9
The following is a setting example when searching for an Ethernet Built-in CPU or an FXCPU with Ethernet adapter on the same network connected via hub and utilizing the IP address. The following is a screen of QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU.
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
Connection destination CPU information list
11
PRINTING
Operation
12
SETTING OPTIONS
1. Select a programmable controller type connected to a personal computer in "PLC Mode".
For FXCPU, the programmable controller type is fixed to FXCPU.
2. Select "Connection via HUB".
3. For QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU, click the
, and for FXCPU, click
USING LIBRARIES
the
button.
13
The IP addresses, CPU types, labels, and comments of the Ethernet Built-in CPU or the
FXCPUs with Ethernet adapter on the same network are displayed in the 'connection destination
CPU information list'.
4. Select an Ethernet Built-in CPU or an FXCPU with Ethernet adapter to be connected in the
'connection destination CPU information list', and click the The selected IP address is displayed in "IP Address".
button.
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
15
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
14.2.2 Accessing by Ethernet
14 - 13
14 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
When a warning message is displayed
When clicking the
button, a warning message may be displayed, which indicates
that a function of GX Works2 is blocked by Windows firewall. Click the
button, and continue the
operation.
When the same IP addresses are displayed If the same IP address is displayed in the 'connection destination CPU information list' when the
button is clicked, multiple IP addresses may be set in the Windows� Network
Connections setting. In such case, select the Ethernet adapter that is used for communication for "PC side I/F". (Section 14.2.2)
14 - 14
14.2.2 Accessing by Ethernet
14.3 Accessing Programmable Controller CPU Via Networks
14.3 Accessing Programmable Controller CPU Via Networks 9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
Q CPU L CPU ReFmXote HFeXad FX
This section explains how to access the programmable controller CPU on another station from a
personal computer via networks.
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
MELSECNET/10(H)
When accessing other stations via a single network.
11
PRINTING
SETTING OPTIONS
When accessing other stations via co-existence networks.
12
13
USING LIBRARIES
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
Operation
1. Set "PC side I/F".
Section 14.1.1
2. Set "PLC side I/F".
15
Section 14.1.1
WRITING/READING DATA
3. Set "Other Station Setting"
Section 14.1.1
4. Set "Network Communication Route" / "Co-existence Network Route".
Select the network type, network number, station number, and start I/O number of the network
that is routed for accessing the programmable controller CPU on another station. The setting
16
items differ according to the selected network type.
PROTECTING DATA
14 - 15
14 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
Setting connection target with checking the communication route
Click the
button to display the Connection Channel List screen.
On the Connection Channel List screen, the images of the communication route selected from the list on the screen can be checked. Since the selected route is reflected on the Transfer Setup Connection screen automatically, the communication route can easily be set. (Section 14.1.1)
Connection via Ethernet The setting of "Station No.IP Information" of the Ethernet parameter may be required. For details, refer to the following manual. MELSEC-Q/L Ethernet Interface Module User's Manual (Application)
14 - 16
14.3 Accessing Programmable Controller CPU Via Networks
Setting example of "Other Station (Single Network)"
9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
The following is the setting example for accessing the programmable controller CPU via single network.
Screen settings for CC-Link system with QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU (single network) The following shows the connection destination detail setting screen example for the CC-Link system configuration.
10
Master station
Station number 1
Station number 2
Request target (Station number 3)
SEARCH/REPLACE
11
PRINTING
12
SETTING OPTIONS
13
USING LIBRARIES
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
Start I/O number of route source CC-Link master/local module ( )
Station number of route target CC-Link master/local module ( )
14
15
Accessible station numbers when accessing the programmable controller CPU on another station via CC-Link When the programmable controller CPU is connected directly or via a serial communication module, accessible station numbers when accessing the programmable controller CPU on another station via CC-Link are 0 (master) to 63.
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
14 - 17
14 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
Screen settings for CC-Link system with FXCPU (single network)
� When FXCPU is a master station The following shows the example of connection destination detail setting screen for the CC-Link system configuration. For details of CC-Link system with FXCPU, refer to the following manuals. CC-Link user's manuals for FXCPU
Master station
*1 *3
FXCPU
Station number 1
*2 *4
FXCPU
Station number 2
*2 *4
FXCPU
Request target (Station number 3)
*2 *4
FXCPU
CC-Link
*1: FX3G/FX3GC version 2.00 or later FX3U/FX3UC version 3.10 or later
*2: FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC For FX3UC, supported by version 2.20 or later
*3: CC-Link master station *4: CC-Link intelligent device station
Special block number of route source CC-Link master station ( )
Station number of request target CC-Link intelligent device station ( )
Considerations when accessing other stations via CC-Link � When accessing other stations via CC-Link, FXCPUs other than the master station can be accessed only when an FXCPU master station (2 in above figure) is relayed. Accessing other FXCPUs via FXCPU other than master station cannot be performed. � Specify the special block number (0 to 7) of CC-Link master station which is connected to the master station for "Start I/O No." in the Network Communication Route Detailed Setting of CC-Link screen. � The following are the accessible station numbers according to the FXCPU model of the master station. FX3U, FX3UC: 1 to 16 FX3G, FX3GC: 1 to 12
14 - 18
14.3 Accessing Programmable Controller CPU Via Networks
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
� When QCPU (Q mode) is a master station
9
The following shows the example of connection destination detail setting screen for accessing
FXCPU via QCPU (Q mode).
For details of CC-Link system with FXCPU, refer to the following manuals.
CC-Link user's manuals for FXCPU
QCPU *1 (Q mode)
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
CC-Link
FXCPU *2 *3
Request target (Station number 3)
*1: Master station *2: FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX3UC
For FX3UC, supported by version 2.20 or later *3: CC-Link intelligent device station
11
PRINTING
12
SETTING OPTIONS
Start I/O number of route source CC-Link master/local module ( )
Station number of request target CC-Link intelligent device station ( )
Accessible station numbers when accessing other stations via CC-Link Accessible station numbers are 1 to 63.
WRITING/READING DATA
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
USING LIBRARIES
13 14 15 16
PROTECTING DATA
14 - 19
14 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
Screen settings for the mixed system in which MELSECNET/10(H), CC-Link IE, and Ethernet are configured (single network)
For the mixed system in which MELSECNET/10(H), CC-Link IE, and Ethernet are configured, specify "Single Network" when accessing the programmable controller CPU on another station. (Since Ethernet is regarded as equivalent to CC-Link IE and MELSECNET/10(H), specify "Single Network".) The following shows the connection destination detail setting screen example for the mixed system configuration (Q series only).
MELSECNET/10(H) Network number 1
Request target (Station number 1)
Ethernet Network number 3
Ethernet Network number 2
Accessing programmable controller CPUs on another station Routing parameters need to be set when accessing a programmable controller CPU on another station with a different network number, or when accessing a programmable controller CPU on another station via network system mixed with MELSECNET/10(H), CC-Link IE and Ethernet. Accessing a programmable controller CPU on another station is possible within the network system specifications by setting routing parameters. For details of routing parameters, refer to the manual of each network module.
Mixed system consisting of MELSECNET/10(H), CC-Link IE, and Ethernet Ethernet parameter "Station No. IP Information" must be set. For details, refer to the following manual. MELSEC-Q/L Ethernet Interface Module User's Manual (Application)
14 - 20
14.3 Accessing Programmable Controller CPU Via Networks
Setting example of "Other Station (Co-existence Network)"
9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
The following is the setting example for accessing the programmable controller CPU via co-existence
network.
This setting is not supported by LCPU and FXCPU.
Screen settings for the mixed system in which MELSECNET/10(H) and Q series C24 modules
are configured (co-existence network) The following shows the connection destination detail setting screen example for the mixed system
10
configuration (Q series only).
SEARCH/REPLACE
Set the routing parameters.
11
CPU C24 MNET/ 10(H) CPU MNET/ 10(H) MNET/ 10(H)
Station No.0
MELSECNET/10 (H) Network number 1
MELSECNET/10 (H) Network number 2
Multi-drop connection
CPU MNET/ 10(H)
C24
Station number 22
CPU C24
12
Request target (Station number 2)
PRINTING
SETTING OPTIONS
13
USING LIBRARIES
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
15
WRITING/READING DATA
Start I/O number of route source C24 module ( )
Station number of route target C24 module ( )
16
PROTECTING DATA
14 - 21
14 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
14.4 Accessing Programmable Controller CPU in Multiple CPU System
*1
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX *1 : Not supported by Q00J/Q00UJ and Redundant CPU.
This section explains the setting method for accessing the programmable controller CPU (host CPU) directly connected to the personal computer or other programmable controller CPUs (other CPUs) in the multiple CPU system. The setting method for accessing the multiple CPU system on another station via a network is also explained.
Accessing host CPU
The setting for accessing the host CPU is the same as that for accessing the programmable controller CPU on the host station. (Section 14.2)
Accessing other CPUs
In the multiple CPU system, specify the CPU number of the access target at "Multiple CPU Setting" when accessing a programmable controller CPU that is not directly connected to the personal computer. For Basic model QCPU and Universal model QCPU (Q00U/Q01U/Q02U), the CPU No. 1 to 3 can be specified. For High Performance model QCPU, Process CPU, and Universal model QCPU (except for Q00U/ Q01U/Q02U), the CPU No. 1 to 4 can be specified.
The following shows a setting example when accessing the CPU No. 4 by connecting the personal computer to the CPU No. 1.
CPU No. 1 (connected to the personal computer) CPU No. 2 CPU No. 3
CPU No. 4 (access target)
Operation
1. Set the settings from "PC side I/F" to
"Co-existence Network Route" Section 14.1.1
2. Set the access target CPU number with
"Multiple CPU Setting" for "Target System".
14 - 22
Specify the CPU No. 4.
14.4 Accessing Programmable Controller CPU in Multiple CPU System
Accessing the programmable controller CPU via network in multiple CPU
9
system
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
The following explains the setting method for accessing the programmable controller CPU in a multiple CPU system on another station via a network.
Relay station
Set the parameters so that the network module mounted on the relay station is controlled by the same programmable controller CPU. (In the figure below, CPU No. 2 is the control CPU.)
10
Access target station Set the CPU number in "Multiple CPU Setting" on the Transfer Setup screen if the access target
station has the multiple CPU system.
SEARCH/REPLACE
The following shows a setting example when accessing the CPU No. 4 in the multiple CPU system on
the access target station via a network.
11
Set the connection destination setting. When accessing one of the CPUs No. 1 to 4 on the access target station, change the CPU number to be accessed in "Multiple CPU Setting" on the Transfer Setup screen.
Personal computer
Host station
1 2 34 1
1 QCPU No. 1 2 QCPU No. 2 3 QCPU No. 3 4 QCPU No. 4
1 Module controlled by the QCPU No. 1 (MELSECNET/10(H), CC-Link IE)
2 Module controlled by the QCPU No. 2 (MELSECNET/10(H), CC-Link IE)
2' Module controlled by the QCPU No. 2 (MELSECNET/10(H), CC-Link IE)
Network number 1 MELSECNET/H Relay station
1 2 3 4 2 2'
Network number 2 MELSECNET/H Access target station
The CPU No. 4 ( 4 ) on the access target station is accessed via the network module 1 by connecting a cable to the CPU No. 1 ( 1 ). Note that the cable shall be connected to the programmable controller CPU that controls the routed network module.
Set the network modules of the relay station to be controlled by the same control CPU. ( 2 2' )
1234 2
Use modules with function version B or later for all modules on the host station, relay station, and access target station.
SETTING OPTIONS
PRINTING
12 13
USING LIBRARIES
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
*1
*1 : Section 14.1.1
15
Specify the CPU number.
16
WRITING/READING DATA
PROTECTING DATA
14 - 23
14 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
Access range by network module function versions To access programmable controller CPUs which are not controlling the network module of the access target station, use the network module with function version B or later.
14 - 24
14.5 Accessing Redundant CPUs
14.5 Accessing Redundant CPUs
9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
This section explains how to access Redundant CPUs.
Connective system (Access target)
*1
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
*1 : Redundant CPU only
10
Target system
SEARCH/REPLACE
PRINTING
11
Tracking cable
12
SETTING OPTIONS
13
USING LIBRARIES
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
Specify the system.
14
Operation
1. Set the settings from "PC side I/F" to "Co-existence Network Route". (Section 14.1.1) 2. Specify the system with "Target System".
Item
Not Specified
Control System Standby System System A System B
Description
� When connecting a CPU directly A programmable controller CPU directly connected to a personal computer
� When routing a module mounted on a main base unit A programmable controller CPU of the station on which a network module whose station number is specified for the network communication route is mounted
� When routing a module mounted on an extension base unit A programmable controller CPU whose system is set as a control system
A programmable controller CPU whose system is a control system
A programmable controller CPU whose system is a standby system
A programmable controller CPU with an A side connector of tracking cable
A programmable controller CPU with a B side connector of tracking cable
WRITING/READING DATA
15 16
PROTECTING DATA
14 - 25
14 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
"Target System" setting when performing the monitoring function When performing the monitoring function on a Redundant CPU, set "Not Specified", "System A", or "System B" for "Target System".
14 - 26
14.5 Accessing Redundant CPUs
14.5.1 Considerations for routing intelligent function module on
9
extension base unit
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
The following table shows the applicability of functions according to the "Target System" setting when accessing a Redundant CPU via an intelligent function module on the extension base unit.
: Applicable : Applicable with restrictions �: Not applicable
Function
Change TC setting Online program change Read from PLC Write to PLC Verify with PLC
Redundant Operation
Password
New Delete Disable
Clear PLC memory
Arrange PLC memory Delete PLC data Read PLC user data Write PLC user data Delete PLC user data Export to ROM format Monitor mode
Monitor (write mode)
Start monitoring (all windows) Stop monitoring (all windows) Start monitoring Stop monitoring Local device monitoring Monitoring program list Interrupt program list Monitoring condition setting SFC all block batch monitoring SFC auto scroll Sampling trace Scan time measurement
MELSECNET diagnostics
Online module change Confirm memory size
Target System
System A/ System B
Not specified/ Control system/ Standby system
Restrictions
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
System switching and change operation mode functions are not applicable.
�
�
�
Clear all file registers function is not applicable.
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
Monitoring SFC programs is not applicable.
Monitoring and verifying SFC programs are not applicable.
Monitoring SFC programs is not applicable.
Monitoring SFC programs is not applicable.
Monitoring SFC programs is not applicable.
Monitoring SFC programs is not applicable.
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
Network test, loop test, setting verification test,
�
station order check test, and communication
test are not applicable.
�
Online mode is not applicable.
WRITING/READING DATA
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
USING LIBRARIES
SETTING OPTIONS
PRINTING
SEARCH/REPLACE
10 11 12 13 14 15 16
PROTECTING DATA
14.5.1 Considerations for routing intelligent function module on extension base unit
14 - 27
14 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
14.5.2
Operation when system switching occurs on Redundant CPU
When a system switching occurs while accessing a Redundant CPU, the access is continued as described below. This function is valid when "Control System" or "Standby System" is set for "Target System" on the Transfer Setup screen.
When "Control System" is set for "Target System".
CPU1
Control system
CPU2 Standby system
Connect to control system via standby
system. CPU1
Standby system
The system is switched.
CPU2 Control system
14 - 28
14.5.2 Operation when system switching occurs on Redundant CPU
14.5 Accessing Redundant CPUs
14.5.3 Operation when communication error occurs during
9
monitoring
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
If a communication error occurs on the route of communication with Redundant CPU, the
communication route is automatically switched to continue the monitoring of the system specified on
the Transfer Setup screen.
10
When the following conditions 1 to 3 are satisfied, the access to the Redundant CPU is continued by
route switching.
SEARCH/REPLACE
1) Monitoring functions of route switch target
� Ladder program monitoring (including Entry Ladder Monitor function, and monitoring programs of Zoom editor and inline structured text)*1
� ST program monitoring � Structured Ladder/FBD monitoring
11
� Local device monitoring*2
� Device/buffer memory batch monitoring*3
PRINTING
� Watch
� Monitoring condition setting*4
� Monitoring stop condition setting*4
12
� Remote operation
SETTING OPTIONS
� Redundant operation
� PLC diagnostics
� Monitoring of intelligent function module
*1 : Not supported by SFC diagram.
*2 : When a communication error occurs and the local device monitoring target program is switched, the monitoring stops.
*3 : When a communication error occurs at a timing of display format change, or when a communication error occurs during scrolling, the monitoring stops.
*4 : When a communication error occurs, conditions cannot be registered/canceled.
13
2) Operation modes and connection targets in which a route switch can be performed
USING LIBRARIES
� Operation mode Connection target
Operation mode/connection target in which a monitoring can be continued Backup mode, separate mode Control system, standby system, system A, system B
14
3) Communication routes in which a route switch can be performed
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
15
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
14.5.3 Operation when communication error occurs during monitoring
14 - 29
14 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
PC side I/F
PLC side I/F
Other Station Setting
PLC Module Serial/USB
GOT
Other Station (Single Network)
Other Station (Co-existence Network)
Other Station (Single Network)
Other Station (Co-existence Network)
Head Module
Other Station (Single Network)
Other Station (Co-existence Network)
C24 Serial/USB
Other Station (Single Network)
Other Station (Co-existence Network)
Other Station (Single Network)
NET/10(H) Remote
Other Station (Co-existence Network)
G4 Module
Other Station (Co-existence Network)
CC IE Cont NET/ CC IE Cont NET/
10(H) Board
10(H) Module
Other Station (Single Network)
CC IE Field Master/ Other Station
Local Module
(Single Network)
CC IE Field Board
Head Module
Other Station (Single Network)
CC IE Field Ethernet Other Station
Adapter
(Single Network)
CC-Link Board CC-Link Module
Other Station (Co-existence Network)
Network
Co-existence Network
Communication Route
Route
CC IE Cont, NET/10(H)
�
CC IE Field
�
Ethernet
�
CC IE Cont, NET/10(H) C24
Ethernet
CC-Link
CC IE Cont, NET/10(H) Ethernet
CC IE Cont, NET/10(H)
�
CC IE Field
�
Ethernet
�
CC IE Cont, NET/10(H) C24
Ethernet
CC-Link
CC IE Cont, NET/10(H) Ethernet
CC IE Field
�
C24
CC-Link CC IE Cont, NET/10(H) CC IE Field Ethernet C24
CC-Link CC IE Cont, NET/10(H) Ethernet C24
CC-Link
CC-Link
CC IE Cont, NET/10(H) Ethernet CC IE Cont, NET/10(H) Ethernet
� � � CC IE Cont, NET/10(H) Ethernet CC IE Cont, NET/10(H) Ethernet � � CC IE Cont, NET/10(H) Ethernet CC IE Cont, NET/10(H) Ethernet CC IE Cont, NET/10(H) Ethernet
CC IE Cont, NET/10(H)
�
CC IE Field
�
CC IE Field
�
CC IE Field CC-Link
�
CC IE Cont, NET/10(H) Ethernet
14 - 30
14.5.3 Operation when communication error occurs during monitoring
14.5 Accessing Redundant CPUs
PC side I/F Ethernet Board
PLC side I/F
Other Station Setting
CPU module
Other Station (Single Network)
Other Station (Co-existence Network)
GOT
Other Station (Single Network)
Other Station (Co-existence Network)
Ethernet Module
Other Station (Single Network)
CC IE Field Ethernet Other Station
Adapter
(Single Network)
Network
Co-existence Network
Communication Route
Route
CC IE Cont, NET/10(H)
�
CC IE Field
�
Ethernet
�
CC IE Cont, NET/10(H) C24
Ethernet
CC-Link
CC IE Cont, NET/10(H) Ethernet
CC IE Cont, NET/10(H)
�
CC IE Field
�
Ethernet
�
CC IE Cont, NET/10(H) C24
Ethernet
CC-Link
CC IE Cont, NET/10(H) Ethernet
Ethernet
�
CC IE Field
�
PRINTING
SEARCH/REPLACE
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
9 10 11 12
SETTING OPTIONS
13
USING LIBRARIES
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
15
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
14.5.3 Operation when communication error occurs during monitoring
14 - 31
14 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
Operation of monitoring functions when a route switch occurs When the target monitoring functions for route switch and other monitoring functions are mixed in an operation, the target monitoring functions for route switch continues operation and other monitoring functions stop operation.
Situations when a route cannot be switched A route switch which is triggered by a communication error cannot be performed when any of the following situations occurs at a monitoring start. � An error occurs on the first communication to the connective system. � One of the Redundant CPUs is powered OFF or reset. � A tracking error occurs and a communication cannot be established between the redundant CPUs.
Messages indicating a system switch request from network module and a tracking cable communication error detection If a message indicating a system switch request from network module or a tracking cable communication error detection is displayed during monitoring, the system may have been switched. Check the corresponding location by following the instruction described on the message, and remove the error factor of route switch. In order to display the above message(s) when communicating via Ethernet, select the following item(s) in the redundant setting of the Ethernet parameter. If the item is not selected, the message will not be displayed even when a route switch is performed. � Issue system switch in Cable disconnection timeout � Issue system switch in communication error
14 - 32
14.5.3 Operation when communication error occurs during monitoring
14.6 Accessing Programmable Controller CPU via Ethernet Board
14.6 Accessing Programmable Controller CPU via Ethernet Board 9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
*1
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
SEARCH/REPLACE
*1 : CC IE Field head module only
This section explains the setting method for accessing the programmable controller CPU via an Ethernet board of a personal computer.
10
The following shows a setting example when accessing the programmable controller CPU from GX
Works2 via Q series-compatible E71 modules.
For the setting to access FXCPU, refer to the manual of the Ethernet module or the manual of the
setting software.
Network number 1
(192.168.1.2) Station number 2
11
Q series-compatible E71 module (192.168.2.2) Station number 2
PRINTING
CPU 1
Q series-compatible E71 module (192.168.1.1) Station number 1
12
SETTING OPTIONS
CPU 2
Network number 2
Q series-compatible E71 module (192.168.2.3) Station number 3
USING LIBRARIES
13 14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
15
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
14 - 33
14 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
Operation
� Set the connection destination setting.
Item PC side I/F
PLC side I/F Network Communication Route
Description
Set the adapter*1, network number, station number*2, and protocol. If there are multiple adapters, make sure that the adapter that is used for communication is selected. When there is only one adapter, it does not need to be specified.
Set the model, station number, IP address and other items for the module to be connected to the personal computer. For "Station No. IP Information", set the method corresponding to the setting for "Station No. IP Information" of Ethernet parameter.
Set the network number and station number of the access target station.
*1 : When an adapter name is not displayed on the pull-down list of "Adapter", check the following: � Is the Ethernet adapter enabled? � Is the Ethernet cable connected to an Ethernet adapter properly?
*2 : Set the station number avoiding the same station number already assigned to the existing system or another Ethernet module.
Connecting MELSOFT products (such as GX Works2) When connecting a MELSOFT product (such as GX Works2) using TCP/IP connection, select "MELSOFT Connection" for "Open System" on the network parameter. In case connecting to multiple MELSOFT products, set the number of connections to be connected. For UDP/IP connection, the connection for MELSOFT products is not necessary to be added. For details of settings, refer to the following manuals. Q Corresponding Ethernet Interface Module User's Manual (Basic) MELSEC-L Ethernet Interface Module User's Manual (Basic) 'MELSOFT Connection' is supported by Q series-compatible E71 function version B modules with a serial number whose first five digits are '02122' or higher.
Multiple network systems For a multiple network system, routing parameters must be set. MELSEC-Q/L Ethernet Interface Module User's Manual (Application)
14 - 34
14.7 Accessing Programmable Controller CPU via G4 Module
14.7 Accessing Programmable Controller CPU via G4 Module 9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
*1
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
*1 : CC IE Field head module only
This section explains the setting method for accessing the programmable controller CPU via a G4 module.
10
For details of AJ65BT-R2N, refer to the following manual.
CC-Link System RS-232 Interface Module User's Manual (MELSOFT Connection Mode)
SEARCH/REPLACE
The following shows a setting example when accessing the programmable controller CPU via
AJ65BT-G4-S3 module from GX Works2.
Data link must be correctly established by setting the switch settings and parameters for the AJ65BTG4-S3 module and the CC-Link master module.
11
AJ65BT-G4-S3 Station number 1
QJ61BT11N Station number 0
PRINTING
SETTING OPTIONS
12
Operation
� Set the connection destination setting.
13
USING LIBRARIES
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
Item PC side I/F PLC side I/F Other Station Setting Network Communication Route
Description Set the COM port and transmission speed. Set the model of the G4 module to be connected. Set "Other Station (Single Network)".
Set the station number of the access target station.
15 16
14 - 35
PROTECTING DATA
WRITING/READING DATA
14 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
14.8 Setting for Access via Serial Communication Module
*1
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX *1 : CC IE Field head module only
This section explains the setting method for accessing the programmable controller CPU on host station or on another station via a C24 module.
14.8.1 Connection on a 1:1 basis
The following shows a setting example when accessing a programmable controller CPU by connecting a personal computer and a Q series C24 module.
Q series C24 module
For connection on a 1:1 basis, the accessing or monitoring can be performed without setting the switch setting. For details of the switch settings, refer to the following manuals. Q Corresponding Ethernet Interface Module User's Manual (Basic) MELSEC-L Ethernet Interface Module User's Manual (Basic)
Operation
� Set the connection destination setting.
The following shows a setting example on a screen when accessing a programmable controller CPU from GX Works2 via a C24 module. The image below is an example for Q series C24 module.
14 - 36
14.8.1 Connection on a 1:1 basis
14.8 Setting for Access via Serial Communication Module
Item
Description
PC side I/F
Set the COM port and transmission speed.
PLC side I/F*1
Set the model and station number of the C24 module to be connected.
Other Station Setting
Set "No Specification".
*1 : If a number other than '0' is set in the station number setting of the C24 module, set the same number for its station number. The station number setting can be set in "Switch 5" (station number setting) in the switch setting of the PLC parameter.
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
9 10
SEARCH/REPLACE
14.8.2 Connection on a 1:n basis
11
Access the programmable controller CPU in another station from GX Works2 in a system composed of multiple programmable controller CPU stations.
PRINTING
Access via a serial communication module
The following shows a setting example when accessing the programmable controller CPU in another station via Q series C24 modules.
12
Station number 0
Station number 1
SETTING OPTIONS
13
USING LIBRARIES
The following table shows an example of switch settings of the I/O assignment setting. For details of the switch settings, refer to the following manuals. Q Corresponding Ethernet Interface Module User's Manual (Basic) MELSEC-L Ethernet Interface Module User's Manual (Basic)
Station number 0
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
Item
Description
Setting
Switch 1
CH1 communication speed
CH1 transmission setting
07E6H
Switch 2
-
CH1 communications protocol
0008H
Switch 3
CH2 communication speed
CH2 transmission setting
07E7H
Switch 4
-
CH2 communications protocol
0000H
Switch 5
Module station number
0000H
15
Station number 1
WRITING/READING DATA
Item Switch 1 Switch 2 Switch 3 Switch 4 Switch 5
Description
CH1 communication speed
CH1 transmission setting
-
CH1 communications protocol
CH2 communication speed
CH2 transmission setting
-
CH2 communications protocol
Module station number
Setting
Set according to the application on CH1 side.
07E6H 0005H 0001H
16
PROTECTING DATA
14.8.2 Connection on a 1:n basis
14 - 37
14 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
Detailed description of settings
Item
Operation Setting
Station number 0 Station number 1
Data bit setting
Parity bit yes/no setting
Odd/even parity bit
Stop bit setting
Sum check yes/no setting
Online change enable/disable setting
Setting change enable/disable setting
Transmission speed setting
Station number 0 Communications protocol
Station number 1
Description Linked operation Independent operation 8 Yes Odd 1 Yes Enable Disable 19200bps GX Developer connection CH1: Set to meet the application CH2: MC protocol format 5
Operation
� Set the connection destination setting.
The following shows a setting example of a screen for accessing C24 modules from GX Works2. The image below is an example for Q series C24 module.
Item PC side I/F PLC side I/F Other Station Setting
Network Communication Route
Description Set the COM port and transmission speed. Set the model and station number of the C24 module to be connected. Set "Other Station (Single Network)". Specify the start I/O number of the C24 module connected to GX Works2 and the station number of access target.
14 - 38
14.8.2 Connection on a 1:n basis
14.8 Setting for Access via Serial Communication Module
Direct connection of a programmable controller CPU
9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
The following shows a setting example when accessing the programmable controller CPU in another
station via Q series C24 modules by directly connecting the personal computer to the programmable
controller CPU.
A programmable controller CPU on another station can be accessed only with CH2 of a Q series C24
module.
10
Station number 0
Station number 1
SEARCH/REPLACE
11
Operation
PRINTING
� Set the connection destination setting.
The following shows a setting example of a screen for accessing a programmable controller
CPU from GX Works2 via C24 modules. The image below is an example for Q series C24 module.
12
SETTING OPTIONS
13
USING LIBRARIES
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
15
WRITING/READING DATA
Item PC side I/F PLC side I/F Other Station Setting
Network Communication Route
Description Set the interface of the personal computer. (Section 14.1.1) Select the series of the programmable controller CPU to be connected. Set "Other Station (Single Network)". Specify the start I/O number of the C24 module connected to GX Works2 and the station number of access target.
16
PROTECTING DATA
14.8.2 Connection on a 1:n basis
14 - 39
14 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
14.9 Setting for Access via GOT (GOT Transparent Function)
This section explains how to access the programmable controller CPU from GX Works2 via GOT using the GOT transparent function.
Considerations on executing online operations from GX Works2 Do not execute online operations from GT Designer2 to GOT (such as downloading project data) when online operations are being executed from GX Works2 to the programmable controller CPU using the GOT transparent function.
When GOT does not monitor normally The GOT transparent function cannot be used in the following cases.
� When GOT does not monitor normally due to programmable controller CPU errors or communication errors between the programmable controller CPU and GOT
� During the period of time between turning ON or resetting the programmable controller CPU or GOT and the start of GOT monitoring
Check the following items if GOT does not monitor normally.
Item
Does the programmable controller CPU operates normally?
Is the programmable controller CPU connected to GOT normally?
Description Refer to the user's manual of the programmable controller CPU used. Refer to the connection manual of the GOT mentioned in each section.
14 - 40
14.9 Setting for Access via GOT (GOT Transparent Function)
14.9.1 Accessing programmable controller CPU via GOT
9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
Access the programmable controller CPU via GOT.
Personal computer (GX Works2) GOT
Q CPU L CPU ReFmXote HFeXad FX
10
Programmable controller CPU
SEARCH/REPLACE
The following table shows the connection between the personal computer and GOT.
: Connectable, -: Not connectable
Connection
GOT2000 series
GOT*1 GOT1000 series GOT-A900 series
GOT-F900 series
RS-232 connection
USB connection
�
�
Ethernet connection
�
�
*1 : For cables connecting GOT with the programmable controller CPU, GOT settings, and considerations, refer to the manual of the GOT connected. � GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) For GT Works3 Version1 � GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) for GT Works3 � GOT1000 Series Connection Manual � GOT-A900 Series User's Manual (GT Works2 Version2/GT Designer2 Version2 compatible Connection System Manual) � GT Designer2 Version2 Operating Manual � GOT-F900 SERIES GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL HARDWARE Manual [Connection]
SETTING OPTIONS
PRINTING
11 12 13
USING LIBRARIES
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
15
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
14.9.1 Accessing programmable controller CPU via GOT
14 - 41
14 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
Connecting personal computer and GOT with RS-232 or USB
The following shows the settings for connecting a personal computer and a GOT with RS-232 or USB.
Operation
1. Set "PC side I/F". (Section 14.1.1)
2. For QCPU (Q mode), LCPU, FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, or FX3UC, double-click "GOT" on
"PLC side I/F". The PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT screen is displayed.
< QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU >
< FXCPU >
For CPUs other than FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, or FX3UC, click "GOT" on "PLC side I/F". The screen will not be displayed in this situation.
3. For QCPU (Q mode), LCPU, FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, or FX3UC, set the following setting
on the PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT screen.
Item Detail setting for GOT and PLC connection
Setup
Description
Select "PLC Module/CC IE Field Ethernet Adapter"
Select "QCPU (Q mode)", "LCPU", or "FXCPU" for "PLC Mode".
Setting method
Description
Bus connection
Select "via GOT (Bus) transparent mode". (For QCPU (Q mode) only)
Direct connection
Select "via GOT (direct connection) transparent mode".
Ethernet connection
Select "via GOT (Ethernet) transparent mode", and set the GOT
(Ethernet) transparent setting from the
button.
GOT-F900
Select "via GOT-F900 transparent mode". Note that if the detailed setting for PC side I/F is USB, this item cannot be selected. (FXCPU only)
4. Set "Other Station Setting" depending on a route to the connection destination.
(Section 14.1.1)
Connecting modules via Ethernet adapter module (For QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU) Modules can be connected via Ethernet adapter module using an Ethernet adapter module with the GOT (Ethernet) transparent function. � Select "via GOT (Ethernet) transparent mode" in the detailed setting and select "NZ2GF-ETB" in the field next to the
button.
14 - 42
14.9.1 Accessing programmable controller CPU via GOT
14.9 Setting for Access via GOT (GOT Transparent Function)
Connecting personal computer and GOT with Ethernet
9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
The following shows the settings for connecting a personal computer and a GOT with Ethernet.
SEARCH/REPLACE
Operation
1. Set "PC side I/F". (Section 14.1.1)
2. Double-click "GOT" on "PLC side I/F".
10
The PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT screen is displayed.
3. Set the following setting on the PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT screen.
<Detailed setting screen when using the Ethernet connection between personal computer and GOT>
11
PRINTING
12
SETTING OPTIONS
13
USING LIBRARIES
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
Item Ethernet Detail setting for PC and GOT connection Detail setting for GOT and PLC connection
Setup
Description Set settings such as an IP address and a host name when using the Ethernet connection between a personal computer and a GOT.
Select "PLC Module/CC IE Field Ethernet Adapter"
Set the following setting according to the setting method between a GOT and a programmable controller CPU. For details, refer to " Connecting personal computer and GOT with RS-232 or USB".
15
WRITING/READING DATA
4. Set "Other Station Setting" depending on a route to the connection destination.
For FXCPU, only "No Specification" can be set. (Section 14.1.1)
16
PROTECTING DATA
14.9.1 Accessing programmable controller CPU via GOT
14 - 43
14 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
14.9.2
Accessing programmable controller CPU via serial communication module
Q CPU L CPU ReFmXote HFeXad FX
The following explains the GX Works2 setting method for accessing the programmable controller CPU via a GOT and a serial communication module.
Personal computer (GX Works2)
Programmable controller CPU Serial communication module
GOT
*1
*2
*1 : The following table shows the connection between the personal computer and GOT.
: Applicable, -: Not connectable
Connection
GOT2000 series
GOT GOT1000 series GOT-A900 series
GOT-F900 series
RS-232 connection
�
�
�
USB connection
�
�
Ethernet connection
�
�
*2 : For details of cables connecting GOT with the serial communication module, GOT settings, and considerations, refer to the manual of the GOT to be connected. � GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) For GT Works3 Version1 � GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) for GT Works3 � GOT1000 series Connection Manual
14 - 44
14.9.2 Accessing programmable controller CPU via serial communication module
14.9 Setting for Access via GOT (GOT Transparent Function)
Connecting to QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU
9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
The following shows the settings for accessing QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU.
Operation
1. Set "PC side I/F". (Section 14.1.1)
2. Double-click "GOT" on "PLC side I/F".
10
The PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT screen is displayed.
3. Set the following setting on the PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT screen.
SEARCH/REPLACE
<Detailed setting screen when using the Ethernet connection
between personal computer and GOT>
11
PRINTING
12
SETTING OPTIONS
13
USING LIBRARIES
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
Item
Ethernet Detail setting for PC and GOT connection
Detail setting for GOT and PLC connection
Setup
Description Set settings such as an IP address and a host name when using the Ethernet connection between a personal computer and a GOT.
Select "C24".
Select "QJ71C24", "QJ71CMO", or "LJ71C24" for "Module Name".
15
4. Set "Other Station Setting" depending on a route to the connection destination.
(Section 14.1.1)
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
14.9.2 Accessing programmable controller CPU via serial communication module
14 - 45
14 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
14.9.3
Accessing programmable controller CPU via CC-Link IE Controller Network
Q CPU L CPU ReFmXote HFeXad FX
The following explains the GX Works2 setting method for accessing the programmable controller CPU via a GOT and a CC-Link IE Controller Network module.
Personal computer (GX Works2)
CC-Link IE Controller Programmable controller CPU Network module
GOT
*1
*2
*1 : The following table shows the connection between the personal computer and GOT.
: Connectable, -: Not connectable
Connection
GOT2000 series
GOT GOT1000 series GOT-A900 series
GOT-F900 series
RS-232 connection
�
�
�
USB connection
�
�
Ethernet connection
�
�
*2 : For cables connecting GOT with the programmable controller CPU, GOT settings, and considerations, refer to the manual of the GOT connected. � GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) For GT Works3 Version1 � GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) for GT Works3 � GOT1000 Series Connection Manual
14 - 46
14.9.3 Accessing programmable controller CPU via CC-Link IE Controller Network
14.9 Setting for Access via GOT (GOT Transparent Function)
Connecting to QCPU (Q mode)
9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
The following shows the settings for accessing QCPU (Q mode).
Operation
1. Set "PC side I/F". (Section 14.1.1)
2. Double-click "GOT" on "PLC side I/F".
10
The PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT screen is displayed.
3. Set the following setting on the PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT screen.
SEARCH/REPLACE
<Detailed setting screen when using the Ethernet connection
between personal computer and GOT>
11
PRINTING
12
SETTING OPTIONS
13
USING LIBRARIES
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
Item
Detail setting for GOT and PLC connection
CPU Mode
Relay Network No.
Relay Station No.
Description Select "CC IE Cont". Select the programmable controller CPU to be connected. Set the network number of the CC-Link IE Controller Network module to be relayed. Set the station number of the CC-Link IE Controller Network module to be relayed.
15
4. Set "Other Station Setting" depending on a route to the connection destination.
(Section 14.1.1)
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
14.9.3 Accessing programmable controller CPU via CC-Link IE Controller Network
14 - 47
14 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
14.9.4
Accessing programmable controller CPU via CC-Link IE Field Network
*1
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
*1 : CC IE Field head module only
The following explains the GX Works2 setting method for accessing the programmable controller CPU via a GOT and a CC-Link IE Field Network module.
Personal computer (GX Works2)
CC-Link IE Field Programmable controller CPU Network module
GOT
*1
*2
*1 : The following table shows the connection between the personal computer and GOT.
: Connectable, -: Not connectable
Connection
GOT2000 series
GOT GOT1000 series GOT-A900 series
GOT-F900 series
RS-232 connection
�
�
�
�
USB connection
�
�
�
Ethernet connection
�
�
�
*2 : For cables connecting GOT with the programmable controller CPU, GOT settings, and considerations, refer to the manual of the GOT connected.
� GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) For GT Works3 Version1
14 - 48
14.9.4 Accessing programmable controller CPU via CC-Link IE Field Network
14.9 Setting for Access via GOT (GOT Transparent Function)
Connecting to QCPU (Q mode)
9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
The following shows the settings for accessing QCPU (Q mode).
Operation
1. Set "PC side I/F". (Section 14.1.1)
2. Double-click "GOT" on "PLC side I/F".
10
The PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT screen is displayed.
3. Set the following setting on the PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT screen.
SEARCH/REPLACE
<Detailed setting screen when using the Ethernet connection
between personal computer and GOT>
11
PRINTING
12
SETTING OPTIONS
13
USING LIBRARIES
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
Item
Detail setting for GOT and PLC connection
CPU Mode
Relay Network No.
Relay Station No.
Description Select "CC IE Field". Select the programmable controller CPU to be connected. Set the network number of the CC-Link IE Field Network module to be relayed. Set the station number of the CC-Link IE Field Network module to be relayed.
15
4. Set "Other Station Setting" depending on a route to the connection destination.
(Section 14.1.1)
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
14.9.4 Accessing programmable controller CPU via CC-Link IE Field Network
14 - 49
14 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
14.10 Accessing Programmable Controller CPU via Phone Line
*1
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
*1 : CC IE Field head module only
This section explains how to set functions to access a programmable controller CPU via phone line, and how to connect/disconnect the line. Modems described in the system configuration below include an external type, built-in PC modem, PC card modem (PIMCIA), and TA (terminal adapter).
When accessing a serial communication module from a personal computer
Modem
QCPU (Q mode) Serial communication
/LCPU
module *1
Modem
Public line *1 : Only modules with RS-232C interface can be used.
Select [Tool] [Set TEL Data/Connect via Modem] [Line Connection] to access the serial communication module from the personal computer. For details of setting items on the Line Connection screen, refer to the following section. Section 14.10.2 " Connecting a line automatically"
The setting of the modem function of serial communication module can be set with the parameter setting of intelligent function module. For details of the modem function, refer to the following manual. MELSEC-Q/L Serial Communication Module User's Manual (Application)
1) Switch settings of serial communication module
Item
Operation setting
Data bit
Parity bit
Transmission setting
Even/odd parity Stop bit
Sum check code
Online change
Setting modifications
Communication rate (transmission speed) setting
Communication protocol (mode setting)
Description Independent
8 None Odd
1 Exist Enable Disable/Enable According to modem specification
5
14 - 50
14.10 Accessing Programmable Controller CPU via Phone Line
2) Initial settings for buffer memories The initial settings are required for the following buffer memories.
Buffer memory address
Name
Setting
2EH (46)
Modem connection channel specification
0: None 1: CH1 2: CH2
34H (52)*1
Data number for initialization specification
0H: Specified initialization data send in user registration frame area for transmission From 7D0H: Data number for initialization
36H (54)
MELSOFT connection specification
0: Not connected 1: Connected
*1 : The following initialization data are registered as a factory setting for serial communication module. Q/L series C24: 7D0H (2000) to 7DDH (2013) If a modem to be used is registered to the initialization data, specify the registration number. When using an unregistered modem, a user can register initialization data to the following registration numbers. � 9C4H (2500) to 9E1H (2529) � 8001H (-32767) to 801FH (-32737)
SEARCH/REPLACE
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
9 10 11
When accessing an FXCPU from a personal computer
PRINTING
Access an FX1S, FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N, FX2NC, FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, or FX3UC through a modem
with a phone line, and remotely-operate the functions such as monitoring, testing, and writing/reading programs.
12
*1 FXCPU
SETTING OPTIONS
Modem
Modem Public line
*1 : For the combinations of an FXCPU and a function expansion board (special adapter), refer to the Section 2.1.10.
13
USING LIBRARIES
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
15
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
14 - 51
14 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
1) Operation flow
Operating procedure on programmable controller CPU side
Start
Open the sequence program to be written to the programmable controller CPU which is accessed remotely.
Set the PLC parameter settings and the type of the modem to be connected to the programmable controller CPU.
Write the set parameters and the program to the FXCPU.
Turn OFF the power of the programmable controller CPU.
Connect the programmable controller CPU and the modem, and connect the modem and the phone line.
Turn ON the power of the programmable controller CPU. (A modem initialization command is automatically sent.)
The programmable controller CPU (modem) becomes in a standby status as it waits for data transmission.
*1 : Section 14.10.2 *2 : Section 14.10.1
Operating procedure on GX Works2 side
Start
Start GX Works2.
Set the type of the modem to be connected to the personal computer.
*1
Register the data to the telephone directory. *2
Set the modem on the personal computer side.
*1
Connect the phone line. *1
Perform the operation such as monitoring in GX Works2.
Disconnect the phone line. *1
End
Power supply procedure Power should be supplied to the modem first, then to the programmable controller CPU. If the programmable controller CPU is turned ON before the modem, the initialization command which is sent to the modem at the power ON of programmable controller CPU is invalidated, and a communication error occurs when operating the system remotely. Furthermore, if only the modem is turned OFF after the power supply, the initialization command is cleared and the same communication error occurs.
14 - 52
14.10 Accessing Programmable Controller CPU via Phone Line
2) Setting PLC parameters
9
Set the PLC parameters which are required to access an FXCPU through the phone line.
< <<PLC System (1) >> tab >
< <<PLC System (2) >> tab >
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
Channel selection
Operating procedure
� Set the items on the screen.
Item
Description
<<PLC System (1)>>
-
MODEM Initialized
Set the initialization command of the modem on the programmable controller side, which is used for the remote access of the programmable controller CPU.
User Register Mode
Select this when using a modem other than "AIWA (PV-AF288)" or "OMRON (ME3314B)". The following are the communication specifications for this mode.
� Start bit: 1 bit
� Data length: 7 bits
� Parity: EVEN
� Stop bit: 1 bit
AIWA (PV-AF288)
Select this when using "AIWA (PV-AF288)".
OMRON (ME3314B)*1
Select this when using "OMRON (ME3314B)".
PP Modem Mode (CH1) PP Modem Mode (CH2)
Select this when using a modem other than "AIWA (PV-AF288)" or "OMRON (ME3314B)", or when using a modem which cannot set the communication specification for the user registration mode. For details, refer to Point in this section. This item can be set for FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, and FX3UC only. Note that only PP Modem Mode (CH1) is supported by FX3S. The following are the communication specifications for this mode.
� Start bit: 1 bit
� Data length: 8 bits
� Parity: None
� Stop bit: 1 bit
<<PLC System (2)>>
-
Channel selection
Specify the channel of programmable controller side to communicate with a personal computer. This item is supported by FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, and FX3UC only. Note that only CH1 is supported by FX3S.
Operate Communication Setting
Clear this item when setting the programmable controller CPU which is operated remotely.
*1 : When selecting OMRON (ME3314B) for FX2N, use the module with the version 2.01 or later (manufacturing number 78**** or later).
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
USING LIBRARIES
SETTING OPTIONS
PRINTING
11 12 13 14 15
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
14 - 53
14 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
Setting PP modem mode (CH1) and PP modem mode (CH2) � <FX3U/FX3UC (FX3UC-32MT-LT, FX3UC-32MT-LT-2) series> When using the first adapter of FX3U-232ADP which is connected to FX3U-232-BD or FX3U-CNV-BD, specify "PP Modem Mode (CH1)". When using FX3U-232ADP which is connected to a board other than FX3U-CNV-BD, specify "PP Modem Mode (CH2)". � <FX3UC (D, DS, DSS)/FX3GC series> When using the first adapter of FX3U-232ADP which is connected to FX3UC (D, DS, DSS) or FX3GC series, specify "PP Modem Mode (CH1)". When using the second adapter of FX3U-232ADP, specify "PP Modem Mode (CH2)". � <FX3G series (14-/24-point type)> When using FX3G-232-BD, or when using the first adapter of FX3U-232ADP which is connected to FX3G-CNV-ADP, specify "PP Modem Mode (CH1)". � <FX3G series (40-/60-point type)> When using FX3G-232-BD, or when using the first adapter of FX3U-232ADP which is connected to FX3G-CNV-ADP, specify "PP Modem Mode (CH1)". When using FX3G-232-BD and FX3U-232ADP which is connected to FX3G-CNV-ADP, specify "PP Modem Mode (CH1)" for FX3U-232ADP, and specify "PP Modem Mode (CH2)" for FX3G-232-BD.
Considerations for creating sequence programs To perform a remote access, the special data register D8120 (communication format) of the programmable controller CPU needs to be "0". D8120 can be cleared to 0 by clearing "Operate Communication Setting" on the <<PLC System (2)>> tab. Note that if a value other than "0" is specified for D8120 in the sequence program, the remote access cannot be performed. Create a sequence program without specifying a specific value for D8120.
14 - 54
14.10 Accessing Programmable Controller CPU via Phone Line
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
3) Setting AT commands
9
When "User Register Mode", "PP Modem Mode (CH1)", or "PP Modem Mode (CH2)" is selected
for "MODEM Initialized" on the <<PLC System (1)>> tab, set AT commands according to the
following operations.
� Register AT commands to programmable controller CPU
Send the following data register data to the modem as a modem initialization command following
the "AT&F" (initialization to the factory setting) command when the programmable controller CPU is turned ON.
10
� D1000 to D1059 (For FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N, FX2NC, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, or FX3UC)
� D200 to D255 (For FX1S, FX3S)
Write a user-registered modem initialization command to above data register in advance using the Modify Value function or a sequence program.
SEARCH/REPLACE
Example) When the initialization command is "ATE0S0=2Q1&D0&M4\Q0\J0&W"
11
Register No. D1000 D1001 D1002 D1003 D1004 D1005 D1006 D1007 D1008 D1009 D1010 D1011 D1012
ASCII A T E 0 S 0 = 2 Q 1 & D 0
Hexadecimal 41 54 45 30 53 30 3D 32 51 31 26 44 30
Register No. D1013 D1014 D1015 D1016 D1017 D1018 D1019 D1020 D1021 D1022 D1023 D1024 D1025
ASCII & M 4 \ Q 0 \ J 0 & W CR LF
Hexadecimal 26 4D 34 5C 51 30 5C 4A 30 26 57 0D 0A
SETTING OPTIONS
PRINTING
12 13
USING LIBRARIES
A user-registered initialization command ends the transmission at the point when "0" is read. As a precaution, create a sequence program in which the input area of initialization command for modem and the data register area used by the general sequence program do not overlap.
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
15
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
14 - 55
14 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
� Setting content of registered modem The following table shows the setting items of AT command for the modem registered to the programmable controller CPU in advance. The setting items differ according to the modem to be used. For details of the actual setting items, refer to the manual of the modem.
Setting item
Command echo setting Number of automatic incoming calls Result code display DTR control Communication mode Terminal flow control Transmission data flow control Terminal speed fixed mode Write to non-volatile memory
AIWA (PV-AF288) ATE0S0=2Q1&D0&M5\Q0\JO&W
E0 (None)
S0=2 (Twice)
Q1 (None) &D0 (Always ON)
&M5 (V.42bis) \Q0 (None)
�
\JO (Fixed) &W
OMRON (ME3314B) ATE0S0=2Q1&D0&H0&R1S15=8&W
E0 (None)
S0=2 (Twice)
Q1 (None) &D0 (Always ON) S15=8 (V.42bis)
&R1 (None)
&H0 (None)
� &W
Modem specifications
Select a modem which satisfies the following specifications. Communication data can be transferred from a built-in modem personal computer or a PC card modem (PCMCIA) used by connecting it to a personal computer.
1) When using a subscriber/in-plant phone line � AT commands are supported. (Initialization command) � DR terminal can be turned ON (High) independently. (Example: A modem, whose CD terminal turns ON as the DR terminal turns ON, cannot be used.) � Communication standard � ITU-T V.90/V.34/V.32bis/V.32/V.22bis/V.22/V.21/V.FC � Bell 212A/103
2) Manual line connection (when connecting a line through an operator) � Addition to the above specification 1), "ANS mode" and "ORG mode" can be switched. (The above mode switches are available on the specific AIWA modem.)
The communication may not be established with the above specification depending on a line condition.
Performing communication using a PC internal modem or PC card (PCMCIA) The COM port setting is required on the Transfer Setup screen to perform communication using a PC internal modem or PC card (PCMCIA). For the COM port number for the PC internal modem or PC card (PCMCIA), refer to the manual of the PC internal modem or PC card (PCMCIA).
Performing communication via a modem When performing communication from GX Works2 via a modem, the standard AT commands cannot be used for some specific modems. If a line cannot be connected by selecting standard AT commands, a user needs to specify the AT commands. For details of specifying AT commands, refer to the following section. Section 14.10.2 " Connecting a line automatically"
14 - 56
14.10 Accessing Programmable Controller CPU via Phone Line
Connection cables
9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
Use an RS-232 cable included in a modem package, or a specified cable to connect a personal computer and a modem. Since the connectors may differ depending on a personal computer, check the specification of the connector when purchasing a modem.
10
Restrictions on phone line
SEARCH/REPLACE
1) Do not use a line with the call-waiting feature enabled. Data may be corrupted or the line is disconnected by the incoming call when the line is enabled with the call-waiting feature.
2) Do not use an extension phone. The phone line may be disconnected when the receiver is picked up during the phone line
11
connection.
3) An analog two-wire circuit can be used for the phone line. For a digital line, the line can be connected by using a TA (terminal adapter).
PRINTING
Phone line with a four-wire circuit
12
A phone line with a four-wire circuit may not be used depending on the modular connector type.
For a phone line with a four-wire circuit, perform a connection test in advance.
SETTING OPTIONS
4) Modems for wireless communication using a cellular phone
Select a model according to the cellular phone to be used.
For details, contact the company of the cellular phone to be used.
5) Coexistence with other applications when performing modem communication
13
When performing modem communication, applications such as GX Works2 and MX Component
USING LIBRARIES
cannot perform modem communication simultaneously.
When performing modem communication in GX Works2, set the other applications not to perform
modem communication.
If modem communication is performed simultaneously with GX Works2 and other applications, a
phenomenon such as a communication error and a line disconnection occurs.
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
15
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
14 - 57
14 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
14.10.1 Setting TEL data
A personal computer can be connected with a programmable controller CPU using a phone line. Use a serial communication module for QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU, and use a function expansion board (special adapter) for FXCPU, to perform communication using a phone line.
Managing telephone directory and AT commands The registered telephone directory and AT commands are managed under each user of Windows� operating system. The telephone directory and AT commands registered by another user cannot be used even when the same personal computer is used. To use the telephone directory and AT commands registered by another user, use the import/export function.
Creating a telephone directory
Register phone numbers.
Screen display
Select [Tool] [Set TEL Data/Connect via Modem] [Phone Book].
List of registered phone numbers
Display contents
Item List of registered phone numbers
Details
Description
Display group names and user names of phone numbers.
Display the registered information of the data selected on the list of registered phone numbers.
14 - 58
14.10.1 Setting TEL data
14.10 Accessing Programmable Controller CPU via Phone Line
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
Operating procedure
9
1. Select a group for which the phone number to be registered on the list of registered
phone numbers.
2. Click the
button.
The Phone Number Setting screen is displayed.
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
11
PRINTING
12 3. Set the items on the screen.
SETTING OPTIONS
Group Name
Item
Destination Name
Phone Number
Outside Line Number
For only Line Connection
Comments
Description
Display the group name to which the information is registered.
Enter the name of the phone number to be set. The maximum number of characters that can be set is 50.
Enter the phone number. The maximum number of characters that can be set is 50.
Set the outside line number. The maximum number of characters that can be set is 10.
When a password is set for Q/L series-compatible C24, this setting enables to process the password authorization automatically to connect the line.
Enter notes on the registered information. The maximum number of characters that can be set is 60.
USING LIBRARIES
13 14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
4. Click the
button.
The phone number is registered.
WRITING/READING DATA
Screen button
Creates a new group. The Group Setting screen is displayed by clicking the The maximum number of characters that can be set is 50.
15
button. Enter a group name.
Opens the screen to edit the registered data. Select a registered data to be edited on the list of registered phone numbers.
16
The Phone Number Setting screen is displayed by clicking the
button. Edit the data.
PROTECTING DATA
14.10.1 Setting TEL data
14 - 59
14 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
Copies a registered phone number to another group. Select the registered data to be copied on the list of registered phone numbers.
The Group screen is displayed by clicking the
button.
Select the group to which data is copied, and click the
button.
Moves a registered phone number to another group. Select the registered data to be moved on the list of registered phone numbers.
The Group screen is displayed by clicking the
button.
Select the group to which data is moved, and click the
button.
Deletes a registered group and phone number. Data cannot be batch deleted in group unit.
Deletes all registered groups and phone numbers.
Searches for a registered phone number. The search condition is a partial match. Target data is searched from all registered data. When entering search conditions to both "Destination Name" and "Phone Number", the data which satisfies the both search conditions is searched.
Performs a selection processing of phone number setting when referring from the Line Connection screen.
Imports phone number data from the specified file and adds it to the directory. Execute the file import after deleting all groups and phone numbers to replace the data with the imported phone number data.
Writes the data set on the Phone Book screen to the specified file.
14 - 60
14.10.1 Setting TEL data
14.10 Accessing Programmable Controller CPU via Phone Line
Registering AT commands
9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
Register AT commands.
Screen display
Select [Tool] [Set TEL Data/Connect via Modem] [AT Command Registration].
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
11
List of registered
AT commands
PRINTING
12
SETTING OPTIONS
Display contents
Item List of registered AT commands
Details
Description
Display titles of AT commands.
Display the registered information of the data selected on the list of registered AT commands.
13
USING LIBRARIES
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
15
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
14.10.1 Setting TEL data
14 - 61
14 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
Operating procedure
1. Select "MELSOFT Application Side Connection Modem" or "TEL Side Connection
Modem" on the list of registered AT commands.
2. Click the
button.
The AT Command Registration screen is displayed.
3. Set the items on the screen.
Group Name Title
Item
AT Command
Description
Display the group name of data to which AT command is registered.
Enter a title for the AT command to be registered.
Set the command for modem initialization. The maximum number of characters that can be entered is 70 in ASCII code.
4. Click the
button.
The AT command is registered.
14 - 62
14.10.1 Setting TEL data
14.10 Accessing Programmable Controller CPU via Phone Line
Screen button
9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
Opens the screen to edit the registered data. Select the registered data to be edited on the list of registered AT commands.
The AT Command Registration screen is displayed by clicking the
button.
Edit the data.
10
Copies a registered AT command to another group.
Select the registered data to be copied on the list of registered AT commands.
SEARCH/REPLACE
The Group screen is displayed by clicking the
button.
Select the group (to which data is copied), and click the
button.
11
PRINTING
SETTING OPTIONS
Moves a registered AT command to another group.
12
Select the registered data to be moved on the list of registered AT commands.
The Group screen is displayed by clicking the
button.
Select the group (to which data is moved), and click the
button.
Deletes a registered AT command.
13
Deletes all registered AT commands.
USING LIBRARIES
Performs a selection processing of AT command when referring from the Line Connection screen.
Imports AT command from the specified file and adds it to the directory.
Execute the file import after deleting all AT commands to replace the commands with the imported
14
commands.
Writes data set on the AT Command Registration screen to the specified file.
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
15
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
14.10.1 Setting TEL data
14 - 63
14 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
14.10.2 Connecting/disconnecting line
Connect/disconnect a line.
Connecting a line automatically
Connect a personal computer to a programmable controller CPU (with the following method: automatic/ callback/manual) for remote access.
Screen display
Select [Tool] [Set TEL Data/Connect via Modem] [Line Connection].
< QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU >
< FXCPU >
Display contents
Item Connect
Description
Display a line connection status. The device which is being accessed is displayed flashing. Devices will be displayed after the connection is established successfully.
When an error occurs during the connection attempt, the failed location is displayed with displayed in gray. Check the failed location with a displayed message regarding the cause of the failure.
, and devices are
14 - 64
14.10.2 Connecting/disconnecting line
14.10 Accessing Programmable Controller CPU via Phone Line
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Item
Connection Method
Line Line Type Outside Line Number Port
Connection Destination AT Command
Modem standard AT Command Setting
Record the logging data
User mode (8bits NP)
Description
Select a method: Automatic, Callback, or Manual (connecting a line through an operator). The phone number is set when specifying a phone number of the callback target. For a connection using the callback function, refer to " Connecting a line using the callback function". For a manual connection, refer to " Connecting a line through an operator (manual connection)".
�
Select a line type: Tone, Pulse, or ISDN.
Set the number as necessary when calling through the outside line.
Select the COM port number which is connected to the modem.
Set the phone number of the target. The previously-registered phone numbers in the telephone directory can be specified by
clicking the
button.
�
Use the AT command set on the modem.
When a difficulty of line connection arises using the standard AT command, create an AT command with reference to the manual of the modem and the content displayed by clicking
the
button.
Line connected time, line disconnected time, connection duration, destination, target phone number, callback, error status, or normal connection can be checked in log files. The log file at the line connection is saved in the following log file. <Save location> User folder\AppData\Roaming\MITSUBISHI\MELSOFT\TEL\Log <Log file name> year, month, day.dat (Example: 110615.dat)
This item is supported by FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, and FX3UC only. Select this when "PP Modem Mode (CH1)" or "PP Modem Mode (CH2)" is selected in the PLC parameter. Do not select this item when the setting other than "PP Modem Mode (CH1)" or "PP Modem Mode (CH2)" is selected.
2. Click the
button.
When the line was not connected, perform the modem initialization.
For the considerations for connecting a line using the callback function, refer to the following manual. MELSEC-Q/L Serial Communication Module User's Manual (Application)
USING LIBRARIES
SETTING OPTIONS
PRINTING
SEARCH/REPLACE
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
9 10 11 12 13 14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
Screen button
Stops the line connection.
15
Displays the Options screen. (Section 14.10.3)
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
14.10.2 Connecting/disconnecting line
14 - 65
14 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
Performs a modem initialization when the modem did not respond at the line connection.
The following confirmation message is displayed by clicking the
button.
A modem initialization starts by clicking the
button. "AT&F" is set as a default command
for the modem initialization.
The command for the modem initialization can be changed by "Modem Initialization AT Command"
under [Tool] [Set TEL Data/Connect via Modem] [Options].
Change the initialization command according to the modem used.
When a failure occurs to the modem initialization, the Options screen is displayed.
Only the settings of items which may become a problem at the line connection can be changed.
For details of the Options screen, refer to Section 14.10.3.
Phone line connection The phone line connection can also be performed on the Transfer Setup screen.
When the line is disconnected by disturbance If the line is disconnected by disturbance during the line connection, a confirmation message will be displayed to select whether to reconnect or disconnect the line.
Connection duration The connection duration is displayed on the status bar when the line is connected.
When the connection destination is changed during the phone line connection Even when the connection destination is changed to another COM port or a communication board (such as MELSECNET/10) on the Transfer Setup screen during the phone line connection, the communication can be performed using the communication routes while the phone line is being connected.
When two or more error messages are displayed Two or more communication error messages are displayed when the modem is turned OFF during the phone line connection. In this case, set a longer time check period for "Other Station Setting" on the Transfer Setup screen.
Using a serial communication module to communicate through a phone line The following table shows the items to be set on a programmable controller CPU and GX Works2 when performing communication using a serial communication module (for Q/L series) through a phone line.
Setting target
Programmable controller CPU
GX Works2
Setting item
� Switch setting Set the following items in the sequence program. � Write the initialization command (ATS0=1). � Set the initialization request.
� AT command registration � Phone number registration
Reference Section 14.10 Section 14.10.1
14 - 66
14.10.2 Connecting/disconnecting line
14.10 Accessing Programmable Controller CPU via Phone Line
Connecting a line using the callback function
9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
The callback function is a function which enables access from GX Works2 to QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU with the line re-connection (callback) operation performed on the Q/L series C24 module side, after the line connection operation is performed in GX Works2. The callback function is not supported by FXCPU.
SEARCH/REPLACE
For 1 to 3, and 9, telephone usage is charged on a personal computer side.
10
For 4 to 8, telephone usage is charged on a Q/L series C24 module side.
For details, refer to the following manual.
MELSEC-Q/L Serial Communication Module User's Manual (Application)
1) Automatic
Select "Automatic" when the callback function is not set on a Q/L series C24 module.
2) Automatic (Callback Fixation)
11
Connect a line without using the callback function when the callback function is set on a Q/L series
C24 module.
A connection operation can be performed on a personal computer whose phone number is
registered to the buffer memory (2101H).
PRINTING
3) Automatic (Callback Number Specification)
Connect a line without using the callback function when the callback function is set on a Q/L series C24 module.
12
A connection operation can be performed on a specific personal computer.
SETTING OPTIONS
4) Callback Connect (Fixation) A callback operation is performed on a personal computer whose phone number is registered to the buffer memory (2101H) of a Q/L series C24 module.
5) Callback Connect (Number Specification)
A callback operation is performed on a specified personal computer.
13
USING LIBRARIES
6) Callback Request (Fixation) Send a callback request from a specified personal computer, and perform a callback operation on a personal computer whose phone number is registered to the buffer memory (2101H) of a Q/L series C24 module. (A callback operation is not performed on the personal computer which is connected first.)
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
7) Callback Request (Number Specification)
14
Send a callback request from a specified personal computer, and perform a call back operation on
a specified personal computer. (A callback operation is not performed on GX Works2 which is
connected first.)
8) Callback Reception Waiting
When connecting a line with Callback Request (Fixation or Number Specification), select "Callback
Reception Waiting" for the personal computer on which a callback is to be performed. 9) Manual
15
This setting is not for the callback function.
Select this item when connecting a line through an operator.
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
14.10.2 Connecting/disconnecting line
14 - 67
14 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
A line connection with the GX Works2 connection method described in the following table can be performed when "Callback function specification" is set for the modem function of the intelligent function module parameter of a Q/L series C24 module. The following table shows the setting items of "Callback function specification" of the modem function and corresponding setting items of GX Works2 connection method.
: Connectable
Q/L series C24 side callback function specification
Auto Setting 1: Auto/Callback Connection (at Fixation) Setting 2: Auto/Callback Connection (at Number Specified)
Connection method on GX Works2 side
1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9)
Setting 3: Callback Connection (at Number Specified Max 10)
Setting 4: Callback Connection (at Fixation)
Setting 5: Callback Connection (at Number Specified)
Setting 6: Callback Connection (at Number Specified Max 10)
The following is an example of line connection with "Callback Request (Number Specification)".
:
Connect from the personal computer with phone number .
:
Connect to the personal computer with phone number .
Modem
Public line
Phone number Set "Callback Request
(Number Specification)" on
the Line Connection screen.
Set one of the following: Setting 2, Setting 3, Setting 5, or Setting 6, for the callback function specification.
Modem
Set "Callback Reception Waiting"
on the Line Connection screen. Set "ATS0=1" for the modem
Phone number
initialization command.
14 - 68
14.10.2 Connecting/disconnecting line
14.10 Accessing Programmable Controller CPU via Phone Line
Connecting a line through an operator (manual connection)
9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
Connect to the in-plant phone line through an operator. A manual line connection cannot be performed on modems without the ANS/ORG/TEL switch.
System configuration
Phone 1
Phone 2 (Operator)
Phone 3 Programmable controller
10
Phone line
Peripheral device Modem 1 C24
SEARCH/REPLACE
Modem 2
11
Operation
PRINTING
1. Select [Tool] [Set TEL Data/Connect via Modem] [Line Connection].
(Select "Manual" for the line connection method on the Line Connection screen. For details of
operating procedure, refer to " Connecting a line automatically".)
2. Set the mode on Modem 1 on Phone 1 side to the ORG mode, and Modem 2 on Phone 3
side to the ANS mode.
12
SETTING OPTIONS
3. Call Phone 2 (operator) from Phone 1.
4. Phone 1 and Phone 3 are connected through Phone 2 (operator).
5. While Phone 1 and Phone 3 are connected, connect C24.
6. Turn ON the DATA switch on Modem 2 on Phone 3 side.
7. After the modem tone on Modem 1 on Phone 1 side is confirmed, turn the DATA switch
13
ON.
USING LIBRARIES
8. When the modem tone on Modem 1 on Phone 1 side is faded, click the
button in GX Works2. When the line is connected normally, the message "Line connected" is displayed.
Considerations
� If the connection cannot be established in step 6 and step 7, repeat the operations and adjust the 14 timing. � The ANS - ORG switch is required on the modem to connect a line manually.
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
15
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
14.10.2 Connecting/disconnecting line
14 - 69
14 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
Disconnecting a line
Disconnect a phone line being connected.
Operating procedure
� Select [Tool] [Set TEL Data/Connect via Modem] [Line Disconnection].
14 - 70
14.10.2 Connecting/disconnecting line
14.10 Accessing Programmable Controller CPU via Phone Line
14.10.3 Setting options
9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
Set options for a line connection.
Screen display
Select [Tool] [Set TEL Data/Connect via Modem] [Options].
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
11
PRINTING
12
SETTING OPTIONS
Operating procedure
� Set the items on the screen.
Item
Description
Line Connection CD Signal Wait Time
Extend the set period when the CD signal does not turn ON within the set period depending on the area (example: overseas) to be connected.
Line Connection Modem Report Wait Time
Extend the set period when the response speed of the modem is slow.
Line Disconnection CD Signal Wait Time
Extend the set period when the CD signal does not turn OFF within the set period depending on the area (example: overseas) to be connected.
Line Disconnection Delay Time
Data Transmission Delay Time
Extend the set period when the response speed of the modem is slow.
AT Command Response Wait Time
Password Cancellation Response Wait Time
Extend the set period when the quality of line connection is poor.
AT Command/Password Cancellation Retry Times
Increase the number of settings.
Line Callback Cancel Wait Time
Extend the set period when the line of the target (Q/L series C24) is not disconnected within the set period depending on the area (example: overseas) to be connected.
Callback Delay Time
Extend the set period when a specific period is required for the device which relays a connection (example: modem) between the line disconnection and the reconnection.
Modem Initialization AT Command
Set a command at the modem initialization. The maximum number of characters that can be entered is 70 in ASCII code.
Communication Initialization Time-out period
Set the timeout period at the communication initialization.
WRITING/READING DATA
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
USING LIBRARIES
13 14 15 16
PROTECTING DATA
14.10.3 Setting options
14 - 71
14 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
14.11 Considerations of Communication with Programmable Controller CPU
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
This section explains the considerations of communication with the programmable controller CPU. Refer to POINT and Restrictions described in each section as well as the descriptions in this section.
Considerations of communication via multiple network systems
When accessing QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU via multiple network systems, connected station*1 and relay stations*2 must be QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU or RCPU.
*1 : Station directly connected from GX Works2 *2 : Stations to be routed on network system
When accessing a programmable controller CPU to which remote password is set via RCPU, the remote password cannot be cleared from GX Works2. Delete the password using the MELSOFT product supported by RCPU.
Considerations of communication with the programmable controller CPU using a USB cable
1) Connecting and disconnecting a USB cable, resetting the programmable controller CPU, and turning the power ON/OFF A communication error may occur and operation may not be recovered if connecting and disconnecting a USB cable, resetting the programmable controller CPU, or turning the power ON/ OFF is performed frequently during communication with the programmable controller CPU. Be sure to set GX Works2 to offline*1 as much as possible during these operations. When operation is not recovered from an error, remove the USB cable. Then, connect it again after five or more seconds. (Even after this operation, an error may occur at initial communication. However, communication will be successful after that.)
*1 : The offline indicates the status other than indicated below. � Write to PLC, Read from PLC, Monitor, and PLC diagnostics
2) Combination of personal computers and USB cables A communication error may occur depending on the combination of personal computers and USB cables. If an error occurs, take appropriate actions according to the message displayed on the screen.
14 - 72
14.11 Considerations of Communication with Programmable Controller CPU
Other considerations
9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
1) High-speed communication using an RS-232 cable
Communication may fail depending on the performance of the personal computer when high-
speed communication is attempted by changing the transmission speed at the serial port of the
personal computer (personal computer side interface). Communication speed may also slow down
due to communication retries. Decrease the transmission speed if high-speed communication is not performed normally.
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
2) Resume function, suspend setting, power saving function, and standby mode of the
personal computer
A communication error may occur during communication with the programmable controller CPU
when the resume function, suspend function, power saving function, or standby mode is set to the
personal computer. Disable these settings for communication with the programmable controller
CPU.
11
3) Switching the connection to GX Works2 during communication through the serial
communication function
When using Q00, Q01, Q00UJ, Q00U, Q01U, Q02U, or QnUD(H)CPU, the connection can be
PRINTING
switched to GX Works2 during communication to a personal computer, indicator, etc. through the
serial communication function.
If unable to connect to GX Works2, adjust the transmission speed to that specified on the <<Serial
Communication>> tab of PLC parameter.
12
<PLC parameter setting screen>
<PC side I/F Serial Setting screen>
SETTING OPTIONS
Select the same transmission speed.
13
USING LIBRARIES
4) Disconnecting Ethernet cable while communicate with Ethernet board
If disconnecting the Ethernet cable and connecting it to other personal computer, a communication
error occurs. This communication error may not be recovered without resetting the programmable
controller CPU.
Disconnect/connect an Ethernet cable after stopping the online functions such as monitoring, or
end GX Works2 once.
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
15
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
14 - 73
14 SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
MEMO
14 - 74
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
9
15 WRITING/READING DATA 10
This chapter explains operations to write or read data to/from the programmable controller CPU or a memory card.
11
SEARCH/REPLACE
PRINTING
SETTING OPTIONS
12
15.1 Writing or Reading Data to/from Programmable Controller CPU
15 - 2
15.2 Verifying Data on Programmable Controller CPU against Data on Personal Computer
15 - 29
15.3 Deleting Programmable Controller CPU Data
15 - 34
13
USING LIBRARIES
15.4 Copying Program Memory Data to ROM
15 - 35
15.5 Writing/Reading/Deleting PLC User Data
15 - 36
15.6 Transferring Data to Program Memory in Batch
15 - 38
14
15.7 Latch Data Backup
15 - 40
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
15.8 Backing up/Restoring Data
15 - 42
15.9 Online Program Change
15 - 45
15.10 Calculating Memory Size
15 - 66
15
15.11 Writing/Reading Data to/from Memory Cards
15 - 73
15.12 Reading Data of Local Devices
15 - 79
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
15 - 1
15 WRITING/READING DATA
15.1 Writing or Reading Data to/from Programmable Controller CPU
This function writes project data to the programmable controller CPU or a memory card, or reads data from the programmable controller CPU or a memory card to the project. Data for intelligent function module also can be written/read. (Section 15.1.4) For reading data from a programmable controller CPU without a project being opened, refer to ' Creating new projects with data read from programmable controller CPU or intelligent function module (New project creation with data read from programmable controller CPU)'. For FXCPU projects with labels, created project data can be read from FX3U/FX3UC version 3.00 or later only. To boot QCPU (Q mode) using a standard ROM or Flash card, it is recommended to firstly write necessary data to the program memory using the Write to PLC function and then write the data to the standard ROM or Flash card using the Export to ROM Format function. (Section 15.4)
Screen display
Select [Online] [Write to PLC] ( )/[Read from PLC] ( ). The following explains the settings for writing data to a programmable controller CPU. Settings for reading data from a programmable controller CPU can be made in the same manner. <Write to PLC screen for the projects without labels.>
Target module tab
File list
Memory capacity
15 - 2
15.1 Writing or Reading Data to/from Programmable Controller CPU
<Write to PLC screen for the projects with labels>
9
For QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU/FXCPU (FX3U/FX3UC version 3.00 or later), the symbolic information
is displayed in the file list.
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
Target module tab
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
File list Memory capacity
PRINTING
11 12
SETTING OPTIONS
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Item Connection Channel List
Target module tab
PLC Module
Intelligent Function Module*1
Description
Display the information of the connection destination setting.
Switch the setting target module. Characters on the tab are displayed in blue when data to be written/read exist.
Set the settings to write data to the programmable controller CPU.
Set the settings to write intelligent function module data to the buffer memory or flash ROM of the intelligent function module. Section 15.1.4
Title*1
Display the title of the target memory by clicking the
button.
Option*2
�
Display Size
Select this to display the "Size" column in the file list and the memory capacity.
File list
�
Target
Select the data to be written/read.
Target Memory*1
Select "Target Memory" on the row of "Symbolic Information" or "PLC Data" displayed in light
blue, and select the target memory to be read/written from ( ). For details of the memory card application, refer to the following manuals. QCPU User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection) MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection)
Memory capacity*3
�
Writing Size
Display the total size of written data selected in "Target".
Free Volume
Display the free space volume of the target memory.
Use Volume
Display the used space volume of the target memory.
*1 : Not supported by FXCPU. *2 : Displayed only when a project with labels is written to the programmable controller CPU.
WRITING/READING DATA
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
USING LIBRARIES
13 14 15 16
PROTECTING DATA
15 - 3
15 WRITING/READING DATA
*3 : For FXCPU, the program size and the symbolic information size are displayed when the project is written to the programmable controller CPU. Symbolic information size is displayed on the screen for projects with labels of FX3U/ FX3UC version 3.00 or later only.
When program (program file), device comment file, device memory file, file register file, or symbolic
information file is selected, the range can be set by clicking the
/
button.
When reading data from the programmable controller CPU, and the device memory is selected,
the detailed settings are required.
For details, refer to the following sections.
Section 15.1.1 "Setting write/read range of program (program file)"
Section 15.1.2 "Setting write/read range of device data"
Section 15.1.3 "Setting range of device comment to be written/read"
Section 15.1.6 "Reading the remaining steps for Online program change"
2. Click the
button.
When the Write to PLC function is executed, the specified data are written to the target memory. When the Read from PLC function is executed, the specified data are read from the target memory.
Screen button
Displays the illustration of the connection channel.
Selects the parameters and all the programs displayed in the list.
Selects all data displayed in the list.
Cancels the selection status of all data selected in the list.
/
Switches display/hide of the Related functions button.
For details of the related functions, refer to the following sections.
� Remote Operation Section 20.1 "Remote Operation of Programmable Controller CPU"
� Set Clock Section 20.6 "Setting Clock on Programmable Controller CPU"
� PLC User Data Section 15.5 "Writing/Reading/Deleting PLC User Data"
� Write Title: Sets a title to the target memory.
� Format PLC Memory Section 20.3 "Formatting Programmable Controller CPU Memory"
� Clear PLC Memory Section 20.4 "Clearing Programmable Controller Memory"
� Arrange PLC Memory Section 20.5 "Arranging Programmable Controller Memory"
(Read from PLC and Delete PLC Data only)
Displays the project name of the symbolic information in the Title/Project Name column.
It is not displayed for projects without labels or by FXCPU.
Updates the file list on the Online Data Operation screen. For QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU, the writing size, free volume, and used volume are also updated. When multiple personal computers are connected to the programmable controller CPU, update the target memory before reading data from the programmable controller CPU.
15 - 4
15.1 Writing or Reading Data to/from Programmable Controller CPU
Unlocking a remote password
9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
The confirmation message for unlocking the remote password is displayed when the programmable controller CPU for which the remote password is set is accessed via C24 modules or Q seriescompatible E71 modules. Unlock the password by following the message. (Setting a remote password Section 6.4)
When the number of permissible incorrect remote password entries or the cumulative number of
10
permissible incorrect password entries has been set and the number of incorrect entries exceeds the
set number, the programmable controller CPU will be in the status as shown in the following table. For
corrective action, refer to MELSEC-Q/L Serial Communication Module User's Manual (Application).
SEARCH/REPLACE
Item When the number of permissible entries is exceeded When the cumulative number of permissible entries is exceeded
Status The line is disconnected automatically. Turn ON the ERR. LED on the module.
11
When accessing a programmable controller CPU to which remote password is set via RCPU, the remote password cannot be cleared from GX Works2. Delete the password using the MELSOFT product supported by RCPU.
PRINTING
12
SETTING OPTIONS
13
USING LIBRARIES
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
15
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
15 - 5
15 WRITING/READING DATA
Target memory The following table shows the relations between the target memory on the Online Data Operation screen and the drive of the programmable controller CPU.
PLC type
Drive No.
Target memory on the Online Data Operation screen
PLC parameter
QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU
0
Program memory/Device memory
Program memory (Drive 0)
1
Memory card (SRAM)
Memory card (RAM) (Drive 1)
QCPU (Q mode)*1
Memory card (Flash): Q2MEM-2MBF
Memory card (Flash): Q2MEM-4MBF
2
Memory card (ATA)
Memory card (ROM) (Drive 2)
QCPU (Q mode)*2/LCPU
Memory card (SD)
Memory card (SD) (Drive 2)
QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU
3
Standard RAM
4
Standard ROM
Standard RAM (Drive 3) Standard ROM (Drive 4)
*1 : Not supported by Basic model QCPU, Q00UJ, Q00U, Q01U, and High-speed Universal model QCPU. *2 : High-speed Universal model QCPU only.
Memory capacity
� When a project is written to the programmable controller CPU, the target memory capacity may be displayed smaller than the actual file size.
� If the target memory settings differ between "Symbolic Information" and "PLC Data", the memory capacity of the target selected in PLC data is displayed.
Writing multiple programs to programmable controller CPU When more than one program is written to the programmable controller CPU, programs categorized as "No Execution Type" will never be executed on the programmable controller CPU. For saving the memory capacity of the programmable controller CPU, it is recommended to remove them from the target data of the Write to PLC function.
Reading device memory data from programmable controller CPU Device memory data are read in the condition in which "Number of Columns" is set to "Auto" on the device memory editor.
Saving the selection status of the files for the Write to PLC/Read from PLC function The selection status of the files for the Write to PLC/Read from PLC function can be saved. To save the file selection status, select [Tool] [Options] "PLC Read/Write" and set "Operational Setting". However, the file selection status is canceled by any of the following operations.
� Changing the connection destination setting
� Changing the target memory
� Changing the PLC type
� Ending the project
<Option setting>
15 - 6
15.1 Writing or Reading Data to/from Programmable Controller CPU
15.1.1 Setting write/read range of program (program file)
9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
Q CPU L CPU ReFmXote HFeXad FX
Set the range of a program (program file) to be written/read when the program (program file) is selected on the Online Data Operation screen.
10
Screen display
Select the program (program file) and click the
button.
SEARCH/REPLACE
11
PRINTING
12
SETTING OPTIONS
Operating procedure
� Set the items on the screen.
Item Selected Program (Program File) Range Allocate Memory for 'Online Change' (Write to PLC only) Option
Specify Same Step Count for Online Change to All Files (Write to PLC only) Reading Left Capacity at the Same Time (Read from PLC only)
Merge Peripheral Statement/Note (Read from PLC only)
Description Display the program name selected in the 'File list'. Display write/read range of each program.
Enter the number of steps secured for Online program change.
�
Select this to specify the equal number of secured steps for Online program change to all files.
Select this to read the remaining secured steps for Online program change of the files written on the programmable controller CPU. Select this to use an Peripheral statement/note. If a program is read without selecting this item, the Peripheral statement/ note is lost. GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project)
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
USING LIBRARIES
13 14 15
WRITING/READING DATA
Screen button
(Read from PLC only)
Displays the remaining steps for Online program change.
16
PROTECTING DATA
15.1.1 Setting write/read range of program (program file)
15 - 7
15 WRITING/READING DATA
15.1.2 Setting write/read range of device data
Q CPU L CPU ReFmXote HFeXad FX
Set the type and range of device memory and the range of file register to be written/read when any or both of them are selected on the Online Data Operation screen.
Setting type and range of device memory to be written/read
Set the type and range of device memory to be written to/read from a programmable controller CPU. The following tables show devices that can be written/read.
QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU
: Applicable �: Not applicable
Device
Writing
Reading
M, L, B, F, SB, V, S*1, T*2, ST*2, C*2, D, W, SW, FX, FY, FD, Z X, Y, SM, SD, intelligent function module device, link direct device
*1 : Not supported by Basic model QCPU. *2 : Three types of data (contact, coil, and current value) can be written/read.
�
FXCPU
Device M, S, T, C, D, R*1, ER*1 X, Y, D (Special register), M (Special relay) *1 : Supported by FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, and FX3UC only.
: Applicable �: Not applicable
Writing
Reading
�
Screen display
Select the device data and click the
/
button.
<QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU>
Device range list
15 - 8
15.1.2 Setting write/read range of device data
15.1 Writing or Reading Data to/from Programmable Controller CPU
Operating procedure
� Set the items on the screen.
Item
Description
Device Data Name (Read from PLC only)
Enter the data name for data created when the device memory data are read.
Device Selection
�
Internal Device Memory
Select this to write/read device data. For FXCPU, this setting is fixed as selected status.
Input Column
Set the method for specifying the device range to be written/read.
Points + Start
Select this to specify the range with the number of device points and the start device number.
Start + End
Select this to specify the range with the start and end device numbers.
Device range list
Set the device to be written/read and the device range. The default device range is a range set on the <<Device>> tab of PLC parameter. Devices to which 0 point is set cannot be set without selecting the check box.
Link Direct Device*1 (Read from PLC only)
Select this to read the link device of the data link module or the network module to the link direct device.*2, *3 Setting range: Slots 1 to 4
Buffer Memory Head I/O No.*1 (last 1 digit is not required) (Read from PLC only)
Select this to read the intelligent function module buffer memory to the intelligent function module device.*3 Setting range: 0 to 1FF
*1 : Not supported by FXCPU. *2 : For the method to number the module to be set, refer to Point in Section 20.1. *3 : For specifying devices, refer to MELSEC-Q/L Programming Manual (Common Instructions).
PRINTING
SEARCH/REPLACE
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
9 10 11 12
SETTING OPTIONS
Screen button
13
Changes the device range to the default.
USING LIBRARIES
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
15
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
15.1.2 Setting write/read range of device data
15 - 9
15 WRITING/READING DATA
Setting range of file register to be written/read
Set the range of file register to be written to/read from a programmable controller CPU. For Q00JCPU/Q00UJCPU/FXCPU, the range of file register to be written/read cannot be set.
Screen display
Select a file register and click the
/
button.
<QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU>
Operating procedure
� Set the item on the screen.
Item Specified Range
Description
Specify the range of file register to be written/read. If multiple file registers are selected, each file register value is written/read in the same range.
Screen button
For the buttons on the screen, refer to Setting type and range of device memory to be written/ read.
Specifying file registers � For QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU, "Whole Range" cannot be selected.
� For Universal model QCPU/LCPU, specify the range of file register assigned on the <<Device>> tab of PLC parameter when using extended data registers or extended link registers.
15 - 10
15.1.2 Setting write/read range of device data
15.1 Writing or Reading Data to/from Programmable Controller CPU
15.1.3 Setting range of device comment to be written/read
9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
Q CPU L CPU ReFmXote HFeXad FX
Set the device and range of global device comment/local device comment to be written or read when the global device comment/local device comment is selected on the Online Data Operation screen.
Set this setting to limit the writing range of device comments in cases such as when the programmable 10
controller CPU has small free capacity. When the range of device comments is not set, all device comments are written/read. For FXCPU, this function only supports global device comments being written to the programmable controller CPU.
SEARCH/REPLACE
Screen display
Select a global device comment/local device comment and click the
button.
11
PRINTING
12
SETTING OPTIONS
13
USING LIBRARIES
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Item
Description
Device Comment Name
Display the selected device comment name.
Device Range
�
Device Name
Set the device name whose write/read range is to be specified.
Start
Set the start device number.
End
Set the end device number.
Bit Specification Information
�
Bit specification information included*1
Select this to specify whether bit-specified word device comments are included as write target.
Comment Format (PLC Format)
�
Number of characters per 1 comment*2
Set the number of characters for a comment to be written to a programmable controller CPU.
*1 : For Universal model QCPU/LCPU only *2 : Not supported by FXCPU.
WRITING/READING DATA
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
14 15 16
PROTECTING DATA
15.1.3 Setting range of device comment to be written/read
15 - 11
15 WRITING/READING DATA
2. Click the
button.
The screen returns to the Online Data Operation screen.
Message displayed when setting range to be written with FXCPU
By clicking the written are displayed.
button, the number of device comments and the maximum number of comments to be
<When the "Parameter" checkbox is not selected on the Online Data Operation screen.>
<When the "Parameter" checkbox is selected on the Online data Operation screen.>
When the setting of "Number of characters per 1 comment" is changed When the number of characters set for "Number of characters per 1 comment" is less than the number of characters of device comment set for the project, the device comment with less number of characters is written to a programmable controller CPU. Therefore, mismatched data may be detected when verifying project data.
Restrictions
Specifying bit-specified word device comments as write target Device comments cannot be read in GX Developer. When a device comment contains a bit-specified comment of LCPU is read in GX Works2 Version 1.62Q or earlier, the bit-specified comment is deleted. When a device comment contains a bit-specified comment of Universal model QCPU is read in GX Works2 Version 1.31H or earlier, the bit-specified comment is deleted.
15 - 12
15.1.3 Setting range of device comment to be written/read
15.1 Writing or Reading Data to/from Programmable Controller CPU
Device comment unset devices
9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
Data to be written differ depending on the setting range of the device comments to be written as shown below.
Range When range is not set When range is set
Data to be written Data of device comment unset devices are not written. Blank data is written to device comment unset devices within the range to be written.
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
<Device comments in the project>
M0 : Emergency stop M1 : M2 : Operating
Write to PLC (With no range set)
M0 : Emergency stop M2 : Operating
11
PRINTING
Write to PLC (With range set)
12
SETTING OPTIONS
M0 : Emergency stop M1 : (Blank) M2 : Operating
13
USING LIBRARIES
If the device comments read with the Read from PLC function are empty If the read device comments with the following option is set are empty, the device comments of the devices will be unset status.
� [Tool] [Option] "PLC Read/Write" "Merge device comment with the project data at time of PLC read"
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
15
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
15.1.3 Setting range of device comment to be written/read
15 - 13
15 WRITING/READING DATA
15.1.4 Writing/reading intelligent function module data
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
Write the intelligent function module data to a programmable controller CPU or intelligent function module buffer memory/flash ROM. Intelligent function module data includes intelligent function module parameters to be written to a programmable controller CPU as a parameter file, and data whose values are written directly to intelligent function module buffer memory/flash ROM. For details of data to be written as intelligent function module parameters and data to be written to intelligent function module buffer memory/flash ROM, refer to the following manuals. GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Intelligent Function Module) User's Manual to be used
Writing/reading intelligent function module parameters to/from programmable controller CPU
Write intelligent function module parameters to a programmable controller CPU, and read the data from the programmable controller CPU to a project.
Screen display
Select [Online] [Write to PLC] ( )/[Read from PLC] ( ) <<PLC Module>>. The settings for writing/reading data to/from a programmable controller CPU are explained together as they are similar operations. <Write to PLC screen>
File list Memory capacity
Operating procedure
1. Select "Intelligent Function Module (Initial Setting/Auto Refresh)" from the file list.
For the items on the screen, refer to Section 15.1.
15 - 14
15.1.4 Writing/reading intelligent function module data
15.1 Writing or Reading Data to/from Programmable Controller CPU
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
2. Click the
button.
9
In the Write to PLC operation, the intelligent function module parameters are written to the target memory. In the Read from PLC operation, the intelligent function module parameters on the programmable controller CPU are read from the target memory.
Writing/reading data to/from intelligent function module buffer memory/
10
flash ROM
SEARCH/REPLACE
Write the set intelligent function module data to the buffer memory/flash ROM of the intelligent function
module via a programmable controller CPU, and read the intelligent function module data to a project.
Use the operation for changing the data temporarily during debugging.
If a module does not have initial settings for intelligent function module parameters, this function can directly write data such as initial values to the intelligent function module buffer memory/flash ROM.
11
Screen display
PRINTING
Select [Online] [Write to PLC] ( )/[Read from PLC] ( ) <<Intelligent Function Module>>.
The following explains the settings for writing data to a programmable controller CPU.
Settings for reading data from a programmable controller CPU can be made in the same
manner.
12
<Write to PLC screen>
SETTING OPTIONS
13
USING LIBRARIES
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
15
WRITING/READING DATA
The items in
may differ depending on the module.
16
PROTECTING DATA
15.1.4 Writing/reading intelligent function module data
15 - 15
15 WRITING/READING DATA
Operating procedure
1. Select "Valid" for write/read target module and "Target" for each item.
Set details such as a write/read range and write target by clicking the
button of each item.
2. Click the
button.
In the Write to PLC operation, the set data are written to the intelligent function module buffer memory/flash ROM, and in the Read from PLC operation, the data are read from the intelligent function module buffer memory/flash ROM.
Screen button
For the buttons on the screen, refer to Section 15.1.
15 - 16
15.1.4 Writing/reading intelligent function module data
15.1 Writing or Reading Data to/from Programmable Controller CPU
9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
Writing data to programmable controller CPU
When writing the intelligent function module parameters, match the configuration of the intelligent function module on
the project with the configuration in the intelligent function module parameters stored on the programmable controller
CPU.
Data cannot be written to the programmable controller CPU unless the start XY address and the module name for the
write target match. Reading data from programmable controller CPU
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
� When the intelligent function module parameter does not exist on the programmable controller CPU, read the data from the programmable controller CPU after adding the intelligent function module according to the actual module configuration to the Navigation window. For the method for adding the intelligent function module, refer to the following manual. GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Intelligent Function Module)
� The configuration of Intelligent function module on the project side is recreated according to the Intelligent function
module parameter. After that, the setting of the Intelligent function module parameter setting is reflected to the
parameter and automatic refresh settings.
11
Default values are set to the Intelligent function module parameter in which parameters are not set. In this case, after
reading data from a programmable controller CPU, read data from the buffer memory/flash ROM of the mounted
module.
� The following screen is displayed when the actual mounting status is different from the configuration on the module*1
PRINTING
or a specific Intelligent function module*2 is used at reading data from the programmable controller CPU.
When the cell under "Model Name" of intelligent function module parameter is indicated with red, select the module
model. And as for blue, change the module model as necessary. Select the module model by double-clicking the cell
under "Model Name".
12
SETTING OPTIONS
Double-click to select the module model.
13
USING LIBRARIES
*1 : For modules without the initial setting in intelligent function module parameters, the actual module configuration is judged by setting or unsetting the auto refresh. When an actual module exists and the auto refresh is not set for the current project, the cell is highlighted in yellow.
*2 : The specific intelligent modules are listed below. Analog module: Q62DAN, Q64DAN, Q68DAVN, Q68DAIN, Q62DA, Q64DA, Q68DAV, Q68DAI Temperature control module: Q64TCTT, Q64TCTTBW, Q64TCRT, Q64TCRTBW, Q64TCTTN, Q64TCTTBWN, Q64TCRTN, Q64TCRTBWN QD75 positioning module: QD75P1/P2/P4, QD75P1N/P2N/P4N, QD75D1/D2/D4, QD75D1N/D2N/D4N Serial communication/modem interface module: QJ71C24N, QJ71C24N-R2, QJ71C24N-R4, QJ71C24, QJ71C24-R2 For QD75 positioning modules and serial communication/modem interface modules, the screen to select a module is displayed when the auto refresh is set.
Writing data when the QD75 ready signal (X0) is ON (positioning data only) Data cannot be written when the QD75 ready signal (X0) of the target intelligent function module is ON.
When the QD75 ready signal (X0) is OFF, the availability of operation differs according to the option setting*1.
: Applicable �: Not applicable
-
Programmable controller CPU operating status
STOP Other than STOP
"Confirm PC operation status when writing a data"
Selected
Cleared
�
WRITING/READING DATA
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
14 15 16
*1 : Select [Tool] [Options] "Intelligent Function Module" "QD75/LD75 Type Positioning".
PROTECTING DATA
15.1.4 Writing/reading intelligent function module data
15 - 17
15 WRITING/READING DATA
Displaying the confirmation message when writing data to a flash ROM (positioning data only) The confirmation message can be displayed when data are written to a flash ROM by the following setting. Select [Tool] [Options] "Intelligent Function Module" "QD75/LD75 Type Positioning" and select "Display a confirmation message when writing to flash ROM".
Restrictions
Writing data to a flash ROM of serial communication/modem interface module when using Redundant CPU Before writing data, change the operation mode of the Redundant CPU to the separate mode, and set "Not Specified" for "Target System".
15 - 18
15.1.4 Writing/reading intelligent function module data
15.1 Writing or Reading Data to/from Programmable Controller CPU
15.1.5 Symbolic information
9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
Q CPU L CPU ReFmXote HFeXad
*1
FX
*1 : FX3U/FX3UC (version 3.00 or later) only
Symbolic information is data that store the program configuration such as structures and labels.
To restore these data included in the symbolic information when reading a program from the
10
programmable controller CPU, write/read the symbolic information to/from the programmable controller
SEARCH/REPLACE
CPU.
Data such as structures and labels included in the symbolic information cannot be restored if only
sequence programs are read. (In case of a Structured project, the programming language is treated as
Ladder Diagram.)
The following table shows the program data included in the symbolic information.
Project type
Data included in symbolic information
11
Structures
Global labels
PRINTING
Simple project
Local labels
Programs
Function blocks User libraries Structures
12
SETTING OPTIONS
Global labels
Program Setting
Structured project
POU
Tasks
Local labels Programs
13
Function blocks
Functions
USING LIBRARIES
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
15
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
15.1.5 Symbolic information
15 - 19
15 WRITING/READING DATA
Write target of symbolic information Symbolic information can also be written to drives other than the program memory (drive 0). For details of writable drives, refer to the following manual. User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals) of the CPU module to be used
Compile status when the symbolic information is read � When the symbolic information and parameters are read simultaneously, and the data in the symbolic information match with parameters and programs (program files) on the programmable controller CPU, the read data are in compiled status. � When only the symbolic information is read, the read data are in uncompiled status. � When the symbolic information of GX Developer or GX IEC Developer is read, the read data are in uncompiled status. Compile the program again after executing the Read from PLC function.
Considerations for reading symbolic information For the considerations for reading label programs (symbolic information) of the existing application using GX Works2, or reading label programs (symbolic information) of GX Works2 using the existing application, refer to the following section. (Appendix 6.2 "Data compatibility")
FXCPU When a memory cassette to which the symbolic information has been written is used on an FXCPU other than FX3U/ FX3UC version 3.00 or later, the memory cassette can be used, however, the symbolic information cannot be read from the memory cassette. When the symbolic information is written to a memory cassette on an FXCPU other than FX3U/FX3UC version 3.00 or later, the symbolic information may be corrupted.
When always writing the symbolic information By setting the option, the symbolic information is always set to be written when the Write to PLC window is displayed. Select [Tool] [Options] "Symbolic Information" and select "In the Write to PLC window, keep the symbolic information selected status as a write target".
Automatic project save after writing to programmable controller CPU By setting the option, the project can be saved automatically after writing to the programmable controller CPU. Select [Tool] [Options] "Project" "Automatic Save" and select "Save project after writing to PLC".
15 - 20
15.1.5 Symbolic information
15.1 Writing or Reading Data to/from Programmable Controller CPU
High speed mode and Compatible mode
9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
'High speed mode' and 'Compatible mode' are added as modes to write symbolic information to a programmable controller CPU in GX Works2 Version 1.48A. Use 'High speed mode' when using GX Works2 for the first time. For FXCPU, only 'High speed mode' is supported.
'High speed mode' or 'Compatible mode' can be selected by "Setting for Writing Symbolic Information
10
to PLC" under [Tool] [Options] "Symbolic Information". 'High speed mode' is set as a default
setting.
SEARCH/REPLACE
High speed mode
� Higher speed of writing/reading symbolic information compare to 'Compatible mode'.
� Smaller symbolic information data size increases a free space on a programmable controller CPU. 11
� The number of files for the symbolic information is counted as two files. Check the number of files that can be stored on a programmable controller CPU.
PRINTING
<Considerations>
� Symbolic information written to a programmable controller CPU with 'High speed mode' cannot be
read in GX Works2 Version 1.43V or earlier.
12
Compatible mode
� Symbolic information which does not support 'High speed mode', and it is the same as the one in GX Works2 Version 1.43V or earlier.
� Larger symbolic information data size decreases a free space on a programmable controller CPU.
SETTING OPTIONS
13
USING LIBRARIES
'High speed mode' and 'Compatible mode' 'High speed mode' and 'Compatible mode' can be changed any time. Symbolic information on a programmable controller CPU is always the one written most recently. Thus, the management of symbolic information is not complicated.
Symbolic information on programmable controller CPU
Symbolic information written to a programmable controller CPU with 'High speed mode' cannot be displayed on the
screen for Read from PLC in GX Works2 Version 1.43V or earlier.
Write to PLC function when symbolic information is set on the <<Boot File>> tab of PLC parameter.
14
When symbolic information is set on the <<Boot File>> tab of PLC parameter, performing the Write to PLC function with
changing the mode between 'High speed mode' and 'Compatible mode' may cause an improper boot operation.
When the mode is changed, write symbolic information to a programmable controller CPU after performing the
following operation.
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
� Check if symbolic information is set on the <<Boot File>> tab of PLC parameter, click the
button and
update the boot file setting.
� Select symbolic information and parameters on the screen for Write to PLC and write symbolic information to a
programmable controller CPU. Confirm the target memory of symbolic information is the same as that of the transfer
15
destination set on the <<Boot File>> tab of PLC parameter.
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
15.1.5 Symbolic information
15 - 21
15 WRITING/READING DATA
15.1.6 Reading the remaining steps for Online program change
Q CPU L CPU ReFmXote HFeXad FX
When reading data of a project with labels from programmable controller, this option can be selected whether to read the remaining steps for Online program change from the file written to the programmable controller CPU. For a project without labels, refer to the following section. Section 15.1.1 "Setting write/read range of program (program file)"
Screen display
Select symbolic information and click the
button.
Operating procedure
� Select the checkbox of "Read the remaining capacity for Allocate Memory for Online Change".
15 - 22
15.1.6 Reading the remaining steps for Online program change
15.1 Writing or Reading Data to/from Programmable Controller CPU
15.1.7 Specifying target to write device comments to
9
programmable controller CPU
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
Q CPU L CPU ReFmXote HFeXad FX
Specify a target memory to write device comments to a programmable controller CPU.
In order to store device comments to the storage destination which is different from the target memory 10
of the current programmable controller data, select "Set save destination of device comment to the target memory of PLC data" under [Tool] [Options] "Save Destination of Device Comment", and set a target for "Save Destination of Device Comment" in advance.
SEARCH/REPLACE
Screen display
Select device comments (global device comments, local device comments) on the Online Data Operation screen.
11
PRINTING
12
SETTING OPTIONS
USING LIBRARIES
13
Operating procedure
1. The following message is displayed. 14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
WRITING/READING DATA
2. Click the
button.
15
The target set for "Target Memory" is changed to the target specified for "Save Destination of Device Comment" in the option setting.
16
PROTECTING DATA
15.1.7 Specifying target to write device comments to programmable controller CPU
15 - 23
15 WRITING/READING DATA
15.1.8
Considerations for writing/reading data to/from programmable controller CPU
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
The following explains the considerations for writing/reading data to/from the programmable controller CPU.
1) Writing or reading programs with a Peripheral statement/note to or from the programmable controller CPU The information of the lines with Peripheral statement/note is written to the programmable controller CPU, but the content of the statement/note are not written to the programmable controller CPU. If a program with the same name as that of the program set with a Peripheral statement/note is read from the programmable controller CPU, the former overwrites the latter (the one in GX Works2), so the Peripheral statements/notes of the latter is discarded. To keep the Peripheral statement/note in GX Works2 when reading data from the programmable controller CPU, merge the Peripheral statement/note. (Merging statements/notes GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project))
2) An uncompiled program exists when writing data to the programmable controller CPU If the following message is displayed when writing data to the programmable controller CPU, click
the
button and stop writing data. Then, execute [Compile] [Build] again on the
uncompiled program.
3) Writing programs to programmable controller CPU after compiling all programs Compiling all programs changes the device assignment to labels. Therefore, device values set before the program change remain on the device-assigned labels. By setting the following option, device values in the range set with the "Device/Label AutomaticAssign Setting" function can be automatically cleared to 0 after writing programs to the programmable controller CPU.
� [Tool] [Options] "When writing to PLC after a Rebuild All operation, clear the device ranges set in the Device/Label Auto-Assign setting to 0."
Perform the following operations for a precautionary measure when the above option setting is not set.
� For QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU After writing data to the programmable controller CPU, reset the programmable controller CPU, clear all device memories including latches, clear all file registers, and switch the programmable controller CPU to RUN.
� For FXCPU After writing data to the programmable controller CPU, clear device memory using the PLC memory clear function, and switch the programmable controller CPU to RUN.
(Section 20.4)
15 - 24
15.1.8 Considerations for writing/reading data to/from programmable controller CPU
15.1 Writing or Reading Data to/from Programmable Controller CPU
4) Editing programs after writing symbolic information to the programmable controller CPU
9
Edit programs in the same project type as the symbolic information if editing them after writing
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
symbolic information to the programmable controller CPU.
In addition, be sure to write the latest symbolic information to the programmable controller CPU if
writing only execution programs to it using such as Online program change.
If execution programs are read out and edited in GX Works2 projects without labels or GX
Developer and rewritten to the programmable controller CPU, the programs being edited may be inconsistent with the execution programs on the programmable controller CPU when symbolic
10
information is read out using GX Works2.
If inconsistency occurs by the operation mentioned above, check the mismatch parts using the
Verify with PLC function and correct them.
SEARCH/REPLACE
5) Performing the Write to PLC function when symbolic information is not written to the
programmable controller CPU
Program data are not displayed on the screen for Read from PLC in a project with labels. When reading programs in a project with labels, select symbolic information.
11
When symbolic information is not written to the programmable controller CPU, create a new project
without labels, and read the programs.
PRINTING
When reading programs in a project without labels, the read programs are displayed as a ladder
program. However, as there are cases where programs cannot be displayed correctly as a ladder
program, be sure to check the program after the symbolic information has been read from the
programmable controller CPU. The background color of the ladder block in which the program cannot be displayed correctly in a
12
SETTING OPTIONS
program is displayed in yellow.
The program can be edited by deleting the ladder block or adding new ladder block before or after
it, even when the background color is displayed in yellow.
Be sure to write/read the symbolic information to/from the programmable controller CPU in order to
restore the program to its original state.
USING LIBRARIES
6) Writing data after the device range in PLC parameter is changed
13
When the device range of PLC parameter has been changed, write the parameter to the
programmable controller CPU.
Programs cannot be written to the programmable controller CPU unless the parameter is written to
the programmable controller CPU.
7) When the date on the personal computer is February 29
When the date on the personal computer is February 29, the following message is displayed if the Write to PLC, Online program change, or Change TC setting function is performed on a Basic
14
model QCPU function version A.
The file will be written with the date 'February 28' by clicking
button.
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
15
8) Basic model QCPU function version A
WRITING/READING DATA
Basic model QCPU function version A does not support SFC programs, device initial values, and
remote passwords.
For the Write to PLC function, these files cannot be written even though their names are displayed.
For the Read from PLC function, files of SFC programs and device initial values are not displayed
in the file list. Files of remote passwords cannot be read out even though their file names are
displayed.
16
PROTECTING DATA
15.1.8 Considerations for writing/reading data to/from programmable controller CPU
15 - 25
15 WRITING/READING DATA
9) Writing data to a Redundant CPU in the backup mode When a Redundant CPU is operating in the backup mode, the write to PLC function is performed on both systems (control system and standby system). However, in any of the following states, the write to PLC function is performed on the connective system only.
� The target system power is OFF.
� The target system is reset.
� The tracking cable failed.
10) Writing data to a Redundant CPU in the separate mode/debug mode When a Redundant CPU is operating in the separate mode or debug mode, the write to PLC function is only performed on the Redundant CPU which is specified for "Target System" on the Transfer Setup screen.
11) FXCPU
� For projects with labels, data can be read from a programmable controller CPU, and symbolic information can be read from/write to a programmable controller CPU in a project of FX3U/FX3UC version 3.00 or later only. Since these functions cannot be performed on the other FXCPU projects with labels, store the projects in a safe place.
� When a project including a block password to which the execution program protection setting was enabled is written, the execution program cannot be read. To restore the program, write the symbolic information.
� When a program with an Peripheral statement/note is written to the programmable controller CPU, the Peripheral statement/note cannot be written to it. (The information of the lines with Peripheral statement/note also cannot be written to the programmable controller CPU.)
12) Writing data to FXCPU in batch Set the programmable controller CPU to STOP status.
When it is in RUN status, the message shown below is displayed. Select the
button.
13) When the program memory of FXCPU is the EPROM cassette Write programs with the ROM writer. For the EEPROM or flash memory cassette, turn the PROTECT switch OFF first and write programs.
14) Writing/reading ER device with FX3U/FX3UC Writing/reading data cannot be executed with FX3U/FX3UC unless the memory cassette is installed to the programmable controller main unit.
15) Writing data to FX1S version earlier than 2.00 Data of project with labels cannot be written. Use data of project without labels.
15 - 26
15.1.8 Considerations for writing/reading data to/from programmable controller CPU
15.1 Writing or Reading Data to/from Programmable Controller CPU
16) Reading the symbolic information, which has been written to the programmable controller
9
CPU using the Japanese version of GX Works2, using the English version of GX Works2
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
The symbolic information, which has been created and written to the programmable controller CPU
using the Japanese version of GX Works2, cannot be read from the programmable controller CPU
using the English version of GX Works2.
In this case, save again the project created with the Japanese version of GX Works2 using the
English version of GX Works2, and write the symbolic information to the programmable controller CPU.
10
By following the operation described above, the symbolic information can be read from the
programmable controller CPU using the English version of GX Works2.
SEARCH/REPLACE
17) Reading projects created in English version of GX Works2 from programmable controller
CPU
When reading projects created in the English version of GX Works2 Version 1.31H or earlier from
the programmable controller CPU, select "Japanese" for the language selection.
11
18) Reading data from SD memory card
The following are the considerations when reading data from the SD memory card.
PRINTING
� Program files/intelligent function module parameters created on the programmable controller CPU whose series is different from the connected programmable controller CPU cannot be read.
� Parameters/symbolic information on the programmable controller CPU whose type is different
from the connected programmable controller CPU cannot be read. Example) When the program file created on the LCPU is stored on the SD memory card
12
The program file created on the LCPU cannot be read from the SD memory card on
the High-speed Universal model QCPU.
SETTING OPTIONS
19) Changing the number of columns of device memory editor
The number of columns of device memory editor can be changed when opening GX Developer
format project by selecting the following option.
� [Tool] [Options] "Device Memory Editor" "Initial Value of Column Number"
13
When selecting "Always Confirm", the number of device memory editor can be changed at opening
USING LIBRARIES
the Device Memory screen at the first time on the following screen.
When setting "Auto" as a default, or always specify the same number of columns by selecting
"Specify the number of column", set with option or select "Set the selected content in option" in
advance.
If reading device memory whose number of device memory editor has been changed without
changing the number of columns, do not perform PLC read but select [Tool] [Read Device
14
Memory from PLC] (Section 7.4.1)
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
15
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
15.1.8 Considerations for writing/reading data to/from programmable controller CPU
15 - 27
15 WRITING/READING DATA
20) Reading device comments By setting the following option, whether to merge the device comments in the project with giving priority to the read device comments can be set. � [Tool] [Option] "PLC Read/Write" "Merge device comment with the project data at time of PLC read" If the option is not set, the device comment file in the project is deleted and replaced with the read device comment when reading data.
21) Reading a program with a block password to which the execution program protection setting was enabled For High-speed Universal model QCPU, LCPU or FXCPU, reading an execution program only is not available if the project written to the CPU includes a block password to which the execution program protection setting was enabled. To read an execution program, the symbolic information needs to read simultaneously.
15 - 28
15.1.8 Considerations for writing/reading data to/from programmable controller CPU
15.2 Verifying Data on Programmable Controller CPU against Data on Personal Computer
15.2 Verifying Data on Programmable Controller CPU against Data on Personal Computer 9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
This section explains how to verify the open project against the data on the programmable controller
CPU. The verification function is used to compare the content of two projects or to locate program
10
changes.
To verify data between two projects, use the Verify function. (Section 4.2.7)
The following data can be selected as verification targets for the Verify with PLC function.
SEARCH/REPLACE
� Programs
� Parameters
� Intelligent function module parameters (initial setting/auto refresh)*1
11
� Device comments
� Device memory data
PRINTING
� File registers
� QD75/LD75 positioning module*1
*1 : Not supported by FXCPU.
Screen display
12
Select [Online] [Verify with PLC]. <CPU module>
SETTING OPTIONS
13
USING LIBRARIES
File list Memory capacity
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
Comment verify type
14
15
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
15 - 29
15 WRITING/READING DATA
<Intelligent function module>
File list
Operating procedure
1. Select data to verify from the file list.
Item Connection Channel List Target module tab
PLC Module Intelligent Function Module*1
Title*1 File list
Target
Target Memory*1
Comment Verify Type
Memory capacity*1 Writing Size Free Volume Use Volume
*1 : Not supported by FXCPU.
Description
Display the information of the connection destination setting.
Switch the setting target module. Characters on the tab are displayed in blue when data to be verified exist.
Set the settings to verify data with data on the programmable controller CPU.
Set the settings to verify data with data on the intelligent function module. Section 15.1.4
Display the title of the target memory by clicking the
button.
�
Select the data to be verified.
Select "Target Memory" on the row of "PLC Data" displayed in light blue, and
select a target memory to be verified from ( ). For details of the memory card application, refer to the following manuals. QCPU User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection) MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection)
Set a basis either; data being edited or module data, when verifying device comments. (" Comment verify type")
�
Display the total size of written data selected in "Target". Display the free space volume of the target memory.
Display the used space volume of the target memory.
2. Click the
button.
The verification results are displayed on the Verify Result screen. Section 4.2.7 " Checking verification result details"
15 - 30
15.2 Verifying Data on Programmable Controller CPU against Data on Personal Computer
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
Screen button
9
For the buttons on the screen, refer to Section 15.1.
(Not supported by FXCPU)
Opens the screen to select the SFC block to be verified.
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
11
PRINTING
Verifying automatically assigned devices
12
Devices are verified based on the range of device/label automatic-assign setting of the project. When changing the
range of device/label automatic-assign setting after writing to PLC, and then automatically assigned devices of the
SETTING OPTIONS
module are outside the range, the verification result mismatches.
Verification result when CC-Link Configuration window is created When the same profile is not registered to the verify destination and the verify source, the verification result may be a
mismatch.
(Section 4.13) Project security status
13
Projects to which the security is set can be verified when both verify source data and verify destination data are not
read-protected.
USING LIBRARIES
Verifying intelligent function module parameters (initial setting/auto refresh) Among modules without initial setting such as QD75/LD75 positioning modules, serial communication/modem interface modules, and AS-i master modules, only modules in which the auto refresh is set are the verification targets.
Verifying QD75/LD75 positioning modules
One module each for verify source and verify destination can be selected.
The following data can be selected as verification targets.
14
� Parameter
� Servo parameter (For QD75M/MH only)
� Positioning data (Except for positioning comments and M code comments)
� Block start data
Verifying device memory data for FXCPU Special registers (M) and special data registers (D) cannot be selected as verification targets.
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
15
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
15 - 31
15 WRITING/READING DATA
Parameter verification
Verification levels can be selected for verifying parameters. This function is not supported by FXCPU.
Screen display
Select the parameter and click the
button.
The following table shows the setting items for parameter verification.
Item User Setting Area Only All Areas
Description Verify only the parameter area set by the user. Verify all area including the parameter area set by the system.
Mismatched point in system area If a mismatched point is detected in the system area by the "All Areas" verification, either of the following messages is displayed. Take corrective action according to the message.
Message
Corrective action
The header information of the parameter block is inconsistent.
A mismatch exists in area other than the user setting area.*1 Rewrite the parameters having been written to the programmable controller CPU.
Versions of GX Works2, GX Developer, or GX IEC Developer used to create the
project differ between the programmable controller CPU and GX Works2.
This parameter block can't analyze.
The operation of the programmable controller CPU is not affected. To match the "All Areas" verification, install the latest version of GX Works2, read the
parameters from the programmable controller CPU, and write them again to the
programmable controller CPU.
*1 : Data in areas other than the user setting area may be erroneous due to such as noise.
15 - 32
15.2 Verifying Data on Programmable Controller CPU against Data on Personal Computer
Comment verify type
9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
A basis of the range, either 'data being edited' or 'module data', can be set in the Verify with PLC function of device comment. The comment verify type can be set when global device comments or local device comments of both 'data being edited' and 'module data' are selected.
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
The following table shows the items of the comment verify type and their descriptions.
Item Comment Verify Type
GX Works2 Data
PLC Data
Description
�
Verify data with the range of device comments in the project as a basis.
When this item is selected, detail setting of the selected device comments can
be set by clicking the
button. (Section 15.1.3)
Verify data with the range of device comments written to the programmable controller CPU as a basis.
11
PRINTING
Verification result differences of comment verification method
The following shows an example of the Verify with PLC function performed on the following device
comments.
12
SETTING OPTIONS
Device M0 M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6
Device comments in project Global device comment 1 Global device comment 2 Device comment of M2
Project only
Device comments on programmable controller CPU Global device comment 1 Global device comment 2 Global device comment 3 Programmable controller CPU only
Programmable controller CPU only
13
< When "GX Works2 Data" is selected for verification >
USING LIBRARIES
14
< When "PLC Data" is selected for verification >
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
15
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
15 - 33
15 WRITING/READING DATA
15.3 Deleting Programmable Controller CPU Data
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
This section explains how to delete data on the programmable controller CPU such as programs and parameters.
Screen display
Select [Online] [Delete PLC Data].
File list Memory capacity
Operating procedure
1. Select the data to delete from the file list.
For the items on the screen, refer to Section 15.1.
2. Click the
button.
The specified data are deleted.
Screen button
For the buttons on the screen, refer to Section 15.1.
Deleting symbolic information If the symbolic information is deleted, information such as labels cannot be restored.
Deleting programs (program files) only The content of the symbolic information are not updated, even if a program (program file) is deleted. When the symbolic information is read, the deleted program is restored.
15 - 34
15.4 Copying Program Memory Data to ROM
15.4 Copying Program Memory Data to ROM
9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
This section explains how to copy the program memory data on the programmable controller CPU to
a standard ROM on the programmable controller CPU or a Flash card in batch. This function is used to boot up using a standard ROM or a Flash card, or save program memory data
10
in a standard ROM or a Flash card without a battery backup.
Since the program memory of Universal model QCPU and LCPU is a flash ROM, program memory
data can be saved without a battery backup for those CPUs.
SEARCH/REPLACE
Screen display
Select [Online] [Export to ROM Format].
11
PRINTING
12
SETTING OPTIONS
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Target
Item
Description Select the memory in which the program memory data are to be written.
13
2. Click the
button.
The message is displayed.
USING LIBRARIES
3. Click the
button.
14
The program memory data are exported in
ROM format and the data are written to the memory set in "Target".
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
Considerations for writing
All the write target data are deleted. Reading data written in ROM format
15
Use the Read from PLC function to read the data written in ROM format.
Exporting device memory in ROM format The device memory cannot be written using the Export to ROM format function.
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
15 - 35
15 WRITING/READING DATA
15.5 Writing/Reading/Deleting PLC User Data
*1
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX *1 : Not supported by Basic model QCPU, Q00UJ, Q00U, and Q01U.
This section explains how to write/read/delete PLC user data (CSV format file/binary format file) to/ from an ATA card/SD memory card/standard ROM. PLC user data written to an ATA card/SD memory card/standard ROM can be used in sequence programs. For the method for handling the PLC user data in sequence programs, refer to the following manual. MELSEC-Q/L Programming Manual (Common Instructions)
Formatting ATA cards Format the ATA card to be used on the programmable controller CPU by selecting [Online] [PLC Memory Operation] [Format PLC Memory] in GX Works2. If a card is formatted using the function such as Windows� format functions, it may not be used on the programmable controller CPU.
Project file attributes The file attributes (read only, hidden file) set by the application such as Windows� Explorer are ignored.
Memory capacity When PLC user data are written to the programmable controller CPU, the target memory capacity may be displayed smaller than it really is.
Folders in memory card When reading/deleting PLC user data, data such as logging data contained in folders are not displayed in "PLC Side File".
Writing data to an SD memory card When PLC user data is written to an SD memory card, the characters of the file names become upper-case characters.
Screen display
Select [Online] [PLC User Data] [Write]/[Read]/[Delete]. The following explains the settings for writing PLC user data. The settings for reading/deleting PLC user data can be made in the same manner. <Writing PLC User Data>
15 - 36
15.5 Writing/Reading/Deleting PLC User Data
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
Operating procedure
9
1. Use the
button to set the storage source for the PLC user data to be
written.
When reading PLC user data, set the save destination for the PLC user data to be read.
2. Set the items on the screen.
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
Item
Description
Connection Channel List
Display the information of the connection destination setting.
Target Memory Title
Select the memory to which the PLC user data are to be written. For details of the memory card application, refer to the following manuals. QCPU User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection) MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection)
Display the title of the target memory by clicking the button.
11
PRINTING
Local File (Write only)
Select the PLC user data to be written. The maximum file size is 32MB per file.
PLC Side File (Read/Delete only)
Select the PLC user data to be read. Select the PLC user data to be deleted.
3. Click the
button.
12
When writing PLC User Data, the selected PLC user data are written. When reading PLC User Data, the selected PLC user data are read. When deleting PLC User Data, the selected PLC user data are deleted.
SETTING OPTIONS
Screen button
For the explanation of the buttons on the screen, refer to Section 15.1.
13
USING LIBRARIES
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
15
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
15 - 37
15 WRITING/READING DATA
15.6 Transferring Data to Program Memory in Batch
*1
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX *1 : Universal model QCPU only
This section explains how to transfer the content of program cache memory to program memory in batch. Use this function to transfer data at desired timing, for example, when option setting is made so that a program is not transferred to the program memory at Online program change.
Operating procedure
1. Select [Online] [Program Memory Batch Download].
Either of the following screens is displayed according to the programmable controller CPU and its version. <Universal model QCPU with a serial number whose first five digits are '10012' or higher, LCPU>
<Universal model QCPU with a serial number whose first five digits are '10011' or lower>
2. Click the
button.
The content in the program cache memory is transferred to program memory in batch.
15 - 38
15.6 Transferring Data to Program Memory in Batch
9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
Considerations of program memory batch transfer The following functions cannot be executed during program memory batch transfer. Execute these functions only after completing program memory batch transfer.
� Online program change (ladder program, Structured Ladder/FBD program, ST program, function block)*1
� Change TC Setting (when "Write changed program to PLC" is selected)*1
� Write to PLC function (when program memory is the target memory)*1
� Program memory batch transfer (this function)
� Set as default connection
� Change PLC Type function
� Check Parameter
*1 : For Universal model QCPU with a serial number whose first five digits are '12012' or higher, the following message is displayed and the
process of the program memory batch transfer can be canceled. To cancel the transfer, click the
button.
SEARCH/REPLACE
10 11
PRINTING
When the program cache memory and the program memory match The batch transfer of the program memory data is not executed.
12
SETTING OPTIONS
13
USING LIBRARIES
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
15
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
15 - 39
15 WRITING/READING DATA
15.7 Latch Data Backup
*1
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX *1 : Universal model QCPU only
This section explains how to back up data such as device memory, file register, and error history to the standard ROM. The backup content stored using this function is automatically restored to the program memory or other area when the programmable controller CPU is turned from OFF to ON or when it is reset. This function allows the system to create backups of the data such as device data and error history data for those times when the system needs to be shut down for a prolonged time without use of battery. For details of backup target data, refer to the User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals) of the CPU module to be used.
15.7.1 Backing up latch data
Back up device memory/file register/error history data.
Operating procedure
1. Select [Online] [Latch Data Backup] [Backup].
2. Click the
button.
Device memory/file register/error history data are backed up.
Devices The latch data backup function is available for the following devices. M, L, B, F, V, T, ST, C, D, W, Z, ZR, R To back up ZR and R, select "Transfer to Standard ROM at Latch data backup operation" on the <<PLC File>> tab of PLC parameter.
15 - 40
15.7.1 Backing up latch data
15.7 Latch Data Backup
15.7.2 Deleting backup data
9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
Delete the backup data on programmable controller CPU.
Operating procedure
1. Select [Online] [Latch Data Backup] [Delete Backup Data].
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
11
PRINTING
2. Click the
button.
Backup data are deleted.
12
SETTING OPTIONS
Considerations for deleting backup data Backup data cannot be deleted when the programmable controller CPU is in RUN status. To delete the backup data, set the programmable controller CPU to STOP status.
13
USING LIBRARIES
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
15
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
15.7.2 Deleting backup data
15 - 41
15 WRITING/READING DATA
15.8 Backing up/Restoring Data
*1
*2
Q CPU L CPU Remote HFeXad FX
*1: Universal model QCPU (except for Q00UJ, Q00U, Q01U) only *2: Not supported by L02S and L02S-P.
This section explains how to back up data on the programmable controller CPU to a memory card, and restoring it to another programmable controller CPU.
15.8.1 Backing up data to memory card
Back up data on the programmable controller CPU to a memory card.
Screen display
Select [Online] [PLC Module Change] [Create Backup Data]. The following is an example of setting screen when QCPU (Q mode) is selected.
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Item Connection Channel List Status
Setting
Description
Display information of the connection channel being set.
Display the execution status of backup.
Select data to be backed up from "Backup Target Data". "Default Backup Data" settings are fixed as selected status. They cannot be changed.
15 - 42
15.8.1 Backing up data to memory card
15.8 Backing up/Restoring Data
2. Click the
button.
9
Data backup starts. When data backup is completed normally, the image as shown below is displayed in "Status".
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
11 3. Remove the memory card.
Turn the programmable controller CPU from OFF to ON, or reset it.
PRINTING
Screen button
12
Refreshes and displays the execution status of backup when the power is turned OFF or reset.
SETTING OPTIONS
Displays a total size of data selected in "Backup Target Data".
Opens the screen to set options for creating backup data.
13
USING LIBRARIES
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
WRITING/READING DATA
15
Deleting backup data Backup data can be deleted by selecting [Online] [Delete PLC Data]. However, backup data in a Flash card cannot be deleted.
16
PROTECTING DATA
15.8.1 Backing up data to memory card
15 - 43
15 WRITING/READING DATA
15.8.2 Restoring backup data
Restore the registration from backup data for the programmable controller CPU replacement.
Screen display
Select [Online] [PLC Module Change] [Restore]. The following is an example of setting screen when QCPU (Q mode) is selected.
Operating procedure
� Click the
button.
Data restoration starts. When data restoration is completed normally, the image as shown below is displayed in "Status".
15 - 44
15.8.2 Restoring backup data
15.9 Online Program Change
15.9 Online Program Change
9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
This section explains the operations for changing programs or data while the programmable
controller CPU is in RUN (Online program change).
The Online program change operations include Online program change performed during conversion/
compilation and performed from the Write to PLC screen in units of files. Be sure to fully understand the descriptions below and in Section 15.9.4 to Section 15.9.6 for
10
operating with care.
SEARCH/REPLACE
WARNING
When data change, program change, or status control is performed from a personal computer to a running programmable
controller, create an interlock circuit outside the programmable controller to ensure that the whole system always operates
safely.
11
Furthermore, for the online operations performed from a personal computer to a programmable controller CPU, the
corrective actions against a communication error due to such as a cable connection fault should be predetermined as a
system.
PRINTING
SETTING OPTIONS
CAUTION
The online operations performed from a personal computer to a running programmable controller CPU (Program change
12
when a programmable controller CPU is RUN, operating status change such as RUN-STOP switching, and remote control
operation) have to be executed after the manual has been carefully read and the safety has been ensured.
When changing a program while a programmable controller CPU is RUN, it may cause a program corruption in some
operating conditions. Fully understand the precautions described in this section.
13
USING LIBRARIES
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
15
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
15 - 45
15 WRITING/READING DATA
15.9.1
Performing Online program change during conversion/ compile
Q CPU L CPU ReFmXote HFeXad FX
Perform Online program change during conversion/compilation after program change. Before changing a program, check that the program matches the one on the programmable controller CPU using the Verify with PLC function. Online program change cannot be performed if the programs do not match.
Writes data to programmable controller CPU in units of changed ladder blocks.
RUN
Projects without labels
Operating procedure
1. Verify a program against a program on the programmable controller CPU to ensure
that they match.
2. Change or modify the program.
3. Select [Compile] [Online Program Change] to perform Online program change.
The message is displayed. Fully understand the message before performing Online program change.
<When not writing/deleting SFC blocks>
<When writing/deleting SFC blocks>
4. Click the
button.
15 - 46
15.9.1 Performing Online program change during conversion/compile
15.9 Online Program Change
9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
When target memory to write data is booting up When updating the changes to the boot source while "Under booting, reflect changes to boot source during online program change" is selected under [Tool] [Options] "Online Change", and the target memory is booting up, click
the
button on the message shown below.*1
*1 : For Universal model QCPU (except for Q00UJ/Q00U/Q01UCPU) and LCPU only
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
11
PRINTING
12
SETTING OPTIONS
13
USING LIBRARIES
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
15
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
15.9.1 Performing Online program change during conversion/compile
15 - 47
15 WRITING/READING DATA
Projects with labels
Operating procedure
1. Verify a program against a program on the programmable controller CPU to ensure
that they match.
2. Change or modify the program. 3. Select [Compile] [Online Program Change].
The Confirm Build Method for Online Program Change screen is displayed.
4. Select "Execute compile and online change after conversion" and click the
button.
The program is converted and compiled simultaneously, and Online program change is performed. The following message is displayed.
<When not writing/deleting SFC blocks>
<When writing/deleting SFC blocks>
15 - 48
15.9.1 Performing Online program change during conversion/compile
15.9 Online Program Change
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
5. Click the
button.
9
The following message is displayed.
Be sure to read and fully understand the message, and click the
button.
<When not writing/deleting SFC blocks>
<When writing SFC blocks>
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
<When deleting SFC blocks>
11
PRINTING
6. Set the items on the screen.
Item
Description
Online Change
Write Symbolic Information to PLC*1
Select this to write the symbolic information to the programmable controller CPU. Select "Target Memory".
Reflect Changes to Boot Source*2,*3
Select this to apply the change to the boot source while the target memory is booting.
*1 : For FXCPU, this item is supported by FX3U/FX3UC version 3.00 or later only.
*2 : Not supported by FXCPU.
*3 : This item can be selected when "Under booting, reflect changes to boot source during online program change" is selected under [Tool] [Options] "Online Change", and the target memory is booting up. (For Universal model QCPU (except for Q00UJ/Q00U/Q01UCPU) and LCPU only)
7. Click the
button.
Online program change is completed.
USING LIBRARIES
SETTING OPTIONS
12 13 14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
15
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
15.9.1 Performing Online program change during conversion/compile
15 - 49
15 WRITING/READING DATA
Writing range for Online program change
Perform Online program change with the following writing range which depends on the editing mode. When a new ladder block is inserted, the inserted program is written together with two steps (one before and the other after the program) to the programmable controller CPU. Therefore, the Online program change may not be completed at a time depending on the number of program steps added and the two steps before and after the program. In this case, reduce the number of steps written at a time and perform Online program change in several times. The following table shows the number of steps that can be written at once.
CPU type
QCPU (Q mode), LCPU FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC (earlier than V2.00) FX0N, FXU, FX2C, FX1S, FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N, FX2NC, FX3UC (V2.00 or later)
Number of steps that can be written at once
512
256
127
Example)
Newly inserted program
Range of the program written at Online program change (including previous and next steps)
Editing separate ladder blocks
For QCPU (Q mode), when the programmable controller CPU has "Online change area of multiple blocks" in its memory, multiple blocks can be written in units of blocks. For High Performance model QCPU, "Online change area of multiple blocks" can be created using the memory format function. (Section 20.3)
15 - 50
15.9.1 Performing Online program change during conversion/compile
15.9 Online Program Change
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
Editing Structured Ladder/FBD or ST programs
9
Structured Ladder/FBD or ST programs are compiled in program block unit.
Even with a partial program change, the whole program block becomes a write target of Online
program change. For this reason, the number of steps that can be written is exceeded and an error
may occur in Online program change.
When an error occurs, update the program with the Write to PLC function. For QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU, Online program change can be performed in file unit.
10
(Section 15.9.2)
SEARCH/REPLACE
Modified program Compilation target
Task Program block
Program block
Program block
Sequence program Program block
Online program change
Program block
Program block
The number of steps that can be written is exceeded and an error may occur in the online program change function because the whole program block becomes a compilation target even with a partial program change.
11
PRINTING
12
Example) Online program change target after compiling a program with a line change
SETTING OPTIONS
As shown in the following figures, delete the line in the ladder block 1 and change the
labels to M_TEST, and compile the program.
Since the temporary variable (1) used for the line in the ladder block 1 is released and
reused as a temporary variable of the line in the ladder block 2, a change is also applied
to the ladder block 2 to which any changes has not been applied by a user, and the
ladder block 2 becomes the Online program change target.
13
Temporary variable (1)
USING LIBRARIES
Delete the line and change the labels to M_TEST.
Temporary variable (2)
Temporary variable (1)
14
Target of online program change
15
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
15.9.1 Performing Online program change during conversion/compile
15 - 51
15 WRITING/READING DATA
When performing Online program change to a programmable controller CPU for the first time, or an error occurs during Online program change Make sure that the program before writing matches the program on the programmable controller CPU with the Verify with PLC function.
When the program part to be written does not match If the program part to be written does not match with the program on the programmable controller CPU, Online program change cannot be performed. Perform Online program change in units of files. (Section 15.9.2)
When Online program change of multiple blocks cannot be performed The message is displayed in the following cases when Online program change is performed. Select whether to perform Online program change in units of files.
� There are no "Online change area of multiple blocks".
� The number of blocks exceeds the limit of Online program change of multiple blocks.
� The programmable controller CPU does not support the Online program change of multiple blocks.
When performing Online program change to a programmable controller CPU in which the symbolic information has been written Symbolic information, which contain the program configuration data such as structures and labels, are the data necessary only for restoring the data such as structures and labels after reading a program from the programmable controller CPU. (Section 15.1.1) Therefore, the write of symbolic information does not affect the operation of the programmable controller CPU, however, when performing Online program change to a programmable controller CPU in which the symbolic information has been written, be sure to write the execution program together with the symbolic information. Note that since programs (program files) are written in batch along with source information, writing only source information is not applicable. However, it may take a few or more minutes to write symbolic information, therefore, the following action is recommended. When performing Online program change repeatedly, do not write symbolic information every Online program change but perform Online program change in units of files, and perform the Write to PLC operation to write symbolic information after all processes of Online program change are completed. (Section 15.9.2)
Online program change after compiling all programs All programs need to be compiled when the following operations are performed. Therefore the [Online Program Change] function cannot be performed. Write programs to programmable controller CPU after compiling all programs. (Section 15.1, Section 15.9.2)
� Changing the following PLC parameters (QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU only)
� "Common Pointer No." and "Timer Limit Setting" on the <<PLC System>> tab
� "File Register" and "File for Local Device" on the <<PLC File>> tab
� Settings on the <<Device>> tab
� Changing the following option settings
� "Default Length of String Data Type" in "Label Setting Editor"
� Settings in "Compile"
� Changing automatically assigned devices
� Updating instructions and application functions when opening Structured project.
� Changing PLC type
� Changing project type
� Executing the Write to PLC function when a new project is not created, or a project is not opened
Automatic project save after Online program change By setting the option, the project can be saved automatically after Online program change. Select [Tool] [Options] "Project" "Automatic Save" and select "Save project after online change".
Editing separate ladder blocks with FXCPU For FXCPU, ladder blocks between the edited ladder blocks are also written to the programmable controller CPU.
Performing Online program change with FXCPU
� Symbolic information can be written to a programmable controller CPU with the Online program change function for projects of FX3U/FX3UC version 3.00 or later only.
� The Online program change function does not support SFC programs.
� When selecting [Compile] [Online Program Change], Online program change may not be able to be performed if a restriction of the programmable controller CPU is applied to the compilation result. (Section 15.9.6)
15 - 52
15.9.1 Performing Online program change during conversion/compile
15.9 Online Program Change
15.9.2 Performing Online program change in units of files
9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
*1
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
*1 : Not supported by Basic model QCPU.
Write programs or data in units of files while the programmable controller CPU is in RUN.
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
RUN
Writes data to programmable controller CPU in units of files.
11
PRINTING
Operating procedure
� Select [Online] [Write to PLC] for
12
Online program change.
SETTING OPTIONS
The message is displayed. Fully understand the message before performing Online program change. (Writing to programmable controller CPU Section 15.1)
13
USING LIBRARIES
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
15
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
15.9.2 Performing Online program change in units of files
15 - 53
15 WRITING/READING DATA
Data that can be written in units of files with Online program change Data such as sequence programs and device comments can be written with Online program change. The data that can be written with Online program change differs depending on the write target memory. For details, refer to the following manual. � User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals) of the CPU module to be used
Online program change after compiling all programs The Online program change cannot be performed after compiling all programs. When the Online program change function is executed after compiling all programs, the programmable controller CPU is remotely stopped and programs are written to the programmable controller CPU. Compiling all programs changes the device assignment to labels. Therefore, device values set before the program change remain on the device-assigned labels. By setting the following option, device values in the range set with the "Device/Label Automatic-Assign Setting" function can be automatically cleared to 0 after writing programs to the programmable controller CPU. � [Tool] [Options] "When writing to PLC after a Rebuild All operation, clear the device ranges set in the Device/ Label Auto-Assign setting to 0." For not configuring the above setting, as a precautionary measure, after writing programs to the programmable controller CPU, reset the programmable controller CPU, clear all device memories including latches, clear all file registers, then switch the programmable controller CPU to RUN. (Section 20.4) For the considerations for compiling all programs, refer to the following manuals. � GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project)/(Structured Project)
Memory shortage of the programmable controller CPU Increase the free space of the programmable controller CPU with the Memory arrangement function. (Section 20.5) If the capacity is still insufficient after the operation, switch the programmable controller CPU to STOP and delete unnecessary programs in it. Then, write the programs using the Write to PLC function. (Delete PLC Data Section 15.3, Write to PLC Section 15.1)
When performing Online program change to a programmable controller CPU in which the symbolic information has been written Symbolic information, which contains the program configuration data such as structures and labels, is data necessary for restoring the data such as structures and labels after reading a program from the programmable controller CPU. (Section 15.1.1) Therefore, the symbolic information does not affect the operation of the programmable controller CPU, however, write the symbolic information when performing Online program change to a programmable controller CPU to which the symbolic information has been written. However, note that since it may take a few minutes to write symbolic information, it is recommended not to write symbolic information every Online program change but to write symbolic information after all Online program changes are completed.
When performing Online program change to Universal model QCPU The following Online program change cannot be performed. � Online program change performed on a program which does not exist on a programmable controller CPU. � Online program change performed on a program which is not registered on the <<Program>> tab of PLC parameter. � Online program change on an SFC program in unit of file.
15 - 54
15.9.2 Performing Online program change in units of files
15.9 Online Program Change
15.9.3 Online program change starting from pointer
9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
*1
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
*1 : Not supported by Basic model QCPU function version A.
Write data to one file with two or more GX Works2s while the programmable controller CPU is in RUN,
using relative step numbers starting from a pointer.
10
A pointer for Online program change needs to be set in advance.
Example)
A program added with another GX Works2
SEARCH/REPLACE
GX Works2 side
CPU side
11
PRINTING
Add a program
Online program change
Based on relative step numbers starting from the pointer P2, program mismatching does not occur even if there is misalignment of step numbers, and Online program change can be performed successfully.
12
SETTING OPTIONS
Screen display
Select [Tool] [Options] "Online Change".
13
USING LIBRARIES
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
Operating procedure
� Select "Execute online change based on relative step No.".
When Online program change is performed, data are written with relative step numbers starting
from the pointer.
15
WRITING/READING DATA
Ladder blocks including a pointer
When performing Online program change based on relative step numbers starting from the pointer, do not add any line
statements to a ladder block including the pointer.
If Online program change of a program with line statements is performed, program mismatching may occur. In this
case, perform Read from PLC, and executes normal Online program change.
16
PROTECTING DATA
15.9.3 Online program change starting from pointer
15 - 55
15 WRITING/READING DATA
15.9.4
Considerations for Online program change of rise, fall, or SCJ instruction
Q CPU L CPU ReFmXote HFeXad FX
The following explains the considerations for Online program change of programs containing the rise, fall, or SCJ instruction.
QCPU (Q Mode)/LCPU
Fall instruction
The fall instruction may be executed even if the executing condition (ONOFF) in the onlinechanged ladder programs is not satisfied. For the types and functions of the fall instructions, refer to the Programming Manual for each CPU. <Fall instruction examples> PLF, LDF, ANDF, ORF, MEF, FCALLP, EFCALLP, and STMR
ON/OFF status of a contact (conduction state at Online program change)
Fall instruction
OFFOFF
Executed*1
OFFON
Not executed
ONOFF
Executed*1
ONON
Not executed
*1 : For details of disabling the fall instruction execution, refer to the following section. ( Disabling the fall instruction in Online program change for QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU)
Rise instruction
The rise instruction is not executed even if the executing condition (OFFON) in the online-changed ladder programs is satisfied. The rise instruction is executed when the executing condition turns OFFON again. For the types and functions of the rise instructions, refer to the programming manual of each CPU. <Rise instruction examples> PLS, LDP, ANDP, ORP, MEP, and STMR
ON/OFF status of a contact (conduction state at Online program change)
OFFOFF OFFON ONOFF ONON
Rise instruction
Not executed Not executed Not executed Not executed
SCJ instruction
When the executing condition for the SCJ instruction is ON after writing, the instruction jumps to the specified pointer without waiting for one scan.
15 - 56
15.9.4 Considerations for Online program change of rise, fall, or SCJ instruction
15.9 Online Program Change
Disabling the fall instruction in Online program change for QCPU (Q mode)/ 9
LCPU
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
The following explains methods for avoiding the fall instruction execution when the executing condition (ONOFF) of the fall instruction for the online-changed program is not satisfied.
Using the option setting (not supported by Basic model QCPU)
The fall instruction execution can be disabled by selecting [Tool] [Options] "Online Change" and 10
setting "Execute fall instruction". However, the fall instruction is not executed even if the executing condition (ON OFF) is satisfied in the online-changed ladder programs. The fall instruction is executed when the execution condition turns ON OFF again.
SEARCH/REPLACE
For information on the QCPU versions that support this function, refer to the User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals) of the CPU module to be used.
11
Example) The following example shows the difference in the executing status depending on the option setting.
PRINTING
<Program example>
M0
[INC D0]
12
SETTING OPTIONS
INC D0 is executed immediately after Online program change. Online program change execution
INC D0 is not executed immediately after Online program change. Online program change execution
Contact input M0
Contact input M0
Falling pulse
Falling pulse
instruction
instruction
output LDF M0 execution LDF M0 execution output No LDF M0 execution LDF M0 execution
(LDF M0)
(LDF M0)
1 scan
1 scan
"Execute fall instruction" is selected in the [Options]. "Execute fall instruction" is not selected in the [Options].
13
USING LIBRARIES
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
14
Universal model QCPU/LCPU In option setting for Universal model QCPU/LCPU, the item is not selected at default.
Replacing the instruction with the EGF instruction
The fall instruction execution can be disabled with the EGF instruction, which converts the operation
result into a pulse. For details, refer to the following manual.
15
MELSEC-Q/L Programming Manual (Common Instructions)
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
15.9.4 Considerations for Online program change of rise, fall, or SCJ instruction
15 - 57
15 WRITING/READING DATA
FXCPU
Fall instruction When Online program change of ladder programs which include fall instructions (LDF/ANDF/ORF) is completed, the fall instructions are not executed regardless of the ON/OFF status of their target devices. Fall instructions (PLF) are also not executed regardless of the ON/OFF status of their operating condition devices. To execute a fall instruction, turn the status of its target device/operating condition device ON OFF again.
Performing Online program change of a ladder block including fall instructions (LDF/ANDF/ORF)
Target devices are ON
Target devices are OFF
Contacts of the LDF/ANDF/ORF instructions in the ladder block remain OFF.
Performing Online program change of a ladder block including the PLF instruction
Operating condition is ON
Operating condition is OFF
Target devices of the PLF instruction in the ladder block do not operate.*1
*1 : Operate if the operating condition changes ON OFF before/after Online program change.
Rise instruction When Online program change of ladder programs which include rise instructions is completed, the rise instructions are executed if their target devices/operating condition devices are ON.
� Target rise instructions: LDP, ANDP, ORP, and Pulse operation type application instructions (such as MOVP)
Performing Online program change of a ladder block including rise instructions (LDP/ANDP/ORP)
Target devices are ON
Target devices are OFF
Contacts of the LDP/ANDP/ORP instructions in the ladder block turn ON for one scan.
Contacts of the LDP/ANDP/ORP instructions in the ladder block remain OFF.
Performing Online program change of a ladder block including pulse operation type application instructions (such as MOVP)
Operating condition is ON
Operating condition is OFF
The relevant pulse operation type application instruction in the ladder block operates for one scan.
The relevant pulse operation type application instruction in the ladder block does not operate.
Performing Online program change of a ladder block including the PLS instruction
Operating condition is ON
Operating condition is OFF
Target devices of the PLS instruction in the ladder block do not operate.*1
*1 : Operate if the operating condition changes OFF ON before/after Online program change.
15 - 58
15.9.4 Considerations for Online program change of rise, fall, or SCJ instruction
15.9 Online Program Change
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
Operation result falling pulse instruction
9
When Online program change of ladder programs which include operation result falling pulse
instructions (MEF) is completed, the operation result falling pulse instructions are not executed
regardless of the satisfied/not satisfied status of their executing condition.
To execute an operation result falling pulse instruction, turn the operation result up to it once ON, and
then OFF.
Performing Online program change of a ladder block including the MEF instruction
Executing condition is satisfied
Executing condition is not satisfied
The operation result of the MEF instruction is OFF.
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
Operation result rising pulse instruction
When Online program change of ladder programs which include operation result rising pulse
instructions (MEP) is completed, the operation result of the operation result rising pulse instruction is
ON if the operation result up to it is ON.
11
Performing Online program change of a ladder block including the MEP instruction
Operation result up to the MEP instruction is ON
Operation result up to the MEP instruction is OFF
The operation result of the MEP instruction is ON.
The operation result of the MEP instruction is OFF.
PRINTING
15.9.5 Considerations of Online program change of SFC programs 12
SETTING OPTIONS
Q CPU L CPU ReFmXote HFeXad FX
The following explains the considerations of Online program change of SFC programs.
USING LIBRARIES
Online program change for operation outputs/transition conditions
13
Online program change cannot be performed after changing programs of multiple operation outputs/
transition conditions.
After correcting the program, perform Online program change for each unit of operation output or
transition condition.
Online program change of SFC diagrams (For CPU modules which do not support Online
program change of SFC blocks)
14
When a SFC diagram is edited, perform Online program change in unit of file by selecting [Online] [Write to PLC] (Section 15.9.2).
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
Online program change of SFC diagrams (For CPU modules which support Online program change of SFC blocks)
When a SFC diagram is edited, Online program change can be performed in unit of SFC block by
15
selecting [Compile] [Online Program Change].
WRITING/READING DATA
Restrictions
Online program change of SFC blocks
For details of CPU modules which support Online program change of SFC blocks, and restrictions regarding Online
program change of SFC blocks, refer to the following manual.
MELSEC-Q/L/QnA Programming Manual (SFC)
16
PROTECTING DATA
15.9.5 Considerations of Online program change of SFC programs
15 - 59
15 WRITING/READING DATA
15.9.6 Considerations of each programmable controller series
Q CPU L CPU ReFmXote HFeXad FX
The following explains the considerations of Online program change for each programmable controller series.
QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU
Item
Description
Online program change to another station
Online program change to another station can be performed within the accessible range set in the connection destination setting. Take extra caution when performing Online program change to another station.
During boot operation
Online program change on Redundant CPU
� When the online program change function is performed during a boot operation in the backup mode, the function is performed on the program memory and transfer source drive of both systems (connective system and target system).
� When the online program change function is performed during a boot operation in the separate/debug mode, the function is performed on the program memory and transfer source drive of connective system.
� When a memory card (ROM) or standard ROM is used, all files on the transfer source drive are deleted and changed to files on the program memory. Set the setting on the <<Boot File>> tab of PLC parameter to transfer all files on the transfer source drive to the program memory.
Deleting a corresponding device from a program
When an instruction is deleted during the OUT instruction execution, or when the device number has been changed and the corresponding device cannot be found in the program, the output status is retained. Perform Online program change after ensuring that sequence programs containing unnecessary coil outputs are OFF.
While a low-speed execution type program is executed, Online program change starts
after the program execution. The program execution is suspended during Online program
Online program change while a lowspeed execution type program is executed
change. However, if "PRG TIME OVER(5010)" keeps occurring while a low-speed execution type program is executed, Online program change cannot be performed. In this case, set the programmable controller CPU to STOP, and increase the constant
scan time and low-speed program execution time in PLC parameter, then execute Online
program change again.
15 - 60
15.9.6 Considerations of each programmable controller series
Item
15.9 Online Program Change
Description
� When the number of secured steps exceeds the currently set number during Online program change, the following message is displayed. In this case, set a new number of secured steps.
� If '0' is set for the number of secured steps on the following message screen, the area for the exceeding amount from the secured steps is reserved and a sequence program is written.
� The number of secured steps newly set on the following message screen is not displayed on the Program Detail Setting screen of the Write to PLC function.
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
9 10
SEARCH/REPLACE
Allocating memory for Online program change
11
PRINTING
� The message above is not displayed with Basic model QCPU function version A.
� When re-securing the secured steps for Online program change in the backup mode of Redundant CPU, the steps are secured on the basis of the smaller remaining program memory capacity of either control system or standby system.
Example) When the remaining capacity (step) of the control system is 100 steps and that of the standby system is 50 steps The maximum number of re-secured steps for Online program change is 50.
The following message may be displayed during Online program change. Take corrective action by following the message.
12
SETTING OPTIONS
13
USING LIBRARIES
Error during Online program change
If the above error message is displayed, the program in GX Works2 changes back to the uncompiled status. However, the program on the programmable controller CPU may have been changed. In this case, compile the GX Works2 program and verify it against the program on the programmable controller CPU to confirm that these programs match. If the programs do not match, write the program to the programmable controller CPU using the Write to PLC function to match them.
When Online program change is performed to a sequence program for which a password
Online program change of a
is set, the Disable Password screen is displayed. Unlock the password to perform Online
program for which a password is set program change.
Online program change is not possible if a password cannot be unlocked.
When system is configured with Redundant CPU
Backup mode
� Online program change is performed on both systems (connective system and target system). However, if the target system fails (communication cannot be established with the target system), Online program change is not performed on both systems.
� Online program change cannot be performed in units of files to the program file which does not exist on the programmable controller CPU. Perform Online program change in units of files after changing the operation mode of the programmable controller CPU to the separate mode or write data to the programmable controller CPU after switching the programmable controller CPU to STOP.
Separate mode/debug mode
Online program change is only performed on the programmable controller CPU specified for "Target System" on the Transfer Setup screen.
WRITING/READING DATA
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
14 15 16
PROTECTING DATA
15.9.6 Considerations of each programmable controller series
15 - 61
15 WRITING/READING DATA
Item
Description
Online program change to Universal model QCPU
� Universal model QCPU has option setting of "Transfer program cache memory to program memory" that allows selection whether to transfer the data of program cache memory to program memory after Online program change. (For option setting,Section 12.2)
� For Universal model QCPU, when a password is registered/changed while the programmable controller CPU is running, the program memory batch transfer is executed. (Section 15.6)
� While program memory is being transferred in Universal model QCPU after Online program change, the following functions cannot be executed.
� Online program change (ladder program, SFC program, Structured Ladder/FBD program, ST program, function block)*1
� Change TC Setting (when "Write changed program to PLC" is selected)*1
� Write to PLC (when the target memory is program memory)*1 � Program memory batch transfer � Set as default connection � Change PLC Type � Check Parameter
Online program change can be performed when the protection status (enable or disable) for "Execution program protection setting" of a block password is set as follows;
: Performed, �: Not performed
When using LCPU
Programmable controller CPU
enabled disabled
GX Works2
enabled
disabled
�
*1 : For Universal model QCPU with a serial number whose first five digits are '12012' or higher, the process of the program memory batch transfer can be canceled. (Section 15.6)
15 - 62
15.9.6 Considerations of each programmable controller series
15.9 Online Program Change
FXCPU
9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
Item
Description
Programmable controller CPUs that support Online program change
Model name
FX2C/FXU series (Version No. V2.1 or later)
FX0Nseries (Version No.V1.10 or later) and FX1S/FX1N/FX2N/FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC/FX3U/FX1NC/FX2NC/FX3UC series
FX3U/FX3UC series
Built-in RAM or optional FLASH cassette (PROTECT switch OFF)
FX3G series
Built-in EEPROM or optional EEPROM memory cassette (PROTECT switch OFF)
FX3GC series
Built-in EEPROM
FX3S series
Built-in EEPROM or optional EEPROM memory cassette (PROTECT switch OFF)
Memory type
FX2N series
Built-in RAM, optional RAM cassette or optional EEPROM cassette (PROTECT switch OFF)
FX2NC series
Built-in RAM or optional memory board (PROTECT switch OFF)
FX1NC series
Built-in EEPROM
FX1S/FX1N series
Built-in EEPROM or optional memory cassette (PROTECT switch OFF)
FXU/FX2C series
Built-in RAM or optional RAM cassette
FX0N series
Built-in EEPROM
� A modified ladder program must not contain added/deleted/changed P and I labels. � A target range for Online program change must not contain I labels
� If a ladder program before or after modification contains the C235 to C255 high-speed counter output instruction (OUT instruction) and the application instructions (MNET, ANRD, ANWR, RMST, RMWR, BLK, and MCDE), the ladder program cannot be changed.
� When using FX0N, FX1S, FX1N, FXU, FX2N, FX1NC, FX2C or FX2NC
� A new 1ms retentive timer must not be inserted.
� If the number of program steps decrease due to deletion of contacts, coils, application instructions, etc., the number of NOPs equivalent to the number of steps removed are added.
� For the application instruction (EXTR) for FX2N and FX2NC, do not perform Online program change during communication (while the instruction is being activated). Communication may stop if Online program change is performed during communication. If the communication stops, switch the programmable controller CPU from STOP to RUN.
� When using FX1S, FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N or FX2NC
Do not perform Online program change on a function block which contains pulse output instructions (PLSY, PLSR, PWM) or positioning instructions (ZRN, PLSV, DRVI, DRVA) after performing any of the following operations.
� Changing a program of a ladder block which contains instructions described above.
� Changing a program of a ladder block in front or back of a ladder block which contains instructions described above.
� Deleting a ladder block in front/back of a ladder block, or adding a ladder block to front/ back of a ladder block, which contains instructions described above.
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
USING LIBRARIES
SETTING OPTIONS
PRINTING
SEARCH/REPLACE
10 11 12 13 14 15
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
15.9.6 Considerations of each programmable controller series
15 - 63
15 WRITING/READING DATA
Item
� When using FX3S, FX3G, FX3U, FX3GC, or FX3UC
� When using FXU (V3.07 or later) or FX2C*1
� When using FXU (V2.1 to V2.30)
Description
� A modified ladder program must not contain added/deleted/changed P and I labels.
� A target range for Online program change must not contain I labels.
� If a ladder program before or after modification contains the C235 to C255 high-speed counter output instruction (OUT instruction) and the application instructions (SORT2, TBL, RBFM, WBFM), the ladder program cannot be changed.
� A new 1ms retentive timer must not be inserted.
� If the number of program steps decrease due to deletion of contacts, coils, application instructions, etc., the number of NOPs equivalent to the number of steps removed are added.
� Do not perform Online program change for positioning instructions (DSZR, DVIT, ZRN, PLSV, DRVI, DRVA) while the pulse output instruction is being executed. The pulse output stops if the ladder program is online-changed during the pulse output instruction execution. PLSV instruction [without acceleration or deceleration] stops immediately. DSZR, DVIT, ZRN, PLSV [with acceleration and deceleration] DRVI and DRVA instructions stop after decreasing the speed. When these instructions are stopped as a result of Online program change, deactivate the instructions (OFF) and activate them again (ON).
� For the IVMC, IVCK, IVDR, IVRD, IVWR, and IVBWR inverter communication instructions, do not perform Online program change during communication (while the instruction is being activated). Communication may stop if Online program change is performed during inverter communication. If communication stops, switch the programmable controller CPU from STOP to RUN.
� Do not perform Online program change on a function block which contains pulse output instructions (PLSY, PWM, and PLSR).
� The error cannot be detected when performing Online program change even if the ladder program contains the ladder error. After switching the programmable controller CPU from STOP to RUN, the error will be detected.
� A substitute instruction for a new instruction cannot be inserted or replaced in the program.
� Even a substitute instruction is already written in a program, the function is disabled due to Online program change.
� The operations of the CMP, ZCP, MOV, ADD, SUB, MUL, DIV, INC, and DEC instructions can be processed at a high speed when word devices specified by digit or index modification are not set to the data. However, the high-speed processing function is disabled when Online program change or insertion is performed.
� The OFF execution time of the application instructions for FXU (V3.07 or later) and FX2C can be processed at a high speed. However, the high-speed processing function is disabled when Online program change or insertion is performed. The processing time is approximately 60% of that for FXU (V2.30 or earlier).
� The application instructions and element numbers added to FXU (V3.07 or later) are written to the programmable controller CPU program memory. The programmable controller CPU assumes that these instructions are non-processing instructions and continues its operation. However, when the programmable controller CPU operating status is changed from STOP to RUN, a program is checked and, as the result, the 'PROG-E LED' indicator flashes. If this happens, correct application instructions and element numbers not supported and batch-transfer the correct program.
� If an element number specified as an operand of application instructions is not supported by FXU (V2.1 to V2.30), the instruction is written to the programmable controller CPU program memory as it is. In this case, an element number range over operation error occurs. The programmable controller CPU assumes that these instructions are non-processing instructions and continues its operation. However, when the programmable controller CPU operating status is changed from STOP to RUN, a program is checked and, as the result, the "PROG-E LED" indicator flashes. If this happens, batch-transfer the program with the correct operand set to application instructions.
15 - 64
15.9.6 Considerations of each programmable controller series
15.9 Online Program Change
Item
Description
� If a written element number is not supported by FX0N, the message "The changed program contains an instruction or device not supported for Online program change. Online program change operation is disabled for this program" is displayed, and the
� When using FX0N (V1.10 or later) program change is stopped.
� The pulse executing type application instruction is not available for FX0N. If this instruction is written, the message "Write failure" is displayed, and the program change is stopped.
� When using FX0N, FX1S, FX1N, FXU, FX2N, FX3U, FX1NC, FX2C, or FX2NC
� When using FX3UC (earlier than V2.00)
� Ladder program change is possible for one ladder block at a time and the number of program steps after editing (adding/deleting) must be within 127 (including an NOP immediately after the ladder block and excluding the end circuit). To change programs with more than 127 steps, use the Batch-transfer function.
� When using FX3S, FX3G, FX3U, or FX3GC
� When using FX3UC (V2.00 or later)
� Ladder program change of multiple ladder blocks at a time is possible and the changes can be written with Online program change. However, the number of the program steps from the start ladder block to the end circuit after editing must be within 256 steps (including unchanged ladder programs). To change programs with more than 256 steps, use the Batch-transfer function.
� When using FX3U/FX3UC (V3.00 or later)
� Online program change can be performed when the protection status (enable or disable) for the execution program protection setting of a block password is set same as that for the target programmable controller CPU.
*1 : Each deteriorated function can be recovered by switching the programmable controller CPU from STOP to RUN after Online program change.
PRINTING
SEARCH/REPLACE
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
9 10 11 12
SETTING OPTIONS
13
USING LIBRARIES
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
15
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
15.9.6 Considerations of each programmable controller series
15 - 65
15 WRITING/READING DATA
15.10 Calculating Memory Size
Q CPU L CPU ReFmXote HFeXad FX
This section explains how to calculate a memory size required when data in a user-created project is written to the programmable controller CPU.
15.10.1 Offline calculation and Online calculation
There are two ways to calculate the memory size: the offline calculation and the online calculation. (Section 15.10.3) For FXCPU, only the offline calculation is supported. (Section 15.10.4) Offline calculation
Displays the size of available memory if data are written to the programmable controller CPU after its memory is initialized by such as the PLC memory format function. In the system file memory size entry field, enter the system file size acquired by the online calculation. Online calculation Displays the size of available memory if selected files are actually written to the programmable controller CPU. Regarding data written on the programmable controller CPU, the exact size of available memory can be confirmed. This function is available when GX Works2 is capable of communicating with the programmable controller CPU.
15.10.2 Setting target data for memory size calculation (QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU)
Set the target data for memory size calculation.
Screen display
Select [Tool] [Confirm Memory Size].
File list
15 - 66
15.10.1 Offline calculation and Online calculation
15.10 Calculating Memory Size
Operating procedure
9
1. Set the items on the screen.
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
Item
Description
Target Memory/Memory Card Type*1
Set the memory of which the size is to be calculated, and memory card type. For details of the memory card application, refer to the following manuals. QCPU User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection) MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection)
File list
�
Target
Select data of which the size is to be calculated.
*1 : For High-speed Universal model QCPU, when the standard RAM is selected for "Target Memory", "Extended SRAM Cassette Type" is displayed.
SEARCH/REPLACE
10 11
2. Click the
button.
The result of memory size calculation is displayed. (Section 15.10.3)
PRINTING
Screen button
For the buttons on the screen, refer to Section 15.1.
12
SETTING OPTIONS
15.10.3 Confirming result of memory size calculation (QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU)
13
Display the result of memory size calculation. Additionally, the offline calculation and online calculation can be switched each other.
USING LIBRARIES
Screen display
Select [Tool] [Confirm Memory Size]
.
<Offline calculation>
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
Calculation result section
Target section
Sum total section Memory status graph section
System file memory size entry field
WRITING/READING DATA
15 16
PROTECTING DATA
15.10.3 Confirming result of memory size calculation (QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU)
15 - 67
15 WRITING/READING DATA
<Online calculation>
Calculation result section
Target section
Sum total section Memory status graph section
Display contents
Item Target Memory Display Option
<<Offline>>/<<Online>>
Calculation result section Target section
System file memory size entry field (Offline calculation only)
Sum total section Memory status graph section Detail
Description
Display the target memory and IC card type selected on the Confirm Memory Size screen.
Select the unit (Byte/Step/%) used for displaying the file size and memory size.
Switch the result display between the offline calculation and online calculation. The result of the offline calculation is displayed just after the execution of the memory size calculation.
�
Display the size of the data selected on the Confirm Memory Size screen in units of files.
Enter the memory size of system files. The default value is "0" at the offline calculation. Enter the memory size when using system files. When the exact memory size is required, it can be confirmed by the online calculation. The memory size of system files may differ depending on target memory.
Display the calculation result according to conditions of the target memory, IC card type, and files specified in the Confirm Memory Size screen.
Display the calculation result in a circle graph. It is displayed in red when there is no available memory.
Display the detailed information of the result of the memory size calculation.
Screen button
For the buttons on the screen, refer to Section 15.1.
15 - 68
15.10.3 Confirming result of memory size calculation (QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU)
15.10 Calculating Memory Size
9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
File size of symbolic information The symbolic information in a project (with labels) is compressed every compilation. Since date information is added
every time, the memory size may vary even though the symbolic information itself is not changed.
File size units for programmable controller CPUs Memory of a programmable controller CPU is occupied by file size units. Therefore, the required memory size may be
larger than the actual file size. For details of file size units, refer to the following manuals.
10
User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals) of the CPU module to be used
Memory size required for parameters and system files Parameters/system files consist of multiple files.
The memory size required to store parameters/system files is the total of memory areas occupied by each files. The following table shows files included in parameters and system files. However, a sampling trace file and local device are displayed separately.
SEARCH/REPLACE
Target
File
Parameter file
Parameters
Boot file
Remote password
Sampling trace files Sampling trace file
Local devices
Local device
Error history file
System files
User setting system area
PLC user data Graphic data for PX Developer
Parameter PLC parameter, network parameter, and redundant parameter Created when the boot file setting is configured. Created when the remote password setting is configured.
For details of each file, refer to the following manuals. User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals) of the CPU module to be used
An area specified when the programmable controller CPU memory is formatted. (For formatting programmable controller CPU memory, Section 20.3) User-optional data
User-created graphic data
PRINTING
11 12
SETTING OPTIONS
USING LIBRARIES
Used capacity The total size of file which is not selected as a target of memory size calculation among the data written in a
13
programmable controller CPU is displayed as "Use Volume".
The used capacity is displayed at the online calculation.
Example) When only Program SUB1 (2500 byte) is selected as the memory size calculation target when Program
MAIN (4000 byte) and SUB1 have been written to the programmable controller CPU.
<Result of memory size calculation (Online calculation)>
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
Memory capacity The memory capacity may be displayed smaller than it really is.
15
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
15.10.3 Confirming result of memory size calculation (QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU)
15 - 69
15 WRITING/READING DATA
15.10.4 Confirming result of memory size calculation (FXCPU)
Display sizes and capacities of program and symbolic information calculated offline. Displayed values are values when the program and parameters are written to the programmable controller CPU.
Screen display
Select [Tool] [Confirm Memory Size].
Display contents
Item
Description
Status
Display compilation status. "---" is displayed for Simple projects (without labels).
Program Size
Display the number of current program steps. "---" is displayed when the program is uncompiled.
Program Capacity
Display the value set for "Program Capacity" on the <<Memory Capacity>> tab of PLC parameter of the project.
Error Information
Display error information regarding the program size and capacity.
Confirm Symbolic Information*1
Select this to calculate the symbolic information size and capacity.
Memory Type
Select a memory type used on the programmable controller CPU. The symbolic information capacity increases/decreases according to the memory type.
Symbolic Information Size
Display the current symbolic information size in byte unit. "---" is displayed when the program is uncompiled.
Symbolic Information Capacity
Display the symbolic information capacity in byte unit. The symbolic information capacity increases/decreases according to the memory type used on the programmable controller CPU or the memory capacity set in the PLC parameter.
Error Information
Display error information regarding the symbolic information size and capacity.
Device Comment Points*2
Display the number of global device comments to be written.
MaximumComment Points*2
Display the number of comments set to Comments Capacity in <<Memory Capacity>> of PLC parameter.
(Global Device Comment Registered Points)
Display the total number of global device comments being set.
*1 : This item is displayed only for FX3U and FX3UC projects with labels. *2 : For the FX0S or FX0 project, the items are disabled.
15 - 70
15.10.4 Confirming result of memory size calculation (FXCPU)
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
SEARCH/REPLACE
PRINTING
SETTING OPTIONS
15.10 Calculating Memory Size
9
File size of symbolic information For projects with labels, the symbolic information is compressed each time the memory capacity is calculated or data is written to the programmable controller CPU. Since date information is included when the symbolic information is compressed, its memory capacity may change even though the symbolic information has not been changed.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
USING LIBRARIES
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
WRITING/READING DATA
PROTECTING DATA
15.10.4 Confirming result of memory size calculation (FXCPU)
15 - 71
15 WRITING/READING DATA
15.10.5 Considerations of calculating memory size
The following explains the considerations of calculating memory size.
1) Memory size calculation using the offline calculation A memory size of system files may differ depending on the target memory. Confirm a memory size of system files using the online calculation and enter the value in the system file memory size entry field. Without using the value calculated by the online calculation, an accurate result may not be ensured.
2) Limit of the number of files The number of files that can be stored on the programmable controller CPU is limited, however, the memory size calculation ignores the limit. Set target data so that the number of files including those stored on the programmable controller CPU is less or equal to the limit. For the number of files which can be stored on a programmable controller CPU, refer to the following manuals. QCPU User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection) MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection)
3) Specifying a range of file registers At the online calculation, when a range smaller than that of file registers written on the programmable controller CPU is specified for the target data of the memory size calculation, the difference from the written file registers is displayed as "Use Volume".
4) Calculating a memory size of a Flash card/standard ROM For High Performance model QCPU, a memory size of a Flash card/standard ROM can be confirmed only using the offline calculation. For Universal model QCPU, a memory size of a Flash card can be confirmed only using the offline calculation. A memory size of a standard ROM can also be confirmed using the online calculation. To confirm a memory size required when writing data using the export to ROM function, select 'Program Memory' for "Target Memory".
5) When data cannot be written to the programmable controller CPU When data cannot be written to the programmable controller CPU despite enough available memory, perform Arrange PLC Memory to secure consecutive free memory areas. (Arrange PLC Memory Section 20.5)
6) Calculating a memory size of an ATA card For Q2MEM-8/16/32MBA, confirm an accurate drive capacity using the online calculation. Depending on the versions of the Q2MEM-8/16/32MBA and CPU module, the offline calculation may be based on a drive capacity smaller than it really is.
7) Calculating a memory size of an SD memory card The calculation of the memory size of an SD memory card is different between the online calculation and the offline calculation. For the offline calculation, the memory size is calculated based on the size of the SD memory card selected for "Memory Card Type". For the online calculation, the memory size is calculated based on the size of the SD memory card inserted on the programmable controller CPU.
15 - 72
15.10.5 Considerations of calculating memory size
15.11 Writing/Reading Data to/from Memory Cards
15.11 Writing/Reading Data to/from Memory Cards
9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
This section explains the functions for writing/reading data to/from a memory card installed on a
personal computer.
If a memory card cannot be installed to a programmable controller CPU, the data can be written to/
read from the memory card on a personal computer by using this function.
10
For the system configuration and other information to use a memory card on a personal computer, refer to Section 2.4.
SEARCH/REPLACE
For writing/reading data when the memory card is installed to a programmable controller CPU, refer to Section 15.1.
11
PRINTING
Formatting memory cards Format the memory card to be used on the programmable controller CPU by selecting [Online] [PLC Memory Operation] [Format PLC Memory] in GX Works2.
If a memory card is formatted using the function such as Windows� format function it may not be used on the programmable controller CPU.
PLC user data The PLC user data in the memory card installed on a personal computer cannot write/read to/from GX Works2 directly.
12
SETTING OPTIONS
Write/read the data using the application such as Windows� Explorer. For writing/reading the PLC user data in the memory card installed to a programmable controller CPU, refer to Section 15.5.
Reading intelligent function module data To read intelligent function module data, create the intelligent function module data in the project in advance. If the intelligent function module data that match the data in the memory card or the image data do not exist, the data are read as data of an unsupported module.
13
USING LIBRARIES
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
15
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
15 - 73
15 WRITING/READING DATA
15.11.1 Writing/reading data to/from ATA/SRAM/SD memory cards
*1
*2
Q CPU L CPU Remote HFeXad FX
*1: Universal model QCPU (except for Q00UJ, Q00U, Q01U) only *2: Not supported by L02S and L02S-P.
Write/read data in a memory card (ATA card, SRAM card or SD memory card) installed on a personal computer to/from GX Works2.
GX Works2 Write/Read IC Memory Card
Insert to card reader or card slot
MITSUBISHI
MELSEC
Writing/reading data
Screen display
Select [Tool] [IC Memory Card] [Write IC Memory Card]/[Read IC Memory Card]. <Screen for writing IC memory card>
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Item
Description
Drive/Path
Title
Edit Data (Write IC Memory Card only)
IC Memory Data (Read IC Memory Card only)
Click the
button and select a drive on the Browse for Folder screen.
If a folder is selected, it cannot be used on a programmable controller CPU.
Enter title of the target memory when writing data to the IC memory card. Display the title of the target memory when reading data from the IC memory card.
Select data to be written from the data list. Display the data list of the open project. (Section 15.1)
Select data to be read from the data list. Display the data list of the project in the memory card. (Section 15.1)
15 - 74
15.11.1 Writing/reading data to/from ATA/SRAM/SD memory cards
15.11 Writing/Reading Data to/from Memory Cards
2. Click the
button.
9
For the Write IC Memory Card function, the specified data are written to the memory card. For the Read IC Memory Card function, the specified data are read from the memory card.
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
Screen button
SEARCH/REPLACE
Opens the screen to set a password to a specified data when writing data to an IC memory card.
10
The set password is validated after data are written to the IC memory card.
For details of setting a password, refer to the following sections.
For QCPU (Q mode) (except for High-speed Universal model QCPU) Section 16.2.1
For High-speed Universal model QCPU and LCPU Section 16.3.1
< Create/Change Password (Target Project Data) screen (For QCPU (Q mode)) >
11
PRINTING
12
SETTING OPTIONS
Opens the screen to cancel a set password when writing data to an IC memory card.
The set password is canceled after data are written to the IC memory card.
For details of canceling a password, refer to the following sections. For QCPU (Q mode) (except for High-speed Universal model QCPU) Section 16.2.2
13
For High-speed Universal model QCPU and LCPU Section 16.3.2
< Delete Password (Target Project Data) screen (For QCPU (Q mode)) >
USING LIBRARIES
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
15
WRITING/READING DATA
Canceling a password
The password cancellation on the Delete Password screen can only be performed while the project is opened after the
password is set.
To cancel the password after the project is reopened, overwrite the data by writing data to the IC memory card without
setting a password.
16
PROTECTING DATA
15.11.1 Writing/reading data to/from ATA/SRAM/SD memory cards
15 - 75
15 WRITING/READING DATA
Considerations when reading program files with the Read IC Memory Card function
Perform the following operations when reading program files with the Read IC Memory Card function. When parameters are written to the IC memory card along with the program files
Read parameters along with the program files. When parameters are not written to the IC memory card along with the program files
Before reading the program files, open the project at the time of writing data to the IC memory card. Import the parameters used to write data to the IC memory card from the programmable controller CPU.
15 - 76
15.11.1 Writing/reading data to/from ATA/SRAM/SD memory cards
15.11 Writing/Reading Data to/from Memory Cards
15.11.2 Writing/reading data to/from SD memory cards (batch save/ 9
batch load function)
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
*1
Q CPU L CPU Remote HFeXad FX
SEARCH/REPLACE
*1 : Not supported by L02S and L02S-P.
Read project data saved on an SD memory card with the batch save function of programmable
10
controller CPU, or copy all data to a personal computer.
Write project data to an SD memory card in the format which can be used for the batch load function of
programmable controller CPU.
For the batch save/batch load function, refer to the following manual.
MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
Insert to card slot
Insert to card reader or card slot
GX Works2 Write to/Read from IC Memory Card (Edit and Data Copy)
11
PRINTING
Batch save/load function of programmable controller CPU
Writing/reading data
12
SETTING OPTIONS
Screen display
Select [Tool] [IC Memory Card] [Write to IC Memory Card (Edit and Data Copy)]/[Read from
IC Memory Card (Edit and Data Copy)]. <For writing IC memory card (edit and data copy)>
13
USING LIBRARIES
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
15
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
15.11.2 Writing/reading data to/from SD memory cards (batch save/batch load function)
15 - 77
15 WRITING/READING DATA
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Item
Description
Drive
Select a drive to write/read data.
Folder name
A folder in the "SaveLoad" folder on the specified drive is displayed. Select a folder to write/read data.
For the write to IC memory card (edit and data copy) function, enter a title of the folder
Title
selected for "Folder name". For the read from IC memory card (edit and data copy) function, the title of the folder
selected for "Folder name" is displayed.
Edit Data (for Write to IC Memory Card (Edit and Data copy))
Display the data list of the open project. Select data to be written from the data list.
IC Memory Data (for Read from IC Memory Card (Edit and Data Copy))
Display the data list of the project in the memory card. Select data to be read from the data list.
PLC user data save destination �
Save PLC user data
For the write to IC memory card (edit and data copy) function, select this to write PLC user data. For the read from IC memory card (edit and data copy) function, select this to copy PLC user data to a personal computer.]
Source drive/path to write (for Write to IC Memory Card (Edit and Data Copy))
Click the
button and select a drive/path on which PLC user data to be
written on the IC memory card are saved.
Source drive/path to read (for Read from IC Memory Card (Edit and Data Copy))
Click the
button and select a drive/path to save user data.
Target memory (for Write to IC Memory Card (Edit and Data Copy))
Specify a save destination for PLC user data selected for "Source drive/path to write".
2. Click the
button.
For the write to IC memory card (edit and data copy) function, the specified data are written to the memory card. For the read from IC memory card (edit and data copy) function, the specified data are read from the memory card.
Screen button
For the buttons on the screen, refer to Section 15.1 and Section 15.11.1.
Copies all data saved with the batch save function of programmable controller CPU on the IC memory card to the copy destination specified for "Source drive/path to".
Considerations for writing data to SD memory card Data are written after all files in the target folder are deleted.
15 - 78
15.11.2 Writing/reading data to/from SD memory cards (batch save/batch load function)
15.12 Reading Data of Local Devices
15.12 Reading Data of Local Devices
9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
*1
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
*1 : Universal model QCPU (except for Q00UJ) with a serial number whose first five digits are "12012" or higher only
This section explains how to read local device data from the programmable controller CPU and save the data on a personal computer in CSV format.
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
Operating procedure
1. Select [Online] [Local Device Batch Read + Save CSV].
The Local Device Batch Read + Save CSV screen is displayed.
11
PRINTING
12
SETTING OPTIONS
13
USING LIBRARIES
2. Enter a name of the file to be saved.
3. Click the
button.
The data of local devices are saved on the personal computer.
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
15
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
15 - 79
15 WRITING/READING DATA
Formatting CSV files
Saved CSV files are displayed as shown below when they are opened by Excel.
Example) The following tables show the settings of this example. � Setting for programs and file usability
Program name MAIN SUB SUB2
File usability setting Based on PLC file settings Not used Based on PLC file settings
� Setting for local devices
Device name
Device range
M
0 to 49
T
0 to 29
D
100 to 149
Program name File usability setting
<CSV file>
Device names and local device values
Local devices of program MAIN
For T, ST, and C, contacts, coils, and current values are read respectively.
Program name File usability setting
Program name File usability setting
Device names and local device values
Local devices of program SUB
Local devices of program SUB2
15 - 80
9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
16 PROTECTING DATA
10
This chapter explains the function for protecting the project data and the programmable controller CPU data against such as falsification and leak.
SEARCH/REPLACE
11
PRINTING
16.1 Functions to Protect Data
12
16 - 2
SETTING OPTIONS
16.2 Registering/Changing Password (QCPU (Q mode))
16 - 3
16.3 Registering/Changing Password (File Password 32) 16 - 8
16.4 Registering/Changing Keyword (FXCPU)
16 - 14
13
16.5 Locking with Security Key
16 - 18
USING LIBRARIES
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
15
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
16 - 1
16 PROTECTING DATA
16.1 Functions to Protect Data
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
The function to protect data differs according to the target data or target CPU. The following table shows the list of functions for protecting data. For "(Structured)" indicated in the Reference column, refer to the following manual. GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Structured Project)
: Supported �: Not supported
Target data Project data
QCPU (Q mode)
LCPU
*1
�
Target CPU
Remote I/O
module
Communication head module
FXCPU
Function
Security
�
�
� Soft Security Key Management
Reference
Section 4.10 Section 4.11
POU User library
�
�
�
Block Password
�
Change Password
Section 4.12 (Structured)
*2
� Remote Password
Section 6.4
*3
�
�
Programmable
*1
�
controller CPU data
�
�
�
*1
�
�
�
�
Password
�
�
Section 16.2 Section 16.3
�
Keyword
Section 16.4
�
� Soft Security Key Management Section 16.5
*4
*5
�
�
*6
Execution program protection (Block Password)
*1 : For High-speed Universal model QCPU only *2 : Supported by CC IE Field head module only. *3 : Not supported by High-speed Universal model QCPU. *4 : For a module with the serial number whose first 5 digits are "19012" or higher. *5 : For a module with the serial number whose first 5 digits are "18112" or higher. *6 : For FX3U/FX3UC version 3.00 or later only
Section 4.12
Differences of functions
The following table shows the differences of functions for protecting data.
: Applicable �: Not applicable
Function
Item
Security
Soft Security Key
Management
Block Password
Change Password
Remote Password
Password/ Keyword
Protect project data
�
�
�
Protect programmable controller CPU
�
�
�
Protect library data
�
�
�
�
�
Limit users who can disable the protection function
�
Limit personal computers that
can disable the protection
�
�
�
�
�
function
Transfer the security setting to another personal computer
�
�
�
�
�
16 - 2
16.2 Registering/Changing Password (QCPU (Q mode))
16.2 Registering/Changing Password (QCPU (Q mode))
9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
*1
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
*1 : Not supported by High-speed Universal model QCPU.
This section explains how to register a password to protect data in QCPU (Q mode). For registering/changing passwords on High-speed Universal model QCPU, refer to Section 16.3.
10
To register a password, connect GX Works2 to a programmable controller CPU in advance. Project data cannot be protected by using this function. Use the project security function to protect the project data. (Section 4.10)
SEARCH/REPLACE
11
Password management Keep passwords in a secure place. If a registered password is lost, initialize the programmable controller CPU using the PLC memory format function (Section 20.3) and write the project to the programmable controller CPU.
PRINTING
Registering a password
� Set a password with 4 characters. For usable characters, refer to "Explanation of Registration Conditions" on the
Input Password screen. � A password can be set for the following items.
12
SETTING OPTIONS
� Program
� Device comment
� Device initial value
Registering/changing/canceling passwords when writing data to an IC memory card
When the Create/Change Password screen or the Delete Password screen is opened from the IC Memory Card
Operation screen, passwords of data in the project are registered/changed/canceled. Therefore, "Target Memory" is
not displayed.
13
Unlocking password
When files with the same name exist on the different drives (such as program memory and standard RAM), the
password which is unlocked first is applied to the other file.
USING LIBRARIES
� With the same password
When one file is unlocked, the other file with the same name is also unlocked.
� With the different password Enter the password to unlock the file with the same name.
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
15
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
16 - 3
16 PROTECTING DATA
16.2.1 Registering/changing password
Register a password to project data on a programmable controller CPU.
Screen display
Select [Online] [Password/Keyword] [New].
16 - 4
16.2.1 Registering/changing password
16.2 Registering/Changing Password (QCPU (Q mode))
Operating procedure
9
1. Select the target memory.
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
2. Select the target data for registering/changing a password in the data list.
3. Click the
button.
10
The Input Password screen is displayed.
SEARCH/REPLACE
11
PRINTING
4. Set the items on the screen.
Item Registration Condition
Description Select a condition for password check.
12
SETTING OPTIONS
Read/Write Protection Select this to check a password when data are read in addition to "Write Protection".
Write Protection
Select this to check a password when data are written to the programmable controller CPU.
New Password
Enter a new password or a password after change.
Re-enter Password
Enter the new password again for confirmation.
13
5. Click the
button.
The screen returns to the Create/Change Password screen.
Symbol
is appended to the data for which a password is registered.
USING LIBRARIES
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
6. Click the
button.
The password is registered or changed for the data on the programmable controller CPU.
15
WRITING/READING DATA
Registering a password � A password can be set to multiple data by holding down the or key and selecting the data in the data list.
� A password set to data in the transfer source memory of boot operation remains set in the transfer destination memory.
Universal model QCPU
For Universal model QCPU, when a password is registered/changed while the programmable controller CPU is running, the program memory batch transfer is executed. (Section 15.6)
16
Changing a password If a password has been already set for the selected data, the Disable Password screen is displayed. Enter the old password to unlock the password.
PROTECTING DATA
16.2.1 Registering/changing password
16 - 5
16 PROTECTING DATA
16.2.2 Canceling password
Cancel the password set to the data on the programmable controller CPU.
Screen display
Select [Online] [Password/Keyword] [Delete].
Operating procedure
1. Select data whose password is to be canceled in the data list.
2. Click the
button.
The Input Disable Password screen is displayed. This screen is not displayed when the password has already been canceled.
3. Enter the password set to the data.
4. Click the
button.
The screen returns to the Delete Password screen.
5. Click the
button.
The password set to the data on the programmable controller CPU is canceled.
16 - 6
16.2.2 Canceling password
16.2 Registering/Changing Password (QCPU (Q mode))
16.2.3 Unlocking password temporarily
9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
Unlock a password temporarily, set to the data on the programmable controller CPU, by authenticating
it.
When the password is unlocked, the corresponding data on the programmable controller CPU can be
accessed freely until the project is closed. This function does not cancel the password set for the data on the programmable controller CPU.
10
Screen display
Select [Online] [Password/Keyword] [Disable].
SEARCH/REPLACE
11
PRINTING
12
SETTING OPTIONS
Operating procedure
1. Select data whose password is to be temporarily unlocked in the data list.
2. Click the
button.
13
The Input Disable Password screen is displayed.
3. Enter the password set to the data.
USING LIBRARIES
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
4. Click the
button.
The screen returns to the Disable Password screen.
15
5. Click the
button.
The password set to the data on the programmable controller CPU is temporarily unlocked.
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
16.2.3 Unlocking password temporarily
16 - 7
16 PROTECTING DATA
16.3 Registering/Changing Password (File Password 32)
*1
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX *1 : High-speed Universal model QCPU only.
This section explains how to register a password to protect data in High-speed Universal model QCPU/LCPU. To register a password, connect GX Works2 to a programmable controller CPU in advance. Project data cannot be protected by using this function. Use the project security function to protect the project data. (Section 4.10)
Password management Keep passwords in a secure place. If a registered password is lost, initialize the programmable controller CPU using the PLC memory format function (Section 20.3) and write the project to the programmable controller CPU.
Registering a password � Set a password with the number of characters between 4 and 32. For usable characters, refer to "Explanation of Registration Conditions" on the Input Password screen. � A password can be set for the following items. � Symbolic information � Program � PLC parameter, network parameter � Device comment � Device initial value
Registering/changing/canceling passwords when writing data to an IC memory card When the Create/Change Password screen or the Delete Password screen is opened from the IC Memory Card Operation screen, passwords of data in the project are registered/changed/canceled. Therefore, "Target Memory" is not displayed.
Unlocking password When files with the same name exist on the different drives (such as program memory and standard RAM), the password which is unlocked first is applied to the other file. � With the same password When one file is unlocked, the other file with the same name is also unlocked. � With the different password Enter the password to unlock the file with the same name.
16 - 8
16.3 Registering/Changing Password (File Password 32)
16.3.1 Registering/changing password
9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
Register a password to project data on a programmable controller CPU.
Screen display
Select [Online] [Password/Keyword] [New].
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
11
PRINTING
12
SETTING OPTIONS
Operating procedure
1. Select the target memory.
2. Select the target data for registering/changing a password in the data list.
13
3. Click the
button.
The Input Password screen is displayed.
USING LIBRARIES
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
15
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
16.3.1 Registering/changing password
16 - 9
16 PROTECTING DATA
4. Set the items on the screen.
Item
Description
Registration Condition
Select a condition for password check.
Read protection
Select this to check a password when data are read from the programmable controller CPU.
Write protection
Select this to check a password when data are written to the programmable controller CPU.
Read protection/Write protection
Select this to check a password when data are written in addition to "Read protection".
Use the same password for read Select this to use the same password for the read protection and write protection when
protection/write protection
`Read protection/Write protection' is selected in "Registration Condition".
New Password (Read Protection)
Enter a new password or a password after change. The password enables the read protection.
Re-enter Password (Read Protection)
Enter the new password again for confirmation.
New Password (Write Protection)
Enter a new password or a password after change. The password enables the write protection. This item cannot be set when "Use the same password for read protection/write protection" is selected.
Re-enter Password (Write Protection)
Enter the new password again for confirmation. This item cannot be set when "Use the same password for read protection/write protection" is selected.
5. Click the
button.
The screen returns to the Create/Change Password screen.
Symbol
is appended to the data for which a password is registered.
6. Click the
button.
The password is registered or changed for the data on the programmable controller CPU.
Registering a password � A password can be set to multiple data by holding down the or key and selecting the data in the data list.
� A password set to data in the transfer source memory of boot operation remains set in the transfer destination memory.
Changing a password If a password has been already set for the selected data, the Disable Password screen is displayed. Enter the old password to unlock the password.
16 - 10
16.3.1 Registering/changing password
16.3 Registering/Changing Password (File Password 32)
16.3.2 Canceling password
9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
Cancel the password set to the data on the programmable controller CPU.
Screen display
Select [Online] [Password/Keyword] [Delete].
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
11
PRINTING
Operating procedure
1. Select data whose password is to be canceled in the data list.
12
SETTING OPTIONS
2. Click the
button.
The Input Disable Password screen is displayed. This screen is not displayed when the password has already been canceled.
13
USING LIBRARIES
3. Set the items on the screen.
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
Item
Delete Condition
Disable Password (Read Protection) Disable Password (Write Protection)
Description Select the condition for password cancellation when the password registration condition of the data selected is "Read Protection/Write Protection".
Enter the password set to the data.
14
4. Click the
button.
15
The screen returns to the Delete Password screen.
WRITING/READING DATA
5. Click the
button.
The password set to the data on the programmable controller
CPU is canceled.
16
PROTECTING DATA
16.3.2 Canceling password
16 - 11
16 PROTECTING DATA
16.3.3 Unlocking password temporarily
Unlock a password temporarily, set to the data on the programmable controller CPU, by authenticating it. When the password is unlocked, the corresponding data on the programmable controller CPU can be accessed freely until the project is closed. This function does not cancel the password set for the data on the programmable controller CPU.
Screen display
Select [Online] [Password/Keyword] [Disable].
Operating procedure
1. Select data whose password is to be temporarily unlocked in the data list.
2. Click the
button.
The Input Disable Password screen is displayed.
3. Set the items on the screen.
Item
Disable Condition
Disable Password (Read Protection) Disable Password (Write Protection)
Description Select the condition for password unlock when the password registration condition of the data selected is "Read Protection/Write Protection".
Enter the password set to the data.
16 - 12
16.3.3 Unlocking password temporarily
16.3 Registering/Changing Password (File Password 32)
4. Click the
button.
9
The screen returns to the Disable Password screen.
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
5. Click the
button.
The password set to the data on the programmable controller
CPU is temporarily unlocked.
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
11
PRINTING
12
SETTING OPTIONS
13
USING LIBRARIES
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
15
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
16.3.3 Unlocking password temporarily
16 - 13
16 PROTECTING DATA
16.4 Registering/Changing Keyword (FXCPU)
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
This section explains how to register a keyword to protect data in FX series programmable controller CPU. To register a keyword, connect GX Works2 to a programmable controller CPU in advance. Project data cannot be protected using this function. Use the project security function to protect the project data. (Section 4.10) For the FX series versions which support this function, refer to the user's manual of the programmable controller CPU to be used.
Keyword management Do not lose the keywords. If a registered keyword is lost, initialize the programmable controller CPU using the PLC memory clear function (Section 20.4) and write the project to the programmable controller CPU.
16.4.1 Registering/changing keyword
Screen display
Select [Online] [Password/Keyword] [New].
16 - 14
16.4.1 Registering/changing keyword
16.4 Registering/Changing Keyword (FXCPU)
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
Operating procedure
9
1. Select the function. (FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, and FX3UC only)
Select either the terminable limitation or permanent limitation.
Item Keyword Protection Permanent PLC Lock
Description
Set the keyword for the limitation. Limitation can be canceled.
Setting the keyword is unnecessary. Limitation cannot be canceled.
10
SEARCH/REPLACE
2. For "Keyword Protection", set "Keyword Input".
For FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, and FX3UC, select '16 digits' or '8 digits'.
Item
Description
Keyword (8 digits)
Set 8 digits using characters 0-9 and/or A-F. This item can be set when "Keyword Protection" is selected and '8 digits' is selected. The Read/Write Protection is available.
Keyword (16 digits)
Set 16 digits using characters 0-9 and/or A-F. This item can be set when "Keyword Protection" is selected and '16 digits' is selected. This item is supported only by FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, and FX3UC. The protection level can be selected from "Read/Write Protection", "Write Protection", and "All Online Operation Protection".
Customer Keyword*1
Set 16 digits using characters 0-9 and/or A-F. This item can be set when "Keyword (16 digits)" is set and "Customer keyword is used (16 digits)" is selected. This item is supported only by FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, and FX3UC. The protection level is the same as that for "Keyword (16 digits)".
*1 : Set this item combining with "Keyword (16 digits)" as necessary. The customer keyword can be disabled temporarily but it cannot be changed or canceled.
3. Select the protection level.
For the programmable controller CPU other than FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, and FX3UC, "Protection Level" is fixed to 'Read/Write Protection'.
SETTING OPTIONS
PRINTING
11 12 13
USING LIBRARIES
Item Read/Write Protection Write Protection All Online Operation Protection
Description Limit the read, write, and verify operations. Limit the write operation. Limit the read, write, verify, and device monitor operations.
14
4. Click the
button.
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
15
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
16.4.1 Registering/changing keyword
16 - 15
16 PROTECTING DATA
16.4.2 Canceling keyword
Cancel the keyword set to the data on the programmable controller CPU.
Screen display
Select [Online] [Password/Keyword] [Delete].
Operating procedure
1. Enter the keyword being registered.
Enter only the first 8 digits when 'Keyword Protection (8 digits)' is registered. The customer keyword cannot be canceled.
2. Click the
button.
The keyword registered on the programmable controller CPU is canceled.
16 - 16
16.4.2 Canceling keyword
16.4 Registering/Changing Keyword (FXCPU)
16.4.3 Unlocking keyword temporarily
9
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
Unlock a password temporarily, set to the data on the programmable controller CPU, by authenticating
it.
When the keyword is unlocked, the corresponding data on the programmable controller CPU can be
accessed freely until the project is closed. This function does not cancel the keyword set for the data on the programmable controller CPU.
10
Screen display
Select [Online] [Password/Keyword] [Disable].
SEARCH/REPLACE
11
PRINTING
SETTING OPTIONS
12
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Item
Description
Keyword Disable
Select this to unlock the keyword temporarily.
Keyword
Enter the keyword registered to the programmable controller CPU. Enter only the first 8 digits when 'Keyword Protection (8 digits)' is registered. When the customer keyword is registered, the keyword can be disabled by entering the customer keyword.*1
Keyword Protect*1
Select this to get the keyword unlocked status to the locked status.
*1 : FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, and FX3UC only
13
USING LIBRARIES
2. Click the
button.
14
The selected operation (Keyword Disable/Keyword Protect) is executed.
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
15
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
16.4.3 Unlocking keyword temporarily
16 - 17
16 PROTECTING DATA
16.5 Locking with Security Key
*1
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX *1 : High-speed Universal model QCPU only
This section explains how to lock the programmable controller CPU with a security key and limit the access. For creating, importing/exporting, or deleting security keys, refer to Section 4.11.
Screen display
Select [Online] [Soft Security Key Management]
Display contents
Item Key Information Registered in the Personal Computer <<CPU>>
Connection Destination Channel List
Connection Interface
Network No. Station No. PLC Type Security Key Information
Name
Creation Date
Explanation
Description
Display the information of selected security key. (Section 4.11.1)
Display the screen to lock/unlock the programmable controller CPU.
�
Display the interface on the personal computer and the interface on the programmable controller CPU connected to the personal computer. Display the network number of the connection destination. Display the station number of the connection destination. Display the programmable controller type of the connection destination. � Display the name of the security key which is used to lock the programmable controller CPU. Display the date of creation of the security key which is used to lock the programmable controller CPU. Display the information when the cursor is placed on the button on the screen.
16 - 18
16.5 Locking with Security Key
SETTING DEVICE COMMENTS
Operating procedure
9
1. Select the security key to lock the programmable controller CPU from "Key
Information Registered in the Personal Computer".
2. Click the
button.
The programmable controller CPU is locked with the selected security key.
10
Screen button
SEARCH/REPLACE
Acquires the security key information of the programmable controller CPU in the connection destination and displays it.
11
Unlocks the locked programmable controller CPU.
PRINTING
Considerations when locking programmable controller CPU
The programmable controller CPU cannot be locked with the security key when it is in RUN status. Set the
programmable controller CPU to STOP status to lock it with the security key.
12
SETTING OPTIONS
13
USING LIBRARIES
14
SETTING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU CONNECTION DESTINATION
15
WRITING/READING DATA
16
PROTECTING DATA
16 - 19
16 PROTECTING DATA
MEMO
16 - 20
17
MONITORING
17 MONITORING
18
This chapter explains how to monitor the execution status of the programmable controller CPU connected to the personal computer.
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
19
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
17.1 Monitoring Function 17.2 Monitoring Programs 17.3 Batch Monitoring Devices/Buffer Memory 17.4 Monitoring Program List 17.5 Monitoring Interrupt Program List 17.6 Registering and Monitoring Devices 17.7 Monitoring Intelligent Function Modules 17.8 Starting/Stopping Monitoring All Windows 17.9 Using Realtime Monitor Function
20
17 - 2
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
17 - 7
17 - 8
17 - 12
21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
17 - 15
17 - 16
17 - 26
22
17 - 26
17 - 27
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
17 - 1
17 MONITORING
17.1 Monitoring Function
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
This section explains how to monitor programs. The monitoring function is a function used to check operating status of a programmable controller CPU by connecting a personal computer and a programmable controller CPU.
17.1.1 Starting/stopping monitoring
The monitoring function can be started/stopped by any of the following menus.
� [Online] [Monitor] [Start Monitoring (All Windows)]/[Stop Monitoring (All Windows)]
� [Online] [Monitor] [Start Monitoring]/[Stop Monitoring]
� [Online] [Watch] [Start Watching]/[Stop Watching]
The menu to start/stop monitoring differs according to the monitoring type. The following table shows the monitoring type to which the execution is applied by each menu. For (Simple), (Structured), and (Intelligent) indicated in the Reference column, refer to the following manuals respectively:
(Simple) ... GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project) (Structured) ... GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Structured Project) (Intelligent) ... GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Intelligent Function Module)
Monitoring type
Start/Stop monitoring (All
windows)
Menu
Start/stop monitoring*1
Program monitoring
Device/buffer memory batch monitoring
Program list monitoring
�*2
Interrupt program monitoring
�*2
SFC all block batch monitoring
Watch
�
Intelligent function module monitoring
�
*1 : Applied to active windows. *2 : The monitoring can be started/stopped by the buttons on the screen.
: Applicable �: Not applicable
Reference Start/stop watching*1
Section 17.2
�
(Simple)
(Structured)
�
Section 17.3
�
Section 17.4
�
Section 17.5
�
(Simple)
Section 17.6
(Intelligent)
17 - 2
17.1.1 Starting/stopping monitoring
17.1 Monitoring Function
17
MONITORING
Monitor values The values at execution of END instruction are displayed. To display the monitor values of ladder program or SFC program in process, use the Monitor Condition Setting function.
When monitoring multiple projects using a single personal computer
� When monitoring multiple projects using a single personal computer, and if an communication error occurs in one of
the projects, the monitoring speed of the other projects may become slow. The operation will be back to normal when the error message displayed in the project in which the communication
18
error occurred is closed.
� When monitoring multiple projects using a single personal computer, the following functions may not be performed normally.
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
� Program list monitoring
� Interrupt program list monitoring
� Monitoring condition setting
� Monitoring stop condition setting
19
� Scan time measurement
Monitoring devices that cannot be monitored When devices that cannot be monitored are specified in a program monitoring, watch, or device/buffer memory batch monitoring execution, the monitoring result is displayed as "FFFFH(-1)".
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
17.1.1 Starting/stopping monitoring
17 - 3
17 MONITORING
17.1.2 Monitoring status
Monitoring status is displayed on the tool bar during monitoring on the work window. Monitoring status bar is hidden when monitoring all items is stopped.
Screen display
At the start of monitoring
When connected to a programmable controller CPU Items displayed on the screen differ according to the programmable controller type. The following are the examples of the Monitor Status screen for High Performance model QCPU and Redundant CPU.
<High Performance model QCPU>
Scan time status
Local device monitoring target selection field
USER status ERR. status RUN/STOP status
Connection status
<Redundant CPU>
Scan time status
Local device monitoring target selection field
Connection status
System A/system B status Control system/standby system status USER status ERR. status RUN/STOP status
During simulation
Items displayed on the screen differ according to the programmable controller type. The following is the example of the Monitor Status screen for High Performance model QCPU.
<High Performance model QCPU>
Scan time status
Local device monitoring target selection field
USER status ERR. status RUN/STOP status
Connection status
Unsupported instructions
17 - 4
17.1.2 Monitoring status
17.1 Monitoring Function
Display contents
Item Connection status
RUN/STOP status
Description Display the connection status between a programmable controller CPU and personal computer in which the simulation function is started.
When connected to a programmable controller CPU During simulation
Display the programmable controller CPU status operated by the key switch on the programmable controller CPU or the remote operation from GX Works2.
RUN
ERR. status
STOP
*1
STEP-RUN
Display the ERR. LED status of the programmable controller CPU. The PLC Diagnostics screen is displayed when the icon is clicked. PLC diagnostics screen (Section 21.1)
ERR. is OFF.
ERR. is ON.
ERR. is flashing.
USER status*1,*2
Display the USER LED status of the programmable controller CPU. The PLC Diagnostics screen is displayed when the icon is clicked. PLC diagnostics screen (Section 21.1)
USER is OFF.
USER is ON.
Control system/standby system status
USER is flashing. Display the control system/standby system status of Redundant CPU. Control system
Standby system
System A/system B status
Unknown Display the system A/system B status of Redundant CPU. System A
System B
Status of device test with execution condition*1
Execution program status*3 Scan time status Local device monitoring target selection field*1,*2
Unknown
Display the status of the device test with execution condition.
Flash when data on the programmable controller CPU and one being edited are not identical. The registered information on the programmable controller CPU is read out when the monitor is restarted. Return to ON when the both data are identical.
RAM, EPROM, EEPROM (FX3UC : FLROM)
Display the maximum scan time of the monitor target programmable controller CPU. For QCPU (Q mode), the display is given in units of 0.1ms.
Select the name of the program for which local device monitoring is performed. If "Auto setting" is selected, the local devices in the program on the active screen are automatically monitored. Not displayed by Q00UJ.
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
MONITORING
17 18 19 20 21 22 A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
17.1.2 Monitoring status
17 - 5
17 MONITORING
Item Unsupported instructions
Description
Display whether an unsupported instruction exists or not when the simulation function is executed. The Instructions Unsupported by Simulation screen is displayed when the icon is clicked. Checking unsupported instruction/device (Section 18.3)
Unsupported instruction exists.
Unsupported instruction does not exist.
*1 : Not supported by FXCPU. *2 : Not supported by communication head module and remote I/O module. *3 : Not supported by QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU.
Operation of the PLC Memory Clear function during the monitoring of local devices When the "Clear Device's whole Memory" operation is executed during the monitoring of local devices, local devices are cleared in the programs selected in the 'local device monitoring target selection field' on the monitoring status bar.
17 - 6
17.1.2 Monitoring status
17.2 Monitoring Programs
17.2 Monitoring Programs
17
MONITORING
Q CPU L CPU ReFmXote HFeXad FX
This section explains how to monitor the execution status of the programmable controller CPU.
The monitored items differ according to the programming language used. For details, refer to the following manuals.
18
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project)
GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Structured Project)
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
Screen display
Select [Online] [Monitor] [Start Monitoring] ( ).
19
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
Monitor other programs during monitoring
By selecting the following option, the monitor can be started automatically when opening the other program editors
while displaying the monitoring status. However, unconverted or uncompiled programs cannot be started monitoring.
[Tool] [Option] "Monitor" "Common" "Start monitoring if converted or compiled program is opened during
monitoring"
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
17 - 7
17 MONITORING
17.3 Batch Monitoring Devices/Buffer Memory
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
This section explains how to monitor devices/buffer memory in batch. For device batch monitoring, specify the target devices. For buffer memory batch monitoring, specify the address of the intelligent function module.
Screen display
Select [Online] [Monitor] [Device/Buffer Memory Batch] ( ).
Decimal/Hexadecimal selection Device comment display
Operating procedure
� Set the items on the screen.
Item
Description
Device
Select this to monitor devices in batch.
Device Name
Select this to enter the name of a device to be monitored in batch.
T/C Set Value Reference Program*1
Specify the program whose setting value is to be displayed when monitoring timer (T) or counter (C) in batch.
Buffer Memory
Select this to monitor buffer memory in batch.
Module Start
Enter the start I/O number of the intelligent function module in hexadecimal number.
� For FXCPU Enter the block number of the special extension device. (0 to 7) FX0N-3A, FX2N-2AD and FX2N-2DA cannot be the target of the buffer memory monitor.
� For Multiple CPU system configuration Specify the programmable controller CPU to be monitored. CPU No. 1: 3E00, CPU No. 2: 3E10, CPU No. 3: 3E20, CPU No. 4: 3E30
Address
Enter the address of buffer memory to be monitored in decimal or hexadecimal.
Decimal/Hexadecimal selection
Select the address input format (decimal or hexadecimal).
Display format
Switch the display format of the monitoring values. Save and read batch monitor display format files.
Device comment display
Select whether to display device comments. When displaying device comments, device comments referred in the selected program are displayed.
*1 : Not supported by communication head module and remote I/O module.
17 - 8
17.3 Batch Monitoring Devices/Buffer Memory
Screen button
17
(Not supported by remote I/O module)
Displays the T/C Set Value Reference Program screen.
MONITORING
18
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
19
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
Operation
� Set the items on the screen.
Item Program Reference Selection/POU Reference Selection
Project User Library
Program/POU_Pool
Description
Set the reference of POU. In Simple project, selection is fixed at "Project".
Select this to reference a program in the project.
Select this to reference a POU in the user library by clicking .
Select the POU to be referenced. Projects selected by "POU Reference Selection" or POU in "User Library" is displayed. Items to be displayed are as shown below.
Simple project Structured project
: Program file : POU
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
20 21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
Displays the Modify Value screen. (Section 19.1)
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
17 - 9
17 MONITORING
Displays the Display Format screen. Set the monitor display format. The screen displays the settings as an example. Setting is possible while confirming the display.
Operation
� Set the items on the screen.
Item Monitor Format
Bit
Select the monitor format.
Description
Select this to monitor bits in unit of one point.
Bit and Word Bit Multi-point Word Multi-point Display 16bit Integer
Select this to monitor both bits and words in unit of one point. Select this to monitor bits in unit of multiple points. Select this to monitor words in unit of multiple points. Select the data type of the value stored in word device/buffer memory when "Bit and Word" or "Word Multi-point" is selected for "Monitor Format". Select this to monitor in 16-bit integer.
32bit Integer
Select this to monitor in 32-bit double word (signed) integer.
Real Number (32Bit)
Select this to monitor in 32-bit (single-precision real number).
Real Number (64Bit)
Select this to monitor in 64-bit (double-precision real number).
ASCII Value
DEC
Select this to monitor in character string. Select either decimal or hexadecimal display format for 16-bit or 32-bit integer. Select this to monitor in decimal number.
HEX
Select this to monitor in hexadecimal number.
Bit Order
Select the alignment sequence of bits to be monitored when "Bit and Word" or "Bit Multi-point" is selected for "Bit".
0-F
Select this to monitor bit information from the left to the right on the screen. This method is appropriate for monitoring bit devices.
F-0
Select this to monitor bit information from the right to the left on the screen. This method is appropriate for monitoring word devices or buffer memory.
Switch No. of Points*1
Select the number of points to be monitored per row.
16 Points (8 Points)
Select this to monitor 8 points of word device or 16 points of bit device per row.
10 Points (10 Points)
Select this to monitor 10 points per row.
*1 : For FXCPU, the display can be switched between 8 points and 16 points when an X/Y device is selected.
17 - 10
MONITORING
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
17.3 Batch Monitoring Devices/Buffer Memory
17
Utilizes the saved display formats.
Saves the current display format in the file.
18
Opening multiple Device/Buffer Memory Batch Monitor screens The maximum number of Device/Buffer Memory Batch Monitor screens that can be opened is 64. A screen number is appended at the end of the screen title.
19
Monitoring time when multiple Device/Buffer Memory Batch Monitor screens are opened When the multiple Device/Buffer Memory Batch Monitor screens are opened, lead time to start monitoring and monitoring intervals may become longer.
Accessing multiple CPU shared memory Multiple CPU shared memory of multiple CPU system can be monitored only by the Device/Buffer Memory Batch Monitor function.
20
Restrictions
FXCPU that support the buffer memory batch monitor function FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N, FX2NC, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, and FX3UC support the buffer memory batch monitor function.
21
22
A
I
17 - 11
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
APPENDIX
INDEX
17 MONITORING
17.4 Monitoring Program List
Q CPU L CPU ReFmXote HFeXad FX
This section explains how to monitor the processing time of programs being executed.
Screen display
Select [Online] [Monitor] [Program List].
Display contents
Item Entire Scan Time
Monitoring Time Total Scan Time Detail of Scan Time for Scan Execution
Execution Status of Programs Program Execution Scan Time
Execution Count
Description
Display the time set in the WDT setting of PLC RAS setting of PLC parameter.
Display each monitoring time of the scan program, initial program, and low-speed program. When the scan time exceeds these time, a programmable controller CPU error occurs.
Display the total time of each item of "Detail of Scan Time for Scan Execution".
Display the processing time of each item. "Constant Wait" displays the waiting time of the constant scan when the constant scan is set. When the low-speed program execution time is also set, however, it displays '0.000' ms.
Display the execution status of programs specified in the program setting of PLC parameter.
Display the program names in the input order in PLC parameter.
Display the execution type of the programs specified in PLC parameter.
Display the actual scan time (current value). Display '0.000' ms in the program stop (standby) status.
Display the number of executions, counted from 0 at the point of turning the programmable controller CPU to the RUN status. After reaching 65536, it returns to 0. It is stored even after the program stops.
Screen button
Displays the Start Program screen. ( Starting programs)
Displays the Stop Program screen. ( Stopping programs)
17 - 12
MONITORING
17.4 Monitoring Program List
17
Program list monitor In a simulation, only "Execution Count" in "Execution Status of Programs" is monitored.
Starting programs
18
Screen display
Select Program List screen
19
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
Operating procedure
20
1. Set the items on the screen.
Item Program Name Start Mode
Scan execution Low speed execution
Fixed scan execution
Description
Select the name of a program to be started from . Select the execution type. Set the execution type to the scan execution. Set the execution type to the low-speed execution. Set the execution type to the fixed scan execution. The time input area in "Fixed scan execution" displays the value set in "Fixed Scan Interval" on the <<Program>> tab of PLC parameter. Change it as necessary.
21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
2. Click the
button.
22
The selected program is started.
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
Starting programs
A program can be started when using one of the following programmable controller CPUs.
High Performance model QCPU
Process CPU
A
Redundant CPU
High-speed Universal model QCPU*1
*1 : A CPU module whose function version is B and first 5 digits of the serial No. are "18112" or higher.
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
17 - 13
17 MONITORING
Stopping programs Screen display
Select Program List screen
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Item Program Name Stop Mode
Stop output after stop
Hold output after stop
Description
Select the name of a program to be stopped from .
Select the stop mode.
� For the scan execution type program, turn outputs OFF (Non-execution processing) at the next scan. The program is set as the standby status after the subsequent scan. (The same behavior as the POFF instruction)
� For the low-speed execution type program, stop its execution, and turn outputs OFF at the next scan. The program is set as the standby status after the subsequent scan.
Place the scan execution type program in the standby status, and store the output of the OUT instruction.
2. Click the
button.
The selected program turns in the stopped status.
Stopping programs
� A program can be started when using one of the following programmable controller CPUs. High Performance model QCPU Process CPU Redundant CPU High-speed Universal model QCPU*1
*1 : A CPU module whose function version is B and first 5 digits of the serial No. are "18112" or higher.
� When "Stop output after stop" is selected, outputs may not turn OFF depending on instructions. For details, refer to the section explains the POFF instruction in the following manuals. MELSEC-Q/L Programming Manual (Common Instructions) MELSEC-Q/L Structured Programming Manual (Common Instructions)
17 - 14
17.5 Monitoring Interrupt Program List
17.5 Monitoring Interrupt Program List
17
MONITORING
Q CPU L CPU ReFmXote HFeXad FX
This section explains how to display the number of executions of interrupt programs used in a
program.
18
Screen display
Select [Online] [Monitor] [Interrupt Program List].
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
19
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
Interrupt pointer monitor list
20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
Operating procedure
� Input the interrupt pointer number whose execution counts are to be displayed in
"Interrupt Pointer".
Display contents
21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
Item Interrupt pointer monitor list
Interrupt Pointer
Execution Count
Comment
Description � Display the interrupt pointer entered in "Interrupt Pointer" on the top. Start counting when the programmable controller CPU turns to the RUN status and display the execution counts. When reaching 65536, returns to 0. Display the device comment.
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
17 - 15
17 MONITORING
17.6 Registering and Monitoring Devices
This section explains how to monitor devices.
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
17.6.1 Registering and monitoring devices
Register multiple devices/labels in single screen and monitor them simultaneously.
Screen display
Select [View] [Docking Window] [Watch 1] to [Watch 4].
Display contents
Item
Description
Device/Label
Display the device/label name.
Current Value
Display the current value of the device/label. The display format (decimal/hexadecimal) of the current value can be switched. (Section 17.6.3) The display format (number display (1/0)/ ON/OFF display/ symbol display (/)) of the current value of bit device can be switched.
Binary Value
Display the current value of the device/label in binary.
Octal Value
Display the current value of the device/label in octal.
Decimal Value
Display the current value of the device/label in decimal.
Hexadecimal Value
Display the current value of the device/label in hexadecimal.
Float Value
Display the current value of the device/label in real number.
String Value
Display the current value of the device/label in character string.
Time Value
Display the current value of the device/label in time.
Data Type
Display the data type of the device/label.
Class
Display the class of the label. Nothing is displayed for the devices.
Device
Display the device, or device assigned to the label. For the labels with the class of VAR_CONSTANT or VAR_GLOBAL_CONSTANT, the initial value set on the label editor is displayed.
Address*1
Display the address of the device/label.
Comment
Display the comments of the device/label. For devices, global device comments are displayed.*2
Forced I/O Status
Display the forced ON/OFF status of the X/Y devices registered on the Forced Input Output Registration/Cancellation screen. For the X/Y devices which are not registered to the Forced Input Output Registration screen or other than X/Y devices, "--" is displayed
*1 : For Structured projects only *2 : Not displayed for Basic model QCPU because global device comment is not supported.
17 - 16
17.6.1 Registering and monitoring devices
17.6 Registering and Monitoring Devices
Operating procedure
17
1. Select a row to be edited, and then click its "Device/Label" column.
The cell becomes the editing status.
MONITORING
18
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
2. Enter a device/label to be registered.
For local labels, enter as 'program (program block) name/label name'. Example) POU_01/counter
19
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
20
3. Press the key.
The entered device/label is registered. When the device/label is registered, its relevant information such as data type and class is registered automatically.
21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
4. Select [Online] [Monitor] [Start Watching].
22
The current value of the registered device/label is displayed.
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
Registered devices/labels on Watch windows
Once devices/labels are registered and the project is saved, registered devices/labels are displayed in registered status
when the project is opened again. Deleting registered devices/labels
A
A device/label can be deleted by right-clicking the specified cell and selecting [Delete] from the shortcut menu or
pressing the key.
Sorting items on Watch window Items in the columns can be sorted in the ascending/descending order by clicking each column header. To sort the items by the "Current Value" column, display all registered devices. When the items are sorted without displaying the registered devices, scroll the screen.
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
17.6.1 Registering and monitoring devices
17 - 17
17 MONITORING Changing order of columns
Change the order of the columns by dragging and dropping a header except for "Device/Label" column.
Displaying/hiding columns
Display/hide the columns by right-clicking a header on the Watch window and select/clear the items to be displayed/hidden. The column of the selected item is inserted where the mouse is right-clicked. When the column header of "Device/Label" is right-clicked, the column of the selected item is inserted on the right side.
17 - 18
17.6.1 Registering and monitoring devices
17.6 Registering and Monitoring Devices
17.6.2 Registering devices
17
MONITORING
Register devices to the Watch window.
Registering devices/labels from program editor/label editor using shortcut
menu
18
Register devices/labels from the program editor/label editor using a shortcut menu. Multiple devices/labels can be registered in batch by selecting a range.
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
Operation
1. Select devices/labels to be registered to the Watch window. 2. Right-click and select [Register to Watch] from the shortcut menu.
19
The devices/labels are registered to the Watch window.
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
Registering devices/labels from the label editor When registering devices/labels to the Watch window from the label editor, right-click a target row and select [Register to Watch] from the shortcut menu.
Registering device/labels with shortcut menu
With the shortcut menu, devices/labels are registered to the foreground Watch window.
When two or more Watch windows are displayed in the foreground, devices/labels are registered to the Watch window
with the younger Watch window number.
22
When the Watch window is not displayed, the Watch window 1 is opened and devices/labels are registered to it.
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
17.6.2 Registering devices
17 - 19
17 MONITORING
Registering devices/labels from program editor/label editor with drag-anddrop operation
Register devices/labels from the program editor/label editor with the drag-and-drop operation. Multiple devices/labels can be registered in batch by selecting a range.
Operation
� Select devices/labels to be registered to the Watch window, and drag and drop them on to
the Watch window.
Drag and drop
Drag-and-drop operation of devices/labels to Watch window The drag-and-drop operation of devices/labels to the Watch window can be performed only from the program editor or the label editor.
Drag-and-drop operation of devices/labels from ladder editor
The drag-and-drop operation of devices/labels can be performed when the cursor is changed to the border of the selected range.
as it is moved to
17 - 20
17.6.2 Registering devices
17.6 Registering and Monitoring Devices
Registering devices/labels at cursor position automatically
17
Register devices/labels in the ladder block at the cursor position to the Watch window automatically by
MONITORING
setting the option.
When this option is set, "(Ladder/SFC Automatic Registration)" is displayed on the title bar of Watch
window.
The automatic registration to the Watch window can be executed when the program is written in Ladder Diagram or Sequential Function Chart.
18
Operation
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
1. Specify the automatic registration destination for "Setting for Automatic Registration to
Watch Window" under [Tool] [Options] "Monitor" "Ladder/SFC".
2. Open the Watch window which is specified as an automatic registration destination. 3. Select [Online] [Watch] [Start Watching].
19
4. Move the cursor to the ladder block which is to be registered to the Watch window.
Devices/labels in the ladder block at the cursor position are displayed on the Watch window which is specified as an automatic registration destination. The displayed devices/labels are overwritten with the devices/labels in the ladder block to which the cursor is moved.
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
17.6.2 Registering devices
17 - 21
17 MONITORING
Inserting next devices/labels
Insert a row of the next device/label right after the row of the selected device/label. When a device is selected, the device whose device number is incremented is inserted. When a label is selected, the label registered in the next row on the label editor is inserted.
Operating procedure
1. Select a device/label on the Watch window.
2. Right-click and select [Insert Next Object] from the shortcut menu.
Or press the + keys. The next device/label is inserted.
17 - 22
17.6.2 Registering devices
17.6 Registering and Monitoring Devices
17.6.3 Changing display format (decimal/hexadecimal) of current
17
values
MONITORING
Change the display format (decimal/hexadecimal) of the current values.
Operating procedure
18
� Right-click on the Watch window, and select [Change Value Format (Decimal)]/
[Change Value Format (Hexadecimal)] from the shortcut menu.
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
Switch to the hexadecimal display
19
Switch to the decimal display
20
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
17.6.3 Changing display format (decimal/hexadecimal) of current values
17 - 23
17 MONITORING
Changing current values The current value can be changed by entering a value directly in the "Current Value" column during monitoring. For bit devices, select a row and press the and keys or press the key and double-click the row to change the current value.
To prevent from pressing the + keys by mistake, changing the current value using the shortcut key can be invalid on the Option screen. Select "Disable Current Value Changing by Pressing Shift+Enter" in [Tool] [Option] "Monitor" "Common". Displaying Watch window If a registered device/label is a structure/function block/array label, the detail of the device/label is displayed in tree format. When the project is opened next time, the tree will be displayed folded.
17 - 24
17.6.3 Changing display format (decimal/hexadecimal) of current values
17.6 Registering and Monitoring Devices
17.6.4 Writing/reading data to/from CSV file
17
MONITORING
Write/read devices/labels registered to the Watch window to/from the CSV file.
Screen display
Right-click and select [Write to CSV File]/[Read from CSV File] from the shortcut menu.
18
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
19
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
Operating procedure
1. Enter a file name, or select a file to be opened.
21
2. Click the
button, or the
button.
The devices/labels are saved to the specified save destination, or the devices/labels are read from the specified location to the Watch window.
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
17.6.4 Writing/reading data to/from CSV file
17 - 25
17 MONITORING
17.7 Monitoring Intelligent Function Modules
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
For the method how to monitor input/output signals and buffer memory of intelligent function modules, refer to the following manual. GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Intelligent Function Module)
17.8 Starting/Stopping Monitoring All Windows
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
This section explains how to start/stop monitoring all open windows.
Operating procedure
� Select [Online] [Monitor] [Start Monitoring (All Windows)]/[Stop Monitoring
(All Windows)].
17 - 26
17.9 Using Realtime Monitor Function
17.9 Using Realtime Monitor Function
17
MONITORING
*1
Q CPU L CPU Remote HFeXad FX
*1 : Not supported by L02S and L02S-P.
This section explains how to start the Realtime Monitor function of GX LogViewer from GX Works2.
18
To use this function, install GX LogViewer in advance.
For the operation method, refer to the following manual.
GX LogViewer Version 1 Operating Manual
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
Screen display
[Tool] [Real-time Monitor Function]
19
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
22
Supported version of GX LogViewer To use this function, GX LogViewer Version 1.40S or later is required.
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
17 - 27
17 MONITORING
MEMO
17 - 28
17
MONITORING
18 SIMULATING
18
PROGRAMS
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
This chapter explains how to debug programs offline using the simulation function.
19
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
18.1 Simulation Function 18.2 Starting/Stopping Simulation 18.3 Checking unsupported instructions/devices
20
18 - 2
18 - 4
18 - 9
21
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
18 - 1
18 SIMULATING PROGRAMS
18.1 Simulation Function
Q CPU L CPU ReFmXote HFeXad FX
This section explains how to debug a sequence program offline using the virtual programmable controller, without connecting to the programmable controller CPU. This function is useful to test programs before operating them actually on the programmable controller CPU. For the considerations and restrictions on the simulation function, refer to Appendix 2.
18.1.1
Safety and handling considerations of the simulation function
The following explains the considerations of safety and handling of the simulation function.
1) The simulation function simulates the actual programmable controller CPU to debug a sequence program. However, this function does not guarantee the operation of the debugged sequence program.
2) The simulation function uses the memory for simulation to input and output data to/from the I/O module and intelligent function module. Some instructions/functions and device memory are not supported. Therefore, the operation results obtained with the virtual programmable controller may differ from those obtained using the actual programmable controller CPU.
After debugging programs using the simulation function, those programs must be debugged online before operating them actually on the programmable controller CPU.
18.1.2 Functions available for simulation function
The following table shows the GX Works2 functions that are available for the simulation function.
Function
Description
Reference
Write to PLC
Write parameter files and program files to the virtual programmable controller.
Section 15.1
Online program change*1,*2
Write programs to a virtual programmable controller in RUN status.
Section 15.9
Verify with PLC
Verify data in the virtual programmable controller against project data.
Section 15.2
Delete PLC Data
For QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU, delete data in the virtual programmable controller.
Section 15.3
Monitor
Monitor the status of operation processing.
Section 17.2
Monitor status
Display the monitoring status of the virtual programmable controller.
Section 17.1.2
Device memory/Buffer memory Batch-monitor the device memory/buffer memory of the virtual
batch monitor
programmable controller.
Section 17.3
Program list monitor
For QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU, monitor the processing time of programs being executed on the virtual programmable controller.
Section 17.4
Entry Ladder Monitor
Register ladder blocks on the Entry Ladder Monitor screen, and monitor them.
(Simple)
Watch
Register and monitors data such as virtual programmable controller devices. Section 17.6
18 - 2
18.1.1 Safety and handling considerations of the simulation function
18.1 Simulation Function
Function
Description
Local Device Batch Read + Save CSV
Read local device data and save them on a personal computer.
Device memory backup in simulation
Save and read device memory/buffer memory of the virtual programmable controller.
Modify value
Modify the current value of the virtual programmable controller.
Forced input output registration/ For QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU, register/cancel the forced input/output of X/Y
cancellation
devices of the virtual programmable controller.
Device Test with Execution Condition
For QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU, register devices of the virtual programmable controller to the device test with execution condition.
Sampling trace
For QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU, trace the device value of the virtual programmable controller.
Step Execution*3
Debug the program by executing it partially.
Remote Operation
Switch the execution status of the virtual programmable controller, such as STOP and PAUSE.
PLC Memory Operation
Perform memory format, memory clear, memory arrangement for the virtual programmable controller.
PLC Diagnostics
Check the virtual programmable controller status and errors.
I/O System Setting
Simulate operations of external devices using the virtual programmable controller.
*1 : The simulation function is not supported by FXCPU. *2 : Online program change of SFC blocks is not supported. *3 : Not supported by FXCPU.
Reference Section 15.12 Section 18.2.1 Section 18.2.2 Section 19.1 Section 19.2
Section 19.3
Section 19.4
Section 19.6
Section 20.1 Section 20.3 Section 20.4 Section 20.5 Section 21.1 Chapter 22
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
MONITORING
17 18 19 20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
18.1.2 Functions available for simulation function
18 - 3
18 SIMULATING PROGRAMS
18.2 Starting/Stopping Simulation
This section explains how to start/stop simulation.
Q CPU L CPU ReFmXote HFeXad FX
Operating procedure
� Select [Debug] [Start/Stop Simulation] ( ).
The GX Simulator2 screen is displayed, and the simulation starts. To end the simulation function, select [Debug] [Start/Stop Simulation] again.
<Simulating a single project>
QCPU(Q mode)/LCPU
FXCPU
<Simulating multiple projects>
Display contents
Item
Description
Switch
Display the operating status of the virtual programmable controller.
RESET*1
STOP
Select this to switch the operating status of the virtual programmable controller.
RUN
Display the operating status of the virtual programmable controller. For details of the LED, refer to the following manuals.
For QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU
LED
User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection) of each CPU module
For FXCPU
User's Manual - Hardware Edition of each FXCPU
HARDWARE MANUAL of each FXCPU
For the operating status error, the icon on the upper left corner of the screen is displayed in red.
*1 : Not supported by FXCPU.
18 - 4
18.2 Starting/Stopping Simulation
Screen button
17
/
Switches between display/hide of the project name during the simulation.
MONITORING
18
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
19
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
Simulations of multiple projects The maximum of 4 projects can be simulated simultaneously by starting the simulation of other project during the simulation.
Simulation of FXCPU For FXCPU, more than one project cannot be simulated simultaneously.
Considerations when changing project names If a project name is changed during the simulation, the project name on the GX Simulator2 screen is not changed. To
21
display the changed project name on the GX Simulator2 screen, exit the simulation, and then start the simulation again.
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
Minimized display at start up of simulation By setting the option, the GX Simulator2 screen can be started up in minimized mode when the simulation is activated.
To start up the GX Simulator2 screen in minimized mode, select "Start in minimized status" from [Options] on the GX Simulator2 screen. From the next start up, the GX Simulator2 screen is not displayed but becomes in taskbar icon mode.
Stopping the simulation The simulation function may not be stopped by the GX Works2 simulation stop operation when another application
22
such as MX Component is being connected to GX Simulator2. (GX Works2 is disconnected from GX Simulator2.)
The simulation function stops when another application is disconnected.
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
18 - 5
18 SIMULATING PROGRAMS
18.2.1 Saving device memory/buffer memory
Save device memory/buffer memory of the virtual programmable controller temporarily.
Operating procedure
1. Switch the operating status of the GX Simulator2 screen to STOP. 2. Select [Tool] [Backup Device Memory in Simulation] [Save] on the GX
Simulator2 screen.
Saving device memory/buffer memory when stopping simulation By setting the option, device memory/buffer memory in the virtual programmable controller can be saved when the simulation is stopped. To save device memory/buffer memory when the virtual programmable controller is stopped, select "Save device memory at stop" from [Options] on the GX Simulator2 screen.
18.2.2 Reading device memory/buffer memory
Read out the temporarily saved device memory/buffer memory to the virtual programmable controller.
Operating procedure
1. Switch the operating status of the GX Simulator2 screen to STOP. 2. Select [Tool] [Backup Device Memory in Simulation] [Read] on the GX
Simulator2 screen.
18 - 6
18.2.1 Saving device memory/buffer memory
18.2 Starting/Stopping Simulation
18.2.3 List of device memory/buffer memory that can be saved/read 17
MONITORING
This section explains device memory/buffer memory that can be saved and read with the virtual programmable controller.
Device memory that can be saved/read
18
The following table shows the list of device memory that can be saved/read. QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
Category
Type
Bit Internal user device
Internal system device
Index register File register
Word
Bit Word Word Word
Device X (DX) Y (DY) M L F V S B SB T (contact) ST (contact) C (contact) T (current value) ST (current value) C (current value) D (including Extended D) W (including Extended W) SW FX FY SM FD SD Z (including ZZ) R ZR
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
19 20 21 22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
18.2.3 List of device memory/buffer memory that can be saved/read
18 - 7
18 SIMULATING PROGRAMS
FXCPU
Category
Type
Bit Device
Word
Special device
Bit Word
Index register
Word
Extended register
Word
*1 : High-speed counters (C235 and later) are not supported. *2 : Supported by FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, and FX3UC only.
Device X Y M S T (contact) C (contact)*1 T (current value) C (current value)*1 D M (special M) D (special D) V Z R*2
Buffer memory that can be saved/read
Buffer memory that can be saved and read is an memory area of modules to which the I/O assignment settings are configured in the PLC parameter. For QCPU (Q mode), the buffer memory [U3E0 to U3E3\G0 to 4095] and the multiple CPU high-speed transfer area [U3E0 to U3E3\G10000 to 65535] on the programmable controller CPU cannot be saved/ read. For LCPU/FXCPU, all buffer memory can be saved/read.
18 - 8
18.2.3 List of device memory/buffer memory that can be saved/read
18.3 Checking unsupported instructions/devices
18.3 Checking unsupported instructions/devices
17
MONITORING
Q CPU L CPU ReFmXote HFeXad FX
The following explains how to display a list of instructions and devices used in a program and not
supported by the simulation function.
18
Screen display
Select [Debug] [Instructions Unsupported by Simulation].
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
19
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
Display of unsupported instructions
Unsupported instructions are not displayed when the programmable controller does not become in RUN status because of the CPU module error at the start of the simulation.
21
A status without a CPU module error is required for unsupported instructions to be displayed.
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
18 - 9
18 SIMULATING PROGRAMS
MEMO
18 - 10
MONITORING
17
19 DEBUGGING PROGRAMS 18
This chapter explains how to debug sequence programs.
19
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
19.1 Changing Current Values
20
19 - 2
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
19.2 Registering/Canceling Forced Input/Output
19 - 7
19.3 Device Test with Execution Condition 19.4 Sampling Trace
19 - 10
19 - 14
21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
19.5 Measuring Scan Time
19 - 33
19.6 Debugging Programs with Simulation Function
19 - 35
19.7 Using CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool
19 - 51
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
19 - 1
19 DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
19.1 Changing Current Values
Q CPU L CPU ReFmXote HFeXad FX
This section explains how to change current device values of the programmable controller CPU in ladder and SFC (Zoom) programs.
The following explains how to turn ON/OFF forcibly the bit device on the programmable controller CPU from the monitoring screen and also changing the current value of the word device and buffer memory.
19.1.1 Changing current value of devices/labels
Screen display
Select [Debug] [Modify Value] ( ). <For bit device>
<For word device>
19 - 2
19.1.1 Changing current value of devices/labels
19.1 Changing Current Values
Operating procedure
17
1. Set the items on the screen.
MONITORING
Item Device/Label
Data Type
Value (For word device)
Description
Display the device or label selected on the monitoring screen. Also enter the device or label.
Display the data type of the device or label. Also select the data type from .
Enter a new value according to the data type as shown below:
Data Type Word [Signed], Double Word [Signed], Word [Unsigned]/Bit String [16-bit], Double Word [Unsigned]/ Bit String [32-bit]
FLOAT (Single Precision)
FLOAT (Double Precision)*1 String
Time
Entry
Enter a value in decimal or hexadecimal format.
Enter a value in decimal or exponential form. Example: � Decimal form: -1.23456 � Exponential form: -1.23456E + 01 Enter a value in decimal form. Enter a character string. (Quotation marks (" ") are not necessary.) Enter a value in the time format. � T#0s (Applicable to Structured projects only)
*1 : Not supported by FXCPU.
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
18 19 20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
2. For bit devices, click the
For word devices, click the
/
/
button.
button.
21
The current value of the programmable controller CPU is changed, and the result is displayed in "Execution Result".
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
Restrictions
Devices whose current values cannot be changed The current values of indirectly specified devices (@D0) cannot be changed.
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
19.1.1 Changing current value of devices/labels
19 - 3
19 DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
Shortcut key to switch ON/OFF of bit devices
To forcibly switch ON/OFF status of bit devices During monitoring the following items, a bit device can be forcibly switched ON/OFF by pressing the key + key after selecting the bit device, or double-clicking the bit device while pressing the key. � Ladder editor � ST editor*1 � Structured Ladder/FBD editor*1 � Device/buffer memory batch monitoring � Watch � Monitoring of intelligent function module
*1 : Only double-clicking a bit device while pressing the key is available.
After the ON/OFF status of bit devices have been switched on the ladder editor, ST editor, or Structured Ladder/FBD editor, the changed result can be checked in "Execution Result" on the Modify Value screen. To disable the shortcut keys to switch ON/OFF status of bit devices To prevent from pressing the + keys by mistake, changing the current value using the shortcut key can be invalid on the Option screen. Select "Disable Current Value Changing by Pressing Shift+Enter" in [Tool] [Option] "Monitor" "Common".
19 - 4
19.1.1 Changing current value of devices/labels
19.1 Changing Current Values
19.1.2 Changing current value of buffer memory
17
MONITORING
Screen display
Select [Debug] [Modify Value] ( ).
18
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
19
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Item Module Start (HEX)
Address Data Type
Value
Description Enter the start I/O number of the intelligent function module. Enter the address of the intelligent function module. Display the data type of the buffer memory. Also select the data type from . Enter a new value according to the data type as shown below.
Data Type
Entry
Word [Signed],
Double Word [Signed], Word [Unsigned]/Bit String [16-bit],
Enter a value in decimal or hexadecimal format.
Double Word [Unsigned]/Bit String [32-bit]
FLOAT (Single Precision)
Enter a value in decimal or exponential form. Example:
� Decimal form: -1.23456
� Exponential form: -1.23456E + 01
FLOAT (Double Precision)*1
Enter a value in decimal form.
String
Enter a character string. (Quotation marks (" ") are not necessary.)
Time
Enter a value in the time format. � T#0s (Applicable to Structured projects only)
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
21 22 A
APPENDIX
*1 : Not supported by FXCPU.
I
2. Click the
button.
The current value of the buffer memory is changed, and the result is displayed in "Execution Result".
INDEX
19.1.2 Changing current value of buffer memory
19 - 5
19 DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
Modify Value screen � When the Modify Value screen is open, a device/label is displayed on the Modify Value screen if it is selected on the editor. � The Modify Value screen of device/label and buffer memory can be switched by clicking tabs.
Execution result of current value change
Display/hide of the execution result of current value change can be switched by
/
.
A device/label can be displayed in "Device/Label" area by selecting the device/label and clicking the
button or double-clicking it in "Execution Result".
Selecting devices/labels used in instructions that handle multiple devices When an instruction that uses multiple devices (such as FROM/TO instruction) is selected, all devices/labels used in the instruction are displayed in the "Device/Label" combo box. Select a device from the combo box and then execute the Modify Value function.
19 - 6
19.1.2 Changing current value of buffer memory
19.2 Registering/Canceling Forced Input/Output
19.2 Registering/Canceling Forced Input/Output
17
MONITORING
*1
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
*1 : Not supported by Basic model QCPU.
This section explains how to register/cancel the forced input/output of devices. X/Y device can be forcibly turned ON/OFF without the effect of the input/output to/from external
18
devices while the programmable controller CPU is in RUN status. This enables program debugs
without external devices.
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
19.2.1 Registering/canceling forced input to/output from QCPU (Q
mode)/LCPU
19
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
Screen display
Select [Debug] [Forced Input Output Registration/Cancellation].
20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
21
Registration status display area
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
Operating procedure
1. Enter a device to be turned ON/OFF forcibly.
Clicking enables to select a device from the list of previously entered ones.
A
2. Click the
/
button.
The forced ON/OFF is registered to the programmable controller CPU. The current registration status of the forced ON/OFF is displayed in the 'registration status display area'.
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
19.2.1 Registering/canceling forced input to/output from QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU
19 - 7
19 DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
Screen button
Cancels the forced ON/OFF of a device registered to the programmable controller CPU.
Reads the registration status from the programmable controller CPU.
Cancels all forced input/output registered to the programmable controller CPU.
Canceling registration The device registration can be canceled by placing the cursor on the device area in the registration status display area and pressing the key.
Device forced input/output registration The status of the device forced input/output registration may be changed by GX Works2 or external devices that can register/cancel such as forced input/output, for the exclusion control is not executed on the programmable controller CPU side.
Forced ON/OFF status The ON/OFF status can be inverted by double-clicking the ON/OFF cell.
Double-click
Closing the Forced Input Output Registration/Cancellation screen
The following message is displayed when the Cancellation screen.
button is clicked on the Forced Input Output Registration/
Click the
button to cancel all forced input/output registrations.
19 - 8
19.2.1 Registering/canceling forced input to/output from QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU
19.2 Registering/Canceling Forced Input/Output
19.2.2
Registering/canceling forced input to/output from remote I/O 17
module
MONITORING
Screen display
Select [Debug] [Forced Input Output Registration/Cancellation].
18
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
Registration status display area
19
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
Operating procedure
� Click the
/
button.
20
A disabled/enabled refresh of X/Y device is registered to the remote I/O module. The current registration status of disabled/enabled refresh is displayed in the 'registration status display area'.
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
Screen button
21
Reads the current registration status of the remote I/O module.
Cancels all disabled refreshes registered to the remote I/O module.
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
Connection route in which forced input/output registration/cancellation can be performed
22
In order to use this function on remote I/O module, the connection route must be set to "Serial Port NET/10(H) Remote
Module Connection".
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
19.2.2 Registering/canceling forced input to/output from remote I/O module
19 - 9
19 DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
19.3 Device Test with Execution Condition
*1
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
*1 : Universal model QCPU only.
This section explains how to change device value at the execution of programs and steps specified in advance. This enables debugs of specific ladder blocks without changing programs. This function can be executed only in a ladder program of Simple project.
19.3.1 Registering device test with execution condition
Register the device test with execution condition.
Screen display
Select [Debug] [Device Test with Execution Condition] [Register].
<For bit device>
<For word device>
19 - 10
19.3.1 Registering device test with execution condition
19.3 Device Test with Execution Condition
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Item Device/Label Data Type
Description
Display the device or label selected on the monitoring screen. Also enter the device or label.
Display the data type of the device or label. Also select the data type from .
Enter a new value according to the data type as shown below.
Value (For word device)
Data Type
Entry
Word [Signed],
Double Word [Signed],
Enter a value in decimal or hexadecimal
Word [Unsigned]/Bit String [16-bit],
format.
Double Word [Unsigned]/Bit String [32-bit]
FLOAT (Single Precision)
Enter a value in decimal or exponential form. Example:
� Decimal form: -1.23456
� Exponential form: -1.23456E + 01
FLOAT (Double Precision)
Enter a value in decimal form.
String
Enter a value as a character string. (Quotation marks (" ") are not necessary.)
Time
Enter a value in the time format. � T#0s (Applicable to Structured projects only)
Execute Condition
Program Name
Step No. Execution Timing
Specify the program name for the timing of the forced ON/OFF and current value change.
Specify the step number in the program for the timing of the forced ON/OFF and current value change.
Select 'before' or 'after' the instruction in the step number in the program for the timing of the forced ON/OFF and current value change.
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
MONITORING
17 18 19 20 21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
2. For bit devices, click the
/
button.
For word devices, click the
button.
The device/label is registered to the device test with execution condition.
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
Registering devices
� Up to 32 devices can be registered.
� The registration of the device test with execution condition is canceled by performing the following operations.
� Online program change of the program in the range which includes the specified step � Write to PLC
A
� A box with the specified color appears at the instruction of the specified step.
(Changing colorSection 3.2.7)
APPENDIX
� The device value is changed at the specified step regardless of whether the instruction of the specified step is executed.
I
INDEX
19.3.1 Registering device test with execution condition
19 - 11
19 DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
19.3.2
Checking/disabling registration of device test with execution condition
Check the registration of the device test with execution condition, write it to a file, read it out from a file, and disable it.
Screen display
Select [Debug] [Device Test with Execution Condition] [Registration Check/Disable].
Registration information list
Display contents
Item Status of Displayed Data Registration information list
Description
Display whether the data being displayed is read from the programmable controller CPU or from a file.
Display the registration of the device test with execution condition. Display up to 32 records.
Screen button
Reads the registration information from the programmable controller CPU.
Disables the registration selected in 'registration information list'.
Registers the registration information data to the programmable controller CPU in batch.
Disables the registration information data on the programmable controller CPU in batch.
Reads the registration information list from a file.
Saves the registration information data being displayed in 'registration information list' to a file.
19 - 12
19.3.2 Checking/disabling registration of device test with execution condition
19.3 Device Test with Execution Condition
17
Checking/disabling the device test with execution condition
MONITORING
� The registration of devices specified in the device test with execution condition can be checked/disabled on the monitor screen of the ladder editor. Right-click on a device and select [Debug] [Check Register Device Test with Execution Condition]/[Disable Register Device Test with Execution Condition] from the shortcut menu.
� Other than the above operation, registrations of device test with execution condition are canceled by the following
operations. � Reset or turn from OFF to ON the programmable controller CPU.
18
� Perform the Online program change including the specified step.
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
� Write the program file to the program memory of the programmable controller CPU while the programmable controller CPU is in STOP status.
� Delete the program file in the program memory of the programmable controller CPU while the programmable controller CPU is in STOP status.
� Format the program memory of the programmable controller CPU while the programmable controller CPU is in
STOP status.
19
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
19.3.3 Batch disabling device test with execution condition
Batch disable the registered device test with execution condition.
20
Operating procedure
� Select [Debug] [Device Test with Execution Condition] [Batch Disable].
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
19.3.3 Batch disabling device test with execution condition
19 - 13
19 DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
19.4 Sampling Trace
*1
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX *1 : Not supported by Basic model QCPU and Q00UJ.
This section explains the operation of the sampling trace function. The sampling trace function acquires the data at the preset timing to find how device values change during program operation and traces the changes by displaying them in time series. For details of the sampling trace function, refer to the manual of each CPU module.
19.4.1 Opening sampling trace screen
Operating procedure
� Select [Debug] [Sampling Trace] [Open Sampling Trace].
Devices displayed with red background When devices or data types which cannot be used in a new programmable controller CPU type are contained in the sampling trace data after the Change PLC Type operation, they are displayed with red background. Modify them to devices appropriate for the new programmable controller CPU type, and execute the sampling trace again.
19 - 14
19.4.1 Opening sampling trace screen
19.4 Sampling Trace
19.4.2 Setting executing condition of sampling trace
17
MONITORING
The following explains the settings required for executing sampling trace and the execution method.
Setting sampling trace execution method and data storage destination
18
Set the sampling trace execution method and the storage destination of the trace data.
Screen display
Select [Debug] [Sampling Trace] [Trace Setting] ( ) <<Setting of Executing and Saving>>.
19
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
Operating procedure
� Set the items on the screen.
Item
Description
Trace Execution Method
Set the trace execution method.
Execute after overwriting current trace Select this to execute sampling trace after overwriting the current trace
settings in the PLC
setting to the programmable controller CPU.
Execute using existing trace settings Select this to execute sampling trace using the trace setting stored on the
in the PLC
programmable controller CPU.
Trace Data (setting+result) Storage
Set the memory and the file name where the trace data set on the <<Condition Setting>> tab and the trace result after execution are stored.
Trace Auto Startup Setting
Select this to perform the sampling trace automatically when the programmable controller CPU is in RUN. (Universal model QCPU/LCPU only*1)
*1 : For the versions of Universal model QCPU that support this function, refer to the User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals) of the CPU module to be used.
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
21 22 A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
19.4.2 Setting executing condition of sampling trace
19 - 15
19 DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
Setting sampling trace conditions
Set the sampling trace conditions such as the number of traces and the trigger condition.
Screen display
Select [Debug] [Sampling Trace] [Trace Setting] ( ) <<Condition Setting>>.
19 - 16
19.4.2 Setting executing condition of sampling trace
19.4 Sampling Trace
Operating procedure
� Set the items on the screen.
Item
Description
Trace Count Setting
Set the number of data acquisitions (samplings) before and after the trigger. Select a value using the combo box or enter a value directly. Setting range: Count Before Trigger < Total Count <= 8192
Additional Information
Set the information to be added to the trace result.
Time
Add the time of the trace start.
Program Name
Add the name of the program in which the sampling trace is executed.
Data Acquisition Timing Setting Set the trace data acquisition timing.
Each Scan
Select this to acquire the data every scan.
Specified Interval
Select this to acquire the data in the set intervals. The setting unit is 1ms.
Each Multiple CPU High Speed Transfer Cycle*1
Select this to acquire the data in the Each multiple CPU high-speed transfer cycle.
Detail Setting
Select this to set the data acquisition timing depending on the device condition.
Use the
button to set the conditional expression.
Trigger Condition Setting
Set the trigger (condition) that is taken as the start point (0 point) of sampling trace execution.
At the Time of Trace Instruction Execution
Select this to generate a trigger when the TRACE instruction in the program is executed. For the TRACE instruction, refer to the following manual. (MELSEC-Q/L Programming Manual (Common Instructions)
At the Time of Manual Select this to generate a trigger manually with GX Works2. Select [Debug] [Sampling
Trigger Execution
Trace] [Execute Manual Trigger] to generate a trigger.
Detail Setting
Select this to set a trigger timing depending on the device condition. A trigger is generated when the conditional expression is satisfied.
Use the
button to set the conditional expression.
*1 : For Universal model QCPU only
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
MONITORING
17 18 19 20 21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
19.4.2 Setting executing condition of sampling trace
19 - 17
19 DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
Screen button
Displays the Detail Setting screen. Setting of the conditional expression can be changed in the Data Get Timing screen or the Trigger Condition screen.
<Data Get Timing>
<Trigger Condition>
Operation
� Set the items on the screen.
Item Device /Label Device Address*1 Comment
Description
Enter a device, address or label. Section 19.4.6
Display the device corresponds to "Device /Label".
Display the address corresponds to "Device /Label".
Display the device comment of "Device /Label".
Select the timing condition. � For the data get timing setting
The data are collected at the end processing of one scan or when the condition of the specified device/label is satisfied.
Condition
Device Condition
Description
Bit device Word device
= Change*2
Collect data at the rising of the specified device/label. Collect data at the falling of the specified device/label. Collect data when the current value of the specified device becomes the specified condition value.
Collect data when the current value of the specified device changes.
� For the trigger condition setting Satisfaction of the condition of the specified device/label becomes a trigger.
Device Condition
Description
Bit device
Consider the rising of the specified device/label as a trigger.
Consider the falling of the specified device/label as a trigger.
Word device
= Write data*2
Consider the time when the current value of the specified device becomes the specified condition value as a trigger.
Consider the time when data are written to the specified device/ label as a trigger.
Radix
Select the radix of the condition value. (Word device only)
Values
Set the condition value. (Word device only)
*1 : For Structured projects only *2 : For Universal model QCPU/LCPU only
19 - 18
19.4.2 Setting executing condition of sampling trace
19.4 Sampling Trace
19.4.3 Registering devices/labels
17
MONITORING
Register the devices/labels on the Sampling Trace screen.
Operating procedure
� Register the devices/labels to which the sampling trace is performed.
18
Devices/labels can be registered by entering them directly or copying them from the program editor or label editor by the drag-and-drop operation.
Display title
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
19
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
Display contents
Item
Description
Display title
-
Device/Label
Set the device, address, label, structure, array, and function block to which the sampling trace is performed. 50 bit devices and 50 word devices can be registered.
Device*1
Display the device corresponds to "Device /Label".
Address*1, *2
Display the address corresponds to "Device /Label".
Comment*1
Display the device comment for the address or device/label which are entered in "Device/ Label".
Data Type*1
Display the data type of "Device/Label". The data type of the word device can be changed after registration.
Radix*1
If the device entered in "Device/Label" is the bit device, the radix is fixed as "Binary". If the device entered in "Device/Label" is the word device, the radix can be selected from "Binary", "Decimal", "Hexadecimal" or "ASCII". If the device entered in "Device/Label" is the singleprecision/double-precision real number, the radix is fixed as "FLOAT".
Vertical Axis
Display the time axis data of the selected cell as displaying the trace result.
*1 : Items can be displayed by selecting [View] [Switching Display Items]. *2 : For Structured projects only
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
20 21 22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
Editing with a selection of two or more rows Two or more rows can be selected by holding down the key or the key to copy or delete.
A
When non-consecutive rows are selected by holding down the key and copied, blank rows are deleted when the
selected rows are pasted.
Multiple rows cannot be selected during the sampling trace execution.
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
19.4.3 Registering devices/labels
19 - 19
19 DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
Changing data types of word devices
For word devices, data type can be changed after registration. When the data type of a device/label that uses the multiple devices is changed, the necessary devices are displayed in the tree format. Example: Changing data type of D10 from "Word [Signed]" to "Double Word [Signed]"
Change to double word (signed)
Restrictions
When 'Double Word'/'FLOAT (Single Precision)'/'FLOAT (Double Precision)' is set to "Data Type" The data acquired by the sampling trace function may become inconsistent.
19 - 20
19.4.3 Registering devices/labels
19.4 Sampling Trace
Registering devices/labels from program editor/label editor with drag-and- 17
drop operation
MONITORING
Register a device/label from the program editor/label editor with the drag-and-drop operation. Multiple devices/labels can be registered in batch by selecting a range.
<Ladder editor>
18
Select the device, instruction and ladder block.
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
<Structured Ladder/FBD editor>
19
Select the device and ladder block.
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
<ST editor> <Label editor>
20
Select the device and line.
21
Select the device by a unit of row.
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
Drag & drop
Activate the window by placing the cursor on the Sampling Trace tab while dragging the data, and drop the data on the Sampling Trace screen.
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
The device is registered at the cursor position.
A
APPENDIX
Drag-and-drop operation of data from ladder editor
I
The drag-and-drop operation of data can be performed when the cursor is changed to of the selected range.
as it is moved to the border
19.4.3 Registering devices/labels
19 - 21
INDEX
19 DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
19.4.4 Executing sampling trace
Operating procedure
� Select [Debug] [Sampling Trace] [Start Trace] ( ).
Sampling trace starts. The Trace Data Storage Status screen is displayed when the sampling trace is started.
Trance data file name
Item Total Data
Data After Trigger Trace data file name
Description
Display the current status of data acquisition (sampling) after the start of sampling trace in percentage in reference to the number of times set for "Trace Setting". Even after this status reaches 100%, sampling trace is continuously executed and the data are overwritten from the oldest data.
Display the current status of data acquisition (sampling) after the generation of trigger in percentage in reference to the number of times set for "Trace Setting". When this status reaches 100%, sampling trace stops.
Display the trace data file name that is registered for the sampling trace on the programmable controller CPU.
After the stop or completion of sampling trace, the trace result is displayed on the Sampling Trace screen.
Display title
Currently selected number of data acquisitions
Chart
Timing chart scale Trigger position
Trend graph registration target
19 - 22
19.4.4 Executing sampling trace
Vertical axis
information
line Trend graph
19.4 Sampling Trace
Display contents
Item
Description
Display title
-
Vertical Axis
Display the device value of the selected cell position, on the 'vertical axis information line'.
Currently selected number of data acquisitions
Indicate the number of data acquisitions on the column selected with the vertical axis information line. The line can be moved to the selected number of data acquisitions by entering a value.
Chart
Display the acquired data in chart.
Timing chart scale
One block corresponds to one data acquisition. The number of scale indicates the number of data acquisitions.
To change the display width, select [View] [Timing Chart Scale] [-: Narrow Scale] ( )/[+: Wide Scale] ( ), or move a scroll wheel on a mouse while pressing the key.
Trigger position
A red mark is displayed at the position corresponding to the trigger generated timing on the timing chart scale when a trigger is generated.
Vertical axis information line
This line is displayed at the position where a cell is selected on the chart in yellow. The device value on the vertical axis information line is displayed in cells under "Vertical Axis". When the vertical axis information line is double-clicked, the data at the right side of the line are displayed on the sampling trace (detailed data) screen. Switching screen to the sampling trace (detailed data) screen
Trend graph registration target
Register the selected word device to the trend graph. Deregister them by clearing the check box. When the selected status is changed while two or more rows are selected, the change applies to the selected status of all the selected rows.
Trend graph
Display the changes of the word device values on the trend graph. Displaying trace results on trend graphs
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
MONITORING
17 18 19 20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
Starting sampling trace from sequence program
Select [Debug] [Sampling Trace] [Register Trace]. To start sampling trace, execute the Trace start command (SM801) in a program.
21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
Displaying only the trace result stored on the programmable controller CPU without executing sampling trace Select [Debug] [Sampling Trace] [Read from PLC]. (Section 19.4.5)
Word devices whose data types can be changed after sampling trace results are displayed The type of a word device can be changed to the double word type or the real type, only when the consecutive devices with the required points are registered as the trace data.
Example) If the sampling trace is performed to D0, D1, D2, and D3, the data type of D0 can be changed to the
double word type. If the data type of D2 is changed to the data type that uses multiple devices, such as the double word and
22
single-precision real number, the data type of D0 cannot be changed as it has no consecutive 4-words
devices.
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
Performing sampling trace from other peripherals during performing sampling trace For Universal model QCPU/LCPU, the sampling trace currently being performed can be stopped by other peripherals and perform another sampling trace. When the sampling trace is performed by other peripherals, select [Debug] [Sampling Trace] [Forced Execution Registration Effective] to activate the forced registration.
Trace ready status (SM800) after sampling trace is completed
In GX Developer, the trace ready status (SM800=1) is held until the trace results are read, even if the sampling trace is
A
completed. In GX Works2, the trace results are automatically read and displayed when the sampling trace is
completed, and then the trace ready status (SM800=0) is canceled.
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
19.4.4 Executing sampling trace
19 - 23
19 DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
Switching screen to the sampling trace (detailed data) screen
Display the device/label value change in numeric values.
Screen display
Click the tool button (Switch Chart/Detail). The sampling trace (detailed data) screen is displayed. Click the tool button (Switch Chart/Detail) again to switch to the chart.
Additional information
Detailed data
Display contents
Item Additional information
Detailed data
Description
Display the additional information set for "Additional Information" on the <<Condition Setting>> tab on the Trace Setting screen. Select [View] [Additional Information] [Time]/[Program Name].
Confirm the device values. In the case of a bit device, '*' is displayed for ON, nothing is displayed (blank) for OFF. In the case of a word device, numeric values are displayed. The registered "Device /Label" are linked with the Sampling Trace screen (chart).
19 - 24
19.4.4 Executing sampling trace
19.4 Sampling Trace
Displaying trace results on trend graphs
17
Display the changes of the word device values on the trend graph.
MONITORING
Operating procedure
� Select the check box(es) of the 'trend graph registration target' on the Sampling
Trace screen.
18
The selected word device is registered on the trend graph. Clear the check box to cancel the registration on the trend graph.
Trend graph registration target
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
19
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
Trend graph line color
Display contents
Item Trend graph line color
Description
Change the background color of cell under 'trend graph line color' to the line color of the trend graph. Double-click the cell, and the Color screen is displayed to allow changing of the trend graph line color.
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
21 22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
Wide/narrow scales of trend graphs
Place the cursor at the base point to widen/narrow, and select [View] [Trend Graph Scale] [-: Narrow Scale] ( )/
[+: Wide Scale] ( ) or move a scroll wheel on a mouse while pressing thekey. The widened/narrowed graph with
the specified base point as the center is displayed.
Select [View] [Trend Graph Scale] [Initial Display] to recover the display to the initial state.
A
APPENDIX
Wide scale
Narrow scale
I
Moving trend graphs Double-click the trend graph to move the graph up or down with the double-clicked point as the center.
INDEX
19.4.4 Executing sampling trace
19 - 25
19 DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
19.4.5 Saving trace data
Save the trace data of sampling trace (sampling trace target devices/labels, trace setting, and trace results) on a personal computer or a programmable controller CPU.
Saving trace data on personal computer
Save the trace data on a personal computer in the CSV file format. The menu item of the function cannot be selected when a trace result does not exist.
Operating procedure
1. Select [Debug] [Sampling Trace] [Export CSV Data].
The Export CSV Data screen is displayed.
2. Enter the file name to be saved.
3. Select the file type.
For checking the trace setting or the trace result using Excel, select "GX Works2 format CSV file". For checking the trace result read by using GX LogViewer, select "GX LogViewer format CSV file".
4. Click the
button.
The trace data is saved on the personal computer.
19 - 26
19.4.5 Saving trace data
19.4 Sampling Trace
17
MONITORING
Checking triggers in CSV file For the trace numbers of the sampling trace when the trace data are output to the file selected for "GX Works2 format
CSV file", the number at the time of the trigger execution is set to 0, and the numbers are displayed with the negative values for the numbers before the trigger execution and positive values for the numbers after the trigger execution.
Example) If M0, which was obtained at the fifth time after the trigger execution, is ON, M0 with the trace number '4' is
displayed as 'ON' in the CSV file.
18
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
Before trigger execution After trigger execution
19
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
When the trace data are output to the file selected for "GX LogViewer format CSV file", "*" is displayed on the data rows at the time of the trigger execution.
Display of CSV files opened in Excel
To display the file selected for "GX Works2 format CSV file" in Excel similar to the display of the sampling trace result,
copy the devices and the range of the result, select "Transpose" in "Paste Special", and then paste them on to Excel. Display of Counter (C), Timer (T), and Retentive timer (ST)
20
When the file selected for "GX LogViewer format CSV file" is read in GX LogViewer, device names are displayed in the
format displayed on the Sampling Trace screen. Therefore, as shown in the following table, the display of device names differs between the file selected for "GX LogViewer format CSV file" and the CSV file output using the logging configuration tool.
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
File selected for "GX LogViewer format CSV file"
T (Current value) T (Contact) T (Coil) C (Current value) C (Contact) C (Coil) ST (Current value) ST (Contact) ST (Coil)
CSV file output using the logging configuration tool
T TS TC C CS CC ST SS SC
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
21 22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
19.4.5 Saving trace data
19 - 27
19 DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
Formatting CSV files
Saved CSV files are displayed as shown below when they are opened by Excel. Example of "GX Works2 format CSV file"
Example of "GX LogViewer format CSV file"
19 - 28
19.4.5 Saving trace data
19.4 Sampling Trace
Writing/reading trace data to/from programmable controller CPU
17
Write/read the trace data to/from a programmable controller CPU.
MONITORING
Operating procedure
� Select [Debug] [Sampling Trace] [Read from PLC]/[Write to PLC].
The Write to PLC function writes the trace data to the target memory set on the <<Setting of
18
Executing and Saving>> tab on the Trace Setting screen.
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
Reading trace data to programmable controller CPU
The word data, which was read by the Read from PLC function, is read as the word (signed) type regardless of the data
type settings at the time of writing the data.
19
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
19.4.5 Saving trace data
19 - 29
19 DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
19.4.6 Applicable devices/labels for sampling trace
List of applicable devices for sampling trace
Category
Device type
Device
Internal user device
Internal system device
Link direct device File register Index register Intelligent function module device Nesting
Input
X
Output
Y
Internal relay
M
Latch relay
L
Annunciator
F
Edge relay
V
Step relay
S
Link relay
B
Link special relay
SB
Current value
T
Timer
Contact
TS
Coil
TC
Current value
C
Counter
Contact
CS
Coil
CC
Retentive timer
Current value Contact Coil
ST STS STC
Data register
D
Link register
W
Link special register
SW
Function input
FX
Function output
FY
Special relay
SM
Function register
FD
Special register
SD
Link input
J\X
Link output
J\Y
Link register
J\W
Link special register
J\SW
Link relay
J\B
Link special relay
J\SB
R File register
ZR
Z Index register
ZZ
Intelligent function module device U\G
Cyclic transmission area device U3E\G
Nesting
N
: Applicable �: Not applicable
Sampling trace screen
Data acquisition
timing
Trigger condition
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
�
�
�
*1
*1
*1
*1
*2
*2
*2
*2
�
�
*2
*2
*2
*2
�
�
*2
*2
*2
*2
�
�
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
�
*1
*1
�
*1
*1
�
*1
*1
�
*1
*1
�
*1
*1
�
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
�
�
�
�
*1
*1
�
*1
*1
�
�
�
�
19 - 30
19.4.6 Applicable devices/labels for sampling trace
19.4 Sampling Trace
Category
Device type
Device
Sampling trace screen
Data acquisition
timing
Trigger condition
Pointer
P
�
�
�
Pointer
Interrupt pointer
I
�
�
�
SFC block device
BL
�
�
�
SFC transition device
TR
�
�
�
Others
Network number specified device J
I/O number specified device
U
�
�
�
�
�
�
Macro instruction argument device
VD
�
�
�
Decimal constant
K
�
�
�
Hexadecimal Constant
H
�
�
�
Constant
Single-precision floating-point data
E
Real constant
Double-precision floating-point data
E
�
�
�
�
�
�
String constant
""
�
�
�
*1 : Following modification settings are applicable. � Digit-specified bit device (K1 to K8 and K1 to K4 can be used for the Sampling Trace screen and data acquisition timing respectively.) � Bit-specified word device � Index setting (not available under the trigger condition)
*2 : For Structured projects only
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
MONITORING
17 18 19 20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
Applicable label types for sampling trace
Label type
Description
Example
Global label*1
Register and display as 'label name'.
Label1
Local label*1
Register and display as 'program/label name'.
POU_01/ Label1
Structure*1
Register and display as 'label name.member name'. Register all members when the whole structure labels are registered.
G_data.AAA
Function block*1
Register and display as 'instance name.label name in function block'. Register all labels in the function block when the whole instances (function blocks) are registered.
FB_01.IN01
Array*1
Register and display as 'label name [one-dimensional element number] [two-dimensional element number] [three-dimensional element number]'. Register all elements/all members when the whole array labels are registered.
Array[0,0,0]
Structure array*1
Register and display as 'label [one-dimensional element number] [twodimensional element number] [three-dimensional element number]. member name'. Register and display arrays when the structure contains member labels of arrays. Register all elements/all members when the whole structure array labels are registered.
Array2[0,0,0]. AAA
Nested function block*1
Register and display as 'instance name.label name in function block.label in nested function block'. Register and display structures when the nest function block contains structure labels. Register all labels in the instance when the whole instances (nested function blocks) are registered.
FB1_01.FB2_ 01.Label1
*1 : The following data types are applicable. Bit, Word [Signed], Word [Unsigned], Word [Unsigned]/Bit String [16-bit], Double Word [Signed], Double Word [Unsigned]/Bit String [32-bit], FLOAT (Single Precision), FLOAT (Double Precision), Timer, Counter, Retentive Timer
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
APPENDIX
21 22 A I
INDEX
19.4.6 Applicable devices/labels for sampling trace
19 - 31
19 DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
19.4.7 Considerations when performing sampling trace
The following explains the considerations when performing the sampling trace. When files for both local device and trace data exist in standard RAM
Perform the following operation to change the local device when the files for both the local device and trace data exist in the standard RAM. If the following operation is not performed, the files for the trace data may be deleted.
Operation
1. Select [Debug] [Sampling Trace] [Read from PLC].
Read the file for trace data from the standard RAM.
2. Change the settings for the local device, and write the changes to the programmable
controller CPU.
3. Select [Debug] [Sampling Trace] [Write to PLC].
Write the file for the trace data, which was read in the procedure 1, to the standard RAM.
19.4.8 Compatibility with sampling trace data in GX Developer
The sampling trace data which are saved by "Trace settings file operation" using GX Developer cannot be read in GX Works2. The sampling trace data which are set in GX Works2 cannot be saved as the format that can be read in GX Developer.
Perform the following operation when utilizing the sampling trace data.
Utilizing GX Developer sampling trace data in GX Works2
Operation
1. Write the sampling trace data, which are set in GX Developer, to the programmable
controller CPU. Perform the "Write to PLC" function of "Trace settings PLC operation" in GX Developer.
2. Read the sampling trace data from the programmable controller CPU in GX Works2.
Select [Debug] [Sampling Trace] [Read from PLC] in GX Works2.
Utilizing GX Works2 sampling trace data in GX Developer
Operation
1. Write the sampling trace data, which are set in GX Works2, to the programmable
controller CPU. Select [Debug] [Sampling Trace] [Write to PLC] in GX Works2.
2. Read the sampling trace data from the programmable controller CPU in GX Developer.
Perform the "Read from PLC" function of "Trace settings PLC operation" in GX Developer.
19 - 32
19.4.7 Considerations when performing sampling trace
19.5 Measuring Scan Time
19.5 Measuring Scan Time
17
MONITORING
*1
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
*1 : Not supported by Basic model QCPU.
This section explains how to measure the initial, current, maximum, and minimum scan time for a user-defined section of a ladder or SFC program.
18
The processing time can be measured even in subroutines and interrupt programs.
This function can be performed in Simple projects only.
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
Screen display
Select [Debug] [Scan Time Measurement].
19
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Item Measurement Limit
Program Name Block No.*1 Block Name*1
Start Step
End Step
*1 : SFC programs only
Description Set the measurement range. Display the name of the program being opened.
Display the SFC block number.
Display the SFC block name.
Set the start step. For SFC program, set the SFC step number. Set the end step. For SFC program, set the SFC step number.
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
22 A
APPENDIX
2. Click the
button.
The first value, current value, maximum value, and minimum value are measured.
0.000ms is displayed when the measured time is shorter than 0.100ms.
I
For Universal model QCPU, the scan time 0.001ms or longer can be measured.
INDEX
19 - 33
19 DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
Scan time measurement range � By selecting a range on the ladder editor/SFC diagram editor and selecting [Debug] [Scan Time Measurement], the selected range can be set to "Start Step" and "End Step". � For a ladder program, when a step specified as "Start Step" or "End Step" exists in the ladder program, the measurement range is set in units of ladder blocks which include the selected range.
When scan time cannot be measured � Scan time cannot be measured depending on a step specified as "Start Step" or "End Step". For details of the case that scan time cannot be measured, refer to the following manual. User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals) of the CPU module to be used
19 - 34
19.6 Debugging Programs with Simulation Function
19.6 Debugging Programs with Simulation Function
17
MONITORING
Q CPU L CPU ReFmXote HFeXad FX
This section explains how to debug programs with the simulation function.
This function is supported only by ladder and ST programs of Simple project. The following table shows the main step execution functions.
18
Item Break execution Step execution Partial execution
Description
Execute a program until set break conditions are satisfied. Break conditions are set with break points or break devices.
Execute a program one step at a time.
Execute a program partially from the specified point. A partial execution is executed by executing a break execution with set break points and break devices.
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
19
The following are program editors in a debugging process with the step execution functions.
<Example of step execution in ladder program>
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
<Example of step execution in ST program>
21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
19 - 35
19 DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
Online functions which can be performed during step execution The RUN/STOP status on the monitoring status bar becomes STEP-RUN ( ) when the step execution is executed. The following are the Online functions which can be performed when the monitoring status is STEP-RUN. � Write to PLC function (SFC file batch online program change is not supported.) � Verify with PLC function � Remote operation � Delete PLC Data function
Editing programs during step execution For ladder programs, programs can be edited even when the step execution is being executed. Note that, however, when the step execution is executed in the status in which the program in GX Works2 and the program in the virtual programmable controller do not match, then the step execution function is executed on the program in the virtual programmable controller as the basis. Therefore, the cursor position of canceled position may be displayed at a different position.
Ladder blocks with yellow background In a ladder program, the step execution may not be executed normally in ladder blocks with yellow background which indicates a program cannot be displayed as a ladder program.
Programs with "Standby" execution type The step execution cannot be executed on programs in which "Standby" is set for execution type in the program setting. However, the step execution can be executed on a program in which the execution start position is set for "From current cursor position" in the execution option setup (Section 19.6.8), and the cursor is positioned in a program in which "Standby" is set.
19 - 36
19.6 Debugging Programs with Simulation Function
17
Restrictions
MONITORING
Restrictions after setting break conditions and skip range All settings of break condition and skip range are canceled when a data name or a library name is changed/deleted in a
project.
Break in ST control syntax The following are the considerations when executing the step execution on an ST program contains ST control syntax.
� A break execution may be executed in a line of control syntax which is not calculated. When the step execution is executed on the following program in which W10=0 is set for the break condition, the
18
break execution is executed in the 6th line. Note that, however, since a calculation is not processed in the line where
the break execution is executed, this break does not affect the calculation result.
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
ST line number 1 2 3 4 5
ST program FOR W10 := 0 TO 3 DO
CASE W10 OF 0: D0 := D0 + 1; 1..3:
6
D1 :=D1 +1;
7
END_CASE;
8
END_FOR;
Operation � � � � � When W10=0, this line is not processed but the break execution is executed. � �
� In step execution, a break execution is not executed in a RETURN syntax and an EXIT syntax. When the step execution is executed on the following program, the break execution is not executed in the 3rd and 4th lines even if the break condition is satisfied.
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
19 20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
ST line number 1 2
ST program W0 := 0; IF X0 THEN
3
RETURN;
4
END_IF;
5
6
FOR W0 := 0 TO 4 DO
7
IF X1 THEN
8
EXIT;
9
END_IF;
10
END_FOR;
11
W0 := 0;
Operation
�
�
The break execution is not executed in the RETURN syntax when X0=ON in the step execution. (The break execution is executed in the first line.)
�
�
�
�
The break execution is not executed in the EXIT syntax when X1=ON in the step execution. (The break execution is executed in the 11th line.)
�
�
�
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
21 22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
Step execution on successive function blocks When function blocks are used successively in the ST program, even if a step execution is canceled in the process of
A
the function blocks, the canceled-position cursor may be placed at one step before the next function block instruction.
The following program is an example when a step execution is canceled in the process of the successive function
blocks.
APPENDIX
I
When using the same function blocks multiple times When the step execution is executed, a break position may move to the first instance at the timing of entering the second and the following instances. This phenomenon occurs when the instance created from the same function block in the program file is used multiple times.
19 - 37
INDEX
19 DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
19.6.1 Debugging procedure
The following flow chart explains the procedure to debug programs.
Start Start the simulation. ( *1)
Set break points. ( *2)
Set break devices. ( *3)
Set a skip range. ( *4)
Is the setting of the break No condition completed?
Yes
Execute the break execution. ( *5)
Cancel the program execution at a specified timing. ( *6) Check the settings of break points and break devices.
Is break condition satisfied? No
Yes
Execute the step execution. ( *7)
*1 : Section 18.2 *2 : Section 19.6.2 *3 : Section 19.6.3 *4 : Section 19.6.4 *5 : Section 19.6.6 *6 : Section 19.6.7 *7 : Section 19.6.5 *8 : Section 19.6.9
No Was the problem solved?
Yes Stop the step execution.
( *8) End the simulation.
( *1)
End
19 - 38
19.6.1 Debugging procedure
19.6 Debugging Programs with Simulation Function
19.6.2 Setting break points
17
MONITORING
By setting a break point, a step execution can be canceled at a specific position in a program. Break points are set in: step unit for ladder program, and line unit for ST program. Break points can be set up to 64 points in an entire project.
Setting/canceling break points
18
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
Set/cancel break points.
Operating procedure
1. Move the cursor to the position to set a break point or cancel the set break point.
19
2. Select [Debug] [Break Setting] [Set/Cancel Break Point] ( ).
A break point is set at the cursor position. When the break point is already set, it is canceled. Set break points are registered on the Break Point window.
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
<Example of break points (for ladder)>
20
<Example of break points (for ST)>
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
When break point overlaps with other indications When a break point overlaps with a canceled-position cursor on the ladder editor, the canceled-position cursor is displayed as a priority. When a break point overlaps with other indications such as a skip range and mixed color is displayed at the overlapped position. The following program is an example of overlapped indications.
A break point which overlaps with a canceled-position cursor
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A break point which overlaps with a skip range
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
19.6.2 Setting break points
19 - 39
19 DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
Enabling/disabling break points
Enable/disable set break points. The break point function is executed at the position with enabled break point. The break point function is not executed when the break point is disabled.
Operating procedure
1. Move the cursor to the break point to be enabled/disabled. 2. Select [Debug] [Break Setting] [Enable/Disable Break Point] ( ).
The break point at the cursor position is enabled/disabled.
<Example of disabled break point (for ladder program)>
Disabled break point
<Example of disabled break point (for ST)> Disabled break point
Canceling all break points
Cancel all break points.
Operating procedure
� Select [Debug] [Break Setting] [Cancel All Break Points] ( ).
All break points are canceled.
19 - 40
19.6.2 Setting break points
19.6 Debugging Programs with Simulation Function
Setting break conditions on Break Point window
17
MONITORING
Display a list of set break points. Set break conditions and the number of execution counts for break points.
Screen display
Select [View] [Docking Window] [Debug] [Break Point] ( ).
18
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
Operating procedure
� Set the items on the screen.
Item Enable/Disable Data Name Position
Program Content
Break Condition Always ON OFF Rising Falling
Execution Count
Description
Display enabled/disabled status of break points. : Enabled : Disabled
Display program names to which break point is set.
Display positions of set break points in a program. For ladder program: Step numbers displayed on the editor. For ST program: Line numbers
Display program content of set break points. For ladder program: Instructions (list format), pointers (P), or interrupt pointers (I) For ST program: Text
Set break conditions. This item can be set for ladder programs only.
Execute the break execution when scans are completed for a set number of times.
Execute the break execution when the specified step/pointer is ON after scans are completed for a set number of times.
Execute the break executions when the specified step/pointer is OFF after scans are completed for a set number of times.
Execute the break execution when the specified step/pointer turns ON from OFF after scans are completed for a set number of times.
Execute the break execution when the specified step/pointer turns OFF from ON after scans are completed for a set number of times.
Set the number of scans until break execution is executed. This item can be set for ladder programs only.
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
19 20 21 22 A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
19.6.2 Setting break points
19 - 41
19 DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
Screen button
Jumps to the selected break point.
Enables/disables the selected break point.
Cancels the selected break point.
Cancels all break points.
Counting and resetting number of execution counts The number of execution counts is counted/reset according to the following rules. � When two or more break points are passed in one scan, the passed number of times is counted as the number of execution counts. � Break points which are not passed by an instruction such as the jump instruction are not counted as the number of execution counts. � The execution count of all break points is reset for each break. � When changing the number of execution counts, the corresponding execution count of break point is reset.
19 - 42
19.6.2 Setting break points
19.6 Debugging Programs with Simulation Function
19.6.3 Setting break devices
17
MONITORING
By setting a break device, a step execution can be canceled when the value of device/label satisfies the
specific condition.
Break devices can be set up to 16 points in total of bit devices and word devices.
When a break device is set, a break execution is executed at the instruction which is the one after the execution of the calculation to satisfy the break condition.
18
In order to execute the break execution after the break condition is satisfied, disable or cancel the break
devices.
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
Setting/canceling break devices
Set/cancel break devices, or enable/disable set break devices.
19
The break device function is executed at the position with enabled break device.
The break device function is not executed when the break device is disabled.
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
Screen display
Select [View] [Docking Window] [Debug] [Break Device] ( ).
20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
Break device information list
21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
19.6.3 Setting break devices
19 - 43
19 DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
Operating procedure
1. Click the
button.
A blank row is added to the last row of the break device information list.
2. Set the items on the screen.
Item Combination
Judge each break device (OR condition) Judge all break devices (AND condition)
Enable/Disable
Comparative Source (Device/Label)
Condition
Rising Falling =
<
>
<=
>=
<> Comparative Target (Value/Device/Label) Comparative Type
Description
�
Select this to execute the break execution when any condition of break devices is satisfied.
Select this to execute the break execution when conditions of all break devices are satisfied.
Enable/disable the break device. Selected: Enabled Cleared: Disabled
Enter the comparative source device/label. For a local label, enter data in a 'program name/label name' format.
Select the comparative condition. The condition selection changes according to the comparative source device/ label.
Execute the break execution when the comparative device/label rises.
Execute the break execution when the comparative device/label falls.
Execute the break execution when the value of comparative source device/ label matches with the value of comparative target device/label.
Execute the break execution when the value of comparative source device/ label is smaller than the value of comparative target device/label.
Execute the break execution when the value of comparative source device/ label is larger than the value of comparative target device/label.
Execute the break execution when the value of comparative source device/ label is the same as or less than the value of comparative target device/label.
Execute the break execution when the value of comparative source device/ label is the same as or more than the value of comparative target device/ label.
Execute the break execution when the value of comparative source device/ label does not match with the value of comparative target device/label.
Enter a comparative target device/label.
Set the data type to compare comparative source and comparative target.
Screen button
Cancels the selected break device.
Cancels all break points.
Canceling all break devices
Cancel all break devices.
Operating procedure
� Select [Debug] [Break Setting] [Cancel All Break Devices] ( ).
All break devices are canceled.
19 - 44
19.6.3 Setting break devices
19.6 Debugging Programs with Simulation Function
19.6.4 Setting skip ranges
17
MONITORING
A skip range is a range in which a program will not be executed during the step execution. A range can be set in ladder block unit for ladder programs. Up to 16 ranges can be set in a project.
Setting/canceling skip ranges
18
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
Set a skip range, or cancel the set skip range.
Operating procedure
1. Select a ladder block to set a skip range.
19
Multiple ladder blocks can be selected by selecting a range.
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
2. Select [Debug] [Skip Setting] [Set/Cancel Skip Range] ( ).
The skip range is set. When the skip range is already set, it is canceled.
Multiple skip ranges set within the selected ladder blocks are all canceled.
Set skip ranges are registered on the Skip Range window.
20
<Example of skip range>
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
Skip range setting in ST programs Skip ranges cannot be set in ST programs.
21
When skip range overlaps with other indications When a skip range overlaps with other indications such as a break point and mixed color is displayed at the overlapped position.
Enabling/disabling skip ranges
22
Enable/disable the skip range at the cursor position. The program of the ladder block with enabled skip range is not executed. When the skip range is disabled, the program of the ladder block with set skip range is also executed.
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
Operating procedure
1. Move the cursor to the skip range to be enabled/disabled.
A
2. Select [Debug] [Skip Setting] [Enable/Disable Skip Range] ( ).
The skip range at the cursor position is enabled/disabled.
<Example of disabled skip range>
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
19.6.4 Setting skip ranges
19 - 45
19 DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
Canceling all skip ranges
Cancel all skip ranges.
Operating procedure
� Select [Debug] [Skip Setting] [Cancel All Skip Ranges] ( ).
All skip ranges are canceled.
Displaying Skip Range window
Display a list of set skip ranges.
Screen display
Select [View] [Docking Window] [Debug] [Skip Range] ( ).
Display contents
Item
Enable/Disable
Data Name Start End
Description
Enable/disable the skip range. : Enabled : Disabled
Display the program name to which the skip range is set.
Display the start position of the skip range with a step number.
Display the end position of the skip range with a step number.
Screen button
Jumps to the start position of the selected skip range.
Enables/disables the selected skip range.
Cancels the selected skip range.
Cancels all skip ranges.
19 - 46
19.6.4 Setting skip ranges
19.6 Debugging Programs with Simulation Function
19.6.5 Executing program one step at a time
17
MONITORING
Execute programs one step at a time.
Operating procedure
� Select [Debug] [Step Execution] [Step Execution] ( ).
18
One instruction of a program is executed for ladder program, and one line of a program is executed
for ST program.
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
When the step execution is executed on a function block in the program, the step execution is
executed on the program in the function block.
The canceled-position cursor is displayed on the function block while the step execution is being
executed on the program in the function block.
19
19.6.6 Executing program until condition is satisfied
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
Execute a program until the condition is satisfied.
Operating procedure
20
� Select [Debug] [Step Execution] [Break Execution] ( ).
When the break condition is satisfied, the break execution is stopped.
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
When multiple break conditions are satisfied simultaneously
21
When the conditions of break point and break device are satisfied simultaneously, the Break Point window is activated
and the cursor moves to the break point where the condition is satisfied.
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
19.6.5 Executing program one step at a time
19 - 47
19 DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
19.6.7 Canceling step execution
Cancel the step execution.
Operating procedure
� Select [Debug] [Step Execution] [Cancel] ( ).
The step execution is canceled. The canceled-position cursor is displayed at the canceled position.
<Example of canceled-position cursor (for ladder program)>
Canceled-position cursor
<Example of canceled-position cursor (for ST)> Canceled-position cursor
Canceled-position cursor The canceled-position cursor is displayed on the program editor in which the step execution is executed as described below. � The step execution is canceled. � The step execution completed without satisfying the break condition. � The break condition is satisfied and the step execution is canceled.
19 - 48
19.6.7 Canceling step execution
19.6 Debugging Programs with Simulation Function
19.6.8 Setting options for step execution
17
MONITORING
Set options for the step execution function. Set the start position of the step execution and the setting for the automatic step execution.
Screen display
18
Select [Debug] [Step Execution] [Execution Option] ( ).
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
19
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Item Execution Start Position
From start From canceled position From current cursor position Automatic Step Execution Execute step execution automatically
Repetition Count
Execution Interval
Description
Set the execution position of the step execution. The setting will be changed depending on the last operation that is performed. For details, refer to Point in this section.
Execute the step execution from the start of the program according to the setting set on the <<Program>> tab of PLC parameter.
Execute the step execution from the canceled position.
Execute the step execution from the current cursor position on the active program editor. When the program editor is not active, the operation is the same as that of "From start".
�
Select this to execute the step execution automatically. The automatic step execution is executed by executing the step execution after setting this item.
Set the number of times the step execution is executed automatically. When this item is blank, the step execution is executed repeatedly until the break condition is satisfied or the step execution is canceled. This item is applicable when "Execute Step execution automatically" is selected.
Set the cycle of automatic step execution in 100ms unit. This item is applicable when "Execute Step execution automatically" is selected.
2. Click the
button.
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
APPENDIX
21 22 A I
INDEX
19.6.8 Setting options for step execution
19 - 49
19 DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
Setting execution start position The setting of the execution start position will be changed depending on the last operation that is performed. The following table shows the execution start position corresponding to the operation that is performed.
Last-performed operation Simulation start, step execution stop Cancellation, break execution, step execution
Execution Start Position From start From canceled position
19.6.9 Stopping step execution
Stop the step execution.
Operating procedure
� Select [Debug] [Step Execution] [Stop] ( ).
The step execution is stopped. The canceled-position cursor on the program editor is hidden.
19 - 50
19.6.9 Stopping step execution
19.7 Using CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool
19.7 Using CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool
17
MONITORING
*1
*2
Q CPU L CPU Remote HFeXad FX
*1 : High-speed Universal model QCPU only
*2 : Not supported by L02S and L02S-P.
18
This section explains how to start CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool from the menu of GX
Works2. To start CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool, install the logging configuration tool in advance. For the operation methods, refer to the following manual.
QnUDVCPU/LCPU User's Manual (Data Logging Function)
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
Screen display
19
Select [Tool] [Logging Configuration Tool].
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
Supported versions of logging configuration tool The following table shows the supported versions of logging configuration tool for each programmable controller type.
Programmable controller type LCPU
Version of logging configuration tool 1.00A or later
A
High-speed Universal model QCPU
1.25B or later
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
19 - 51
19 DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
MEMO
19 - 52
17
MONITORING
20 OPERATING
18
PROGRAMMABLE
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
CONTROLLER CPU
19
This chapter explains how to change the execution status and setting the clock of the programmable controller CPU from GX Works2.
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
20
20.1 Remote Operation of Programmable Controller CPU 20 - 2
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
20.2 Operating Redundant CPUs
20 - 6
20.3 Formatting Programmable Controller CPU Memory
20 - 8
20.4 Clearing Programmable Controller Memory
20 - 10
21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
20.5 Arranging Programmable Controller Memory
20 - 13
20.6 Setting Clock on Programmable Controller CPU
20 - 14
20.7 Registering/Canceling Display Module Menu
20 - 16
22
20.8 Start Ethernet Adapter Module Configuration Tool
20 - 18
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
20 - 1
20 OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
20.1 Remote Operation of Programmable Controller CPU
Q CPU L CPU ReFmXote Head FX
This section explains how to switch the RUN/STOP status of the programmable controller CPU and allowing the memory card removal from GX Works2.
Screen display
Select [Online] [Remote Operation].
<High Performance model QCPU>
<FXCPU>
<Redundant CPU>
20 - 2
20.1 Remote Operation of Programmable Controller CPU
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Item
Description
Connection Channel List Display the information of the connection destination.
Specify Execution Target*1,*2
Set the target station of remote operation.
Currently Specified Station
Select this to perform the remote operation only on the station specified in the connection destination setting.
All Stations
Select this to perform the remote operation on the station specified in the connection destination setting and all the stations on the same network. Set a target network with "Specify Module No."*3 or "Specify Network No.".
Specified Group
Select this to perform the remote operation on the station specified in the connection destination setting and each station of the specific group on the specified network. Set a target network with "Specify Module No." or "Specify Network No.", and set a group number with "Specify Group No.".
Specify both systems
Select this to perform the remote operation on the both systems (control system and standby system) with the route specified on the Transfer Setup screen. This item is applicable to Redundant CPU only.
Operation
Select the operation details.
RUN
STOP
PAUSE*2
Select this to switch the operating status of the programmable controller CPU.
Latch Clear*2
RESET*2
Remove Memory Card*2, *3
Select this to remove the memory card while the programmable controller CPU is ON. "Specify Execution Target" cannot be set. The station set as a connection target can only be executed.
Operation during RUN*2
Set the status of the device memory and signal flow when the programmable controller CPU is switched to RUN.
Device Memory
Select whether to clear the device memory.
Signal Flow
Select whether to retain the signal flow.
Redundant status*2,*3
Display the operation mode and system status of Redundant CPU. This item is applicable to Redundant CPU only.
*1 : When the target network is CC-Link IE Field Network, the target station can be specified with "Currently Specified Station" and "All Stations".
*2 : Not supported by FXCPU. *3 : Not supported by LCPU.
2. Click the
button.
The operating status of the programmable controller CPU is changed.
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
MONITORING
17 18 19 20 21 22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
20 - 3
20 OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
Remote operation and RUN/STOP switch for QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU When operation to the programmable controller CPU differs among controls by the remote operation, RUN/STOP switch, and remote RUN/PAUSE contact, the programmable controller CPU operates according to the priority shown below:
Operation to the programmable controller CPU STOP PAUSE RUN
Priority 1 2 3
The following table shows the operating status after RUN/STOP switching on the programmable controller CPU or remote RUN/PAUSE contact operation.
-
Programmable controller CPU switch
Remote RUN/STOP contact is ON.
RUN
STOP
(The programmable controller CPU is in STOP.)
RUN
RUN
STOP
STOP
Remote operation
STOP PAUSE Latch clear
STOP PAUSE Inoperable*1
STOP STOP Latch clear
STOP STOP Latch clear
RESET*2
Inoperable*1
RESET
RESET
*1 : Operable when the programmable controller CPU is switched to STOP by remote operation. *2 : The remote reset operation must be enabled on the <<PLC System>> tab of PLC parameter.
Remote reset operation on Redundant CPU A remote reset operation on Redundant CPU may not be performed depending on the status of the control system or the standby system. The following table shows the CPU status at a remote reset operation and the operation results.
: Applicable �: Not applicable
Current redundant CPU status
Control system status
Standby system status
RUN/PAUSE
RUN/PAUSE STOP*1/Stop error
Remote reset operation result
Control system
Standby system
� �
STOP*1/Stop error
RUN*2/PAUSE STOP*1/Stop error
�
*1 : A remote reset operation cannot be performed when a remote operation is performed on a Redundant CPU from other GX Works2.
*2 : A system switch occurs and the system is activated.
Considerations for removing a memory card Turn OFF SM605 to allow the memory card removal. If the memory card is removed when not allowed, the programmable controller CPU becomes in an error status.
20 - 4
20.1 Remote Operation of Programmable Controller CPU
17
Counting modules to set "Specify Module No."
MONITORING
Physically count the module from the programmable controller side, and specify the number.
However, note that the target modules to be counted are MELSECNET/H network modules and CC-Link IE Controller
Network modules only. Do not include other modules such as Ethernet modules, CC-Link master/local modules, and
CC-Link IE Field Network modules.
The following figure shows an example of counting modules.
18
1st module 2nd module 3rd module 4th module
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
Programmable controller CPU
Ethernet MNET/10(H) MNET/10(H) CC IE Field CC IE Control MNET/10(H)
<Terms on the figure>
Ethernet
: Q series-compatible E71
MNET/10(H) : MELSECNET/H network module
CC IE Field : CC-Link IE Field Network module
CC IE Control : CC-Link IE Controller Network module
Remote operation of FXCPU M8035 (forced RUN mode), M8036 (forced RUN command), and M8037 (forced STOP command) are controlled. The remote operation is possible regardless of the status of the programmable controller CPU side RUN/STOP switch. Programmable controller CPUs that support the remote operation are as follows: FX1S, FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N, FX2NC, FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, and FX3UC
Restrictions
Performing remote operation on other stations When performing the remote operation on other stations with "All Stations" or "Specified Group", the remote operation cannot be performed on the following modules. � ACPU/QnACPU
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
19 20 21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
20 - 5
20 OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
20.2 Operating Redundant CPUs
*1
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX *1 : Redundant CPU only
This section explains how to switch the system, change the operation mode, and copy memory data from the control system to the standby system from GX Works2. This function cannot be performed in the debug mode.
Screen display
Select [Online] [Redundant Operation].
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Item Connection channel list Redundant operation
System switching
Change operation mode
Copy memory
Memory copy progress status Redundant status
Description
Display the information of the specified connection target.
Select a redundant operation to be performed.
Change the system of the current connection target from the control system to the standby system.
Change the operation mode on the current connection target. The mode can be changed from backup mode to separate mode, and vice versa.
Copy data of standard RAM, standard ROM, and program memory from the control system to the standby system.
Display memory copy progress. "Memory copy failed" is displayed when the memory copy fails.
Display the operation mode and the system status of Redundant CPU.
2. Click the
button.
20 - 6
20.2 Operating Redundant CPUs
17
MONITORING
Considerations of memory copy function The following functions cannot be performed on the control system while the memory copy function is being performed.
� Writing data to a running CPU.
� Writing data to a programmable controller CPU (flash ROM)
� Switching systems
� Changing operation mode
18
� Copying memory data in a redundant operation
� Formatting programmable controller CPU memory
� Copying program memory data to ROM
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
19
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
20 - 7
20 OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
20.3 Formatting Programmable Controller CPU Memory
Q CPU L CPU ReFmXote Head FX
This section explains how to format the programmable controller CPU memory or the memory card. The function is used when using the programmable controller CPU and the memory card for the first time or clearing all data stored in them. However, the Flash card cannot be formatted using this function. (Flash cards do not require formatting.)
Screen display
Select [Online] [PLC Memory Operation] [Format PLC Memory].
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Item
Description
Connection Channel List
Display the information of the connection destination setting.
Target Memory
Set the memory to be formatted.
Format Type
Select the format type.
Do not create a user setting system area (the required system area only)
Select this to create the necessary system area only.
Create a user setting system area
Select this to create the necessary system area, the area for highspeed monitoring from another station, and the area for enabling Online program change of multiple blocks.
2. Click the
button.
The target memory is formatted.
20 - 8
20.3 Formatting Programmable Controller CPU Memory
Format types
17
MONITORING
The system area is an area created on the programmable controller CPU memory. The system area consists of the 'Necessary system area' automatically created upon formatting the programmable controller CPU memory and 'User setting system area' created by the user. In the necessary system area, data such as local devices are stored.
The user setting system areas are set for the following purposes:
18
Area for enabling high-speed monitoring from another station
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
The area is set to accelerate monitoring from peripheral such as GX Works2 connected to a serial
communication module and other communication module.
Change the capacity according to the number of device points (capacity) to be monitored through a
serial communication module or other communication module and the volume of other user data to
be stored in the program memory.
19
The setting range for Basic model QCPU, and Universal model QCPU (Q00UJ/Q00U/Q01U) is 0 to
3k steps.
The setting range for High Performance model QCPU, Process CPU, Redundant CPU, Universal
model QCPU (except for Q00UJ/Q00U/Q01U), and LCPU is 0 to 15k steps.
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
Area for enabling Online program change of multiple blocks
This area is set to enable Online program change of multiple locations (multiple blocks) simultaneously.
20
The following table shows the restrictions on Online program change of multiple blocks according to
the capacity.
Since 4k steps are secured automatically other than for the program memory, this setting is not
required for Universal model QCPU and LCPU.
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
Description
The number of blocks for simultaneous writing The number of steps per block for writing The number of used pointers (P, I) per block for writing
Secured system area capacity for Online program change of multiple blocks
Function version A
Basic model QCPU Function version B or later
High Performance model QCPU/ Process CPU/Redundant CPU
�
0k steps 1.25k steps 2.5k steps 0k steps 2k steps 4k steps
Online program change of multiple blocks is not possible.
Online program change of multiple blocks is not possible.
Max. 32 blocks
Max. 512 steps
Max. 64 blocks
Max. 1024 steps
Not limited
Online program change of multiple blocks is not possible.
Max. 32 blocks Max. 512 steps
Max. 50
Max. 64 blocks Max. 1024 steps
Max. 100
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
21 22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
Device memory
The device memory values cannot be cleared with the Memory format function. To clear the device memory values, execute [Online] [PLC Memory Operation] [Format PLC Memory].
A
(Section 20.4)
APPENDIX
Formatting a memory card To format an SRAM card, ATA card or SD memory card to be used on the programmable controller CPU, select [Online] [PLC Memory Operation] [Format PLC Memory].
If it is formatted using other functions such as the Windows�, the card may not be usable when it is installed to a programmable controller CPU.
Memory in which user setting system areas can be created The areas can be created only in the program memory.
I
INDEX
20 - 9
20 OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
20.4 Clearing Programmable Controller Memory
Q CPU L CPU ReFmXote HFeXad FX
This section explains how to initialize device memory data on the programmable controller CPU and file registers stored in the memory card and setting them to '0'.
QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU
Initialize device memory data on the programmable controller CPU and file registers stored in the memory card and set them to '0'. However, the memory clear function is not available for standard ROM/Flash cards/SD memory cards.
Screen display
Select [Online] [PLC Memory Operation] [Clear PLC Memory].
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Item Connection Channel List Clear Device's whole Memory
Include Latch
Clear all File Registers Target Memory*1 All Files*1
Specific File*1
*1 : For QCPU (Q mode) only
Description Display the information of the connection destination setting. Select this to clear the device memory data. Select this to clear device data in the latch range also. The device data for which latch clear is disabled is also cleared. Select this to clear the file register data.
Select the memory in which file registers are stored.
Select this to clear all file registers in the target memory.
Select this to clear the selected file register memory. Select a file name of the file register.
2. Click the
button.
The target memory data is cleared.
20 - 10
20.4 Clearing Programmable Controller Memory
17
Operation of the PLC Memory Clear function during the monitoring of local devices When the "Clear Device's whole Memory" operation is executed during the monitoring of local devices, local devices are cleared in the programs selected in the 'local device monitoring target selection field' on the monitoring status bar.
MONITORING
FXCPU
18
Initialize device memory data in FXCPU and resetting them to '0'.
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
Screen display
Select [Online] [PLC Memory Operation] [Clear PLC Memory].
19
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
Item Connection Channel List Target Data
PLC Memory
Data Device
Bit Device
Description
Display the information of the connection destination setting.
Select the device memory to be cleared.
Select this to clear all data. (Programs, comments, parameters, file registers, device memory, and extended file registers)
Select this to clear all registers. (Data registers, file registers, RAM file registers, special registers, extended registers, and extended file registers)
Select this to clear all bit devices. (X, Y, M, S, T, and C) Additionally, the current values of 'T' and 'C' are reset to '0'.
2. Click the
button.
The target data is cleared.
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
22 A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
20 - 11
20 OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
Executing condition of the memory clear for FXCPU
Item
PLC memory
Data device Bit device
Memory
Available for the built-in memory, and RAM/EEPROM (PROTECT switch OFF)/FLASH memory (PROTECT switch OFF) cassette. Not available for the EEPROM (PROTECT switch ON)/FLASH memory (PROTECT switch ON) and EPROM cassette.
Equivalent to executing condition to PLC memory
Available for all the memory.
Considerations when using FXCPU
� Execute this function when the programmable controller CPU is in STOP status. Memory data cannot be cleared in RUN status.
� When the status of the programmable controller CPU is changed to STOP by the remote operation, bit devices cannot be cleared. Execute the PLC memory clear function after switching the status of the programmable controller CPU to STOP.
� When the PLC memory clear function is executed while an FX3S/FX3G/FX3GC programmable controller CPU and an Ethernet port are connected directly, a communication error caused by Windows Firewall may occur. In this case, open the Control Panel and specify GX Works2 as an 'Allowed apps', 'Allowed program', or 'exception' in the Windows Firewall setting.
20 - 12
20.5 Arranging Programmable Controller Memory
20.5 Arranging Programmable Controller Memory
17
MONITORING
Q CPU L CPU ReFmXote HFeXad FX
This section explains how to secure consecutive free memory areas by arranging the data stored in
program memory/standard RAM of the programmable controller CPU or memory card. Use this function to rearrange files whose arrangement became discontinuous by operations such as
18
Delete PLC Data.
However, the Memory arrangement function is not available for standard ROM/Flash cards/SD
memory cards.
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
The following figure shows how consecutive free areas are created with the Memory arrangement
function after Delete PLC Data.
19
Program A 8K
Program A 8K
Program A 8K
Program B
Free area
Program C
28K
6K
6K
6K
Program C Delete PLC data Program C Memory format
6K
(Delete program B.)
6K
Free area
Free area
Free area
14K
8K
8K
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
20
Total free space
8K
Maximum consecutive 8K
free space
Total free space
14K
Maximum consecutive 8K
free space
Total free space
14K
Maximum consecutive 14K
free space
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
Screen display
Select [Online] [PLC Memory Operation] [Arrange PLC Memory].
21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Item Connection Channel List Target Memory
Description
Display the information of the connection destination setting.
A
Set the memory to be arranged.
2. Click the
button.
The target memory is arranged.
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
20 - 13
20 OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
20.6 Setting Clock on Programmable Controller CPU
Q CPU L CPU ReFmXote HFeXad FX
This section explains how to set the clock on a programmable controller CPU. The clock setting function is not supported by FX0S, FX0, and FX1.
Screen display
Select [Online] [Set Clock].
Date and time
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Item
Description
Date and time
Set the date and time.
Specify Execution Target*1,*2
Set the target station whose clock is to be set.
Currently Specified Station
Select this to set the clock only upon the station specified in the connection destination setting.
All Stations
Select this to perform the remote operation to the station specified in the connection destination setting and all the stations on the specified network. Set a target network with "Specify Module No."*3 or "Specify Network No.".
Specified Group
Select this to perform the remote operation to the station specified in the connection destination setting and each station of the specific group on the specified network. Set a target network with module mounted on the station specified in the connection destination setting for "Specify Module No." or "Specify Network No.", and set a group number with "Specify Group No.".
*1 : Not supported by FXCPU. *2 : The target station can be specified with "Currently Specified Station" or "All Stations" when the target network is CC-
Link IE Field Network. *3 : Not supported by LCPU.
2. Click the
button.
The programmable controller CPU clock is set.
Screen button
Applies the time of personal computer to the 'date and time' boxes.
20 - 14
20.6 Setting Clock on Programmable Controller CPU
17
MONITORING
Clock setting for QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU For QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU, the clock setting can be set regardless of the ON/OFF status of the clock setting device
'SM1028'. Note that the ON/OFF status of 'SM1028' does not change upon clock setting.
Considerations of the clock setting
In the clock setting, a time-lag error may appear due to the span of transfer. Counting modules to set "Specify Module No."
18
Refer to Point in Section 20.1.
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
Restrictions
Performing clock setting to other stations
When performing the clock setting to other stations with "All Stations" or "Specified Group", the clock setting cannot be performed to the following modules.
19
� ACPU/QnACPU
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
20 - 15
20 OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
20.7 Registering/Canceling Display Module Menu
*1
Q CPU L CPU Remote HFeXad FX *1 : Not supported by L02S and L02S-P.
This section explains how to register/cancel menu items to/from a standard ROM or SD memory card to operate the intelligent function modules using the LCPU display module. Use this function to confirm or change each setting of intelligent function module by operating the display module. For details of functions and operations of display module, refer to the following manual. MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals)
For details of intelligent function modules which support registration/cancellation of display module menu, and functions which can be performed on each intelligent function module, refer to the following manual. Manual of the intelligent function module to be used
Screen display
Select [Online] [Register/Cancel Display Module Menu].
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Item
Target Memory
Register/Cancel Menu Target Module Menu Language
Description Select the target memory to which the display module menu items are to be registered/canceled. Select registration/cancellation of the menus. Select the target module of the menu items to be registered. Select the language of the menu items.
2. Click the
button.
The display module menu items are registered/canceled.
20 - 16
20.7 Registering/Canceling Display Module Menu
Modules and corresponding GX Works2 versions The following table shows the modules and corresponding GX Works2 versions for registering/canceling the display module menu.
Module type Analog
Temperature control
Counter Serial communication CC-Link
Module name
L60AD4 L60DA4
L60TCTT4 L60TCTT4BW L60TCRT4 L60TCRT4BW
LD62 LD62D
LJ71C24 LJ71C24-R2
LJ61BT11
Version GX Works2 Version 1.24A GX Works2 Version 1.62Q GX Works2 Version 1.31H GX Works2 Version 1.24A
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
MONITORING
17 18 19
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
20 - 17
20 OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
20.8 Start Ethernet Adapter Module Configuration Tool
Q CPU L CPU ReFmXote HFeXad FX
This section explains how to start the Ethernet adapter module configuration tool. For details of Ethernet adapter module configuration tool, refer to the following manual. CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet Adapter Module User's Manual
Operating procedure
1. Select [Tool] [Ethernet Adapter Module Configuration Tool].
The Ethernet Adapter Module Configuration Tool screen is displayed.
2. Enter the IP address or domain name of the Ethernet adapter module to
"Connection Destination", and click the
button.
A default web browser is activated and a start screen of the Ethernet adapter module configuration tool is displayed.
20 - 18
17
MONITORING
21 DIAGNOSING
18
PROGRAMMABLE
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
CONTROLLER STATUS
19
This chapter explains how to display system status and error codes of the programmable controller CPU.
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
21.1 Diagnosing Programmable Controller CPU
20
21 - 2
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
21.2 Diagnosing MELSECNET
21 - 14
21.3 Diagnosing CC-Link IE Controller Network 21.4 Diagnosing CC-Link IE Field Network
21 - 28
21 - 38
21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
21.5 Diagnosing CC-Link IE Field Network Basic
21 - 51
21.6 Diagnosing CC-Link and CC-Link/LT
21 - 53
21.7 Diagnosing Ethernet 21.8 Executing Sensor/Device Monitoring
21 - 66
22
21 - 88
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
21.9 System Monitor
21 - 89
21.10 Changing Modules Online
21 - 104
21.11 Built-in I/O Module Tools
21 - 106
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
21 - 1
21 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
21.1 Diagnosing Programmable Controller CPU
This section explains how to display system status and error codes of the programmable controller CPU.
21.1.1
Diagnosing QCPU (Q mode), LCPU, communication head module, and remote I/O module
Display the programmable controller CPU status.
Screen display
Select [Diagnostics] [PLC Diagnostics]. <QCPU (Q mode)>
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
CPU operating status
Image of programmable controller CPU
<LCPU>
CPU operating status
Image of programmable controller CPU
21 - 2
21.1.1 Diagnosing QCPU (Q mode), LCPU, communication head module, and remote I/O module
<Communication head module>
CPU operating status
Image of programmable controller CPU
21.1 Diagnosing Programmable Controller CPU
17
18
19
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
MONITORING
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
<Remote I/O module>
20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
CPU operating status
21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
Image of programmable controller CPU
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
21.1.1 Diagnosing QCPU (Q mode), LCPU, communication head module, and remote I/O module
21 - 3
21 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
Display contents
Item
Description
Monitor Status
Display the current monitor status.
Connection Channel List
Display the connection route which has been set.
CPU operating status
Single CPU system Display the operating status and switch status of the programmable controller CPU. For Redundant CPU, an enable/disable state of manual switching and a tracking communication status are also displayed.
Multiple CPU system (QCPU (Q mode) only) Display the operating status and the switch status of CPU No. 1 to No. 4.
� "Uninstallable/Blank" is displayed for a slot with no module mounted.
Image of programmable controller CPU
Perform online operations of the programmable controller CPU. (For details, Section 21.1.4 "Online operations")
Error Information
Select this to display the current error information of the programmable controller CPU.
Select this to clear user specified errors and minor errors.
To clear errors, select the errors and click the
button.
Continuation Error Information*1
Select this to display the status information of the programmable controller CPU. Display contents differ according to the programmable controller CPU. QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU
PLC Status Information
Serial Communication Error*2
Communication head module/Remote I/O module
Monitor the programmable controller CPU when the serial communication function is set.
Error information is cleared by clicking the
button.
Change the window size and position Select this to downsize the PLC Diagnostics screen and move it to the upper left of the
after error jump
entire screen when the error jump is executed.
Error History
Display the latest error history by clicking the
button.
Occurrence Order Display
Sort error history in ascending/descending order.
Status Icon Legend
Display the status icons on the screen. (Section 21.1.3 "Error icons")
*1 : For High-speed Universal model QCPU and LCPU only *2 : For Q00UJ/Q00U/Q01U/Q02U/QnUD(H)CPU only
21 - 4
21.1.1 Diagnosing QCPU (Q mode), LCPU, communication head module, and remote I/O module
21.1 Diagnosing Programmable Controller CPU
Screen button
17
MONITORING
Displays the illustration of the connection route which has been set.
/
module)
(Not supported by communication head module and remote I/O
Jumps the screen display to the sequence program step number corresponding to the selected error item/error history item.
18
However, jump is not applicable in the following cases.
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
� The error is not a program error.
� The error step information does not exist.
� The information of the program number and SFC step number of SFC block or the transition
number does not exist.
� SFC program error of FXCPU.
19
� The label program is not compiled.
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
Clears the current error information.
/
Displays the explanation screen corresponding to the error number of the selected error item/error history item.
20
Displays the latest error history.
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
Saves the error history being displayed in a file in the CSV file format.
(High-speed Universal model QCPU only)
21
Displays the operation history of a CPU module.( Displaying operation histories)
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
21.1.1 Diagnosing QCPU (Q mode), LCPU, communication head module, and remote I/O module
21 - 5
21 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
Displaying the Error Details screen The following Error Details screen is displayed by double-clicking the Present Error column or the error item in the Error History display column. SD5 to 15 (Common Error Information) and SD16 to 26 (Individual Error Information) of the programmable controller CPU are displayed on the Error Details screen. For details, refer to the manual of the programmable controller CPU module.
Double-click
"Change the window size and position after error jump" check box When "Change the window size and position after error jump" is selected and the error jump is executed, the PLC Diagnostics screen is downsized as shown below. This function applies when executing the error jump on either Present Error column or Error History display column.
The screen returns to the original size by clicking the
button.
When error is not found at error jump destination In the following conditions, an error may not be found at the error jump destination.
� When the program of the open project does not match with the program on the programmable controller CPU.
� When diagnosing programmable controller other than the one set as a connection destination in the project.
Example) When a module is selected from the CC IE Control Diagnostics and the System Monitor is activated, and the PLC Diagnostics is activated from the activated System Monitor.
Confirming operation mode of Redundant CPU The operation mode of Redundant CPU can be confirmed with the 'BACKUP' LED displayed on the 'image of programmable controller CPU'.
'BACKUP" LED status
Operation mode
ON (green)
Backup mode
ON (red)
Backup mode (In a state in which the control (RUN) cannot be continued by the system switching.)
ON (orange)
Separate mode
OFF
Debug mode
For details of CPU module LED, refer to the following manual. QCPU User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection)
21 - 6
21.1.1 Diagnosing QCPU (Q mode), LCPU, communication head module, and remote I/O module
21.1 Diagnosing Programmable Controller CPU
Displaying operation histories
17
Display operation histories for a CPU module (device writing and file writing). Note that only High-speed Universal model QCPU*1 support this function.
*1 : The module whose function version is B and first five digits of the serial number are "19062" or higher.
MONITORING
18
Operation history For the operation history, refer to the following manuals. QnUCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals) QCPU User's Manual(Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection)
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
Screen display
19
Click the
button on the PLC Diagnostics screen.
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
Operation history list
20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
Operation history detailed information
21
Display contents
Item Operation history list
No. Date and Time
Operation Type
Operation Code Overview Operation history detailed information
Description
Display operation histories for a CPU module. The most recent 10000 operation histories are displayed.
Display an operation history number.
Display a time that an operation was performed (year, month, date, hour, minute, second).
Display the information to classify operations into each type. � System � Operation
Display a value indicating each operation in four-digit decimal number.
Display an operation overview.
Display the operation history detailed information.
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
APPENDIX
22 A I
INDEX
21.1.1 Diagnosing QCPU (Q mode), LCPU, communication head module, and remote I/O module
21 - 7
21 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
Screen button
Updates the operation history with the latest information.
Clears the operation history.
Save the displayed operation history in a CSV file format.
Operation history screen The operation history can be sorted in ascending order or descending order by clicking the header of the operation history list.
21 - 8
21.1.1 Diagnosing QCPU (Q mode), LCPU, communication head module, and remote I/O module
21.1 Diagnosing Programmable Controller CPU
21.1.2 Diagnosing FXCPU
17
MONITORING
Display the programmable controller CPU status.
Screen display
Select [Diagnostics] [PLC Diagnostics].
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
18
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
19
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
Display contents
Item Connection Channel List
Error Information
PLC Panel PLC Information Monitor Status
21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
Description
Display the connection route which has been set.
Display errors being occurring. The corresponding error help is displayed by double-clicking the row of error information.
(It is also displayed by clicking the
button.)
Display the status of the connection destination CPU module.
Display the memory type and version of the connection destination CPU module.
Display the current monitor status.
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
22 A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
21.1.2 Diagnosing FXCPU
21 - 9
21 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
Screen button
For the screen buttons, refer to Section 21.1.1.
Switches the execution status of the programmable controller CPU to RUN. Not supported by FX0, FX0S, FX1, FXU, and FX2C.
Switches the execution status of the programmable controller CPU to STOP. Not supported by FX0, FX0S, FX1, FXU, and FX2C.
Displays the Clear PLC Memory screen.
Displays the Set Clock screen. Not supported by FX0S, FX0, and FX1.
21.1.3 Error icons
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
The following table shows the details of the error information icons of the programmable controller CPU.
Icon
Programmable controller CPU status
Serious error
RESET and others
Moderate error
STOP due to error in parameter or instruction codes
User specified error*1
The error that allow "STOP"/"Continue" to be specified as an "Operating Mode When There is an Error" on the <<PLC RAS>> tab of PLC parameter.
Minor error
Errors that allow RUN status such as battery low and annunciator ON
*1 : Not supported by FXCPU.
21 - 10
21.1.3 Error icons
21.1 Diagnosing Programmable Controller CPU
21.1.4 Online operations
17
MONITORING
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
The PLC Memory Operation function and the Remote Operation function can be executed from the
figure of programmable controller CPU.
When the cursor is moved to the figure of programmable controller CPU, the function menu is
18
expanded. Click the figure of programmable controller CPU to display the items to be set.
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
Screen display
<QCPU (Q mode) (For Universal model CPU)>
<PLC Memory Operation>
<Remote Operation>
19
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
<Ethernet Diagnostics>
<QCPU (Q mode) (For Redundant CPU)>
<PLC Memory Operation>
<Set Clock/Write Title>
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
20 21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
<Redundant Operation>
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
<Remote Operation>
A
<Set Clock/Write Title>
I
APPENDIX
INDEX
21.1.4 Online operations
21 - 11
21 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
<LCPU>
<PLC Memory Operation>
<Remote Operation/ PLC Module Change>
<Ethernet Diagnostics>
<Set Clock/Write Title>
<CC-Link Diagnostics>
<Communication head module (CC IE Field head module)>
<CC IE Field Diagnostics>
<Remote Operation>
<Write Title/Memory Format>
21 - 12
21.1.4 Online operations
<Remote I/O module>
21.1 Diagnosing Programmable Controller CPU
17
MONITORING
<MELSEC Diagnostics>
18
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
Display contents
PLC Memory Operation
Remote Operation/PLC Module Change Redundant Operation Ethernet Diagnostics Set Clock/Write Title CC-Link Diagnostics CC-Link IE Field Diagnostics MELSECNET Diagnostics
Item
(Type of memory operation)
Memory format Memory clear Memory arrangement
Remote operation
Backup data creation
Data restoration
Set clock Write title
19
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
Reference
Section 20.3 Section 20.4 Section 20.5
Section 20.1 Section 15.8.1 Section 15.8.2 Section 20.2 Section 21.7 Section 20.6 Section 15.1 Section 21.6.1 Section 21.4 Section 21.2
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
20 21 22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
21.1.4 Online operations
21 - 13
21 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
21.2 Diagnosing MELSECNET
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
This section explains how to check the MELSECNET/10(H) status connected to the selected module.
Screen display
Select [Diagnostics] [MELSECNET Diagnostics].
Link module selection tab
Display contents
Item
Link module selection tab
Network Information Link Information Communication Information
Description Switch the MELSECNET diagnostics result display screen for each link modules from 1 to 4. The information whether a link module is mounted or not is acquired from the mounted status. Display the network information of the selected module. Display the network status. Display the communication status of the target network.
Screen button
Displays the Network Test screen. (Section 21.2.1)
Displays the Loop Test screen. (Section 21.2.2)
Displays the Setting Confirmation Test screen. (Section 21.2.3)
Displays the Station Order Check Test screen. (Section 21.2.4)
Displays the Communication Test screen. (Section 21.2.5)
Displays the Error History Monitor screen. (Section 21.2.6)
Displays the Network Monitor Details screen. (Section 21.2.7)
21 - 14
21.2 Diagnosing MELSECNET
17
Displays the Other Station Information screen. (Section 21.2.8)
MONITORING
Network to be diagnosed
To change a network to be diagnosed, change the target station in the connection destination setting.
When another station is set in the connection destination setting
18
Test functions such as network test cannot be executed when the connection destination setting is set to other than "No
Specification".
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
MELSECNET/H (bus) connection
� The loop test and station order test cannot be executed with the MELSECNET/H (bus) connection with the coaxial
cable.
� The loop test, setting verification test, and station order test cannot be executed with the MELSECNET/H (bus)
connection with the twisted pair cable.
19
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
21 - 15
21 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
21.2.1 Network test
Perform link start/stop (cyclic transmission stop/restart) on the host station, specified station, and all stations in MELSECNET/10(H). Use this function to avoid receiving data from another stations or to avoid sending data from host station when starting up (debugging) the system.
Screen display
Click the
button on the MELSECNET Diagnostics screen.
Display contents
Item Network Information Monitor Status Host Status Operation Status of All Stations
Description Display the network information on the host station of the selected module. Display the current monitor status. Display the operating status of the host station for the selected module.
Display the link status of all stations on the tested network.
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Item Link Start/Stop
Link Start Link Stop
Operation
Forced Link Start
Designate Object Station
Object Module
Description
Set the items to execute the test.
� Select this to start the station that was stopped by the host station. � The station that was stopped by another station cannot be started.
Select this to stop a station from the host/another station.
� Select this to forcibly perform the link start on a station stopped by the host station or another station, or to forcibly perform the link start on a station to which the link stop is performed by special relay/special register. However, forced start in units of stations is not possible while all stations are stopped.
� To check whether the station is stopped by stop specification of all stations, check SW0000.
� This function can be executed when "PLC side I/F" in the connection destination setting is set to "C24".
� This function cannot be executed when the MELSECNET/10(H) board is used. � This function cannot be executed via the A series-compatible E71/QE71 module. (The
route via A series-compatible E71/QE71 is not supported by GX Works2.)
Specify the object station of the network test.
Select the object module of the network test.
21 - 16
21.2.1 Network test
2. Click the
button.
The network test is executed according to the settings.
21.2 Diagnosing MELSECNET
17
MONITORING
When another station is set in the connection destination setting
The network test function cannot be executed when the connection destination setting is set to other than "No Specification".
18
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
19
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
21.2.1 Network test
21 - 17
21 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
21.2.2 Loop test
Check the loop status of MELSECNET/10(H). Use this function to perform the loop test in the forward loop/reverse loop status with the completion of the optical loop system wiring. Wiring status of data link cables (IN/OUT) can be checked.
Screen display
Click the
button on the MELSECNET Diagnostics screen.
Display contents
Item Network Information Execute Results
Description Display the network information on the host station of the selected module. Display the number of stations and the result (normal/invalid, reserved station: R) of loop test.
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Loop Test
Item
Test Method
Parameter Designation
All Stations Designation
Object Module
Description Set the items to execute the test. Select this to test all the (slave) stations specified by the network parameter (except for reserved stations). All stations are tested, if network parameter does not exist.
Select this to test all stations.
Select the module for which loop test is executed.
2. Click the
button.
The loop test is executed according to the settings.
When another station is set in the connection destination setting The loop test function cannot be executed when the connection destination setting is set to other than "No Specification".
21 - 18
21.2.2 Loop test
21.2 Diagnosing MELSECNET
21.2.3 Setting verification test
17
MONITORING
Check the status of the station number, network number, and group number set for each station.
Use this function to check duplicates of control stations or station numbers, or whether the network
number set to the station to which GX Works2 is connected matches with the network number set in the
network parameter of host station.
18
Screen display
Click the
button on the MELSECNET Diagnostics screen.
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
19
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
Display contents
Item Network Information Execute Results
Station No. Control Station No. Duplicated Station No.
Network No.
Group No.
Reserved Station
Error Station Network Type Error Station Duplex R Sub M Station Duplication Parallel R Sub M Station Duplication
Description
Display the network information on the host station of the selected module.
Display the test result.
Display the station number of the stations for which the setting verification test was executed. Up to 64 stations are displayed.
Display "" symbol at the target station if control station is set at two or more places.
Display "" symbol at the target station if the same station number is set at two or more places.
Display the network number of the stations for which the setting verification test was executed. If the network number differs from that of the host station, it is identified by red.
Display the group number of the stations for which the setting verification test was executed. For the remote I/O network, the station in error is blank.
Display "" symbol for the station reserved by parameter setting. (When "Parameter Designation" is set in the test execution method.)
Display "" symbol for the station when it is reserved by parameter setting or if a module is faulty in all station specification.
Display "" symbol for the station where the parameter setting and the actual connection type disagree.
Display "" symbol for the station where multiple sub-master stations exist on the same network.
Display "" symbol for the station where multiple sub-master stations exist on the same network.
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
APPENDIX
21 22 A I
INDEX
21.2.3 Setting verification test
21 - 19
21 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Item Setting Check Test
Test Method
Parameter Designation
All Stations Designation
Object Module
Description Set the items to execute the test. Select this to test all the (slave) stations specified by the network parameter (except for reserved stations). All stations are tested, if network parameter does not exist.
Select this to test all stations.
Select the module for which setting verification test is executed.
2. Click the
button.
The setting verification test is executed according to the settings.
Considerations for executing the test The test cannot be executed to multiple stations simultaneously. If executed, cyclic transmission stops.
When another station is set in the connection destination setting The setting verification test cannot be executed when the connection destination setting is set to other than "No Specification".
21 - 20
21.2.3 Setting verification test
21.2 Diagnosing MELSECNET
21.2.4 Station order check test
17
MONITORING
Check the station number of the connected stations in the optical loop system of MELSECNET/10(H).
Screen display
Click the
button on the MELSECNET Diagnostics screen.
18
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
19
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
Display contents
Item Network Information Execute Results
Description
Display the network information on the host station of the selected module. The loop status indicates the forward/reverse loop, forward loop, reverse loop or loopback status. "No. of Stations" indicates the number of stations that have been checked, including the reserved station.
Display the station number in "Forward Loop Direction from Host Station" and "Reverse Loop Destination from Host Station". In the loopback status, the test is executed only in "Forward Loop Direction from Host Station". The number for the reserved station is not displayed.
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
20 21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Item Station Order Check Test
Description Set the items to execute the test.
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
Test Method
Parameter Designation
All Stations Designation
Select this to test all the (slave) stations specified by the network parameter (except for reserved stations). All stations are tested, if network parameter does not exist.
Select this to test all stations.
Object Module
Select the module for which station order check test is executed.
A
2. Click the
button.
The station order check test is executed according to the settings.
APPENDIX
Considerations for executing the test The test cannot be executed to multiple stations simultaneously.
I
If executed, cyclic transmission stops.
When another station is set in the connection destination setting The station order check test cannot be executed when the connection destination setting is set to other than "No Specification".
INDEX
21.2.4 Station order check test
21 - 21
21 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
21.2.5 Communication test
Perform the communication test between networks on MELSECNET/10(H). Use this function to check whether communication can be performed between the host station and the communication target. Especially, when the communication target is located on another network, the routing parameter setting can be checked by the relayed network numbers and station numbers displayed on the screen.
Screen display
Click the
button on the MELSECNET Diagnostics screen.
Display contents
Item Execute Results
Description Display the result of communication test executed between networks.
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Item Communication Test
Destination
Communication Data
Description Set the items to execute the test.
Set the network number and station number. Set the data length (1 to 900 bytes), number of communications (1 to 100 times), and monitoring time (1 to 100 seconds) to execute the test.
2. Click the
button.
The communication test is executed according to the settings.
When another station is set in the connection destination setting The communication test cannot be executed when the connection destination setting is set to other than "No Specification".
21 - 22
21.2.5 Communication test
21.2 Diagnosing MELSECNET
Example of communication test
The following shows an example of the communication test between the host station (network number 1, station number 1) and the communication target (network number 3, station number 2) with the network configuration described below.
GX Works2
Station number 2
Host station Station number 1
Communication target Station number 2
Network number 1
Network number 3
(Relay station 1) (Relay station 2)
Station number 3
Station Station number 4 umber 3
Station Station number 2 number 1
Network number 2
Station number 1
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
MONITORING
17 18 19
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
Return direction from communication target to host station
Direction from host station to communication target
20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
Relay station number of network No. 1: 4 Relay station number of network No. 2: 3
21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
21.2.5 Communication test
21 - 23
21 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
21.2.6 Error history monitoring
Display the error history of MELSECNET/10(H).
Screen display
Click the
button on the MELSECNET Diagnostics screen.
Display contents
Item
Description
Network Information
Display the network information of the selected host station.
Loop Switching
Display the number of times that the loop is switched.
Transient Transmission Errors Display the number of occurrences of transient transmission error.
F.Loop/R.Loop
Display the items during monitoring.
Screen button
Displays the Error History Detail Monitoring screen that lists the details of loop switching and transient transmission error.
21 - 24
21.2.6 Error history monitoring
21.2 Diagnosing MELSECNET
17
Displays the Clear of Error History screen. Select the items to be cleared and click the button.
18
MONITORING
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
21.2.7 Network monitor details
19
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
Display the network line status of MELSECNET/10(H).
Screen display
Click the
button on the MELSECNET Diagnostics screen.
20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
Display contents
APPENDIX
Item
Description
Network Information
Display the network information of the selected host station.
Display the control station information.
Control Station Information For the I/O master station, the information is displayed only for PLC to PLC network.*1
LX/LY assignment is displayed only for the remote I/O network.*1
I
Data Link Information
Display the data link information.
Status of Self Station
Display the host station status. Parameter setting is displayed only for PLC to PLC network.
*1 : Not supported by remote I/O module.
INDEX
21.2.7 Network monitor details
21 - 25
21 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
21.2.8 Monitoring other station information
Monitor other station connected to MELSECNET/10(H).
Screen display
Click the
button on the MELSECNET Diagnostics screen.
Error details display field
Display contents
Item Network Information
Other Station Information
Error details display field
Description
Display the network information of the selected host station.
Display detailed information on the error details display field when an item button is clicked. � "ERR" is displayed on the error information display field if a faulty station or a stop station is
detected. � "RSV" is displayed on the error information display field if a reserved station exists. � "PWR" is displayed on the error information display field if a power is supplied to a module
with external power supply.
Display the status of each station for the items selected in "Other Station Information".
21 - 26
21.2.8 Monitoring other station information
21.2 Diagnosing MELSECNET
The table below shows the items that can be selected in "Other Station Information" of QCPU (Q mode).
: Applicable �: Not applicable (grayed out)
Communication Status of each Station Data-Link Status of each Station
MELSECNET/10(H)
PLC to PLC network
Control station
Normal station
Loop
Bus
Loop
Bus
Remote I/O network
Master station
Loop
Bus
Parameter Status of each Station*1 CPU Operation Status of each Station
�
�
CPU RUN Status of each Station*1 Loop Status of each Station Reserved Station Designation of each Station
�
�
�
�
�
Power Operation Status of each Station External*1
�
�
�
Search Status of Local Station Error*1
�
�
�
�
�
�
Each Station PLC Operation Mode Status*1,*2
�
�
Each Station Pairing Status*1,*2
�
�
Each Station PLC System Status*1,*2
�
�
Each Station Network Type Status*1,*2
*1 : Not supported by remote I/O module. *2 : For MELSECNET/H network module only
�
�
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
MONITORING
17 18 19 20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
21.2.8 Monitoring other station information
21 - 27
21 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
21.3 Diagnosing CC-Link IE Controller Network
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
This section explains how to check the CC-Link IE Controller Network status of a selected module.
When another station is set in the connection destination setting When another station is set in the connection destination setting, the function cannot be executed.
Details of CC-Link IE Controller Network diagnostics Refer to CC-Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual.
Selecting the diagnostics target
When two or more CC-Link IE Controller Network modules are connected to the connected station, the Select Diagnostics Destination screen as shown below is displayed before starting diagnostics.
Select a network to be diagnosed and click the
button.
Diagnostics screen Screen display
Select [Diagnostics] [CC IE Control Diagnostics].
Network information
21 - 28
21.3 Diagnosing CC-Link IE Controller Network
Display contents
17
Item
Network information
Selected Station's Network Equipment Status
Description
Display the network information of the selected module. The status is displayed by icons shown below.
Icon
Module
Board
Station status
Normally operating station
Focusing (icon enclosed by dotted line)
Selected station
Error (cyclic transmission stopped)
Warning (Although cyclic transmission is executed, an error occurred with a module and/or a cable)
Module whose shared group is different
�
Reserved station (gray)
�
Disconnected station (black)
�
Current connected station, specified in the connection destination setting
Number unspecified station (Although "Specify Station No.
�
by Program" is selected in parameter (normal station only), a
station number is not set in the program.)
Clicking an icon sets the corresponding station as the selected station and displays the details in "Selected Station's Network Equipment Status". The selected station can also be determined by moving the focus with the right and left arrow keys and pressing the or key. Double-clicking an icon displays the System Monitor screen (Section 21.9) of the corresponding station.
Display the status of the CC-Link IE Controller Network module in the station selected in the network information display field and the status of the connecting cable.
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
MONITORING
18 19 20 21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
Screen button
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
Displays the Select Diagnostics Destination screen. The diagnostic target module can be changed.
22
Changes the selected station to the station to which the station number specified in "Select Station"
is assigned. The status of the selected station is displayed in "Selected Station's Network Equipment
Status".
/
Switches the screen display of the network information when the total number of station is 61 or more.
A
Displays the Communication Test screen. The communication route from the connected station to the specified destination station can be confirmed. (Section 21.3.1)
APPENDIX
(Universal model QCPU (except for Q00UJ/Q00U/Q01U/Q02U) only)
Displays the IP Communication Test screen. The IP communication route from the connected station
to the communication destination station can be confirmed. (Section 21.3.2)
I
Displays the Link Start/Stop screen. The data link start/stop can be performed to the specified station. (Section 21.3.3)
INDEX
21 - 29
21 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
Displays the Logging screen. The communication route switch information and the transient transmission error of the connected station can be monitored. The monitor information can be saved in a file. (Section 21.3.4)
Displays the System Monitor screen. The system status of the selected station can be confirmed. (Section 21.9)
Displays the Remote Operation screen. The remote operation can be performed to the programmable controller CPU of the selected station. (Section 20.1)
Connection destination for executing CC-Link IE Controller Network diagnostics The communication test and the link start/stop can be executed only when the connected station is selected.
When an unsupported CPU module is specified as the selected station, or a CC-Link IE Controller Network interface board is specified as the selected station The system monitor or remote operation cannot be performed when an unsupported CPU module is specified as the selected station. The system monitor cannot be performed when a CC-Link IE Controller Network interface board is specified as the selected station.
When the total number of stations is set to 65 or more In a case where the total number of stations is set to 65 or more and High Performance model QCPU is specified as the connected station, an error occurs when a station whose station number is 65 or more is selected. The error, however, does not occur where Universal model QCPU is connected with a cable in a multiple CPU configuration.
Restrictions
Communication test and link start/stop To execute the communication test or link start/stop, a target station must be connected using a USB/RS-232 cable.
21 - 30
21.3 Diagnosing CC-Link IE Controller Network
Display on the "Selected Station's Network Equipment Status" field when
17
an error occurs
MONITORING
When an error occurs on a CC-Link IE Controller Network module or connection cable, the button is displayed on the "Selected Station's Network Equipment Status" field as shown below. The detailed information, error factor, and troubleshooting can be displayed by clicking the button.
The icon ( ) is displayed as shown below when a destination station is disconnected.
18
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
Click the button.
19
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
21 - 31
21 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
21.3.1 Communication test
Perform the communication test on CC-Link IE Controller Network.
Screen display
Click the
button on the CC IE Control Network Diagnostics screen.
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Item
Communication Test Parameters
Target Station
Communication Data Setting
Description
Set the items to execute the test.
Set the network number and station number. Set the data length (1 to 900 bytes), the number of communications (1 to 100 times), and monitoring time (1 to 100 seconds) to execute the test.
2. Click the
button.
The communication test is executed according to the settings.
Display contents
Item Communication Test Result
Description
Display the result of inter-network communication test. Networks and stations routed from the own station (connected station) to the target station are displayed on the <<Outward>> tab and those routed from the target station to the own station (connected station) are displayed on the <<Inward>> tab.
21 - 32
21.3.1 Communication test
21.3 Diagnosing CC-Link IE Controller Network
21.3.2 IP communication test
17
MONITORING
Perform the IP communication test on CC-Link IE Controller Network.
Screen display
Click the
button on the CC IE Control Network Diagnostics screen.
18
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
19
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
Item IP Communication Test Parameters
IP Address Input Format Connected Station (Own) Communication Target
Description
Set the information for the test.
Select the input format (decimal/hexadecimal) of the IP address. Display the IP address of the Ethernet Built-in CPU. Set the IP address of the target station.
22
2. Click the
button.
The IP communication test is performed according to the set information.
A
Display contents
APPENDIX
Item
Description
Display the result of the IP communication test between the networks.
Network numbers and station numbers routed from the own station to the target station are
IP Communication Test Result displayed on the <<Outward>> tab. Network numbers and station numbers routed from the target station to the own station are
I
displayed on the <<Inward>> tab.
INDEX
21.3.2 IP communication test
21 - 33
21 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
21.3.3 Link start/stop
Start/stop the data link of individual stations on CC-Link IE Controller Network.
Screen display
Click the
button on the CC IE Control Network Diagnostics screen.
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Item Network Information
All Station Status
Link Start/Stop Link Start Link Stop Forced Link Start
Description
Display the network information of the connected station.
Display the link status of all stations on the same network which are performing the data link with the connected station. Target stations of the link start/stop operation can be selected in "Selective Status".
Select this to start the data link.
Select this to stop the data link.
Select this to forcibly start the data link of a station which has been stopped by another station or a special relay/special register.
2. Click the
button.
The link start/stop is executed for all selected stations at once.
21 - 34
21.3.3 Link start/stop
21.3 Diagnosing CC-Link IE Controller Network
Selection of link start/stop The target stations of the link start/stop operation can also be selected by the following methods.
Selection Group Selection Select All
Operating procedure
Right-click on the "Group" column of a station and select "Group Selection" from the shortcut menu. Stations which have the same group number as the selected line become selected. When the "Group" column whose value is 0 is right-clicked, this shortcut menu cannot be selected.
Right-click the "Station No." column of a station and select "Select All" from the shortcut menu.
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
MONITORING
17 18 19
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
21.3.3 Link start/stop
21 - 35
21 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
21.3.4 Logging
Display the communication route switch information and transient transmission error information of the selected station.
Screen display
Select the
button on the CC IE Control Network Diagnostics screen.
Display contents
Item Display Station
Description Display the network information of the currently selected station.
Displaying the communication route switch information and transient transmission error information
The <<Monitor Details>> tab displays the communication route switch information and transient transmission error information. Maximum 100 logs can be displayed. If the number of logs exceeds 100, the logs are deleted from the oldest one.
Display contents
Item
Description
Switch Transmission Path
Display the loop status of communication route, the number of station where loopback occurred, and the date when communication route switching occurred.
Transient Transmission Errors
Display the error code, network number and station number of the transient request target, and the date of error occurrence if transient transmission error occurs.
21 - 36
21.3.4 Logging
21.3 Diagnosing CC-Link IE Controller Network
Screen button
17
Displays the Save Error Log screen and the contents displayed on the <<Monitor Details>> tab can be saved in a CSV file.
MONITORING
18
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
Clearing errors
19
Clear the errors of the currently selected station using the <<Error Clear>> tab.
Screen display
20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
Operating procedure
1. Select the item to be cleared.
A
2. Click the
button.
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
21.3.4 Logging
21 - 37
21 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
21.4 Diagnosing CC-Link IE Field Network
*1
*2
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
*1 : Universal model QCPU only *2 : CC IE Field head module only
This section explains how to check the CC-Link IE Field Network status of a selected module.
When another station is set in the connection destination setting When another station is set in the connection destination setting, the function cannot be executed.
Details of CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics Refer to the User's Manual of each module.
Selecting the diagnostics target
When two or more CC-Link IE Field Network modules are connected to the connected station, the Select Diagnostics Destination screen as shown below is displayed before starting diagnostics.
Select a network to be diagnosed and click the
button.
21 - 38
21.4 Diagnosing CC-Link IE Field Network
Diagnostics screen
17
MONITORING
Screen display
Select [Diagnostics] [CC IE Field Diagnostics]. The following is an example of setting screen when QCPU (Q mode) is selected.
18
Network information Network configuration
Data link unexecuted stations
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
19
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
Display contents
Item
Description
Select Diagnostics Destination
Module
Display the module and network number of the diagnostics target.
Select Station
Display the station number of the station selected in the network information. When the connected station is CC IE Field head module, this item is fixed to the own station.
Network Status*1
Network information
Display the total number of slave stations, the link scan time (in units of ms), and the number of error-detected stations on the network being displayed.
Display the state of the network. The status of each station is displayed with icons.
Network configuration
Descriptions of displayed icons can be checked by clicking the
button.
Clicking an icon sets the corresponding station as the selected station and displays the details
on the "Selected Station Communication Status Monitor" field. The selected station can also be
determined by moving the focus with the right and left arrow keys and pressing the or
key.
Data link unexecuted stations
Display stations on which the data link is not established among the stations set to the parameter. The disconnected stations which are deleted by the "Hide Disconnected Station" function are also displayed.
Monitor Status
St. Info
Select whether to display each station on the 'network configuration' with station type or with device name. A station type is displayed when the device name is not set in the network parameter, or the module used is not supported by the function to display station type, despite "Device Name" is selected.
Selected Station Communication Status Monitor*2
Display the communication status of the own station.
*1 : Not displayed when the connected station is a CC IE Field head module.
*2 : When the master station is duplicated, the icon for QJ71GF11-T2 is displayed even if the selected station is QD77GF4, QD77GF8, and QD77GF16.
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
APPENDIX
20 21 22 A I
INDEX
21 - 39
21 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
Screen button
(Not supported by CC IE Field head module)
Displays the Select Diagnostics Destination screen. The diagnostic target module can be changed.
( Selecting the diagnostics target)
Updates the network configuration to delete the disconnected station.
Displays the Legend screen. The explanation for icons displayed on the Diagnostics screen is displayed.
Displays the Communication Test screen. The communication route from the connected station to the specified destination station can be confirmed. (Section 21.4.1)
Displays the IP Communication Test screen. The IP communication route from the connected station to the communication target station can be confirmed. (Section 21.4.2)
Displays the Cable Test screen. The cable connection status can be tested. (Section 21.4.3)
(Not supported by CC IE Field head module)
Displays the Link Start/Stop screen. The data link start/stop can be performed to the specified
station. (Section 21.4.4)
(Not supported by CC IE Field head module)
Displays the Network Event History screen. Displays the history of events that have occurred on the
own station and the network, and the various network information. (Section 21.4.5)
21 - 40
21.4 Diagnosing CC-Link IE Field Network
17
(Not supported by CC IE Field head module)
Displays the Reserved Station Function Enable screen. The reserved stations can temporarily be disabled, and the temporarily disabled reserved stations can be enabled. (Section 21.4.6)
MONITORING
(Not supported by CC IE Field head module)
Displays the Enable/Disable Ignore Station Errors screen. The temporary error invalid stations can be set, and the registered temporary error invalid stations can be canceled. (Section 21.4.7)
18
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
(Not supported by Ethernet adapter module/CC-Link IE Field Network
board/CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit)
Displays the System Monitor screen. The system status of the selected station can be confirmed.
(Section 21.9)
(Supported by Ethernet adapter module/CC-Link IE Field Network-CC-
Link bridge module only)
19
Displays the Error History screen. The system status of the selected station can be confirmed.
(Section 21.9)
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
(Not supported by Ethernet adapter module/CC-Link IE Field Network
board/CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit)
Displays the Remote Operation screen. The remote operation can be performed to the
programmable controller CPU of the selected station. (Section 20.1)
20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
Connection destination for executing CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics The communication test and the link start/stop can be executed only when the connected station is selected.
When an unsupported CPU module is specified as the selected station
The IP communication test, system monitor, or remote operation cannot be performed when an unsupported CPU
module is specified as the selected station.
21
When the selected station is a remote device station
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
� The system monitor cannot be performed.
� For the remote operation, only remote reset operations can be performed on the selected station.
� Extension modules are displayed on the "Selected Station Communication Status Monitor" field only when a CC-Link
IE Field Network master/local module is connected.
For the versions (serial numbers) of master/local modules which can display the extension modules, refer to the
following manuals.
MELSEC-Q CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local Module User's Manual
22
MELSEC-L CC-Link IE Field Network Master/Local Module User's Manual
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
Considerations of sub-master station display When a sub-master station is specified in the network parameter of the master station, a slave station whose station number is the same as that of the sub-master station is indicated as "Sub-Master". In this case, review the network parameter and the system configuration.
Received frame error displayed on the cable
Received frame error is displayed regardless of the port.
Therefore, when the cables are connected to port 1 and port2, a received frame error is displayed on both side. The received frame error of the cable is displayed on the 'network configuration'. It is not displayed on the "Selected
A
Station Communication Status Monitor" field.
APPENDIX
Restrictions
Communication test and link start/stop
To execute the communication test or link start/stop, a target station must be connected using a USB/RS-232 cable.
I
INDEX
21 - 41
21 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
Display on the "Selected Station Communication Status Monitor" field
The button as shown below is displayed on the "Selected Station Communication Status Monitor" field for any of the following situations: � an error occurs on a CC-Link IE Field Network master/local module, CC IE Field head module, or
Ethernet adapter module; � an error occurs on a connection cable; or � a station number is not specified. The detailed information, error factor, and troubleshooting can be displayed by clicking the button. The icon ( ) is displayed as shown below when a destination station is disconnected.
Click the button
Setting a station number of CC IE Field head module A station number of CC IE Field head module can be set or changed when connecting a CC IE Field head module whose station number is not set. Specify "CC IE Field Head Module" for "Select Station" on the CC IE Field Diagnostics screen for the master station,
and click the
button displayed on the "Selected Station Communication Status Monitor" field.
Station numbers of the following modules used in the master station can be reset.
� QJ71GF11-T2 (With a serial number whose first five digits are "12072" or higher)
� LJ71GF11-T2
For details of setting station numbers, refer to the following manual.
MELSEC-L CC-Link IE Field Network Head Module User's Manual
21 - 42
21.4 Diagnosing CC-Link IE Field Network
21.4.1 Communication test
17
MONITORING
Perform the communication test on CC-Link IE Field Network.
Screen display
Click the
button on the CC IE Field Diagnostics screen.
18
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
Presence or absence of errors on the communication test
19
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
Operating procedure
21
1. Set the items on the screen.
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
Item
Communication Test Parameters
Connected Station (Own)
Target Station
Communication Data Setting
Description
Set the items to execute the test.
Display the network number and station number of the connected station. Set the network number and station number. Set the data length (1 to 900 bytes), the number of communications (1 to 100 times), and monitoring time (1 to 100 seconds) to execute the test.
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
2. Click the
button.
The communication test is performed according to the settings.
Display contents
A
APPENDIX
Item
Description
Display the result of inter-network communication test. Also in 'Presence or absence of errors
on the communication test', display whether the communication test has been executed
Communication Test Result
normally. Networks and stations routed from the own station (connected station) to the target station are
displayed on the <<Outward>> tab and those routed from the target station to the own station
(connected station) are displayed on the <<Inward>> tab.
I
INDEX
21.4.1 Communication test
21 - 43
21 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
21.4.2 IP communication test
Perform the IP communication test on CC-Link IE Field Network.
Screen display
Click the
button on the CC IE Field Diagnostics screen.
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Item IP Communication Test Parameters
IP Address Input Connected Station (Own) Communication Target
Description
Set the information for the test.
Select the input format (decimal/hexadecimal) of the IP address. Display the IP address of the Ethernet Built-in CPU. Set the IP address of the target station.
2. Click the
button.
The IP communication test is performed according to the set information.*1
*1 : A maximum of two minutes may be required for the cancellation processing when the module is not connected with the serial/USB cable.
Display contents
Item
IP Communication Test Result
Description
Display the result of the IP communication test between the networks. Network numbers and station numbers routed from the own station to the target station are displayed on the <<Outward>> tab. Network numbers and station numbers routed from the target station to the own station are displayed on the <<Inward>> tab.
21 - 44
21.4.2 IP communication test
21.4 Diagnosing CC-Link IE Field Network
21.4.3 Cable test
17
MONITORING
Test the status of the cable connections between the testing station and the devices connected to the ports of the testing station.
Screen display
18
Click the
button on the CC IE Field Diagnostics screen.
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
19
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
21
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Item Cable Test Contents
Testing Station Setting
Description
�
Set the network number and station number of the station which executes the cable test.
22
2. Click the
button.
The cable test is executed on the testing station.
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
Display contents
Item
Description
A
Cable Test Result
Display the cable test result, error factor, and troubleshooting of each port.
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
21.4.3 Cable test
21 - 45
21 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
21.4.4 Link start/stop
Start/stop the data link of a specified station. This function can be used for debugging purposes to stop the station from receiving data from other stations and sending its own data. The data link cannot be started/stopped to the stations other than the own station when the connected station is the master station operating as a sub-master station.
Screen display
Click the
button on the CC IE Field Diagnostics screen.
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Item
Description
Network Information
�
Connected Station Information
Display the network information of the connected station.
Link Start/Stop Setting Contents �
All Stations Information
Display the link status of all stations on the same network which are performing the data link with the connected station. Target stations of the link start/stop operation can be selected in "Selected Status".
Link Start/Stop Executing Contents
Select "Link Start"/"Link Stop". To forcibly start the data link of a station which has been stopped by another station or a special relay/special register, select "Forced Link Start".
2. Click the
button.
The link start/stop is executed for all selected stations at once. When the process is completed, "Selected Status" are cleared and the contents of "Link Status" are updated.
21 - 46
21.4.4 Link start/stop
21.4 Diagnosing CC-Link IE Field Network
Screen button
17
MONITORING
Selects all stations displayed in the list.
Cancels the selection status of all stations selected in the list.
18
21.4.5 Network event history
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
Display the list of event history occurred on the own station and on the network.
Screen display
19
Click the
button on the CC IE Field Diagnostics screen.
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
Display contents
Item Network Event History List Detailed Information
Description
Display the list of network event history. Each column can be sorted in ascending/descending order by clicking on the column header.
Display the detailed information of an event selected in "Network Event History List".
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
21.4.5 Network event history
21 - 47
21 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
Screen button
Clears the network event history exists on the programmable controller CPU.
Displays the History Acquisition Setting screen. Select events to be acquired.
� All events displayed in the list are selected by clicking the
button.
� The selection status of all events selected in the list are canceled by clicking the
Saves the network event history in CSV file format.
Updates "Network Event History List".
button.
21 - 48
21.4.5 Network event history
21.4 Diagnosing CC-Link IE Field Network
21.4.6 Reserved station function enable
17
MONITORING
Disable the reserved stations temporarily, and enable the temporarily disabled reserved station. This function cannot be performed when the connected station is a local station or the master station operating as a sub-master station.
Screen display
18
Click the
button on the CC-Link IE Field Diagnostics screen.
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
19
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
Operating procedure
22
1. Select reserved stations to be disabled temporarily/enabled from "Reserved Station
List".
2. Click the
button.
The selected reserved stations are disabled temporarily/enabled.
When the process is completed, the contents of "Reserved Station List" are updated.
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
21.4.6 Reserved station function enable
21 - 49
21 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
21.4.7 Temporary error invalid station setting/restore
Set/cancel temporary error invalid stations. This function cannot be performed when the connected station is a local station or the master station operating as a sub-master station.
Screen display
Click the
button on the CC-Link IE Field Diagnostics screen.
Operating procedure
1. Select stations to be set/canceled as temporary error invalid stations from "Ignore
Station Error List".
2. Click the
button.
The temporary error invalid stations are set/canceled. When the process is completed, the contents of "Ignore Station Error List" are updated.
21 - 50
21.4.7 Temporary error invalid station setting/restore
21.5 Diagnosing CC-Link IE Field Network Basic
21.5 Diagnosing CC-Link IE Field Network Basic
17
MONITORING
*1
*2
Q CPU L CPU Remote HFeXad FX
*1 : High-speed Universal model QCPU only
*2 : Built-in Ethernet port LCPU only
18
This section explains how to check the network status of CC-Link IE Field Network Basic.
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
Details of CC-Link IEF Basic Diagnostics Refer to CC-Link IE Field Network Basic Reference Manual.
19
Screen display
[Diagnostics] [CC-Link IEF Basic Diagnostics]
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
List of devices
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
21 - 51
21 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
Display contents
Item Change IP Address Display
Master Station Status
Network Status Rough Diagnostics*1
Link Scan Time
Detailed Diagnostics*1 Diagnostics Target Group Station No. Occpd Stns Reserved Station IP Address Transmission Status
Disconnected Count
Timeout Count
Latest Error Error Details
Description Switch decimal/hexadecimal notation of IP address display. Display the total number of slave stations, IP address, and an error code of the master station. � �
Display the link scan time (in units of ms) of group No.1 to 4*2, and the number of stations in an error state or unspecified stations.
�
Select a group*2 to display in the station list. Display the station number of a slave station. Display the number of occupied stations of a slave station. Display a reserved station of a slave station. Display the IP address of a slave station. Display the transmission status of a slave station. Display the number of disconnection between the master station and slave stations (0 to 65535). Display the number of timeouts between the master station and slave stations (0 to 65535).
Display the latest error code for a slave station.
Display the error contents and corrective actions for a slave station.
*1 : The background color is changed as described below depending on the number of unspecified stations (not including reserved stations) or stations in an error state. Yellow: An unspecified station exists. Red: A station in an error status exists. Or, an unspecified station and a station in an error state exist at the same time.
*2 : For LCPUs, select group No.1 (fixed).
Screen button
Displays the error contents and corrective actions for the master station.
Clears an error code.
21 - 52
21.6 Diagnosing CC-Link and CC-Link/LT
21.6 Diagnosing CC-Link and CC-Link/LT
17
MONITORING
This section explains how to monitor the network information of each station, diagnosing the network status, and testing.
21.6.1 Monitoring line (host station/other stations)
18
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
*1
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
Monitor host station line/another station line in CC-Link or CC-Link/LT.
Screen display
*1 : CC IE Field head module only
19
Select [Diagnostics] [CC-Link Diagnostics]. The following is an example of setting screen when QCPU (Q mode) is selected.
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
Module list/ diagnostic target selection
20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
Station list
21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
21.6.1 Monitoring line (host station/other stations)
21 - 53
21 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
Display contents
Item Diagnostics Result Module list/diagnostic target selection
Station list
<<Connecting Station Information>>
Description
Display the number of all errors/warnings being occurring in the modules.
Display CC-Link and CC-Link/LT modules exist in the connected station. The number of errors (errors and warnings) is also displayed. The diagnostic target can be changed by clicking a desired module.
Display the icons of stations configuring the CC-Link network. In the detail display, the 33rd station and later are displayed by clicking the
button.
The display can be switched by the
/
button. The information of all
stations are displayed on the screen at once in the all-station display.
Click the
button to check the description of each icon.
Display such as the data link status of the connecting station (host station). Display such as the data link status of the station (another station) selected in the station list.
<<Selected Station Information>>
<<Selected Station Error Information>>
Display the error information of the station selected in the station list.
Screen button
Updates the module list/diagnostic target selection.
/ (Not supported by FXCPU) Switches modules to be displayed in units of eight modules.
Reset the icon layout in the station list to the station number order. For the layout edit of the station list, refer to Point in this section.
/
(Not supported by FXCPU)
Switches the screen of the station list.
When an error or warning exists on each screen, the icon indicating the error information is displayed
on the button.
/
(Not supported by FXCPU)
Switches the all-station display and detail display.
21 - 54
21.6.1 Monitoring line (host station/other stations)
21.6 Diagnosing CC-Link and CC-Link/LT
/
17
Displays/hides the related function buttons.
For details of related functions, refer to the following sections.
MONITORING
� Loop Test*1 Section 21.6.2 "Loop test/transmission speed test"
� Status Logging*2 Section 21.6.3 "Displaying logs of station information (status logging)"
� Create Check Sheet Section 21.6.4 "Creating check sheets"
� Start Data Link/Stop Data Link*1Section 21.6.5 "Starting/stopping data link"
18
*1 : Not supported by remote I/O module. *2 : Not supported by FXCPU.
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
Displays the explanation for icons displayed on the diagnostics screen. The following is an example of setting screen when QCPU (Q mode) is selected.
19
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
Update of the number of errors and warnings displayed in "Diagnostics Result"
During the monitoring, the number of errors/warnings being occurring on the network of a module selected in "Module
list/diagnostic target selection" is only updated. To also update the number of errors/warnings on other modules, update the module list using .
22
Editing layout of station list Icons in the station list can be moved and allocated freely with the drag-and-drop operation.
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
Move icons by drag and drop.
Diagnostic target
� For QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU, only QJ61BT11, QJ61BT11N, and LJ61BT11 are diagnosed in the CC-Link system configuration, and only QJ61CL12 and LJ61CL12 are diagnosed in the CC-Link/LT system configuration.
I
� For FXCPU, the diagnostic target is CC-Link system only. Remote I/O, remote device stations, and intelligent device stations are diagnosed.
INDEX
21.6.1 Monitoring line (host station/other stations)
21 - 55
21 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
Diagnosing CC-Link bridge modules (Not supported by FXCPU) When a CC-Link bridge module is selected in the station list, the bridge diagnostics can be executed by right-clicking it and selecting [Bridge Diagnostics] from the shortcut menu.
To return to the CC-Link Diagnostics screen, click the
button.
Considerations for executing each function Do not execute the following functions by a sequence program and peripheral at the same time. If executed, they may not be executed correctly.
� Start data link/stop data link
� Set/cancel temporary error invalid station
� Loop test
� Obtain transmission speed setting (including the acquisition of the transmission speed setting in the Check Sheet Creation Wizard)
Considerations for setting network parameters with a program Create a program so that a station number is in consecutive ascending order. When a station number is not
consecutive or not in ascending order, the diagnostic function may not perform normally.
Restrictions
Restrictions on bridge diagnostics, loop test, and check sheet creation Bridge diagnostics, loop test, and check sheet creation can be performed only when the connected station is a master station.
21 - 56
21.6.1 Monitoring line (host station/other stations)
21.6 Diagnosing CC-Link and CC-Link/LT
Setting/canceling temporary error invalid station
17
Replacing a module in online is possible without detecting an error in the corresponding remote station.
MONITORING
To set the temporary error invalid station, select the desired station in the station list and right-click it,
and select [Enable/Disable Ignore Station Errors] from the shortcut menu.
If multiple stations are set as occupied stations, specify the start station number of each occupied
station for the temporary error invalid station. If setting is set for a station that is not the start station in actual assignment, invalid setting is ignored.
18
In addition, do not set the temporary error invalid station by a sequence program or peripheral at the
same time. If set, the temporary error invalid station may not be set correctly.
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
19
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
21.6.1 Monitoring line (host station/other stations)
21 - 57
21 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
Company names in other station information
1) The field displays the company name or manufacturer code of the device connected in CCLink.
2) The field displays the manufacturer code if company name is not entered in the manufacturer code list.
3) The manufacturer code list (partner_English.dat) is saved in the following folder and can be edited using text editor available in market. C:\Program Files\MELSOFT\DnaviZero\DnaviSatellite\CCLink
4) The company names can be edited on the diagnostics screen, however, changes are not applied to partner_English.dat.
For some manufacturers, manufacturer codes are not listed. Edit the file according to the following file format specifications.
Manufacturer code
Company name
Max. number of characters
5
255
Usable characters*1 0 to 9
� Alphanumeric characters � Symbols
Remarks
Manufacturer code other than 5 digits is ignored.
Display differs depending on the screen width. With small fonts, up to 75 characters are displayed, characters exceeding the limit are not displayed.
*1 : If "," is used in a company name, enclose the company name by double quotations (" "). Example: "xxxxx Co., Ltd"
The following is an example of partner_English.dat displayed using a text editor.
If the manufacturer code list does not exist in the install destination of GX Works2 or if it is corrupted, the following message is displayed.
21 - 58
21.6.1 Monitoring line (host station/other stations)
21.6 Diagnosing CC-Link and CC-Link/LT
21.6.2 Loop test/transmission speed test
17
MONITORING
*1
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
*1 : CC IE Field head module only
Check operating status of lines for all stations or specified stations, and checking the transmission
speed settings of all stations.
18
Screen display
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
Double-click
on the CC-Link Diagnostics screen.
The following is an example of setting screen when QCPU (Q mode) is selected.
19
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
22
Test result
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
21.6.2 Loop test/transmission speed test
21 - 59
21 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Item Loop Test
Description
Execute the loop test according to the specification of "All Stations" or "Selected Station No.". Setting is not possible when CC-Link/LT is selected.
All Stations: Selected Station No.:
Select this to execute the test for all stations. QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU: 64 stations FXCPU : 16 stations Select this to execute the test for the specified stations. To specify a station, specify the start address of an occupied station.
Example) When four occupied stations and two occupied stations are connected
4 stations occupied 2 stations occupied
Obtain transmission speed setting
"1" is specified "5" is specified If 2, 3, 4, or 6 is specified, the station becomes faulty station. Obtain the transmission speed settings of all stations.
2. Click the
button.
The loop test/acquisition of the transmission speed setting is executed and the result is displayed in the 'Test result'. Check 'Legends' for the descriptions of the icons displayed in the 'Test result'.
Considerations for executing the test Do not execute the loop test/acquisition of the transmission speed setting by a sequence program or peripheral at the same time. If executed, the loop test/acquisition of the transmission speed setting may not be executed correctly. In addition, when executing the acquisition of the transmission speed setting, do not execute the acquisition of the transmission speed setting in the Check Sheet Creation Wizard at the same time.
21 - 60
21.6.2 Loop test/transmission speed test
21.6 Diagnosing CC-Link and CC-Link/LT
21.6.3 Displaying logs of station information (status logging)
17
MONITORING
*1
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
*1 : CC IE Field head module only
Collect logs of the station information (the data link status of other stations, date of acquisition).
18
Screen display
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
Double-click
on the CC-Link Diagnostics screen.
<Q series CC-Link module whose serial number is lower than 12032>
19
Log data display area
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
<Q series CC-Link module whose serial number is 12032 or higher/LCPU>
22
Log data display area
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
21.6.3 Displaying logs of station information (status logging)
21 - 61
21 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Item
Description
Time of Logging Acquisition
Specify the period of time to collect the log on the second time scale. The log is collected during the time of period between when the logging starts and when the specified time elapses.
Log Storage Area in CC-Link Module
Specify the logging storage destination. Since the log which is stored on a RAM is deleted when the programmable controller CPU is turned from OFF to ON or reset, select "RAM + Flash ROM" to keep the log stored. The log on a flash ROM can remain stored on the flash ROM of the CC-Link master/local module even if the programmable controller CPU is turned from OFF to ON or reset.
2. Click the
button.
The log is collected during the specified log acquisition time and displayed in "Log List". The log displayed in "Log List" is read out from the RAM. The log collection stops when the number of log records reaches 5000.
When '0' is specified, the log collection continues until the
button is clicked or the
number of log records reaches 5000.
The status as of the date selected in "Log List" is displayed in the 'Log data display area'.
Check "Legends" for the descriptions of the icons displayed in the 'Log data display area'.
Screen button
Clears the log in the module. Also clears the log stored on a flash ROM when "RAM + Flash ROM" is selected.
/
Saves information of the log list in CSV format. Also reads out a log file saved in CSV format and
displays in "Log List".
Log collection when "RAM + Flash ROM" is selected When "RAM + Flash ROM" is selected, the first 45 records of the log are stored on a flash ROM and the following records are stored on a RAM.
Checking the log stored on a flash ROM The log stored on a flash ROM is transferred to a RAM when the programmable controller CPU is turned from OFF to ON or reset. The log stored on the flash ROM can be displayed in "Log List" by reopening the Status Logging screen.
Log collection In the case where GX Works2 cannot always be connected, select "RAM + Flash ROM". The log (up to 45 records) stored on a flash ROM can be displayed when GX Works2 is reconnected after the logging. In the case where GX Works2 can always be connected, up to 5000 records of the log can be collected whichever "RAM" or "RAM + Flash ROM" is selected.
21 - 62
21.6.3 Displaying logs of station information (status logging)
21.6 Diagnosing CC-Link and CC-Link/LT
21.6.4 Creating check sheets
Create a check sheet for troubleshooting by the wizard.
Operating procedure
17
*1
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX *1 : CC IE Field head module only
18
MONITORING
1. Double-click
on the CC-Link Diagnostics screen.
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
19
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
2. Set the items according to the terms on the screens.
22
For details of setting items, refer to the following guide.
Open Field Network CC-Link Troubleshooting Guide
The created check sheet is saved in Excel format.
Considerations for checking the transmission speed Do not execute the check (acquisition) of the transmission speed setting by a sequence program or peripheral at the
A
same time. If executed, the check (acquisition) of the transmission speed setting may not be executed correctly.
Check sheets "System Configuration" can be output when Excel 2000 or later is installed.
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
21.6.4 Creating check sheets
21 - 63
21 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
Example of a check sheet: The following shows an example of a check sheet in case where Excel 2000 or later is installed.
21 - 64
21.6.4 Creating check sheets
21.6 Diagnosing CC-Link and CC-Link/LT
21.6.5 Starting/stopping data link
17
MONITORING
*1
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
*1 : CC IE Field head module only
Start/stop the data link.
The following operating procedure is explained with icons of QCPU (Q mode) as an example.
18
Operating procedure
� Double-click
on the CC-Link Diagnostics screen.
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
The data link is stopped. The icon is switched to
.
19
To start the data link, click
.
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
Considerations of data link stop
20
Performing 'data link stop' disables data transmission from GX Works2 when the personal computer is connected to a master station via CC-Link as shown in the system configuration below. To re-establish the connection to send data from GX Works2, reset the programmable controller CPU to which the data link stop is performed and restart the data link.
Master station, station number 0
Local station, station number 1
21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
CC-Link Reset this programmable controller CPU.
GX Works2
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
22 A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
21.6.5 Starting/stopping data link
21 - 65
21 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
21.7 Diagnosing Ethernet
Q CPU L CPU Remote HFeXad FX
This section explains how to check various setting status of Ethernet module, Ethernet Built-in CPU, and FXCPU with Ethernet adapter.
21.7.1 Q series-compatible E71/L series-compatible E71 module
Check Q series-compatible E71/L series-compatible E71 module parameter status, error history, status of each connection, status of each protocol, LED status, received e-mail information, and send e-mail information. For details of each displayed item, refer to the following manuals. Q Corresponding Ethernet Interface Module User's Manual (Basic) MELSEC-L Ethernet Interface Module User's Manual (Basic) The screens of QCPU (Q mode) are used in this section.
Screen display
Select [Diagnostics] [Ethernet Diagnostics].
Monitoring Information
21 - 66
21.7.1 Q series-compatible E71/L series-compatible E71 module
21.7 Diagnosing Ethernet
Display contents
17
Item Target Module Setting Change IP Address Display
Monitoring information
Description
Select "Module No.", and specify an Ethernet module to be monitored. The following is the setting range. QCPU: 1 to 4 LCPU: 1 to 2
Switch decimal/hexadecimal notation of IP address display.
The following Ethernet module information can be monitored. � Parameter status ( Monitoring the parameter status) � Error history ( Monitoring the error history) � Status of each connection ( Monitoring the status of each connection) � Status of each protocol ( Monitoring the status of each protocol) � LED status ( Monitoring the LED status) � Received e-mail information ( Monitoring the received e-mail information) � Send e-mail information ( Monitoring the send e-mail information)
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
MONITORING
18 19
Screen button
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
Displays the PING Test screen. (Section 21.7.3)
(Supported by QCPU (Q mode) only)
Displays the Loopback Test screen. (Section 21.7.4)
20
(Supported by QCPU (Q mode) only)
Turns OFF the [COM ERR] LED.
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
Monitoring the parameter status
Monitor the Ethernet module parameter status.
21
Screen display
Select the <<Parameter Status>> tab on the Ethernet Diagnostics screen.
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
21.7.1 Q series-compatible E71/L series-compatible E71 module
21 - 67
21 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS Monitoring the error history
Monitor the error history area.
Screen display
Select the <<Error History>> tab on the Ethernet Diagnostics screen.
Screen button
Clears the error history.
Monitoring the status of each connection
Monitor the status of each connection.
Screen display
Select the <<Status of Each Connection>> tab on the Ethernet Diagnostics screen.
21 - 68
21.7.1 Q series-compatible E71/L series-compatible E71 module
21.7 Diagnosing Ethernet
Monitoring the status of each protocol
17
Monitor the status of each protocol.
MONITORING
Screen display
Select the <<Status of Each Protocol>> tab on the Ethernet Diagnostics screen.
18
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
19
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
20
Monitoring the LED status
Monitor the status of LED on the front of the Ethernet module.
21
Screen display
Select the <<LED Status>> tab on the Ethernet Diagnostics screen.
22
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
Considerations for monitoring If RAM test or ROM test is set with the switch setting of an Ethernet module, programmable controller communication error occurs.
21.7.1 Q series-compatible E71/L series-compatible E71 module
21 - 69
INDEX
21 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS Monitoring the received e-mail information
Monitor the received e-mail information.
Screen display
Select the <<Received E-mail Information>> tab on the Ethernet Diagnostics screen.
Screen button
Clears the number of times set in each item by '0'.
Clears "Number of Error Log Writes" by '0' and the contents of "Error Log".
21 - 70
21.7.1 Q series-compatible E71/L series-compatible E71 module
21.7 Diagnosing Ethernet
Monitoring the send e-mail information
17
Monitor the send e-mail information.
MONITORING
Screen display
Select the <<Send E-mail Information>> tab on the Ethernet Diagnostics screen.
18
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
19
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
Screen button
Clears the number of times set in each item by '0'.
21
Clears "Number of Error Log Writes" by '0' and the contents of "Error Log".
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
21.7.1 Q series-compatible E71/L series-compatible E71 module
21 - 71
21 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
21.7.2
Ethernet Built-in CPU, FXCPU with Ethernet adapter connection
Check parameter status, error history, status of each connection, connection status, and time status setting of Ethernet Built-in CPU or FXCPU with Ethernet adapter. For details of displayed items, refer to the following manuals. QCPU User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection) QnUCPU User's Manual (Communication via Built-in Ethernet Port) MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection) MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual (Built-in Ethernet Function) FX3U-ENET-ADP User's Manual
Screen display
Select [Diagnostics] [Ethernet Diagnostics]. The following is a screen of LCPU.
Monitoring information
Display contents
Item
Description
Target Module Setting*1
Select "CPU", and specify the CPU to be monitored. Setting range is CPU number 1 to 4.
Change IP Address Display Switch decimal/hexadecimal notation of IP address display.
Monitoring information
The following built-in Ethernet port information can be monitored. � Parameter status ( Monitoring the parameter status) � Error history ( Monitoring the error history) � Status of each connection ( Monitoring the status of each connection) � Access history*2 ( Monitoring the status of each connection) � Connection status ( Monitoring the connection status) � Time status setting ( Monitoring the time setting status) � Simple PLC communication status*3 ( Monitoring the simple PLC communication
status)
� Protocol status*2 ( Monitoring the protocol status)
*1 : For QCPU (Q mode) only *2 : For FXCPU only *3 : For LCPU only
Screen button
For the buttons on the screen, refer to Section 21.7.
21 - 72
21.7.2 Ethernet Built-in CPU, FXCPU with Ethernet adapter connection
21.7 Diagnosing Ethernet
Monitoring the parameter status
17
Monitor the parameter status of Ethernet Built-in CPU or FXCPU with Ethernet adapter.
MONITORING
Screen display
Select the <<Parameter Status>> tab on the Ethernet Diagnostics screen.
The following is a screen of LCPU.
18
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
19
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
Monitoring the error history
Monitor the error history area.
Screen display
21
Select the <<Error History>> tab on the Ethernet Diagnostics screen. The following is a screen of LCPU.
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
Screen button
Clears the error history.
I
INDEX
21.7.2 Ethernet Built-in CPU, FXCPU with Ethernet adapter connection
21 - 73
21 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS Monitoring the status of each connection
Monitor the status of each connection. For FXCPU, the status of each connection can be monitored by the access history function.
Screen display
Select the <<Status of Each Connection>> tab on the Ethernet Diagnostics screen. <QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU>
<FXCPU>
Screen button
Clears the error codes.
(QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU only)
Clears "Unlock Error Count".
Allows the connection of the selected row.
Cancels the connection of the selected row.
(FXCPU only)
Clears the access history.
21 - 74
21.7.2 Ethernet Built-in CPU, FXCPU with Ethernet adapter connection
21.7 Diagnosing Ethernet
Monitoring the connection status
17
MONITORING
Monitor the connection status. For FXCPU, the broadcast information is not monitored.
Screen display
Select the <<Connection Status>> tab on the Ethernet Diagnostics screen.
18
The following is a screen of LCPU.
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
19
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
Screen button
(QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU only)
21
Clears the number of receive buffer overflows and broadcast information.
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
21.7.2 Ethernet Built-in CPU, FXCPU with Ethernet adapter connection
21 - 75
21 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
Monitoring the time setting status
Monitor the time setting status.
Screen display
Select the <<Time Setting Status>> tab on the Ethernet Diagnostics screen. The following is a screen of Built-in Ethernet port QCPU.
Screen button
Sets the time according to the time setting on the <<Built-in Ethernet Port Setting>> tab of PLC parameter written to the programmable controller CPU.
Setting time For Ethernet Built-in CPU and FXCPU with Ethernet adapter, the time on a programmable controller CPU can be set automatically by collecting the time information from the time information server (SNTP server) connected to the LAN according to the time setting on the <<Built-in Ethernet Port Setting>> tab of PLC parameter. For details of the time setting, refer to the following manuals. QnUCPU User's Manual (Communication via Built-in Ethernet Port) MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual (Built-in Ethernet Function) FX3U-ENET-ADP User's Manual
21 - 76
21.7.2 Ethernet Built-in CPU, FXCPU with Ethernet adapter connection
21.7 Diagnosing Ethernet
Monitoring the simple PLC communication status
17
MONITORING
Monitor the simple PLC communication status. This function can be executed only when using LCPU with a serial number whose first five digits are '13042' or higher.
Screen display
18
Select the <<Simple PLC Communication Status>> tab on the Ethernet Diagnostics screen.
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
19
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
Screen button
21
Displays the Details screen which shows detailed information of each setting.
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
Displaying simple PLC communication status
I
Since the simple PLC communication status indicates the current status, the error history may not be confirmed.
Confirm errors on the <<Error History>> tab.
( Monitoring the error history)
21.7.2 Ethernet Built-in CPU, FXCPU with Ethernet adapter connection
21 - 77
INDEX
21 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS Monitoring the protocol status
Monitor the total number of communication packets. This function can be executed only when using FXCPU with Ethernet adapter.
Screen display
Select the <<Protocol Status>> tab on the Ethernet Diagnostics screen.
Screen button
Clears the protocol status.
21 - 78
21.7.2 Ethernet Built-in CPU, FXCPU with Ethernet adapter connection
21.7 Diagnosing Ethernet
21.7.3 PING test
17
MONITORING
A PING test is a test to check the existence of Ethernet modules to which the initial processing has been completed, or devices with specified IP address on the same Ethernet line.
The following checks are performed when the PING test is executed on Ethernet module, Ethernet Built-in CPU, or FXCPU with Ethernet adapter.
18
� Whether the line is connected correctly between the host station and the target device.
� Whether the parameters are set correctly for the Ethernet module on host station.
� Whether the initial processing has been completed correctly for the Ethernet module on host station.
(For Ethernet module only)
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
19
Required setting items Make sure to check the following before executing the PING test when using an Ethernet module.
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
� "Station No. IP Information" of Ethernet parameter is set.
� RUN LED and INT LED on the Ethernet module are ON.
System configuration where the PING test can be executed
� A PING test is valid for the system configured with Ethernet, MELSECNET/10(H), and CC-Link IE Controller
Network. It cannot be executed via CC-Link, CC-Link IE Field Network, and serial communication.
20
� A PING test can only be executed to the Ethernet module on the same segment as the target station. However, it cannot be executed to a host station.
Administrator authority required to execute the PING test To execute the PING test, the user must log on Windows� as the user having the administrator authority.
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
PING test overview
21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
The following are the two methods to execute a PING test.
� Sending a ping from an Ethernet module*1
Execute a PING test on a device (PING test target station) exists on the same network as the
Ethernet module (PING test execution station) which sends a ping.
When "Ethernet Module" is selected for "PLC side I/F" on the Transfer Setup screen, specify a PING
test target station only.
22
When "PLC Module" is selected for "PLC side I/F" on the Transfer Setup screen, specify a PING test
execution station and a PING test target station.
*1 : Not supported by FXCPU with Ethernet adapter.
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
� Sending a ping from an Ethernet board on a personal computer
The same operation as a PING test executed by the command prompt of Windows�. A PING test is executed on a device on the network via Ethernet from a personal computer.
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
21.7.3 PING test
21 - 79
21 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
Sending a ping from an Ethernet module (when "Ethernet Module" is selected for "PLC side I/F") A PING test is executed on a device on the same network from the access station when accessing the programmable controller CPU via Ethernet module. This function is not supported by FXCPU with Ethernet adapter. PING test execution station: Access target station (A station does not need to be specified.) PING test target station: Specify a device on the same network as the access target station.
Select "Module No." for "Target Module Setting" on the Ethernet Diagnostics screen. For the settings on the Transfer Setup screen, refer to the following example. For the system configuration described in the following figure, configure the settings of the connection destination as shown below to execute a PING test for station number 1 from the station number 2.
Station number: 3
Network number 1
Ethernet
Access target station Send a ping.
Ethernet Station number: 2 module (192.168.0.4)
Ethernet Station number: 1 module (192.168.0.3)
(PING test execution station)
(PING test target station)
21 - 80
21.7.3 PING test
21.7 Diagnosing Ethernet
Sending a ping from an Ethernet module (when "PLC Module" is selected for "PLC side I/F")
17
A PING test is executed on a device on the same network from an Ethernet module which exists on
MONITORING
the same base unit as the connected station when accessing the programmable controller CPU with
a serial/USB/Ethernet port direct connection or a connection via Ethernet hub.
This function is not supported by the programmable controller CPU accessed via a built-in Ethernet
port of Ethernet Built-in CPU or FXCPU with Ethernet adapter.
PING test execution station: Specify an Ethernet module which exists on the same base unit as the connected station.
18
PING test target station: Specify a device on the same network as the PING test execution station.
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
Select "Module No." for "Target Module Setting" on the Ethernet Diagnostics screen.
For the settings on the Transfer Setup screen, refer to the following example.
For the system configuration described in the following figure, configure the settings of the
connection destination as shown below to execute a PING test for the station number 2 on the network number 2.
19
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
When the Ethernet module (station number 1 on network number 1 in the system shown below) is Q series-compatible E71 module, a PING test can be executed with the function version B or later only.
Serial/USB/Ethernet port direct connection or connection via Ethernet hub
Ethernet module
Station number: 1
20
Ethernet
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
Network number 1
(PING test execution station)
Connective station
Ethernet Ethernet Station number: 1 module module
Station number: 2 Send a ping.
Ethernet
Network number 2
Ethernet Station number: 2 module (192.168.0.3)
(PING test target station)
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
21 22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
21.7.3 PING test
21 - 81
21 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
Sending a ping from an Ethernet board on a personal computer
Select "CPU" for "Target Module Setting" on the Ethernet Diagnostics screen. Settings on the Transfer Setup screen is not necessary. The already-set connection destination settings do not affect the execution of PING test. For FXCPU with Ethernet adapter, the specification of target module is not necessary.
Screen display
Perform any of the following operations.
Click the
button on the Ethernet Diagnostics screen.
Click the
button the Ethernet Diagnostics screen and click the
button on
the Loop Test screen.
Sending a ping from an Ethernet module (when "Module No." is selected for "Target Module Setting")
<<"Ethernet Module" is selected for "PLC side I/F">>
<<"PLC Module" is selected for "PLC side I/F">>
PING test information
Sub status bar
Sending a ping from an Ethernet board on a personal computer (when "CPU" is selected for "Target Module Setting")
21 - 82
21.7.3 PING test
PING test information
Sub status bar
21.7 Diagnosing Ethernet
Operating procedure
1. Set the items on the screen.
Item
Description
Input Item
�
Address Specification
Set the IP address of the target Ethernet module for PING test.
Transfer Setup
Specify the connection destination of the PING test.
Execution
Set the network number and station number of the Ethernet module which executes the PING
Station of PING test.
Target of PING Set the IP address of the Ethernet module which is a target of the PING test.
Setting Options
Set whether to display a host name in the result. Also set data size (For Q series-compatible E71 and FXCPU with Ethernet adapter: 1 to 8,192 bytes, for Ethernet Built-in CPU: 1 to 1,460 bytes), communication time check (1 to 30 seconds), number of transmissions (1 to 50 times, or until interrupted).
2. Click the
button.
The PING test is executed according to the settings.
Display contents
Item
Description
PING test information
Display the IP address and data size to which the PING test is executed.
When "Module No." is selected for "Target Module Setting" ("Ethernet Module" is selected for "PLC side I/F")*1 When "CPU" is selected for "Target Module Setting*1
Transmitting data
� When successful IP address (example: Reply from 10.97.29.75): Data size (example: bytes=32) Communication speed (example: time<1ms TTL=128)
� When unsuccessful Request timed out.
Completion of data transmission Packets transmitted Received Lost Minimum packet round-trip time (ms) Maximum packet round-trip time (ms) Average packet round-trip time (ms) "Packets transmitted" and "Received" are updated each time a packet is sent.
When "Module No." is selected for "Target Module Setting" ("PLC Module" is selected for "PLC side I/F")*1
Transmitting data
� When successful Success
� When unsuccessful Time Out
Completion of data transmission Packets transmitted Received Lost "Packets transmitted" and "Received" are updated each time a packet is sent.
Sub status bar
Display the number of send successes and total number of packet transmissions.
*1 : Not supported by FXCPU.
Screen button
Resets the setting items of option setting to their defaults.
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
APPENDIX
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
MONITORING
17 18 19 20 21 22 A I
INDEX
21.7.3 PING test
21 - 83
21 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
21.7.4 Loopback test
A loopback test is a test to check whether the initial processing of each module has been completed by sending a loopback test message to the Q series-compatible E71 modules (function version B or later) of the specified network number or station number.
The following checks are performed when the loopback test is executed. � Whether the line is connected correctly between the host station and the target device. � Whether the parameters are set correctly for the Ethernet module on host station. � Whether the initial processing has been completed correctly for the Ethernet module on host station.
Required setting items Make sure to check the following before executing the loopback test when using an Ethernet module. � "Station No. IP Information" of Ethernet parameter is set. � RUN LED and INT LED on the Ethernet module are ON.
System configuration where the loopback test can be executed � A loopback test is available only with Q series-compatible E71 modules (function version B or later). Ethernet modules (function version A) are treated as "No Response" even if connected. A loopback test is valid for the system configured only with Ethernet. � A loopback test can only be executed to the Ethernet module on the same segment as the target station.
Considerations for executing the loopback test In a multiple network system, to execute the loopback test by specifying a station number in another network number, setting the routing parameters is necessary.
21 - 84
21.7.4 Loopback test
21.7 Diagnosing Ethernet
Loopback test overview
17
MONITORING
For a loopback test, a target station differs according to the connection destination setting described below.
� When "Ethernet Module" is selected for "PLC side I/F" on the Transfer Setup screen.
� When "PLC Module" is selected for "PLC side I/F" on the Transfer Setup screen.
18
When "Ethernet Module" is selected for "PLC side I/F"
Station number 1 Station number 3 Station number 5 Station number 7 Station number 9
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
Set the confirmation station numbers from 1 to 5 on the Loopback Test screen.
Station number 2 Station number 4 Station number 6 Station number 8
19
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
A loopback test is executed to the network number specified on the Loopback Test screen when
accessing the programmable controller CPU via Ethernet module.
In the system as shown below, when the loopback test is executed for station numbers 2 to 4 in
network number 2, the response from the station number 2 (loopback test execution station) is
20
treated as "No Response".
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
Network number 1
Station number 4 The response is
treated as "No
Response".
Network number 2
Station number 3
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
21 22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
21.7.4 Loopback test
21 - 85
21 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
When "PLC Module" is selected for "PLC side I/F"
Serial/USB/Ethernet port direct connection or connection via Ethernet hub
Station number 1 Station number 3 Station number 5 Station number 7 Station number 9
Set the confirmation
station numbers from 1
to 5 on the Loopback
Test screen.
Station number 2 Station number 4 Station number 6 Station number 8
A loopback test is executed to the network number specified on the Loopback Test screen when accessing the programmable controller CPU with a serial/USB/Ethernet port direct connection or a connection via Ethernet hub. For the system configuration described in the following figure, configure the settings of the connection destination as shown below to execute a loopback test for the Ethernet module on the network number 2.
Network number 1
Target station Station number 1 Network number 2
Station number 2
Target station Station number 3
Target station Station number 2
21 - 86
21.7.4 Loopback test
21.7 Diagnosing Ethernet
Screen display
17
Click the
button on the Ethernet Diagnostics screen.
MONITORING
18
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
19
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
Display contents
Item
Description
Network No.
Set the network number for which the loopback test is executed. Setting range: 1 to 239
Number of Confirmation Set the station number to be checked.
Nodes
Setting range: 1 to 64
Check at Communication Time
Setting range: 1 to 99 seconds.
of Ethernet parameter includes TCP Resend Timer. The communication time check value of loopback test must be larger than the value set for TCP Resend Timer. If not, the tested Ethernet module may be judged inexistent even if it is connected correctly.
Result
The loopback test is executed in order from the start station number and whether or not the response is returned within the set communication time check value is displayed in the order of station numbers. If an IP address is duplicated, such IP address is displayed in red.
IP Address Input Style Switch decimal/hexadecimal notation of IP address display.
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
20 21 22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
21.7.4 Loopback test
21 - 87
21 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
21.8 Executing Sensor/Device Monitoring
Q CPU L CPU ReFmXote HFeXad FX
Check the status of iQSS-compatible devices. For details of the sensor/device monitoring function, refer to the following manual. iQ Sensor Solution Reference Manual
21 - 88
21.9 System Monitor
21.9 System Monitor
17
MONITORING
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
This section explains how to display the system status of the programmable controller CPU.
Screen display
18
Select [Diagnostics] [System Monitor]. Some terms and module images are different but the screen configurations are same between the screens of QCPU (Q mode) and LCPU. The screens of QCPU (Q mode) are used in this section.
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
<QCPU (Q mode) (without extension base unit)>
19
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
21
<QCPU (Q mode) (with extension base unit)>
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
21 - 89
21 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
<Redundant CPU> <Remote I/O module>
21 - 90
21.9 System Monitor
Display contents
Item
Description
Monitor Status
Display the current monitor status.
Connection Channel List Display the information of the route to the connection destination.
Mode*1
Select this to perform either system monitor or online module change function.
System Monitor
Execute the system monitor.
Online Module Change Execute the online module change. (For details, refer to Section 21.10)
Main Base*2
Display the operating status of the module and I/O address.
Redundant system (Target system)*3
Display the information of the target system.
Operation to Selected Module
Display the name, slot number, and model name of the base unit/block to which the selected module is mounted.*4
Extension Base*2
This item is displayed when the extension base unit/block is connected. Switch the display by pressing the arrow button on the right. The base unit/block, operating status of the module, and I/O address are displayed.
Base Information List*2
Display the status of each base unit/block.
Base*2
Display the status of the base unit/block.
Module
Display the error status of each module mounted to the base unit/block.
Base Model Name*2
Display the base name set to the parameter on the programmable controller CPU. If the parameter is not set, "Main Base", "Extension Base 1" to "Extension Base 7" are displayed.
Power Supply
Display whether there is power supply.
Base Type*2
Display the type of the base unit/block. For Q series, "QA" is displayed for QA extension base unit. "Q" is displayed for other base units. For L series, "LA" is displayed for LA1S extension base unit. "L" is displayed for other blocks.
Slots
Display the slot number.
Installed Modules*5
Display the number of modules mounted to the base unit.
Number Of Total Modules Occupations*6
Display the total number of modules counted for all mounted modules.*7
Module Information List
Display the information of modules on the base unit/block where the selected module is mounted.
Status
Display the status of each module.
Base-Slot*2
Display the slot number of each module.
Series*4
Display the series of each module.
Model Name*4
Display the model name of each module.
Point*4
Display the number of occupied I/O points of each module.
Type Parameter
Point*4
Display the type/points of each module set to the parameter on the programmable controller CPU. If the parameter is not set, type/points of the mounted module is displayed.
I/O Address*4
Display the I/O address of each module set to the parameter on the programmable controller CPU.
Network No. Station No.*4 Display the network number and the station number set to each module.
Master PLC*5
Display the programmable controller CPU number that controls each module in a multiple CPU configuration. "-" is displayed for the programmable controller CPU or the blank slot.
Number Of Module Occupied*6,*7
Display the number of modules counted for each module.
Legend
Display the legend of the icon displayed on the screen.
*1 : For Process CPU, Redundant CPU, and remote I/O module only.
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
MONITORING
17 18 19 20 21 22 A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
21 - 91
21 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
*2 : Each item is displayed as shown below according to the programmable controller series.
QCPU (Q mode)
LCPU
Main Base
Main Block
Extension base
Extension block
Base Information List Block Information List
Base Base Model Name Base Type Base-Slot
Block Block Name Block Type Block-Slot
*3 : For Redundant CPU only *4 : "*****", "-", and "**" are displayed if the module is not mounted or the parameter is different with the mounting status. *5 : For QCPU (Q mode) only *6 : For LCPU only *7 : A module with width exceeding 28.5mm logically counts as two modules.
Be sure that "Number Of Total Modules Occupations" does not exceed the number of modules that can be mounted. MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual (Hardware Design, Maintenance and Inspection)
Connection Channel List In "Connection Channel List", the route information of the connection destination setting is displayed at all times.
Considerations when using QA extension base unit or LA1S extension base unit
� QA extension base unit is supported by High Performance model QCPUs and Universal model QCPUs with a serial number whose first five digits are '12102' or higher. When using those programmable controller CPUs which do not support it, QA extension base unit is not displayed on the System Monitor screen.
� LA1S extension base unit is supported by LCPUs with a serial number whose first five digits are '16102' or higher. When using LCPUs which do not support LA1S extension base unit, it is not displayed on the System Monitor screen.
� When A series module or QnA series module is mounted on the QA extension base unit, the images displayed on the system monitor of both A series and QnA series modules are common. Additionally, a module type is displayed for Model Name of Module Information List.
� When A series or QnA series module is selected, the functions under "Operation to Selected Module" cannot be performed.
System monitor when a GOT is connected via bus When a GOT is connected via bus, a single row of extension base unit (16 points x 10 slots) is displayed on the System Monitor screen, and the GOT is displayed as an intelligent function module with 16 I/O points. The displayed slot position is the position set on the GOT side. For details of GOT bus connection, refer to the following manuals. GOT2000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) For GT Works3 Version1 GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) for GT Works3 GOT-A900 Series User's Manual (GT Works2 Version2/GT Designer2 Version2 compatible Connection System Manual)
21 - 92
Screen button
Displays the illustration of the connection route. (Section 14.1.1)
21.9 System Monitor
17
18
MONITORING
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
19
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
Displays the module information of the selected module. The following is an example of the Module's Detailed Information screen when QJ71LP21-25 is
21
selected.
(Section 21.9.1)
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
21 - 93
21 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
Displays the hardware LED information and the hardware switch information. The display contents of the H/W Information differ according to module version. For details, refer to the User's Manual of each module.
Displays the diagnostic information of the selected module. The following is an example of the PLC Diagnostics screen when the programmable controller CPU module is selected. (Section 21.1)
21 - 94
MONITORING
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
21.9 System Monitor
17
Displays error history logs of the module selected on the System Monitor screen. This button is available when GX Works2 is connected to the programmable controller CPU that supports the module error history collection function. (Section 21.9.2)
18
19
20
21
Prints the figure of the system configuration.
22
A
I
21 - 95
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
APPENDIX
INDEX
21 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
Displays the product information of each module mounted to the base unit/block.
� Clicking the
button saves the product information data in CSV file format.
Displays all error history logs of the programmable controller and modules. This button is available when GX Works2 is connected to the programmable controller CPU that supports the module error history collection function. (Section 21.9.2)
21 - 96
21.9 System Monitor
17
Operation to selected module The functions of "Operation to Selected Module" can also be executed from the shortcut menu by selecting modules from "Main Base" or "Extension Base" ("Main Block" or "Extension Block" for LCPU).
18
MONITORING
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
Displaying module status
19
The following screen is displayed if the mounting status of the module cannot be obtained due to the incorrect
parameter settings.
Execute the system monitor function again after adjusting the parameter to the mounting status.
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
21 - 97
21 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
Error icons
The following table shows the details of the error status icons of the programmable controller CPU and the modules.
Module
Icon
Error
Programmable controller CPU status
Serious error
MAIN CPU down
RESET and others
Programmable controller CPU
Moderate error
Stop error
STOP due to error in parameter or instruction codes
Minor error Assignment error
Error allowing operation
Errors that allow RUN status such as battery low and annunciator ON
Assignment error
Assignment errors such as multiple CPU setting is not set.
Error
H/W error
H/W errors in the base or the power supply
Module
Serious error*1 Moderate error Minor error*1
Module system error Module error Module warning
Assignment error Assignment error
Illegal assignment Illegal assignment *1 : This item is not displayed for remote I/O module.
H/W errors in modules
No appropriate environment for executing the functions of modules
Impropriety in programs or user's operations
The assigning status of the module is different with the mounting status of the module. (The status that the module type and points cannot be obtained.) The assigning status of the module is different with the mounting status of the module. (The status that the module type and points can be obtained.)
Display when mounted modules do not match with the I/O assignment setting on PLC parameter
The following shows "Module Information List" on the System monitor function according to the I/O assignment on PLC parameter. If module mounting status does not match with the I/O assignment, change "I/O Assignment" of the I/O assignment setting to match with the mounting status. "*****", "-", and "**" are displayed if the module is not mounted, or the parameter is different with the mounting status.
21 - 98
21.9 System Monitor
21.9.1 Checking module's detailed information
17
MONITORING
Display the module information of the selected module.
Modules of QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU
18
Screen display
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
Select a module on the System Monitor screen and click the
button.
The following is an example of the Module's Detailed Information screen when QJ71LP21-25 is
selected.
19
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
Screen button
Displays the hardware LED information and the hardware switch information. (Section 21.9)
Updates the error history of the module.
A
(Supported by LCPU only)
Deletes the error history of the module.
APPENDIX
Clears the error displayed in "Latest Error Code".
I
INDEX
21.9.1 Checking module's detailed information
21 - 99
21 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
Built-in I/O module Screen display
Select a built-in I/O module on the System Monitor screen and click the
button.
Screen button
For the buttons on the screen, refer to Modules of QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU.
/
Displays/hides the built-in function buttons.
For details of the built-in function buttons, refer to the following sections.
� Positioning monitor Section 21.11.1
� High-speed counter monitor Section 21.11.2
� I/O monitor Section 21.11.3
21 - 100
21.9.1 Checking module's detailed information
21.9 System Monitor
Built-in CC-Link module
17
MONITORING
Screen display
Select a built-in CC-Link module on the System Monitor screen and click the button.
18
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
19
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
21
Screen button
For the buttons on the screen, refer to Modules of QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU.
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
21.9.1 Checking module's detailed information
21 - 101
21 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
21.9.2 Checking details of error history
Check error history of the programmable controller CPU and modules. Error history of a specified module can be displayed by using the refine search function.
Screen display
Select [Diagnostics] [System Monitor]
/
.
<Error history (when programmable controller CPU is selected>
<System error history>
21 - 102
21.9.2 Checking details of error history
21.9 System Monitor
Display contents
Item Monitor Status Connection Channel List
Refine Search
Error History List Error Code Notation No. Error Code Date and Time Model Name Start I/O
Error Details Model Name
Start I/O
Mount Position
<<Error and Solution>>
<<Intelligent Module Information>>
Description Display the current monitor status. Display the information of the connection destination setting. Display the refinement criteria for the error history list. Not displayed when no refinement criterion is specified. � Select the display format of error codes (DEC/HEX). Display the error history number. Errors are numbered in order of occurring. Display the error code that indicates details of the error. Display date and time of the error occurrence. Display the model name of the module on which the error occurs. Display the start I/O number of the module on which the error occurs. � Display the model name of the module selected in the error history list. Display the start I/O number of the module selected in the error history list. For the module that uses multiple slots, the starting slot is only displayed. Display the mount position of the module selected in the error history list. Display the explanation and solution of the error on the module being selected in the error history list. Display the module information at the error occurrence of the intelligent function module being selected in the error history list.
Screen button
For the buttons on the screen, refer to Section 21.9.
Clears all refinement criteria.
Displays the Enter Refine Criteria screen.
To start refining the search, click the
button.
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
MONITORING
17 18 19 20 21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
Clears the error history saved on the programmable controller CPU.
A
Updates information displayed in the error history list.
Exports information displayed in the error history list to a file in CSV format.
APPENDIX
I
Programmable controller CPUs and modules that support the function to display detailed error history Detailed error history can be displayed when a programmable controller CPU and intelligent function module that support the module error history collection function are used. For versions of modules that support the function, refer to the User's Manual of each module.
INDEX
21.9.2 Checking details of error history
21 - 103
21 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
21.10 Changing Modules Online
This section explains how to change modules online.
Screen display
Select [Diagnostics] [Online Module Change]. <Remote I/O module>
*1
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
*1 : Process CPU and Redundant CPU only
Operating procedure
1. Double-click the module to be exchanged on the System Monitor screen.
The Online Module Change screen is displayed.
2. Change the module by following the instruction of "Status/Guidance".
21 - 104
21.10 Changing Modules Online
17
MONITORING
Remote I/O module versions compatible with Online module change Use the function version D or later to perform the Online module change function on a remote I/O module. For the method for checking the function version, refer to the following manual. Q Corresponding MELSECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (Remote I/O network)
Canceling Online module change
� Online module change can be suspended by clicking the
button during the process of Online module
18
change to check the system status with monitoring or current value change.
� Online module change can be continued from the suspended status by selecting [Diagnostics] [Online Module Change].
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
� Online module change can also be continued when GX Works2 is terminated during the process of Online module change by restarting GX Works2 and performing the same operation above.
Executing Online module change on a single programmable controller CPU from two personal computers
The authority to execute Online module change can be transferred to the personal computer which executed the
function later.
19
Online module change during monitoring
Stop monitoring before executing Online module change.
Online module change can be executed without stopping the monitoring, however, the following message will be
displayed.
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
Restrictions
Restrictions on Online module change � Online module change cannot be performed to multiple modules simultaneously.
21
� Online module change cannot be continued when the programmable controller CPU is reset, or the power is turned
OFF during the process of Online module change.
� Online module change cannot be performed when a Process CPU or Redundant CPU is in the following state.
� The RESET/L.CLR switch of the programmable controller CPU is reset.
� A stop error occurred and the programmable controller CPU is stopped.
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
21 - 105
21 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
21.11 Built-in I/O Module Tools
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
This section explains how to monitor the operating status of the positioning function, high-speed counter function, and I/O signals using the built-in I/O module tools. For the monitoring items and setting values, refer to MELSEC-L CPU Module User's Manual (Built-in I/ O Function).
21.11.1 Positioning monitor
Monitor the operating status of the positioning function. The methods for executing the error reset and OPR OFF are also explained.
Screen display
Select [Tool] [Built-In I/O Module Tool] [Positioning Monitor].
Display contents
Monitor Test
Item
Error Reset
OPR OFF
Display the current status. �
Description
Click to select an axis to execute the error reset.
Click to select an axis to execute the OPR OFF.
Screen button
Executes the error reset of the selected axis.
Executes the OPR OFF of the selected axis.
21 - 106
21.11.1 Positioning monitor
21.11 Built-in I/O Module Tools
21.11.2 High-speed counter monitor
17
MONITORING
Monitor the operating status of the high-speed counter function. The methods for executing the current value preset and error reset are also explained.
Screen display
18
Select [Tool] [Built-In I/O Module Tool] [High-Speed Counter Monitor].
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
19
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
Display contents
Monitor Test
Item
Display the current status. �
Description
Current Value Preset
Click to select a channel. After selecting the channel, enter the preset value.
Error Reset
Click to select a channel to execute the error reset.
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
Screen button
A
Applies the preset value of the selected channel to the programmable controller CPU.
Executes the error reset of the selected channel.
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
21.11.2 High-speed counter monitor
21 - 107
21 DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
21.11.3 I/O monitor
Monitor the I/O signals.
Screen display
Select [Tool] [Built-In I/O Module Tool] [I/O Monitor].
Display contents
Item Input Signal Output Signal
Description Display the status of each input signal. Display the status of each output signal.
21 - 108
21.11.3 I/O monitor
17
MONITORING
22 SIMULATING
18
OPERATIONS OF
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
EXTERNAL DEVICES
19
This chapter explains debugging operations using the I/O system setting function.
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
22.1 I/O System Setting Function
20
22 - 2
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
22.2 Operating Procedure of I/O System Setting Function 22 - 7
22.3 Screen Configuration of I/O System Setting Function 22 - 8
22.4 Setting by Inputting Device Values
22 - 10
21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
22.5 Setting Using Timing Charts
22 - 15
22.6 Performing I/O System Setting Function
22 - 27
22.7 Monitoring I/O System Setting 22.8 Operating I/O System Setting Files
22 - 28
22
22 - 30
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
22 - 1
22 SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
22.1 I/O System Setting Function
Q CPU L CPU ReFmXote HFeXad FX
The I/O system setting function simulates operations of external devices. Using the I/O system setting function, operations of external devices can be simulated without a special debugging sequence program. Since input devices (X) can also be turned ON/OFF, devices in programs do not need to be rewritten during the simulation.
22.1.1
Differences between conventional debugging and debugging with I/O system setting function
This section explains differences between conventional debugging and debugging with the I/O system setting function.
Conventional debugging
1) Devices need to be rewritten As input devices (X) can be turned ON/OFF only with an external device connected to the I/O module, the program needs to be modified by changing X0 M0, X1 M1, etc. to conduct debugging without an external device.
2) A sequence program for debugging is required A debugging sequence program needs to be added to simulate operations of external devices.
Debugging with the I/O system setting function
1) Devices do not need to be rewritten It is not necessary to rewrite devices (X0 M0) as input devices (X) can be turned ON/OFF with the I/O system setting function.
2) A sequence program for debugging is not required For sequence actions for debugging can be set/changed easily from the setting screen, a sequence program for debugging is not required.
22 - 2
22.1.1 Differences between conventional debugging and debugging with I/O system setting function
22.1 I/O System Setting Function
Example: Simulating operations of program when Y0 is turned ON, and 5 seconds later X1 is turned
17
ON to stop running
<Conventional debugging> 1) Devices need to be rewritten
<Debugging using the I/O system setting function> 1) Devices do not need to be rewritten
MONITORING
X0-M0 X1-M1
Start Y0
Stop
X0
X1
Y0
Run
Start
Stop
Y0
18
Y0
Run
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
2) A sequence program for debugging is required
Y0
K50
T0
T0
M1
2) A sequence program for debugging is not required
<Setting on the I/O System Setting screen>
19
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
<Image of operation>*1 Settings set in the I/O system setting screen are saved in a file as a sequence program shown below.
Y0 5 sec. timer
setting
5 sec. timer SET X1
*1: The program is an image of operation.
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
20 21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
22.1.1 Differences between conventional debugging and debugging with I/O system setting function
22 - 3
22 SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
22.1.2 Conditions and sequence actions for simulation
The I/O system setting function simulates operations of external devices according to specified conditions and sequence actions for debugging. In "Condition", set a condition for starting up a sequence action for debugging. For settings of conditions, refer to Table 22.1.2-1. In "Sequence Action", set devices of which values are to be changed or a timing chart which is to be started up at timing when the condition is true, using either of two kinds of setting methods: device value input and timing chat input. For details, refer to Section 22.1.3. Sequence actions for debugging can be switched easily by selecting/clearing "Enable" on the I/O system setting screen.
Example) Settings on the I/O system setting screen using the device value input
By selecting/clearing "Enable", sequence actions for debugging can be switched easily.
22 - 4
22.1.2 Conditions and sequence actions for simulation
22.1 I/O System Setting Function
Combinations of conditions and examples of settings on the I/O system setting screen
17
Table 22.1.2-1 Combination of conditions and setting examples
Combination of conditions
Condition setting on the I/O system setting screen
MONITORING
1
18
2
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
3
19
4
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
5
20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
6
21
7
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
22.1.2 Conditions and sequence actions for simulation
22 - 5
22 SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
22.1.3 Timing chart input and device value input
There are two methods to set sequence actions in the I/O system setting function: one is the device value input to change value of a desired device after a specified amount of time has elapsed when a condition has been satisfied; the other is the time chart input to execute a timing chart when a condition has been satisfied. Device value input
A value of a specified device can be changed after the specified condition is satisfied and the time specified for the timer is elapsed. This enables actions such as the following.
Example: "When Y0 is turned ON, 5 seconds later X0 and X3 are turned ON"
Condition
Timer
<Setting of device value input>
Sequence action
Sequence action after timer activation After the timer is activated, the timer will not be suspended even when the condition changes to unsatisfied status, and the sequence action is performed to change the value of the specified device.
Timing chart input When a specified condition has been satisfied, device variation defined in timing chart format can be performed. This enables complicated actions such as the following.
Example: "When Y0 is turned ON, D0 is counted up, Y0 is turned OFF when X0 is turned ON"
Condition <Setting of timing chart input>
Timing chart format
22 - 6
22.1.3 Timing chart input and device value input
22.2 Operating Procedure of I/O System Setting Function
22.2 Operating Procedure of I/O System Setting Function
17
MONITORING
Q CPU L CPU ReFmXote HFeXad FX
The following shows the operating procedure of the I/O system setting function.
Start simulation
*1
18
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
Start the I/O system setting from the GX Simulator2 screen *2
Do you want to set the I/O system
by inputting device
YES
values?
Enter device values
*3
NO
Do you want to set the I/O system using timing charts?
YES
Use timing charts
*4
NO
Save the I/O system setting
*5
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
19 20 21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
Execute the I/O system setting
*6
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
Do you want to start monitoring with the I/O system
YES
setting?
Start monitoring
*7
NO
A
APPENDIX
End simulation
*1
*1 : Section 18.2 *2 : Section 22.3 *3 : Section 22.4 *4 : Section 22.5 *5 : Section 22.8.3 *6 : Section 22.6 *7 : Section 22.7
I
22 - 7
INDEX
22 SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
22.3 Screen Configuration of I/O System Setting Function
Q CPU L CPU ReFmXote HFeXad FX
This section explains the screen configuration of the I/O system setting function.
Screen display
Select the GX Simulator2 screen [Tool] [I/O System Setting].
Menu bar Toolbar
I/O system setting tree
Edit/monitor screen
Status bar
Display contents
Item Menu bar Toolbar File under Editing File under Execution
I/O system setting tree
Description
Display menu options for executing each function.
Display tool buttons for executing each function.
Display the name of a file being edited.
Display the name of a file being executed.
Select a setting method for the I/O system setting. Timing Chart Input
To set the I/O system setting in timing chart format, double-click the number to be set. Device Value Input To set the I/O system setting by setting device values, double-click the number to be set.*1
Edit/monitor the I/O system setting. At timing chart input
Reference Section 1.3.14 Appendix 1.8 � �
Section 22.4 Section 22.5
Edit/monitor screen
At device value input
Section 22.4 Section 22.5
Status bar
Display information about a project being edited.
�
*1 : For FXCPU, the setting range is No. 1 to No. 100.
22 - 8
22.3 Screen Configuration of I/O System Setting Function
17
Target Simulator Setting screen (QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU) If simulation has been started from multiple projects at startup of the I/O system setting function, the Target Simulator Setting screen is displayed to specify a simulator (virtual programmable controller) on which the I/O system setting is performed.
18
MONITORING
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
19
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
Restrictions
Startup of the I/O system setting
The I/O system setting of GX Simulator Version 7 and the I/O system setting of GX Works2 cannot be started up
simultaneously.
Startup the I/O system setting of GX Works2 after disabling the I/O system setting of GX Simulator Version 7.
20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
22 - 9
22 SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
22.4 Setting by Inputting Device Values
Q CPU L CPU ReFmXote HFeXad FX
This section explains how to configure the I/O system setting by inputting device values.
Operating procedure
1. Double-click a desired setting number from "Device Value Input" in the I/O system
setting tree.
Doubleclick
2. Set the items on the screen.
Item No.
Condition
Description
Setting number in the I/O System Setting screen.
Specify the input condition from the virtual programmable controller.
The Device Specification screen is displayed by clicking . (Section 22.4.1) Bit devices and word devices can be specified for the input condition. Labels cannot be specified. For a bit device, ON/OFF can be set in a designated condition; for a word device, comparison (=,<>,<,>,<=,>=) with a constant or another word device can be set in a designated condition. In addition, a relational condition can be set by specifying AND/OR operation.
AND operation
OR operation
Timer ms
Sequence Action Setting
With an And operation, the condition is satisfied if both designated conditions on the left and right are achieved. Otherwise, the condition is not satisfied. With an OR operation, the condition is satisfied if either or both of designated conditions in upper and lower columns are achieved.
Set a period of time from when the specified condition is satisfied until the sequence action is issued. The setting range is 1 to 1000 (10 to 10000ms).
Set a bit device to be turned ON/OFF or a word device of which the value is to be changed after the specified condition is satisfied. Labels cannot be set.
Set whether each setting is to be enabled/disabled. Select this to enable the setting.
22 - 10
22.4 Setting by Inputting Device Values
22.4.1 Setting conditions
17
MONITORING
Conditions can be entered directly, or set on the Device Specification screen.
For devices that can be entered for conditions, refer to Appendix 2.2.
Note that there are devices which are not supported by the I/O system setting. For unsupported
devices, refer to Restrictions in this section. Data entry method (direct data entry)
18
Operation
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
� Enter conditional expressions directly.
Example) For bit devices: X0=ON, M10=OFF
For word devices: D0=20, D5<20, D15<>5, D25>=10, D0=D50
19
Data entry method (set on the Device Specification screen)
<When a bit device is selected>
<When a word device is selected>
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
Operation
� Set the items on the screen.
Item
Description
Compare Source
�
<<Device>>
�
Device
Set a device.
<<Buffer Memory>>*1
�
Module Start (HEX) Enter a start I/O number of the intelligent function module in hexadecimal.
Address
Enter a buffer memory address in decimal/hexadecimal.
Decimal/Hexadecimal Select an input form (decimal/hexadecimal) of the buffer memory address.
Condition
Select a comparison condition when the compare source is other than a bit device.
Compare Destination
�
<<Value>>
�
Select ON/OFF
Specify ON/OFF when the compare source is a bit device.
Value
Enter a value when the compare source is a word device.
<<Device>>
�
Device
Set a device.
<<Buffer Memory>>*1
�
Module Start (HEX) Enter a start I/O number of the intelligent function module in hexadecimal.
Address
Enter a buffer memory address in decimal/hexadecimal.
Decimal/Hexadecimal Select an input form (decimal/hexadecimal) of the buffer memory address.
*1 : For FXCPU, these items are supported by FX3U and FX3UC only.
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
APPENDIX
21 22 A I
INDEX
22.4.1 Setting conditions
22 - 11
22 SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
Restrictions
Unsupported devices The following special relays are not supported by the I/O system setting. Use other supported devices to set conditions. � SM402 (After RUN, ON for only 1 scan) � SM403 (After RUN, OFF for only 1 scan) � SM404 (Low speed execution type program After RUN, ON for 1 scan only) � SM405 (Low speed execution type program After RUN, OFF for 1 scan only) � SM1038 (After RUN, ON for only 1 scan) � SM1039 (After RUN, OFF for only 1 scan)
22 - 12
22.4.1 Setting conditions
22.4 Setting by Inputting Device Values
22.4.2 Setting sequence actions
17
MONITORING
Sequence actions can be entered directly, or set on the Bit Device Setting screen or the Word Device
Setting screen.
For devices that can be entered for conditions, refer to the following section.
(Appendix 2.2) Data entry method (direct data entry)
18
Operation
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
� Enter devices directly.
Example) For bit devices: X2-4, M5, M7
For word devices: D12=234, D20=10
19
Data entry method (set on the Bit Device Setting screen)
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
Operation
� Set the items on the screen.
Item Bit Device List Bit Device Setting
Device (from) Device No. (to)
Description Display the list of bit devices being set. � Set a bit device. Set an end bit device number for the range specification.
22
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
22.4.2 Setting sequence actions
22 - 13
22 SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
Data entry method (set on the Word Device Setting screen)
Operation
� Set the items on the screen.
Item
Description
Word Device List
Display the list of word devices being set.
<<Device>>
�
Device
Set a word device.
Setting Value/Device
Set a device value or device.
<<Buffer memory>>*1
�
Module Start (HEX)
Enter a start number of the module in hexadecimal.
Address
Enter a buffer memory address in decimal/hexadecimal.
Decimal/Hexadecimal
Select an input form (decimal/hexadecimal) of the buffer memory address.
*1 : For FXCPU, these items are supported by FX3U and FX3UC only.
Data entry method for direct data entry
Enter a device of which a value is to be changed when the specified condition is satisfied.
For setting multiple devices, separate each device with ",". For setting consecutive devices, connect the start device number and end device number with "-".
Example) X0, X2, M10-20 D0=100, W0=100
Number of device points that can be executed simultaneously Up to 25000 device points can be executed simultaneously in the device input of the I/O system setting.
Setting conditions and sequence operation
� Index settings (Example: D0Z0), bit-specified word device (Example: D0.0), and digit-specified bit device (Example: K4X0) cannot be set in the conditions and sequence operation.
� The I/O system setting does not support local devices. When local devices are set, the I/O system setting may not perform properly.
Cutting/copying/pasting I/O system setting by unit of setting number The I/O system setting can be cut/copied/pasted by unit of setting number. To cut/copy/paste the I/O system setting, click a setting number of the I/O system setting and select [Edit] [Cut]/ [Copy]/[Paste].
22 - 14
22.4.2 Setting sequence actions
22.5 Setting Using Timing Charts
22.5 Setting Using Timing Charts
17
MONITORING
Q CPU L CPU ReFmXote HFeXad FX
This section explains how to set the I/O system setting using timing charts.
Operating procedure
18
1. Double-click a desired setting number from "Timing Chart Input" in the I/O system
setting tree.
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
19
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
Doubleclick
20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
2. Set the items on the screen.
No. Condition
Item
Timing Chart Format
Keep Setting
Description Setting number in the I/O System Setting screen. Specify the input condition from the simulation. (Section 22.4.1) The Edit Timing Chart Format screen is displayed by clicking the
button.
Select this to execute the timing specified in the timing chart repeatedly. Set whether each setting is to be enabled/disabled. Select this to enable the setting.
21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
22
Cutting/copying/pasting I/O system setting by unit of setting number The I/O system setting can be cut/copied/pasted by unit of setting number. To cut/copy/paste the I/O system setting, click a setting number of the I/O system setting and select [Edit] [Cut]/ [Copy]/[Paste].
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
22 - 15
22 SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
22.5.1 Setting in timing chart format
The following shows the setting procedure on the Edit Timing Chart Format screen.
Start setting
Do you want to read a timing chart data file saved
with GX Simulator?
YES
NO
Read a timing chart data file
*1
Register devices
*2
Set/edit timing
*3
Do you want to repeat scans for the specified
number of times?
YES
NO
Set the number of scans
*4
*1 : Section 22.5.6 *2 : Section 22.5.3 *3 : Section 22.5.4 *4 : Section 22.5.5
End setting
22 - 16
22.5.1 Setting in timing chart format
22.5 Setting Using Timing Charts
22.5.2 Screen configuration of Edit Timing Chart Format screen
17
MONITORING
The following explains the screen configuration of the Edit Timing Chart Format screen.
Screen display
Select the Timing Chart Input screen
.
18
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
Menu bar Toolbar
Number of scans
Device name/ device value
19
Status
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
Display contents
Item Menu bar Toolbar
Device name/device value
Number of scans
Description
Display menu options for executing each function.
Display tool buttons for executing each function.
Display devices specified in the Enter Device screen.
Bit device The device name is displayed in yellow when the device is ON at the timing of the cursor position.
Word device The device value at timing of the cursor position is displayed in a text box on the right of the device name. When a word device is specified as 32-bit integer, (D) is added at the end of the device name, and when a word device is specified as single precision real number, (E) is added at the end of the device name.
Example) D0(D), W6(D), D10(E), W60(E)
Display the number of scans at the timing. To repeat a scan for the specified number of times, set the number of scans. (Section 22.5.5)
When "Keep" below the
button is selected, enabled
scans can be repeated while the condition is satisfied. (Example: Keep scanning for 6 scans, which is the specified number of scans)
Reference � � �
�
6 scans of from scan 0 to 5 are only enabled.
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
20 21 22 A
APPENDIX
Status
Repeat scan 0 to 5 while the condition is satisfied.
Display status of the timing chart being set.
*2 *1
I
�
*1: The target device is turned OFF ON.
*4
*3 *2: The target device is turned ON OFF.
*3: There is no change in the device value.
*4: There is a change in the device value.
INDEX
22.5.2 Screen configuration of Edit Timing Chart Format screen
22 - 17
22 SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
22.5.3 Registering devices
Register devices for setting timing.
Operating procedure
1. Select [Device] [Enter Device] from the Edit Timing Chart Format screen.
<Bit device>
<Word device>
<Buffer memory>
2. Set the items on the screen.
Item
Description
<<Device>>
Select this tab to register devices.
Device
Set a device to be registered.
Initial Value
Set the initial value of the device. For a bit device, select ON/OFF of the bit. For a word device, set the initial value.
<<Buffer Memory>>*1
Select this tab to register buffer memory.
Module Start (HEX)
Set a start address of a module to be registered.
Address
Set the address of the buffer memory to be registered.
Decimal/Hexadecimal
Select the input form of the buffer memory address.
Initial Value
Set the initial value of the buffer memory to be registered.
Display Format
�
Value
Select the display format of the value.
View
Select the display format of the device.
*1 : For FXCPU, this item is supported by FX3U and FX3UC only.
Deleting registered devices To delete a registered device, select the device displayed in device name/device value on the Edit Timing Chart Format screen, and select [Device] [Delete Device].
22 - 18
22.5.3 Registering devices
22.5 Setting Using Timing Charts
22.5.4 Setting timing
17
MONITORING
Set/edit the timing. Move the cursor to the timing to be set, and perform an operation using any of tool buttons, menus, and shortcut keys.
18
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
19
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
Operation Device ON
Device OFF Progressive OFF Progressive ON All OFF All ON Change No Change Insert Delete
Toolbar
Menu
� Select [Edit] [Bit Device] [Device ON]. � Right-click and select [Device ON] from the shortcut menu. � Double-click at the cursor position
� Select [Edit] [Bit Device] [Device OFF]. � Right-click and select [Device OFF] from the shortcut menu. � Double-click at the cursor position.
� Select [Edit] [Bit Device] [Progressive OFF]. � Right-click and select [Progressive OFF] from the shortcut menu.
� Select [Edit] [Bit Device] [Progressive ON]. � Right-click and select [Progressive ON] from the shortcut menu.
� Select [Edit] [Bit Device] [All OFF]. � Right-click and select [All OFF] from the shortcut menu.
� Select [Edit] [Bit Device] [All ON]. � Right-click and select [All ON] from the shortcut menu.
� Select [Edit] [Word Device] [Change]. � Right-click and select [Change] from the shortcut menu. � Double-click the cursor position.
� Select [Edit] [Word Device] [No Change]. � Right-click and select [No Change] from the shortcut menu.
� Select [Edit] [Insert]. � Right-click and select [Insert] from the shortcut menu.
� Select [Edit] [Delete]. � Right-click and select [Delete] from the shortcut menu.
Shortcut key
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
20 21 22 A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
22.5.4 Setting timing
22 - 19
22 SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
Setting timing of bit devices
Setting the ON/OFF cycle Set continuous ON/OFF repeated for the specified period after the specified timing. Example) Set the following value to scan 1 (cursor position). Cycle: 2
Operation
1. Select a cell corresponding to a scan of a bit device to be changed.
2. Select [Edit] [Timing Setting].
3. Set an ON/OFF cycle of the bit device.
4. Click the
button.
ON/OFF of the bit device is cyclically set.
22 - 20
22.5.4 Setting timing
22.5 Setting Using Timing Charts
Setting timing of word devices
17
MONITORING
Changing the value at the specified timing Change the value of the specified device at the specified timing.
Example) Set the following value to scan 3 (cursor position).
Setting Value: 10, Continue, Number of Scans: 4, Increase and Decrease: Increase,
Increase and Decrease Value: 20
18
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
19
Operation
1. Select a cell corresponding to a word device to be changed.
20
2. Select [Edit] [Word Device] [Change] ( ).
21
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
3. Set the items on the screen.
Item Value Setting
Setting Value Continue
Number of Scans Increase and Decrease Increase and Decrease Value Trigonometric Function SIN curve COS curve Maximum Value Cycle Scan
Description Select this to set a value. Enter a setting value for the word device. Select this to set the setting value continuously. Enter the number of scans to be continued. Set this to increase/decrease the value. Set the increase/decrease value. Select this to change the value using trigonometric functions. Select this to change the value with a SIN curve. Select this to change the value with a COS curve. Enter the maximum value. Select the number of scans corresponding to one period of SIN/COS curves.
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
APPENDIX
22 A I
INDEX
22.5.4 Setting timing
22 - 21
22 SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
4. Click the
button.
The value of the word device is set.
22.5.5 Setting number of scans of timing chart
Set the number of scans of a timing chart input from an external device.
Screen display
Select the Edit Timing Chart Format screen [Scan] [Scan Setting].
Operating procedure
1. Enter the value for "No. of Scans".
2. Click the
button.
Columns of disabled scans are shaded on the timing chart.
22 - 22
22.5.5 Setting number of scans of timing chart
22.5 Setting Using Timing Charts
22.5.6 Utilizing timing chart data of existing applications
17
MONITORING
Read and utilize a timing chart data file (*.DAT) saved with the timing chart of GX Simulator. Since devices and timing are automatically registered after reading, there is no need to register them again.
Screen display
18
Select the Edit Timing Chart Format screen [File] [Open File].
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
19
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
Restrictions
21
Number of device points that can be read from a timing chart data file
Timing chart data for 16 device points from the top in the screen can only be saved with the timing chart function.
Therefore, move necessary devices to within 16 points from the top in the screen and save the data when creating a
timing chart data file.
Number of scans that can be read from a timing chart data file Scan 0 to 99 are available in the Edit Time Chart Format screen of the I/O system setting function. When a timing chart data file includes scan 100 and later, they are discarded.
When a double-precision real number is used in a timing chart data file When a double-precision real number is contained in a timing chart data file created with GX Simulator, the file cannot
22
be read.
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
22.5.6 Utilizing timing chart data of existing applications
22 - 23
22 SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
22.5.7 Displaying list of registered devices
Display a list of registered devices.
Screen display
Select the Edit Timing Chart Format screen [Device] [Device List].
Display contents
Device List
Item
Description Display devices registered on the Edit Timing Chart Format screen.
Screen button
Displays the Enter Device screen, and adds a device to the Edit Timing Chart Format screen.
Deletes the device being selected from the Edit Timing Chart Format screen.
Displays the device being selected on the Edit Timing Chart Format screen.
/
Moves the display position of a device being selected up/down on the Edit Timing Chart Format
screen.
22 - 24
22.5.7 Displaying list of registered devices
22.5 Setting Using Timing Charts
22.5.8 Exchanging display positions of devices
17
MONITORING
Exchange the display positions of devices by dragging and dropping a device name.
Operating procedure
1. Drag a device name on the Edit Timing Chart Format screen.
18
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
Drag
19 2. Place the square frame over a device to be exchanged.
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
Place the square frame over
21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
22.5.8 Exchanging display positions of devices
22 - 25
22 SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
22.5.9 Changing display format of devices
Change the display format of devices registered in the Edit Timing Chart Format screen. This function is not applicable to bit devices.
Operating procedure
1. Select the Edit Timing Chart Format screen [Device] [Property].
2. Set the items on the screen.
Item Display Format
Value View
Description � Select the display format of values. Select the display format of devices.
3. Click the
button.
22 - 26
22.5.9 Changing display format of devices
22.6 Performing I/O System Setting Function
22.6 Performing I/O System Setting Function
17
MONITORING
Q CPU L CPU ReFmXote HFeXad FX
This section explains the operations of simulation using the I/O system setting function.
18
22.6.1 Executing simulation
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
Execute simulation with settings configured using the I/O system setting function.
Operating procedure
19
1. Select the I/O System Setting screen [File] [Open] ( ), and open an I/O system
setting file (*.IOS).
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
20 2. Select the I/O System Setting screen [File] [Execute I/O System Setting] ( ).
The confirmation message is displayed.
21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
3. Click the
button.
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
I/O system setting files When the I/O system setting function is executed after an I/O system setting file is changed, the changes are automatically overwritten to the file.
Simulation with the I/O system setting Make sure that the simulator (virtual programmable controller) specified as execution target is in the RUN status at "LED" on the GX Simulator2 screen.
When it is in the STOP status, sequence actions and timing charts are not performed even though conditions of the device value input or timing chart input are satisfied.
A
APPENDIX
22.6.2 Disabling simulation
Stop simulation of the I/O system setting being executed by disabling the I/O system setting.
I
Operating procedure
� Select the I/O System Setting screen [File] [Disable I/O System Setting] ( ).
INDEX
22.6.1 Executing simulation
22 - 27
22 SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
22.7 Monitoring I/O System Setting
Q CPU L CPU ReFmXote HFeXad FX
This section explains how to monitor devices on the I/O System Setting screen. Using this function, status of registered conditions can be confirmed, and values of devices registered in conditions can be changed.
22.7.1 Starting/stopping monitoring
Start/stop monitoring on the I/O System Setting screen.
Start monitoring
Start monitoring on the I/O System Setting screen.
Operating procedure
� Select [Online] [Start Monitoring] (
Monitoring starts.
) on the I/O System Setting screen.
Stop monitoring
Stop monitoring on the I/O System Setting screen.
Operating procedure
� Select [Online] [Stop Monitoring] ( ) on the I/O System Setting screen.
22 - 28
22.7.1 Starting/stopping monitoring
22.7 Monitoring I/O System Setting
Screen display during monitoring
17
When monitoring starts, the I/O System Setting screen is displayed as shown below. Conditions that are satisfied are displayed in yellow.
MONITORING
18
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
Screen button
19
Displays the Edit Timing Chart Format screen to confirm the monitoring status.
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
22.7.2 Changing current value of devices
Change current device value during monitoring.
20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
Operating procedure
� Set the items on the screen.
Item For a bit device
Description
Click a bit device to invert its status.
Click a word device to display the Change Device Value screen below and change its value.
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
For a word device
A
APPENDIX
Screen button
For the button on the screen, refer to Section 22.7.1.
22.7.2 Changing current value of devices
I
22 - 29
INDEX
22 SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
22.8 Operating I/O System Setting Files
Q CPU L CPU ReFmXote HFeXad FX
This section explains how to operate an I/O system setting file (*.IOS).
22.8.1 Creating I/O system setting files
Create a new I/O system setting file.
Operating procedure
� Select [File] [New] ( ).
22.8.2 Opening existing I/O system setting files
Open a saved I/O system setting file.
Operating procedure
1. Select [File] [Open] ( ). 2. Select a file to be opened and click the
button.
Supported existing applications I/O system setting files created with GX Simulator Version 6 or later can also be opened.
Restrictions
'Push Button'/'Always ON' set with existing GX Simulator When an I/O system setting file in which a `Push Button'/'Always ON' is set with GX simulator is read with GX Works2, a 'Push Button' is converted to a '(blank)' and a 'Always ON' is converted to a 'SM400=ON' by QCPU (Q mode). A 'Push Button' is converted to a '(blank)' and an 'Always ON' is converted to an 'M8000=ON' by FXCPU.
22.8.3 Saving I/O system setting files
Save an I/O system setting file being open under a specified name.
Operating procedure
1. Select [File] [Save As]. 2. Enter a name of the file to be saved and click the
button.
22 - 30
22.8.1 Creating I/O system setting files
17
MONITORING
APPENDIX
18
Appendix 1 List of Toolbars and Shortcut Keys
App - 2
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
Appendix 2 Simulation Function
App - 22
Appendix 3 ASCII Code Table
App - 61
Appendix 4 Considerations of GX Works2 and Differences
19
with GX Developer
App - 62
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
Appendix 5 Compatibility with Projects Created with Existing
Applications
App - 78
Appendix 6 Compatibility of Data Read from Programmable
Controller CPU
App - 81
20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
Appendix 7 Compatibility with Existing Applications
App - 90
Appendix 8 Considerations When Saving Projects in GX Developer Format
App - 107
Appendix 9 Character Strings that cannot be Used for Label
Names and Data Names
App - 110
21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
Appendix 10 Restrictions When Changing Programmable Controller Type
App - 113
Appendix 11 Instruction Conversion Lists
App - 162
Appendix 12 Functions Added Since Previous Versions
App - 166
22
Appendix 13 Supported Versions of Modules
App - 193
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
Appendix 14 Procedure to Use GX Works2 Unsupported Programmable Controller Type
App - 196
Appendix 15 Considerations of Installation Appendix 16 USB Driver Installation
App - 200
App - 203
A
Appendix 17 Considerations When Using English Version of
GX Works2
App - 204
APPENDIX
Appendix 18 Considerations for Selecting Project Language App - 210
Appendix 19 Modifying Instructions of Projects in Other
I
Formats
App - 213
Appendix 20 Considerations When Using Projects Created in
PX Developer
App - 225
INDEX
Appendix 21 Troubleshooting
App - 227
App - 1
APPENDIX
Appendix 1 List of Toolbars and Shortcut Keys
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
This section shows the list of toolbars and shortcut keys that can be used for GX Works2.
For (Simple), (FB), (Structured), and (Intelligent) indicated in the Reference column, refer to the following manuals respectively:
(Simple) ... GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project)
(FB)
... GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project, Function Block)
(Structured) ... GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Structured Project)
(Intelligent) ... GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Intelligent Function Module)
Appendix 1.1 Common toolbars and shortcut keys
The following explains the toolbars that are available regardless of the editing target and the corresponding shortcut keys.
"Standard" toolbar icons
The following table shows the "Standard" toolbar icons and the corresponding shortcut keys.
Toolbar icon
-
Shortcut key + + + + -
Corresponding menu
Description
Reference
New Open Save Print GX Works2 Help Find Help for GX Works2
Create a new project.
Open an existing project.
Save the project. Print data such as sequence programs and devices. Display the GX Works2 Help screen. Search for help items with an entered keyword on the GX Works2 Help screen.
Section 4.2.1 Section 4.2.2 Section 4.2.3 Chapter 11
Section 3.4.1
App - 2
Appendix 1.1 Common toolbars and shortcut keys
Appendix 1 List of Toolbars and Shortcut Keys
"Program Common" toolbar icons
The following table shows the "Program Common" toolbar icons and the corresponding shortcut keys.
Toolbar icon
Shortcut key + + + + + + �
++
�
�
�
� +
�
+
+ ++
�
Corresponding menu
Cut Copy
Paste
Undo Redo Find Device Find Instruction
Find Contact or Coil
Write to PLC
Read from PLC Start Monitoring (All Windows) Stop Monitoring (All Windows) Start Monitoring Stop Monitoring Device/Buffer Memory Batch Monitor
Modify Value
Build
Online Program Change
Rebuild All Start/Stop Simulation
Description
Reference
Cut the selected data.
�
Copy the selected data.
�
Paste the cut/copied data at the cursor position.
�
Cancel the previous operation.
�
Perform the operation canceled by [Undo].
�
Search for a device.
Section 10.3.1
Search for an instruction.
Search for a contact or coil corresponding to a specified device.
Write data to the programmable controller CPU.
Read data from the programmable controller CPU.
Section 10.3.2 Section 15.1
Start monitoring all windows being opened.
Stop monitoring all windows being opened. Start monitoring the window being operated. Stop monitoring the window being operated.
Section 17.2
Batch monitor device/buffer memories.
Section 17.3
For ladder and SFC (Zoom) programs, change the ON/OFF and value of a device/label used in a program.
Compile/convert a program being edited.
Compile/convert a program and write it to the programmable controller CPU.
Compile/convert all programs in a project.
Start/stop simulation.
Section 19.1 Section 5.4 Section 18.2
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
MONITORING
17 18 19 20 21 22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
Appendix 1.1 Common toolbars and shortcut keys
App - 3
APPENDIX
"Docking Window/Switch Project Data" toolbar icons
The following table shows the "Docking Window/Switch Project Data" toolbar icons.
Toolbar icon
� �
Shortcut key � �
� � � � � �
� � � � �
Corresponding menu
Description
Reference
Navigation Element Selection
Display/hide the Navigation window. Display/hide the Element Selection window.
Output
Display/hide the Output window.
Cross Reference
Display/hide the Cross Reference window.
Device List
Display/hide the Device List window.
Device Reference
Display/hide the Device Reference window.
Watch
Display/hide the Watch window.
Intelligent Function Module Display/hide the Intelligent Function Module
Monitor
Monitor window.
Intelligent Function Module Display/hide the Intelligent Function Module
Guidance
Guidance window.
Find/Replace
Display/hide the Find/Replace window.
Select data type Select data name
Display
Select a data type and data name to be displayed.
Display the editing screen of the selected data type and data name.
Section 3.2.5 (FB)
(Structured) (Simple)
(Structured) Section 10.1 Section 10.2 Section 6.3.4 Section 17.6
(Intelligent)
Section 10.3
Section 3.2.2
"Intelligent Function Module" toolbar icons
The following table shows the "Intelligent Function Module" toolbar icons.
Toolbar icon
Shortcut key � � � � � � �
Corresponding menu
Description
QD75/LD75 Positioning Module Wave Trace
Execute a wave trace of the QD75/LD75 positioning module.
QD75/LD75 Positioning Module Location Trace
Execute a location trace of the QD75/LD75 positioning module.
Serial Communication Module Circuit Trace
Execute a circuit trace of the serial communication module.
QD75/LD75 Positioning Module Test Monitor
Execute a positioning monitor of the QD75/ LD75 positioning module.
QD75/LD75 Positioning Module Test
Execute a positioning test of the QD75/LD75 positioning module.
Offset/Gain Setting of
Execute offset/gain setting of the temperature
Temperature Input Module input module.
Offset/Gain Setting of Analog Module
Execute offset/gain setting of the analog module.
Reference (Intelligent)
App - 4
Appendix 1.1 Common toolbars and shortcut keys
Appendix 1 List of Toolbars and Shortcut Keys
"Debug Function" toolbar icons
17
The following table shows the "Debug Function" toolbar icons.
Toolbar icon
Shortcut key � � � � �
�
� � � � � �
� � �
Corresponding menu
Description
Reference
Stop Cancel Break Execution Step Execution Execution Option
Set/Cancel Break Point
Enable/Disable Break Point Cancel All Break Points Break Point Cancel All Break Devices Break Device Set/Cancel Skip Range
Enable/Disable Skip Range Cancel All Skip Ranges Skip Range
Stop the step execution.
Cancel the step execution.
Execute the break execution.
Execute the step execution. Display the Execution Option screen of the step execution. Set a break point at the cursor position, or cancel the set break point. Enable/disable the break point at the cursor position. Cancel all break points.
Display the Break Point window.
Cancel all break devices.
Display the Break Device window. Set a skip range, or cancel the set skip range. Enable/disable the skip range at the cursor position. Cancel all skip ranges.
Display the Skip Range window.
Section 19.6.9 Section 19.6.7 Section 19.6.6 Section 19.6.5 Section 19.6.8
Section 19.6.2
Section 19.6.3
Section 19.6.4
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
MONITORING
18 19 20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
Other shortcut keys
21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
The following table shows other shortcut keys that are available regardless of the editing target.
Toolbar icon � � � � �
� � � �
�
�
� �
Shortcut key
++ ++ ++
+ + + /+
+/ ++
/+
+ ++
Corresponding menu Rename Rename (Library) Delete Copy Paste Add New Module
Exit Cross Reference Device List
�
�
�
Find Device Find String
Description
Reference
Change the name of the selected data or library on the Navigation window.
Delete the selected data.
Copy data in the project.
Paste the copied data to a folder.
Add the intelligent function module data to the project being edited.
Close the project being edited and exits GX Works2.
Create the cross reference information.
Display the device list.
After creating cross reference information, move to the next cross reference information.
After creating cross reference information, move to the previous cross reference information.
After creating cross reference information, move focus between the Cross Reference window and work windows.
Search for a device/label in the program.
Search for a string.
Section 4.3.3 (Structured) Section 4.3.4 Section 4.3.2 (Intelligent) Section 3.1 Section 10.1 Section 10.2
Section 10.1
Section 10.3.1 Section 10.3.3
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
APPENDIX
22 A I
INDEX
Appendix 1.1 Common toolbars and shortcut keys
App - 5
APPENDIX
Toolbar icon � � �
�
�
�
� � �
Shortcut key +
++ ++
++
+
++ + + +
Corresponding menu
Description
Reference
Replace Device Replace String
�
�
Start Watching
Stop Watching Register Device Test with Execution Condition
� �
Replace a device/label in the program.
Replace a string.
After performing the search/replace function once, search for an item in the downward direction.
After performing the search/replace function once, search for an item in the upward direction.
Start monitoring the current values of registered devices/labels and intelligent function module.
Stop monitoring the current values of registered devices/labels and intelligent function module.
Register the device test with execution condition.
Close the window displayed on the uppermost position.
Move to the next uppermost window.
Section 10.3.1 Section 10.3.3 Section 10.3
Section 17.6
Section 19.3 � �
Appendix 1.2 "Navigation Window" toolbar icons
The following table shows the "Navigation Window" toolbar icons.
Toolbar icon
Shortcut key � � � � �
�
Corresponding menu
Description
Reference
Add New Data Copy Paste Property
Refresh
Project Property Expand All Uncompiled Data
Collapse All
Add data to the project.
Copy selected data.
Paste copied data.
Display a property of the selected data.
Update the display content of the Navigation window. Display a property of the open project. Expand all uncompiled data in the tree on the Project view and the User Library view. Collapse all data in the tree on the Project view and the User Library view.
Section 4.3.1 Section 4.3.2 Section 4.3.6
� �
Section 3.2.5
App - 6
Appendix 1.2 "Navigation Window" toolbar icons
Appendix 1 List of Toolbars and Shortcut Keys
Appendix 1.3 Toolbar icons and shortcut keys for setting labels
17
MONITORING
The following explains the toolbar icons and the corresponding shortcut keys for setting labels.
"Label" toolbar icons
The following table shows the "Label" toolbar icons and the corresponding shortcut keys.
Toolbar icon
Shortcut key +
� +
� � �
� � �
Corresponding menu
Description
New Declaration (Before)
New Declaration (After)
Delete Row
Add a row above the cursor position. Add a row below the cursor position. Delete the row at the cursor position.
Read from CSV File Read label settings from the CSV file.
Write to CSV File
Write label settings to the CSV file.
Confirm Update of System Label Database
Apply system label information changed in another project to global labels.
Import System Label
Import system label information and apply it to global labels.
Reservation to
Reserve the selected global label for
Register System Label registration as a system label.
Reservation to
Reserve the selected global label for
Release System Label deregistration of system label.
Reference
(Simple) (Structured)
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
18 19 20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
Other shortcut keys
21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
The following table shows other shortcut keys for setting labels.
Toolbar icon
Shortcut key
Corresponding menu
Description
�
+
Select All
Select all rows.
�
+/ + Num *1
�
Display all lines of comment and remark of the selected line.
�
+/ + Num *1
�
Display only the first line of comment and remark of the selected line.
*1 : 'Num' indicates keys in the numeric keypad.
Reference
(Simple) (Structured)
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
Appendix 1.3 Toolbar icons and shortcut keys for setting labels
App - 7
APPENDIX
Appendix 1.4 Toolbar icons and shortcut keys for setting device memory
The following explains the toolbar icons and the corresponding shortcut keys for setting device memory.
"Device Memory" toolbar icons
The following table shows the "Device Memory" toolbar icons and the corresponding shortcut keys.
Toolbar icon
Shortcut key � � � � � � � � � �
+ � �
� � �
Corresponding menu
Description
Reference
Display Mode/Binary Display data in binary.
Display Mode/Octal Display data in octal.
Display Mode/Decimal Display data in decimal.
Display Mode/ Hexadecimal
Display data in hexadecimal.
Display Mode/Float Display data in real number.
Display Mode/String
Display Mode/String (ASCII only)
Display data in character string. Display data in ASCII string.
Register/16-bit
Display data in units of words.
Register/32-bit
Display data in units of double words.
Register/64-bit
Display data in units of 64 bits.
Input Device
Enter a device.
FILL
Read Device Memory from PLC
Write Device Memory to PLC
Set the same value to consecutive devices.
Read data in device memory from a programmable controller CPU.
Write data in device memory to a programmable controller CPU.
Read from Excel File Read data from an Excel file.
Write to Excel File
Write data to an Excel file.
Section 7.2.5
Section 7.2.2 Section 7.2.4 Section 7.4.1 Section 7.4.2
Other shortcut key
The following table shows other shortcut key for setting device memory.
Toolbar icon
�
Shortcut key
Corresponding menu
Description
Insert Row
Insert a row at the cursor position.
Reference Section 7.2
App - 8
Appendix 1.4 Toolbar icons and shortcut keys for setting device memory
Appendix 1 List of Toolbars and Shortcut Keys
Appendix 1.5 Toolbar icons and shortcut keys for verification result 17
MONITORING
The following table shows the toolbar icons and the corresponding shortcut keys for the verification result.
Toolbar icon
Shortcut key + +
+ +
++ �
Corresponding menu
Description
Reference
Next Unmatch
Move to the next mismatched data.
Previous Unmatch
Move to the previous mismatched data.
Return to Result List Display the <<Verify Result List>>tab.
Close Detail Result
Close the <<Detail Verify Result>>tab being displayed.
Close All Detail Result Close all <<Detail Verify Result>>tab.
Write to CSV File
Write verification result to a CSV file.
Section 4.2.7 Section 15.2
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
18 19
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
Appendix 1.6 Toolbar icons and shortcut keys for executing sampling trace
20
The following explains the toolbar icons and the shortcut keys for executing sampling trace.
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
Toolbar icons for executing sampling trace
The following table shows the toolbar icons for executing sampling trace.
Toolbar icon
Shortcut key � � � � � �
� � � � � �
Corresponding menu
Description
Reference
Trace Setting
Start Trace
Stop Trace Display Trace Buffer Condition
�
Buffer Status
Trigger Occurrence Zoom Out Timing Chart Zoom In Timing Chart Zoom Out Trend Graph Zoom In Trend Graph
Switch Chart/Detail
Display the Trace Setting screen. Start sampling trace. To start sampling trace, the trace ready signal (SM800) must be ON. Stop sampling trace. Display the Trace Data Storage Status screen. Display the current sampling trace status Displayed when the trace data have been acquired up to the specified total number of samplings. Displayed when a trigger is generated during sampling trace.
Zoom the scale of timing chart
Zoom the scale of trend graph
Switch the trace result display on the Sampling Trace screen between the timing chart (graph) and the detailed data (value).
Section 19.4.2 Section 19.4.4
�
Section 19.4.4
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
APPENDIX
21 22 A I
INDEX
Appendix 1.5 Toolbar icons and shortcut keys for verification result
App - 9
APPENDIX
Other shortcut keys
The following table shows the other shortcut keys for executing sampling trace.
Toolbar icon � � � �
�
�
Shortcut key ++ ++
+ +
+
+
Corresponding menu
Description
Reference
�
Move the vertical axis information line 10 columns to the left.
�
Move the vertical axis information line 10 columns to the right.
�
Move the vertical axis information line 100 columns to the left.
�
Move the vertical axis information line 100 columns to the right.
Section 19.4.4
Move the vertical axis information line
�
toward the left from the vertical axis information line to the columns of first
data change.
Move the vertical axis information line
�
toward the right from the vertical axis information line to the columns of first
data change.
Appendix 1.7 Toolbar icons and shortcut keys for program editors
The following explains the toolbar icons and the corresponding shortcut keys for program editors.
"Ladder" toolbar icons and shortcut keys
The following table shows the toolbar icons and the corresponding shortcut keys for the ladder editor.
Toolbar icon
Shortcut key
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + ++ ++
Corresponding menu
Description
Open Contact
Insert an open contact at the cursor position.
Open Branch
Insert an open contact branch at the cursor position.
Close Contact
Insert a closed contact at the cursor position.
Close Branch
Insert a closed contact branch at the cursor position.
Coil
Application Instruction
Insert a coil at the cursor position. Insert an application instruction at the cursor position.
Horizontal Line
Insert a horizontal line at the cursor position.
Vertical Line
Insert a vertical line at the cursor position.
Delete Horizontal Line
Delete Vertical Line
Delete the horizontal line at the cursor position. Delete the vertical line at the cursor position.
Rising Pulse
Insert a rising pulse at the cursor position.
Falling Pulse
Insert a falling pulse at the cursor position.
Rising Pulse Branch Insert a rising pulse branch at the cursor position.
Falling Pulse Branch Insert a falling pulse branch at the cursor position.
Rising Pulse Close Insert a rising pulse close at the cursor position.
Falling Pulse Close Insert a falling pulse close at the cursor position.
Reference (Simple)
App - 10
Appendix 1.7 Toolbar icons and shortcut keys for program editors
Appendix 1 List of Toolbars and Shortcut Keys
Toolbar icon
� �
� � � � � � � �
Shortcut key
++
++
+
++
++
+ +
� � � � + ++
+
+ +
++
+
+ ++
�
++ + + + +
++
++
+
Corresponding menu
Rising Pulse Close Branch
Falling Pulse Close Branch
Operation Result Rising Pulse
Operation Result Falling Pulse
Invert Operation Results
Description
Insert a rising pulse close branch at the cursor position.
Insert a falling pulse close branch at the cursor position.
Insert an operation result rising pulse at the cursor position.
Insert an operation result falling pulse at the cursor position.
Insert an operation result inversion at the cursor position.
Reference (Simple)
Edit Line
Input a line at the cursor position.
Delete Line
Delete the line at the cursor position.
Insert Inline Structured Text Box
Device Comment
Insert an inline structured text box. Edit device comments.
Section 9.2.2
Statement
Edit statements.
Note
Statement/Note Batch Edit
Edit notes. Batch-edit statements/notes.
(Simple)
Line Statement List Display the list of line statements used in the program.
Display Template
Insert a template corresponds to the instruction/ function/control syntax.
Mark Template (Left)
Set an argument of the template in the selected status from the left by selecting the menu each time.
Mark Template (Right)
Set an argument of the template in the selected status from the right by selecting the menu each time.
(Structured)
Read Mode
Switch the mode of the open window to "Read Mode".
Write Mode
Switch the mode of the open window to "Write Mode".
Read Mode (All Windows)
Switch the mode of all open windows to "Read Mode".
Write Mode (All Windows)
Switch the mode of all open windows to "Write Mode".
Monitor Mode
Switch the mode of the open window to "Monitor Mode" during monitoring.
Monitor (Write Mode)
Switch the mode of the open window to "Monitor (Write Mode)" during monitoring.
Device Display
Display devices assigned by compilation.
Zoom
Change the display magnification ratio of the ladder program.
Continuous Paste
Increment the device number of device in the cut/ copied ladder block and paste it consecutively.
Insert Row
Insert a row at the cursor position.
Delete Row
Delete the row at the cursor position.
Insert Column
Insert a column at the cursor position.
Delete Column
Delete the column at the cursor position.
Connect Line to Right-Side Symbol
Connect a horizontal line to the element at the right of the cursor position.
Connect Line to Left- Connect a horizontal line to the element at the left of
Side Symbol
the cursor position.
Enter/Delete HLine Rightward
Enter/delete a line at the right of the cursor position.
(Simple)
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
APPENDIX
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
MONITORING
17 18 19 20 21 22 A I
INDEX
Appendix 1.7 Toolbar icons and shortcut keys for program editors
App - 11
APPENDIX
Toolbar icon
Shortcut key
Corresponding menu
Description
�
+
Enter/Delete HLine Leftward
Enter/delete a line at the left of the cursor position.
�
+
Enter/Delete VLine Downward
Enter/delete a line at the downward of the cursor position.
�
+
Enter/Delete VLine Upward
Enter/delete a line at the upward of the cursor position.
�
+
Switch Open/Close Switch a open contact to closed contact, and vice
Contact
versa.
�
+
Switch Statement/ Note Type
Change the type of a statement/note.
�
++
Instruction Partial Edit
Open the Enter Symbol screen in which the first argument is in the selected status.
�
+/
Select a device/label on the Enter Symbol screen.
�
Switch the device/label to be selected using the /
button.
�
+/
�
Increment/decrement a device/label on the Enter Symbol screen.
�
+
�
Display options of instruction/label on the Enter Symbol screen.
�
+ ///
�
Move the cursor on the editing screen while the Enter Symbol screen is displayed.
�
+
Jump
Display the specified row.
�
++
Jump to Next Ladder Block Start
Move the cursor from the current position to the start of the next ladder block.
�
++
Jump to Previous Ladder Block Start
Move the cursor from the current position to the start of the previous ladder block.
�
++ Next Device
Move the cursor to the same device as the one at the cursor position.
�
++ Next Contact
Move the cursor to the contact where the same device as the one at the cursor position is used.
�
++ Next Coil
Move the cursor to the coil where the same device as the one at the cursor position is used.
�
++ Back
Return the cursor to the previous position before the [Next Device]/[Next Contact]/[Next Coil] function execution.
�
+
Comment
Display device comments.
�
+
Statement
Display statements.
�
+
Note
Display notes.
�
+/ +Num*1
Non-Display Ladder Block
Hide a ladder block.
�
+/ +Num*1
Display Ladder Block Display hidden a ladder block.
�
+ turn mouse scroll wheel upward
Bigger
Change the display size of text larger on the editing screen.
+ turn mouse
�
scroll wheel
Smaller
downward
Change the display size of text smaller on the editing screen.
�
++ Tile FB Horizontally
Tile the ladder editor and the function block program editor horizontally.
Reference (Simple) (FB)
App - 12
Appendix 1.7 Toolbar icons and shortcut keys for program editors
Appendix 1 List of Toolbars and Shortcut Keys
Toolbar icon �
�
�
� � �
Shortcut key
+ ++ ///
+
+
Corresponding menu
Back to Zoom SFC Block
Moves up/down/left/ right
Open Instruction Help
ST Monochrome Display
�
�
�
++
�
*1 : 'Num' indicates keys in the numeric keypad.
Description
Open the SFC diagram corresponds to the program on the Zoom editor window. Move the cursor toward up/down/left/right of the SFC diagram.
Display the Instruction Help screen.
Switch the text color (color or monochrome) in inline structured text boxes. Display the Find screen. Display the instruction help of GX Works2 or reference manual of FB library. Enter an assignment operator (:=) when editing the inline structured text program.
Reference
(Simple)
Section 3.4.1 (FB)
(Structured)
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
MONITORING
17 18 19
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
Appendix 1.7 Toolbar icons and shortcut keys for program editors
App - 13
APPENDIX
"ST" toolbar icons and shortcut keys
The following table shows the toolbar icons and the corresponding shortcut keys for the ST editor.
Toolbar icon
Shortcut key
+ ++ ++
+ �
Corresponding menu
Description
List Operands
Display the Label Registration/Selection screen.
Display Template
Insert a template corresponds to the instruction/function/control syntax.
Set an argument of the template in the Mark Template (Left) selected status from the left by selecting
the menu each time.
Mark Template (Right)
Set an argument of the template in the selected status from the right by selecting the menu each time.
Toggle Bookmark
Set a bookmark at the cursor line. If a bookmark has already been set, delete the set bookmark.
Bookmark List
Jump to the specified bookmark from the bookmark list.
Next Bookmark
Display the next bookmark position.
+
Previous Bookmark Display the previous bookmark position.
++
Delete All Bookmarks Delete all bookmarks.
+ Num*1
Increase Zoom
Zoom in the screen one level.
+ Num*1
Decrease Zoom
�
+
Jump
�
+
Zoom Header/Body Header
�
+
Copy
�
+
Cut
�
+
Paste
�
�
�
++
�
�
+
ST Monochrome Display
*1 : 'Num' indicates keys in the numeric keypad.
Zoom out the screen one level.
Jump to the specified line.
Open the label setting editor of the selected POU.
Copy the selected data.
Cut the selected data.
Paste the cut/copied data at the cursor position.
Display the instruction help of GX Works2, reference manual of FB library, or help of user library.
Enter an assignment operator (:=) when editing the inline structured text program.
Switch the text color (color or monochrome) in an ST editor.
Reference
(Structured)
Section 3.4.1 (FB)
(Structured) (Structured)
App - 14
Appendix 1.7 Toolbar icons and shortcut keys for program editors
Appendix 1 List of Toolbars and Shortcut Keys
"Structured Ladder/FBD" toolbar icons and shortcut keys
The following table shows the toolbar icons and the corresponding shortcut keys for the Structured Ladder/FBD editor.
Toolbar icon
Shortcut key + +
++ ++
+ + + ++ ++
� � � � � � +
Corresponding menu
Select Mode
Description
Change the input mode for positioning contacts/coils.
Interconnect Mode Change the input mode for drawing lines.
Guided Mode/Guided Change the input mode for entry with
Editing
keyboard.
Guided Mode/Auto Comment
Add a comment entry field at the start of the ladder block added in Guided editing.
Auto Connect
Connect the start and end points to draw a line automatically.
Insert Row
Insert a row into the ladder program being edited.
Insert Column
Insert a column into the ladder program being edited.
New Ladder Block Before
Insert a new ladder block in front of the ladder block being edited.
New Ladder Block After
Insert a new ladder block after the ladder block being edited.
Input Instruction
Open the Input Instruction screen.
Left Power Rail
Display/hide the left power rail.
Open Contact
Close Contact
Open Branch
Close Branch Vertical Line Segment Horizontal Line Segment
Insert an open contact at the cursor position.
Insert a closed contact at the cursor position.
Insert an open contact branch at the cursor position.
Insert a closed contact branch at the cursor position.
Insert a vertical line at the cursor position.
Insert a horizontal line at the cursor position
Coil
Insert a coil at the cursor position.
Element Selection Display the Element Selection window.
Input Label Output Label Rising Pulse
Insert an input variable at the cursor position.
Insert an output variable at the cursor position.
Insert a rising pulse at the cursor position.
Falling Pulse
Insert a falling pulse at the cursor position.
Rising Pulse Close Falling Pulse Close
Insert a rising pulse close at the cursor position.
Insert a falling pulse close at the cursor position.
Jump
Insert a jump at the cursor position.
Reference (Structured)
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
APPENDIX
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
MONITORING
17 18 19 20 21 22 A I
INDEX
Appendix 1.7 Toolbar icons and shortcut keys for program editors
App - 15
APPENDIX
Toolbar icon
Shortcut key
Corresponding menu
Description
Reference
+
Return
Insert a return at the cursor position.
+
Comment
Insert a comment entry field.
++
Ladder Block Label Display the Ladder Block screen.
List Operands
Display the Label Registration/Selection screen.
Increment Pins
Increment the number of arguments of functions and function blocks.
Delete Pins
Delete the number of arguments of functions and function blocks.
+ Num*1
Increase Zoom
Zoom in the screen one level.
+ Num*1
Decrease Zoom
Zoom out the screen one level.
�
+/
�
�
++
Signal Configuration/ Configure
�
++
Signal Configuration/ Toggle
�
+
Jump
Change Label-
�
++
Device-Address
Mode
�
++
Change LabelComment Mode
�
+
Zoom Header/Body/ Header
�
+
Copy
�
+
Cut
�
+
Paste
Guided Mode/
�
Overwrite, Insert
Mode
�
+
Guided Mode/Line Mode
�
+
�
�
+
�
�
�
*1 : 'Num' indicates keys in the numeric keypad.
Narrow and widen the width of ladder block in the Guided mode.
Set the type of contact and coil.
Change the type of contact and coil in the order shown below: � Contact: Open Contact Close Contact � Coil: Normal Negation Set
Reset Jump to the specified ladder block number.
Switch the display format in order (label, device, address).
Switch the display between label and comment. Open the label setting editor screen for the selected POU. Copy the selected data. Cut the selected data. Paste the cut/copied data at the cursor position.
Switch the input mode between Overwrite/ Insert in the Guided mode.
Change the input mode for drawing lines in Guided editing. Scroll a ladder block to the right. Scroll a ladder block to the left. Display the instruction help of GX Works2 help or the help of the user library.
(Structured)
Section 3.4.1 (Structured)
App - 16
Appendix 1.7 Toolbar icons and shortcut keys for program editors
Appendix 1 List of Toolbars and Shortcut Keys
"SFC" toolbar icons and shortcut keys
The following table shows the toolbar icons and the corresponding shortcut keys for the SFC editor.
Toolbar icon
Shortcut key
+
+
Corresponding menu
Description
[STEP] New Step
Insert at the cursor position.
[B] Block Start Step (with END check)
Insert at the cursor position.
[BS] Block Start Step (without END check)
Insert
at the cursor position.
[JUMP] Jump
Insert at the cursor position.
[END] END Step
Insert at the cursor position.
[DUMMY] Dummy Step
Insert at the cursor position.
[TR] Transition
Insert at the cursor position.
[--D] Selection Divergence
Insert a selection divergence.
[==D] Simultaneous Divergence Insert a simultaneous divergence.
[--C] Selection Convergence
Insert a selection convergence.
[==C] Simultaneous Convergence Insert a simultaneous convergence.
+ [|] Vertical Line
Insert a vertical line.
+
No Attribute
Set the step attribute to No Attribute.
+
Stored Coil
Set the step attribute to Stored Coil.
+ + +
Stored Operation (without Transition Check)
Stored Operation (with Transition Check)
Reset
Set the step attribute to Stored Operation (SE).
Set the step attribute to Stored Operation (ST).
Reset the step attribute.
+ + + + + +
Vertical Line (Draw Line)
Insert at the cursor position.
Selection Divergence (Draw Line) Insert at the cursor position.
Simultaneous Divergence (Draw Line)
Insert at the cursor position.
Selection Convergence (Draw Line) Insert at the cursor position.
Simultaneous Convergence (Draw Line)
Insert
at the cursor position.
Delete Line
Delete the line at the cursor position.
�
SFC Step/Transition Comment
Edit the SFC step/transition comments.
�
Sort SFC Step No.
Sort the SFC block step numbers.
�
SFC All Block Batch Monitoring
Batch monitor all blocks in the SFC program.
�
SFC Auto Scroll
Scroll the screen to display active steps automatically when they are out of the screen during monitoring.
+ Read Mode
Switch the mode of the open window to "Read Mode".
Write Mode
Switch the mode of the open window to "Write Mode".
�
++ Read Mode (All Windows)
Switch the mode of all open windows to "Read Mode".
�
+ Write Mode (All Windows)
Switch the mode of all open windows to "Write Mode".
Reference (Simple)
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
APPENDIX
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
MONITORING
17 18 19 20 21 22 A I
INDEX
Appendix 1.7 Toolbar icons and shortcut keys for program editors
App - 17
APPENDIX
Toolbar icon
Shortcut key
Corresponding menu
Description
Monitor Mode
Switch the mode of the open window to "Monitor Mode" during monitoring.
+ Monitor (Write Mode)
Switch the mode of the open window to "Monitor (Write Mode)" during monitoring.
�
Zoom
Change the display magnification ratio of the SFC diagram.
+ turn
�
mouse scroll Bigger
wheel upward
Enlarge the text display size on the editing screen.
+ turn
�
mouse scroll Smaller
wheel downward
Reduce the text display size on the editing screen.
�
+ Insert Row
Insert a row at the cursor position.
�
+ Delete Row
Delete the row at the cursor position.
�
+ Insert Column
Insert a column at the cursor position.
�
+ Delete Column
Delete the column at the cursor position.
�
+
Jump
Move the cursor to the SFC step number/ transition number in the specified block
�
+
Find Jump Step
Move the cursor to the step of the jump source.
�
Numeric key
�
Move the cursor to the SFC step number/ transition number.
�
++ Convert Block
Convert a single block only.
�
+ SFC Step/Transition Comment
Display the SFC step/transition comments.
�
+/ + double-
click
Open Zoom/Start Destination Block
Display the Zoom editor window or the start destination block.
�
�
Display the start destination block.
�
+
Back to Start SFC Block
Display the start source block.
�
++ Program Display
Display programs on the SFC diagram when editing in MELSAP-L.
Reference (Simple)
SFC block list shortcut keys
The following table shows the shortcut keys for the SFC block list.
Toolbar icon
�
� �
Shortcut key
+ Numeric key
+
Corresponding menu
Description
Jump
� SFC Block List Comment
Jump to the specified block number/data name.
Jump to the selected block number.
Display comments of the SFC block list.
Reference (Simple)
App - 18
Appendix 1.7 Toolbar icons and shortcut keys for program editors
Appendix 1 List of Toolbars and Shortcut Keys
Other shortcut keys
17
The following table shows other shortcut keys for program editors.
Toolbar icon � � � � � �
�
�
� � �
� �
Shortcut key ///
+ +
+
+ +///
++
++
Corresponding menu � � � � � �
�
�
� � �
� �
Description
Move the cursor in the arrow direction. Scroll up the screen.
Scroll down the screen. Scroll the screen to the left.
Scroll the screen to the right. Move the cursor to its leftmost position in the row. Move the cursor to its rightmost position in the row. Move the cursor to the start of the program. Move the cursor to the end of the program. Set a range. Select the range from the current position up to the start of the program. Select the range from the current position down to the end of the program. Delete the selected target.
Reference (Structured)
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
MONITORING
18 19 20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
Appendix 1.7 Toolbar icons and shortcut keys for program editors
App - 19
APPENDIX
Appendix 1.8 Toolbar icons and shortcut keys for I/O system setting function
The following table shows the toolbar icons and the corresponding shortcut keys for the I/O system setting function.
Toolbar icon
�
Shortcut key + + + + + +
�
�
�
�
+
Corresponding menu
Description
Reference
New Open Save Cut Copy
Paste
Execute I/O System Setting Disable I/O System Setting
Start Monitoring
Stop Monitoring
Exit I/O System Settings
Create a new I/O system setting.
Section 22.8.1
Open an existing I/O system setting. Section 22.8.2
Save the I/O system setting.
�
Cut the selected data.
Copy the selected data.
Paste the cut/copied data at the cursor position.
Execute the I/O system setting function and starts simulation.
Disable the execution of the I/O system setting function.
Start monitoring the I/O System Setting screen.
Stop monitoring the I/O System Setting screen.
Section 22.4.2
Section 22.6.1 Section 22.6.2 Section 22.7.1
Exit the I/O system setting.
�
App - 20
Appendix 1.8 Toolbar icons and shortcut keys for I/O system setting function
Appendix 1 List of Toolbars and Shortcut Keys
Appendix 1.9 Shortcut keys for operating intelligent function module 17
MONITORING
The following explains the toolbar icons and the corresponding shortcut keys for editing intelligent function module data.
Toolbar icons for positioning monitoring function
18
The following table shows the toolbar icons for the positioning monitoring function.
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
Toolbar icon
Shortcut key
� � � � +
Corresponding menu
� � � � � �
Description
Monitor the operating status of positioning module. Monitor the start history. Monitor the error history. Monitor the warning history. Start the positioning monitor. Stop the positioning monitor.
Reference
19
(Intelligent)
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
Toolbar icons and shortcut keys for predefined protocol support function
20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
The following table shows the toolbar icons and the corresponding shortcut keys for the predefined protocol support function.
Toolbar icon
Shortcut key + + + + +
� � �
Corresponding menu
Description
New Open Save Copy
Paste
Print Write to Module Read from Module
Create a new communication protocol. Open an existing communication protocol. Save the protocol information. Copy the selected data. Paste the cut/copied data at the cursor position. Print the protocol information. Write data to the module. Read data from the module.
Reference
21
(Intelligent)
22
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
Appendix 1.9 Shortcut keys for operating intelligent function module
App - 21
APPENDIX
Appendix 2 Simulation Function
Q CPU L CPU ReFmXote HFeXad FX
The simulation function debugs sequence programs on the virtual programmable controller on the personal computer. The created sequence programs can be debugged without connecting the personal computer to the programmable controller CPU.
This section explains the simulation function and the restrictions.
Appendix 2.1 Supported CPU functions
This section explains the programmable controller CPU functions that are supported by GX Works2 simulation function. The following tables show the functions that are supported by the simulation function.
: Supported : Supported with restrictions �: Not supported
Function name
Function detail
Supported/ Not
supported
Remarks
Programming
Program memory
�
Program cache memory
�
�
Memory
Memory card (RAM) Memory card (ROM)
�
�
�
Standard RAM
�
Standard ROM
�
I/O number assignment (automatic)
�
I/O number
I/O number assignment (specified)
Number of points occupied by empty slots
�
�
Number of base slots
QCPU (Q mode) only
Interrupt program
�
�
�
Program executing order setting
�
Initial execution type
�
Scan execution type
�
Multiple program execution
Low-speed execution type program
For the operation of low-
speed execution type programs, refer to
Appendix 2.5.
Standby type
�
Fixed scan execution type
�
Change (Set) by parameter
�
Change by instruction
�
Boot operation
�
�
App - 22
Appendix 2.1 Supported CPU functions
Function name
Function detail
Programmable controller CPU function
Ladder Diagram
Programming language
List
Sequential Function Chart (MELSAP3, MELSAP-L)
Structured Text
Communication with intelligent function module
�
Constant scan
�
Watch dog timer (WDT)
�
Latch function
�
Device initial value
�
Service processing setting
�
Output mode setting at STOP to RUN �
Input response time selection
�
Error time output mode setting
�
CPU operation mode at hardware error �
Switch setting of intelligent function module
�
Monitoring function
�
Monitor condition setting
�
Monitoring/testing local devices
�
Remote password
�
CPU module system display
�
LED display
�
Interrupt from intelligent function module
�
Serial communication function
�
Remote RUN/STOP
�
Remote PAUSE
�
Remote RESET
�
Remote latch clear
�
Scan time measurement
�
Program list monitoring
�
Interrupt program list monitoring
�
Monitoring/testing devices
�
Forced ON/OFF of external I/O
�
Device test with execution condition �
Sampling trace
�
Online program change
�
Debugging by multiple programming tools
�
Appendix 2 Simulation Function
17
Supported/
Not
Remarks
supported
MONITORING
�
�
�
*1
�
18
�
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
�
�
No operation is performed in actual time.
30,000,000 instructions per scan
19
Supported by device backup function.
�
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
20
�
�
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
21
�
�
�
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
�
�
�
�
�
No operation is performed in actual time.
�
�
�
A
�
�
�
SFC file batch online program change is not supported.
APPENDIX
�
�
I
INDEX
Appendix 2.1 Supported CPU functions
App - 23
APPENDIX
Function name
Programmable controller CPU function
Self-diagnostic function
�
Error history
�
System protection
�
Password registration
�
Error reset
�
LED control function
�
Module error history collection function �
Local device batch read function
�
Backing up latch data to standard ROM �
Writing/Reading device data to standard ROM
�
Reading module name
�
Function detail
Clock function
�
Battery long-life operation
�
Memory check function
�
LCPU data logging function
�
LCPU built-in I/O function
�
LCPU built-in Ethernet function
�
LCPU built-in CC-Link function
�
QCPU multiple CPU system
�
QCPU network
�
Device, Constant
A series CPU compatibility setting (Special relay, special register)
�
Device indexing
16-bit indexing 32-bit indexing
Pointer
Local/Common pointer
Local device
�
Floating point arithmetic processing (Internal precision)
�
Device setting
�
Indirect specification
�
File register setting
�
Extended data register, extended link register (Use file registers)
�
Extension of bit device points
�
*1 : The following functions are not supported. � Periodic execution program setting � Operation mode at block/step concurrent start � Step transition monitoring timer � Control SFC type program � Step/Transition comment read (instruction)
Supported/ Not
supported
Remarks
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
Supported by device backup function.
�
�
Clock setting is not
supported.
Extended clock setting (1/
1000 seconds) is not
supported.
�
�
�
�
Only trigger logging is
supported by sampling trace
function.
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
Rounding error occurs.
�
�
�
�
�
App - 24
Appendix 2.1 Supported CPU functions
Appendix 2 Simulation Function
Appendix 2.2 Supported devices
17
MONITORING
This section explains the devices supported by the simulation function.
However, some devices may be restricted or not supported. No processing is performed for
unsupported devices (NOP processing).
Unsupported devices used in a program and their used locations can be checked by selecting [Debug] [Instructions Unsupported by Simulation]. (Section 18.3)
18
Device list (QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU)
: Supported �: Not supported
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
Category
Type Bit device
Device name Input (X) Output (Y) Internal relay (M)*2 Latch relay (L) Annunciator (F)
Support
Remarks
Actual inputs are invalid.
Actual outputs are invalid.
�
�
�
19
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
Internal user device*1
Edge relay (V)*2 Step relay (S) Link special relay (SB) Link relay (B)
Timer (T)*2, *3
Retentive timer (ST)*3 Word device
Counter (C)*3
�
�
�
�
No operation is performed in actual time.
The high-speed timer can be set in units of 0.1ms (by parameter). (For Universal model QCPU and LCPU, in
units of 0.01ms)
No operation is performed in actual time.
The high-speed retentive timer can be set in units of 0.1ms (by parameter). (For Universal model QCPU
and LCPU, in units of 0.01ms)
�
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
20 21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
Internal system device
Bit device
Data register (D)*2 Link register (W) Link special register (SW) Function input (FX) Function output (FY)
Special relay (SM)
Word device
Function register (FD) Special register (SD)
Link direct device
Bit device
Word device
Intelligent function module device
Word device
Index register
Word device
File register*4
Word device
Extended device*4 Nesting
Word device �
Link input (Jn\X) Link output (Jn\Y) Link relay (Jn\B) Link special relay (Jn\SB) Link register (Jn\W) Link special register (Jn\SW) Intelligent function module device (Un\G) Index register (Z) File register (R) File register (ZR) Extended data register (D) Extended link register (W) Nesting (N)
�
�
�
�
�
For the supported special relays, refer to the Special relay list.
�
For the supported special registers, refer to the Special register list.
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
I/O assignment setting in PLC parameter is required.
�
File register setting in PLC parameter is required.
�
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
APPENDIX
22 A I
INDEX
Appendix 2.2 Supported devices
App - 25
APPENDIX
Category
Type
Device name
Support
Remarks
Pointer
Pointer (P) �
Interrupt pointer (I)
�
�
�
Bit device
SFC block device (BL) SFC transition device (TR)
�
�
�
Network number specified device (J)
�
�
Others
I/O number specified device (U)
�
�
�
Macro instruction argument
device (VD)
�
CPU shared memory (Un\G)
Memory for reading/writing data among CPU modules
in a multiple CPU system. Enabled only when multiple CPU settings are made.
Not supported by LCPU.
Decimal constant
K-2147483648 to K2147483647
Hexadecimal constant
H0 to HFFFFFFFF
Constant
� Real constant
E�1.17550-38 to E�3.40282+38
E�2.22507-308 to E�1.79770+308 Supported by Universal model QCPU/LCPU only.
String constant
Up to 32 characters per instruction
*1 : The device points of the internal user devices can be changed within the following range. High-speed Universal model QCPU: Within 60k word Other CPUs: Within 29k word
*2 : Devices that can be used for local devices
*3 : Timer/Retentive timer/Counter: Contact and coil are bit devices and current value is a word device.
*4 : The total device points of the file registers and the extended registers can be changed within the following range. (1k unit) QnUD(H)CPU, QnUDE(H)CPU, and LCPU: 0 to 4086k points High-speed Universal model QCPU: 0 to 4736k points Other CPUs: 0 to 1018k points
App - 26
Appendix 2.2 Supported devices
Appendix 2 Simulation Function
Device list (FXCPU)
Category
Type
Device name Input (X) Output (Y)
Auxiliary relay (M) Bit device
State (S)
Internal user device
Timer (T)
Counter (C)
Word device
Data register (D) (32 bits when used in pairs)
Purpose � �
General type*1 (changeable) Latched type*2 (changeable)
General type (fixed) Latched type*3 (fixed)
Special type Initial state*1 Initial state (latched) General type*1 Latched type*2 Annunciator type*3 Latched type*3
100ms 10ms 100ms/10ms Retentive type for 1ms*3 Retentive type for 100ms*3 1ms*3 16-bit up-counter*1 16-bit up-counter*2 32-bit bidirectional counter*1 32-bit bidirectional counter*2 High-speed counter 16-bit general type*1 16-bit latched type*2 16-bit latched type*3 16-bit special type File type*1 RAM file type 16-bit latched type (extension register [R]) 16-bit latched type (extension file register [ER]) Buffer memory 16-bit index type
: Supported �: Not supported
Support
Remarks
Octal number. Actual inputs are invalid.
Octal number. Actual outputs are invalid.
�
�
�
� �
�
� �
�
�
�
� � � �
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
� �
�
�
�
�
�
� �
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
MONITORING
17 18 19 20 21 22 A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
Appendix 2.2 Supported devices
App - 27
APPENDIX
Category Type
Device name
Purpose
Nesting (N)
Master control
Pointer
Pointer (P) Interrupt pointer (I)
JUMP or CALL branch Interruption
Decimal constant
16 bits 32 bits
Hexadecimal constant
16 bits 32 bits
Real number constant
Character string constant
*1 : Non-latched area. It can be changed to the latched area by parameter setting. *2 : Latched area. It can be changed to the non-latched area by parameter setting. *3 : Fixed latched area. The characteristics of latch cannot be changed.
Support
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
Remarks
App - 28
Appendix 2.2 Supported devices
Appendix 2 Simulation Function
No. SM0 SM1
SM5
SM16 SM50 SM56 SM62 SM165 SM202 SM203 SM204 SM206 SM213 SM250 SM320
SM321
SM322
SM323
SM324 SM325 SM326
Special relay list (QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU)
For details of special relays User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals) of the CPU module to be used
Name Diagnostic error
Description
OFF : No error ON : Error
Self-diagnostic error
OFF : No self-diagnostic error
ON : Self-diagnostic error
Error common information
OFF : No error common information
ON : Error common information
Error individual information
OFF : No error individual information
ON : Error individual information
Error reset Operation error
OFFON: Error reset
OFF : Normal ON : Operation error
Annunciator detection
OFF : Not detected ON : Detected
Program memory batch transfer execution status
OFF : Completed ON : Not being executed
or not completed
LED OFF command STOP contact PAUSE contact
PAUSE enable coil
OFFON: LED OFF STOP status PAUSE status
OFF : PAUSE disabled ON : PAUSE enabled
Clock data read request
OFF : Ignored ON : Read request
Max. loaded I/O read
OFF : Ignored ON : Read
Presence/absence of SFC program
OFF : SFC program absent ON : SFC program present
Start/stop SFC program
OFF : SFC program not executed (stop)
ON : SFC program executed (start)
SFC program start status
OFF : Initial start ON : Resume start
Presence/absence of continuous transition for entire block
OFF : Continuous transition not effective
ON : Continuous transition effective
Continuous transition prevention flag
OFF : When transition is executed
ON : When no transition
Output mode at block stop
OFF : OFF ON : Preserves
SFC device clear mode
OFF : Clear device ON : Preserves device
No. SM327
SM328
SM329
SM400
SM401
SM402
SM403
SM404
SM405
SM409*1 SM410*1 SM411*1 SM412*1 SM413*1 SM414*1 SM415*1 SM420 SM421 SM422 SM423 SM424 SM430 SM431 SM432 SM433 SM434
Name
Output during end step execution
Description
OFF : Hold step output turned OFF (cleared)
ON : Hold step output held
OFF : Clear processing is
Clear processing mode
performed.
when end step is reached ON : Clear processing is
not performed.
Online module change of SFC non-active block in progress flag
OFF : Not executed ON : Being executed
Always ON
ON OFF
Always OFF
ON OFF
After RUN, ON for only 1 ON
scan
OFF
1 scan
After RUN, OFF for only ON
1 scan
OFF
Low speed execution type program ON for 1 scan only after RUN
ON OFF
Low speed execution type program After RUN,
ON
OFF for 1 scan only
OFF
1 scan 1 scan 1 scan
0.01 second clock
0.005 sec 0.005 sec
0.1 second clock
0.05 sec 0.05 sec
0.2 second clock
0.1 sec 0.1 sec
1 second clock
0.5 sec 0.5 sec
2 second clock
1 sec
1 sec
2n second clock
n sec
n sec
2n (ms) clock
User timing clock No. 0 User timing clock No. 1 User timing clock No. 2 User timing clock No. 3 User timing clock No. 4 User timing clock No. 5 User timing clock No. 6 User timing clock No. 7 User timing clock No. 8 User timing clock No. 9
n (ms) n (ms)
n2 scan
n2 scan
n1 scan
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
APPENDIX
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
MONITORING
17 18 19 20 21 22 A I
INDEX
Appendix 2.2 Supported devices
App - 29
APPENDIX
No. SM510 SM600 SM602 SM603 SM604 SM620 SM621 SM622 SM623 SM624 SM626 SM640 SM650 SM672
SM680 SM681 SM700 SM702 SM703 SM704
SM709
SM716 SM717
Name
Low speed program execution flag
Description
OFF : Completed or not executed
ON : Execution under way
Memory card usable flags
OFF : Unusable ON : Use enabled
Drive 1 flag
OFF : No drive 1 ON : Drive 1 present
Drive 2 flag
OFF : No drive 2 ON : Drive 2 present
Memory card in-use flag
OFF : Not used ON : In use
Drive 3/4 usable flags
OFF : Unusable ON : Use enabled
Drive 3/4 protect flag
OFF : Not protected ON : Protected
Drive 3 flag
OFF : No drive 3 ON : Drive 3 present
Drive 4 flag
OFF : No drive 4 ON : Drive 4 present
Drive 3/4 in-use flag
OFF : Not used ON : In use
Extended SRAM cassette insertion flag
OFF : Not inserted ON : Inserted
File register use
OFF : File register not used ON : File register in use
Comment use
OFF : Comment not used ON : Comment in use
Memory card file register access range flag
OFF : Within access range ON : Outside access
range
Program memory write error
OFF : Write not executed/ normal
ON : Write error
Program memory writing OFF : Write not executed
flag
ON : During writing
Carry flag
OFF : Carry OFF ON : Carry ON
Search method
OFF : Search next ON : 2-part search
Sort order
OFF : Ascending order ON : Descending order
Block comparison
OFF : Non-match found ON : All match
DT/TM instruction improper data detection flag
OFF : Improper data not detected
ON : Improper data detected
Block comparison (Except an interrupt program)
Block comparison (Interrupt program)
OFF : Mismatch found ON : No mismatch
OFF : Mismatch found ON : No mismatch
No. SM722
SM750 SM774 SM776 SM777 SM794 SM800 SM801 SM802 SM803 SM804 SM805 SM826
SM829
SM1500*2 SM1501*2
SM1510*3
SM1511*3 SM1512*3 SM1513*3 SM1515*3 SM1516*3
Name
BIN/DBIN instruction error disabling flag
Description
OFF : Error detection performed
ON : Error detection not performed
Scaling instruction search method setting
OFF : Search next ON : 2-part search
PID bumpless processing OFF : Matched (for complete derivative) ON : Not matched
Enable/disable local device at CALL
OFF : Local device disabled ON : Local device enabled
Enable/disable setting for local devices in interrupt program
OFF : Local device disabled ON : Local device enabled
PID bumpless processing(for incomplete derivative)
OFF : Matched ON : Not matched
Trace preparation
OFF : Not ready ON : Ready
Trace start
OFF : Suspend ON : Start
Trace execution in progress Trace trigger
After trace trigger
OFF : Suspend ON : Start
OFF ON: Start
OFF : Not after trigger ON : After trigger
Trace completed
OFF : Not completed ON : End
Trance error
OFF : Normal ON : Error
Forced registration specification of trace setting
OFF : Forced registration disabled
ON : Forced registration enabled
Process control instruction S.IN hold mode Process control instruction S.OUT hold mode
Operation mode
OFF : No-hold ON : Hold
OFF : No-hold ON : Hold
(Fixed to 'OFF') OFF : Backup mode, debug
mode ON : Separate mode
System A identification flag System B identification flag
Debug mode status flag
(Fixed to 'ON' (System A))*4
(Fixed to 'OFF' (System A))*4 (Fixed to 'ON') OFF : Not in debug mode ON : Debug mode
Operation system status
(Fixed to 'ON' (Control system))*5
(Fixed to 'OFF' (Control system))*5
App - 30
Appendix 2.2 Supported devices
*1 : When the setting value of the constant scan is equal to the integral multiple of the clock time, the value of the special relay is OFF every scan. For the setting to turn the clock of the special relay ON/OFF, refer to Point in the next page.
*2 : These devices are for the process control instruction, and supported by Process CPU and Redundant CPU only. When the program with the process control instruction is written to the programmable controller CPU other than Process CPU and Redundant CPU, a stop error occurs on the CPU from INSTRCT.CODE ERR (error code 4002).
*3 : Applicable for operations on Redundant CPU only. Fixed to the status in the parentheses.
*4 : The following shows the correspondences for the system A and the system B of Redundant system. System A: When SM1511 is ON, or SM1512 is OFF. System B: When SM1511 is OFF, or SM1512 is ON. Unspecified system: When both SM1511 and SM1512 are OFF.
*5 : The following shows the correspondences for the operating status of CPU module. Control system: When SM1515 is ON, or SM1516 is OFF. Standby system: When SM1515 is OFF, or SM1516 is ON. Unspecified system: When both SM1515 and SM1516 are OFF.
Appendix 2 Simulation Function
17 18 19 20 21 22 A I
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
APPENDIX
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
MONITORING
INDEX
Appendix 2.2 Supported devices
App - 31
APPENDIX
Turning clock of special relay ON/OFF To turn the clock of the special relay ON/OFF, set the constant scan setting value avoiding the integral multiple of the clock time, as described by the following example "Not equal to integral multiple" shown below.
� Example: Not equal to integral multiple The following figure shows the behavior of the 0.1-second clock when the constant scan is 50ms. The special relay repeats ON/OFF.
0
0.05
0.1
0.15
0.2
0.25
0.3 (Second)
0.1-second clock
Clock ON/OFF
inversion and
value of special relay
ON OFF
50ms
0
1
2
ON
OFF
3
4
ON
OFF
(Scan)
5
6
� Example: Equal to integral multiple The following figure shows the behavior of the 0.1-second clock when the constant scan is 100ms (default). The value of the special relay is OFF every scan.
0
0.05
0.1
0.15
0.2
0.25
0.3 (Second)
0.1-second clock
Clock ON/OFF inversion and value of special relay
0
100ms
OFF 1
OFF 2
OFF
(Scan) 3
Contact scan setting To set the constant scan setting value, select [PLC Parameter] <<PLC RAS>> and set it.
App - 32
Appendix 2.2 Supported devices
Appendix 2 Simulation Function
No. M8000 M8001 M8002 M8003 M8004 M8011 M8012 M8013 M8014 M8018 M8020 M8021 M8022 M8023 M8024 M8026 M8028 M8029 M8031 M8032 M8033 M8034 M8038 M8039
Special relay list (FXCPU)
For details of special relays Programming Manual of the FXCPU module to be used
Name
Description
RUN monitor NO contact
OFF : STOP ON : RUN
RUN monitor NC contact
OFF : RUN ON : STOP
Initial pulse NO contact Initial pulse NC contact Error occurrence
ON for only 1 scan after RUN
OFF for only 1 scan after RUN
ON while either one among M8060 to M8067 is ON
10ms clock
100ms clock
1 sec. clock
1 min. clock
Installation detection for real-time clock
Always ON
Zero
ON when the addition or subtraction result is 0
Borrow
ON when the subtraction result is less than the maximum negative value
Carry
ON when "carry" occurs in the addition result
Floating-point calculation ON : Carry out floating-
command
point calculation
BMOV instruction execution direction
ON : Write OFF : Read
RAMP mode
ON : Hold output value OFF : Reset value at output
Timer switch command
OFF : 100ms timer ON : 10ms timer
Instruction execution complete
OFF : During executing ON : Execution completed
Non-latched memory all OFF : Hold
clear
ON : Clear
Latched memory all clear
OFF : Hold ON : Clear
Memory holding against STOP mode
All output disable
OFF : Clear ON : Hold
OFF : Enable output ON : Disable output
RAM file clear command
OFF : Hold ON : Clear
Constant scan mode
OFF : Normal scan ON : Constant mode
No. M8040 M8041 M8042 M8043
M8044 M8045 M8046 M8047 M8048 M8049 M8067 M8068 M8074
M8090
M8091 M8160 M8161 M8164 M8168
M8200
Name Transfer disable
Description
OFF : Enable transfer ON : Disable transfer
Transfer start (for IST instruction)
OFF : Stop transfer ON : Start transfer
Start pulse (for IST instruction)
ON : IST instruction start command
Zero point return complete (for IST instruction)
ON : IST instruction zero point return complete command
Zero point condition (for IST instruction)
ON : Zero point OFF : Zero point return is
undetermined
All output reset disable (for IST instruction)
ON : Disable reset OFF : Enable reset
STL state ON
ON : ON while either one among S0 to S899 is ON
STL monitoring enable
ON : Enable D8040 to D8047
Annunciator ON Annunciator enable
ON while either one among S900 to S999 is ON
ON : Enable D8049 OFF : Disable D8049
Operation error
ON : Operation error OFF : No operation error
Operation error latch RAM file register setting
Hold occurrence of M8067
ON : Use setting OFF : Not use setting
BKCMP instruction: Block comparison signal
ON : Comparison result matches
OFF : Comparison result does not match
Output character quantity ON : Change nothing
selector signal
OFF : Write 00H (NULL)
XCH instruction: SWAP function
8-bit processing mode
FROM and TO instructions: Transfer points variable mode SMOV instruction: Hexadecimal data handling function
Counter counting direction
ON : 8-bit conversion OFF : Normal mode
Processing mode in the ASC, ASCI, and HEX instructions
Transfer points switch command
Data shift in 4-bit units
ON : C200 is downcounting
OFF : C200 is up-counting
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
APPENDIX
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
MONITORING
17 18 19 20 21 22 A I
INDEX
Appendix 2.2 Supported devices
App - 33
APPENDIX
No. M8201
Name
Counter counting direction
M8202
Counter counting direction
M8203
Counter counting direction
M8204
Counter counting direction
M8205
Counter counting direction
M8206
Counter counting direction
M8207
Counter counting direction
M8208
Counter counting direction
M8209
Counter counting direction
M8210
Counter counting direction
M8211
Counter counting direction
M8212
Counter counting direction
M8213
Counter counting direction
M8214
Counter counting direction
M8215
Counter counting direction
M8216
Counter counting direction
M8217
Counter counting direction
M8218
Counter counting direction
Description
ON : C201 is downcounting
OFF : C201 is up-counting
ON : C202 is downcounting
OFF : C202 is up-counting
ON : C203 is downcounting
OFF : C203 is up-counting
ON : C204 is downcounting
OFF : C204 is up-counting
ON : C205 is downcounting
OFF : C205 is up-counting
ON : C206 is downcounting
OFF : C206 is up-counting
ON : C207 is downcounting
OFF : C207 is up-counting
ON : C208 is downcounting
OFF : C208 is up-counting
ON : C209 is downcounting
OFF : C209 is up-counting
ON : C210 is downcounting
OFF : C210 is up-counting
ON : C211 is downcounting
OFF : C211 is up-counting
ON : C212 is downcounting
OFF : C212 is up-counting
ON : C213 is downcounting
OFF : C213 is up-counting
ON : C214 is downcounting
OFF : C214 is up-counting
ON : C215 is downcounting
OFF : C215 is up-counting
ON : C216 is downcounting
OFF : C216 is up-counting
ON : C217 is downcounting
OFF : C217 is up-counting
ON : C218 is downcounting
OFF : C218 is up-counting
No. M8219
Name
Counter counting direction
M8220
Counter counting direction
M8221
Counter counting direction
M8222
Counter counting direction
M8223
Counter counting direction
M8224
Counter counting direction
M8225
Counter counting direction
M8226
Counter counting direction
M8227
Counter counting direction
M8228
Counter counting direction
M8229
Counter counting direction
M8230
Counter counting direction
M8231
Counter counting direction
M8232
Counter counting direction
M8233
Counter counting direction
M8234
Counter counting direction
Description
ON : C219 is downcounting
OFF : C219 is up-counting
ON : C220 is downcounting
OFF : C220 is up-counting
ON : C221 is downcounting
OFF : C221 is up-counting
ON : C222 is downcounting
OFF : C222 is up-counting
ON : C223 is downcounting
OFF : C223 is up-counting
ON : C224 is downcounting
OFF : C224 is up-counting
ON : C225 is downcounting
OFF : C225 is up-counting
ON : C226 is downcounting
OFF : C226 is up-counting
ON : C227 is downcounting
OFF : C227 is up-counting
ON : C228 is downcounting
OFF : C228 is up-counting
ON : C229 is downcounting
OFF : C229 is up-counting
ON : C230 is downcounting
OFF : C230 is up-counting
ON : C231 is downcounting
OFF : C231 is up-counting
ON : C232 is downcounting
OFF : C232 is up-counting
ON : C233 is downcounting
OFF : C233 is up-counting
ON : C234 is downcounting
OFF : C234 is up-counting
App - 34
Appendix 2.2 Supported devices
Appendix 2 Simulation Function
Special register list (QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU)
For details of special registers User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals) of the CPU module to be used
No. SD0 SD1 SD2 SD3
SD4
SD5 SD6 SD7 SD8 SD9 SD10 SD11 SD12 SD13 SD14 SD15 SD16 SD17 SD18 SD19 SD20 SD21 SD22 SD23 SD24 SD25 SD26 SD50 SD62
SD63
SD64 SD65 SD66 SD67 SD68 SD69 SD70 SD71 SD72 SD73 SD74 SD75
Name Diagnostic error
Clock time for diagnosis error occurrence
Error information categories
Description Diagnostic error code
Clock time for diagnosis error occurrence
Error information category code
Error common information
Error common information
Error individual information
Error individual information
Error reset
Annunciator number
Number of annunciators
Error code to be reset Annunciator number
Number of annunciators
Table of detected annunciator numbers
Annunciator detection number
No. SD76 SD77 SD78 SD79 SD200 SD201
SD202
SD203
SD204 SD207 SD208 SD209 SD210 SD211
SD212
SD213
SD220 SD221 SD222 SD223 SD224 SD225 SD226 SD227
SD240
SD241
SD242
SD243 SD244 SD250 SD282 SD283 SD284 SD285 SD286 SD287 SD288 SD289
Name
Description
Table of detected annunciator numbers
Annunciator detection number
Status of switch LED status LED OFF command Operating status of CPU LED display color
LED display priority ranking
Clock data Clock data Clock data
Clock data
Status of CPU switch Status of CPU-LED Bit pattern of LED that is turned OFF
Operating status of CPU*1
CPU-LED display color Priorities 1 to 4 Priorities 5 to 8 Priorities 9 to 11 Clock data (year, month) Clock data (day, hour) Clock data (minute, second) Clock data (higher digits of year, day of week)
LED display data
LED display data
Base mode
Extension stage number
A/Q base differentiation
0: Automatic mode 1: Detail mode
0: Main base only 1 to 7: Extension stage number
0 : QA**B is installed (A mode) 1 : Q**B is installed (Q mode)
No. of base slots (Operation status)
Number of base slots
Loaded maximum I/O Loaded maximum I/O number
Number of points assigned for D (for internal device extension)
Device assignment
Number of points assigned for W (for internal device extension)
Number of points assigned for M (for extension)
Number of points assigned for B (for extension)
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
APPENDIX
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
MONITORING
17 18 19 20 21 22 A I
INDEX
Appendix 2.2 Supported devices
App - 35
APPENDIX
No.
Name
Description
SD290
Number of points assigned for X
SD291
Number of points assigned for Y
SD292
Number of points assigned for M
SD293
Number of points assigned for L
SD294
Number of points assigned for B
SD295
Number of points assigned for F
SD296
Number of points assigned for SB
SD297 Device assignment SD298
Number of points assigned for V Number of points assigned for S
SD299
Number of points assigned for T
SD300
Number of points assigned for ST
SD301
Number of points assigned for C
SD302
Number of points assigned for D
SD303
Number of points assigned for W
SD304
Number of points assigned for SW
SD305
Device assignment (Index register)
16-bit modification Number of points assigned for Z
SD306 SD307
Device assignment (Same as parameter contents)
Number of points assigned for ZR (for extension)
SD308 SD309 SD310
SD311
Device assignment (Assignment including the number of points set to the extended data register and extended link register setting)
Number of points assigned for D (for inside + for extension)
Number of points assigned for W (for inside + for extension)
SD395 Multiple CPU system Multiple CPU number
SD396 information
No. 1 CPU operation status
SD412*2 1 second counter
Number of counts in 1-second units
SD414*2
2n second clock setting
2n second clock units
SD415*2
2n millisecond clock setting
2n millisecond clock units
SD420 Scan counter
Number of counts in each scan
SD430
Low speed scan counter
Number of counts in each scan
SD500
Execution program No.
Program number in execution
SD520*3 Current scan time
SD521*3
Current scan time (ms value) Current scan time (s value)
SD522*3 Initial scan time
SD523*3
Initial scan time (ms value) Initial scan time (s value)
SD524*3 Minimum scan time
SD525*3
Minimum scan time (ms value) Minimum scan time (s value)
SD526 Maximum scan time
SD527
Maximum scan time (ms value) Maximum scan time (s value)
SD528 SD529
Current scan time for low speed execution type programs
Current scan time (ms value) Current scan time (s value)
No.
Name
Description
SD532 SD533
Minimum scan time for Minimum scan time (ms value)
low speed execution
type programs
Minimum scan time (s value)
SD534 SD535
Maximum scan time for low speed execution type programs
Maximum scan time (ms value) Maximum scan time (s value)
SD600 Memory card type
Memory card type
SD602
Drive 1 (Memory card RAM) capacity
Drive 1 capacity
SD603
Drive 2 (Memory card ROM) capacity
Drive 2 capacity
SD604
Memory card use conditions
Memory card use conditions
SD620 Drive 3/4 type
Drive 3/4 type
SD622
Drive 3 (Standard RAM) capacity
Drive 3 capacity
SD623
Drive 4 (Standard ROM) capacity
Drive 4 capacity
SD624
Drive 3/4 use conditions
Drive 3/4 use conditions
SD640 File register drive
Drive number
SD641 to SD646
File register file name File register file name
SD647 File register capacity File register capacity
SD648
File register block number
File register block number
SD650 Comment drive
Comment drive number
SD651 to SD656
Comment file name
Comment file name
SD670
Parameter enable drive information
Parameter enable drive number
SD681
Program memory write (transfer) status
(Fixed to 100) Write (transfer) status display (percentage)
SD840
Debugging function usage
Debugging function usage
SD1500
*4
SD1501
*4
Process control instruction Basic period
Basic period for process control instruction
SD1502
*4
Process control instruction Detail error code
Detailed error code for process control instruction
SD1503
*4
Process control instruction Generated error location
Generated error location for process control instruction
SD1506
*4
SD1507
*4
Dummy devices
Dummy devices
App - 36
Appendix 2.2 Supported devices
No.
Name
Description
SD1508
*4
Process control instruction Function availability selection
b0 Bumpless function availability setting for the S.PIDP instruction 0: Enabled 1: Disabled (Default: 0)
*1 : SD203 supports the operating status of CPU only. STOP/ PAUSE cause is fixed to 0.
*2 : Values are derived from the constant scan setting value and the number of scans.
*3 : All values are equal to the constant scan setting value.
*4 : These devices are for the process control instruction, and supported by Process CPU and Redundant CPU only. When the program with the process control instruction is written to the programmable controller CPU other than Process CPU and Redundant CPU, a stop error occurs on the CPU from INSTRCT.CODE ERR (error code 4002).
Appendix 2 Simulation Function
17 18 19 20 21 22 A I
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
APPENDIX
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
MONITORING
INDEX
Appendix 2.2 Supported devices
App - 37
APPENDIX
No. D8000 D8001
D8002
D8004 D8006 D8010 D8011 D8012 D8013 D8014 D8015 D8016 D8017 D8018 D8019 D8028 D8029 D8030
D8031
D8039 D8040 D8041 D8042 D8043 D8044 D8045 D8046 D8047 D8049
D8067
D8068
D8069
D8101
D8102
Special register list (FXCPU)
For details of special registers Programming Manual of the FXCPU module to be used
Name
Description
Watchdog timer
200ms*1
PLC type and system version
*2
Memory capacity
Maximum capacity based on the programmable controller type
Error M number
M8060 to M8068
Low battery voltage detection level
30 (Unit: 0.1 V)
Current scan time
*3
Minimum scan time
*3
Maximum scan time
*3
Second data
Operate as 1-second timer
Minute data
Time data
Hour data
Time data
Day data
Time data
Month data
Time data
Year data
Time data
Day-of-the-week data
Time data
Value of register Z
Value of register Z
Value of register V
Value of register V
Variable analog potentiometer VR1
*4
Variable analog
*4
potentiometer VR2
Constant scan time
Initial value: 100ms (Unit: 1ms)*5
ON state relay number 1 Value of STL monitor
ON state relay number 2 Value of STL monitor
ON state relay number 3 Value of STL monitor
ON state relay number 4 Value of STL monitor
ON state relay number 5 Value of STL monitor
ON state relay number 6 Value of STL monitor
ON state relay number 7 Value of STL monitor
ON state relay number 8 Value of STL monitor
Smallest active state relay number
Value of STL monitor
Error code for operation error
Error code number
Latched step number where operation error has occurred
Hold step number where operation error has occurred
Step number where error Step number where error
has occurred
has occurred
PLC type and system version
*2
Memory capacity
Maximum capacity based on the programmable controller type
No.
Name
Description
D8164
FROM and TO instructions: Transfer points quantity specification
Write transfer points
D8182
Value of register Z1
Value of register Z1
D8183
Value of register V1
Value of register V1
D8184
Value of register Z2
Value of register Z2
D8185
Value of register V2
Value of register V2
D8186
Value of register Z3
Value of register Z3
D8187
Value of register V3
Value of register V3
D8188
Value of register Z4
Value of register Z4
D8189
Value of register V4
Value of register V4
D8190
Value of register Z5
Value of register Z5
D8191
Value of register V5
Value of register V5
D8192
Value of register Z6
Value of register Z6
D8193
Value of register V6
Value of register V6
D8194
Value of register Z7
Value of register Z7
D8195
Value of register V7
Value of register V7
D8312 D8313
Latched step number where operation error has occurred
Lower Upper
D8314 D8315
Step number where error Lower
has occurred 32 bits
Upper
*1 : Initialized to 200ms on every programmable controller type. The watchdog timer time can be changed, but the WDT check is never performed.
*2 : The value of D8001 and D8101 differs according to the programmable controller type.
Programmable controller CPU
Value ("***" indicates version)
D8001
D8101
FX0, FX0S
20***
FX0N
20***
FX1
21***
FXU, FX2C
20***
0
FX1S
22***
FX1N, FX1NC
26***
FX2N, FX2NC
24***
FX3S
28***
28***
FX3G, FX3GC
26***
26***
FX3U, FX3UC
24***
16***
*3 : The value is always set to 100ms.
*4 : Operates as a general data register. Write a value between 0 and 255 and test the operation using functions such as the Modify Value function of GX Works2.
*5 : The value can be changed, but a single scan is always executed in 100ms.
App - 38
Appendix 2.2 Supported devices
Appendix 2 Simulation Function
Devices supported by the I/O system setting function
17
MONITORING
The following table shows the list of devices which can be used for conditions, the device value input, and timing chart input in the I/O system setting function.
Device list (QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU)
Category
Input
Device name
Symbol
: Supported �: Not supported QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU
18
X
Output
Y
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
Internal relay
M
Latch relay
L
Annunciator
F
Edge relay
V
Step relay
S
� �
19
Link relay
B
Link special relay
SB
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
Current value
TN
Timer
Contact
TS
Internal user device
Counter
Coil
TC
Current value
CN
Contact
CS
�
20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
Coil
CC
�
Current value
STN(SN)
Retentive timer
Contact
STS(SS)
Coil
STC(SC)
�
Data register
D
Link register
W
21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
Link special register
SW
Direct input
DX
�
Direct output
DY
�
Function input
FX
Function output
FY
Internal system device
Special relay
SM
Function register
FD
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
Special register
SD
Link input
J\X
�
Link output
J\Y
�
Link direct device
Link register Link special register Link relay
J\W J\SW J\B
�
�
�
A
Link special relay
J\SB
�
Intelligent function module device
Intelligent function module device
U\G
APPENDIX
Index register
Index register
Z
R
File register
File register
ZR
Nesting
Nesting
N
�
I
Pointer
P
�
Pointer
Interrupt pointer
I
�
INDEX
Appendix 2.2 Supported devices
App - 39
APPENDIX
Category Others Constant
Device list (FXCPU)
Device name SFC block device SFC transition device Decimal constant Hexadecimal constant Real constant
Category
Device name
Input
Output
Auxiliary relay
State
Current value
Device
Timer
Contact
Coil
Current value
Counter
Contact
Coil
Data register
Direct specification of buffer memory
Index register
Index register
Extension register
Extension register
Nesting
Nesting
Pointer
JUMP or CALL branch Interrupt pointer
Decimal constant
Constant
Hexadecimal constant
Real number constant
*1 : Supported by FX3U and FX3UC only. *2 : Supported by FX3U, FX3UC, FX3G, and FX3GC only.
Symbol BL TR K H E
QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU � � �
Symbol X Y M S TN TS TC CN CS CC D U\G V Z R N P I K H E
: Supported �: Not supported FXCPU � � *1 *2 � � � �
App - 40
Appendix 2.2 Supported devices
Appendix 2 Simulation Function
Appendix 2.3 Supported instructions
17
MONITORING
This section explains the instructions supported by the simulation function.
Instructions/functions used in Structured projects can also be simulated.
However, some instructions may be restricted or not supported. No processing is performed for
unsupported instructions (NOP processing).
18
When an unsupported instruction is used,
is displayed in "Unsupported instructions" on the
monitoring status bar. (Section 17.1.2) Unsupported devices used in a program and their used locations can be checked by selecting [Debug] [Instructions Unsupported by Simulation]. (Section 18.3)
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU
Sequence instructions
Category
Contact instruction
Bond instruction
Output instruction
Shift instruction Master control instruction End instruction Other instruction
Symbol
LD, LDI, AND, ANI, OR, ORI, LDP, LDF, ANDP, ANDF, ORP, ORF, LDPI, LDFI, ANDPI, ANDFI, ORPI, and ORFI
�
ANB, ORB, MPS, MRD, MPP, INV, MEP, MEF, EGP, and EGF
�
OUT, OUT T, OUT C, OUT F, OUTH T, SET, RST, SET F, RST F, PLS, PLF, and FF
�
SFT(P)
�
MC and MCR
�
FEND and END
�
STOP, NOP, NOPLF, and PAGE
�
Restrictions
Basic instructions
Category Comparison operation instruction
Arithmetic operation instruction
Data conversion instruction
Data transfer instruction Program branch instruction
Symbol
Restrictions
=, <>, >, , <, , D=, D<>, D>, D , D<, D , E=, E<>, E>, E , E<, E , and BKCMP(P)
�
$=, $<>, $>, $<=, $< and $>=
Not supported by Basic model QCPU.
ED=, ED<>, ED>, ED , ED<, ED , and DBKCMP(P)
Supported by Universal model QCPU/ LCPU only.
CMP(P), DCMP(P), ZCP(P), DZCP(P), ECMP(P), EDCMP(P), EZCP(P), Supported by High-speed Universal
EDZCP(P)
model QCPU/LCPU only.
+(P), (P), D+(P), D(P), *(P), /(P), D*(P), D/(P), B+(P), B(P), DB+(P),
DB(P), B*(P), B/(P), DB*(P), DB/(P), E+(P), E(P), E*(P), E/(P),
�
BK+(P), BK(P), INC(P), DEC(P), DINC(P), and DDEC(P)
$+(P)
Not supported by Basic model QCPU.
ED+(P), ED-(P), ED*(P), ED/(P), DBK+(P), and DBK-(P)
Supported by Universal model QCPU/ LCPU only.
BCD(P), DBCD(P), BIN(P), DBIN(P), INT(P), DINT(P), FLT(P), DFLT(P), DBL(P), WORD(P), GRY(P), DGRY(P), GBIN(P), DGBIN(P), NEG(P), � DNEG(P), ENEG(P), BKBCD(P), and BKBIN(P)
INTD(P), DINTD(P), FLTD(P), DFLTD(P), EDNEG(P), ECON(P), and EDCON(P)
Supported by Universal model QCPU/ LCPU only.
MOV(P), DMOV(P), EMOV(P), $MOV(P), CML(P), DCML(P), BMOV(P), FMOV(P), XCH(P), DXCH(P), BXCH(P), and SWAP(P)
�
EDMOV(P) and DFMOV(P)
Supported by Universal model QCPU/ LCPU only.
SMOV(P)
Supported by High-speed Universal model QCPU/LCPU only.
CJ, SCJ, JMP, and GOEND
�
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
APPENDIX
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
19 20 21 22 A I
INDEX
Appendix 2.3 Supported instructions
App - 41
APPENDIX
Category
Symbol
Other convenient instruction
UDCNT1, UDCNT2, TTMR, STMR, ROTC, RAMP, SPD, PLSY, PWM, and MTR
Restrictions
Not supported by Basic model QCPU and Redundant CPU.
Application instructions
Category
Symbol
Restrictions
Logical operation instruction
WAND(P), DAND(P), BKAND(P), WOR(P), DOR(P), BKOR(P), WXOR(P), DXOR(P), BKXOR(P), WXNR(P), DXNR(P), and BKNXR(P)
�
Rotation instruction
ROR(P), RCR(P), ROL(P), RCL(P), DROR(P), DRCR(P), DROL(P), and DRCL(P)
�
SFR(P), SFL(P), BSFR(P), BSFL(P), DSFR(P), and DSFL(P)
�
Shift instruction
SFTBR(P), SFTBL(P), SFTWR(P), and SFTWL(P)
Supported by Universal model QCPU/ LCPU only.
SFTR(P), SFTL(P), WSFR(P), WSFL(P)
Supported by High-speed Universal model QCPU/LCPU only.
Bit processing instruction BSET(P), BRST(P), TEST(P), DTEST(P), and BKRST(P)
�
Data processing instruction
SER(P), DSER(P), SUM(P), DSUM(P), DECO(P), ENCO(P), SEG(P), DIS(P), UNI(P), NDIS(P), NUNI(P), WTOB(P), BTOW(P), MAX(P), MIN(P), DMAX(P), DMIN(P), SORT, DSORT, WSUM(P), and DWSUM(P)
MEAN(P) and DMEAN(P)
The SORT and DSORT instructions are executed in one scan.
Supported by Universal model QCPU/ LCPU only.
CCD(P), CRC(P)
Supported by High-speed Universal model QCPU/LCPU only.
Structured instruction
FOR, NEXT, BREAK(P), CALL(P), RET, FCALL(P), and XCALL ECALL(P) and EFCALL(P)
� Not supported by Basic model QCPU.
Data table operation instruction
FIFW(P), FIFR(P), FPOP(P), FINS(P), and FDEL(P)
�
Buffer memory access instruction
FROM(P), DFRO(P), TO(P), and DTO(P)
�
STR(P), DSTR(P), VAL(P), DVAL(P), ESTR(P), and EVAL(P)
�
String processing instruction
BINDA(P), DBINDA(P), BINHA(P), DBINHA(P), BCDDA(P), DBCDDA(P), DABIN(P), DDABIN(P), HABIN(P), DHABIN(P), DABCD(P), DDABCD(P), LEN(P), ASC(P), HEX(P), RIGHT(P), LEFT(P), MIDR(P), MIDW(P), INSTR(P), EMOD(P), and EREXP(P)
Not supported by Basic model QCPU.
STRINS(P) and STRDEL(P)
Supported by Universal model QCPU/ LCPU only.
SIN(P), COS(P), TAN(P), RAD(P), DEG(P), SQR(P), EXP(P), LOG(P), RND(P), and SRND(P)
�
ASIN(P), ACOS(P), ATAN(P), BSQR(P), BDSQR(P), BSIN(P), Special function instruction BCOS(P), BTAN(P), BASIN(P), BACOS(P), and BATAN(P)
Not supported by Basic model QCPU.
SIND(P), COSD(P), TAND(P), ASIND(P), ACOSD(P), ATAND(P), RADD(P), DEGD(P), SQRD(P), EXPD(P), LOGD(P), POW(P), POWD(P), LOG10(P), and LOG10D(P)
Supported by Universal model QCPU/ LCPU only.
Data control instruction
LIMIT(P), DLIMIT(P), BAND(P), DBAND(P), ZONE(P), and DZONE(P) SCL(P), DSCL(P), SCL2(P), and DSCL2(P)
�
Supported by Universal model QCPU/ LCPU only.
Switch instruction
RSET(P) and QDRSET(P)
The QDRSET(P) instruction is not supported by Basic model QCPU/ LCPU.
DATERD(P), DATE+(P), DATE(P), SECOND(P), and HOUR(P)
The DATERD(P) instruction reads the personal computer clock data.
Clock instruction
DT=, DT<>, DT>, DT , DT<, DT , TM=, TM<>, TM>, TM , TM<, and TM
Supported by Universal model QCPU/ LCPU only.
HOURM, DHOURM, TCMP(P), TZCP(P)
Supported by High-speed Universal model QCPU/LCPU only.
Extended clock instructions S(P).DATERD, S(P).DATE+, and S(P).DATE-
Not supported by Basic model QCPU.
App - 42
Appendix 2.3 Supported instructions
Appendix 2 Simulation Function
Category
Symbol
Restrictions
Program control instruction PSTOP(P), POFF(P), and PSCAN(P)
Not supported by Basic model QCPU.
Display instruction
LEDR
�
Process control instruction
S.IN, S.OUT1, S.PID, S.PHPL, S.LLAG, S.I, S.D, S.DED, S.FG, S.IFG, S.FLT, S.ENG, S.IENG, S.ABS, S.OUT2, S.MOUT, S.R, S.PIDP, S.SPI, S.IPD, S.BPI, S.HS, S.LS, S.MID, S.AVE, S.LIMT, S.VLMT1, S.VLMT2, S.ONF2, S.ONF3, S.DBND, S.PGS, S.SEL, S.BUMP, S.AMR, S.SUM, S.TPC, S.ADD, S.SUB, S.MUL, S.DIV, S.SQR, S.>, S.<, S.=, S.>=, S.<=, S.DUTY, S.BC, S.2PID, S.PSUM, S.AT1
Supported by Process CPU and Redundant CPU only.*1
Other instruction
DUTY, ZRRDB(P), ZRWRB(P), ADRSET(P), ZPUSH(P), ZPOP(P), TIMCHK, WDT(P), TRACE, TRACER, and RBMOV(P)
� The RBMOV instruction operates as the BMOV instruction.
� The TRACE, TRACER, and RBMOV(P) are not supported by Basic model QCPU.
� The RBMOV(P) instruction is not supported by LCPU.
*1 : When the program is written to the programmable controller CPU other than Process CPU and Redundant CPU a stop error occurs on the CPU from INSTRCT.CODE ERR (error code 4002).
PID control instructions
Category
PID Control Data Settings (Incomplete differentiation)
PID Control (Incomplete differentiation)
Operation Stop/Start of Designated Loop No. (Incomplete differentiation)
Parameter Change at Designated Loop (Incomplete differentiation)
PID Control Data Settings
PID Control
Operation Stop/Start of Designated Loop No.
Parameter Change at Designated Loop
S.PIDINIT, SP.PIDINIT
Symbol
S.PIDCONT, SP.PIDCONT
S.PIDSTOP, SP.PIDSTOP, S.PIDRUN, SP.PIDRUN
S.PIDPRMW, SP.PIDPRMW
PIDINIT(P) PIDCONT(P) PIDSTOP(P), PIDRUN(P)
PIDPRMW(P)
PID Control Loop
PID
Restrictions
Not supported by Process CPU.
Supported by High-speed Universal model QCPU/LCPU only.
SFC control instructions
Category
Symbol
Step operation status check instruction
Block operation status check instruction
LD, LDI, AND, ANI, OR, ORI
Active step batch readout instruction
MOV(P), DMOV(P), BMOV(P)
Block START instruction
SET
Block END instruction
RST
Block STOP instruction
PAUSE
Block restart instruction
START
Step START instruction
SET
Step END instruction
RST
Restrictions �
�
� � � � � � �
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
APPENDIX
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
MONITORING
17 18 19 20 21 22 A I
INDEX
Appendix 2.3 Supported instructions
App - 43
APPENDIX
Multiple CPU dedicated instructions
Category
Symbol
CPU shared memory access instruction
FROM(P), DFRO(P), S(P), TO, TO(P), and DTO(P)
Restrictions Not supported by LCPU.
App - 44
Appendix 2.3 Supported instructions
Appendix 2 Simulation Function
FXCPU
17
For details of the instructions, refer to the following manual. FXCPU Structured Programming Manual [Basic & Applied Instruction]
MONITORING
Sequence instructions
Category Contact instruction
Bond instruction
Output instruction Master control instruction Step ladder instruction Other instruction
Symbol
LD, LDI, AND, ANI, OR, ORI, LDP, LDF, ANDP, ANDF, ORP, and ORF �
ANB, ORB, MPS, MPP, and INV
�
MEP and MEF
�
OUT, SET, RST, PLS, and PLF
�
MC and MCR
�
STL and RET
�
END and NOP
�
Application instructions
Category Program flow Move and compare
Arithmetic and logical operation
CJ CALL SRET FEND FOR NEXT CMP ZCP MOV SMOV CML BMOV FMOV XCH BCD BIN ADD SUB MUL DIV INC DEC WAND WOR WXOR NEG
Symbol
32-bit instruction � � � � � � � �
Restrictions
: Supported, �: Not supported Pulse instruction execution
� � � �
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
18 19 20 21 22 A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
Appendix 2.3 Supported instructions
App - 45
APPENDIX
Category Rotation and shift operation
Data operation
Handy instruction External FX I/O device External Device (optional device) Data transfer 2
ROR ROL RCR RCL SFTR SFTL WSFR WSFL SFWR SFRD ZRST DECO ENCO SUM BON MEAN ANS ANR SQR FLT IST SER ABSD INCD TTMR STMR ALT RAMP SORT ASC FROM TO ASCI HEX ZPUSH ZPOP
Symbol
32-bit instruction � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � �
Pulse instruction execution � � � � � � � � � �
App - 46
Appendix 2.3 Supported instructions
Category
Floating point
Real time clock control External device Block data operation
Symbol ECMP EZCP EMOV ESTR EVAL EBCD EBIN EADD ESUB EMUL EDIV EXP LOGE LOG10 ESQR ENEG INT SIN COS TAN ASIN ACOS ATAN RAD DEG WSUM WTOB BTOW UNI DIS SWAP TCMP TZCP TADD TSUB HTOS STOH TRD HOUR GRY GBIN BK+ BKBKCMP= BKCMP> BKCMP< BKCMP<> BKCMP<= BKCMP>=
Appendix 2 Simulation Function
32-bit instruction � � � � � � � � �
17
Pulse instruction execution
MONITORING
18
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
19
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
�
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
Appendix 2.3 Supported instructions
App - 47
APPENDIX
Category Character string control Data operation 3
Data comparison
Data table operation Data transfer 3
STR VAL $+ LEN RIGHT LEFT MIDR MIDW INSTR $MOV FDEL FINS POP SFR SFL LD= LD> LD< LD<> LD<= LD>= AND= AND> AND< AND<> AND<= AND>= OR= OR> OR< OR<> OR<= OR>= LIMIT BAND ZONE DABIN BINDA RBFM WBFM
Symbol
32-bit instruction � � � � � � � � � � � � � � �
Pulse instruction execution � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � �
App - 48
Appendix 2.3 Supported instructions
Appendix 2 Simulation Function
Appendix 2.4 Enable/disable setting of parameter items
17
MONITORING
Some parameter setting items of GX Works2 are not applicable to the simulation function. The following table shows the parameter setting items applicable to the simulation function. The remote password is not supported.
QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU
18
PLC parameter setting applicability
Parameter PLC Name
Item Label Comment Timer Limit Setting RUN-PAUSE Contacts Latch Data Backup Operation Valid Contact Remote Reset Output Mode at STOP to RUN
Floating Point Arithmetic Processing
PLC System PLC File
Intelligent Function Module Setting (Interrupt Pointer Setting) Module Synchronization Built-in CC-Link Setting Common Pointer No. Points Occupied by Empty Slot System Interrupt Settings High Speed Interrupt Settings Interrupt Program/Fixed Scan Program Setting A-PLC Compatibility Setting
Service Processing Setting
PLC Module Change Setting File Register Transfer to Standard ROM at Latch data backup operation Comment File Used in a Command Initial Device Value File for Local Device File used for SP.DEVST/S.DEVLD Instruction
: Applicable �: Not applicable
Applicability � �
� Fixed to 'Allow' Fixed to 'Perform internal arithmetic operations in double precision*1 � � �
� � � � Fixed to 'Execute it while waiting for contact scan setting' � �
�
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
19 20 21 22 A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
Appendix 2.4 Enable/disable setting of parameter items
App - 49
APPENDIX
Parameter
Item
PLC RAS
Boot File Program SFC Device
I/O Assignment Setting
Multiple CPU Setting
Built-in Ethernet Port Setting Built-in I/O Function Setting
WDT (Watchdog Timer) Setting
WDT Setting
Initial Execution Monitoring Time
Low Speed Execution Monitoring Time
Error Check
Operating Mode When There is an Error
Constant Scanning
Error History
Low Speed Program Execution Time
Module Error History Collection
Boot Option
Boot File Setting
Program
SFC Program Start Mode
Start Conditions
Output Mode When the Block is Stopped
Device Points
Latch Start/End (possible to clear with latch clear)
Latch Start/End (disabled to clear with latch clear)
Local Device Start/End
Extended Device Latch Start/End (possible to clear with latch clear)
Extended Device Latch Start/End (disabled to clear with latch clear)
I/O Assignment
Base Setting
Switch Setting
Error Time Output Mode
Detailed Setting
PLC Operation Mode at H/W Error I/O Response Time
Control PLC
No. of PLC
Host Station
Operation Mode
Multiple CPU Synchronous Startup Setting
Online Module Change
I/O Sharing When Using Multiple CPUs
Communication Area Setting (Refresh Setting)
Multiple CPU High Speed Transmission Area Setting
Auto Refresh Setting
IP Address Setting
Communication Data Code
Open Setting
FTP Setting
Time Setting
Positioning
High-speed Counter
Input Signal
Output Signal
Applicability WDT error occurs if 30,000,000 or more
instructions are executed during one
scan. � �
*2 *3
� � � � *4 � � � � *5 � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � �
App - 50
Appendix 2.4 Enable/disable setting of parameter items
Appendix 2 Simulation Function
Parameter
Item
Applicability
Transmission Speed
�
Sum Check
�
Serial Communication
Transmission Wait Time
�
Online Change
�
Acknowledge XY Assignment
�
*1 : Internal operations are performed with double precision. However, the processing speed does not change. *2 : When "Check Device Range at Indexing" is selected, an operation error occurs if the file register out of the range is
accessed. Other errors are not supported. *3 : Supports "Computation Error" and "Intelligent Module Program Execution Error". *4 : There are restrictions for "Low Speed" and "Fixed Scan" type programs. (Appendix 2.5) *5 : Slots are assigned with a maximum number of slots when "Auto" is selected for "Base Mode".
MONITORING
17 18
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
Network parameter setting applicability
Parameter Network Parameter
Item Ethernet/CC IE/MELSECNET CC-Link
: Applicable �: Not applicable Applicability � �
19
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
FXCPU
PLC parameter setting applicability
Parameter Memory Capacity Device PLC Name PLC System (1)
PLC System (2)
Item Memory Capacity Comments Capacity File Register Capacity Program Capacity Special Function Memory Capacity Device Title Battery Less Mode MODEM Initialized RUN Terminal Input Channel Setting Operate Communication Setting Protocol Data Length Parity Stop Bit Transmission Speed Header Terminator Control Line H/W Type Control Mode Sum Check Transmission Control Procedure Station Number Setting Time Out Judge Time
20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
: Applicable �: Not applicable
Applicability
21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
�
�
�
�
22
�
�
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
�
�
�
� �
A
�
APPENDIX
�
�
�
�
�
I
�
�
�
INDEX
Appendix 2.4 Enable/disable setting of parameter items
App - 51
APPENDIX
Parameter Special Function Block (Built-in CC-Link/LT Setting)
Positioning
Ethernet Port Setting
Item Unit Name Address Value Size/Type Check the identification code before initializing Identification Code Transmission Speed Point Mode Station Type I/O Points Specify Reserved Station Bias Speed [Hz] Max. Speed [Hz] Creep Speed [Hz] Zero Return Speed [Hz] Acceleration Time [ms] Deceleration Time [ms] Interruption Input of DVIT Instruction Rotation Direction Signal Head Address Positioning Instruction Pulse [pls] Frequency [Hz] Positioning table settings will not be initialized when the PLC is powered ON Channel IP Address Setting Communication Data Code Disable direct connection to MELSOFT Do not respond to search for CPU on network Open Setting Time Setting Log Record Setting
Applicability � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � �
�
� � � � � � � �
Network parameter setting applicability
Parameter Network Parameter
CC-Link
Item
: Applicable �: Not applicable Applicability �
App - 52
Appendix 2.4 Enable/disable setting of parameter items
Appendix 2 Simulation Function
Appendix 2.5 Restrictions and considerations
17
MONITORING
This section explains the restrictions and considerations on debugging programs using the simulation function.
QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU
No.
Item
1
Time processing
2
Supported instructions
3
Process control instructions
Debugging using the simulation function
Time processing of the timer instruction/function is performed by assuming that the scan time is 100ms. If the constant scan time is set in parameter, the set constant scan time is used as the scan time.
Some instructions including the data refresh instruction are not supported by the simulation function. Unsupported instructions are processed as NOP. (Supported instructions Appendix 2.3)
NSTRCT. CODE ERR (error code 4004) occurs when a device which cannot be used for instruction argument is specified. For programmable controller CPU, this error occurs at the timing of CPU power ON/reset, switching from STOP to RUN, or instruction execution. For the simulation function, however, this error occurs only at the timing of instruction execution. Therefore, the error will not occur for the simulation function if the instruction with an inapplicable device is not executed, however, when that program is written to the programmable controller CPU, an error occurs even if the instruction is not executed.
The time set for constant scan is used for updating the timer current value. If the constant scan is not set, the simulation function performs the same operation as the constant scan time is set to 100ms.
Constant scan
Scan 1
Scan 2
Scan 3
Scan 4
Scan 5
SM400
T0 K10
100ms 300ms
STc0a=n11 STc0a=n21 STc0a=n31 STc0a=n41 STc0a=n51 STc0a=n31 STc0a=n61 STc0a=n91 TS0c=an112 TS0c=an115
4
Processing time
5
Monitoring
� In the virtual programmable controller, the number of counts per scan of the timer instruction changes depending on the constant scan setting. When the constant scan time is set to 100ms, the count of the 100ms timer is +1 per scan. The count of the same timer is +3 per scan when the constant scan time is set to 300ms.
� A virtual programmable controller waits for the end of a constant scan after executing one scan. However, if the value of a constant scan is small (10 ms, for example), the virtual programmable controller may not wait and the next scan will be executed. A timer instruction starts counting up after executing one scan; however, if the value of the constant scan is small described as above, the timer instruction will count up faster than the actual time. Additionally, when another software (GT Designer3, for example) keep accessing a virtual programmable controller, a scan time will be longer. Consequently, the scan time and constant scan time value get closer, and the symptom above tends to occur.
� If [Local device not executed] is selected from "Local device monitoring target selection field" on the monitoring status bar during the monitoring of local devices, the simulation function monitors the devices of the program executed at the end of each scan. However, the function may monitor the devices of the low-speed execution type or fixed scan execution type programs processed at the end of each scan if these types of program are included in the programs for simulation. For details, refer to 6 and 7 in this table.
� If a program for local device monitoring is specified in the GX Works2 local device monitoring, the simulation function monitors the local devices in the specified program regardless of the existence of a scan execution type program.
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
18 19 20 21 22 A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
Appendix 2.5 Restrictions and considerations
App - 53
APPENDIX
No.
Item
6
Operation of low-speed execution type programs
Debugging using the simulation function
In the virtual programmable controller, one low-speed execution type program is always executed after the execution of scan execution type programs. This execution is not affected by the constant scan time and the program execution time set for low-speed execution type programs. The following shows the operating procedure of programs. (The procedure does not change in step operation.)
Initial execution type
Scan execution type 1 Scan execution type 2
(Assume that one scan takes 100ms, then five scans takes 500ms. Changing reference time is possible by changing the constant scan setting value. (Refer to No. 3.))
Scan execution type N Low-speed execution type i
All scan execution type programs are executed in each scan, whereas one low-speed execution type program is executed. Therefore, when N number of low-speed execution type programs are set, the execution of all programs completes in N scans.
Scan 1
Scan 2
Scan 3
Scan 4
Scan execution type program
Low-speed execution type program A
Low-speed execution type program B � Since a low-speed execution type program is always executed within one scan in the virtual programmable controller, the monitor value of SM510 remains OFF
App - 54
Appendix 2.5 Restrictions and considerations
Appendix 2 Simulation Function
No.
Item
17
Debugging using the simulation function
� The simulation function measures the time at the end of scan execution type and low-speed execution type programs and judges whether to execute fixed scan execution type programs. The following shows the processing timing of the simulation function when the scan time is set to 100ms and the timing of fixed scan execution type programs is set to 200ms.
MONITORING
100ms
200ms
300ms
400ms
elapsed
elapsed
elapsed
elapsed
Reference from
END
from
END
from
END
from
END
reference processing reference processing reference processing reference processing
time
time
time
time
18
Scan execution type program
7
Operation of fixed scan execution type programs
Low-speed execution type program
Fixed scan execution type program A (200ms cycle)
Fixed scan execution type program B (200ms cycle)
� When a constant scan is set, a fixed scan execution type program is executed when the total number of times of constant scans is equivalent to the set fixed scan interval. Note that, however, a virtual programmable controller performs wait processing every time the value of a constant scan is accumulated. (Example) Constant scan value: 100 ms, fixed scan interval: 1000 ms Number of times a virtual programmable controller performed wait processing: 1000/100 = 10 times When a small value (10 ms, for example) is set as a constant scan time, the difference of time between the actual fixed scan interval and that of a virtual programmable controller will be greater because the difference of time among each wait processing is accumulated with the increase of the number of times of wait processing.
At the start of simulation, PLC parameters and programs registered in the program setting of PLC
8
Automatic write at the start of parameter are written to the virtual programmable controller.
simulation
The file register specified in "Use the following file" on the <<PLC File>> tab of PLC parameter is
automatically created.
9
Interrupt programs
Not supported by the simulation function. Even created, an interrupt program is not processed.
10 Floating point numbers
Since a rounding error always occurs in the operation result of an instruction using floating point numbers, the result does not match with the result of the operation executed on the programmable controller CPU.
The memory card (SRAM) performs in the following capacity according to the programmable controller type.
11
Using memory card or extended SRAM cassette
Basic model QCPU, High Performance model QCPU: 4M
QnUD(H)CPU, QnUDE(H)CPU
: 8M
For details of capacity, refer to No. 20 in this table.
Memory card (ROM) and memory card (SD) are not supported.
For High-speed Universal model QCPU, the simulation function performs the same operation as an extended SRAM cassette (8M) is installed.
12 I/O module
Not supported by the simulation function.
13 Network
Not supported by the simulation function.
The virtual programmable controller has a buffer memory area of 64k points for 64 modules to be used
14
Intelligent function module (Intelligent parameters)
for accessing intelligent function modules. This buffer memory can be used for saving and reading data. To use intelligent function modules in the simulation function, the I/O assignment must be set on the
<<I/O Assignment>> tab of PLC parameter.
15
Double-precision operation for the floating-point arithmetic processing
The double-precision operation of the simulation function performs the internal operation with double precision and converts the final result to the single precision. The processing speed is not changed even if the double-precision operation is set not to be performed on the <<PLC System>> tab of PLC parameter.
16 Clock data
Clock data can be read out to SD210-SD213 by the clock data read request (SM213). However, the set clock function is not supported.
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
APPENDIX
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
19 20 21 22 A I
INDEX
Appendix 2.5 Restrictions and considerations
App - 55
APPENDIX
No.
Item
17 Intelligent function module
18 Watchdog timer
19 Operating status monitor
Debugging using the simulation function
Buffer memory for the intelligent function module is stored with the setting on the <<I/O Assignment>> tab of PLC parameter. Buffer memory (U\G) cannot be accessed when the I/O assignment setting is not set. Select 'Intelligent' as the module type and specify the point to create buffer memory in compliance with the specified points. If the module type is not specified, it becomes an empty slot. If the module type is specified but the point is not specified, the point of the specified module becomes equivalent to one specified for "Point Occupied by Empty Slot" on the <<PLC System>> tab of PLC parameter.
When the program loops endlessly (when 30,000,000 or more instructions are executed during one scan), a WDT error may occur.
SD393, SD395, and SD396 are only supported.
: Supported �: Not supported
Name/Description
Device
No. 1 CPU reset flag No. 2 CPU reset flag No. 3 CPU reset flag No. 4 CPU reset flag No. 1 CPU error flag No. 2 CPU error flag No. 3 CPU error flag No. 4 CPU error flag
Multiple CPU system information
Number of multiple CPUs
CPU mounting information
Multiple CPU number
No. 1 CPU operation status
No. 2 CPU operation status
No. 3 CPU operation status
No. 4 CPU operation status
SM240 SM241 SM242 SM243 SM244 SM245 SM246 SM247 SD393 SD394 SD395 SD396
SD397
SD398
SD399
Supported/ Not
supported � � � � � � � �
�
�
�
�
Description
Fixed to 'OFF' Fixed to 'OFF' Fixed to 'OFF' Fixed to 'OFF' Fixed to 'OFF' Fixed to 'OFF' Fixed to 'OFF' Fixed to 'OFF'
Fixed to '0' Fixed to '1'
Fixed to '0'
Fixed to '0'
Fixed to '0'
App - 56
Appendix 2.5 Restrictions and considerations
Appendix 2 Simulation Function
No.
Item
20 Available drive volume
Debugging using the simulation function
Difference of the drive volume may originate, for the file format is different from the actual programmable controller CPU. The following lists the available volume of each drive and the file size in the virtual programmable controller CPU.
� Available volume for users: Available space for users (free space after formatting)
� File size: Minimum size of one file
For details, refer to the User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals) of the CPU module to be used. Memory card (ROM) or memory card (SD) on the drive 2 cannot be used.
�
Basic model QCPU/ High Performance
model QCPU
QnUD(H)CPU, QnUDE(H)CPU
(Other than Q50UDEHCPU and
Q100UDEHCPU)
QnUD(H)CPU, QnUDE(H)CPU
High-speed Universal model
QCPU
LCPU
Available volume for
users
File size
Available volume for
users
File size
Available volume for
users
File size
Available volume for
users
File size
Available volume for
users
File size
Program memory*1
Drive 0
Memory card (RAM)
Drive 1
Standard RAM
Drive 3
Standard ROM*2
Drive 4
1008k bytes 4078k bytes 256k bytes 1008k bytes
2048 bytes 1024 bytes 1024 bytes 2048 bytes
1040k bytes 8172k bytes 1280k bytes 4096k bytes
512 bytes 4096 bytes 512 bytes 2048 bytes
4000k bytes 8172k bytes 1792k bytes 16384k bytes
512 bytes 4096 bytes 512 bytes 2048 bytes
1040k bytes
�
9472k bytes 4102k bytes
512 bytes
�
512 bytes 2048 bytes
1040k bytes
�
768k bytes 2048k bytes
512 bytes
�
512 bytes 2048 bytes
21
Considerations for Online program change
At Online program change, fall instructions are executed regardless of options. Secured steps for Online program change are 500 steps by default at the start up of the simulation function. Secured steps can be changed at "Allocate Memory for 'Online Change' (Write to PLC only)".
When changing SFC programs with Online program change, the SFC programs perform an initial start regardless of the setting of the start-up mode of SFC program.
22 Program monitoring
In ladder programs, line monitor is available even though the program written to the programmable controller CPU and one being edited are different.
When 'Initial start' is selected for "SFC program start mode" and a set of operations 'STOPWrite to 23 Initial start for SFC programs PLCRUN' is performed, not 'Initial start' but 'Resume start' is adopted if programs written to the
programmable controller CPU have no change.
In the following cases, file batch online change cannot be performed.
24
Considerations for file batch online change
� Program memory does not have free space larger than the program to be written.
� The maximum number of files has already been stored in program memory.
25
Error codes for online operation errors
For QCPU (Q mode), error codes for online operation errors are equal to those of QnUDE(H)CPU.
26 Operation error
For High-speed Universal model QCPU, conditions of operation error occurrence are equal to those of QnUDE(H)CPU.
27
When "-0" is specified as the floating-point type real number
No error occurs. (Processed as '0' in operation.)
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
APPENDIX
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
MONITORING
17 18 19 20 21 22 A I
INDEX
Appendix 2.5 Restrictions and considerations
App - 57
APPENDIX
No.
28
29 30 31 32 33
Item
Debugging using the simulation function
Operation when a negative number is set to 'n' (number of devices/number of transfers) of an instruction
When a negative number is set to 'n' (number of devices/number of transfers) of the following instructions, the instruction is not processed. Since the program may cause an error when it is executed on a programmable controller CPU, review the program if a negative number is set to 'n'. � FMOV(P) � WTOB(P) � BTOW(P) � MAX(P) � MIN(P) � SORT � FIFW(P) � FIFR(P) � FPOP(P) � FDEL(P) � FINS(P)
Errors detected in the CALL(P)/RET/FOR/NEXT instruction
For High-speed Universal model QCPU, the content of error detected in the CALL(P)/RET/FOR/NEXT instruction is equal to those of QnUD(H)CPU.
Device range check
For the device range check for the instructions to which the variable-length devices are set, R device is checked within the range of ZR device. For Basic model QCPU and High Performance model QCPU, devices are not read/written if devices within and out of the range of R/ZR device are accessed in the device range check for the instructions to which the fixed-length devices are set.
Monitoring local devices
If [Local device not executed] is selected from "Local device monitoring target selection field" on the monitoring status bar during the monitoring of local devices, the virtual programmable controller CPU monitors the devices of the program executed at the end of each scan. However, it may monitor the devices of the low-speed execution type or fixed scan execution type programs processed at the end of each scan if these types of program are included in the programs for simulation. If a program for local device monitoring is specified in the local device monitor, the virtual programmable controller CPU monitors the local devices in the specified program regardless of the existence of a scan execution type program.
Assigning base units
Slots are assigned with a maximum number of slots when "Auto" is selected for "Base Mode" on the <<I/O Assignment>> tab of PLC parameter. To avoid slots to be assigned with a maximum number of slots, select "Details" and set the number of slots.
VAL(P)/DVAL(P)/EVAL(P) instruction
For a high performance model QCPU, when the last character string that is specified for an argument of an instruction is '2EH' ("."), for example '0000.', the operation error (4100) occurs on a programmable controller CPU. But on the simulation function, no error occurs and the instruction is executed.
34 ST, inline ST
"$" cannot be used as an escape sequence in character string type data. When "$" is used, the result does not match with the result of the operation executed on the
programmable controller CPU.
*1 : The file size unit of program memory of Universal model QCPU/LCPU is 4 bytes (equal to Q26UDH). *2 : The value shown at 'Standard ROM' of Basic model QCPU/High Performance QCPU is one after the writing to the ROM.
App - 58
Appendix 2.5 Restrictions and considerations
Appendix 2 Simulation Function
FXCPU
No. 1 2
Item
Selection of programmable controller CPU and operation of FX series CPU
Program check at STOP to RUN
Debugging using the simulation function
In the simulation function of FXCPU, the CPU-specific functions and device range operate according to the specifications of the selected FXCPU. Application instructions can operate in the simulation function even they are not supported by the selected FXCPU. Since a program may contain unsupported instructions after changing its programmable controller type from a top model to a low model, the program may cause a program error when it is written to the FXCPU even it can be performed in the simulation function. For example, even the pulse execution type application instructions are not supported by FX0, FX0S, and FX0N they can be performed in the simulation function. However, a program error may occur due to the unsupported instructions when the program is written to the FXCPU.
The program check function at STOP to RUN detects a program error only when an MC/MCR exists in the STL instruction or the RET instruction is not input in response to the STL instruction. Note that other problems cannot be detected by the program check function at STOP to RUN, and check them in advance using the program check function of GX Works2.
Some parameter setting items of GX Works2 become disabled in the simulation function even they are set.
3
Enable/disable setting of parameter items
PLC Parameter
Network Parameter
Parameter Memory Capacity Device PLC Name PLC System (1) PLC System (2)
Special Function Block Positioning
Ethernet Port Setting
CC-Link
Setting item All items are enabled All items are enabled All items are disabled All items are disabled All items are disabled All items are disabled All items are disabled All items are disabled
All items are disabled
4
Program memory capacity
The simulation function is performed with the maximum step capacity of each model.
5
Watchdog timer
The watchdog timer (D8000) operates in 200ms with all CPUs. The setting value can be changed but the change is not applied to its operation.
6
Buffer memory monitor
In the simulation function, the buffer memory of a special extension device operates as a general register which can be read/written by the FROM/TO instruction. It does not have functions specific to the special extension device.
The data register (D8030/D8031), which stores the value of the variable analog potentiometer built in
7
Variable analog potentiometer FX0, FX0S, FX0N, FX1S, FX1N, FX3S, and FX3G, operates as a general data register. Write a value
between 0 and 255 and test the operation using GX Works2.
8
High-speed counter
The high-speed counter is not supported by the simulation function.
The SORT/SORT2 instruction is executed over multiple scans on FXCPU. In the simulation function,
9
SORT/SORT2 instruction
however, its execution is always completed in one scan and M8029 (Instruction execution complete)
turns ON immediately.
10 Latched type device
A latched type device keeps holding its value when the simulation function is in STOP status. It clears its value when the simulation function is ended.
11 Non-latch type device
A non-latched type device clears its value when the simulation function is in STOP status or ended.
12 Clear PLC Memory
Execute the Clear PLC Memory function to clear and initialize user data written with the simulation function. Execute it too when the operation of the simulation function is not stable.
13 Character string constant
Up to 16 characters can be processed as a character string constant in a program. The 17th and later characters are ignored when the length of characters is 17 or more. Example: $+ "12345678901234567" "abcdefghijklmnopq" D0 When the operation shown above is processed, the following data are stored in the devices starting from D0. D0 to D15 = "1234567890123456abcdefghijklmnop" (The 17th and later characters of each character string constant ("7" and "q") are ignored.)
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
APPENDIX
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
MONITORING
17 18 19 20 21 22 A I
INDEX
Appendix 2.5 Restrictions and considerations
App - 59
APPENDIX
No.
Item
14
Write to PLC of device memory
15 Special Block 16 ST, inline ST
Debugging using the simulation function
The Write to PLC function does not support the device memory listed below. � Input (X) � Output (Y) � Special relay (M8000 and later) � Special register (D8000 and later)
Only the buffer memory of the special block is supported by the simulation function.
"$" cannot be used as an escape sequence in character string type data. When "$" is used, an error may occur in the simulation function.
App - 60
Appendix 2.5 Restrictions and considerations
Appendix 3 ASCII Code Table
Appendix 3 ASCII Code Table
17
MONITORING
�
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 LSD 8 9 A B C D E F
0000 0001 0010 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111 1000 1001 1010 1011 1100 1101 1110 1111
0 000 NUL SOH STX ETX EOT ENQ ACK BEL BS HT LF VT FF CR SO SI
1 001 DLE DC1 DC2 DC3 DC4 NAK SYN ETB CAN EM SUB ESC FS GS RS US
2 010 (SP)
! " # $ % & ' ( ) * + , . /
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
MSD
3
4
5
6
7
011
100
101
110
111
0
@
P
`
p
1
A
Q
a
q
2
B
R
b
r
3
C
S
c
s
4
D
T
d
t
5
E
U
e
u
6
F
V
f
v
7
G
W
g
w
8
H
X
h
x
9
I
Y
i
y
:
J
Z
j
z
;
K
[
k
{
<
L
l
|
=
M
]
m
}
>
N
^
n
~
?
O
_
o
DEL
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
18 19 20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
App - 61
APPENDIX
Appendix 4 Considerations of GX Works2 and Differences with GX Developer
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
This section describes the considerations when using GX Works2 and the differences between GX Works2 and GX Developer.
Appendix 4.1 Before using GX Works2
Compared with GX Developer, GX Works2 has some differences in supported CPU modules, features, and operability. Please review the following considerations prior to use. For (Intelligent) indicated in the Reference column, refer to the following manual. GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Intelligent Function Module)
Item to be confirmed Supported CPU modules Unsupported features Supported project types
Using project functions Programming languages supported by each project type
Using Ladder Diagram Using Sequential Function Chart Using labels Using function blocks Using device comments Using device memory Using device initial values Using search/replace function Using online function Using monitoring/debugging function Using printing function Copying saved project data Using change programmable controller type function Using program check function Using IC memory card function Compatibility with GX Developer Compatibility with GX IEC Developer Compatibility with GX Configurator-QP Key operation Program titles
Reference Appendix 4.2 Appendix 4.3
Appendix 4.4
Appendix 4.5
Appendix 4.6 Appendix 4.7 Appendix 4.8 Appendix 4.9 Appendix 4.10 Appendix 4.11 Appendix 4.12 Appendix 4.13 Appendix 4.14 Appendix 4.15 Appendix 4.16 Appendix 4.17 Appendix 4.18 (Intelligent) Appendix 4.19 Appendix 4.20
App - 62
Appendix 4.1 Before using GX Works2
Appendix 4 Considerations of GX Works2 and Differences with GX Developer
Appendix 4.2 Supported CPU modules
17
MONITORING
The following CPU modules are supported by GX Works2.
Programmable controller series
QCPU (Q mode)
LCPU FXCPU
Programmable controller type
Basic model QCPU (Q00J, Q00, Q01)
High Performance model QCPU (Q02, Q02H, Q06H, Q12H, Q25H)
Universal model QCPU (Q00UJ, Q00U, Q01U, Q02U, Q03UD, Q03UDE, Q03UDV, Q04UDH, Q04UDEH, Q04UDV, Q06UDH, Q06UDEH, Q06UDV, Q10UDH, Q10UDEH, Q13UDH, Q13UDEH, Q13UDV, Q20UDH, Q20UDEH, Q26UDH, Q26UDEH, Q26UDV, Q50UDEH, Q100UDEH)
Remote I/O (QJ72LP25, QJ72BR15)
Process CPU (Q02PH, Q06PH, Q12PH, Q25PH)
Redundant CPU (Q12PRH, Q25PRH)
L02S, L02S-P, L02, L02-P, L06, L06-P, L26, L26-P, L26-BT, L26-PBT, LJ72GF15-T2, LJ72MS15
FX0S, FX0, FX0N, FX1, FX1S, FX1N, FX1NC, FXU, FX2C, FX2N, FX2NC, FX3S, FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, FX3UC
The following CPU modules are supported by starting GX Developer from GX Works2. For details of using the following CPU modules, refer to Appendix 14.
Programmable controller series QCPU (A mode) QSCPU QnACPU ACPU Motion controller (SCPU) CNC (M6, M7)
Programmable controller type All programmable controller types All programmable controller types All programmable controller types All programmable controller types All programmable controller types All programmable controller types
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
18 19 20 21 22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
Appendix 4.2 Supported CPU modules
App - 63
APPENDIX
Appendix 4.3 Unsupported features
The following table shows the features that are not supported by GX Works2. Use GX Developer, GX Simulator, or GX Configurator for the following features.
Debugging function for ladder program
Intelligent function module programming function Device initial value Password Interaction with GX Explorer MEDOC print format import
Online
Sampling trace
Unsupported feature Timing chart monitoring function Serial communication function Device manager function
Protocol FB support
Device memory registration Password registration for data in project Boot by GX Explorer Import in MEDOC print format
Intelligent module diagnostics from system monitor
Sampling trace conditionally on step number
Alternate S/W GX Simulator
GX Configurator-SC
GX Developer
GX Developer GX Configurator GX Developer
* In addition to the features mentioned above, the following features are not supported by FXCPU. � Configuration function � Sampling trace function
App - 64
Appendix 4.3 Unsupported features
Appendix 4 Considerations of GX Works2 and Differences with GX Developer
Appendix 4.4 Supported project types
17
MONITORING
The following table shows the supported project types in GX Works2.
Project type
Description
Simple project
�
This is the equivalent of the "Do not use label" project of GX Developer.
Without labels
1) When a project created in the "Do not use label" of GX Developer is read with GX Works2, the project becomes the Simple project (without labels).
2) When a project created in the Simple project (without labels) of GX Works2 is read with GX Developer, the project becomes the "Do not use label" project.
This is the equivalent of the "Use label" project of GX Developer.*2
With labels*1
1) When a project created in the "Use label" of GX Developer is read with GX Works2, the project becomes the Simple project (with labels).
2) When a project created in the Simple project (with labels) of GX Works2 is read with GX Developer, the project becomes the "Use label" project.
Structured project*3
In GX Works2, 'structured programming' is available. The structured programming proceeds while creating POUs and combining them (registering tasks in the program file). The projects created in 'Structured project' of GX Works2 cannot be read with GX Developer.
*1 : Not supported by FX0, FX0S, FX0N, FXU, and FX2C. *2 : "Use label" projects of GX Developer are not supported by FXCPU. *3 : Not supported by FX1.
Using project functions
Before using the project functions in GX Works2, please review the following considerations.
Function
Description (differences between GX Developer and GX Works2)
GX Developer
GX Works2
Protect projects
By installing as 'monitoring only', projects were protected on each personal computer.
By setting projects as 'read-only' with the 'Security' function, projectby-project protection is now available.
The following project type changes are now available.
Project types cannot be Change project types changed from "Do not use
label" to "Use label".
1) Project type change from 'Simple project (without labels)' to 'Simple project (with labels)'
2) Project type change from 'Simple project (with labels)' to 'Structured project*1
Read GX Developer format projects
Selecting [Project] [Intelligent Function Module] [Read GX
Configurator-QP Data] enables GX Configurator-QP format data to
�
be read out. *GX Developer starts and a project is opened when a project of the
following CPU types is specified: ACPU, QnACPU, QCPU (A mode),
Motion Controller (SCPU), CNC (M6/M7), and Safety CPU.
Read GX Configurator-QP format projects*2
Selecting [Project] [Intelligent Function Module] [Read GX
�
Configurator-QP Data] enables GX Configurator-QP format data to
be read out.
Copy data in a project It was enabled on the project to different projects copy dialog.
Copy and paste is now available on the Navigation window.
*1 : Direct project type change from 'Simple project (without labels)' to 'Structured project' is not available. *2 : Not supported by FXCPU.
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
18 19 20 21 22 A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
Appendix 4.4 Supported project types
App - 65
APPENDIX
Appendix 4.5 Programming languages supported by each project type
The following table shows the programming languages that are supported by each project type of GX Works2.
Project type Simple project
Without labels
With labels
Supported programming language � Ladder Diagram, Sequential Function Chart (MELSAP3, MELSAP-L)*1, Sequential Function Chart (FXCPU)*2 Ladder Diagram, Sequential Function Chart (MELSAP3, MELSAP-L)*1, Structured Text*1
Supported program element Label, structure, function block
Structured project
Ladder Diagram*1, Sequential Function Chart (MELSAP3, MELSAP-L)*1, Structured Ladder/FBD, Structured Text
Supported program element Label, structure, function block, function, library
*1 : Not supported by FXCPU. *2 : Not supported by QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU.
The following programming languages are not supported by GX Works2. Use GX Developer for the following programming languages.
Unsupported programming language
List
Description
1) If GX Works2 reads out a program created with lists in GX Developer, it can be displayed or edited as a ladder program.
2) If GX Developer reads out a program created with ladder programs in GX Works2, it can be displayed or edited in list program.
Alternate S/W GX Developer
App - 66
Appendix 4.5 Programming languages supported by each project type
Appendix 4 Considerations of GX Works2 and Differences with GX Developer
Using Ladder Diagram
Before using Ladder Diagram in GX Works2, please review the following considerations.
Function
Description (differences between GX Developer and GX Works2)
GX Developer
GX Works2
Program giving devices an alias
It was enabled by the 'Alias' function.
Please use 'Label'.
Segment a part of program into POUs (macros)
It was enabled by the 'Macro definition/ import' function.
Please use 'Function Block'.
Pressing the key on the ladder editor allows the simple find.
Find/Replace instructions/ devices/labels
Find was enabled by directly typing an instruction/device/label in 'Read mode'.
The mode can be switched to "Read Mode" by setting the option. Select "Use the Switching Ladder Edit Mode (Read, Write, Monitor, Monitor (Write))" under "Program Editor" "Ladder" "Ladder Diagram" in the option setting.
Check use status of device/label
It was enabled by the 'Cross Reference List' function and 'List of Used Devices' function.
Please select [Find/Replace] [Cross Reference], or [Find/Replace] [Device List].
Select the range specified It was enabled by left-clicking the
with the drag-and-drop mouse while holding down the
operation
key.
Selecting the frame of the target range enables the dragand-drop operation.
Select the range starting from the cursor specified by mouse under read status
It was enabled using the mouse while holding down the key.
The range can be selected using only the mouse without pressing the key.
Verify
The verify result window clearly shows the following:
�
'unmatched area of the programs', 'only verify source contains the program' and 'only verify destination contains
the program'.
Devices/labels in the ladder block at the cursor position
are automatically registered to the Watch window.
Register to Watch window
�
To use this function, set "Setting for Automatic
Registration to Watch Window" under "Monitor"
"Ladder" in the option setting.
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
MONITORING
17 18 19 20 21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
Appendix 4.5 Programming languages supported by each project type
App - 67
APPENDIX
Using Sequential Function Chart
Before using Sequential Function Chart (MELSAP3, MELSAP-L) or Sequential Function Chart (FXCPU) in GX Works2, please review the following considerations.
Function
Description (differences between GX Developer and GX Works2)
GX Developer
GX Works2
Change block number
It was enabled by the 'copy and paste' function in block list.
Each block data is displayed on the Navigation window, and the block number can be changed in the property of each block data. * Selecting [View] [Open SFC Blocklist] can display the block list equivalent to that of GX Developer.
Open a start source block by block start
No corresponding function.
Selecting [View] [Back to Start SFC Block] can open it.
Online change using SFC program
No corresponding function.
In SFC program, online change is possible in SFC block unit. Please execute from the menu of "Online Change".
Select the range specified with the drag-and-drop operation
"+left click" allows the drag and drop operation.
Selecting the frame of the target range enables the dragand-drop operation.
Select the range starting from the cursor specified by mouse under read status
Select a range by using the mouse while pressing the key.
Able to select a range without pressing the key.
Display action/transition condition programs
Multiple Zooms (operation output/transition condition
data) can be simultaneously displayed.
�
* Changing the "Setting of Zoom Display" option can
switch the display on a window in the same way as GX
Developer.
Copy and paste Ladder programs in Zoom editor
Unable to paste.
Able to paste. In some cases, ladder block could not be displayed correctly.
Monitor SFC diagram editor and Zoom editor
Monitor of two areas was enabled by selecting [Online] [Monitor] [Start Monitoring] () in either of SFC diagram editor area or action output/ transition condition program editor area.
Please select [Online] [Monitor] [Start Monitoring] () in each of SFC diagram editor and Zoom editor.
App - 68
Appendix 4.5 Programming languages supported by each project type
Appendix 4 Considerations of GX Works2 and Differences with GX Developer
Using labels
Before using labels in GX Works2, please review the following considerations.
Function
Description (differences between GX Developer and GX Works2)
GX Developer
GX Works2
Check devices automatically assigned labels
It was enabled by the 'Show assigned Please check on the ladder editor by selecting [View]
device' function of label editor.
[Device Display].
Automatically assigned devices for input variables, output variables, and input/ output variables of function blocks
Devices are automatically assigned in the order that they are registered on the FB variable (FB label) setting window.
Labels registered on the Function/FB Label Setting screen are sorted in the order of 'VAR_INPUT', 'VAR_IN_OUT', 'VAR_OUTPUT', 'VAR', and devices are automatically assigned.
Import/Export device comments to labels
It was enabled by the 'device comment import' function and 'device comment export' function.
Please use the copy and paste on the label editor and device comment editor.
Use pointer type labels Local pointers were assigned.
Common pointers are now assigned. For projects with labels, points are set by default in "Common Pointer" in the "PLC Parameter" "PLC System" setting. (Points set by default differ vary according to the programmable controller type.)
Unusable reserved words for label name
The definition of reserved words are different between GX Developer and GX Works2.
Using function blocks
Before using function blocks in GX Works2, please review the following considerations.
Function Use function blocks created with Ladder Diagram
Use function blocks created with Structured Ladder/FBD
Use function blocks created with ST
Set function block call option
Description
Function blocks created with ladder can be used for ladder program, Structured Ladder/FBD program, ST program, and SFC program operation outputs. For FXCPU, they can be used for ladder programs only.
* When using function blocks created with Ladder Diagram for ladder, Structured Ladder/FBD or ST programs, select [Tool] [Options], and select "Enable calling function block and using inline ST" under "Compile" "Basic Setting".
Function blocks created with Structured Ladder/FBD can be used for ladder programs, Structured Ladder/FBD programs and ST programs.
* When using function blocks created with Structured Ladder/FBD for ladder programs, select [Tool] [Options], and select "Enable calling function block and using inline ST" under "Compile" "Basic Setting".
Function blocks created with ST can be used for ladder programs, Structured Ladder/FBD programs, and ST programs. For FXCPU, they can be used for Structured Ladder/FBD programs and ST programs.
* When using function blocks created with Structured Text for ladder programs, select [Tool] [Options], and select "Enable calling function block and using inline ST" under "Compile" "Basic Setting".
When the VAR_IN_OUT input variable and output variable have different label/device, the input variable value is always equal to the output variable value. This function is not supported by FXCPU.
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
APPENDIX
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
MONITORING
17 18 19 20 21 22 A I
INDEX
Appendix 4.5 Programming languages supported by each project type
App - 69
APPENDIX
Appendix 4.6 Using device comments
Before using device comments in GX Works2, please review the following considerations.
Function Sample comment
Description (differences between GX Developer and GX Works2)
GX Developer
GX Works2
Sample comments of special relay/ special register were provided in project format.
Comments of special relay/special register and intelligent function module can be imported by the 'Import from Sample Comment' function on the device comment editor.
Appendix 4.7 Using device memory
Before using the device memory in GX Works2, please review the following considerations.
Function
Device memory display
Copy and past device memory data to Excel
Description Multiple device ranges can be displayed on a window.
* By selecting "All Range" when entering a device, all the device range can be displayed on one window in the same way as that of GX Developer. To copy and paste device memory data to Excel, please select [Tool] [Read from Excel File] / [Write to Excel File].
Appendix 4.8 Using device initial values
Before using device initial values in GX Works2, please review the following considerations.
Function
Description (differences between GX Developer and GX Works2)
GX Developer
GX Works2
Maximum amount of device initial value data to Only 1 data was able to be created. be created
Up to 800 data can be created.
Restriction of device number
It was able to create within the range of maximum points for each programmable controller of devices.
It now can be created within the range of PLC parameter device setting.
PLC write/read IC memory card write/ read
Only 1 data was able to be read and written.
Selected multiple data can be read and written.
App - 70
Appendix 4.6 Using device comments
Appendix 4 Considerations of GX Works2 and Differences with GX Developer
Appendix 4.9 Using search/replace function
17
MONITORING
Before using the search/replace function in GX Works2, please review the following considerations.
Function All Find Specified Range Replacing
Find String
Replace Device Device Batch Replace
Device Batch Replace
Find/Replace
Description (differences between GX Developer and GX Works2)
GX Developer
GX Works2
The batch search function was not available.
The batch search function is enabled by "All Find".
The replace function is enabled within The replace function is enabled within the selected range a range of the specified step numbers. in a ladder program.
The following were the search targets: 1. Statements 2. Notes
The search targets are added as follows: 1. Statements 2. Notes 3. Device/Label names 4. Device/Label comments 5. Instruction names 6. Data types
The following devices could not be specified for "Find Device" or "Replace Device": devices with digit, index setting, or indirect specification.
The following devices can be specified for "Find Device" or "Replace Device": devices with digit, index setting, or indirect specification. Note that, however, one of the specification needs to be a label.
The device batch replace function is enabled by specifying a device for "Find Device" and a label for "Replace Device", and specifying two or more points for the number of points to be replaced.
1 is the only value that can be set for the number of points to be replaced when a label is specified for "Replace Device".
In ladder editor, find/replace function is executed in line order (from left to right, top to bottom) regardless of the step number.
In ladder editor, find/replace function is executed in step number order.
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
18 19 20 21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
Appendix 4.9 Using search/replace function
App - 71
APPENDIX
Appendix 4.10 Using online function
Before using the online function in GX Works2, please review the following considerations.
Function
Description (differences between GX Developer and GX Works2)
GX Developer
GX Works2
Connection destination setting
A project was able to contain only 1 'transfer setup' information.
A project can contain multiple pieces of 'connection destination' information. To change 'connection destination' information, select 'Connection Destination' on the Navigation window.
Data write/read for intelligent function module
Data write/read was not able to be executed for CPU modules and intelligent function modules at once.
Selecting [Online] [Write to PLC], allows simultaneous data write for CPU modules and intelligent function modules. Selecting [Online] [Read from PLC], allows simultaneous data read for CPU modules and intelligent function modules.
Flash ROM data write of CPU module
It was enabled by the 'PLC write (Flash ROM)' function.
The 'PLC write (Flash ROM)' function is now integrated in the 'Write to PLC' function. Please select [Online] [Write to PLC].
Remote Operation screen PLC Diagnostics screen System Monitor screen
Selecting [Online] [Remote Operation] and
[Diagnostics] [System Monitor] / [PLC Diagnostics] can
�
display the module image and the programmable controller CPU operation status is now easy to see.
The remote operation, memory operation, and clock setup
can be started from the PLC Diagnostics screen.
System Monitor
As the system monitoring function was not supported by LCPU, [Diagnostics] [System Monitor] could not be selected.
The system monitoring function has been supported by LCPU and the module image can be displayed by selecting [Diagnostics] [System Monitor].
PLC Diagnostics
The continuation error information display function of "PLC Diagnostics" was not supported by LCPU.
Continuation error information can be displayed using the "PLC Diagnostics" function of LCPU.
Register/Cancel Display Module Menu
Registration /cancellation function of display module menus was not supported by LCPU.
Registration/cancellation function of display module menus has been supported by LCPU. Select [Online] [Register/Cancel Display Module Menu].
Symbolic information in GX Developer format does not include SFC programs. Please read on the 'Simple project (without labels)'.
If symbolic information of GX Developer or GX IEC Developer is read out, the project becomes uncompiled.
Read from PLC
The Read from PLC function in Simple projects (with
labels) and Structured projects is supported by FXCPU of
�
the following models only.
For FX3U/FX3UC (Version 3.00 or later)
GX Developer starts and a new project is created with data read from the programmable controller CPU when a programmable controller series of the following CPU types is specified: ACPU, QnACPU, QCPU (A mode), Motion Controller (SCPU), CNC (M6/M7), and Safety CPU.
Write to PLC
Writing symbolic information to programmable controller
�
CPU is supported by FXCPU of the following models only.
For FX3U/FX3UC (Version 3.00 or later)
App - 72
Appendix 4.10 Using online function
Appendix 4 Considerations of GX Works2 and Differences with GX Developer
Appendix 4.11 Using monitoring/debugging function
17
MONITORING
Before using the monitoring/debugging function in GX Works2, please review the following considerations.
Function Entry data monitoring Device batch monitoring Buffer batch monitoring Debugging function*1
Monitor Condition Setting/Monitor Stop Condition Setting
*1 : Not supported by FXCPU.
Description
The 'entry data monitoring' function is now a dockable window as a 'watch' function so that it can be displayed without overlapping with the program editor.
Device/label is now enabled to be entered by dragging and dropping from the program editor and the ON/OFF status of bit device and current values of word device can be modified on the monitoring window.
The 'device batch monitor' and 'buffer memory batch monitoring' functions are now integrated to realize the same operability.
ON/OFF status of bit device and current values of word device can be modified on the monitoring window.
The debugging function can be executed by starting the simulation function.
The break point setting and the break device setting functions become dockable windows, and they can be displayed without overlapping the program editor.
The debugging function such as step execution can be executed from the "Debug Function" toolbar.
The STEP-RUN switch is not displayed on the GX Simulator2 screen. The operating status of the simulation switches to STEP-RUN automatically by executing the debugging from the "Debug Function" toolbar.
The Monitor Stop Condition screen cannot be closed while setting the monitor stop condition.
The 'monitor stop condition' function cannot be performed when the monitoring function is not being executed.
The Monitor Condition Setting screen or the Monitor Stop Condition Setting screen cannot be opened when the following function is being performed or the screen is being opened. � Online program change/program memory transfer � Intelligent function module monitoring � Program list monitoring � Interrupt program list monitoring � SFC all block batch monitoring � The Modify Value screen � The Forced Input Output Registration/Cancellation screen � Sampling trace � The CC-Link Diagnostics screen
The Monitor Condition Setting screen or the Monitor Stop Condition Setting screen cannot be opened in MELSAP-L.
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
18 19 20 21 22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
Appendix 4.12 Using printing function
A
APPENDIX
Before using the printing function in GX Works2, please review the following considerations.
Function
Additional information print such as statement and device comment
Description
For the Print Window function, displayed image is subject to print/print window
preview. To print with additional information such as statement and device comment, please
I
put the desired information on the screen and then select [Project] [Print
Window] / [Print Window Preview].
INDEX
Appendix 4.11 Using monitoring/debugging function
App - 73
APPENDIX
Appendix 4.13 Copying saved project data
Before copying project data saved in GX Works2, please review the following considerations.
Function
Description (differences between GX Developer and GX Works2)
GX Developer
GX Works2
Please copy all the workspace name folders and "workspacelist.xml" created in the same hierarchy as the workspace name folders.
Copy saved project data
Save project data was able to be copied by copying files under the project name folder.
* When only workspace name folders or project name folders are copied, it is enabled to open the project in the copy destination. However, if saving after editing, the workspace name and the project name need to be specified again.
A project data can be copied by saving data as a single project with the "Save as a Single File Format Project" function on the Save As screen.
Appendix 4.14 Using PLC type change function
Before using the PLC type change function in GX Works2, please review the following considerations.
Function
Use PLC type change function
Description (differences between GX Developer and GX Works2)
GX Developer
GX Works2
Intelligent function module data could Intelligent function module data can be transmitted in PLC
not be transmitted.
type conversion of Q series PLC and L series PLC.
Appendix 4.15 Using program check function
Before using the program check function in GX Works2, please review the following considerations.
Function Program check
Description (differences between GX Developer and GX Works2)
GX Developer
GX Works2
Programs which follow the END instruction and do not affect sequence control were checked.
Programs which affect sequence control up to the END instruction are checked. Programs which follow the END instruction and do not affect sequence control are not checked.
The duplicated coil error occurs when the same local label is used at two or more locations.
Since the same local label can be used at two or more locations when the function block is called with the same instance, the duplicated error does not occur.
Appendix 4.16 Using IC memory card function
Before using the IC memory card function in GX Works2, please review the following considerations.
Function Read IC Memory Card Write IC Memory Card
Description (differences between GX Developer and GX Works2)
GX Developer
GX Works2
Symbolic information could not be read. Symbolic information can be read.
Symbolic information could not be written. Symbolic information can be written.
Passwords could not be set for LCPU.
Passwords can be set for LCPU.
App - 74
Appendix 4.13 Copying saved project data
Appendix 4 Considerations of GX Works2 and Differences with GX Developer
Appendix 4.17 Compatibility with GX Developer
17
MONITORING
For the compatibility between GX Developer and GX Works2, please review the following considerations. An error may occur at a compilation when a project which contains ST programs created in GX Developer is opened in GX Works2. For modifying instructions which cause a compilation error, refer to Appendix 19.
Function
Description
Before opening a GX Developer "Use label" project of which a program and function block have the same name, please change the data name in GX Developer.
Function names of Structured Text are different between GX Developer and GX Works2. Please compile and correct errors. Alternatively, select "Use Dedicated Instruction for GX Developer, GX IEC Developer" under [Tool] [Options] "Project" "Common Setting" "Other Project Dedicated Instruction Setting".
For a program which contains a utilized FB, the compiled program is not identical with the program compiled with GX Developer. To conform the compiled program to that compiled with GX Developer, select [Tool] [Options] "Compile" "Basic Setting" and clear "Enable calling function block and using inline ST " in "Function Block Call".
Open other project
For Q00UJ, Q00U, and Q01U projects, a compilation error may occur if the string type is used for the Boolean expression (conditional expression) in the conditional syntax or iteration syntax of the ST program. When an error occurs, create a ladder program with a string comparison function block whose operation result is a Boolean value, and correct the program by using this operation result for the failed Boolean expression (conditional expression) in the conditional syntax or iteration syntax.
The setting of 'steps secured for Online program change' which is set on the [Read from PLC]/[Write to PLC] screen of GX Developer is not set. Set the setting of 'steps secured for Online program change' on the [Read from PLC]/[Write to PLC] screen after performing the Open Other Project function in GX Works2.
Local labels of timer, counter, retentive timer, and pointer cannot be used for function blocks of ladder program to be utilized in an ST program. Change local labels to global labels.
Before opening a project in which constants are set to the structures, delete the constants with GX Developer.
Target projects are:
1) Simple project (without labels)
2) Simple project (with labels)*1 However, SFC programs can only be saved when the blocks are converted or programs are compiled.
To execute, the following requirements must not be satisfied in the global label settings.
1) No device is set.
2) The lengths of label name exceeds 16 characters.
3) Label name contains a device name or reserved word. Export to GX Developer format file 4) An invalid character is used.
5) Data type that is not supported by GX Developer is used.
6) A value that is not constant is used in the constant.
The projects that does not correspond to the following condition can be saved. � The label which is declared with VER_RETAIN is used.
Data registered to the global label is set as "Auto External" for all the local labels.
Projects which include inline structured text cannot be saved in GX Developer format.
Projects which include ladder programs whose function block calls function block cannot be saved in GX Developer format.
*1 : Not supported by FXCPU.
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
APPENDIX
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
18 19 20 21 22 A I
INDEX
Appendix 4.17 Compatibility with GX Developer
App - 75
APPENDIX
Appendix 4.18 Compatibility with GX IEC Developer
For the compatibility between GX IEC Developer and GX Works2, please review the following considerations. Projects for FXCPU created with GX IEC Developer cannot be opened with GX Works2.
Function Open other project User library
Description
Function names of Structured Text are different between GX IEC Developer and GX Works2. Please compile and correct errors.
Before using GX IEC Developer user libraries with passwords enabled, please disable the passwords in GX IEC Developer.
Appendix 4.19 Key operation
This section explains the differences of key operation between GX Developer and GX Works2.
Function
Description
Shortcut key
GX Developer
GX Works2
Read mode Edit
Write mode
Change to the read mode. Change to the write mode.
+
+*1 *1
Find/
Cross reference
Replace Device List
Display the cross reference. Display the device list.
�
+
�
+
Convert Block conversion
Block
(SFC block being edited)
Convert the SFC block being edited.
++
Project data list
Switch display/non-display of project data list.
+
�
View
Switch between project data list and Switch the project data list and each
window
window.
+
�
Switch ladder program/list
Switch the ladder/list screen.
+
�
Start Monitor (all windows)
Execute the program monitoring for all the opened programs.
+
�
Monitor Monitor (write mode)
Change to the write mode during program monitoring.
+
+*1
Stop monitor (all windows)
Stop the program monitoring for all the opened programs.
++
�
Online
Device test
Execute the device forced ON/OFF or the current value modification.
+
�
Skip execution Debug
Run selected sequence programs in skip execution.
+
�
Partial execution
Run sequence programs partially.
+
�
Step run
Run the programmable controller CPU in step run.
+
�
Remote operation
Perform remote operations.
+
�
*1 : In GX Works2, select "Use the Switching Ladder Edit Mode (Read, Write, Monitor, Monitor (Write))" under "Program Editor" "Ladder" "Ladder Diagram" in the option setting to switch the read mode/write mode of the ladder editor and the SFC diagram editor.
App - 76
Appendix 4.18 Compatibility with GX IEC Developer
Appendix 4 Considerations of GX Works2 and Differences with GX Developer
Appendix 4.20 Program titles
17
MONITORING
A title of data created under each execution type of Program Setting has the equivalent function to
program titles of GX Developer. Titles can be set on the Property screen of each data.
The title being set is displayed on the Online Data Operation screen and written to/read from
programmable controller CPU along with the program.
18
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
19
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
Appendix 4.20 Program titles
App - 77
APPENDIX
Appendix 5 Compatibility with Projects Created with Existing Applications
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
This section explains the compatibility of GX Works2 projects with projects created with existing applications.
Appendix 5.1 Application compatibility
Reading projects created with existing application to GX Works2
Reading projects created with GX Developer and IEC Developer
The following table shows the applicability of reading project files created with existing applications to GX Works2. Projects and data created with the CPU types or programming languages not supported by GX Works2 cannot be read. When ST programs created with GX Developer are read to GX Works2, they are opened as Structured projects with Version 1.08J or earlier and opened as Simple projects with Version 1.12N or later. (For the method for reading projects created with existing applications, refer to the following section. Section 4.7)
GX Developer
: Applicable : Applicable with restrictions
Programmable controller type
Basic model QCPU High Performance model QCPU, Q12PH, Q25PH
Application GX Developer Version 8.00A or later
Reading applicability
*1
Q02PH, Q06PH
GX Developer Version 8.68W or later
*1
Q12PRH, Q25PRH
GX Developer Version 8.17T or later
*1
Q03UD, Q04UDH, and Q06UDH
GX Developer Version 8.45X or later
*1
Q02U
GX Developer Version 8.48A or later
*1
Q13UDH and Q26UDH
GX Developer Version 8.62Q or later
*1
Q03UDE, Q04UDEH, Q06UDEH, Q13UDEH, and Q26UDEH
GX Developer Version 8.68W or later
*1
Q00UJ, Q00U, Q01U, Q10UDH, Q10UDEH, Q20UDH, and Q20UDEH
GX Developer Version 8.76E or later
*1
L02, L26-BT
GX Developer Version 8.88S or later
*1
FX3U and FX3UC
GX Developer Version 8.25B or later
FX3G
GX Developer Version 8.72A or later
FX0, FX0S, FX0N, FX1, FXU, FX2C, FX1S, FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N, and FX2NC
GX Developer Version 8.00A or later
*1 : When MELSAP-L format SFC programs are read with Version 1.24A or earlier, they are opened in the MELSAP3 format.
App - 78
Appendix 5.1 Application compatibility
Appendix 5 Compatibility with Projects Created with Existing Applications
GX IEC Developer
Programmable controller type
Basic model QCPU High Performance model QCPU, Q12PH, Q25PH Q03UD, Q04UDH, and Q06UDH Q02U Q13UDH and Q26UDH Q03UDE, Q04UDEH, Q06UDEH, Q13UDEH, and Q26UDEH
Application
GX IEC Developer Version 7.00A or later GX IEC Developer Version 7.03D GX IEC Developer Version 7.03D GX IEC Developer Version 7.03D GX IEC Developer Version 7.03D
17
MONITORING
: Applicable
Reading applicability
18
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
Reading projects created with GX Configurator
GX Configurator flash ROM setting saved files (*.UMD) cannot be read in GX Works2. To use GX Configurator flash ROM setting saved files in GX Works2, write the data to the intelligent
19
function module with GX Configurator, and then read the data using GX Works2. (Reading intelligent function module data Section 15.1.4)
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
Appendix 5.1 Application compatibility
App - 79
APPENDIX
Reading projects created with GX Works2 to existing applications
Reading projects using GX Developer and IEC Developer
Projects created with GX Works2 can be read to GX Developer by saving them using "Export to GX Developer Format File". (Section 4.7) Reading projects to GX IEC Developer or non-Windows applications such as GPPQ is not possible.
When reading projects with GX Developer, application versions that can read projects differ according to the programmable controller type of the project. The following table shows the relation between the programmable controller types of project and the read-applicable versions.
: Applicable : Applicable with restrictions
Programmable controller type
Basic model QCPU High Performance model QCPU, Q12PH, Q25PH
Application GX Developer Version 8.00A or later
Reading applicability
*1
Q02PH, Q06PH
GX Developer Version 8.68W or later
*1
Q12PRH, Q25PRH
GX Developer Version 8.17T or later
*1
Q03UD, Q04UDH, and Q06UDH
GX Developer Version 8.45X or later
*1
Q02U
GX Developer Version 8.48A or later
*1
Q13UDH and Q26UDH
GX Developer Version 8.62Q or later
*1
Q03UDE, Q04UDEH, Q06UDEH, Q13UDEH, and Q26UDEH
GX Developer Version 8.68W or later
*1
Q00UJ, Q00U, Q01U, Q10UDH, Q10UDEH, Q20UDH, and Q20UDEH
GX Developer Version 8.76E or later
*1
L02, L26-BT
GX Developer Version 8.88S or later
*1
FX3U and FX3UC
GX Developer Version 8.25B or later
FX3G
GX Developer Version 8.72A or later
FX0, FX0S, FX0N, FX1, FXU, FX2C, FX1S, FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N, and FX2NC
GX Developer Version 8.00A or later
*1 : For the restrictions in reading, refer to "SWD5C-GPPW Compatibility" of the GX Developer Operating Manual.
Reading projects using GX Configurator
As projects cannot be saved in formats such as the GX Configurator-QP format and the GX Configurator flash ROM setting saved file format (*.UMD) in GX Works2, data set in GX Works2 cannot be read using GX Configurator. To use GX Works2 data in GX Configurator, write the data to the intelligent function module with GX Works2, and then read the data using GX Configurator. (Writing intelligent function module data Section 15.1.4)
App - 80
Appendix 5.1 Application compatibility
Appendix 6 Compatibility of Data Read from Programmable Controller CPU
Appendix 6 Compatibility of Data Read from Programmable Controller CPU 17
MONITORING
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
This section explains the compatibility between the data written on the programmable controller CPU
using GX Developer or GX IEC Developer and the data read using GX Works2.
18
Appendix 6.1 Application compatibility
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
Reading data written on the programmable controller CPU using existing
applications to GX Works2
19
The following table shows the applicability of reading data written on the programmable controller CPU using existing applications to GX Works2. Data created with the CPU types or programming languages not supported by GX Works2 cannot be read.
GX Developer
: Applicable : Applicable with restrictions
Programmable controller type
Basic model QCPU High Performance model QCPU, Q12PH, Q25PH
Application GX Developer Version 8.00A or later
Reading applicability
*1
Q02PH, Q06PH
GX Developer Version 8.68W or later
*1
Q12PRH, Q25PRH
GX Developer Version 8.17T or later
*1
Q03UD, Q04UDH, and Q06UDH
GX Developer Version 8.45X or later
*1
Q02U
GX Developer Version 8.48A or later
*1
Q13UDH and Q26UDH
GX Developer Version 8.62Q or later
*1
Q03UDE, Q04UDEH, Q06UDEH, Q13UDEH, and Q26UDEH
GX Developer Version 8.68W or later
*1
Q00UJ, Q00U, Q01U, Q10UDH, Q10UDEH, Q20UDH, and Q20UDEH
GX Developer Version 8.48A or later
*1
L02, L26-BT
GX Developer Version 8.88S or later
*1
FX3U and FX3UC
GX Developer Version 8.25B or later
FX3G
GX Developer Version 8.72A or later
FX1S, FX1N, FX1NC
GX Developer Version 6.00A or later
FX0, FX0S, FX0N, FX1, FXU, FX2C, FX2N, and FX2NC GX Developer Version 2.00A or later
*1 : When MELSAP-L format SFC programs are read with Version 1.24A or earlier, they are opened in the MELSAP3 format.
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
20 21 22 A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
Appendix 6.1 Application compatibility
App - 81
APPENDIX
GX IEC Developer
Programmable controller type
Basic model QCPU High Performance model QCPU, Q12PH, Q25PH Q03UD, Q04UDH, and Q06UDH Q02U Q13UDH and Q26UDH Q03UDE, Q04UDEH, Q06UDEH, Q13UDEH, and Q26UDEH
Application
GX IEC Developer Version 7.00A or later GX IEC Developer Version 7.03D GX IEC Developer Version 7.03D GX IEC Developer Version 7.03D GX IEC Developer Version 7.03D
: Applicable Reading applicability
App - 82
Appendix 6.1 Application compatibility
Appendix 6 Compatibility of Data Read from Programmable Controller CPU
Reading data written on the programmable controller CPU using GX Works2 17
to existing applications
MONITORING
The following table shows the applicability of reading data written on the programmable controller CPU using GX Works2 to existing applications. Data created with the CPU types or programming languages not supported by existing applications cannot be read.
GX Developer
: Applicable with restrictions
Programmable controller type
Basic model QCPU High Performance model QCPU, Q12PH, Q25PH
Application GX Developer Version 8.00A or later
Reading applicability
*1, *2, *3
Q02PH, Q06PH
GX Developer Version 8.68W or later
*1, *2, *3
Q12PRH, Q25PRH
GX Developer Version 8.17T or later
*1, *2, *3
Q03UD, Q04UDH, and Q06UDH
GX Developer Version 8.45X or later
*1, *2, *3
Q02U
GX Developer Version 8.48A or later
*1, *2, *3
Q13UDH and Q26UDH
GX Developer Version 8.62Q or later
*1, *2, *3
Q03UDE, Q04UDEH, Q06UDEH, Q13UDEH, and Q26UDEH
Q00UJ, Q00U, Q01U, Q10UDH, Q10UDEH, Q20UDH, and Q20UDEH
GX Developer Version 8.68W or later GX Developer Version 8.48A or later
*1, *2, *3 *1, *2, *3, *4
L02, L26-BT
GX Developer Version 8.88S or later
*1, *2, *3
FX3U and FX3UC
GX Developer Version 8.25B or later
*1, *4
FX3G
GX Developer Version 8.72A or later
*1
FX3S
GX Developer Version 8.72A or later*5
*1
FX1S, FX1N, FX1NC
GX Developer Version 6.00A or later
*1
FX0, FX0S, FX0N, FX1, FXU, FX2C, FX2N, and FX2NC GX Developer Version 2.00A or later
*1
*1 : Only execution programs can be read when programs written in Simple project (with labels) or Structured project are read from the programmable controller CPU. They can be displayed/edited in ladder program or list.
*2 : Programs cannot be read to GX Developer Version 8.03D or later if projects are opened with the setting of "Use label". To enable reading of programs to GX Developer Version 8.03D or later, create projects without the "Use label" setting.
*3 : When Structured Ladder/FBD or ST programs are read from a programmable controller CPU using existing applications, there may be cases where ladder programs cannot be restored. Be sure to check the programs after they have been read from the programmable controller CPU using existing applications. When programs are read from a programmable controller CPU using GX Developer, ladder blocks which cannot be displayed as ladder programs are displayed in yellow.
*4 : When a project including a block password to which the execution program protection setting was enabled is written, the execution program cannot be read.
*5 : When reading the data written on FX3S using GX Developer, use FX3G project of GX Developer.
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
18 19 20 21 22 A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
Appendix 6.1 Application compatibility
App - 83
APPENDIX
GX IEC Developer
: Applicable with restrictions
Programmable controller type
Basic model QCPU High Performance model QCPU, Q12PH, Q25PH
Application GX IEC Developer Version 7.00A or later
Reading applicability
*1
Q03UD, Q04UDH, and Q06UDH
GX IEC Developer Version 7.03D
*1
Q02U
GX IEC Developer Version 7.03D
*1
Q13UDH and Q26UDH
GX IEC Developer Version 7.03D
*1
Q03UDE, Q04UDEH, Q06UDEH, Q13UDEH, and Q26UDEH
GX IEC Developer Version 7.03D
*1
FX0, FX0S, FX0N, FX1, FXU, FX2C, FX2N, and FX2NC GX Developer Version 2.00A or later
*1
*1 : Only execution programs can be read. They can be displayed/edited as MELSEC-IL programs.
App - 84
Appendix 6.1 Application compatibility
Appendix 6 Compatibility of Data Read from Programmable Controller CPU
Appendix 6.2 Data compatibility
17
MONITORING
Reading data written on the programmable controller CPU using GX Developer to GX Works2
The following table shows the reading applicability depending on the label setting when reading data written on the programmable controller CPU using GX Developer to GX Works2. Data created with the CPU types or programming languages not supported by GX Works2 cannot be read.
Reading data with labels This function is not supported by FXCPU.
: Applicable : Applicable with restrictions
�: Not applicable
Project type of GX Works2
Data
Simple project
Without labels
With labels
Structured project
Label program
Label program (GX Developer format symbolic information)
�
*3,*5
*3,*5
Ladder program
*4
�*5
�*5
Program
SFC program
*1,*2
�*3
�*3
ST Program
*4
�*5
�*5
Parameter
PLC/Network/Remote password/ Redundant parameter
Intelligent function module parameter
Device comment
Common comment (Global device comment)
Comment by program (Local device comment)
Device memory Device memory
Device initial value Device initial value
*1 : When MELSAP-L format SFC programs are read with Version 1.24A or earlier, they are opened in the MELSAP3 format.
*2 : Block statements written with GX Developer are read as SFC block comments in GX Works2.
*3 : SFC programs are not included in label programs of GX Developer. Use 'Simple project (without labels)' when reading programs in GX Works2.
*4 : When a ladder program or ST program, in which labels of GX Developer are used, is read in Simple program (without labels), it becomes a ladder program without labels. By editing this ladder program and writing it to a programmable controller CPU again, this program becomes inconsistent with the label program written to a programmable controller CPU using GX Developer.
*5 : Ladder programs and ST programs, in which labels of GX Developer are used, are included in label programs. Read GX Developer format symbolic information when reading programs in GX Works2.
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
18 19 20 21 22 A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
Appendix 6.2 Data compatibility
App - 85
APPENDIX
Reading data without labels (QCPU (Q mode))
: Applicable : Applicable with restrictions
�: Not applicable
Project type of GX Works2
Data
Simple project
Without labels
With labels
Structured project
Program
Ladder program SFC program
�
�
*1, *2
�
�
Parameter
PLC/Network/Remote password/ Redundant parameter
Intelligent function module parameter
Device comment
Common comment (Global device comment)
Comment by program (Local device comment)
Device memory Device memory
Device initial value Device initial value
*1 : When MELSAP-L format SFC programs are read with Version 1.24A or earlier, they are opened in the MELSAP3 format. *2 : Block statements written with GX Developer are read as SFC block comments in GX Works2.
Reading data without labels (FXCPU)
Data
Program Parameter
Device comment
Device memory
Program
PLC parameter
Common comment (Global device comment)
Comment by program (Local device comment)
Device memory
: Applicable �: Not applicable
Project type of GX Works2
Simple project
Without labels
With labels
Structured project
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
App - 86
Appendix 6.2 Data compatibility
Appendix 6 Compatibility of Data Read from Programmable Controller CPU
Reading data written on the programmable controller CPU using GX IEC
17
Developer to GX Works2
MONITORING
The following table shows the applicability of reading data written on the programmable controller CPU
using GX IEC Developer to GX Works2.
Data created with the CPU types or programming languages not supported by GX Works2 cannot be
read.
18
QCPU (Q mode)
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
: Applicable : Applicable with restrictions
�: Not applicable
Project type of GX Works2
Data PLC parameter
Simple project
Without labels
With labels
Structured
project
19
Parameter
Network parameter
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
Intelligent function module parameter
Program
Program file
*1
�
�
Symbolic
information
-
�
�
*2
(Symbolic data) *1 : Only actual programs are read.
20
*2 : Programs which contain data not supported by GX Works2 cannot be read.
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
FXCPU
Data
Parameter
Program
Symbolic information (Symbolic data)
PLC parameter Program file
-
: Applicable �: Not applicable
Project type of GX Works2
Simple project (Without labels)
Structured project
�
�
21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
�
�
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
Appendix 6.2 Data compatibility
App - 87
APPENDIX
Reading data written on the programmable controller CPU using GX Works2 to existing applications
The following table shows the applicability of reading data written on the programmable controller CPU using GX Works2 to existing applications. Data created with the CPU types or programming languages not supported by existing applications cannot be read.
GX Developer
: Applicable : Applicable with restrictions
�: Not applicable -:No corresponding data
Data
Existing applications
QCPU (Q mode)
LCPU
FXCPU
Symbolic information
�
�
�
�
Program
Program/Program file SFC program/SFC program file
*1,*2,*3 *2,*4
*1,*2,*3 *2,*4
*1,*3 *5
PLC parameter
*6
Network parameter
�
Parameter
Remote password
-
Redundant parameter
-
-
Intelligent function module parameter
-
Device comment
Global device comment (Common comment) Local device comment (Comment by program)
�
Device memory
Device memory
*1 : Only execution programs can be read. They can be displayed/edited in ladder program or list.
*2 : Programs cannot be read to GX Developer Version 8.03D or later if projects are opened with the setting of "Use label". To enable reading of programs to GX Developer Version 8.03D or later, create projects without the "Use label" setting.
*3 : When Structured Ladder/FBD or ST programs are read from a programmable controller CPU using existing applications, they are read as ladder programs, but there may be cases where the ladder programs cannot be restored. Be sure to check the programs after they have been read from the programmable controller CPU using existing applications. When programs are read from a programmable controller CPU using GX Developer, ladder blocks which cannot be displayed as ladder programs are displayed in yellow.
*4 : SFC block titles set in "Simple project (with labels)" are not restored when programs are read from a programmable controller CPU in GX Developer. They are restored when the device comments are read using GX Developer, after they have been set to the BL device and written in GX Works2.
*5 : SFC block titles are not restored when programs are read from a programmable controller CPU in GX Developer. The transition condition numbers are re-sorted in ascending order.
*6 : Ethernet port setting cannot be read.
App - 88
Appendix 6.2 Data compatibility
Appendix 6 Compatibility of Data Read from Programmable Controller CPU
GX IEC Developer
Data
Symbolic information
�
Program/Program file
Program
Program file
SFC program/SFC program file
PLC/Network/Remote password
Parameter
PLC parameter
Intelligent function module parameter
Device comment
Global device comment (Common comment) Local device comment (Comment by program)
Device memory
Device memory
*1 : Only execution programs can be read. They can be displayed/edited as MELSEC-IL programs.
: Applicable : Applicable with restrictions
�: Not applicable
Existing applications
QCPU (Q mode)
FXCPU
�
�
*1
-
�
*1
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
MONITORING
17 18 19
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
Appendix 6.2 Data compatibility
App - 89
APPENDIX
Appendix 7 Compatibility with Existing Applications
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
This section explains the considerations when handling GX Works2 projects in earlier version of GX Works2. Read the considerations in each following item to handle projects. Note that, depending on the combination of project-created version and project-handled version, considerations for both versions need to be read. For example, when handling the GX Works2 Version 1.08J project in GX Works2 Version 1.05F, read the considerations of ' Handling GX Works2 Version 1.08J projects in GX Works2 Version 1.05F' and ' Handling GX Works2 Version 1.12N projects in GX Works2 Version 1.08J or earlier'.
Handling GX Works2 Version 1.08J projects in GX Works2 Version 1.05F
Function Open Project Revision
Parameter
Instruction
Considerations
� Projects for Q00UJ, Q00U, Q01U, Q10UDH, Q10UDEH, Q20UDH, Q20UDEH, and FXCPU cannot be opened in GX Works2 Version 1.05F.
� Projects whose path includes a semicolon (;) cannot be opened in GX Works2 Version 1.05F. Before opening a project in GX Works2 Version 1.05F, perform 'Save As' with GX Works2 Version 1.08J or later so that its path does not include a semicolon (;).
The project revision function cannot be used when the length the full path of the project file (Project.gd2) exceeds 256 bytes. Before using the project revision function with GX Works2 Version 1.05F, perform 'Save As' in GX Works2 Version 1.08J or later so that the length of the project file is 255 bytes or less.
When a project in which the following parameters are set is opened in GX Works2 Version 1.05F, the parameters are changed to the default settings.
� When the duplicated network number is specified for 'Network No.' of the CC IE Control on the MELSECNET/CC IE/Ethernet Module Configuration screen.
� When any of 'Twist' is selected for MELSECNET/H in the baud rate setting on the MELSECNET/CC IE/Ethernet Module Configuration screen.
� When "Use serial communication" is selected in the serial communication setting with Q02U.
� When the PLC module change setting in the PLC system setting is specified with Universal model QCPU.
� When index registers are specified as local devices in the device setting with Universal model QCPU.
� When "Socket Communication" is selected for 'Open System' in the open setting of the built-in Ethernet port setting in projects with Built-in Ethernet port QCPU.
When an instruction added due to Universal model QCPU (the first five digits of the serial number is '10102' or higher) compatible is used in a project, an instruction code error occurs as the project is opened in GX Works2 Version 1.05F.
App - 90
Appendix 7 Compatibility with Existing Applications
Handling GX Works2 Version 1.12N projects in GX Works2 Version 1.08J or 17
earlier
MONITORING
Function
Open
Intelligent function module data Write to PLC/Read from PLC
Considerations
� Simple projects (with labels) written in Structured Text cannot be opened in GX Works2 Version 1.08J or earlier.
� Projects that include inline structured text programs cannot be opened in GX Works2 Version 1.08J or earlier.
� Simple projects (with labels) for FXCPU or projects for the FXCPU containing Sequential Function Chart cannot be opened in GX Works2 Version 1.08J or earlier.
Newly added items in data of Q62AD-DGH/Q66AD-DG module cannot be displayed and changed in GX Works2 Version 1.08J or earlier. In addition, data of items newly added since Version 1.10L or later may be lost when data are written to the module in GX Works2 Version 1.05F or earlier.
Symbolic information of projects which include inline structured text programs and are created and written to the programmable controller CPU in GX Works2 Version 1.12N or later cannot be read from the programmable controller CPU.
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
18 19
Handling GX Works2 Version 1.15R projects in GX Works2 Version 1.12N or earlier
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
Function
Open
Connection destination setting Write to PLC/Read from PLC Library
Considerations
� When a project is opened in GX Works2 Version 1.12N or earlier, system labels are read as global labels. If a project which is saved after rows of global label are moved or deleted in GX Works2 Version 1.12N or earlier, is opened in GX Works2 Version 1.15R or later, the relation with system labels is disabled. If a project which is saved after global labels are edited in GX Works2 Version 1.12N or earlier, is opened in GX Works2 Version 1.15R or later, the relation with system labels can be resolved by executing the verification synchronous function.
� Contact instructions newly added for Structured Ladder and ST are not supported by GX Works2 Version 1.12N or earlier. A project which contains newly added contact instructions cannot be opened in GX Works2 Version 1.12N or earlier even if they have already been deleted.
When a project is opened in GX Works2 Version 1.12N or earlier, the connection destination setting to use the GOT (Ethernet) transparent is changed. Reconfigure the connection destination setting according to the actual communication route.
Symbolic information of projects which contain contact instructions newly added for Structured Ladder and ST cannot be read from the programmable controller CPU in GX Works2 Version 1.12N or earlier.
A user library which contains contact instructions newly added for Structured Ladder and ST cannot be opened in GX Works2 Version 1.12N or earlier.
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
20 21 22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
App - 91
APPENDIX
Handling GX Works2 Version 1.24A projects in GX Works2 Version 1.15R or earlier
Function
Open
Intelligent function module data
Connection destination setting
Considerations
� Projects for LCPU cannot be opened in GX Works2 Version 1.15R or earlier. � Simple projects (with labels) for FXCPU that include inline structured text programs cannot be
opened in GX Works2 Version 1.15R or earlier.
When a project which contains the switch setting of Q62DA-FG/Q66DA-G module set to "4 to 20mA (extended mode)" or "1 to 5V (extended mode)" is opened in GX Works2 Version 1.15R or earlier, the setting is reset to default ("4 to 20mA").
When a project for FX3U/FX3UC is opened in GX Works2 Version 1.15R or earlier, the connection destination setting which is set for the Ethernet connection is reset to default. Reconfigure the connection destination setting according to the actual communication route.
Handling GX Works2 Version 1.31H projects in GX Works2 Version 1.24A or earlier
Function Open Parameter
Intelligent function module data
Considerations
� Projects for Q50UDEH, Q100UDEH, and LJ72GF15-T2 cannot be opened in GX Works2 Version 1.24A or earlier.
� Projects for LCPU in which system labels are set cannot be opened in GX Works2 Version 1.24A or earlier.
� When "MELSAP-L (Instruction Format)" or "MELSAP-L (Start Conditions Format)" is selected as the SFC display format, SFC is opened as MELSAP3 in GX Works2 Version 1.24A or earlier.
When a project in which "CC IE Field (Master Station)" or "CC IE Field (Local Station)" is set in the network parameter is opened in GX Works2 Version 1.24A or earlier, the parameters are changed to the default settings.
� When a project which contains LD62, LD62D, LD75D4, LD75P4, or LD77MH4 is opened in GX Works2 Version 1.24A or earlier, these modules become reserved modules.
� Projects cannot be handled in GX Works2 Version 1.24A or earlier when "Disconnection detection mode setting" and "Disconnection detection setting value" are set in the parameter setting of Q62DA-FG module.
� Projects cannot be handled in GX Works2 Version 1.24A or earlier when the following parameters are set in the parameter setting of QJ71C24N/QJ71C24N-R2.
� The echo back permit/prohibit specification or execution history option specification in the various control specification
� The predefined protocol function error code, send data storage area or receive data storage area in the auto refresh
App - 92
Appendix 7 Compatibility with Existing Applications
Handling GX Works2 Version 1.40S projects in GX Works2 Version 1.31H or 17
earlier
MONITORING
Function
Open
Connection destination setting Parameter Device comment Build
Considerations
� Projects for remote I/O module cannot be opened in GX Works2 Version 1.31H or earlier.
� Projects for Universal model QCPU (except for Q00U, Q00UJ, Q01U, Q02U) in which "Act at Block Multi-Activated" is set for SFC program property cannot be opened in GX Works2 Version 1.31H or earlier.
� Be aware the following considerations when handling a project in which system labels are used for FXCPU. System labels are read as global labels when a project is opened in GX Works2 Version 1.12N or earlier. If a project in which rows of global label are moved or deleted is saved in GX Works2 Version 1.12N or earlier, the relation with system labels is disabled. If a project is opened in GX Works2 Version 1.15R - 1.40S, system label information is resolved, but the operations related to system label functions cannot be performed. If a project which is saved after global labels are edited in GX Works2 Version 1.31H or earlier, is opened in GX Works2 Version 1.40S or later, the relation with system labels can be resolved by executing the verification synchronous function.
When a project in which the communication route via Ethernet adapter module is set is opened in GX Works2 Version 1.31H or earlier, the communication route is changed to programmable controller direct connection setting.
� When a project in which the number of points between 1K (1024) and 7K (7168) or exceeds 8K (8192) is set for S device on the PLC parameter is opened in GX Works2 Version 1.31H or earlier, the parameters are changed to the default settings.
� When a project in which "CC IE Control Ext. Mode (Control Station)" or "CC IE Control Ext. Mode (Normal Station)" is set in the network parameter is opened in GX Works2 Version 1.31H or earlier, the setting is deleted.
For Universal model QCPU, when a project in which bit-specified word device comments are set is opened in GX Works2 Version 1.31H or earlier, the bit-specified word device comments are deleted.
� When a project in which the same name is used for data name and label name is opened and compiled in GX Works2 Version 1.31H or earlier, a C4110 error occurs. Compile the program after changing the data name and label name.
� When a project in which devices set with the "Device/Label Automatic-Assign Setting" function are used is opened and compiled in GX Works2 Version 1.31H or earlier, an error occurs. Compile the program after changing the devices not to duplicate with the ones set with the "Device/Label Automatic-Assign Setting" function.
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
18 19 20 21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
App - 93
APPENDIX
Handling GX Works2 Version 1.48A projects in GX Works2 Version 1.44W or earlier
Function
Open
Intelligent function module data
Connection destination setting
Write to PLC/Read from PLC
Language selection
Considerations
� When a ladder program whose "Display Connection of Ladder Diagram" setting is set to 13 or more is opened in GX Works2 Version 1.44W or earlier, the program is read with the 11 contacts as the number of displayed contacts.
� An FXCPU Simple project (with labels) which contains multiple programs cannot be opened in GX Works2 Version 1.44W or earlier.
� Even when an FXCPU Simple project (with labels) contains only a single program, if the program data name is not "MAIN", the project cannot be opened in GX Works2 Version 1.44W or earlier.
When a project which contains QD65PD2 or LD77MH16 is opened in GX Works2 Version 1.44W or earlier, the module becomes a reserved module.
� When a project in which the communication route via CC-Link IE Field Network board is set is opened in GX Works2 Version 1.44W or earlier, the communication route is changed to programmable controller direct connection setting.
� When a project in which the communication route via GOT from Ethernet board is set is opened in GX Works2 Version 1.44W or earlier, the PLC side I/F of the connection destination setting is changed to CPU module. "GOT Transparent" is displayed on the status bar. This change does not affect the communication, however, correct the connection destination setting according to the actual communication route.
� When a ladder program whose "Display Connection of Ladder Diagram" setting is set to 13 or more is read from a programmable controller CPU using GX Works2 Version 1.44W or earlier, the program is displayed as an improper ladder program.
� When a project which is written to a programmable controller CPU using the high-speed mode is read from the programmable controller CPU using GX Works2 Version 1.44W or earlier, the symbolic information cannot be read.
When a project with a condition described below is opened in GX Works2 Version 1.44W or earlier, the operation is not ensured.
� A language other than Japanese is selected, and characters other than one-byte characters are used.
� Two or more types of two-byte characters are mixed.
Handling GX Works2 Version 1.53F projects in GX Works2 Version 1.49B or earlier
Function Open Intelligent function module data Connection destination setting
Parameter
Write to PLC/Read from PLC
Considerations
A project in which multiple devices are selected with the "Device/Label Automatic-Assign Setting" function cannot be opened in GX Works2 Version 1.49B or earlier.
When a project which contains QJ71MT91 or QJ71MB91 is opened in GX Works2 Version 1.49B or earlier, the module becomes a reserved module.
When a project in which the communication route via CC-Link IE Field Network master/local module is set for LCPU is opened in GX Works2 Version 1.49B or earlier, the communication route is changed to programmable controller direct connection setting.
When a project in which "CC IE Field (Master Station)" and "CC IE Field (Local Station)" are set in the network parameter of LCPU is opened in GX Works2 Version 1.49B or earlier, the network parameters are changed to default settings.
A project in which multiple devices are selected with the "Device/Label Automatic-Assign Setting" function cannot be read from a programmable controller CPU in GX Works2 Version 1.49B or earlier.
App - 94
Appendix 7 Compatibility with Existing Applications
Handling GX Works2 Version 1.62Q projects in GX Works2 Version 1.55H or 17
earlier
MONITORING
Function Open
Intelligent function module data
Parameter
Considerations
� Structured projects in which the operation to display/hide the left power rail is performed on the Structured Ladder/FBD editor cannot be opened in GX Works2 Version 1.55H or earlier.
� For FXCPU, a project in which a block password with the validated setting for "Read-protect the execution program" exists cannot be opened in GX Works2 Version 1.55H or earlier.
� A project which contains Q64TCTTN, Q64TCTTBWN, Q64TCRTN, or Q64TCRTBWN opens as a project of Q64TCTTN, Q64TCTTBWN, Q64TCRTN, Q64TCRTBWN respectively. Added items cannot be displayed or changed in GX Works2 Version 1.55H or earlier.
� When a project which contains L60TCTT4, L60TCTT4BW, L60TCRT4, or L60TCRT4BW is opened in GX Works2 Version 1.55H or earlier, those modules become reserved modules.
� When a project in which the simple PLC communication setting is set on the PLC parameter of LCPU is opened in GX Works2 Version 1.55H or earlier, the parameters are changed to the default settings.
� When a project in which the serial communication setting is set on the PLC parameter of QnUD(H)CPU is opened in GX Works2 Version 1.55H or earlier, the parameters are changed to the default settings.
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
18 19
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
Handling GX Works2 Version 1.64S projects in GX Works2 Version 1.62Q or earlier
Function
Parameter
Intelligent function module data Device comment
Print Write to PLC/Read from PLC
Considerations
Projects cannot be handled in GX Works2 Version 1.62Q or earlier when the following parameters are set. � When "Branch Module" is set for the I/O assignment setting on PLC parameter of LCPU.
When a project which contains QD75P1N, QD75P2N, QD75P4N, QD75D1N, QD75D2N, or QD75D4N is opened in GX Works2 Version 1.62Q or earlier, these modules become reserved modules.
For LCPU, when a project in which bit-specified word device comments are set is opened in GX Works2 Version 1.62Q or earlier, the bit-specified word device comments are deleted.
String patterns are printed as character strings when a project in which string pattern is set to the header/footer is opened in GX Works2 Version 1.62Q or earlier. Delete the entered string patterns and set the setting again.
For projects of LCPU, device comment files which contain bit-specified comments cannot be read from the programmable controller CPU in GX Works2 Version 1.62Q or earlier.
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
20 21 22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
App - 95
APPENDIX
Handling GX Works2 Version 1.73B projects in GX Works2 Version 1.64S or earlier
Function Open
Parameter Compile IC memory card write/ read
Considerations
� When a project which contains Q64ADH is opened in GX Works2 Version 1.64S or earlier, the module becomes a reserved module.
� Projects in which the auto refresh parameter of temperature control module is set in the Setting item reduction mode cannot be opened in GX Works2 Version 1.64S or earlier.
� Projects in which parameters are set in the FX3U/FX3UC network parameter cannot be opened in GX Works2 Version 1.64S or earlier.
When a project in which the following parameters are set is opened in GX Works2 Version 1.64S or earlier, the parameters are changed to the default settings. � When the station information of CC-Link is set on the CC-Link Configuration window. � When "Branch Module" is set on the <<I/O Assignment>> tab of PLC parameter for LCPU.
An error occurs when a program in which function blocks of ladder program are used in a Structured Ladder/FBD program, or function blocks of Structured Ladder/FBD program are used in a ladder program, is opened and compiled in GX Works2 Version 1.64S or earlier.
IC memory card data to which a password is set cannot be read in GX Works2 Version 1.64S or earlier.
Handling GX Works2 Version 1.77F projects in GX Works2 Version 1.75D or earlier
Function
Parameter
Intelligent function module data
Considerations
When a project in which the following parameters are set is opened in GX Works2 Version 1.75D or earlier, the parameters are changed to the default settings. � When "Use" is selected for the IP Packet Transfer setting on the <<Built-in Ethernet Port Setting>>
tab of PLC parameter. � When "CC IE Field (Sub-Master Station)" is selected for "Network Type" in the network parameter. � When "Sub-Master Station" is selected for "Station Type" of "Network Configuration Settings". � When the IP address is set for "Network Operation Settings".
When a project which contains Q68CT, QD77MS2, QD77MS4, QD77MS16, LD75P1, LD75P2, LD75D1, or LD75D2 is opened in GX Works2 Version 1.75D or earlier, these modules become reserved modules.
App - 96
Appendix 7 Compatibility with Existing Applications
Handling GX Works2 Version 1.87R projects in GX Works2 Version 1.77F or 17
earlier
MONITORING
Function
Open
Global label Verify Write to PLC/Read from PLC Parameter Intelligent function module data
Considerations
� When opening a project in which the extended mode for device comments is set in GX Works2 Version 1.77F or earlier, the comments which exceeded the number of points of device comment that can be set in the standard mode are deleted as described below.
� When the number of points of device comment per device exceeds the number of points that can be set in the standard mode, points over 32K points are deleted. All bit-specified comments set to the device type which corresponds to the point at 32K + 1 are deleted.
� When the number of points of device comment per file exceeds the number of points that can be set in the standard mode, points over 1024K points are deleted. All bit-specified comments set to the device type which corresponds to the point at 1024K + 1 are deleted.
� Saved projects in which an element is added or a comment is edited for a structure registered to a system label cannot be opened in GX Works2 Version 1.77F or earlier.
� Projects in which structure array global labels are registered as system labels cannot be opened in GX Works2 Version 1.77F or earlier.
� The following functions cannot be used when a project which includes ladder programs whose function block calls function block is opened in GX Works2 Version 1.77F or earlier.
� Watch
� Monitor
� Modify value
� Sampling trace
� PLC Diagnostics
� Cross reference
� Projects for Q02PH, Q06PH, Q12PH, Q12PRH, Q25PH, and Q25PRH cannot be opened in GX Works2 Version 1.77F or earlier.
� Projects in which parameters are set in the FX3G/FX3GC network parameter cannot be opened in GX Works2 Version 1.77F or earlier.
When any of the following system labels is registered, the system label data base cannot be connected from the project in GX Works2 Version 1.77F or earlier.
� A system label in which an element is added or a comment is edited for a structure registered to a system label.
� A system label in which a structure array global label is set to the data type.
Project data of GX Works2 Version 1.87R cannot be verified against that of GX Works2 Version 1.77F or earlier because of different naming methods of block data name in SFC program. Copy the names of block data of project opened in GX Works2 Version 1.87R, paste them to block data of project opened in GX Works2 Version 1.77F or earlier as a block data name, and execute [Verify].
The following functions cannot be used when a project which includes ladder programs whose function block calls function block is read from a programmable controller CPU using GX Works2 Version 1.77F or earlier.
� Watch
� Monitor
� Modify value
� Sampling trace
� PLC Diagnostics
� Cross reference
When a project in which "CC IE Field (Local Station)" is selected for "Network Type", and "Specify station No. by program" is selected for 'specification method for station number' in the network parameter is opened in GX Works2 Version 1.77F or earlier, the parameters are changed to the default settings.
When a project which contains QD73A1 is opened in GX Works2 Version 1.77F or earlier, the module becomes a reserved module.
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
APPENDIX
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
18 19 20 21 22 A I
INDEX
App - 97
APPENDIX
Handling GX Works2 Version 1.91V projects in GX Works2 Version 1.87R or earlier
Function Open Write to PLC/Read from PLC
Parameter
Intelligent function module data
Considerations
Simple projects (with labels) for Q02PH, Q06PH, Q12PH, Q12PRH, Q25PH, and Q25PRH cannot be opened in GX Works2 Version 1.87R or earlier.
When using GX Works2 Version 1.87R or earlier, data cannot be written to/read from a Process CPU or Redundant CPU to which symbolic information of Simple project (with labels) is written. Delete the symbolic information with the delete PLC data function before writing/reading data to/from the programmable controller CPU.
� When a project in which the following parameters are set is opened in GX Works2 Version 1.87R or earlier, the parameters are changed to the default settings.
� When the network configuration of CC-Link IE Field Network is set on the CC IE Field Configuration window.
� When the Ethernet adapter setting is set on the PLC parameter of FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, or FX3UC.
� CSV files exported by the parameter processing of slave station on the CC-Link Configuration window cannot be imported in GX Works2 Version 1.87R or earlier.
When a project which contains QE81WH, QE84WH, QE81WH4W, QE83WH4W, or QE82LG is opened in GX Works2 Version 1.87R or earlier, these modules become reserved modules.
App - 98
Appendix 7 Compatibility with Existing Applications
Handling GX Works2 Version 1.98C projects in GX Works2 Version 1.91V or 17
earlier
MONITORING
Function Open
Write to PLC/Read from PLC Verify
Parameter
Considerations
� The following projects cannot be opened in GX Works2 Version 1.91V or earlier.
� Structured projects for Q02PH, Q06PH, Q12PH, Q12PRH, Q25PH, and Q25PRH.
� Projects for Q03UDV, Q04UDV, Q06UDV, Q13UDV, Q26UDV, L02S, L06, L26, and LJ72MS15.
� When a project in which the reflection/reference targets of device comments are set to 'PLC parameter setting' is opened in GX Works2 Version 1.91V or earlier, the reflection/reference targets are set to "Local".
� The following functions may not be performed normally when a project, in which an inline structured text program is called from the function block created in a ladder program, or a function block created in an ST program is called from the function block created in a ladder program, is opened in GX Works2 Version 1.98C or earlier.
� Watch
� Monitor
� Modify value
� Sampling trace
� PLC Diagnostics
� Cross reference
� Print
� Deletion of inline structured text box in function block of ladder program
� When using GX Works2 Version 1.91V or earlier, data of the following projects cannot be written to a programmable controller CPU.
� QCPU project in which the IP address is set for "Network Operation Settings" of CC IE Control network parameter
� LCPU project in which Ethernet is set for the network parameter
� LCPU project in which the IP packet transfer is set for "Built-in Ethernet Port Setting" of PLC parameter
� LCPU project in which the IP address is set for "Network Operation Settings" of CC-Link IE Field Network parameter (master station, sub-master station)
� When using GX Works2 Version 1.91V or earlier, data cannot be written to/read from a Process CPU or Redundant CPU to which symbolic information of Structured project is written. Delete the symbolic information with the delete PLC data function before writing/reading data to/from the programmable controller CPU.
When any of the following projects is opened in GX Works2 Version 1.91V or earlier, the programmable controller data, projects, and revisions cannot be verified.
� LCPU project in which the IP packet transfer is set for "Built-in Ethernet Port Setting" of PLC parameter
� LCPU project in which the sub-master station is set for the network configuration of CC-Link IE Field Network parameter (master station, sub-master station)
� LCPU project in which the IP address is set for "Network Operation Settings" of CC-Link IE Field Network parameter (master station, sub-master station)
� When any of the following project is opened in GX Works2 Version 1.91V or earlier, the parameters are set to default.
� QCPU project in which the IP address is set for "Network Operation Settings" of CC IE Control network parameter
� LCPU project in which Ethernet is set for the network parameter
� LCPU project in which the IP packet transfer is set for "Built-in Ethernet Port Setting" of PLC parameter
� LCPU project in which the sub-master station is set for the network configuration of CC-Link IE Field Network parameter (master station, sub-master station)
� LCPU project in which the IP address is set for "Network Operation Settings" of CC-Link IE Field Network parameter (master station, sub-master station)
� LCPU project in which the Auto Detect Setting of the Connected Device is set for "Operation Setting" of CC-Link network parameter
� Project contains AnyWireASLINK configuration data
� When a project in which the following parameter is set is opened in GX Works2 Version 1.91V or earlier, the parameters are changed to the default settings.
� CC IE Field (Motion Master Station) is set in the network parameter of Universal model QCPU.
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
APPENDIX
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
18 19 20 21 22 A I
INDEX
App - 99
APPENDIX
Function
Intelligent function module data
Remote password
Considerations
� When a project which contains QD77GF16, Q64DAH, L60AD4-2GH, QJ51AW12AL, or LJ51AW12AL is opened in GX Works2 Version 1.91V or earlier, these modules become reserved modules
� QCPU waveform output data created in GX Works2 Version 1.98C or later cannot be read in GX Works2 Version 1.91V or earlier.
When a project in which the remote password for LJ71E71-100 is set is opened in GX Works2 Version 1.91V or earlier, the module is changed to "LCPU" (Ethernet Built-in CPU).
Handling GX Works2 Version 1.492N projects in GX Works2 Version 1.98C or earlier
Function Open
Parameter
Intelligent function module data
Compile
Considerations
The following projects cannot be opened in GX Works2 Version 1.98C or earlier � Project for FX3S.
When any of the following project is opened in GX Works2 Version 1.98C or earlier, the parameter settings are reset to default. � A project in which "Communication protocol" is set to "Fixed Buffer Communication Procedure", or
in the range of 1 to 1024 is set to "Destination Port No." for open setting of Ethernet network parameter. � Projects which include Ethernet configuration data.
� When a project which contains L60AD2DA2, LD77MS2, LD77MS4, or LD77MS16 is opened in GX Works2 Version 1.98C or earlier, these modules become reserved modules.
� Waveform output data of L60AD2DA2 created in GX Works2 Version 1.492N or later cannot be read in GX Works2 Version 1.95Z or earlier.
� Waveform output data of L60AD2DA2 created in GX Works2 Version 1.492N or later cannot be read from the device memory or a data for memory card to GX Works2 Version 1.98C.
When the project in which devices/labels are used for indexes in structure array labels is compiled with GX Works2 Version 1.98C or earlier, the program operation may be changed depending on the programmable controller type or the index setting. Review the program where over 65,536 array elements are accessed.
Handling GX Works2 Version 1.499V projects in GX Works2 Version 1.493P or earlier
Function Language selection
Considerations
When the project in which Chinese (traditional characters) is selected and the characters other than one-byte characters are used is opened with Japanese or English GX Works2 Version 1.493P or earlier, the operation is not ensured.
App - 100
Appendix 7 Compatibility with Existing Applications
Handling GX Works2 Version 1.501X projects in GX Works2 Version 1.499V 17
or earlier
MONITORING
Function Open
Parameter
Considerations
� Projects for LCPU (except for L02S/L02S-P, L02/L02-P) in which "Act at Block Multi-Activated" is set for SFC program property cannot be opened in GX Works2 Version 1.499V or earlier.
� Projects for FXCPU in which the settings of intelligent function module is included cannot be opened in GX Works2 Version 1.499V or earlier.
When a project in which the following parameters are set is opened in GX Works2 Version 1.499V, the parameters are changed to the default settings.
� A project in which the number of points between 1K (1024) and 7K (7168) is set for S device on the PLC parameter of L02S/S02S-P and L02/L02-P
� A project in which the number of points between 1K (1024) and 7K (7168) or exceeds 8K (8192) is set for S device on the PLC parameter of L06/L06-P, L26/L26-P, and L26-BT/L26-PBT
� A project in which "Communication protocol" is set to the open system of the open setting on the <<Built-in Ethernet Port Setting>> tab of PLC parameter.
� A project in which "Communication protocol" is set to "Select Function" on the <<Built-in Serial Setting>> tab of PLC parameter.
� A project in which, except for "Not Used", is set to "Select Function" on the <<Adapter Serial Setting>> tab of PLC parameter.
� A CC IE Filed project which includes data of CC-Link Configuration or AnyWireASLINK Configuration
� A project in which CC IE Field head module or GOT2000 series is set using CC IE Field Configuration window
� A project in which GOT2000 series is set using CC-Link Configuration window
� A project in which "CC IE Field (Motion Master Station)" is set to network type of CC-Link IE Field Network, and network configuration settings are set using CC IE Field Configuration window
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
18 19 20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
Handling GX Works2 Version 1.507D projects in GX Works2 Version 1.501X or earlier
21
Function
Considerations
Intelligent function module data
When a project, in which FX3U-20SSC-H or FX-ENET series is included, is opened in GX Works2 Version 1.51X or earlier, it will be a reserved module.
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
App - 101
APPENDIX
Handling GX Works2 Version 1.513K projects in GX Works2 Version 1.507D or earlier
Function Parameter Intelligent function module data Instruction
Read from PLC Print
Considerations
When any of the following project is opened in GX Works2 Version 1.507D or earlier, the parameters are set to default. � L06, L06-P, L26, L26-P, L26-BT, or L26-PBT project in which "Use Pointer Extended Setting" is
set in Device of PLC parameter � Project in which AnyWireASLINK Configuration is created to the bridge module (NZ2AW1C2AL)
on the CC-Link Configuration window
When a project, which includes L60MD4-G, L60ADVL8, or L60ADIL8, is opened with GX Works2 Version 1.507D or earlier, it will be a reserved module.
When any of the following projects is opened in GX Works2 Version 1.507D or earlier, an instruction code error occurs in the ladder block. � Projects in which one of the instructions (SMOV(P),CMP(P),DCMP(P),ZCP(P),DZCP(P))
supported by High-speed Universal model QCPU with a serial number whose first five digits are '16042' or higher is used.
In GX Works2 Version 1.507D or earlier, an error will occur when compiling a project with data in the following project read from a programmable controller CPU. � Projects in which any of the instructions (SP.READ, SP.WRITE) supported by High-speed
Universal model QCPU with a serial number whose first five digits are '16042' or higher is used in a Structured Ladder/FBD or ST program.
The task setting data set to the batch print screen of FXCPU are not printed.
Handling GX Works2 Version 1.521T projects in GX Works2 Version 1.513K or earlier
Function
Connection destination setting
Considerations
When a project is opened in GX Works2 Version 1.513K or earlier, the connection destination setting via RCPU is changed to programmable controller direct connection setting.
App - 102
Appendix 7 Compatibility with Existing Applications
Handling GX Works2 Version 1.525X projects in GX Works2 Version 1.521T 17
or earlier
MONITORING
Function Parameter
Instruction Connection destination setting
Read from PLC
Considerations
When any of the following project is opened in GX Works2 Version 1.521T or earlier, the parameters are set to default.
� An LCPU project in which FTP Client Setting, E-mail Setting, and/or DNS Setting is configured on the Built-in Ethernet Port Setting of PLC parameter.
� An LCPU project in which "Carry out fuse blown check" is not selected in the PLC RAS setting of PLC parameter.
� An LCPU project in which "Continue" is selected in "Fuse Blown" in the PLC RAS setting of PLC parameter.
When any of the following projects is opened in GX Works2 Version 1.521T or earlier, an instruction code error occurs in the ladder block.
� A project in which an instruction (ECMP(P), EDCMP(P), EZCP(P), EDZCP(P), SFTR(P), SFTL(P), WSFR(P), WSFL(P), CCD(P), CRC(P), TCMP(P), TZCP(P), HOURM, DHOURM, PID) supported by High-speed Universal model QCPU and LCPU with a serial number whose first five digits are '16102' or higher is used.
When a project is opened in GX Works2 Version 1.521T or earlier, the connection destination setting to use the GOT (Ethernet) transparent set in Redundant CPU is changed to GOT (Bus) transparent.
When a project is opened in GX Works2 Version 1.521T or earlier, the connection destination setting to use the GOT (CC-Link IE Control) transparent is changed to programmable controller direct connection setting.
In GX Works2 Version 1.507D or earlier, an error will occur when compiling a project with data in the following project read from a programmable controller CPU.
� A project in which an instruction (ECMP(P), EDCMP(P), EZCP(P), EDZCP(P), SFTR(P), SFTL(P), WSFR(P), WSFL(P), CCD(P), CRC(P), TCMP(P), TZCP(P), HOURM, DHOURM, PID) supported by High-speed Universal model QCPU and LCPU with a serial number whose first five digits are '16102' or higher is used.
� A project in which an instruction (SP.FTPPUT, SP.FTPGET, SP.MLSEND, SP.MLRECV, SP.MLOPEADR, SP.MLGETADR) supported by LCPU with a serial number whose first five digits are '16102' or higher is used in a Structured ladder/FBD program or ST program.
Handling GX Works2 Version 1.530C projects in GX Works2 Version 1.525X or earlier
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
18 19 20 21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
Function Parameter
Considerations
When any of the following project is opened in GX Works2 Version 1.525X or earlier, the parameters are set to default. � A project in which the AnyWireASLINK configuration is created for CC-Link IE Field Network-
AnyWireASLINK bridge module on the CC IE Field Configuration window
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
Handling GX Works2 Version 1.535H projects in GX Works2 Version 1.531D or earlier
Function Parameter
Considerations
A
When any of the following project is opened in GX Works2 Version 1.531D or earlier, the parameters are set to default.
� A High-speed Universal model QCPU project for which the MELSOFT Connection Extended Setting in the Built-in Ethernet Port Setting of PLC parameter is set to "Use".
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
App - 103
APPENDIX
Handling GX Works2 Version 1.540N projects in GX Works2 Version 1.536J or earlier
Function
Intelligent function module data
Considerations
When a project, which includes QD77GF4 or QD77GF8, is opened with GX Works2 Version 1.536J or earlier, it will be a reserved module.
Handling GX Works2 Version 1.545T projects in GX Works2 Version 1.542Q or earlier
Function
Intelligent function module data
Connection destination setting
Considerations
� Newly added items in data of Q64ADH module cannot be displayed and changed in GX Works2 Version 1.542Q or earlier.
� When a project which contains L60DAVL8, or L60DAIL8 is opened in GX Works2 Version 1.542Q or earlier, these modules become reserved modules. Waveform output data of L60DAVL8 or L60DAIL8 created in GX Works2 Version 1.545T or later cannot be read in GX Works2 Version 1.542Q or earlier.
When a project in which the communication route via GOT (CC-Link IE Field) transparent is set is opened in GX Works2 Version 1.542Q or earlier, the communication route is changed to programmable controller direct connection setting.
Handling GX Works2 Version 1.550Y projects in GX Works2 Version 1.545T or earlier
Function Parameter
Considerations
When a project, which includes Ethernet configuration data of High-speed Universal model QCPU, is opened with GX Works2 Version 1.545T or earlier, the parameters are set to default.
Handling GX Works2 Version 1.555D projects in GX Works2 Version 1.551Z or earlier
Function Open Project
Project Verify
Parameter Read from PLC
Considerations
A project to which a block password was set cannot be opened in GX Works2 Version 1.551Z or earlier.
The naming rule of block data for an SFC program opened by selecting [Open Other Project] differs between GX Works2 Version 1.555D and GX Works2 Version 1.551Z or earlier. Even with the same GX Developer format projects, they cannot be verified if one of them was opened by selecting "Open Other Project" and saved in GX Works2 Version 1.555D and the other one was opened in the same method and saved in GX Works2 Version 1.551Z or earlier. It is because of the names of their block data which were named according to their own naming rules. Copy the name of block data of project opened in GX Works2 Version 1.555D, paste it to block data of project opened in GX Works2 Version 1.550Y or earlier as a block data name, and execute [Verify].
Parameters of a project used for High-speed Universal model QCPU and Built-in Ethernet port LCPU return to the defaults when the CC-Link IEF Basic setting is set for them on the <<Built-in Ethernet Port Setting>> tab of PLC parameter and the project is opened in GX Works2 Version 1.551Z or earlier.
In GX Works2 Version 1.555D or earlier, an error will occur when compiling a project with data in the following project read from a programmable controller CPU. � Project including a Structured Ladder/FBD program or an ST program which uses the instruction
(SP.SLMPSND) that is supported by high-speed universal model QCPUs with a serial number whose first five digits are '18112' or later and LCPUs.
App - 104
Appendix 7 Compatibility with Existing Applications
Handling GX Works2 Version 1.560J projects in GX Works2 Version 1.555D 17
or earlier
MONITORING
Function Intelligent function module data
Open Project
Considerations
When a project which contains LD40PD01 is opened in GX Works2 Version 1.555D or earlier, these modules become reserved modules.
For High-speed Universal model QCPU, a project including a block password to which the execution program protection setting is enabled cannot be opened in GX Works2 Version 1.555D or earlier.
18
Handling GX Works2 Version 1.566Q projects in GX Works2 Version 1.560J or earlier
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
Function Connection destination setting Parameter
Read from PLC
Considerations
When a project for which both a personal computer is connected to a GOT by Ethernet and "via GOT(Ethernet) transparent mode" is set in "Detail setting for GOT and PLC connection" is opened in GX Works2 Version 1.560J or earlier, the communication route will be changed to the programmable controller direct connection setting.
When any of the following project is opened in GX Works2 Version 1.560J or earlier, the parameters are set to default. � Project for which group No.2 to No.4 are set in "CC-Link IEF Basic Setting" on the <<Built-in
Ethernet Port Setting>> tab of "PLC Parameter" and which is used for high-speed universal model QCPUs. (However, when a project for which only group No.1 is set is opened in GX Works2 Version 1.560J or 1.555D, the communication route will not be changed.)
� Project for which nine or more stations are set in "CC-Link IEF Basic Setting" on the <<Built-in Ethernet Port Setting>> tab of "PLC Parameter" and which is used for a built-in Ethernet port LCPU. (However, when a project for which eight or less stations are set is opened in GX Works2 Version 1.560J or 1.555D, the communication route will not be changed.)
When any of the following project is opened in GX Works2 Version 1.560J or earlier, the parameters are set to default.
� For high-speed universal model QCPUs, the operation history of a CPU module can be saved by setting the item on the <<PLC RAS>> tab of "PLC Parameter".
� For high-speed universal model QCPUs, a device range to prohibit device writing from an external device can be set on the <<Device Setting>> tab of "PLC Parameter" is selected.
In GX Works2 Version 1.560J or earlier, an error will occur when compiling a project with data in the following project read from a programmable controller CPU. � Project including the instructions (DATE2SEC(P), SEC2DATE(P) that are supported by highspeed
universal model QCPUs with a serial number of which the first five digits are '18112' or later.
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
19 20 21 22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
App - 105
APPENDIX
Handling GX Works2 Version 1.576A projects in GX Works2 Version 1.535H or earlier
Function Parameter
Considerations
When opening any one of the following project in GX Works2 Version 1.535H or earlier, the parameters are changed to the default.
� A High-speed Universal model QCPU project for which the simple PLC communication setting has been configured in the built-in Ethernet port setting of PLC parameter.
� A built-in Ethernet LCPU project for which "SLMP-Compatible Device (QnA Compatible 3E Frame)" has been set as the communication destination in the module type of the simple PLC communication setting in built-in Ethernet port setting of PLC parameter.
� A built-in Ethernet LCPU project for which "MELSEC iQ-R (Built-in Ethernet Function)" has been set as the communication destination in the module type of the simple PLC communication setting in built-in Ethernet port setting of PLC parameter.
Handling GX Works2 Version 1.580E projects in GX Works2 Version 1.577B or earlier
Function Parameter
Read from PLC
Considerations
When opening any one of the following project in GX Works2 Version 1.577B or earlier, the parameters are changed to the default.
� A High-speed Universal model QCPU project and a built-in Ethernet LCPU project for which "MELSEC iQ-F (Built-in Ethernet Function)" has been set as the communication destination in the module type of the simple PLC communication setting in the built-in Ethernet port setting of PLC parameter.
In GX Works2 Version 1.577B or earlier, an error will occur when compiling a project with data in the following project read from a programmable controller CPU.
� Projects including a Structured Ladder/FBD program or a ST program which uses the instruction (SP.LOGNAMER, SP.LOGFILES) that is supported by High-speed Universal model QCPU whose first five digits of a serial number are '20073' or higher.
Handling GX Works2 Version 1.585K projects in GX Works2 Version 1.580E or earlier
Function
Connection destination setting
Considerations
When an Ethernet adapter is set for an Ethernet Board in PC side I/F and a project is opened in GX Works2 Version 1.580E or earlier, the Ethernet board operates in the default (Not Specified) settings.
App - 106
Appendix 8 Considerations When Saving Projects in GX Developer Format
Appendix 8 Considerations When Saving Projects in GX Developer Format 17
MONITORING
Q CPU L CPU Remote HFeXad FX
This section explains the considerations applied when saving projects in GX Developer format. In cases other than those listed below when data cannot be saved, a message is displayed, and saving is canceled. In such cases, follow the instructions of the message.
GX Works2 data
Considerations
Project
Title Comment
The 33rd and later characters are deleted. Deleted.
Parameter
Comment
Deleted.
Intelligent function module
Intelligent function module data
� QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU Data other than intelligent function module parameters (initial setting, auto refresh) are deleted. QD75P1N, QD75P2N, QD75P4N, QD75D1N, QD75D2N, and QD75D4N are saved as QD75P1, QD75P2, QD75P4, QD75D1, QD75D2, and QD75D4 respectively.
� FXCPU Deleted.
Structured Data Types*1
Comment Label
Comment
Deleted.
The 65th and later characters are deleted. If a line feed is entered, delete anything following the line feed.
Number of data
The data are combined into one unit.
Data name
A fixed character string (label) is created to combine data into one unit.
Title
Deleted.
Global Label*1
Comment Label
Comment Remarks
Deleted.
The 65th and later characters are deleted. If a line feed is entered, delete anything following the line feed.
Deleted.
FB instance
Deleted.
System label information
Deleted.
Comment
Deleted.
FB*1
Label*1
Comment FB instance
The 65th and later characters are deleted. If a line feed is entered, delete anything following the line feed.
Deleted*2.
Comment
Deleted.
Program
Label*1
Comment FB instance
The 65th and later characters are deleted. If a line feed is entered, delete anything following the line feed.
Deleted*2.
SFC program*1
Program Comment
Unconverted/uncompiled programs are deleted. Deleted.
SFC block*1
Data name Comment
Deleted.
Converted to a block statement. (Characters exceeding 10 lines times 65 characters are deleted.)
Device Memory
Comment Duplicated devices
Deleted. Latter device is preferred.
Connection destination setting
Connection destination data
The settings other than the current connection settings are deleted. The settings which are not supported by GX Developer are changed to programmable controller direct connection setting.
*1 : Not supported by FXCPU.
*2 : The function block instances created for global labels in GX Works2 are created as local labels in GX Developer. However, in GX Developer, the function block instances are not displayed on the local label setting screen.
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
APPENDIX
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
18 19 20 21 22 A I
INDEX
App - 107
APPENDIX
Appendix 8.1 ST instruction table for GX Works2 and GX Developer
Instructions that can be used in ST programs differ in between GX Works2 and GX Developer. As a result, an error may occur when a project that includes an ST program and is saved in GX Developer format is read and compiled with GX Developer. In such case, correct the ST program according to the following table.
GX Works2 ACOS ASIN ATAN BACOS BAND BASIN BATAN BCD BCOS BDSQR BIN BKAND BKBCD BKBIN BKOR BKRST BKXNR BKXOR BMOV BRST BSET BSFL BSFR BSIN BSQR BTAN BTOW BXCH CML COM COS DATERD DATEWR DBAND DBCD DBIN DBL DCML DDEC DEC DECO DELTA
GX Developer ACOS*1 ASIN*1 ATAN*1 BACOS_MD BAND_MD BASIN_MD BATAN_MD BCD_M BCOS_MD BDSQR_MD BIN_M BKAND_M BKBCD_M BKBIN_M BKOR_M BKRST_M BKXNR_M BKXOR_M BMOV_M BRST_M BSET_M BSFL_M BSFR_M BSIN_MD BSQR_MD BTAN_MD BTOW_MD BXCH_M CML_M COM_M COS*1 DATERD_MD DATEWR_MD DBAND_MD DBCD_M DBIN_M DBL_M DCML_M DDEC_M DEC_M DECO_M DELTA_M
GX Works2 DFLT DFRO DGBIN DGRY DI DINC DIS DLIMIT DMAX DMIN DNEG DOR DRCL DRCR DROL DROR DSER DSFL DSFR DSORT DSUM DTEST DTO DWSUM DXCH DXNR DXOR DZONE EI EMOD ENCO ENEG EREXP ESTR EVAL EXP FLT FMOV FROM GBIN GRY HOUR
GX Developer DFLT_M DFRO_M DGBIN_M DGRY_M DI_M DINC_M DIS_M DLIMIT_MD DMAX_M DMIN_M DNEG_M DOR_M DRCL_M DRCR_M DROL_M DROR_M DSER_M DSFL_M DSFR_M DSORT_M DSUM_M DTEST_MD DTO_M DWSUM_M DXCH_M DXNR_M DXOR_M DZONE_MD EI_M EMOD_M ENCO_M ENEG_M EREXP_M ESTR_M EVAL_M EXP*1 FLT_M FMOV_M FROM_M GBIN_M GRY_M HOUR_M
GX Works2 INC LEFT LEN LIMITATION MAXIMUM MIDR MIDW MINIMUM NDIS NEG NUNI OUT PLOW POFF PSCAN PSTOP QCDSET QDRSET RCL RCR RFS RIGHT RND ROL_E ROR_E RSET RST SECOND SEG SER SET SFL SFR SFT SIN SORT SRND STOP SUM SWAP TAN TEST
GX Developer INC_M LEFT*1 LEN*1 LIMIT MAX MIDR_M MIDW_M MIN NDIS_M NEG_M NUNI_M OUT_M PLOW_M POFF_M PSCAN_M PSTOP_M QCDSET_M QDRSET_M RCL_M RCR_M RFS_M RIGHT*1 RND_M ROL*1 ROR*1 RSET_MD RST_M SECOND_M SEG_M SER_M SET_M SFL_M SFR_M SFT_M SIN*1 SORT_M SRND_M STOP_M SUM_M SWAP_MD TAN*1 TEST_MD
App - 108
Appendix 8.1 ST instruction table for GX Works2 and GX Developer
Appendix 8 Considerations When Saving Projects in GX Developer Format
GX Works2 GX Developer
GX Works2 GX Developer
GX Works2
UNI
UNI_M
WSUM
WSUM_M
WXOR
WAND
WAND_M
WTOB
WTOB_MD
XCH
WDT
WDT_M
WXNR
WXNR_M
ZONE
WOR
WOR_M
*1 : Devices/labels need to be changed according to the arguments of GX Developer instructions.
GX Developer WXOR_M XCH_M ZONE_MD
MONITORING
17 18
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
19
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
Appendix 8.1 ST instruction table for GX Works2 and GX Developer
App - 109
APPENDIX
Appendix 9 Character Strings that cannot be Used for Label Names and Data Names
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
Character strings used for application function names, common instruction names, special instruction names, instructions and so on are called reserved words. These reserved words cannot be used for label names or data names. If the character string defined as a reserved word is used for a label name or data name, an error occurs during registration or compilation. The following tables shows character strings that cannot be used for label names or data names. The numbers from to in the tables indicate the following label names and data names.
<Label name and data name> Project file name Program file name (Simple (without labels)) Program file name (Simple (with labels)) Program file name (structure) Task name Global label data name Structure name POU name Label name
: Applicable, : With restrictions, �: Not applicable
Category
Character string
Class identifier
VAR, VAR_RETAIN, VAR_ACCESS, VAR_CONSTANT, VAR_CONSTANT_RETAIN, VAR_INPUT, VAR_INPUT_RETAIN, VAR_OUTPUT, VAR_OUTPUT_RETAIN, VAR_IN_OUT, VAR_IN_EXT, VAR_EXTERNAL, VAR_EXTERNAL_CONSTANT, VAR_EXTERNAL_CONSTANT_RETAIN, VAR_EXTERNAL_RETAIN, VAR_GLOBAL, VAR_GLOBAL_CONSTANT, VAR_GLOBAL_CONSTANT_RETAIN, VAR_GLOBAL_RETAIN
�� � � � � � �
Data type
BOOL, BYTE, INT, SINT, DINT, LINT, UINT, USINT, UDINT,
ULINT, WORD, DWORD, LWORD, ARRAY, REAL, LREAL,
TIME, STRING, TIMER, COUNTER, RETENTIVETIMER,
POINTER, Bit, Word [Unsigned]/Bit String [16-bit], Double Word [Unsigned]/Bit String [32-bit], Word [Signed], Double
� � � � � � �
Word [Signed], FLOAT (Single Precision), FLOAT (Double
Precision), String, Time, Timer, Counter, Retentive Timer,
Pointer
Data type hierarchy
ANY, ANY_NUM, ANY_BIT, ANY_REAL, ANY_INT, ANY_DATE
ANY_SIMPLE, ANY16, ANY32
� � � � � � � *1 �
Device name
X, Y, D, M, T, B, C, F, L, P, V, Z, W, I, N, U, J, K, H, E, A, SD, SM, SW, SB, FX, FY, DX, DY, FD, TR, BL, SG, VD, ZR, ZZ*2
*1 �
Character string recognized as device (Device name + Numeral)
Such as X0
� � � � � *3 �
ST operator
NOT, MOD (, ), -
� � � � � � � *1 �
IL operator
LD, LDN, ST, STN, S, S1, R, R1, AND, ANDN, OR, ORN,
XOR, XORN, ADD, SUB, MUL, DIV, GT, GE, EQ, NE, LE, LT, JMP, JMPC, JMPCN, CAL, CALC, CALCN, RET, RETC,
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
RETCN
LDI, LDP, LDF, ANI, ANDP, ANDF, ANB, ORI, ORP, ORF, ORB, MPS, MRD, MPP, INV, MEP, MEF, EGP, EGF, OUT(H), SET, RST, PLS, PLF, FF, DELTA(P), SFT(P), MC, MCR, STOP, PAGE, NOP, NOPLF
*1 �
App - 110
Appendix 9 Character Strings that cannot be Used for Label Names and Data Names
Category
Character string
Application instruction in GX Works2
Application instructions such as DMOD, PCHK, and INC(P)
MELSEC-Q/L Programming Manual (Common Instructions), MELSEC-Q/L Structured Programming Manual
(Common Instructions)
SFC instruction
SFCP, SFCPEND, BLOCK, BEND, TRANL, TRANO, TRANA,
TRANC, TRANCA, TRANOA, SEND, TRANOC, TRANOCA,
TRANCO, TRANCOC, STEPN, STEPD, STEPSC, STEPSE, STEPST, STEPR, STEPC, STEPG, STEPI, STEPID,
STEPISC, STEPISE, STEPIST, STEPIR, TRANJ, TRANOJ,
TRANOCJ, TRANCJ, TRANCOJ, TRANCOCJ
ST code body
RETURN, IF, THEN, ELSE, ELSIF, END_IF, CASE, OF,
END_CASE, FOR, TO, BY, DO, END_FOR, WHILE,
END_WHILE, REPEAT, UNTIL, END_REPEAT, EXIT, TYPE,
END_TYPE, STRUCT, END_STRUCT, RETAIN, VAR_ACCESS, END_VAR, FUNCTION, END_FUNCTION,
�
�
�
�
FUNCTION_BLOCK, END_FUNCTION_BLOCK, STEP,
INITIAL_STEP, END_STEP, TRANSITION,
END_TRANSITION, FROM, UNTILWHILE
Function name in application function
Function names in application functions such as AND_E and NOT_E
Function block name in application function
Function block names in application functions such as CTD and CTU
Symbol
/, \, *, ?, <, >, |, ", :, [, ], ,, =, +, %, ', ~, @, {, }, &, ^, ., tab character
;
������ � � � � �
!, #, $, `
�
Date and time literal DATE, DATE_AND_TIME, DT, TIME, TIME_OF_DAY, TOD � � � � �
Others
ACTION, END_ACTION, CONFIGURATION,
END_CONFIGURATION, CONSTANT, F_EDGE, R_EDGE,
AT, PROGRAM, WITH, END_PROGRAM, TRUE, FALSE,
READ_ONLY, READ_WRITE, RESOURCE,
END_RESOURCE, ON, TASK, EN, ENO, BODY_CCE,
�� � � �
BODY_FBD, BODY_IL, BODY_LD, BODY_SFC, BODY_ST,
END_BODY, END_PARAMETER_SECTION,
PARAM_FILE_PATH, PARAMETER_SECTION, SINGLE,
RETAIN, INTERVAL
String that starts with K1 to K8
Such as K1AAA
Address
Such as %IX0
� � � � �
Statement in Ladder Diagram
;FB BLK START, ;FB START, ;FB END, ;FB BLK END, ;FB IN, ;FB OUT, ;FB_NAME, ;INSTANCE_NAME, ;FB, ;INSTANCE
� � � � �
Common instruction Such as MOV
� �
Windows� reserved word
COM1, COM2, COM3, COM4, COM5, COM6, COM7, COM8, COM9, LPT1, LPT2, LPT3, LPT4, LPT5, LPT6, LPT7, LPT8, LPT9, AUX, CON, PRN, NUL
�
�
�
�
�
�
*1 : Functions cannot be used.
*2 : Whether to handle a device name indexed with ZZ device as a reserved word depends on the parameter setting. When Z device is specified for 32-bit index setting: Not handled as a reserved word When ZZ device is specified for 32-bit index setting: Handled as a reserved word
*3 : Applicable to Simple projects without labels only.
*1 �
*1 �
���
��� ��� ��� ��� ��� ���
���
*1 � ��� ��� � *3 � � �
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
MONITORING
17 18 19 20 21 22 A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
App - 111
APPENDIX Considerations for using labels
In a function, the same name as the function cannot be used for a label. Inapplicable character strings differ between label names and data names such as function
block names and structure names. Therefore, if a label name which contains a function block name or a structure name is set when setting a label of instance or structure, an error may occur. A space cannot be used. A numeral cannot be used at the beginning of label name. A label name is not case-sensitive. An error may occur at compilation when the same label names with different cases (example: 'AAA' and 'aaa') are declared. In Structured Ladder/FBD and ST programs, the same label name can be used for a global label and local label by setting the following option*1.
*1 : Select "Use the same label name in global label and local label" under [Tool] [Options] "Compile" "Basic Setting".
An underscore (_) cannot be used at the beginning or end of label name. Consecutive underscores (_) cannot be used for a data name or a label name.
For Simple projects, function names and function block names in common instructions and application functions can be used.
App - 112
Appendix 10 Restrictions When Changing Programmable Controller Type
Appendix 10 Restrictions When Changing Programmable Controller Type 17
MONITORING
*1
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
*1 : CC IE Field head module only
The following explains the restrictions applied when changing a programmable controller series or type.
18
For the restrictions applied when changing a programmable controller type between QCPU (Q mode)/
LCPU and QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU, refer to Appendix 10.1 and the following table.
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
For the restrictions applied when changing a programmable controller type between QCPU (Q mode)/
LCPU and CC IE Field head module, refer to Appendix 10.11.
For the restrictions applied when changing a programmable controller type of FXCPU, refer to
Appendix 10.12.
19
Old programmable controller type
Basic model QCPU
New programmable controller type
High Performance model QCPU
Process CPU
Redundant CPU
QnUD(H)CPU
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
Basic model QCPU
Table App.10.9-1
Table App.10.8-4
Table App.10.7-1
Table App.10.6-1
Table App.10.2-7
High Performance model QCPU
Process CPU
Table App.10.9-1 Table App.10.9-2
Table App.10.9-1 Table App.10.9-5
� Table App.10.8-3
Table App.10.7-1 �
Table App.10.6-1
Table App.10.6-1 Table App.10.6-3
Table App.10.2-1 Table App.10.2-6
20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
Redundant CPU
Table App.10.9-1 Table App.10.9-4
Table App.10.8-2
Table App.10.7-1 Table App.10.7-3
�
Table App.10.2-5
QnUD(H)CPU
Table App.10.9-1 Table App.10.9-3
Table App.10.8-1
Table App.10.7-1
Table App.10.6-1
�
Q00U, Q00UJ, Q01U, Q02U
QnUDE(H)CPU
Table App.10.9-1 Table App.10.9-3
Table App.10.9-1 Table App.10.9-3
Table App.10.8-1 Table App.10.8-1
Table App.10.7-1 Table App.10.7-1
Table App.10.6-1 Table App.10.6-1
Table App.10.2-2 Table App.10.2-3
21
High-speed Universal model QCPU
Table App.10.9-1 Table App.10.9-3
Table App.10.8-1 Table App.10.8-5
Table App.10.7-1 Table App.10.7-2
Table App.10.6-1 Table App.10.6-2
Table App.10.2-4
LCPU
Table App.10.9-1 Table App.10.9-6
Table App.10.8-6
Table App.10.7-1 Table App.10.7-4
Table App.10.6-1 Table App.10.6-4
Table App.10.2-8
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
Old programmable controller type
Basic model QCPU
High Performance model QCPU
Process CPU
Redundant CPU
QnUD(H)CPU
Q00U,Q00UJ, Q01U,Q02U
QnUDE(H)CPU
High-speed Universal model QCPU/
Universal model process CPU
Q00U,Q00UJ, Q01U,Q02U Table App.10.3-1 Table App.10.3-8 Table App.10.3-1 Table App.10.3-2 Table App.10.3-1 Table App.10.3-7 Table App.10.3-1 Table App.10.3-6 Table App.10.3-1 Table App.10.3-3
Table App.10.3-1
Table App.10.3-1 Table App.10.3-4
Table App.10.3-1 Table App.10.3-5
New programmable controller type
QnUDE(H)CPU
High-speed Universal model QCPU
Table App.10.4-6
Table App.10.5-7
Table App.10.4-1
Table App.10.5-1
Table App.10.4-5
Table App.10.5-6
Table App.10.4-4
Table App.10.5-5
�
Table App.10.5-3
Table App.10.4-2
Table App.10.5-2
�
Table App.10.5-4
Table App.10.4-3
�
LCPU
Table App.10.10-1 Table App.10.10-9
Table App.10.10-1 Table App.10.10-2
Table App.10.10-1 Table App.10.10-8
Table App.10.10-1 Table App.10.10-7
Table App.10.10-1 Table App.10.10-3
Table App.10.10-1 Table App.10.10-4
Table App.10.10-1 Table App.10.10-5
Table App.10.10-1 Table App.10.10-6
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
APPENDIX
22 A I
INDEX
App - 113
APPENDIX
Old programmable controller type
LCPU
Q00U,Q00UJ, Q01U,Q02U
Table App.10.3-1 Table App.10.3-9
New programmable controller type
QnUDE(H)CPU
High-speed Universal model QCPU
Table App.10.4-7
Table App.10.5-8
LCPU
Table App.10.10-1 Table App.10.10-10
Appendix 10.1 Common restrictions when changing programmable controller series/types
The following table shows the common restrictions applied when changing a programmable controller series or type.
Item
Connection destination setting
Compilation status Saved project status Password/Keyword status Program
Ladder Diagram
Structured Ladder/FBD Library Global Device Comment Local Device Comment Device Initial Value
Table App.10.1-1
: With restrictions
Restrictions
� Connection destination data other than "Connection 1" are deleted. Connection 1 is changed to the setting for accessing the programmable controller CPU directly to a personal computer.
� If the changed programmable controller type is Basic model QCPU/FXCPU, 'RS-232' is set to "PC side IF".
� If the changed programmable controller type is other than Basic model QCPU/FXCPU, 'USB' is set for "PC side IF".
� An Ethernet adapter is set to "Not Specified" for Ethernet board in "PC side I/F".
� Programs are set in the uncompiled status.
� Programs are changed in the project-unsaved status.
� Passwords returns to the registered status if unlocked.
� Unsupported instructions, devices outside the range, and unsupported index settings are changed to SM1255 or SD1255 (SM999 or SD999).
� If a program exceeds the program capacity of the changed programmable controller type, the exceeding ladder blocks are deleted.
� A ladder block containing an unsupported instruction is displayed in yellow. (Motion dedicated sequence instructions for changing from QnUD(H)CPU or Built-in Ethernet port QCPU to LCPU are excluded.)
� Instructions with devices outside the range or unsupported index settings are deleted, and the ladder block is displayed in yellow.
� An x mark is appended on an element of an unsupported instruction.
� Common instructions/application functions are changed to libraries appropriate for the changed programmable controller type.
Project type
Simple project
Without With labels labels
Structured project
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
� Devices not supported by the changed programmable controller type and those outside the range are deleted.
App - 114
Appendix 10.1 Common restrictions when changing programmable controller series/types
Appendix 10 Restrictions When Changing Programmable Controller Type
Item
PLC Parameter Network Parameter
Device/Label AutomaticAssign Setting
Restrictions
� Settings are changed to those appropriate for the changed programmable controller type.
� The default values in the changed programmable controller series/type are set to the data which cannot be edited in the changed programmable controller series/ type.
� The module models and points of Input, Output, and I/O Mix displayed on the <<I/O Assignment>> tab are not changed depending on the programmable controller series.
� Network types which cannot be set for the changed programmable controller type are deleted.
� When the module set as "Valid Module During Other Station Access" is to be deleted at the programmable controller type change (module not supported by the changed programmable controller type), the first module is set as the valid module.
� If the number of device points set for the refresh device is outside the range or the device is not available, the setting for the refresh device is deleted.
� Settings are changed to those appropriate for the changed programmable controller type.
� The default values in the changed programmable controller series/type are set to the data which cannot be edited in the changed programmable controller series/ type.
� When the programmable controller type is changed from the project in which "Pointer Extended Setting for Automatic-Assign Device" is set to the project that does not have "Pointer Extended Setting for Automatic-Assign Device", the pointer assignment range is changed to those appropriate for the changed programmable controller type.
Project type
Simple project
Without With labels labels
Structured project
�
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
MONITORING
17 18 19 20 21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
Appendix 10.1 Common restrictions when changing programmable controller series/types
App - 115
APPENDIX
Appendix 10.2 Restrictions when changing to QnUD(H)CPU
The following tables show the restrictions applied when changing a programmable controller series/ type to QnUD(H)CPU.
Changing from High Performance model QCPU
Item
Program Sequential Function Chart
PLC Parameter PLC System Program Boot File
Table App.10.2-1
: With restrictions
Restrictions
� If "Convert motion dedicated sequence instruction" is selected, S.instructions are converted to D.instructions. (Appendix 11)
� The property settings "SFC Program Type Setting", "Periodic Execution Block", and "Act at Step Multi-Activated" are deleted.
� � If the constant scan time is set in the PLC RAS setting,
"Execute it while waiting for constant scan setting" is set to the service processing setting in the PLC System setting. � If "Low Speed" is set to "Execute Type" in the Program setting, it is changed to "Standby". � If "Standard ROM" is set to "Transfer from", it is changed to "Memory Card (ROM)".
Project type
Simple project
Without With labels labels
Structured project
�
�
�
�
�
Changing from Q00U, Q00UJ, Q01U, or Q02U
Table App.10.2-2
Item Program Remote Password
Restrictions
� A series-compatible SM/SD devices (SM/SD1000 to SM/ SD1255) are changed to the corresponding devices for Q series.
� If "Convert motion dedicated sequence instruction" is selected, S.instructions are converted to D.instructions. (Appendix 11)
� Any existing settings are cleared.
: With restrictions
Project type
Simple project
Without With labels labels
Structured project
�
�
App - 116
Appendix 10.2 Restrictions when changing to QnUD(H)CPU
Appendix 10 Restrictions When Changing Programmable Controller Type
Changing from QnUDE(H)CPU
Table App.10.2-3
Item Remote Password
Restrictions � Only the settings of Ethernet Built-in CPU are cleared.
17
MONITORING
: With restrictions
Project type
Simple project
Without With labels labels
Structured project
18
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
Changing from High-speed Universal model QCPU
Item
Remote Password PLC Parameter
Device
Built-in Ethernet Port Setting
Block Password
Table App.10.2-4
Restrictions
� Only the settings of Ethernet Built-in CPU are cleared. � � If the value exceeds the capacity of changed programmable
controller type is set for "File Register Extended Setting", the maximum value is set and all points are set as file register (ZR(R)). The setting of the latch range is cleared. � Any existing settings in "CC-Link IEF Basic Setting" are deleted. � For a project including a block password for which the execution program protection setting was enabled, the programmable controller type cannot be changed to one other than a high-speed universal model QCPU and an LCPU.
: With restrictions
Project type
Simple project
Without With labels labels
Structured project
�
�
�
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
19 20 21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
Appendix 10.2 Restrictions when changing to QnUD(H)CPU
App - 117
APPENDIX
Changing from Redundant CPU
Item
Program Sequential Function Chart
PLC Parameter PLC System
Boot File
I/O Assignment Network Parameter
Ethernet CC-Link
Table App.10.2-5
: With restrictions
Restrictions
� � The property settings "SFC Program Type Setting", "Periodic
Execution Block", and "Act at Step Multi-Activated" are deleted. � � If the constant scan time is set in the PLC RAS setting, "Execute it while waiting for constant scan setting" is set to the service processing setting in the PLC System setting. � If "Standard ROM" is set to "Transfer from", it is changed to "Memory Card (ROM)". � Settings on the slot 0 are deleted. � If any slot after the slot 1 is set, "Empty" is set for "Type" and "0 Point" is set for "Points" on the slot 0. � � "Ethernet (Main Base)" or "Ethernet (Extension Base)" is changed to "Ethernet". � "Master station (Extension Base)" is changed to "Master Station".
Project type
Simple project
Without With labels labels
Structured project
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
App - 118
Appendix 10.2 Restrictions when changing to QnUD(H)CPU
Appendix 10 Restrictions When Changing Programmable Controller Type
Changing from Process CPU
17
Item
Program Sequential Function Chart
PLC Parameter PLC System Program Boot File
Table App.10.2-6
: With restrictions
Restrictions
� If "Convert motion dedicated sequence instruction" is selected, S.instructions are converted to D.instructions. (Appendix 11)
� The property settings "SFC Program Type Setting", "Periodic Execution Block", and "Act at Step Multi-Activated" are deleted.
� � If the constant scan time is set in the PLC RAS setting,
"Execute it while waiting for constant scan setting" is set to the service processing setting in the PLC System setting. � If "Low Speed" is set to "Execute Type" in the Program setting, it is changed to "Standby". � If "Standard ROM" is set to "Transfer from", it is changed to "Memory Card (ROM)".
Project type
Simple project
Without With labels labels
Structured project
�
�
�
�
�
Changing from Basic model QCPU
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
MONITORING
18 19 20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
Item
Program PLC Parameter
PLC File
Boot File
Table App.10.2-7
Restrictions
� If "Convert motion dedicated sequence instruction" is selected, S.instructions are converted to D.instructions. (Except for Q00J. Appendix 11)
� � When changing from Q00 or Q01, "Use the following file" is
selected and "Corresponding Memory: Standard RAM", "File Name: MAIN", and "Capacity: 64K Points" are set in the file register setting. � If "Do boot from standard ROM" is selected before changing the programmable controller type, "Type: Sequence", "Data Name: MAIN", "Transfer From: Memory Card (ROM)", and "Transfer To: Program Memory" are set.
: With restrictions
Project type
Simple project
Without With labels labels
Structured project
�
�
�
�
�
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
21 22 A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
Appendix 10.2 Restrictions when changing to QnUD(H)CPU
App - 119
APPENDIX
Changing from LCPU
Item
Remote Password
PLC Parameter I/O Assignment Built-in Ethernet Port Setting
Network Parameter CC-Link IE Field Network CC-Link
Block Password
Table App.10.2-8
: With restrictions
Restrictions
� When changing from L02S/L02S-P or L02/L02-P, any existing settings are cleared.
� When changing from L06/L06-P, L26/L26-P, or L26-BT/L26PBT, the following settings are set. � The settings of the built-in Ethernet are cleared. � The settings of LJ71C24 are replaced to the settings of QJ71C24/CMO. � The settings of LJ71E71 are replaced to the settings of QJ71E71.
� � Settings of "Built-in I/O Function Setting" and "Built-in CC-
Link Setting" are deleted.
Project type
Simple project
Without With labels labels
Structured project
�
�
�
� When changing from Built-in Ethernet port LCPU, any
existing settings in "CC-Link IEF Basic Setting" are deleted.
�
�
�
�
� If the number of modules is one and "Start I/O No." is outside
the range, its maximum value is set. If the number of
modules is two, "Start I/O No." is set starting from 0000.
� The IP address setting of "Network Operation Settings" for
CC IE Field (Master Station) is deleted.
� If "H/W Test" or "Loop Test" is set to "Mode", the setting is deleted.
� For a project including a block password for which the
execution program protection setting was enabled, the
programmable controller type cannot be changed to one
other than a high-speed universal model QCPU and an
LCPU.
App - 120
Appendix 10.2 Restrictions when changing to QnUD(H)CPU
Appendix 10 Restrictions When Changing Programmable Controller Type
Appendix 10.3 Restrictions when changing to Q00U, Q00UJ, Q01U, or 17
Q02U
MONITORING
The following tables show the restrictions applied when changing a programmable controller series/ type to Q00U, Q00UJ, Q01U, or Q02U.
18
Common restrictions when changing to Q00U, Q00UJ, Q01U, or Q02U
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
Item
Remote Password PLC Parameter
I/O Assignment
Multiple CPU Network Parameter
Ethernet
MELSECNET/10(H), CC-Link IE Controller Network
CC-Link
Table App.10.3-1
: With restrictions
Restrictions
� Any existing settings are cleared.
�
� If a multiple CPU is set to "Type", it is deleted and closed up. � If a value which exceeds the maximum base number for the
changed programmable controller type is set, the exceeding base settings are deleted.
� If the number of multiple CPUs exceeds the allowable number, the settings are set to default.
�
� When changing to Q02U, the third and later Ethernet modules in the module settings are deleted.
� When changing to Q00UJ/Q00U/Q01U, the second and later Ethernet modules in the module setting are deleted.
� When changing to Q02U, the third and later modules out of total of MELSECNET/10(H) and CC-Link IE Controller Network modules are deleted.
� When changing to Q00UJ/Q00U/Q01U, the second and later modules out of total of MELSECNET/10(H) and CC-Link IE Controller Network modules are deleted.
� When changing to Q02U, the fifth and later modules are deleted.
� When changing to Q00UJ/Q00U/Q01U, the third and later modules are deleted.
Project type
Simple project
Without With labels labels
Structured project
�
�
�
�
�
�
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
19 20 21 22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
Appendix 10.3 Restrictions when changing to Q00U, Q00UJ, Q01U, or Q02U
App - 121
APPENDIX
Changing from High Performance model QCPU
Item
Program Sequential Function Chart
PLC Parameter PLC System
Program
Boot File
Table App.10.3-2
: With restrictions
Restrictions
� � The property settings "SFC Program Type Setting", "Periodic
Execution Block", "Act at Block Multi-Activated", and "Act at Step Multi-Activated" are deleted. � � If the constant scan time is set in the PLC RAS setting, "Execute it while waiting for constant scan setting" is set to the service processing setting in the PLC System setting. � If the number of programs exceeds the allowable number, the exceeding settings are deleted. � If "Low Speed" is set to "Execute Type" in the Program setting, it is changed to "Standby". � If "Standard ROM" is set to "Transfer from", it is changed to "Memory Card (ROM)". (Q02U only)
Project type
Simple project
Without With labels labels
Structured project
�
�
�
�
�
�
Changing from QnUD(H)CPU
Item
Program Sequential Function Chart
PLC Parameter PLC File
Program Device
Table App.10.3-3
Restrictions
� If "Convert motion dedicated sequence instruction" is selected, D.instructions are converted to S.instructions. (Except for Q00UJ. Appendix 11)
: With restrictions
Project type
Simple project
Without With labels labels
Structured project
�
�
� The property setting "Act at Block Multi-Activated" is deleted.
�
�
�
�
� If "Capacity" exceeds 16K points in "File used for SP.DEVST/
S.DEVLD Instruction", the setting is set to 16K points for
Q02U, and 1K points for Q00U, Q00UJ, and Q01U.
� If the number of programs exceeds the allowable number, the settings are set to default.
� If the points exceeding 8K points are specified for S device, the setting is set to 8K points.
App - 122
Appendix 10.3 Restrictions when changing to Q00U, Q00UJ, Q01U, or Q02U
Appendix 10 Restrictions When Changing Programmable Controller Type
Changing from QnUDE(H)CPU
17
Item
Program Sequential Function Chart
PLC Parameter PLC System
PLC File Program Device
Table App.10.3-4
Restrictions
� If "Convert motion dedicated sequence instruction" is selected, D.instructions are converted to S.instructions. (Except for Q00UJ. Appendix 11)
: With restrictions
Project type
Simple project
Without With labels labels
Structured project
�
�
� The property setting "Act at Block Multi-Activated" is deleted.
�
�
�
�
� If a device that exceed the range of the Device setting is set
to "Latch Data Backup Operation Valid Contact", the setting
is deleted.
� If the capacity exceeds 16K points in "File used for
SP.DEVST/S.DEVLD Instruction", the setting is set to 16K
points for Q02U, and 1K points for Q00U, Q00UJ, and Q01U.
� If the number of programs exceeds the allowable number, the settings are set to default.
� If the points exceeding 8K points are specified for S device, the setting is set to 8K points.
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
MONITORING
18 19 20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
Appendix 10.3 Restrictions when changing to Q00U, Q00UJ, Q01U, or Q02U
App - 123
APPENDIX
Changing from High-speed Universal model QCPU
Item
Program Sequential Function Chart
Remote Password PLC Parameter
PLC System
PLC File Program
Device
Built-in Ethernet Port Setting
Block Password
Table App.10.3-5
Restrictions
� If "Convert motion dedicated sequence instruction" is selected, D.instructions are converted to S.instructions. (Except for Q00UJ.Appendix 11)
: With restrictions
Project type
Simple project
Without With labels labels
Structured project
�
�
� The property setting "Act at Block Multi-Activated" is deleted.
� Any existing settings are cleared.
�
�
�
�
� If a device that exceed the range of the Device setting is set
to "Latch Data Backup Operation Valid Contact", the setting
is deleted.
� If the capacity exceeds 16K points in "File used for
SP.DEVST/ S.DEVLD Instruction", the setting is set to 16K
points for Q02U, and 1K points for Q00U, Q00UJ, and Q01U.
� If the number of programs exceeds the allowable number, the settings are set to default.
� If the value exceeds the capacity of changed programmable
controller type is set for "File Register Extended Setting", the
maximum value is set and all points are set as file register
(ZR(R)). The setting of the latch range is cleared.
� If the points exceeding 8K points are specified for S device, the setting is set to 8K points.
� Any existing settings in "CC-Link IEF Basic Setting" are deleted.
� For a project including a block password for which the
execution program protection setting was enabled, the
programmable controller type cannot be changed to one
other than a high-speed universal model QCPU and an
LCPU.
App - 124
Appendix 10.3 Restrictions when changing to Q00U, Q00UJ, Q01U, or Q02U
Appendix 10 Restrictions When Changing Programmable Controller Type
Changing from Redundant CPU
17
Item
Program Sequential Function Chart
PLC Parameter PLC System
Program Boot File
I/O Assignment Network Parameter
Ethernet CC-Link
Table App.10.3-6
: With restrictions
Restrictions
� � The property settings "SFC Program Type Setting", "Periodic
Execution Block", "Act at Block Multi-Activated", and "Act at Step Multi-Activated" are deleted. � � If the constant scan time is set in the PLC RAS setting, "Execute it while waiting for constant scan setting" is set to the service processing setting in the PLC System setting. � If the number of programs exceeds the allowable number, the exceeding settings are deleted. � If "Standard ROM" is set to "Transfer from", it is changed to "Memory Card (ROM)". � Settings on the slot 0 are deleted. � If any slot after the slot 1 is set, "Empty" is set for "Type" and "0 Point" is set for "Points" on the slot 0. � � "Ethernet (Main Base)" or "Ethernet (Extension Base)" is changed to "Ethernet". � "Master station (Extension Base)" is changed to "Master Station".
Project type
Simple project
Without With labels labels
Structured project
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
MONITORING
18 19 20 21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
Appendix 10.3 Restrictions when changing to Q00U, Q00UJ, Q01U, or Q02U
App - 125
APPENDIX
Changing from Process CPU
Item
Program Sequential Function Chart
PLC Parameter PLC System
Program
Boot File
Table App.10.3-7
: With restrictions
Restrictions
� � The property settings "SFC Program Type Setting", "Periodic
Execution Block", "Act at Block Multi-Activated", and "Act at Step Multi-Activated" are deleted. � � If the constant scan time is set in the PLC RAS setting, "Execute it while waiting for constant scan setting" is set to the service processing setting in the PLC System setting. � If the number of programs exceeds the allowable number, the exceeding settings are deleted. � If "Low Speed" is set to "Execute Type" in the Program setting, it is changed to "Standby". � If "Standard ROM" is set to "Transfer from", it is changed to "Memory Card (ROM)".
Project type
Simple project
Without With labels labels
Structured project
�
�
�
�
�
�
Changing from Basic model QCPU
Table App.10.3-8
: With restrictions
Item
Restrictions
Project type
Simple project
Without With labels labels
Structured project
PLC Parameter
�
�
�
�
PLC File
� When changing from Q00 or Q01 to other than Q00UJ, "Use
the following file" is selected and "Corresponding Memory:
Standard RAM", "File Name: MAIN", and "Capacity: 64K
Points" are set in the File Register setting.
� When changing from Q00 or Q01 to Q00UJ, "Not Used" is selected in the File Register setting.
Device/Label Automatic- � When changing from Q00 or Q01 to Q00UJ, the default value
Assign Setting
is set.
�
App - 126
Appendix 10.3 Restrictions when changing to Q00U, Q00UJ, Q01U, or Q02U
Appendix 10 Restrictions When Changing Programmable Controller Type
Changing from LCPU
17
Item Program
Sequential Function Chart
Remote Password
PLC Parameter PLC System
PLC File
PLC RAS
Program Device I/O Assignment Built-in Ethernet Port Setting
Table App.10.3-9
: With restrictions
Restrictions �
Project type
Simple project
Without With labels labels
Structured project
�
�
�
� The property setting "Act at Block Multi-Activated" is deleted.
� When changing from L02/L02-P to Q00U or Q01U, the remote password set for the built-in Ethernet of CPU module is cleared.
� When changing from L02S/L02S-P or L02/L02-P to Q00U or
Q01U, the following settings are set.
� The settings of LJ71C24 are replaced to the settings of QJ71C24/CMO.
� The settings of LJ71E71 are replaced to the settings of QJ71E71.
�
�
�
�
� If "Start I/O No." in the interrupt pointer setting of the
intelligent function module setting is outside the range, the
setting is deleted.
� When changing to Q00UJ, if the number of points is outside
the range, its maximum point is set.
� When changing to Q00U, Q00UJ, or Q01U, if an item other than "Program Memory" or "Standard ROM" is set to "Corresponding Memory" in the initial device value setting, it is changed to "Program Memory".
� When changing to Q00U, Q00UJ, or Q01U, if the capacity
exceeds 1K points in "File used for SP.DEVST/S.DEVLD
Instruction", the setting is set to 1K point.
� When changing from L06/L06-P, L26/L26-P, or L26-BT/L26PBT to Q02U, if the capacity exceeds 16K points in "File used for SP.DEVST/ S.DEVLD Instruction", the setting is set to 16K points.
� When changing to Q00UJ, "System Memory" is set to "Corresponding Memory".
� When changing to Q00U, Q00UJ, or Q01U, if the number of
samplings is outside the range, its maximum number is set.
� When changing to Q00UJ, if the number of revisions is outside the range, its maximum number is set. If the number of revisions is less than '40', '40' is set.
� If the number of programs exceeds the allowable number, the exceeded programs are deleted.
� If the points exceeding 8K points are specified for S device, the setting is set to 8K points.
� Settings of "Built-in I/O Function Setting" and "Built-in CCLink Setting" are deleted.
� When changing from Built-in Ethernet port LCPU, any existing settings of "CC-Link IEF Basic Setting" are deleted.
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
MONITORING
18 19 20 21 22 A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
Appendix 10.3 Restrictions when changing to Q00U, Q00UJ, Q01U, or Q02U
App - 127
APPENDIX
Item Network Parameter
CC-Link IE Field Network
CC-Link
Block Password
Restrictions
�
� If the number of modules is one and "Start I/O No." is outside the range, its maximum value is set. If the number of modules is two, "Start I/O No." is set starting from 0000.
� The IP address setting of "Network Operation Settings" for CC IE Field (Master Station) is deleted.
� If "H/W Test" or "Loop Test" is set to "Mode", the setting is deleted.
� When changing to Q00UJ, or when changing from L06/L06P, L26/L26-P, or L26-BT/L26-PBT, if the number of modules is one and "Start I/O No." is outside the range, its maximum value is set. If the number of modules is two or more and the start I/O number is outside the range, "Start I/O No." is set starting from 0000.
� When changing from L06/L06-P, L26/L26-P, or L26-BT/L26PBT, if the number of slots exceeds the maximum number of slots of the changed programmable controller type, the exceeded setting is deleted.
� For a project including a block password for which the execution program protection setting was enabled, the programmable controller type cannot be changed to one other than a high-speed universal model QCPU and an LCPU.
Project type
Simple project
Without With labels labels
Structured project
�
�
�
App - 128
Appendix 10.3 Restrictions when changing to Q00U, Q00UJ, Q01U, or Q02U
Appendix 10 Restrictions When Changing Programmable Controller Type
Appendix 10.4 Restrictions when changing to QnUDE(H)CPU
17
MONITORING
The following tables show the restrictions applied when changing a programmable controller series/ type to QnUDE(H)CPU.
Changing from High Performance model QCPU
18
Item
Program Sequential Function Chart
PLC Parameter PLC System Program Boot File
Table App.10.4-1
: With restrictions
Restrictions
� If "Convert motion dedicated sequence instruction" is selected, S.instructions are converted to D.instructions. (Appendix 11)
� The property settings "SFC Program Type Setting", "Periodic Execution Block", and "Act at Step Multi-Activated" are deleted.
� � If the constant scan time is set in the PLC RAS setting,
"Execute it while waiting for constant scan setting" is set to the service processing setting in the PLC System setting. � If "Low speed" is set to "Execute Type" in the Program setting, it is changed to "Standby". � If "Standard ROM" is set to "Transfer from", it is changed to "Memory Card (ROM)".
Project type
Simple project
Without With labels labels
Structured project
�
�
�
�
�
Changing from Q00U, Q00UJ, Q01U, or Q02U
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
19 20 21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
Item Program Remote Password
Table App.10.4-2
Restrictions
� A series-compatible SM/SD devices (SM/SD1000 to SM/ SD1255) are changed to the corresponding devices for Q series.
� If "Convert motion dedicated sequence instruction" is selected, S.instructions are converted to D.instructions. (Appendix 11)
� Any existing settings are cleared.
: With restrictions
Project type
Simple project
Without With labels labels
Structured project
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
�
�
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
Appendix 10.4 Restrictions when changing to QnUDE(H)CPU
App - 129
APPENDIX
Changing from High-speed Universal model QCPU
Item PLC Parameter
Device
Built-in Ethernet Port Setting
Block Password
Table App.10.4-3
: With restrictions
Restrictions
�
� If the value exceeds the capacity of changed programmable controller type is set for "File Register Extended Setting", the maximum value is set and all points are set as file register (ZR(R)). The setting of the latch range is cleared.
� If "Communication protocol" is set to "Open System" for open setting, the settings of the rows are set to default.
� Any existing settings in "Ethernet Conf." are deleted. � Any existing settings in "CC-Link IEF Basic Setting" are
deleted.
� For a project including a block password for which the execution program protection setting was enabled, the programmable controller type cannot be changed to one other than a high-speed universal model QCPU and an LCPU.
Project type
Simple project
Without With labels labels
Structured project
�
�
�
Changing from Redundant CPU
Item
Program Sequential Function Chart
PLC Parameter PLC System
Boot File
I/O Assignment Network Parameter
Ethernet CC-Link
Table App.10.4-4
: With restrictions
Restrictions
Project type
Simple project
Without With labels labels
Structured project
�
�
�
�
� The property settings "SFC Program Type Setting", "Periodic
Execution Block", and "Act at Step Multi-Activated" are
deleted.
�
�
�
�
� If the constant scan time is set in the PLC RAS setting,
"Execute it while waiting for constant scan setting" is set to
the service processing setting in the PLC System setting.
� If "Standard ROM" is set to "Transfer from", it is changed to "Memory Card (ROM)".
� Settings on the slot 0 are deleted.
� If any slot after the slot 1 is set, "Empty" is set for "Type" and
"0 Point" is set for "Points" on the slot 0.
�
�
�
�
� "Ethernet (Main Base)" or "Ethernet (Extension Base)" is changed to "Ethernet".
� "Master station (Extension Base)" is changed to "Master Station".
App - 130
Appendix 10.4 Restrictions when changing to QnUDE(H)CPU
Appendix 10 Restrictions When Changing Programmable Controller Type
Changing from Process CPU
17
Item
Program Sequential Function Chart
PLC Parameter PLC System Program Boot File
Table App.10.4-5
: With restrictions
Restrictions
� If "Convert motion dedicated sequence instruction" is selected, S.instructions are converted to D.instructions. (Appendix 11)
� The property settings "SFC Program Type Setting", "Periodic Execution Block", and "Act at Step Multi-Activated" are deleted.
� � If the constant scan time is set in the PLC RAS setting,
"Execute it while waiting for constant scan setting" is set to the service processing setting in the PLC System setting. � If "Low Speed" is set to "Execute Type" in the Program setting, it is changed to "Standby". � If "Standard ROM" is set to "Transfer from", it is changed to "Memory Card (ROM)".
Project type
Simple project
Without With labels labels
Structured project
�
�
�
�
�
Changing from Basic model QCPU
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
MONITORING
18 19 20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
Item
Program PLC Parameter
PLC File
Table App.10.4-6
Restrictions
� If "Convert motion dedicated sequence instruction" is selected, S.instructions are converted to D.instructions. (Except for Q00J. Appendix 11)
� � When changing from Q00 or Q01, "Use the following file" is
selected and "Corresponding Memory: Standard RAM", "File Name: MAIN", and "Capacity: 64K Points" are set in the file register setting.
: With restrictions
Project type
Simple project
Without With labels labels
Structured project
�
�
�
�
�
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
21 22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
Appendix 10.4 Restrictions when changing to QnUDE(H)CPU
App - 131
APPENDIX
Changing from LCPU
Item
Remote Password
PLC Parameter I/O Assignment Built-in Ethernet Port Setting
Network Parameter CC-Link IE Field Network CC-Link
Block Password
Table App.10.4-7
: With restrictions
Restrictions
� When changing from L02S/L02S-P or L02/L02-P, any existing settings are cleared.
� When changing from L06/L06-P, L26/L26-P, or L26-BT/L26PBT, the following settings are set. � The settings of the built-in Ethernet are replaced to the settings appropriate for the changed programmable controller type. � The settings of LJ71C24 are replaced to the settings of QJ71C24/CMO. � The settings of LJ71E71 are replaced to the settings of QJ71E71.
�
� Settings of "Built-in I/O Function Setting" and "Built-in CCLink Setting" are deleted.
� Any existing settings of "Ethernet Conf." are deleted. � When changing from Built-in Ethernet port LCPU, any
existing settings of "CC-Link IEF Basic Setting" are deleted.
�
� If the number of modules is one and "Start I/O No." is outside the range, its maximum value is set. If the number of modules is two, "Start I/O No." is set starting from 0000.
� If "H/W Test" or "Loop Test" is set to "Mode", the setting is deleted.
� For a project including a block password for which the execution program protection setting was enabled, the programmable controller type cannot be changed to one other than a high-speed universal model QCPU and an LCPU.
Project type
Simple project
Without With labels labels
Structured project
�
�
�
�
�
�
App - 132
Appendix 10.4 Restrictions when changing to QnUDE(H)CPU
Appendix 10 Restrictions When Changing Programmable Controller Type
Appendix 10.5 Restrictions when changing to High-speed Universal 17
model QCPU
MONITORING
The following tables show the restrictions applied when changing a programmable controller series/ type to High-speed Universal model QCPU.
18
Changing from High Performance model QCPU
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
Item
Program
Sequential Function Chart PLC Parameter PLC System
Program Boot File
Table App.10.5-1
: With restrictions
Restrictions
� If "Convert motion dedicated sequence instruction" is selected, S.instructions are converted to D.instructions. (Appendix 11)
� The property settings of "SFC Program Type Setting", "Periodic Execution Block", and "Act at Step Multi-Activated" are deleted.
� � If the constant scan time is set in the PLC RAS setting,
"Execute it while waiting for constant scan setting" is set to the service processing setting in the PLC System setting. � If "Low speed" is set to "Execute Type" in the Program setting, it is changed to "Standby". � The setting of "Transfer From" is set to "Memory Card (SD)".
Project type
Simple project
Without With labels labels
Structured project
�
�
�
�
�
Changing from Q00U, Q00UJ, Q01U, or Q02U
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
19 20 21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
Item Program Remote Password
Table App.10.5-2
Restrictions
� A series-compatible SM/SD devices (SM/SD1000 to SM/ SD1255) are changed to the corresponding devices for Q series.
� If "Convert motion dedicated sequence instruction" is selected, S.instructions are converted to D.instructions. (Appendix 11)
� Any existing settings are cleared.
: With restrictions
Project type
Simple project
Without With labels labels
Structured project
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
�
�
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
Appendix 10.5 Restrictions when changing to High-speed Universal model QCPU
App - 133
APPENDIX
Changing from QnUD(H)CPU
Item
PLC Parameter Boot File
Table App.10.5-3
: With restrictions
Restrictions
� � The setting of "Transfer From" is set to "Memory Card (SD)".
Project type
Simple project
Without With labels labels
Structured project
�
�
�
Changing from QnUDE(H)CPU
Item
PLC Parameter Boot File
Table App.10.5-4
: With restrictions
Restrictions
Project type
Simple project
Without With labels labels
Structured project
�
�
�
�
� The setting of "Transfer From" is set to "Memory Card (SD)".
Changing from Redundant CPU
Item
Program Sequential Function Chart
PLC Parameter PLC System Boot File I/O Assignment
Network Parameter Ethernet CC-Link
Table App.10.5-5
: With restrictions
Restrictions
Project type
Simple project
Without With labels labels
Structured project
�
�
�
�
� The property settings of "SFC Program Type Setting",
"Periodic Execution Block", and "Act at Step Multi-Activated"
are deleted.
�
�
�
�
� If the constant scan time is set in the PLC RAS setting,
"Execute it while waiting for constant scan setting" is set to
the service processing setting in the PLC System setting.
� The setting of "Transfer From" is set to "Memory Card (SD)".
� Settings on the slot 0 are deleted.
� If any slot after the slot 1 is set, "Empty" is set for "Type" and
"0 Point" is set for "Points" on the slot 0.
�
�
�
�
� "Ethernet (Main Base)" or "Ethernet (Extension Base)" is changed to "Ethernet".
� "Master station (Extension Base)" is changed to "Master Station".
App - 134
Appendix 10.5 Restrictions when changing to High-speed Universal model QCPU
Appendix 10 Restrictions When Changing Programmable Controller Type
Changing from Process CPU
17
Item
Program
Sequential Function Chart PLC Parameter PLC System
Program Boot File
Table App.10.5-6
: With restrictions
Restrictions
If "Convert motion dedicated sequence instruction" is selected, S.instructions are converted to D.instructions. (Appendix 11) � The property settings of "SFC Program Type Setting",
"Periodic Execution Block", and "Act at Step Multi-Activated" are deleted. � � If the constant scan time is set in the PLC RAS setting, "Execute it while waiting for constant scan setting" is set to the service processing setting in the PLC System setting. � If "Low Speed" is set to "Execute Type" in the Program setting, it is changed to "Standby". � "Transfer from" is set to "Memory Card (SD)".
Project type
Simple project
Without With labels labels
Structured project
�
�
�
�
�
Changing from Basic model QCPU
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
MONITORING
18 19 20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
Item
Remote Password PLC Parameter
PLC File
Boot File
Table App.10.5-7
: With restrictions
Restrictions
Project type
Simple project
Without With labels labels
Structured project
If "Convert motion dedicated sequence instruction" is selected,
S.instructions are converted to D.instructions.
�
�
(Except for Q00J.Appendix 11)
�
�
�
�
� When changing from Q00 or Q01, "Use the following file" is
selected and "Corresponding Memory: Standard RAM", "File Name: MAIN", and "Capacity: 64K Points" are set in the file
register setting.
If "Do boot from standard ROM" is selected before changing the
programmable controller type, "Type: Sequence", "Data Name: MAIN", "Transfer From: Memory Card (ROM)", and "Transfer
To: Program Memory" are set.
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
21 22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
Appendix 10.5 Restrictions when changing to High-speed Universal model QCPU
App - 135
APPENDIX
Changing from LCPU
Item
Remote Password
PLC Parameter I/O Assignment
Network Parameter CC-Link IE Field Network CC-Link
Table App.10.5-8
: With restrictions
Restrictions
� When changing from L02S/L02S-P or L02/L02-P, any existing settings are cleared.
� When changing from L06/L06-P, L26/L26-P, or L26-BT/L26PBT, the following settings are set. � The settings of the built-in Ethernet are replaced to the settings appropriate for the changed programmable controller type. � The settings of LJ71C24 are replaced to the settings of QJ71C24/CMO. � The settings of LJ71E71 are replaced to the settings of QJ71E71.
�
� Settings of "Built-in I/O Function Setting" and "Built-in CCLink Setting" are deleted.
�
� If the number of modules is one and "Start I/O No." is outside the range, its maximum value is set. If the number of modules is two or more, "Start I/O No." is set starting from 0000.
� If "H/W Test" or "Loop Test" is set to "Mode", the setting is deleted.
Project type
Simple project
Without With labels labels
Structured project
�
�
�
�
�
�
App - 136
Appendix 10.5 Restrictions when changing to High-speed Universal model QCPU
Appendix 10 Restrictions When Changing Programmable Controller Type
Appendix 10.6 Restrictions when changing to Redundant CPU
17
MONITORING
The following tables show the restrictions applied when changing a programmable controller series/ type to Redundant CPU.
Common restrictions when changing to Redundant CPU
Item Program
Ladder PLC Parameter
I/O Assignment Network Parameter
Ethernet
CC-Link IE Controller Network CC-Link
Table App.10.6-1
: With restrictions
Restrictions
�
� A series-compatible SM/SD devices (SM/SD1000 to SM/SD1255) are changed to the corresponding devices for Q series.
� Unsupported instructions are changed to the OUT instructions.
�
� Settings on the slot 0 are deleted. � "Redundant" is set for "Type" and "0 Point" is set for "Points"
on the slot 0. Note that, if the slot 0 is set, "Type" of the slot 0 on the Switch Setting for I/O and Intelligent Function Module screen and the Intelligent Function Module Detailed Setting screen is set to "Empty".
�
� "Ethernet" is changed to "Ethernet (Main Base)". � Set a number (system A station number + 1) for the system B
station number. If the system A station number is 64, set 1. � Assign the IP address as indicated below according to the
address of system A. � If the address of system A is 255.255.255.255, assign the
same address to the system B. � If the address of system A is 0.0.0.255 or
255.255.255.254, assign 192.0.1.254 to the system B. � If the address of system A is *.*.*.254, assign *.*.*.253 to
the system B. (*.*.*. is the same numerical string for system A and B.) � If the address of system A is *.*.*.255, assign *.*.*.254 to the system B. (*.*.*. is the same numerical string for system A and B.) � If the address of system A is other than any of the above addresses, assign the address (4th number of system A address + 1) to the system B.
� If the station number is 64, 63 is set. If 63 is set on the higher number side in the network range assignment setting, "Disable" is set for "Pairing".
� "Master Station" is changed to "Master station (Extension Base)".
Project type
Simple project
Without With labels labels
Structured project
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
18 19 20 21 22 A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
Appendix 10.6 Restrictions when changing to Redundant CPU
App - 137
APPENDIX
Changing from High-speed Universal model QCPU
Item
Remote Password PLC Parameter
Device
Built-in Ethernet Port Setting
Table App.10.6-2
: With restrictions
Restrictions
� Only the settings of Ethernet Built-in CPU are cleared. � � If the value exceeds the capacity of changed programmable
controller type is set for "File Register Extended Setting", the maximum value is set and all points are set as file register (ZR(R)). The setting of the latch range is cleared.
Project type
Simple project
Without With labels labels
Structured project
�
�
�
� Any existing settings of "CC-Link IEF Basic Setting" are deleted.
Changing from Process CPU
Item PLC Parameter
PLC RAS
Program
Table App.10.6-3
Restrictions
� � If the value of "Capacity to be checked at one time" under
"Memory Check" exceeds the maximum value, set the maximum value. � If "Low Speed" is set to "Execute Type" in the Program setting, it is changed to "Standby". � If the number of programs exceeds the allowable number, the exceeding settings are deleted.
: With restrictions
Project type
Simple project
Without With labels labels
Structured project
�
�
�
Changing from LCPU
Item
PLC Parameter Built-in Ethernet Port Setting
Block Password
Table App.10.6-4
Restrictions
� � When changing from Built-in Ethernet port LCPU, any
existing settings of "CC-Link IEF Basic Setting" are deleted. � For a project including a block password for which the
execution program protection setting was enabled, the programmable controller type cannot be changed to one other than a high-speed universal model QCPU and an LCPU.
: With restrictions
Project type
Simple project
Without With labels labels
Structured project
�
�
�
App - 138
Appendix 10.6 Restrictions when changing to Redundant CPU
Appendix 10 Restrictions When Changing Programmable Controller Type
Appendix 10.7 Restrictions when changing to Process CPU
17
MONITORING
The following tables show the restrictions applied when changing a programmable controller series/ type to Process CPU.
Common restrictions when changing to Process CPU
18
Item
PLC Parameter Program
Table App.10.7-1
Restrictions
� � If the number of programs exceeds the allowable number,
the exceeding settings are deleted.
: With restrictions
Project type
Simple project
Without With labels labels
Structured project
�
�
�
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
19
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
Changing from High-speed Universal model QCPU or Universal model
process CPU
20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
Table App.10.7-2
: With restrictions
Item Remote Password
Restrictions � Only the settings of Ethernet Built-in CPU are cleared.
Project type
Simple project
Without With labels labels
Structured project
21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
PLC Parameter
�
�
�
�
Device
� If the value exceeds the capacity of changed programmable
controller type is set for "File Register Extended Setting", the maximum value is set and all points are set as file register
(ZR(R)). The setting of the latch range is cleared.
Built-in Ethernet Port � Any existing settings of "CC-Link IEF Basic Setting" are
Setting
deleted.
22
Block Password
� For a project including a block password for which the
execution program protection setting was enabled, the
programmable controller type cannot be changed to one
other than a high-speed universal model QCPU and an
LCPU.
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
Appendix 10.7 Restrictions when changing to Process CPU
App - 139
APPENDIX
Changing from Redundant CPU
Item
PLC Parameter PC RAS
I/O Assignment Network Parameter
Ethernet CC-Link
Table App.10.7-3
: With restrictions
Restrictions
� � If the value of "Capacity to be checked at one time" under
"Memory Check" exceeds the maximum value, set the maximum value. � Settings on the slot 0 are deleted. � If any slot after the slot 1 is set, "Empty" is set for "Type" and "0 Point" is set for "Points" on the slot 0. � � "Ethernet (Main Base)" or "Ethernet (Extension Base)" is changed to "Ethernet". � "Master station (Extension Base)" is changed to "Master Station".
Project type
Simple project
Without With labels labels
Structured project
�
�
�
�
�
�
Changing from LCPU
Item
PLC Parameter Built-in Ethernet Port Setting
Block Password
Table App.10.7-4
Restrictions
� � When changing from Built-in Ethernet port LCPU, any
existing settings of "CC-Link IEF Basic Setting" are deleted. � For a project including a block password for which the
execution program protection setting was enabled, the programmable controller type cannot be changed to one other than a high-speed universal model QCPU and an LCPU.
: With restrictions
Project type
Simple project
Without With labels labels
Structured project
�
�
�
App - 140
Appendix 10.7 Restrictions when changing to Process CPU
Appendix 10 Restrictions When Changing Programmable Controller Type
Appendix 10.8 Restrictions when changing to High Performance
17
model QCPU
MONITORING
The following tables show the restrictions applied when changing a programmable controller series/ type to High Performance model QCPU.
18
Changing from Universal model QCPU
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
Item
Program Device comment Remote Password PLC Parameter
PLC System PLC File Program Device Network Parameter Ethernet
CC-Link IE Controller Network
MELSECNET/10(H)
Table App.10.8-1
: With restrictions
Restrictions
� If "Convert motion dedicated sequence instruction" is selected, D.instructions are converted to S.instructions. (Except for Q00U, Q00UJ, Q01U, and Q02U. Appendix 11)
Bit-specified word device comments are deleted.
Only the settings of Ethernet Built-in CPU are cleared.
�
� The setting value of "High Speed" in the timer limit setting is rounded up to the range 0.1 to 100ms. (Example: 0.01ms 0.1ms)
� If the capacity of the file register exceeds 1019K points, the setting is set to 1018K points.
� When changing to Q02, Q02H, or Q06H, the Program setting and file usability setting for programs exceed the supported program number are deleted.
� 8K is specified for S device.
�
� In the news setting in the E-mail setting, condition devices outside the device range in the changed programmable controller type are deleted.
� The third and later CC-Link IE Controller Network modules in the module setting are deleted.
� Modules whose station numbers are set in programs ("Specify station No. by program") are deleted.
� When "Total stations" is 65 or more, 64 is set. � The 65th and later settings are deleted in the network range
assignment setting. � The 65th and later I/O master stations are deleted in the LX/
LY setting in the network range assignment setting. � When '0800' or larger is specified for "Start" of SB/SW in the
PLC side device range in the refresh parameters setting, the specified range is deleted. When '0800' or larger is specified for "End" of SB/SW, it is replaced to '07FF'. Devices out of the range are also deleted. � The settings of "Network Operation Settings" are deleted.
� When '0800' or larger is specified for "Start" of SB/SW in the PLC side device range in the refresh parameters setting, the specified range is deleted. When '0800' or larger is specified for "End" of SB/SW, it is replaced to '07FF'. Devices out of the range are also deleted.
Project type
Simple project
Without With labels labels
Structured project
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
APPENDIX
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
19 20 21 22 A I
INDEX
Appendix 10.8 Restrictions when changing to High Performance model QCPU
App - 141
APPENDIX
Changing from Redundant CPU
Item
PLC Parameter Program
I/O Assignment Network Parameter
Ethernet CC-Link
Table App.10.8-2
: With restrictions
Restrictions
� � If the number of programs exceeds the allowable number,
the exceeding settings are deleted. � Settings on the slot 0 are deleted. � If any slot after the slot 1 is set, "Empty" is set for "Type" and
"0 Point" is set for "Points" on the slot 0. � � "Ethernet (Main Base)" or "Ethernet (Extension Base)" is
changed to "Ethernet". � "Master station (Extension Base)" is changed to "Master
Station".
Project type
Simple project
Without With labels labels
Structured project
�
�
�
�
�
�
Changing from Process CPU
Table App.10.8-3
Item PLC Parameter
Program
Restrictions
� � If "Low Speed" is set to "Execute Type" in the Program
setting, it is changed to "Standby". � If the number of programs exceeds the allowable number,
the exceeding settings are deleted.
: With restrictions
Project type
Simple project
Without With labels labels
Structured project
�
�
�
App - 142
Appendix 10.8 Restrictions when changing to High Performance model QCPU
Appendix 10 Restrictions When Changing Programmable Controller Type
Changing from Basic model QCPU
17
Item PLC Parameter
PLC File
Table App.10.8-4
: With restrictions
Restrictions
� � When changing from Q00 or Q01, "Use the following file" is
selected and "Corresponding Memory: Standard RAM", "File Name: MAIN", and "Capacity: 64K Points" are set in the file register setting.
Project type
Simple project
Without With labels labels
Structured project
�
�
�
MONITORING
18
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
Changing from High-speed Universal model QCPU
19
Table App.10.8-5
Item
Restrictions
PLC Parameter Built-in Ethernet Port Setting
Block Password
�
� Any existing settings of "CC-Link IEF Basic Setting" are deleted.
� For a project including a block password for which the execution program protection setting was enabled, the programmable controller type cannot be changed to one other than a high-speed universal model QCPU and an LCPU.
: With restrictions
Project type
Simple project
Without With labels labels
Structured project
�
�
�
20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
21
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
Appendix 10.8 Restrictions when changing to High Performance model QCPU
App - 143
APPENDIX
Changing from LCPU
Item Device comment
Remote Password
PLC Parameter Boot File Program Device I/O Assignment Built-in Ethernet Port Setting
Network Parameter CC-Link
Block Password
Table App.10.8-6
Restrictions
Bit-specified word device comments are deleted. � When changing from L02S/L02S-P or L02/L02-P, any
existing settings are cleared. � When changing from L06/L06-P, L26/L26-P, or L26-BT/L26-
PBT, the following settings are set. � The settings of the built-in Ethernet are cleared. � The settings of LJ71C24 are replaced to the settings of
QJ71C24/CMO. � The settings of LJ71E71 are replaced to the settings of
QJ71E71. � � When changing from L02/L02-P, L06/L06-P, L26/L26-P, or
L26-BT/L26- PBT, if 'Symbolic Information' is set to "Type", the setting is deleted. If "Standard ROM" is set to "Transfer To", it is changed to "Program Memory". � If the number of programs exceeds the allowable number, the exceeded programs are deleted. � 8K is specified for S device. � Settings of "Built-in I/O Function Setting" and "Built-in CCLink Setting" are deleted.
� When changing from Built-in Ethernet port LCPU, any existing settings of "CC-Link IEF Basic Setting" are deleted.
� � If "H/W Test" or "Loop Test" is set to "Mode", the setting is
deleted. � For a project including a block password for which the
execution program protection setting was enabled, the programmable controller type cannot be changed to one other than a high-speed universal model QCPU and an LCPU.
: With restrictions
Project type
Simple project
Without With labels labels
Structured project
�
�
�
�
�
�
App - 144
Appendix 10.8 Restrictions when changing to High Performance model QCPU
Appendix 10 Restrictions When Changing Programmable Controller Type
Appendix 10.9 Restrictions when changing to Basic model QCPU
17
MONITORING
The following tables show the restrictions applied when changing a programmable controller series/ type to Basic model QCPU.
Common restrictions when changing to Basic model QCPU
Table App.10.9-1
: With restrictions
Item
Program
Device Initial Value
Global Device Comment Remote Password PLC Parameter
PLC File Device/Label AutomaticAssign Setting
Restrictions
� When changing to Q00J, file registers (R/ZR) are changed to SD999.
� If the name of the device initial value data is other than 'MAIN', the file is deleted.
� If the setting exceeds the editable range of device initial values in the changed programmable controller type, the exceeding range is deleted.
� Global device comments are deleted. � Any existing settings are cleared. � � If an item other than "Not Used" is set in the initial device
value setting, it is changed to "Used". � If the Device setting or the setting for the file register capacity
in the PLC File setting in the PLC parameter is changed, the default value is set.
Project type
Simple project
Without With labels labels
Structured project
�
�
�
�
�
�
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
18 19 20 21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
Appendix 10.9 Restrictions when changing to Basic model QCPU
App - 145
APPENDIX
Changing from High Performance model QCPU
Item Program
Ladder Diagram
Sequential Function Chart
PLC Parameter PLC System Boot File
Table App.10.9-2
: With restrictions
Restrictions
�
� If instructions not supported by the changed programmable controller type are used, they are deleted and displayed in yellow.
� The property settings "SFC Program Type Setting", "Periodic Execution Block", "Act at Block Multi-Activated" and "Act at Step Multi-Activated" are deleted.
� The block title in the property setting is deleted. � If device points not supported by Q00J/Q00/Q01 are used for
"Block Information" in the property setting, the setting is deleted.
�
� The setting values of "Fixed Scan Interval" are rounded out to the one in "System Interrupt Settings".
� If "Type: Sequence", "Data Name: MAIN", "Transfer From: Standard ROM", and "Transfer To: Program Memory" are set before changing the programmable controller type, "Do boot from standard ROM" is selected.
Project type
Simple project
Without With labels labels
Structured project
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
App - 146
Appendix 10.9 Restrictions when changing to Basic model QCPU
Appendix 10 Restrictions When Changing Programmable Controller Type
Changing from Universal model QCPU
17
Item
Program
Ladder Diagram
Sequential Function Chart Device comment PLC Parameter
PLC System
Boot File Device Built-in Ethernet Port Setting
Block Password
Table App.10.9-3
: With restrictions
Restrictions
� If "Convert motion dedicated sequence instruction" is selected, D.instructions are converted to S.instructions. (Except for Q00U, Q00UJ, Q01U, and Q02U. Appendix 11)
� If instructions not supported by the changed programmable controller type are used, they are deleted and displayed in yellow.
� The property setting "Act at Block Multi-Activated" is deleted. � The property setting "Block Setting" is deleted. � If device points not supported by Q00J/Q00/Q01 are used,
the setting is deleted. Bit-specified word device comments are deleted. � � The setting value is rounded out to the tenth in "Timer Limit
Setting (High Speed)". � The setting values of "Fixed Scan Interval" are rounded out
to the one in "System Interrupt Settings". � Any specified settings are deleted. � 2K is set for S device.
Project type
Simple project
Without With labels labels
Structured project
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
� Any existing settings of "CC-Link IEF Basic Setting" are deleted.
� For a project including a block password for which the
execution program protection setting was enabled, the
programmable controller type cannot be changed to one
other than a high-speed universal model QCPU and an
LCPU.
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
MONITORING
18 19 20 21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
Appendix 10.9 Restrictions when changing to Basic model QCPU
App - 147
APPENDIX
Changing from Redundant CPU
Item Program
Ladder Diagram
Sequential Function Chart
PLC Parameter PLC System
Boot File
Program I/O Assignment Network Parameter Ethernet CC-Link
Table App.10.9-4
: With restrictions
Restrictions
�
� If instructions not supported by the changed programmable controller type are used, they are deleted and displayed in yellow.
� The property settings "SFC Program Type Setting", "Periodic Execution Block", "Act at Block Multi-Activated" and "Act at Step Multi-Activated" are deleted.
� The block title in the property setting is deleted. � If device points not supported by Q00J/Q00/Q01 are used for
"Block Information" in the property setting, the setting is deleted.
�
� The setting values of "Fixed Scan Interval" are rounded out to the one in "System Interrupt Settings".
� If "Type: Sequence", "Data Name: MAIN", "Transfer From: Standard ROM", and "Transfer To: Program Memory" are set before changing the programmable controller type, "Do boot from standard ROM" is selected.
� If the number of programs exceeds the allowable number, the exceeding settings are deleted.
� Settings on the slot 0 are deleted. � If any slot after the slot 1 is set, "Empty" is set for "Type" and
"0 Point" is set for "Points" on the slot 0.
�
� "Ethernet (Main Base)" or "Ethernet (Extension Base)" is changed to "Ethernet".
� "Master station (Extension Base)" is changed to "Master Station".
Project type
Simple project
Without With labels labels
Structured project
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
App - 148
Appendix 10.9 Restrictions when changing to Basic model QCPU
Appendix 10 Restrictions When Changing Programmable Controller Type
Changing from Process CPU
17
Item Program
Ladder Diagram
Sequential Function Chart
PLC Parameter PLC System Boot File
Table App.10.9-5
: With restrictions
Restrictions
�
� If instructions not supported by the changed programmable controller type are used, they are deleted and displayed in yellow.
� The property settings "SFC Program Type Setting", "Periodic Execution Block", "Act at Block Multi-Activated" and "Act at Step Multi-Activated" are deleted.
� The block title in the property setting is deleted. � If device points not supported by Q00J/Q00/Q01 are used for
"Block Information" in the property setting, the setting is deleted.
�
� The setting values of "Fixed Scan Interval" are rounded out to the one in "System Interrupt Settings".
� If "Type: Sequence", "Data Name: MAIN", "Transfer From: Standard ROM", and "Transfer To: Program Memory" are set before changing the programmable controller type, "Do boot from standard ROM" is selected.
Project type
Simple project
Without With labels labels
Structured project
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
MONITORING
18 19 20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
Appendix 10.9 Restrictions when changing to Basic model QCPU
App - 149
APPENDIX
Changing from LCPU
Item Program
Sequential Function Chart Device comment PLC Parameter PLC System
Boot File Device I/O Assignment Built-in Ethernet Port Setting Network Parameter
CC-Link
Block Password
Table App.10.9-6
: With restrictions
Restrictions �
Project type
Simple project
Without With labels labels
Structured project
�
�
�
� The property setting "Act at Block Multi-Activated" is deleted.
Bit-specified word device comments are deleted.
�
�
�
�
� If "Start I/O No." in the interrupt pointer setting of the
intelligent function module setting is outside the range, the
setting is deleted.
� When changing to Q00J, if the number of points is outside
the range, its maximum point is set.
� If "Type: Sequence", "Data Name: MAIN", "Transfer From:
Standard ROM", and "Transfer To: Program Memory" are set before changing the programmable controller type, "Do boot
from standard ROM" is selected.
� S device is set to 2K points.
� Settings of "Built-in I/O Function Setting" and "Built-in CCLink Setting" are deleted.
� When changing from Built-in Ethernet port LCPU, any existing settings of "CC-Link IEF Basic Setting" are deleted.
�
�
�
�
� If "H/W Test" or "Loop Test" is set to "Mode", the setting is deleted.
� When changing to Q00J, or when changing from L06/L06-P,
L26/L26-P, or L26-BT/L26-PBT, if the number of modules is
one and "Start I/O No." is outside the range, its maximum
value is set. If the number of modules is two or more and the start I/O number is outside the range, "Start I/O No." is set
starting from 0000.
� When changing from L06/L06-P, L26/L26-P, or L26-BT/L26PBT, if the number of slots exceeds the maximum number of slots of the changed programmable controller type, the exceeded setting is deleted.
� For a project including a block password for which the
execution program protection setting was enabled, the
programmable controller type cannot be changed to one
other than a high-speed universal model QCPU and an
LCPU.
App - 150
Appendix 10.9 Restrictions when changing to Basic model QCPU
Appendix 10 Restrictions When Changing Programmable Controller Type
Appendix 10.10Restrictions when changing to LCPU
17
MONITORING
The following tables show the restrictions applied when changing a programmable controller series/ type to LCPU.
Common restrictions when changing to LCPU
Item PLC Parameter
PLC System
PLC File Program Device
I/O Assignment Network Parameter
Ethernet CC-Link
Table App.10.10-1
: With restrictions
Restrictions
�
� If "Start I/O No." in the interrupt pointer setting of the intelligent function module setting is outside the range, the setting is deleted.
� When changing to L02S/L02S-P or L02/L02-P, if "Backup Start Setup Contact" and "Backup Start Contact" in the PLC module change setting are outside the range, the device settings are deleted.
� If "Use the same file name as the program" is set in the file register setting, it is changed to "Not Used".
� If an item other than "Memory Card (ROM)" and "Standard ROM" is set to "Corresponding Memory" in the comment file used in a comment setting, it is changed to "Memory Card (SD)".
� If "Memory Card (RAM)" is set to "Corresponding Memory" in the initial device value setting, it is changed to "Memory Card (SD)".
� If "Low Speed" is set to "Execute Type" in the Program setting, it is changed to "Standby".
� If the capacity of the file register setting before changing the programmable controller type exceeds the maximum capacity of the setting of the changed programmable controller type, the following settings are set. � The number of normal device points is set to default. � The number of extended device points is set to the maximum point that can be set for file register. � The settings for Latch (1) and Latch (2) are initialized.
� When changing to L02S/L02S-P, L02/L02-P, L06/L06-P, or L26/L26-P, "Type" of the slot 1 is set to "Built-in I/O Function", and "Points" is set to "16 Points". All settings of start XY are deleted.
� When changing to L26-BT/L26-PBT, "Type" of the slot 1 is set to "Built-in I/O Function", and "Points" is set to "32 Points". All settings of start XY are deleted.
�
� When changing to L02S/L02S-P or L02/L02-P, the second and later Ethernet modules in the module settings are deleted.
� When changing to L06, L26, or L26-BT/L26-PBT, the third and later Ethernet modules in the module settings are deleted.
� When changing to L02S/L02S-P or L02/L02-P, if the number of modules is one and "Start I/O No." is outside the range, its maximum value is set. If the number of modules is two or more and the start I/O number is outside the range, "Start I/ O No." is set starting from 0000.
Project type
Simple project
Without With labels labels
Structured project
�
�
�
�
�
�
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
APPENDIX
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
18 19 20 21 22 A I
INDEX
Appendix 10.10 Restrictions when changing to LCPU
App - 151
APPENDIX
Item
Device/Label AutomaticAssign Setting
Restrictions
� If the Device setting or the setting for the file register capacity in the PLC File setting in the PLC parameter is changed, the default value is set.
Project type
Simple project
Without With labels labels
Structured project
�
Changing from High Performance model QCPU
Item Program
Sequential Function Chart
Remote Password
PLC Parameter Boot File PLC System Program
Network Parameter CC-Link
Table App.10.10-2
: With restrictions
Project type
Restrictions
Simple project
Without With labels labels
Structured project
�
�
�
�
� When changing to L02S/L02S-P or L02/L02-P, property
settings "SFC Program Type Setting", "Periodic Execution
Block", "Act at Block Multi-Activated", and "Act at Step Multi-
Activated" are deleted. � When changing to L06/L06-P, L26/L26-P, or L26-BT/L26-
PBT, property settings "SFC Program Type Setting",
"Periodic Execution Block", and "Act at Step Multi-Activated"
are deleted.
� When changing to L02S/L02S-P or L02/L02-P, any existing settings are cleared.
� When changing to L06/L06-P, L26/L26-P, or L26-BT/L26PBT, the following settings are set.
� The settings of the Ethernet module are cleared.
� The settings of QJ71C24/CMO are replaced to the settings of LJ71C24.
� The settings of QJ71E71 are replaced to the settings of LJ71E71.
�
�
�
�
� When changing to L02/L02-P, L06/L06-P, L26/L26-P, or L26-
BT/L26-PBT, the setting of "Transfer From" in the Boot File
setting is changed to "Memory Card (SD)".
� When changing to L02S/L02S-P or L02/L02-P, if the number of points is outside the range, its maximum point is set.
� If the number of programs exceeds the allowable number, the exceeded programs are deleted.
�
�
�
�
� If the number of slots exceeds the maximum number of slots
of the changed programmable controller type, the exceeded
setting is deleted.
App - 152
Appendix 10.10 Restrictions when changing to LCPU
Appendix 10 Restrictions When Changing Programmable Controller Type
Changing from QnUD(H)CPU
17
Item Program
Sequential Function Chart Remote Password PLC Parameter Boot File Device PLC System
PLC File
Program Network Parameter
CC-Link IE Field Network CC-Link
Table App.10.10-3
: With restrictions
Project type
Restrictions
Simple project
Without With labels labels
Structured project
�
�
�
�
� When changing to L02S/L02S-P or L02/L02-P, the property setting "Act at Block Multi-Activated" is deleted.
� When changing to L02S/L02S-P or L02/L02-P, any existing settings are cleared.
� When changing to L06/L06-P, L26/L26-P, or L26-BT/L26PBT, the settings of Ethernet module are deleted. The
settings of QJ71C24/CMO are replaced to the settings of
LJ71C24.
�
�
�
�
� When changing to L02/L02-P, L06/L06-P, L26/L26-P, or L26-
BT/L26-PBT, the setting of "Transfer From" in the Boot File
setting is changed to "Memory Card (SD)".
� When changing to L02S/L02S-P or L02/L02-P, if the points
that exceeds 8K points are specified for S device, the setting
is set to 8K points.
� When changing to L02S/L02S-P or L02/L02-P, if the number of points is outside the range, its maximum point is set.
� If the file capacity of file register is outside the range, its maximum capacity is set, and the drive is changed to "Standard RAM".
� When changing to L02/L02-P, L06/L06-P, L26/L26-P, or L26-
BT/L26-PBT, if "Memory Card (RAM)" is set to
"Corresponding Memory" in the initial device value setting, it
is changed to "Memory Card (SD)". � When changing to L02S/L02S-P, if an item other than
"Program Memory" or "Standard ROM" is set to
"Corresponding Memory" in the initial device value setting, it
is changed to "Standard ROM".
� When changing to L02S/L02S-P or L02/L02-P, if the capacity exceeds 16K points in "File used for SP.DEVST/S.DEVLD Instruction", the setting is set to 16K point.
� If the number of programs exceeds the allowable number, the exceeded programs are deleted.
�
�
�
�
� If the number of modules is one and "Start I/O No." is outside
the range, its maximum value is set. If the number of
modules is two, "Start I/O No." is set starting from 0000.
� If the number of slots exceeds the maximum number of slots
of the changed programmable controller type, the exceeded
setting is deleted.
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
MONITORING
18 19 20 21 22 A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
Appendix 10.10 Restrictions when changing to LCPU
App - 153
APPENDIX
Changing from Q00U, Q00UJ, Q01U, or Q02U
Item
Remote Password
PLC Parameter Boot File PLC System
PLC File Network Parameter
CC-Link IE Field Network
CC-Link
Table App.10.10-4
: With restrictions
Project type
Restrictions
Simple project
Without With labels labels
Structured project
� When changing from Q00U or Q01U to L02S/L02S-P or L02/ L02-P, the following settings are set.
� The settings of QJ71C24/CMO are replaced to the settings of LJ71C24.
� The settings of QJ71E71 are replaced to the settings of LJ71E71.
� When changing from Q00UJ or Q02U to L02S/L02S-P or L02/L02-P, any existing settings are cleared.
� When changing to L06/L06-P, L26/L26-P, or L26-BT/L26PBT, any existing settings are cleared.
�
�
�
�
� When changing from Q02U to L02/L02-P, L06/L06-P, L26/
L26-P, or L26- BT/L26-PBT, the setting of "Transfer From" in
the Boot File setting is changed to "Memory Card (SD)".
� When changing from Q00U, Q01U, or Q02U to L02S/L02S-P
or L02/L02-P, if the number of points is outside the range, its
maximum point is set.
� When changing from Q02U, if "Start I/O No." in the interrupt
pointer setting of the intelligent function module setting is
outside the range, the setting is deleted.
� When changing from Q02U, if the file capacity of file register is outside the range, its maximum capacity is set, and the drive is changed to "Standard RAM".
� When changing from Q02U to L02/L02-P, L06/L06-P, L26/ L26-P, or L26- BT/L26-PBT, if an item other than "Memory
Card (ROM)" and "Standard ROM" is set to "Corresponding
Memory" in the comment file used in a comment setting, it is
changed to "Memory Card (SD)".
�
�
�
�
� If the number of modules is one and "Start I/O No." is outside
the range, its maximum value is set. If the number of
modules is two, "Start I/O No." is set starting from 0000.
� When changing from Q02U to L02S/L02S-P or L02/L02-P, if
the number of modules is one and "Start I/O No." is outside
the range, its maximum value is set. If the number of
modules is two or more and the start I/O number is outside
the range, "Start I/O No." is set starting from 0000.
� When changing from Q02U to L02S/L02S-P or L02/L02-P, if
the number of slots exceeds the maximum number of slots of
the changed programmable controller type, the exceeded
setting is deleted.
App - 154
Appendix 10.10 Restrictions when changing to LCPU
Appendix 10 Restrictions When Changing Programmable Controller Type
Changing from QnUDE(H)CPU
17
Item Program
Sequential Function Chart
Remote Password
PLC Parameter PLC System
Boot File Device Built-in Ethernet Port Setting
PLC File
Program Network Parameter
CC-Link IE Field Network CC-Link
Table App.10.10-5
: With restrictions
Project type
Restrictions
Simple project
Without With labels labels
Structured project
�
�
�
�
� When changing to L02S/L02S-P or L02/L02-P, the property setting "Act at Block Multi-Activated" is deleted.
� When changing to L02S/L02S-P or L02/L02-P, any existing settings are cleared.
� When changing to L06/L06-P, L26/L26-P, or L26-BT/L26PBT, the following settings are set
� The settings of the built-in Ethernet are replaced to the
settings appropriate for the changed programmable
controller type.
� The settings of QJ71C24/CMO are replaced to the settings of LJ71C24.
� The settings of QJ71E71 are replaced to the settings of LJ71E71.
�
�
�
�
� If a device that exceeds the range of the Device setting is set
to "Latch Data Backup Operation Valid Contact", the setting
is deleted.
� When changing to L02S/L02S-P or L02/L02-P, if the number
of points is outside the range, its maximum point is set.
� When changing to L02/L02-P, L06/L06-P, L26/L26-P, or L26-
BT/L26-PBT, the setting of "Transfer From" in the Boot File
setting is changed to "Memory Card (SD)".
� When changing to L02S/L02S-P or L02/L02-P, if the points
that exceeds 8K points are specified for S device, the setting
is set to 8K points.
� If the IP address is outside the range of 0.0.0.1 to 223.255.255.254, the default is set.
� If the file capacity of file register is outside the range, its maximum capacity is set, and the drive is changed to "Standard RAM".
� When changing to L02/L02-P, L06/L06-P, L26/L26-P, or L26-
BT/L26-PBT, if an item other than "Memory Card (ROM)"
and "Standard ROM" is set to "Corresponding Memory" in
the comment file used in a comment setting, it is changed to
"Memory Card (SD)".
� When changing to L02S/L02S-P or L02/L02-P, if the capacity exceeds 16K points in "File used for SP.DEVST/S.DEVLD Instruction", the setting is set to 16K point.
� If the number of programs exceeds the allowable number, the exceeded programs are deleted.
�
�
�
�
� If the number of modules is one and "Start I/O No." is outside
the range, its maximum value is set. If the number of
modules is two, "Start I/O No." is set starting from 0000.
� If the number of slots exceeds the maximum number of slots
of the changed programmable controller type, the exceeded
setting is deleted.
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
APPENDIX
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
MONITORING
18 19 20 21 22 A I
INDEX
Appendix 10.10 Restrictions when changing to LCPU
App - 155
APPENDIX
Changing from High-speed Universal model QCPU
Item Program
Sequential Function Chart
Remote Password
PLC Parameter PLC System
Device
Built-in Ethernet Port Setting PLC File
Program Network Parameter
CC-Link IE Field Network CC-Link
Table App.10.10-6
: With restrictions
Restrictions
�
� When changing to L02S/L02S-P or L02/L02-P, the property setting "Act at Block Multi-Activated" is deleted.
� When changing to L02S/L02S-P or L02/L02-P, any existing settings are cleared.
� When changing to L06/L06-P, L26/L26-P, or L26-BT/L26PBT, the following settings are set. � The settings of the built-in Ethernet are replaced to the settings appropriate for the changed programmable controller type. � The settings of QJ71C24/CMO are replaced to the settings of LJ71C24. � The settings of QJ71E71 are replaced to the settings of LJ71E71.
�
� If a device that exceed the range of the Device setting is set to "Latch Data Backup Operation Valid Contact", the setting is deleted.
� When changing to L02S/L02S-P or L02/L02-P, if the number of points is outside the range, its maximum point is set.
� If the value exceeds the capacity of changed programmable controller type is set for "File Register Extended Setting", the maximum value is set and all points are set as file register (ZR(R)). The setting of the latch range is cleared.
� When changing to L02S/L02S-P or L02/L02-P, if the points that exceeds 8K points are specified for S device, the setting is set to 8K points.
� If the IP address is outside the range of 0.0.0.1 to 223.255.255.254, the default is set.
� If the file capacity of file register is outside the range, its maximum capacity is set, and the drive is changed to "Standard RAM".
� When changing to L02S/L02S-P or L02/L02-P, if the capacity exceeds 16K points in "File used for SP.DEVST/S.DEVLD Instruction", the setting is set to 16K point.
� If the number of programs exceeds the allowable number, the exceeded programs are deleted.
�
� If the number of modules is one and "Start I/O No." is outside the range, its maximum value is set. If the number of modules is two or more, "Start I/O No." is set starting from 0000.
� If the number of slots exceeds the maximum number of slots of the changed programmable controller type, the exceeded setting is deleted.
Project type
Simple project
Without With labels labels
Structured project
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
App - 156
Appendix 10.10 Restrictions when changing to LCPU
Appendix 10 Restrictions When Changing Programmable Controller Type
Changing from Redundant CPU
17
Item Program
Sequential Function Chart
Remote Password
PLC Parameter Boot File Program
PLC File
Network Parameter Ethernet CC-Link
Table App.10.10-7
: With restrictions
Project type
Restrictions
Simple project
Without With labels labels
Structured project
�
�
�
�
� When changing to L02S/L02S-P or L02/L02-P, property
settings "SFC Program Type Setting", "Periodic Execution
Block", "Act at Block Multi-Activated", and "Act at Step Multi-
Activated" are deleted.
� When changing to L06/L06-P, L26/L26-P, or L26-BT/L26-
PBT, property settings "SFC Program Type Setting",
"Periodic Execution Block", and "Act at Step Multi-Activated"
are deleted.
� When changing to L02S/L02S-P or L02/L02-P, any existing settings are cleared.
� When changing to L06/L06-P, L26/L26-P, or L26-BT/L26-
PBT, the following settings are set.
� The settings of QJ71C24/CMO are replaced to the settings
of LJ71C24.
� The settings of QJ71E71 are replaced to the settings of LJ71E71.
�
�
�
�
� The setting of "Transfer From" in the Boot File setting is changed to "Memory Card (SD)".
� If the number of programs exceeds the allowable number, the exceeding settings are deleted.
� When changing to L02/L02-P, L06/L06-P, L26/L26-P, or L26-
BT/L26-PBT, if "Memory Card (RAM)" is set to
"Corresponding Memory" in the initial device value setting, it
is changed to "Memory Card (SD)". � When changing to L02S/L02S-P, if an item other than
"Program Memory" or "Standard ROM" is set to
"Corresponding Memory" in the initial device value setting, it
is changed to "Standard ROM".
�
�
�
�
� "Ethernet (Main Base)" or "Ethernet (Extension Base)" is changed to "Ethernet".
� "Master station (Extension Base)" is changed to "Master Station".
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
MONITORING
18 19 20 21 22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
Appendix 10.10 Restrictions when changing to LCPU
App - 157
APPENDIX
Changing from Process CPU
Item Program
Sequential Function Chart
Remote Password
PLC Parameter Boot File Program
PLC File
Table App.10.10-8
: With restrictions
Project type
Restrictions
Simple project
Without With labels labels
Structured project
�
�
�
�
� When changing to L02S/L02S-P or L02/L02-P, property
settings "SFC Program Type Setting", "Periodic Execution
Block", "Act at Block Multi-Activated", and "Act at Step Multi-
Activated" are deleted.
� When changing to L06/L06-P, L26/L26-P, or L26-BT/L26-
PBT, property settings "SFC Program Type Setting",
"Periodic Execution Block", and "Act at Step Multi-Activated"
are deleted.
� When changing to L02S/L02S-P or L02/L02-P, any existing settings are cleared.
� When changing to L06/L06-P, L26/L26-P, or L26-BT/L26-
PBT, the following settings are set.
� The settings of QJ71C24/CMO are replaced to the settings
of LJ71C24.
� The settings of QJ71E71 are replaced to the settings of LJ71E71.
�
�
�
�
� The setting of "Transfer From" in the Boot File setting is changed to "Memory Card (SD)".
� If the number of programs exceeds the allowable number, the exceeding settings are deleted.
� When changing to L02/L02-P, L06/L06-P, L26/L26-P, or L26-
BT/L26-PBT, if "Memory Card (RAM)" is set to
"Corresponding Memory" in the initial device value setting, it
is changed to "Memory Card (SD)". � When changing to L02S/L02S-P, if an item other than
"Program Memory" or "Standard ROM" is set to
"Corresponding Memory" in the initial device value setting, it
is changed to "Standard ROM"
App - 158
Appendix 10.10 Restrictions when changing to LCPU
Appendix 10 Restrictions When Changing Programmable Controller Type
Changing from Basic model QCPU
17
Item Remote Password PLC Parameter
PLC File
PLC System
Boot File
Table App.10.10-9
: With restrictions
Project type
Restrictions
Simple project
Without With labels labels
Structured project
� Any existing settings are cleared.
�
�
�
�
� When changing from Q00 or Q01, "Use the following file" is
selected and "Corresponding Memory: Standard RAM" and
"File Name: MAIN" are set in the file register setting.
� If "Used" is set in the initial device value setting, "Use the
following file" is selected and "Corresponding Memory:
Program Memory" and "File Name: MAIN" are set.
� When changing from Q00 or Q01 to L02S/L02S-P or L02/
L02-P, if the number of points is outside the range, its
maximum point is set.
� When changing to L02/L02-P, L06/L06-P, L26/L26-P, or L26-
BT/L26-PBT, if "Do boot from standard ROM" is selected
before changing the programmable controller type, "Type:
Sequence", "Data Name: MAIN", "Transfer From: Memory
Card (SD)", and "Transfer To: Program Memory" are set.
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
MONITORING
18 19 20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
Changing from LCPU
Item
Program Sequential Function Chart
PLC Parameter
Device
Built-in Ethernet Port Setting
Table App.10.10-10
: With restrictions
Restrictions
Project type
Simple project
Without With labels labels
Structured project
�
�
�
�
� When changing to L02S/L02S-P or L02/L02-P, the property setting "Act at Block Multi-Activated" is deleted.
�
�
�
�
� When changing to L02S/L02S-P or L02/L02-P, if the points
that exceeds 8K points are specified for S device, the setting
is set to 8K points.
� When changing from Built-in Ethernet port LCPU to L02S/
L02S-P, any existing settings in "CC-Link IEF Basic Setting"
are deleted.
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
21 22 A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
Appendix 10.10 Restrictions when changing to LCPU
App - 159
APPENDIX
Appendix 10.11Restrictions when changing between QCPU (Q mode)/ LCPU and CC IE Field head module
The following tables show the restrictions applied when changing QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU to CC IE Field head module and when changing communication head module to QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU.
Changing from QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU to CC IE Field head module
Table App.10.11-1
Item
Restrictions
Device Comment
Device Memory
� All data are deleted.
Device Initial Value
Remote Password
� Any existing settings are cleared.
PLC Parameter, Network Parameter
� All parameters are set to default.
: With restrictions
Project type
Simple project
Without With labels labels
Structured project
�
�
�
�
�
�
Changing from CC IE Field head module to QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU
Table App.10.11-2
Item
Restrictions
Remote Password
� Any existing settings are cleared.
PLC Parameter, Network Parameter
� All parameters are set to default.
: With restrictions
Project type
Simple project
Without With labels labels
Structured project
�
�
�
�
App - 160
Appendix 10.11 Restrictions when changing between QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU and CC IE Field head module
Appendix 10 Restrictions When Changing Programmable Controller Type
Appendix 10.12Restrictions when changing to FXCPU (FXCPU
17
FXCPU)
MONITORING
The following tables show the restrictions applied when changing FXCPU to FXCPU.
Table App.10.12-1
: With restrictions
Item
Program Ladder Diagram
Global Device Comment Local Device Comment PLC Parameter
Memory Capacity
Ethernet Port Network Parameter
CC-Link
Special Module (Intelligent Function Module) System label
Block password
Restrictions
� � Programs which exceed the program capacity of the
changed programmable controller type are deleted.
� Devices not supported and these outside the range are deleted.
� � If the program capacity set before changing the
programmable controller type is not supported by the changed programmable controller type, it is changed to the maximum value of the changed programmable controller type. � When the device range set in the log record setting cannot be applied as it is after the programmable controller type is changed, the log record setting is set to default. � � When the number of stations set for "Station Information Setting" exceeds the maximum number for the programmable controller type, all CC-Link parameter settings are set to default.
Intelligent function module data is deleted.
� FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, and FX3UC whose projects contain system labels cannot be changed to FX0, FX0S, FX0N, FX1, FXU, FX2C, FX1S, FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N, FX2NC or FX3S.
� The programmable controller type cannot be changed to other than FX3U and FX3UC if the written project includes a block password to which the execution program protection setting was enabled.
Project type
Simple project
Without With labels labels
Structured project
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
18 19 20 21 22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
Appendix 10.12 Restrictions when changing to FXCPU (FXCPU FXCPU)
App - 161
APPENDIX
Appendix 11 Instruction Conversion Lists
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
The following tables show the instructions that can be converted when changing the programmable controller type.
Appendix 11.1 Instruction conversion for Universal model QCPU CPU other than Universal model QCPU conversion
This section shows the lists of instructions which are converted based on selecting/clearing "Convert motion dedicated sequence instruction" when the programmable controller type of a Simple project (without label) is changed.
Instruction conversion list for conversion to Universal model QCPU
Motion dedicated instruction
Basic model QCPU (Except for Q00J), High Performance model QCPU, Process CPU, Universal model QCPU (Q00U, Q01U, Q02U)
Before conversion
S(P).SFCS S(P).SVST S(P).CHGV S(P).CHGT S(P).CHGA S(P).DDWR S(P).DDRD S(P).GINT
Universal model QCPU (Except for Q00U, Q00UJ, Q01U, Q02U)
After conversion
Selected
Cleared
D(P).SFCS
S(P).SFCS
D(P).SVST
S(P).SVST
D(P).CHGV
S(P).CHGV
D(P).CHGT
S(P).CHGT
D(P).CHGA
S(P).CHGA
D(P).DDWR
S(P).DDWR
D(P).DDRD
S(P).DDRD
D(P).GINT
S(P).GINT
App - 162
Appendix 11.1 Instruction conversion for Universal model QCPU CPU other than Universal model QCPU conversion
Appendix 11 Instruction Conversion Lists
Instruction conversion list for conversion from Universal model QCPU
17
Universal model QCPU (Except for Q00U, Q00UJ, Q01U, Q02U)
Basic model QCPU (Except for Q00J), High Performance model QCPU, Process CPU, Universal model QCPU (Q00U, Q01U Q02U)
Before conversion
After conversion
Selected
Cleared
D(P).SFCS
S(P).SFCS*1
SM1255
D(P).SVST
S(P).SVST*2
SM1255
D(P).CHGV
S(P).CHGV*2
SM1255
Motion dedicated instruction
D(P).CHGT D(P).CHGA
S(P).CHGT*2 S(P).CHGA*2
SM1255 SM1255
D(P).DDWR
S(P).DDWR*3
SM1255
D(P).DDRD
S(P).DDRD*3
SM1255
D(P).GINT
S(P).GINT*4
SM1255
*1 : When the number of arguments is 2, correct the arguments after the programmable controller type is changed. *2 : When the number of arguments is 3, correct the arguments after the programmable controller type is changed. *3 : When a character string is used in an argument, correct the argument after the programmable controller type is changed. *4 : When the number of arguments is 3 or more, correct the arguments after the programmable controller type is changed.
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
MONITORING
18 19 20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
Appendix 11.1 Instruction conversion for Universal model QCPU CPU other than Universal model QCPU conversion
App - 163
APPENDIX
Appendix 11.2 Instruction conversion for Redundant CPU CPU other than Redundant CPU conversion
Instruction conversion list for conversion to Redundant CPU
The following instructions are converted to "OUT SM1255".
Description
QCPU instruction
Motion dedicated instruction Display instruction Peripheral device instruction Other convenient instruction Program control instruction
Program load Program unload Load + unload Data write to host CPU shared memory Other CPU device data read to host CPU device Host CPU device data write to other CPU device Motion SFC program start request Torque limit value change during operation/stop in real mode Servo program start request Axis speed change during positioning or JOG operation Current value change for stopping axis/synchronous encoder/cam axis Other CPU interrupt program start request ASCII code print instruction Comment print instruction Key input from peripheral device 1-phase input up/down counter 2-phase input up/down counter Teaching timer Special function timer Rotary table shortest direction control Ramp signal Pulse density measurement Fixed cycle pulse output Pulse width modulation Matrix input Program low-speed execution registration instruction
Instruction name
PLOADP PUNLOADP PSWAPP S.TO S.DDRD S.DDWR S.SFCS S.CHGT S.SVST S.CHGV S.CHGA S.GINT PR PRC KEY UDCNT1 UDCNT2 TTMR STMR ROTC RAMP SPD PLSY PWM MTR PLOW
App - 164
Appendix 11.2 Instruction conversion for Redundant CPU CPU other than Redundant CPU conversion
Appendix 11 Instruction Conversion Lists
Instruction conversion list for conversion from Redundant CPU
17
Control system switching instruction
PID control instruction
Before conversion
Redundant CPU
SP.CONTSW
PIDINIT PIDCONT PIDSTOP PIDRUN PIDPRMW S.PIDINIT S.PIDCONT S.PIDSTOP S.PIDRUN S.PIDPRMW
Basic model QCPU
After conversion
High Performance model QCPU
OUT SM999
OUT SM1255
PIDINIT PIDCONT PIDSTOP PIDRUN PIDPRMW S.PIDINIT S.PIDCONT S.PIDSTOP S.PIDRUN S.PIDPRMW
PIDINIT PIDCONT PIDSTOP PIDRUN PIDPRMW S.PIDINIT S.PIDCONT S.PIDSTOP S.PIDRUN S.PIDPRMW
Process CPU OUT SM1255
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
MONITORING
18 19
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
Appendix 11.2 Instruction conversion for Redundant CPU CPU other than Redundant CPU conversion
App - 165
APPENDIX
Appendix 12 Functions Added Since Previous Versions
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
This section shows major functions added/changed with upgrade. For (Simple), (FB), (Structured), (Intelligent), and (iQSS) described in the Reference column, refer to the following manuals respectively.
(Simple) ...GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project)
(FB)
...GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Simple Project, Function Block)
(Structured)...GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Structured Project)
(Intelligent) ...GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual (Intelligent Function Module)
(iQSS) ...iQ Sensor Solution Reference Manual
Version Version 1.05F
Version 1.08J
Major function added/ changed
Description
Label comment display
Label comments can be displayed in Structured projects.
Programmable controller type
Q00UJ, Q00U, Q01U, Q10UDH, Q10UDEH, Q20UDH, Q20UDEH, and FX series are supported.
Intelligent function module Q68TD-G-H02 is supported.
Change PLC Type
The programmable controller type can be changed from Universal model QCPU to High Performance model QCPU.
Verify
The parts that do not match can be searched.
Parameter
Ladder
ST Structured Ladder Monitor Debug
The following parameters are supported by Universal model QCPU. � The CPU module can be replaces using a memory card. � Index registers can be specified as local devices. � The A-PLC compatibility Setting is supported.
Twist-bus-compatible modules are supported by MELSECNET/H.
With the easy edit function, the following functions can be operated by a one-step operation (menu/shortcut key). � Draw line � Change open/close contact � Switch statement/note type � Instruction partial edit
Ladder blocks can be displayed/hidden in units of one ladder block.
The ladder editor and function block can be displayed horizontally.
The instruction help can be opened from the menu.
Arguments of a template can be selected one-by-one by the menu or shortcut key.
The wrapping positions for printing can be checked on the Structured Ladder editor.
The program list can be monitored.
The interrupt program list monitor can be monitored.
The intelligent function modules can be monitored.
The forced input/output can be registered/canceled.
The device test with execution condition is supported by the Universal model QCPU.
Reference (Structured)
� � Section 4.2.8 Section 4.2.7 Section 4.6.5 Section 15.2
Section 6.1.1
Section 6.3.1
(Simple)
(Structured) Section 17.4 Section 17.5 Section 17.7 Section 19.2 Section 19.3
App - 166
Appendix 12 Functions Added Since Previous Versions
Version Version 1.08J
Version 1.12N
Major function added/ changed
Description
Reference
The screen for the CC-Link/CC-Link/LT diagnostics is modified.
CC-Link/ CC-Link/LT Diagnostics
The CC-Link/CC-Link/LT diagnostics support the following functions. � Obtain transmission speed setting � Status logging � Create check sheet
Section 21.6
System monitor
The error reset function can be performed on the Module's Detailed Information screen.
Section 21.9
Shortcut key customize
With the shortcut key customize function, shortcut keys can be registered arbitrarily.
Section 3.2.8
Parameter
The socket communication through Ethernet is supported by Builtin Ethernet port QCPU.
Section 6.1.1
FB library
FB libraries are supported.
Section 13.1.1 (FB)
Programmable controller type Q00J, Q00, and Q01 are supported.
�
Intelligent function module Q64AD2DA and Q61LD are supported.
�
Programming language
� Structured Text is supported by Simple projects (with labels) of QCPU (Q mode).
� Sequential Function Chart is supported by Simple projects (without labels) of FXCPU.
(Simple)
Project type
Simple projects (with labels) are supported by FXCPU.
Navigation window
The Project window is modified, and its name is changed to Navigation window.
�
Change PLC Type
Motion dedicated instructions can be converted when the programmable controller type of a Simple project (without label) is changed.
Section 4.2.8
Print
Device initial value can be printed.
Chapter 11
Saving projects
The project compression/decompression function is supported.
Section 4.2.4
Parameter
The module error history collection function for the intelligent function module is supported by Universal model QCPU.
Section 6.1.1
Program editor
The default font color of labels is changed.
�
The following instructions are supported. � Rising pulse close instruction � Falling pulse close instruction � Rising pulse close branch instruction � Falling pulse close branch instruction
Ladder
� Simplified edit of devices/labels is supported by the Enter Symbol screen.
� An undefined label can be registered following an element entry operation.
� A list of possible candidates of instructions/labels can be displayed at entering elements.
� A tooltip for arguments of an instruction can be displayed at entering instructions.
(Simple)
The line statement list function is supported.
The cursor can jump to the start of the next ladder block or the start of the previous ladder block.
The change TC setting function is supported.
The Inline structured text function is supported.
SFC
� The SFC editor window and the Zoom editor window can be displayed vertically at opening the SFC window.
� An SFC block can be displayed automatically at auto scroll monitoring.
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
APPENDIX
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
MONITORING
17 18 19 20 21 22 A I
INDEX
App - 167
APPENDIX
Version Version 1.12N
Major function added/ changed
ST Structured Ladder All Device Display
Find/Replace
Device Memory Write to PLC Confirm Memory Size Monitor
Simulation function
Scan Time Measurement CC-Link IE Control Diagnostics CC-Link/ CC-Link/LT Diagnostics System monitor Shortcut key customize
Intelligent function module tool
FB library
Description
Reference
The bookmark list function is supported.
A list of possible candidates of instructions/labels can be displayed at entering elements.
In a ladder program or Structured Ladder program, the display of labels on all program editors being opened can be switched to the device display simultaneously.
In all programming languages, Find String/Replace String, Find Device/Replace Device, Find Instruction/Replace Instruction, and Change Open/Close Contact are supported.
A character string can be entered to device memory.
The FILL function is supported.
In a project (with labels), file sizes can be displayed/hidden on the Write to PLC screen.
The memory size required when data is written to the programmable controller CPU can be calculated.
Detailed information of such as an error can be confirmed from the Intelligent Function Module Monitor window.
The minimized display at start up of simulation is supported.
The saving/reading device memory/buffer memory function is supported.
The I/O system setting function is supported.
The scan time measurement function is supported.
(Structured)
(Simple)
Section 10.3
Section 7.2.3 Section 7.2.4 Section 15.1
Section 15.10
Section 17.7 Section 18.2 Section 18.2.1 Section 18.2.2 Chapter 22 Section 19.5
The Logging screen of another station can be displayed.
Section 21.3
� Up to 64 modules can be displayed. � The system configuration can be output in a check sheet.
The module information at time of the error occurrence can be displayed in the error history list.
User-created shortcut key settings can be registered to a template.
� The Q61LD two-point calibration setting of the analog module is supported.
� The auto tuning function of the temperature control module is supported.
� The preset function of the counter module is supported. � The positioning test, wave trace, location trace, offline
simulation, automatic command speed calculation, and automatic sub arc calculation of QD75 positioning module are supported. � The circuit trace function of the serial communication module is supported.
Components of the FB libraries can be imported to a project being edited using the function to obtain the libraries to a project.
Section 21.6 Section 21.9 Section 3.2.8
(Intelligent)
Chapter 13 (FB)
App - 168
Appendix 12 Functions Added Since Previous Versions
Version Version 1.15R
Version 1.24A
Major function added/ changed
Parameter Transfer setting ST
Structured Ladder
Description
The function to apply the parameters of MELSOFT Navigator is supported.
The GOT (Ethernet) transparent mode is supported.
The following instructions are supported. � Negated rising edge instruction � Negated falling edge instruction
The following contact symbols are added. � Rising edge � Falling edge � Negated rising edge � Negated falling edge
The following instructions are supported. � Negated rising edge instruction � Negated falling edge instruction
Global label
System labels are supported.
Programmable controller type L02 and L26-BT are supported.
Intelligent function module L64AD4, L60DA4, LJ71C24, and LJ71C24-R2 are supported.
Ladder
� The Inline structured text function is supported by FXCPU. � The following functions are supported by the Inline structured
text function. � Verifying projects � Verifying revisions � Replacing character strings
ST
� The compilation result can be displayed in list format. � The ST control syntax templates are supported.
Structured Ladder
� The compilation result can be displayed in list format.
� Function blocks can be dragged and dropped from the Project view.
Saving projects
A title of the change history of the project can automatically be set when it is overwritten.
Device List
� The number of uses of a coil which uses the device can be displayed.
� Devices which are used in the parameters can be indicated.
Colors and fonts
The color and font settings can be reset to default.
Write to PLC
A project can automatically be saved after it is written to the programmable controller CPU.
Simulation function
The simulation function is supported by FXCPU.
Intelligent function module tools
Help
� The offset/gain setting can be performed from the menu. � The predefined protocol support function of the serial
communication module is supported.
The detailed explanation of instructions can be opened from the program editor or the Element Selection window.
Reference Section 6.1 Section 14.9.1
(Structured)
(Simple) (Structured)
� (Intelligent)
Section 4.2.7 Section 4.6 Section 10.3.3
(Simple)
(Structured) Section 4.2.3 Section 10.2 Section 3.2.7 Chapter 15 Chapter 18 Chapter 22 Appendix 2 (Intelligent)
�
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
MONITORING
17 18 19 20 21 22 A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
App - 169
APPENDIX
Version Version 1.31H Version 1.40S
Major function added/ changed
Description
Reference
Programmable controller type Q50UDEH, Q100UDEH, and LJ72GF15-T2 are supported.
�
Intelligent function module LD62, LD62D, LD75P4, LD75D4, and LD77MH4 are supported.
(Intelligent)
Ladder
In projects (with labels), the function which enables the device display in uncompiled state is supported.
�
SFC
The display format "MELSAP-L (Instruction Format)" / "MELSAPL (Start Conditions Format)" are supported.
(Simple)
Global labels
System labels are supported by LCPU.
(Simple) (Structured)
Change PLC Type
The programmable controller type of a project which contains intelligent function modules can be changed between programmable controller series.
Section 4.2.8
Parameter
In the network parameter, "CC IE Field (Master Station)" and "CC IE Field (Local Station)" are supported by Universal model QCPU.
Section 6.3
Intelligent function module data
� The disconnection detection mode setting and Disconnection detection setting value setting are supported by Q62DA-FG.
� The following settings are supported by QJ71C24N/ QJ71C24N-R2.
� The echo back permit/prohibit specification and the execution history option specification are supported by the various control specification.
� The predefined protocol function error code, the send data storage area, and the receive data storage area are supported by the auto refresh.
(Intelligent)
Cross Reference
In projects (with labels), the cross reference information can be displayed in uncompiled state.
Section 10.1
Local Device Batch Read
The function which reads local device data from the programmable controller CPU and saves the data on the personal computer is supported by Universal model QCPU.
Section 15.12
CC IE Field Diagnostics
The CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics is supported by Universal model QCPU.
Section 21.4
Options
For QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU, the following option is added. [Tool] [Options] "PLC Read/Write" "When writing to PLC after a Rebuild All operation, clear the device ranges set in the Device/Label Auto-Assign setting to 0."
Section 15.1.8 Section 12.2
(Simple) (Structured)
Operating environment
Windows� 7 is supported.
�
Programmable controller type Remote I/O module is supported.
�
Ethernet adapter module configuration tool
Ethernet adapter module configuration tool is supported.
Section 20.8
Label
The Read from CSV File and Write to CSV File functions are supported.
(Simple) (Structured)
Device comment
Bit-specified word device comments are supported by Universal model QCPU.
Section 9.2.1 Section 15.1.3
Ladder
The template function in the inline structured text program is supported.
The drag-and-drop operation from the ladder editor is changed.
(Structured) Section 17.6.2
SFC
"Act at Block Multi-Activated" can be set for Universal model QCPU.
(Simple)
ST
The menu title [Create Template] is changed to [Display Template].
(Structured)
Structured Ladder
The line connection function in "Select Mode" is supported.
The automatic line connection function when entering elements is supported.
(Structured) (Structured)
App - 170
Appendix 12 Functions Added Since Previous Versions
Version Version 1.40S
Major function added/ changed
Compile Opening existing projects Opening projects in other formats
Verify
Parameter Cross Reference
Find/Replace
Online Program Change Simulation function Global label
Description
Reference
A compilation error does not occur when the same name is used for label name and data name.
The option to check whether devices are used exceeding the device range assigned to labels in the data transfer instruction such as DMOV is added.
Projects in the workspace folder/project folder which is copied or moved using Windows� Explorer can be forcibly opened.
GX Developer option setting "Copy source/display source of reference during comment edit" is utilized to GX Works2 option setting: "Program Editor" "Ladder/SFC" "Comment" "Reference of Device Comment".
Intelligent function module parameters (initial setting, auto refresh), QD75/LD75 positioning module set data can be verified in the following verification function. � Project verification � Revision verification � Programmable controller CPU data verification
The extended setting of step relay (S device) is supported by Universal model QCPU.
"CC IE Control Ext. Mode (Control station)" and "CC IE Control Ext. Mode (Normal Station)" are added.
The loopback function setting is added to the supplementary setting of CC-Link IE Field.
The Cross Reference window can be displayed vertically.
The focus is not moved to the editor side after executing the search/replace function.
The device search/replace function can be executed for indexed devices without canceling "Digit" or "Double Word" option.
The search function can be executed on different items when the devices are being displayed on the ladder editor.
Find Device, Replace Device, Find Instruction, Replace Instruction, Change Open/Close Contact, and Device Batch Replace functions are supported by the inline structured text function.
SFC block Online program change is supported by Universal model QCPU.
Local device data can be read.
System labels are supported by FX3G, FX3U, and FX3UC.
�
Section 12.2
Section 4.2.2
Section 4.7.1
Section 4.2.7 Section 4.6.5 Section 15.2
� � � Section 10.1 Section 10.3.1 Section 10.3.2 Section 10.3.3 Section 10.3.4 Section 10.3.1 �
Section 10.3
Section 15.9.1 Section 15.12
(Simple) (Structured)
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
MONITORING
17 18 19 20 21 22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
App - 171
APPENDIX
Version Version 1.48A
Major function added/ changed
Intelligent function module Navigation window Open other project
Transfer setting
Device comment Ladder
Verify
Print
Cross reference Write to PLC/Online program change Watch window PLC diagnostics Intelligent function module tool
Language selection
Description
QD65PD2 and LD77MH16 are supported.
� Titles set in the property are displayed on the Navigation window.
� The color of the characters on the title bar is displayed in red when an uncompiled data exists.
The secured steps for Online program change and the writing range of device comment set in GX Developer can be utilized.
CC-Link IE Field Network board is supported.
Ethernet connection between personal computer and GOT is supported.
Sample comments of input/output signals can be utilized for intelligent function module.
� The number of displayed contacts in a ladder program can be set to 13, 17, or 21 contacts.
� For FXCPU Simple project (with labels), execution program can be divided into multiple programs.
The following functions are supported on the Verify Result screen. � Copy data � Write data to CSV file
The following information can be added when printing a ladder program. � Device comment � Statement/note � Contact/coil usage destination
The print preview and the print functions are supported on the Device List screen.
For project without labels, a device on which the cursor is placed in the program editor can be searched automatically.
� 'High-speed mode' is supported when writing symbolic information to a programmable controller CPU.
� A default setting of target memory can be set in the option setting for Online program change.
� The automatic registration function is supported. � The list of devices/labels registered to Watch window can be
write to/read from CSV files.
When the error jump is executed from the PLC Diagnostics screen, the PLC Diagnostics screen is down sized to be able to specify the error location in the program easily.
� The monitoring function (positioning monitor) dedicated to QD75/LD75 positioning module is supported.
� The user protocol library function is supported for the predefined protocol support function.
Characters of the following languages are not corrupted by selecting a project language. � English � Chinese (simplified characters) � Korean
Reference (Intelligent)
Section 3.2.5
Section 4.7.1 Section 2.2 Section 2.3 Section 14.1 Section 14.9.1 Section 14.9.2 Section 9.5.2
(Simple)
Section 4.2.7
Section 11.8.1
Section 11.9 Section 11.7 Section 10.1
Section 15.1.5
Section 17.6.2 Section 17.6.4
Section 21.1
(Intelligent)
Section 3.3 Appendix 18
App - 172
Appendix 12 Functions Added Since Previous Versions
Version Version 1.53F
Major function added/ changed
Incorporation with GX Developer
Intelligent function module Ladder SFC Structured Ladder Print Parameter
Search/Replace
Debug CC IE Field Diagnostics Device/label automaticassign setting Language selection
Description
Reference
GX Developer can be installed at the same time as installation of GX Works2.
GX Developer is used for the following functions when the programmable controller type is not supported by GX Works2. � Creating a new project � Opening a project � Opening a project in other formats � Creating a new project with data read from programmable
controller CPU
QJ71MT91 and QJ71MB91 are supported.
Changes of function block names and deletions of function blocks are automatically applied to the target program.
Changes of the function block label setting are applied to the target program at compilation.
When copying and pasting SFC block data, whether to overwrite block data with the same block number, or to add data with unused block number can be selected.
Operability of the Label Registration/Selection screen is improved.
The print function to batch print project data is supported.
The print preview and the print functions are supported on the Cross Reference screen.
In the network parameter, "CC IE Field (Master Station)" and "CC IE Field (Local Station)" are supported by LCPU.
The search/replace function can be executed for digit-specified bit devices, devices with index setting, and devices with indirect specification. Note that either a searched device or a replaced device needs to be a label when replacing devices.
Devices, instructions, strings, contacts, and coils can be searched from the shortcut menu by right-clicking the ladder editor or SFC (Zoom) editor.
The default setting for "Find In" is changed to "(Entire Project)".
The debugging function can be executed during the program simulation.
LJ71GF11-T2 is supported.
"Selected Station Communication Status Monitor" function is supported by Ethernet adapter module.
Multiple devices can be set in the device/label automatic assign setting for QCPU (Q mode) and LCPU.
The applicability of data names and label names to be used in a language-changed project is checked when selecting the language.
The applicability of language of the data name in a project to which the data is pasted is checked when data are copied between projects.
Appendix 14
Section 4.2.1 Section 4.2.2 Section 4.7.1
(Intelligent) � � �
(Structured) Chapter 11 Section 10.1 Section 6.3
Section 10.3
Section 19.6 Section 21.4
(Simple) (Structured)
�
�
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
MONITORING
17 18 19 20 21 22 A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
App - 173
APPENDIX
Version Version 1.62Q
Major function added/ changed
Description
Project
A project can be overwritten when a project is saved with an existing project name.
A project can be saved in the single file format.
Programmable controller type L02-P and L26-PBT are supported.
Intelligent function module
Q64TCTTN, Q64TCRTN, Q64TCTTBWN, Q64TCRTBWN, L60TCTT4, L60TCTT4BW, L60TCRT4, and L60TCRT4BW are supported.
Comment
The automatic start function which converts the language at the entry of device comments, statements and notes is supported.
Device comment
When a device comment is edited in a ladder or SFC program, the edited information is reflected to the referred device comment.
"Read Mode", "Write Mode", "Monitor Mode", and "Monitor (Write Mode)" are supported.
Line statements can be displayed on the Navigation window.
Ladder
The initial value for the Enter HLine screen and the Delete HLine screen can be set to "1".
Entry or deletion of horizontal line can be stopped at the instruction or vertical line.
The option setting to disable the display of note on the Enter Symbol screen when editing a coil instruction is added.
SFC
"Read Mode", "Write Mode", "Monitor Mode", and "Monitor (Write Mode)" are supported.
An SFC diagram and a Zoom editor can be tiled horizontally.
The jump step search function is added.
The display of the programming language name is changed from "Structured Ladder" to "Structured Ladder/FBD".
Structured Ladder
The function to display/hide the left power rail is added.
Labels and devices assigned to labels can be displayed simultaneously.
Label
The program does not become in an uncompiled status even when information in "Comment" and "Remark" is changed.
Cells can be selected and copied on the label editor.
Print
The following data can be batch printed. � Cover � PLC parameter � Network parameter � Structured Ladder/FBD � Device memory � Device initial value � TC setting value � Device list � Cross reference � Project content list � Product information list
When printing ladder programs, blank device comment lines are not printed in the default setting.
Parameter
The simple PLC communication setting is supported by LCPU. The serial communication setting is supported by QnUD(H)CPU.
Device List
When searching for devices in a specified program, device comments can be entered in the device list.
When searching for devices in a specified program, device comments of devices which are not used in the program can be deleted.
Reference Section 4.2.3 Section 4.2
� (Intelligent) Section 12.2 Section 9.2.2
(Simple)
(Simple)
(Structured) (Simple)
(Structured) �
Chapter 11
Section 6.1 Section 6.1.1 Section 10.2
App - 174
Appendix 12 Functions Added Since Previous Versions
Version Version 1.62Q
Version 1.64S
Major function added/ changed
Search/Replace
Write to PLC/Read from PLC CC IE Field Diagnostics Block password Intelligent function module Tool Help Product Makeup Operation Environment Intelligent function module
Print
Parameter Intelligent function module Data Device comment Transfer setting
Verify
System monitor
Description
The function to search/replace devices/labels/instructions downward from the top of the editor is added.
Data can also be searched in other programs in the project with the space key search function on the ladder editor.
Symbolic information can be written to/read from a programmable controller CPU with FX3U/FX3UC version 3.00 or later.
The configuration including CC-Link IE Field Network communication units can be diagnosed.
Execution programs can be protected on FX3U/FX3UC version 3.00 or later.
The sensor correction function of temperature control module is supported.
The MELSOFT help function is supported.
Data are supplied with two CD-ROMs.
Required HDD free space for the installation is changed to 2.5GB or more.
QD75P1N, QD75P2N, QD75P4N, QD75D1N, QD75D2N, and QD75D4N are supported.
� Print job output can be selected. � Print conditions for device memory data are added. � Whether to print or not to print 'start destination block' can be
selected on the SFC block list. � Setting values of timer, retentive timer, and counter can be
printed according to devices when printing TC setting values.
� For LCPU, "Branch Module" can be selected for the I/O assignment setting on PLC parameter.
QD75/LD75 positioning module data can be saved to/read from the file.
� For LCPU, bit-specified word device comment is supported. � Device comments can be saved to/read from the file.
A personal computer can be connected to a programmable controller CPU via a phone line.
For QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU, the following functions are supported. � The following data can be verified when verifying projects or
revisions. � Device comment � Device memory � The following data can be verified when verifying programmable controller data. � Device comment � Device memory � File register
For LCPU, extension blocks can be monitored.
Reference Section 10.3
(Simple) Section 15.1 Section 21.4 Section 4.12 (Intelligent) Section 3.4 GX Works2 Installation Instructions (Intelligent)
Chapter 11
Section 6.1.1 (Intelligent) Section 9.2.1 Section 15.1.3 Section 14.10
Section 4.2.7 Section 4.6.5 Section 15.2
Section 21.9
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
MONITORING
17 18 19 20 21 22 A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
App - 175
APPENDIX
Version Version 1.73B
Major function added/ changed
Intelligent function module Transfer Setup
Ladder SFC Structured Ladder
Parameter
Device comment
Cross reference
Device List Write to PLC Monitor CC-Link/ CC-Link/LT Diagnostics Write/read IC memory card data
Options Merge Data Intelligent function module data
Description
Reference
� Q64ADH is supported. � A parameter item is added for Q62HLC.
For FX3U and FX3UC, programmable controller CPU connections via CC-Link are supported.
For FXCPU, the Ethernet connection between a personal computer and a GOT is supported.
� Ladder blocks can be pasted consecutively with incremented device numbers on the ladder editor.
� Ladder programs can be saved to/read from CSV files in list format
� SFC blocks can be copied/pasted on the SFC block list. � SFC diagrams can be converted in SFC block unit.
Function blocks of ladder program can be used in a Structured Ladder program, and function blocks of Structured Ladder program can be used in a ladder program.
� Station information of CC-Link is displayed graphically on the CC-Link Configuration window.
� Assignment information of CC-Link refresh devices can be checked easily on the Acknowledge CC-Link Device Assignment window.
� Default parameters can be set in batch to the PLC parameter and the network parameter.
For FXCPU, the CC-Link setting is supported by the network parameter.
The I/O assignment setting and the acknowledge XY assignment of PLC parameter can be saved to CSV files.
Device comment data being displayed can be deleted in batch.
� For Simple projects (with labels), the time to create cross reference information can be reduced by selecting "Fast Find". Cross reference information can be created even when a program is uncompiled.
� Cross reference of SFC program block information is supported.
� Elements of instructions in which devices are used in a ladder program can be displayed.
The device points to be searched can be selected.
The number of characters of device comment to be written can be specified when writing data to a programmable controller CPU.
� The Entry Ladder Monitor function to monitor registered ladder blocks is supported by Simple project (without labels).
� For QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU, monitoring condition/monitoring stop condition can be set.
(Intelligent) Section 14.3 Section 14.9
(Simple)
(Structured)
Section 6.3.3 Section 6.3.4 Section 6.7
Section 6.3 Section 6.6 Section 9.3.2
Section 10.1
Section 10.2 Section 15.1.3
(Simple)
� For FXCPU, the CC-Link/CC-Link/LT diagnostic is supported. Section 21.6
� A password can be set to data when writing data to an IC memory card.
� Data can be written to/read from an IC memory card by specifying a folder.
� Symbolic information can be written to/read from an IC memory card.
Section 15.11.1
The setting to enable compilation when opening a project contains ST programs of GX Developer is added.
Section 12.2
Multiple ladder program data or device comment data can be merged and added to the project.
Section 4.3.5
The Setting item reduction mode can be set for the auto refresh parameter of temperature control.
(Intelligent)
App - 176
Appendix 12 Functions Added Since Previous Versions
Version Version 1.77F
Version 1.87R
Major function added/ changed
Description
Programmable controller type FX3GC is supported.
Intelligent function module
Q68CT, LD75P1, LD75P2, LD75D1, LD75D2, QD77MS2, QD77MS4, and QD77MS16 are supported.
The IP Packet Transfer setting can be set on the <<Built-in Ethernet Port Setting>> tab of PLC parameter.
Parameter
� CC IE Field (sub-master station) is supported by Universal model QCPU in the network parameter.
� The IP Packet Transfer setting can be set in the network parameter for Built-in Ethernet port QCPU in CC-Link IE Field Network.
The operation at reconnection can be set in "Network Configuration Settings" for Universal model QCPU when "CC-IE Filed (Master Station)" is selected for "Network Type".
Intelligent function module data
Positioning module data can be saved as a GX Configurator-QP format project file.
Label
� Labels can be sorted in ascending or descending order.
� Blank rows below the last row to which the label is set on the label setting editor can be deleted to a single blank row.
Read from PLC
When a project, in which the setting of "Compile" under [Tool] [Options] has been changed, is read from a programmable controller CPU, the project will not be an uncompiled project.
CC IE Field Diagnostics
Sub-master stations are supported. The IP communication test is supported.
Toolbar
Editing screens can be displayed from the toolbar in Simple projects.
Navigation window
Tasks in a program file can be sorted in the execution order.
Open other project
� For QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU, GX Developer projects with GX Works2 invalid characters can be opened.
� SFC block names are set with sequential number without appending a program name.
� A project can be opened with the connection destination settings saved in the GX Developer format.
Device Memory
Device values can be set by specifying a device range on the cell
The setting method of "Specify the Reference/Reflection" is improved.
Device comment
The number of points of device comment that can be set in the project can be extended.
Applicable number of characters to be entered is limited for the device comment editing mode.
Find/Replace
Block information set on the Property screen of SFC block can be searched.
Ladder
� Labels and devices can be displayed simultaneously.
� Detailed information of the label can be displayed with the tooltip when the cursor is placed on the label.
� List of instructions/labels and tooltip for instructions can be displayed/hide when entering an element.
� Device comments can be copied and pasted along with the copied elements.
� Programs in ladder block unit can be displayed/edited in the list format.
� The cursor position does not change when switching the mode to "Read Mode", "Write Mode", "Monitor Mode", or "Monitor (Write Mode)" in the ladder editor.
A function block can be called from a function block in the ladder program.
Reference �
(Intelligent) Section 6.1.1
Section 6.3.1
� (Intelligent)
(Simple) (Structured)
� Section 21.4 Section 21.4.2 Section 3.2.2 Section 3.2.5
Section 4.7.1
Section 7.2.2 Section 9.1.1 Section 9.4 Section 9.2.2
(Simple)
(Structured) (FB)
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
APPENDIX
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
MONITORING
17 18 19 20 21 22 A I
INDEX
App - 177
APPENDIX
Version Version 1.87R
Major function added/ changed
SFC Inline structured text ST Structured Ladder Security Block password
Cross Reference
Device List
Monitor
Options
Read from PLC Installation
Description
Reference
� SFC step/transition comments can be pasted along with the copied blocks on the SFC block list.
� Text size on the editing screen can be changed. � The comment or the step number on the Enter SFC Symbol
screen can be displayed as it is in selected status when changing the SFC symbol in MELSAP3.
The compilation result can be displayed from the shortcut menu.
The compilation result can be displayed from the shortcut menu.
� The compilation result can be displayed from the shortcut menu.
� The tool button to connect lines automatically is added.
Access authority of multiple items can be set in batch.
A block password can be set for POUs in batch.
� Devices set in simple PLC communication setting of PLC parameter can be searched.
� A search range can be specified in program file unit. � Block start steps of SFC blocks can be searched. � The setting to search devices other than the start device is
added under "Find Condition" on the <<Condition Setting>> tab.
� Devices set in simple PLC communication setting of PLC parameter can be searched.
� All SFC blocks are searched when an SFC program is set for the search location.
� The display format can be changed by the button on the Device/Buffer Memory Batch Monitor screen.
� Device comments of monitored devices can be displayed on the Device/Buffer Memory Batch Monitor screen.
Devices and labels on the SFC editor window are automatically registered to the Watch window.
The setting in which the program cache memory is checked and automatically fixed when a program is written to a programmable controller CPU is added.
For FXCPU, the following option can be set. When reading a project saved with GX Works 2 which does not support the following option, the item is selected. [Tool] [Options] "PLC Read/Write" "When writing to PLC after a Rebuild All operation, clear the device ranges set in the Device/Label Auto-Assign setting to 0."
Programs which are closed when performing the read from PLC function are reopened.
When upgrading GX Works2, the information of color and fonts of the previous version is retained.
(Simple)
(Structured) Section 4.10.4 Section 4.12.1
Section 10.1
Section 10.2
Section 17.3 Section 17.6.2 Section 12.2 Section 15.1.8 Section 12.2
(Simple) (Structured)
� �
App - 178
Appendix 12 Functions Added Since Previous Versions
Version Version 1.87R
Major function added/ changed
Description
Reference
Programmable controller type
For Simple project (without labels), Q02PH, Q06PH, Q12PH, Q12PRH, Q25PH, and Q25PRH are supported.
�
Intelligent function module QD73A1 is supported.
(Intelligent)
Verify
For FXCPU, the following functions are supported. � The following data can be verified when verifying
programmable controller data, projects, or revisions. � Device comment � Device memory
Section 4.2.7 Section 4.6.5 Section 15.2
Saving projects in other formats
A project in GX Developer format can be saved along with the connection destination settings.
Section 4.8
Transfer Setup
For FX3G and FX3GC, a programmable controller CPU can be connected via CC-Link.
Section 14.3
Write/read IC memory card For LCPU, projects can be saved on/loaded from SD memory
data
card using the batch save/batch load function.
Section 15.11.2
The print function can be activated from the toolbar or the shortcut menu.
The following data can be printed in batch. � Redundant parameter � Program setting � User library content list
Chapter 11
Print
User libraries can be printed for the following print items. � ST � Structured Ladder/FBD � FB/FUN program � Label
For MELSAP3 and MELSAP-L, SFC block lists of Structured project can be printed.
SFC program settings can be printed when "Property (SFC Program)" is selected under SFC Diagram Print Item for printing MELSAP3 or MELSAP-L.
Section 11.5.8 Section 11.5.9
The following functions are added to the I/O assignment setting.
� The I/O assignment setting and the base setting can be set by selecting a programmable controller type, module, and module type.
� Intelligent function module data on the Navigation window are updated regarding added/deleted/changed modules.
Section 6.1.1 (Intelligent)
Parameter
The editing operations (Undo/Cut/Paste) can be performed on the MELSECNET/CC IE/Ethernet Module Configuration screen.
A number of columns to be displayed on the Setting for the CCLink List screen can be changed to either 4 or 2 columns according to the option setting.
Section 6.3
A number of rows to be displayed on the CC-Link station information screen can be changed to either 16 or 8 rows according to the option setting.
A station number can be set for local station in the CC-Link IE setting of a program.
Section 6.3.1
The operability of the CC-Link Configuration window is improved. Section 6.3.3
Unused labels can be extracted and batch deleted.
(Simple)
Label
Devices assigned to structure are not cleared even when elements of structure are changed on the Structure Setting screen.
(Simple) (Structured)
Color and Font
The import and export functions are added.
Section 3.2.7
Help
FXCPU instruction help is supported by the GX Works2 help function.
Section 3.4.1
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
APPENDIX
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
MONITORING
17 18 19 20 21 22 A I
INDEX
App - 179
APPENDIX
Version Version 1.87R
Version 1.91V
Major function added/ changed
Description
Intelligent function module tool
Waveform output data can be created for analog module L60DA4.
Structured Ladder/FBD or ST Step relay devices can be monitored.
Global label
� The operability of system label registration/deregistration is improved.
� For structures registered to data type of system label, elements of structure can be added and comments can be edited.
� Structure array can be used for system label.
For Simple project (with labels), Process CPU (Q02PH, Q06PH, Programmable controller type Q12PH, Q25PH) and Redundant CPU (Q12PRH, Q25PRH) are
supported.
Toolbar
All toolbars can be displayed. The display positions of toolbars can be maintained.
Transfer Setup
For FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, and FX3UC, a CPU can be connected via Ethernet adapter.
Intelligent function module
� Energy measuring modules (QE81WH, QE81WH4W, QE82LG, QE83WH4W, and QE84WH) are supported.
� The number of parameter settings for the initial setting of temperature control modules (Q64TCTTN, Q64TCTTBWN, Q64TCRTN, Q64TCRTBWN, L60TCTT4, L60TCTT4BW, L60TCRT4, and L60TCRT4BW) is added by 1.
Device comment
A target memory to write data to a programmable controller CPU can be specified in advance.
Instruction
� For Universal model QCPU and LCPU, the data write/read instruction for devices targeted for auto-refresh is supported.
� For Universal model QCPU (excluding Q00UJ, Q00U, Q01U, and Q02U), programs with motion dedicated instructions (Command generation axis speed change during positioning or JOG operation, Present value change of stopped command generation axis) can be used.
Parameter
The Ethernet adapter setting is supported by FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, and FX3UC.
Network Parameter
Network configuration of CC-Link IE Field Network can be set graphically on the CC IE Field Configuration window.
Parameter data set on the CC-Link Configuration window can be copied.
Global label
Duplications of device names assigned to global labels can be checked.
Registered system labels can be deleted.
Ladder
� When "A-PLC Compatibility Setting" on the <<PLC System>> tab of PLC parameter is not selected, entries of special relays/ special registers can be checked on the Enter Symbol screen and the Enter List screen.
� The [Undo] operation can be performed up to 30 times when editing a program on the ladder editor.
� Device comments can be displayed/hidden using tooltips on the ladder editor.
SFC
� The number of contacts to be displayed on a single rung can be changed on the SFC (Zoom) editor window.
� The window display operations of the SFC editor window and the Zoom editor window are linked.
� Device comments can be displayed/hidden using tooltips on the Zoom editor window.
Reference (Intelligent) (Structured)
(Simple) (Structured)
� Section 3.2.2 Section 14.2.2
(Intelligent)
Section 15.1.7
�
Section 6.1.1 Section 6.3.2
� (Simple) (Structured)
�
(Simple)
App - 180
Appendix 12 Functions Added Since Previous Versions
Version Version 1.91V
Major function added/ changed
ST Structured Ladder/FBD Compile Verify
Cross Reference
Device List Find/Replace Online Program Change Monitor
Sampling Trace
Ethernet Diagnostics CC IE Field Diagnostics CC-Link/ CC-Link/LT Diagnostics System monitor Merge Data
Description
Reference
� VAR_OUTPUT can be used for an argument of function block.
� Device names, monitored values, and device comments can be checked using tooltips on the ST editor.
Device comments can be checked using tooltips on the Structured Ladder/FBD editor.
The usage of automatically assigned devices is displayed after programs are compiled.
Among the rows with mismatched devices in program files of project with labels, the cursor skips the rows whose mismatched devices are within the range of devices automatically assigned to labels.
Constant (K) and constant (H) can be specified and searched for devices/labels.
� Two or more search locations can be selected. � The search result can be displayed in the order of program
setting.
� Items (contacts, coils, etc.) can be displayed/hidden. � Two or more search locations can be selected.
The default setting for "Find In" is set as "Current window".
Devices, such as pointers, which are not related to the search option can be searched disregarding the option setting such as "Digit" and "Multiple word".
Two or more search locations can be selected.
For Universal model QCPU (excluding Q00UJ/Q00U/Q01UCPU)/ LCPU, the changes can be applied to the boot source after performing Online program change.
ON/OFF status of device names of contacts/coils can be displayed with the monitoring function of ladder program.
� CSV files can be output in the format which can be used to read data from GX LogViewer.
� Changes on global device comments or label comments of global labels/local labels are applied to device comments or label comments on the Sampling Trace screen.
� After data under the "Device/Label" column is edited on the Sampling Trace screen, the cursor moves to the next row.
� Two or more data can be selected to be copied or to change settings of trend graph registration on the Sampling Trace screen.
� When scrolling vertically on the Sampling Trace screen, the vertical axis information line is not scrolled.
� The cursor jumps to the specified position by entering a value to the cell of 'currently selected number of data acquisitions'.
� The setting to cancel the display of the confirmation message at the sampling trace start is applicable.
� The trace result on the Sampling Trace screen can be scrolled using the shortcut keys.
The Ethernet adapter diagnostics is supported by FX3G, FX3GC, FX3U, and FX3UC.
� Remote device station is supported. � The display of data link unexecuted stations is modified.
The CC-Link diagnostics is continued on CC-Link modules mounted on the slots following the empty slot on the extension base unit.
Q24DHCCPU-V can be monitored with QCPU (except for Q00JCPU and Q00UJCPU).
Information of "Target Data List" can be displayed on tooltips.
(Simple) (Structured) (Structured)
(Simple) (Structured) Section 4.2.7 Section 4.6.5
� Section 10.1 Section 10.2
� Section 10.3.1 Section 10.3 Section 15.9.1
(Simple)
Section 19.4
Section 21.7 Section 21.7.2 Section 21.7.3 Section 21.4 Section 21.6 Section 21.9 Section 4.3.5
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
APPENDIX
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
MONITORING
17 18 19 20 21 22 A I
INDEX
App - 181
APPENDIX
Version Version 1.98C
Major function added/ changed
Description
� High-speed Universal model QCPU (Q03UDV, Q04UDV, Q06UDV, Q13UDV, Q26UDV) is supported.
Programmable controller type � L02S, L06, L26, and LJ72MS15 are supported. � For Structured project, Process CPU (Q02PH, Q06PH, Q12PH, Q25PH) and Redundant CPU (Q12PRH, Q25PRH) are supported.
Transfer Setup
For FXCPU, the GOT (Ethernet) transparent function is supported.
Intelligent function module
� L60AD4-2GH, Q64DAH, QD77GF16, QJ51AW12AL, and LJ51AW12AL are supported.
� The auto refresh item is added for QD77MS2, QD77MS4, and QD77MS16.
Security
For High-speed Universal model QCPU (Q03UDV, Q04UDV, Q06UDV, Q13UDV, Q26UDV), projects and programmable controller CPUs can be locked/unlocked with security keys.
Menu
Menu names and positions are unified between GX Works2 and iQ Works.
For LCPU, the IP packet transfer setting on the <<Built-in Ethernet Port Setting>> tab of PLC Parameter is supported.
Parameter
� For Universal model QCPU, the network operation setting is supported by the CC IE Control network parameter.
� For LCPU, Ethernet can be set in the network parameter.
� For LCPU, CC IE Field (Sub-Master Station) is supported by the network parameter.
� For LCPU, the IP address setting is supported by "Network Operation Settings" of CC-Link IE Field Network parameter (master station, sub-master station).
� Network configuration of AnyWireASLINK can be set graphically on the AnyWireASLINK Configuration window.
� The configuration of the actual system connected to CC-Link can be applied to the CC-Link Configuration window.
For Universal model QCPU, CC IE Field (motion master station) is supported in the network parameter.
Write to PLC
The set values of XY devices can be written when writing data to a programmable controller CPU on which the simulation function is in operation.
Block password
For FXCPU, a block password can be set for POUs in batch.
Ladder
� For FXCPU, programs in ladder block unit can be displayed/ edited in the list format.
� The different sections of the same program can be monitored simultaneously using the reference window of the ladder editor.
� The cursor position can be jumped to the position where the next specified device/label is used only with the shortcut key.
� Inline structured text programs can be called from function blocks created in ladder programs.
� Function blocks created in ST programs can be called from function blocks created in ladder programs.
SFC
For FXCPU, SFC diagrams can be converted in SFC block unit.
ST
Monitoring conditions can be set.
Structured Ladder/FBD
� Temporary arguments can be assigned for the arguments when calling function blocks in Structured project.
� Monitoring conditions can be set.
CC IE Control Diagnostics The IP communication test is supported.
CC IE Field Diagnostics
CC-Link IE Field Network CC-Link Bridge module, CC-Link IE Field Network High Speed Counter module, and Simple Motion module are supported.
Ethernet Diagnostics
L series Ethernet module is supported.
Reference
�
Section 14.9.1 (Intelligent) Section 4.11 Section 16.5 � Section 6.1.1
Section 6.3.1
Section 6.3.3 (iQSS) �
Section 15.1.2 Section 4.12.1
(Simple)
� (Simple) (Structured) Section 21.3 Section 21.4 Section 21.7.1
App - 182
Appendix 12 Functions Added Since Previous Versions
Version Version 1.98C
Version 1.492N
Major function added/ changed
Description
Sensor/Device Monitor
The function to monitor iQSS-compatible devices which are connected with AnyWireASLINK or CC-Link is supported.
Print
Operation outputs and transition conditions can be appended on the print of SFC diagram.
Intelligent function module tool
Waveform output data of QCPU (Q mode) can be created for analog module Q64DAH.
FB library
For QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU Simple project (with labels), FBs created in another project can be added to the project being edited on the Install screen.
Unused label list
For Structured project, extracted unused labels can be deleted in batch.
Cross reference
When the Auto-tracking mode is selected, cross reference information can be updated only when the cursor is moved by clicking the mouse or pressing the key.
Watch
The display format (number display (1/0)/ON/OFF display/symbol display (/)) of the current value of bit device can be changed.
Monitor
The program can be verified with the program on the programmable controller CPU before starting the monitoring of the Structured Ladder/FBD editor or the ST editor.
Intelligent function module monitor
For QD73A1, the required items for the accumulated pulse error detection function can be monitored.
Shortcut key customize
The template on which the MEDOC format shortcut keys can be set is added.
Options
For QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU, by setting the reference/reflection targets of device comments for 'PLC parameter setting', device comments can be referred/reflected according to the range of local devices specified on the <<Device>> tab of PLC parameter.
Operating environment
Windows� 8 is supported.
Programmable controller type L02S-P, L06-P, L26-P, and FX3S are supported.
Parameter
� The function to verify the actual system configuration connected to AnyWireASLINK and the configuration being displayed on the AnyWireASLINK Configuration window is supported.
� The information such as refresh device and I/O device assignment set to the parameter of AnyWireASLINK can be displayed on the Device Reference window.
� The function to verify the actual system configuration connected to CC-Link and the configuration being displayed on the CC-Link Configuration window is supported.
� The parameter settings for the equipment connected to the communication module.
For LCPU, the open setting of the built-in Ethernet port setting can be set graphically on the Ethernet Configuration window.
Intelligent function module
L60AD2DA2, LD77MS2, LD77MS4, and LD77MS16 are supported.
Device comment
The line wrapping of the device comment for display can be displayed on the device comment editor.
� When entering an instruction of ST program, the instructions
which can be entered are displayed.
ST
� For Universal model QCPU/LCPU, in case 32-bit index setting
is enabled, over 65,536 array elements with structure array can
be accessed.
Reference Section 21.8
(iQSS) Section 11.5.8
(Intelligent) (FB)
(Structured) Section 10.1.2 Section 17.6.4
(Structured) �
Section 3.2.8
Section 12.2 � �
(Intelligent) (iQSS)
Section 6.3.3 (iQSS)
Section 6.1.3 (iQSS)
(Intelligent) Section 9.2.1
�
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
APPENDIX
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
MONITORING
17 18 19 20 21 22 A I
INDEX
App - 183
APPENDIX
Version Version 1.492N
Version 1.499V
Major function added/ changed
Structured Ladder/FBD
Simulation function Sensor/Device Monitor Intelligent function module Predefined protocol support function Parameter Structured Ladder/FBD
FB library
Cross Reference
Write to PLC Read from PLC Monitor Language selection
Description
Reference
When the Auto connect function is enabled, the selected element can be moved/copied without lines connected.
� The elements can be copied between projects. � When editing a variable or an instance name, the labels which
can be entered are displayed. � For Universal model QCPU/LCPU, in case 32-bit index setting
is enabled, over 65,536 array elements with structure array can be accessed.
For High-speed Universal model QCPU, the simulation function is supported.
The function to monitor iQSS-compatible devices which are connected to Ethernet is supported.
Waveform output data of L60AD2DA2 can be created.
The predefined protocol support function for Ethernet modules is supported.
The Change Module function is supported on the Ethernet Configuration window.
Devices, addresses, and/or label comments can be displayed with label. Also, addresses and/or device comments can be displayed with devices on the Structured Ladder/FBD editor.
For QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU Simple project (with labels), the function to add the FB created with the project being edited to other projects is supported on the Export FB to Library (Project) screen.
The cross reference function can be performed when a ladder editor being edited (in uncompiled state) exists.
The setting to search the constant (K and H) is added for search condition on the <<Condition Setting>> tab.
Write to PLC can be performed when a ladder editor being edited (in uncompiled state) exists.
When reading intelligent function module parameters, the recommended module models of the specific modules can be displayed.
For MELSAP-L (Instruction Format), bit devices can be monitored on the SFC diagram editor.
The data created with Chinese (traditional characters) can be displayed without character corruption by selecting the project language.
(Structured)
�
Chapter 18 Section 21.8
(iQSS) (Intelligent) (Intelligent) Section 6.1.3 (Structured)
(FB)
Section 10.1 Section 10.1.2 Section 15.1 Section 15.1.4
(Simple) Section 3.3 Appendix 18
App - 184
Appendix 12 Functions Added Since Previous Versions
Version Version 1.501X Version 1.507D
Major function added/ changed
Navigation window
Intelligent function module
SFC Structured Ladder/FBD
Parameter
Device Memory
Project Colors and fonts Online Program Change Monitor Simulation function Predefined protocol support function Operating environment Intelligent function module
Ladder
Watch
Description
Reference
For FXCPU, Special Module (Intelligent Function Module) is supported.
� One initial setting of the temperature control modules (Q64TCTTN, Q64TCRTN, Q64TCTTBWN, Q64TCRTBWN, L60TCTT4, L60TCTT4BW, L60TCRT4, and L60TCRT4BW) is added.
� FX3U-128ASL-M is supported.
For LCPU (except for L02S/L02S-P and L02/L02-P), the settings of operation mode for "Act at Block Multi-Activated" can be changed.
Ladder block comments can be displayed on the ladder block list.
For LCPU, the extended setting of step relay (S device) is supported.
When "CC IE Field (Motion Master Station)" is set to network type, setting the network configuration using CC IE Field configuration window is supported.
For CC IE Field head module, setting the network configuration using CC-Link configuration window or AnyWireASLINK configuration window is supported.
After performing "Read from PLC" or opening other format project, a number of columns of editor can be set when opening the device memory editor at the first time.
The operability or screen layout of the project operation (New, Open, Close, Save, Save As, Delete) are standardized among MELSOFT products.
The font size can be changed on the font setting of Structured ladder/FBD editor and ST editor.
For LCPU (except for L02S/L02S-P and L02/L02-P), online change of SFC block is supported.
When opening other program editors during monitoring, monitor can be started automatically.
For LCPU, the settings for branch modules are supported.
Predefined protocol support function for built-in/adapter serial and built-in Ethernet is supported.
Windows� 8.1 is supported.
FX3U-20SSC-H and FX-ENET series are supported.
� Statement/note type can be changed for all programs in the project by clicking the [Change All] button on the Switch Statement/Note Type screen.
� When "Use the Switching Ladder Edit Mode (Read, Write, Monitor, Monitor (Write))" is selected, stopped monitors can be restarted by pressing shortcut keys.
The columns to display the registration status of forced I/O and current values in binary, octal, decimal, hexadecimal, real, character string, and time are added.
Registration of the next device/label of the registered device/label using shortcut keys is supported.
When bit devices or bit type labels are ON during monitoring, the background color of the row is changed to the color set to "Color and fonts".
Section 4.1.3
(Intelligent)
(Simple) (Structured)
�
Section 6.3.2
Section 6.3.3 (Intelligent) Section 4.7.1 Section 15.1.8 Section 4.2.1 Section 4.2.2 Section 4.2.3 Section 4.2.5 Section 3.2.7 Section 15.9.1 Section 17.2 Appendix 2 (Intelligent)
� (Intelligent)
(Simple)
Section 17.6.1
Section 17.6.2
�
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
APPENDIX
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
MONITORING
17 18 19 20 21 22 A I
INDEX
App - 185
APPENDIX
Version Version 1.513K
Version 1.521T
Major function added/ changed
Description
Reference
Intelligent function module L60MD4-G, L60ADVL8, and L60ADIL8 are supported.
(Intelligent)
Instruction FB library
� For High-speed Universal model CPU with a serial number
whose first five digits are '16042' or higher and LCPU,
SMOV(P), CMP(P), DCMP(P), ZCP(P), and DZCP(P) are
supported.
�
� For High-speed Universal model CPU with a serial number
whose first five digits are '16042' or higher, SP.READ and
SP.WRITE are supported.
For FXCPU Simple project (with labels), FBs created in another
project can be added to the project being edited on the Install
(FB)
screen.
Print
For FXCPU Simple project, program settings can be printed in batch.
Section 11.5.6
View
The display positions of dockable windows can be returned to their default.
Section 3.2.4
CC IE Field Diagnostics Device/label automaticassign setting Confirm Memory Size
Options
For the master/local station, occurrence of received frame error can be displayed.
Section 21.4
For L06, L06-P, L26, L26-P, L26-BT, and L26-PBT, pointer assignment range can be extended in "Pointer Extended Setting for Automatic-Assign Device" of PLC parameter.
Section 6.1.1
The memory size of local devices and sampling trace can be displayed.
Section 15.10.3
The option to set the communication route to programmable controller direct connection setting when creating a new project is added.
Section 12.2
The option that do not check duplicated coils for SET instructions at program check or compiling all programs is added.
(Simple) (Structured)
Transfer Setup
The connection route via RCPU is supported.
�
Tool bar
Intelligent function module data
The selection status of the tool bar that indicates the display status of docking window/project data can be saved in the project.
When reading GX Configulator-QP data, the I/O address set to GX Configulator-QP is reflected to the start X/Y address and
mounted slot number on the New Module screen.
Section 3.2.2 (Intelligent)
Device comments which are not used in the project can be deleted in batch.
Section 9.3.3
Device comment
Extended devices (U\G, BL\S, BL\TR, J\X, J\Y, J\B, J\W, J\SB,
J\SW) are distinguished with the point of the extension part and
regarded as different devices even if they are the same device
type.
�
Therefore, the device comments of each extended device are
treated as a different device comments of devices in the CPU
module.
Ladder
The mode of the program which contains unconverted ladder blocks can be switched between Write mode and Monitor (write mode).
Open other project
When reading a GX Developer format project, whether to enable the option to call a function block can be selected.
Save project in GX Developer The project which contains unconverted programs or function
format
blocks can be saved.
(Simple) �
Appendix 4.17
Device List
Device comments which are not used in the project can be deleted in device units.
Section 10.2
Read from PLC
Device comments in the project can be replaced with the device comments read from the programmable controller CPU.
Section 12.2
Monitor
In MELSAP-L (instruction format) or MELSAP-L (start conditions format), word devices and labels can be monitored.
For LCPU, the Realtime Monitor function of GX LogViewer can be started up.
(Simple) Section 17.9
App - 186
Appendix 12 Functions Added Since Previous Versions
Version Version 1.521T
Version 1.525X
Major function added/ changed
CC IE Field Diagnostics
Options
Parameter
Instruction
Transfer Setup Replace Compile Write to PLC Debug System monitor Confirm Memory Size Predefined protocol support function
Description
Reference
� The occurrence of received frame error in the slave station can be displayed.
� Display of slave station can be switched between station type and device name.
Section 21.4
� Whether to always write the source information at Online program change or not can be selected.
� Whether to display the completion message or not at closing the progress dialog of Read from PLC/Write to PLC can be selected.
Section 12.2
When "When writing to PLC after a Rebuild All operation, clear
the device ranges set in the Device/Label Auto-Assign setting to
0." is selected, the message that indicates clearing device values to '0' when data is written to the programmable controller CPU is
�
displayed on the Write to PLC screen or option screen displayed
after compiling all programs.
For LCPU (except for L02S/L02S-P), file transfer function (FTP client) and e-mail function are supported.
Section 6.1.1
For LCPU, LA1S extension base unit is supported.
�
� For High-speed Universal model QCPU and LCPU with a serial
number whose first five digits are '16102' or higher, ECMP(P),
EDCMP(P), EZCP(P), EDZCP(P), SFTR(P), SFTL(P),
WSFR(P), WSFL(P), CCD(P), CRC(P), TCMP(P), TZCP(P),
HOURM, DHOURM, and PID are supported.
�
� For LCPU with a serial number whose first five digits are
'16102' or higher, SP.FTPPUT, SP.FTPGET, SP.MLSEND,
SP.MLRECV, SP.MLOPEADR, and SP.MLGETADR are
supported.
For Redundant CPU, Ethernet connection between GOT and programmable controller CPU is supported.
�
The GOT (CC-Link IE Control) transparent function is supported. Section 14.9.3
Devices which are specified with multiple points can be replaced in SFC block information.
�
After a compilation, projects can be saved automatically.
(Simple) (Structured)
For FXCPU, the number of device comments and maximum number of comments to be written can be displayed.
Section 15.1.3
The result after switching ON/OFF status of bit devices by pressing the key + key after selecting a bit device or double-clicking a bit device while pressing the key on the ladder editor, ST editor, and Structured Ladder/FBD editor can be
checked on the Modify Value screen.
Section 19.1.1
For LCPU, the configuration on which LA1S extension base unit is used can be displayed.
Section 21.9
For FXCPU, the number of device comments and maximum number of comments to be written can be displayed.
Section 15.10.4
A protocol setting file of other format can be opened.
(Intelligent)
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
MONITORING
17 18 19 20 21 22 A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
App - 187
APPENDIX
Version Version 1.530C
Version 1.535H Version 1.540N Version 1.542Q
Major function added/ changed
Description
Reference
Parameter
The function to apply the actual system configuration connected to the CC-Link IE Field Network to the CC IE Field Configuration window is supported.
Section 6.3.2 (iQSS)
When entering an instruction/label in the project with labels, press
Ladder/SFC/ST/ Structured Ladder/FBD
the key or key while the instruction/label option is displayed, the instruction/label displayed on the top is inserted
�
automatically.
Ladder
When changing an FB instance name on the ladder editor,
whether to change all the instance names with the same name or
(FB)
change only the selected FB instance can be selected.
SFC
When changing a step number on the Enter SFC Symbol screen/
Enter SFC Symbol/Enter Program screen, whether to overwrite
the comment which has been set to the step number before the
�
change to the comment of the step number after the change can
be selected.
Step number can be sorted for all blocks. Additionally, the step number in an inactive block can be sorted.
(Simple)
Library
When the data name of the global label is duplicated between the library file to be installed and project, the data name can be changed at installation of user library.
(Structured)
Device List
The search location where the search is completed normally is retained while the project is open on the Device List screen.
�
Compile
Programs other than compilation target, functions, function blocks, and structures are displayed in blue at compilation.
(Simple) (Structured)
Read from PLC/Write to PLC/ For Structured project, the read from PLC/write to PLC/verify/
Verify/Delete
delete function can be performed without checking the password.
Section 12.2
Sensor/Device Monitor
The function to monitor iQSS-compatible devices which are connected to CC-Link IE Field Network is supported.
(iQSS)
Parameter
MELSOFT Connection Extended function is supported.
Section 6.1.1
Intelligent function module L60RD8 is supported.
(Intelligent)
Monitor
"Word Multi-point" display format can be switched with a button on the Device/Buffer Memory Batch Monitor screen.
Section 17.3
For the station status, "Error station (Illegal ring connection
CC IE Field Diagnostics
detected)" and "Error station (Minor/Moderate/Major)" can be
�
displayed simultaneously.
Intelligent function module tool
� Free Conversion Characteristics Function and Free Operation Function added in L60AD2DA2 are supported.
� 2-point Sensor Compensation Value Registration Function is supported.
(Intelligent)
Intelligent function module QD77GF4 and QD77GF8 are supported.
(Intelligent)
Parameter
The parameter processing of slave stations can be performed while the programmable controller CPU set as a connection target is in RUN status.
Section 6.3.2 Section 6.3.3
SFC
The display position of the SFC diagram editor window and the Zoom editor window can be returned to the initial status.
For simple project, the block with the same name can be overwritten and pasted over on the SFC block list.
Section 1.3.3 (Simple)
(Simple)
Device comment
All the local device comments can be written/read in a batch.
Section 9.6
Profile Management
The registered profile can be deleted.
Section 4.13.2
Options
The option to copy device comment including the hidden bit specification information is added.
When Input Device Comment screen is displayed on the ladder editor and the Zoom editor window, whether to display the Device/ Label Comment field in editing status or not can be selected.
Section 12.2 Section 12.2
Options
Whether to always write the symbolic information on the Write to PLC window can be selected.
Section 12.2
App - 188
Appendix 12 Functions Added Since Previous Versions
Version Version 1.545T
Version 1.550Y Version 1.555D Version 1.560J
Major function added/ changed
Operating environment Intelligent function module
Change PLC Type
Transfer Setup Print Verify
Parameter Incorporation with iQ AppPortal Open Other Project Parameter Instruction
Monitor CC-Link IEF Basic Diagnostics Block Passwords Intelligent function module Block Passwords
Description
Reference
Windows� 10 is supported.
� L60DAVL8 and L60DAIL8 are supported.
� The number of the initial setting for Q64ADH is added by 1.
In <<Multiple CPU Setting>> of the PLC parameter, <<Communication Area Setting (Refresh Setting)>> for High Performance model QCPU or Process CPU can be converted to <<Multiple CPU High Speed Transmission Area Setting>> for Universal model QCPU (except for Q00UJ, Q00U, Q01U, and Q02U).
When changing from Basic model QCPU, High Performance model QCPU, and Process CPU to Universal model QCPU, the number of points of B and W can be changed in "Refresh Parameters" of MELSECNET/H under "Network Parameter" according to <<Device>> in PLC parameter.
The GOT (CC-Link IE Field) transparent mode is supported.
The number of header/footer rows that can be entered is changed from 3 to 7.
For program files of a project with labels, the rows with mismatches within the range of device/label automatic-assign setting can be displayed in a different background color.
For High-speed Universal model QCPU, the open setting of the built-in Ethernet port setting can be set graphically on the Ethernet Configuration window.
� (Intelligent)
�
� Section 14.9.4 Section 11.4 Section 4.2.7 Section 6.1.3
(iQSS)
iQ AppPortal information files can be output when saving projects. Section 4.3.6
A block number for an SFC block assigned in a GX Developer format project is retained.
The CC-Link IEF Basic setting can be set on the <<Built-in Ethernet Port Setting>> tab of PLC parameter.
The SP.SLMPSND instruction is supported by High-speed Universal model QCPU and LCPU whose first five digits of a serial number are '18112' or higher.
In High-speed Universal model QCPU, a program can be started and stopped by using the program list monitor function.
Section 4.7.1 Section 6.1.4
� Section 17.4
CC-Link IE Field Network Basic can be diagnosed.
Section 21.5
Execution programs can be protected on LCPU.
LD40PD01 is supported.
Execution programs can be protected on High-speed Universal model QCPU.
Section 4.12.2 (Intelligent)
Section 4.12.2
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
MONITORING
17 18 19 20 21 22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
App - 189
APPENDIX
Version Version 1.566Q Version 1.570U
Major function added/ changed
Parameter
Instruction Connection destination setting Cross Reference Device List Colors and fonts Structured Ladder PLC diagnostics Product Makeup SFC
Description
Reference
The number of slave stations that can be set in 'CC-Link IEF Basic Setting' on the <<Built-in Ethernet Port Setting>> tab of "PLC Parameter" is increased as follows: � 64 stations for high-speed universal model QCPUs � 16 stations for built-in Ethernet port LCPUs
� A function to apply the actual system configuration connected in CC-Link IE Field Network Basic to the CC-Link IEF Basic Configuration window is supported.
� A function to apply the communication setting set in the CCLink IEF Basic Configuration window to slave stations is supported.
� For high-speed universal model QCPUs, the operation history of a CPU module can be saved by setting the item on the <<PLC RAS>> tab of "PLC Parameter".
� For high-speed universal model QCPUs, a device range to prohibit device writing from an external device can be set on the <<Device Setting>> tab of "PLC Parameter" is selected.
The DATE2SEC(P) instruction and the SEC2DATE(P) instruction is supported by High-speed Universal model QCPU whose first five digits of a serial number are '19042' or higher.
The GOT (Ethernet) transparent function can be performed when a personal computer and a GOT are connected by Ethernet.
The value set for "Start Device to Store Predefined Protocol Operation Status" in "Open Setting", "Built-in Serial Setting", and "Adapter Serial Setting" on the <<Built-in Ethernet Port Setting>> tab of "PLC Parameter" can be searched.
The value set for "Start Device to Store Predefined Protocol Operation Status" in "Open Setting", "Built-in Serial Setting", and "Adapter Serial Setting" on the <<Built-in Ethernet Port Setting>> tab of "PLC Parameter" can be searched.
� Colors of texts, backgrounds, grids, and devices in an SFC block list can be changed in "Color Setting" on the SFC editor.
� Colors of device names and label names while monitoring an inline ST are changed by following the setting for "Normal Text and Symbol" in "Color Setting" of the ladder editor.
On the Structured Ladder/FBD editor, the display item in functions/function blocks can be switched between input/output labels or comments.
For high-speed universal model QCPUs, the operation history of a CPU module can be displayed.
Data is supplied with three DVD-ROMs.
In an SFC block list, a block number can be searched.
Section 6.1.4
Section 6.1.4
Section 6.1.1
� Section 14.9.1 Section 10.1
Section 10.2
Section 3.2.7
(Structured) Section 21.1.1
GX Works2 Installation Instructions
(Simple)
App - 190
Appendix 12 Functions Added Since Previous Versions
Version Version 1.576A Version 1.580E
Major function added/ changed
Description
Save project in GX Developer The value of the secured steps for Online program change can be
format
saved.
The simple PLC communication setting is supported by Highspeed Universal model QCPUs.
In the simple PLC communication setting for LCPUs, "MELSECiQ-R (Built-in Ethernet Function)" or "SLMP-Compatible Device (QnA Compatible 3E Frame)" can be selected.
Parameter
For High-speed Universal model QCPUs, a function to apply an actual system configuration on the CC-Link IE Field Network to the CC IE Field Configuration window is supported.
For High-speed Universal model QCPUs, a function to verify an actual system configuration on the CC-Link IE Field Network with the CC IE Field Configuration window is supported.
For High-speed Universal model QCPUs, the parameters of the slave stations selected in the CC IE Field Configuration window can be backed up to a memory card.
For High-speed Universal model QCPUs, the parameters of slave stations that were backed up with the CC IE Field Configuration window can be restored.
Ladder
In the continuous paste function, cut or copied ladder blocks are pasted as follows.
� If a bit-specified word device number becomes greater than 'F' then it is incremented and carried up.
� For an indexed device, the index number is not incremented, but the device number is.
Text color (color/monochrome) in inline structured text boxes can be switched in [View] [ST Monochrome Display].
ST
Text color (color/monochrome) on an ST editor can be switched in [View] [ST Monochrome Display].
FB library
For a Simple project (with labels), an FB for which a block password has been set can be added to the project being edited.
Sensor/Device Monitor
For High-speed Universal model QCPUs, a function to monitor devices supporting iQSS on CC-Link IE Field Network is supported.
Parameter
"MELSEC iQ-F (Built-in Ethernet Function)" can be selected as the communication destination in the simple PLC communication setting in a High-speed Universal model QCPU project and an LCPU project.
For MELSOFT Navigator, the subnet mask pattern and the default router IP address can be applied to the Built-in Ethernet Port Setting of PLC parameter even if the parameters are applied without connecting to the CC-Link IEF Basic Configuration.
Instruction
The SP.LOGNAMER instruction and SP.LOGFILES instruction is supported by High-speed Universal model QCPU whose first five digits of a serial number are '20073' or higher.
Property
The program title of the program setting and the POU can be linked.
Device comment
Text size on the device comment editor can be changed.
Ladder
The mode of all open windows can be switched between "Read Mode" and "Write Mode".
SFC
The mode of all open windows can be switched between "Read Mode" and "Write Mode".
Read from PLC
The remaining steps for Online program change can be read in a Simple project (with labels) and a Structured project.
Verify
For Q series and L series, projects between different programmable controller types can be verified.
Copy and paste
For Q series and L series, project data between different programmable controller types can be copied and pasted.
Reference Section 4.8 Section 6.1.1
Section 6.3.2 (iQSS)
(Simple)
(Structured) (FB)
Section 21.8 (iQSS)
Section 6.1.1
�
�
Section 4.3.6 Section 9.1.3
(Simple) (Simple) Section 15.1.6 Section 4.2.7 Section 4.3.2
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
APPENDIX
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
MONITORING
17 18 19 20 21 22 A I
INDEX
App - 191
APPENDIX
Version Version 1.585K
Major function added/ changed
Parameter Connection destination setting
Sensor/Device Monitor
Print
Description
Reference
An object name can be displayed or hidden from the list of devices on CC IE Field Configuration window.
An Ethernet adapter to communicate with a CPU module can be selected.
Section 6.3.2
Section 14.2.2 Section 14.6
The following functions are supported by AnyWireASLINK.
� The display format of monitoring value in "Monitoring Information" can be selected from "Bit", "Word Decimal Number Signed", "Word Decimal Number Unsigned" or "Word Hexadecimal Number".
� Character strings set in a profile can be displayed in the status of "Monitoring Information".
(iQSS)
A device list can be printed including used devices filtered with AND or OR condition.
Section 11.5.18
App - 192
Appendix 13 Supported Versions of Modules
Appendix 13 Supported Versions of Modules
17
MONITORING
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
The following table shows the modules which are supported according to the upgrades. Modules can be used in the corresponding and later versions of GX Works2.
Supported version
Supported module
CPU module/Remote I/O module/ Communication head module
Intelligent function module
Version 1.05F
Q02(H), Q02U, Q03UD, Q03UDE, Q04UDH, Q04UDEH, Q06H, Q06UDH, Q06UDEH, Q12H, Q13UDH, Q13UDEH, Q25H, Q26UDH, Q26UDEH
� Analog Q64AD, Q68ADV, Q68ADI, Q64AD-GH, Q62AD-DGH, Q68AD-G, Q66AD-DG, Q62DAN, Q64DAN, Q68DAVN, Q68DAIN, Q62DA, Q64DA, Q68DAV, Q68DAI, Q62DA-FG, Q66DA-G
� Temperature input Q64RD, Q64RD-G, Q64TD, Q64TDV-GH, Q68TD-G-H01, Q68RD3-G
� Temperature control Q64TCTT, Q64TCTTBW, Q64TCRT, Q64TCRTBW, Q62HLC
� Counter QD62, QD62E, QD62D, QD63P6, QD64D2, QD60P8-G
� QD75 type positioning QD75P1, QD75P2, QD75P4, QD75D1, QD75D2, QD75D4, QD75M1, QD75M2, QD75M4, QD75MH1, QD75MH2, QD75MH4
� QD70 type positioning QD70P4, QD70P8, QD70D4, QD70D8, QD72P3C3
� Serial communication/modem interface QJ71C24N, QJ71C24N-R2, QJ71C24N-R4, QJ71C24, QJ71C24-R2
� AS-i master QJ71AS92
� FL-net (OPCN-2) interface QJ71FL71-F01, QJ71FL71-T-F01, QJ71FL71-B2-F01, QJ71FL71-B5-F01, QJ71FL71, QJ71FL71-T, QJ71FL71-B2, QJ71FL71-B5
Version 1.08J
Q00UJ, Q00U, Q01U, Q10UDH, Q10UDEH, Q20UDH, Q20UDEH
FX0, FX0S, FX0N, FX1, FXU, FX2C, FX1S, FX1N, FX1NC, FX2N, FX2NC, FX3G, FX3U, FX3UC
� Temperature input Q68TD-G-H02
�
Version 1.12N
Q00J, Q00, Q01
� Analog Q64AD2DA, Q61LD
Version 1.15R
�
�
Version 1.24A
L02, L26-BT
� Analog L64AD4, L60DA4
� Serial communication LJ71C24, LJ71C24-R2
Q50UDEH, Q100UDEH
�
Version 131H
LJ72GF15-T2
� Counter LD62, LD62D
� LD75 type positioning LD75P4, LD75D4
� Simple motion LD77MH4
Version 1.40S
QJ72LP25, QJ72BR15
�
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
APPENDIX
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
18 19 20 21 22 A I
INDEX
App - 193
APPENDIX
Supported version
Supported module
CPU module/Remote I/O module/ Communication head module
Intelligent function module
Version 1.48A
�
� Counter QD65PD2
� Simple motion LD77MH16
Version 1.53F
�
� MODBUS interface QJ71MT91, QJ71MB91
Version 1.62Q
� L02-P, L26-PBT
� Temperature control Q64TCTTN, Q64TCRTN, Q64TCTTBWN, Q64TCRTBWN,
� Temperature control L60TCTT4, L60TCTT4BW, L60TCRT4, L60TCRT4BW
Version 1.64S
�
� QD75 type positioning QD75P1N, QD75P2N, QD75P4N, QD75D1N, QD75D2N, QD75D4N
Version 1.73B
�
� Analog Q64ADH
� Version 1.77F
�
� Analog Q68CT
� Simple motion QD77MS2, QD77MS4, QD77MS16
� LD75 type positioning LD75P1, LD75P2, LD75D1, LD75D2
FX3GC
�
Version 1.87R
Q02PH*1, Q06PH*1, Q12PH *1, Q25PH*1, Q12PRH*1, � QD70 type positioning
Q25PRH*1
QD73A1
Version 1.91V
Q02PH*2, Q06PH*2, Q12PH*2, Q25PH*2, Q12PRH*2, Q25PRH*2
� Energy measuring QE81WH, QE81WH4W, QE84WH, QE83WH4W, QE82LG
Version 1.98C
Q02PH*3, Q06PH*3, Q12PH*3, Q25PH*3, Q12PRH*3, Q25PRH*3, Q03UDV, Q04UDV, Q06UDV, Q13UDV, Q26UDV
� Analog Q64DAH
� Simple motion QD77GF16
� AnyWireASLINK interface QJ51AW12AL
L02S, L06, L26, LJ72MS15
� Analog L60AD4-2GH
� AnyWireASLINK interface LJ51AW12AL
Version 1.492N
L02S-P, L06-P, L26-P
� Analog L60AD2DA2
� Simple motion LD77MS2, LD77MS4, LD77MS16
FX3S
�
Version 1.501X
�
� AnyWireASLINK interface FX3U-128ASL-M
Version 1.507D
�
� Positioning FX3U-20SSC-H
� Ethernet FX-ENET series
Version 1.513K
�
� Multiple input L60MD4-G
� Analog L60ADVL8, L60ADIL8
App - 194
Appendix 13 Supported Versions of Modules
Supported version
Supported module
CPU module/Remote I/O module/ Communication head module
Intelligent function module
Version 1.535H
�
� Temperature input L60RD8
Version 1.540N
�
� Simple motion QD77GF4, QD77GF8
Version 1.545T
�
� Analog L60DAVL8,L60DAIL8
Version 1.560J
�
� Counter LD40PD01
Version 1.576A
�
� DeviceNet QJ71DN91
*1 : Simple projects (without labels) are supported. *2 : Simple projects are supported. *3 : Simple projects and Structured projects are supported.
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
MONITORING
17 18 19
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
App - 195
APPENDIX
Appendix 14 Procedure to Use GX Works2 Unsupported Programmable Controller Type
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
For programmable controller types which are not supported by GX Works2 (CPUs such as ACPU, QnACPU, and Safety CPU), use GX Developer. When GX Developer Version 8.95Z or later is installed, and a new project is created in GX Works2 with a selection of an unsupported programmable controller type, GX Developer starts automatically and a new project is created. (Section 4.2.1)
Appendix 14.1 Installing GX Developer
GX Developer is included on the GX Works2 DVD-ROM and CD-ROM.
For details on how to install GX Developer, refer to the following manual. GX Developer Version 8 Operating Manual (Startup) At installation, use the same product ID as GX Works2.
For GX Works2 Version 1.570U or later
The installation file is included in the "Disk2\GXD1" folder on the DVD-ROM. The following shows the installation procedure.
Operating procedure
� Run "Disk2\GXD1\SETUP.EXE" on the DVD-ROM.
The installation of GX Developer starts.
Installing updated version of GX Works2 When installing GX Developer at the same time as the installation of updated version of GX Works2, the product version of GX Developer needs to be installed in advance. When the product version of GX Developer is not installed, install GX Developer from the product version CD-ROM, or install GX Developer included on the GX Works2 DVD-ROM before installing the updated version of GX Works2.
App - 196
Appendix 14.1 Installing GX Developer
Appendix 14 Procedure to Use GX Works2 Unsupported Programmable Controller Type
For GX Works2 Version 1.521T or later and Version 1.568S or earlier
17
MONITORING
The installation file is included in the "GXD1" folder on the CD-ROM (Disc 2). The following shows the installation procedure.
Operating procedure
� Run "GXD1\SETUP.EXE" on the CD-ROM (Disc 2).
18
The installation of GX Developer starts.
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
Installing updated version of GX Works2
When installing GX Developer at the same time as the installation of updated version of GX Works2, the product
version of GX Developer needs to be installed in advance.
19
When the product version of GX Developer is not installed, install GX Developer from the product version CD-ROM, or
install GX Developer included on the GX Works2 CD-ROM (Disc 2) before installing the updated version of GX Works2.
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
Appendix 14.1 Installing GX Developer
App - 197
APPENDIX
For GX Works2 Version 1.50C or later, or Version 1.53K or earlier
GX Developer can be installed at installation of GX Works2 by the following procedure.
Operating procedure
1. Select "Install GX Developer" on the following screen displayed at installation of
GX Works2.
Select the items in "Select Component" as necessary.
2. Click the
button and proceed the installation.
GX Developer is installed after the completion of GX Works2 installation.
When installing GX Developer separately The installation file is included on the CD-ROM (Disc 1) of GX Works2. Install GX Developer by running "\support\GD1\SETUP.EXE".
App - 198
Appendix 14.1 Installing GX Developer
Appendix 14 Procedure to Use GX Works2 Unsupported Programmable Controller Type
For GX Works2 Version 1.48A or earlier
17
MONITORING
The installation file is included in the "Others" folder on the CD-ROM. The following is the installation procedure.
Operating procedure
1. Copy the GX Developer compressed file on the CD-ROM to the HDD on the personal 18
computer.
The path for the GX Developer compressed file on the CD-ROM is "\Others\d8-xxx.dat"*1.
*1 : "xxx" is an alphanumeric string.
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
2. Change the extension of the copied file from "dat" to "exe".
The file name is changed from "d8-xxx.dat" to "d8-xxx.exe".
19
3. Double-click the "d8-xxx.exe" file and decompress the file to the specified folder.
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
4. Run the decompressed "SETUP.EXE" file.
The installation of GX Developer starts.
20
Appendix 14.2 Utilizing programs of GX Works2 unsupported programmable controller type in GX Works2
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
Programs of GX Works2 unsupported programmable controller type created with GX Developer can be
utilized in GX Works2 by the following procedure.
21
The following is an example of utilizing an ACPU program created with GX Developer in the QCPU (Q
mode) project of GX Works2.
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
Operating procedure
1. Change the programmable controller type of the project from ACPU to QCPU (Q
mode) with GX Developer.
22
To change the programmable controller type, select [Project] [Change PLC type].
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
2. Save the project with GX Developer.
To save the project, select [Project] [Save As].
3. With GX Works2, read the project for QCPU (Q mode) created with GX Developer.
A
To read a GX Developer project with GX Works2, select [Project] [Open Other Data] [Open Other Project]. (Section 4.7.1)
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
Appendix 14.2 Utilizing programs of GX Works2 unsupported programmable controller type in GX Works2
App - 199
APPENDIX
Appendix 15 Considerations of Installation
This section explains the considerations of installation.
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
Installing a MELSOFT product for the first time
At the first installation of a MELSOFT product, the following screen may be displayed during
installation. To continue the installation, click the
button on the Software Installation
screen. (We have checked the operation and assured that the system operates without any problems
by performing this procedure.)
The Software Installation screen may be displayed behind another screen. Press the + keys to
bring it to the front.
App - 200
Appendix 15 Considerations of Installation
Procedure for continuing installation when it is not completed correctly
17
MONITORING
When the installation of a MELSOFT product or another software is not completed correctly, the following screen is displayed and the installation cannot continue unless the personal computer is restarted. In this case, restart the personal computer and start the installation again.
18
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
19
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
Considerations after the installation
When the following screen is displayed after the completion of the installation, select "This program
20
installed correctly" and restart the personal computer.
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
When "Reinstall using recommended settings" is erroneously selected, the Windows XP SP2
22
compatibility mode is automatically set.
Disable the Windows XP SP2 compatibility mode, and perform the reinstallation. The following shows
the example of the procedure.
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
App - 201
APPENDIX
Operating procedure
1. Right-click on the setup.exe icon of the installation
target on Windows� Explorer.
The setup Properties screen is displayed.
2. Click the
<<Compatibility>> tab.
button on the
3. Clear "Run this program in compatibility mode for:"
and click the
button.
4. Click the
button.
App - 202
Appendix 16 USB Driver Installation
Appendix 16 USB Driver Installation
17
MONITORING
In order to communicate with a programmable controller CPU via USB, a USB driver needs to be
installed.
The following explains the example of the procedure to install the USB driver.
For the installation procedure of USB driver for FX-USB-AW and FX3U-USB-BD, refer to the following manual.
18
FX-USB-AW/FX3U-USB-BD USER'S MANUAL - USB Driver Installation Edition
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
Operating procedure
1. Connect the personal computer and the programmable controller CPU with USB
cable, and then turn ON the programmable controller CPU.
19
2. Select [Control Panel] - [System and Security] - [Administrative Tools] - [Computer
Management] - [Device Manager] from Windows� Start*1. Then, right-click "Unknown device" or "MELSEC" and click "Update Driver Software".
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
3. Select "Browse my computer for driver software" on the Update Driver Software
screen, and specify 'Easysocket\USBDrivers' in the folder where GX Works2 is
20
installed on the next screen*2.
*1 : On the Start screen or from the Start menu.
*2 : If multiple MELSOFT products are already installed, specify 'Easysocket\USBDrivers' which is in the folder of the first product installed. If 'Easysocket\USBDrivers' does not exist, search 'USBDrivers' in the Windows explorer.
21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
App - 203
APPENDIX
Appendix 17 Considerations When Using English Version of GX Works2
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
This section explains the considerations when using project data, which is created in Japanese version of GX Works2, in English version of GX Works2. Refer to the considerations described in this section when using Japanese version of GX Works2 Version 1.42U or earlier, or English version of GX Works2 Version 1.44W or earlier. Note that, however, project data created in Japanese version of GX Works2 Version 1.45X or later which satisfy the following conditions can be used in English version of GX Works2 Version 1.48A or later. Data names listed in the section 'Section Appendix 16.1' match with the project language selected
for the "Language Selection" function. The font of the project language selected for the "Language Selection" function is installed in the
operating system. Use the programmable controller types applicable to English version of GX Works2 when using project data created in Japanese version of GX Works2 in English version of GX Works2.
App - 204
Appendix 17 Considerations When Using English Version of GX Works2
Appendix 17.1 Data to which double byte character and half-width
17
Japanese kana character are applicable
MONITORING
The following tables show all data to which double byte characters are applicable. When data
described in the following table contains a double byte character, any symptom described in
Appendix 17.2 occur.
18
When using Japanese version of GX Works2 Version 1.42U or earlier, or English version of GX Works2
Version 1.44W or earlier, refer to the considerations in Appendix 17.2.
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
However, if a project data created in Japanese version of GX Works2 satisfies the following conditions,
the project can be used in English version of GX Works2 Version 1.48A or later without any symptom
described in Appendix 17.2.
� When the language used for data with indicated in the 'Project language is unchangeable' column
of the following table matches with the project language set for "Language Selection".
19
� When the font of the specified project language is installed to the operating system.
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
Note that; however, when data other than alphanumeric character is used for the data with indicated
in the 'Project language is unchangeable' column of the following table, an error occurs at the change of
project language for Japanese version of GX Works2 Version 1.45X or later. Change the project
language after correcting the data name to match the changed project language.
Data to which double byte character and half-width Japanese kana character are applicable
20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
: Unchangeable �: Changeable
Item
Data name
Workspace
Project
Project revision Program
Ladder, ST, Structured Ladder/FBD, SFC (Zoom) SFC
Parameter Intelligent function module data Device comment Device memory Device initial value
Workspace name GX Works2 project name GX Developer project name Compressed project name Property (Title/Comment) Detailed information (Title/Comment) Program name Statement/Note/Comment/Label name FB instance name SFC block name SFC step/Transition comment Property (Block information) PLC parameter data Network parameter data Property (Title/Comment) Intelligent function module data Local device comment name Device comment Device memory name Property (Title/Comment) Device initial value name Comment
Changeable/ unchangeable project language
�
� �
21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
�
�
�
�
�
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
�
�
�
�
� �
A
�
�
APPENDIX
�
�
�
�
I
INDEX
Appendix 17.1 Data to which double byte character and half-width Japanese kana character are applicable
App - 205
APPENDIX
Item
Data name
Global label/Local label/Structure
FB/FUN
Program file/Task (Structured project)
User library (Structured project) Intelligent function module tool
QD75/LD75 positioning module
Serial communication module
User data (Example: *.xls) Backup data for PLC Module Change Setting function Target memory for online operations IC memory card drive for IC memory card operation I/O system setting CSV file that can be created in Diagnostic function Shortcut key
Global label name/Structure name Label name Constant value Data type Comment Remark Function block name/Function name Property (Result Type) Program file name/Task name Program name Comment User library name Library file name (*.SUL) Property (Help path) � Wave trace file name Location trace file name Circuit trace data Protocol setting file name (Predefined protocol support function) Manufacturer/Model/Protocol name/Packet name/ Element name (Predefined protocol support function) File name
Title
Title
Title
I/O system setting file name Product information in System monitor PLC diagnostics Module error history Template file name
Changeable/ unchangeable project language
� � � � � � � � � � � �
�
�
�
�
�
�
� � � � �
App - 206
Appendix 17.1 Data to which double byte character and half-width Japanese kana character are applicable
Appendix 17 Considerations When Using English Version of GX Works2
PLC parameter data
Tab name PLC Name PLC System
PLC File
PLC RAS Boot File Program
I/O Assignment
Item
�
PLC Module Change Setting File Register Comment File Used in a Command Initial Device Value File for Local Device Error History � � I/O Assignment
Base Setting
: Unchangeable �: Changeable
Data name
Label Comment Title Setting File Name File Name File Name File Name File Name Data Name Program Name Type Model Name Power Model Name Extension Cable
Changeable/ unchangeable project language
� � � � � � � � � � � � � �
Network parameter data
Type Ethernet/CC IE/MELSECNET CC-Link
Item
Network Range Assignment Network Configuration Settings Network Operation Settings Station Inherent Parameters FTP Parameters E-mail Setting
News Setting Operation Setting
: Unchangeable �: Changeable
Data name Parameter Name
Changeable/ unchangeable project language
�
Alias
�
Comment
�
Parameter Name
�
Parameter Name
�
Login Name
�
SMTP Server Name
�
POP Server Name
�
Attached File Name
�
Parameter Name
�
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
MONITORING
17 18 19 20 21 22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
Intelligent function module data
Module type
Item
: Unchangeable �: Changeable
Changeable/
A
Data name
unchangeable
project language
Positioning module
Positioning Data
Positioning Comment
�
APPENDIX
Initialization command
�
Serial communication module/Modem interface module
Modem Function
Telephone number Message Comment
�
�
�
I
User Register Frame Content User registration frame
�
FL-net (OPCN-2) interface module
Parameter
Node name (Equipment name)
�
INDEX
Appendix 17.1 Data to which double byte character and half-width Japanese kana character are applicable
App - 207
APPENDIX
Appendix 17.2 Considerations
The English version of GX Works2 (SW1DND-GXW2-E and SW1DNC-GXW2-E) does not support double byte character and half-width Japanese kana character. Therefore, when using the project data, which has been created in the Japanese version of GX Works2 (SW1DND-GXW2-J and SW1DNCGXW2-J) using double byte character or half-width Japanese kana character, in the English version of GX Works2, change all the double byte character and half-width Japanese kana character to single byte alphanumeric character in the Japanese version of GX Works2. After characters are changed, execute [Compile] [Rebuild All] or [Build] in the Japanese version of GX Works2 and save the project in a condition without any errors.
The following are the considerations when reading project data, in which double byte character or halfwidth Japanese kana character is used, from the programmable controller CPU. � The symbolic information created in the Japanese version of GX Works2 and written to the
programmable controller CPU, cannot be read to the English version of GX Works2. In this case, save the project created in the Japanese version of GX Works2 using the English version of GX Works2, then write the symbolic information to the programmable controller CPU.
Symptom example
The following are examples when using the project data, which is created using double byte character or half-width Japanese kana character, in the English version of GX Works2.
App - 208
Appendix 17.2 Considerations
Appendix 17 Considerations When Using English Version of GX Works2
Displayed as garbled characters
17
When double byte character or half-width Japanese kana character is set in the statement or label,
they are displayed as garbled characters.
<Japanese version of GX Works2>
<English version of GX Works2>
MONITORING
18
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
Data name is not displayed
When double byte character or half-width Japanese kana character is used in data names of user library files, data names cannot be displayed and user library cannot be operated.
19
<Japanese version of GX Works2>
<English version of GX Works2>
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
Data cannot be opened
When opening saved project data in which double byte character or half-width Japanese kana
21
character is used in workspace names, project names, or file names, the message shown below may
be displayed and the project cannot be opened.
<Workspace format project>
<Single file format project>
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
Compilation error
A
When compiling the project data in which double byte character or half-width Japanese kana
character is used in label names, compilation error occurs and compilation cannot be completed
normally.
<English version of GX Works2>
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
Appendix 17.2 Considerations
App - 209
APPENDIX
Appendix 18 Considerations for Selecting Project Language
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
This section explains the considerations for selecting a project language. 'language of GX Works2' in the table indicates the language of installed GX Works2.
Category OS Programmable controller CPU
Operation after installation
Entered language
Item
Considerations
The language pack is not installed.
All characters of the selected language are corrupted.
File name
When a file with a name using other than Japanese characters or one-byte alphanumeric characters is written to a programmable controller CPU, the file cannot be read from the programmable controller CPU, and the performance of the online function may not be normal.
When using GX Works2 in Japanese language, check the following settings.
� "Language for non-Unicode programs"*1 of Windows� operating system is set to Japanese.
� The project language is set to Japanese under [Tool] [Language Selection] in GX Works2.
Language of Windows� operating system and 'language of GX Works2' are different.
When using the following functions, use alphanumeric characters or Japanese characters for folder names and file names.
� Open data in other format
� Save project in GX Developer format
� Read/write IC memory card
� Local device batch read + save CSV
For "Language for non-Unicode programs"*1 setting, set the same language as the one set for the 'language of GX Works2' in advance. By this setting, error messages can be displayed in the 'language of GX Works2'.
Mixing different languages
Only one language with double-byte characters can be used in a project. Japanese, Chinese (simplified characters), Chinese (traditional characters), and Korean cannot be mixed. A language with one-byte characters and a language with double byte characters can be mixed. For example, English (one-byte alphanumeric characters) and Japanese.
When entering data in a language other than the one set for the project language.
The operation is ensured only when the project language which is set for the language selection is used. Do not use characters of the language other than the one set for the project language. Note that alphanumeric characters and one-byte symbols can be used in all languages.
App - 210
Appendix 18 Considerations for Selecting Project Language
Category Font
Function
Project language selection
Item
Considerations
Korean is selected for project language. (Regarding the font 'BatangChe' which is set automatically.)
Including fixed characters such as menus, some of the characters of Japanese and Chinese (simplified characters) are displayed in smaller size.
Displayed characters are different depending on the font even when they are the same character.
Displayed characters may be different between the ones on the screen in which font can be changed and the ones on the screen in which font cannot be changed. Change the font on the Color and Font screen.
Example) With Korean is selected as the project language, when " " is entered in the label editor and a compilation error is performed, " " is displayed on the Output window.
The entered text may be truncated on the screen on which fonts cannot be specified.
The font size of some characters is different in Windows� 10.
When the font size of some characters is different in Windows� 10, install Supplemental Fonts that is supported by 'language of GX Works2' from Windows� Settings. Example) [System] [Apps & features] [Manage optional features] [Add a feature] from Windows� Settings Characters can be displayed in the same way as that of Windows� 7, Windows� 8, or Windows� 8.1.
[Verify] Projects whose project languages are different are verified.
When the same character strings with double-byte character are verified, the result will be a match, however, the character strings may not be displayed normally. Select the same language for projects to be verified.
[Install] User library which contains characters of different language is imported to project.
The operation of user library import is ensured when the project language set for the language selection is used for user library file names and data in the user library. User library which contains file names and data with alphanumeric characters and one-byte symbol can be used in a project in any language.
[Read from PLC], [Read IC Memory Card] Data contains characters in different language is imported, and the Read from PLC or Read IC Memory Card is executed.
The operation of Read from PLC or Read IC Memory Card function is ensured when the project language set for the language selection is used for characters in a target data. Set the same language as the one used in a target data to be read. Target data of the data read function which contains alphanumeric characters and one-byte symbol can be used in a project in any language.
[Open Other Project] The project language selected for "Language Selection" and the operating system language are different.
Other format projects which can be opened in GX Works2: projects whose data name and label name are written in alphanumeric code.
[Read from CSV File] (When reading a program which is written in list format.)
The operation is ensured only when the project languages for the Write to CSV File function and Read from CSV File function are the same.
A language is selected while the project is being displayed.
Screens which are opened from the Project view and the User Library view are closed automatically when a language is selected. Close all other open screens. The selected language is applied by reopening the screens.
Data names, label names
When characters other than alphanumeric characters are used for data names and label names in a project before selecting a project language, the operation is not ensured after the language is selected.
Simulation function
Interaction with CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool
Interaction with Ethernet adapter module configuration tool
Project language setting is invalidated.
Predefined protocol support function
Interaction with iQ Works
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
APPENDIX
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
MONITORING
17 18 19 20 21 22 A I
INDEX
App - 211
APPENDIX
*1 : Set "Language for non-Unicode programs" on Windows Control Panel. Example) From Windows� Control Panel, select [Clock, Language, and Region] [Region and Language] <<Administrative>> "Language for non-Unicode programs".
App - 212
Appendix 19 Modifying Instructions of Projects in Other Formats
Appendix 19 Modifying Instructions of Projects in Other Formats 17
MONITORING
Q CPU L CPU ReFmXote HFeXad FX
This section explains instructions which require modification and how to modify them when using
projects in other formats in GX Works2.
18
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
An X mark may appear on a POU or an error may occur at a compilation when a project which contains ST programs or Structured Ladder/FBD programs created in GX Developer or GX IEC Developer is opened in GX Works2. In this case, instructions or arguments need to be modified. The following table shows the modification methods and reference sections. For instructions which require modification, read the corresponding reference.
Modification method Replacing instruction names Adding devices/labels Changing positions of devices/labels Changing arguments to constants Changing label data types to double-precision real number Changing label data types Changing number of array elements of array data type labels Changing label data type to array data type
Reference Appendix 19.1 Appendix 19.2 Appendix 19.3 Appendix 19.4 Appendix 19.5 Appendix 19.6 Appendix 19.7 Appendix 19.8
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
19 20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
Compiling programs with instructions which do not require modification
For the instructions which do not require modification, perform the following operation to compile programs
without correcting the programs.
Select "Use Dedicated Instruction for GX Developer, GX IEC Developer" under [Tool] [Options] "Project" "Common Setting", and restart GX Works2.
21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
App - 213
APPENDIX
Appendix 19.1 Replacing instruction names
When using any of the following GX Developer or GX IEC Developer instruction, replace the instruction with the GX Works2 instruction.
Instruction to be replaced GX Developer instruction/GX IEC Developer instruction LIMIT MAX MIN
LIMITATION MAXIMUM MINIMUM
GX Works2 instruction
Replacing an instruction in Structured Ladder/FBD program
Operation
1. Select an instruction to be modified.
2. Select [Edit] [Input Instruction].
The Input Instruction [Replace] screen is displayed.
3. Enter a GX Works2 instruction name.
4. Click the
button.
The instruction is replaced with the GX Works2 instruction.
Replacing an instruction in ST program
Operation
� Replace the instruction with the GX Works2 instruction.
Considerations when replacing instructions in Structured Ladder/FBD programs The size of function/function block may be changed. Adjust the position of function/function block if a function/function block with a replaced instruction overlaps with the connected function/function block.
Replacing instructions in Structured Ladder/FBD programs The Input Instruction [Replace] screen can also be displayed by selecting an instruction and entering an instruction name from the keyboard.
Replacing instructions using the Replace Instruction function Instructions can also be replaced using the Replace Instruction function. (Section 10.3.2)
App - 214
Appendix 19.1 Replacing instruction names
Appendix 19 Modifying Instructions of Projects in Other Formats
Appendix 19.2 Adding devices/labels
17
MONITORING
When using any of the following GX Developer or GX IEC Developer instruction, add or change device/ label according to the argument of the GX Works2 instruction. For Structured Ladder/FBD programs, instructions also need to be changed.
Instruction to be modified GX Developer instruction/GX IEC Developer instruction COS LEFT LEN RIGHT ROL ROR SIN TAN ACOS ASIN ATAN EXP
COS LEFT LEN RIGHT ROL_E ROR_E SIN TAN ACOS ASIN ATAN EXP
GX Works2 instruction
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
18 19 20
Modifying an instruction in Structured Ladder/FBD program
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
Operation
1. Replace the instruction with the GX Works2 instruction. (Appendix 19.1)
21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
2. Connect the device/label set to EN to the argument s . 3. Connect the device/label set to ENO to the argument d .
22
4. Select [Edit] [ladder Symbol] [Input Label] ( ), and add an input label to EN. 5. Set TRUE to EN.
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
Appendix 19.2 Adding devices/labels
App - 215
APPENDIX
Modifying an instruction in ST program
Operation
� Adjust the position of the argument, and add TRUE to EN.
In GX Works2, a return value of an instruction is ENO, not an operation result. Programs in which instructions are nested should be rewritten as shown below. <ST before modification> Var_Real := COS(Var_s_Real) + 1.23;
<ST after modification> COS(TRUE, Var_s_Real, Var_cos_Real);Var_Real := Var_cos_Real + 1.23;
App - 216
Appendix 19.2 Adding devices/labels
Appendix 19 Modifying Instructions of Projects in Other Formats
Appendix 19.3 Changing positions of devices/labels
17
MONITORING
When using any of the following GX IEC Developer instruction, replace the instruction with the GX Works2 instruction, and change the position of device/label according to the corresponding argument.
Instruction to be modified
GX IEC Developer instruction
GETE_M GETEP_M BUFRCV_M BUFSND_M CLOSE_M RISEND_MD RISEND_P_MD RITO_MD RITO_P_MD
GX Works2 instruction
G_GETE GP_GETE ZP_BUFRCV ZP_BUFSND ZP_CLOSE G_RISEND GP_RISEND G_RITO GP_RITO
Argument with different
position
New position for argument
s2
s2
Change the position of the device/label from
s2
the right side to the left side of the POU
s3
according to the position of the argument.
s2
d1
d1
Change the position of the device/label from
the left side to the right side of the POU
d
according to the position of the argument.
d
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
18 19
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
Modifying an instruction in Structured Ladder/FBD program
Operation
20
1. Replace the instruction with the GX Works2 instruction. (Appendix 19.1)
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
21
2. Change the position of the device/label according to the argument of the instruction.
If an input label or output label does not exist at the position of argument, add it by selecting [Edit] [Ladder Symbol] [Input Label] ( )/[Output Label] ( ). For G_GETE in the following example, move "D12" of the argument d to s2 , and move "M12" which is not connected to the argument d .
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
Modifying an instruction in ST program
Operation
A
� Replace the instruction with the GX Works2 instruction.
APPENDIX
Only for RISEND(_P)_MD, switch the positions of 4th argument and 5th argument.
I
INDEX
Appendix 19.3 Changing positions of devices/labels
App - 217
APPENDIX
Appendix 19.4 Changing arguments to constants
When using any of the following GX IEC Developer instruction, replace the instruction with the GX Works2 instruction, and change the data type of argument to constant.
Instruction to be modified GX IEC Developer instruction MEAN_M MEANP_M BMOV_E
GX Works2 instruction
MEAN MEANP BMOV_E
Argument to which constant is to be set
n n n
Modifying an instruction in Structured Ladder/FBD program
Operation
1. Replace the instruction with the GX Works2 instruction. (Appendix 19.1)
2. Change the argument n to constant. When a label is set to the argument n, change the
class of the label to "VAR_CONSTANT" or "VAR_GLOBAL_CONSTANT" on the label setting editor.
Modifying an instruction in ST program
Operation
1. Replace the instruction with the GX Works2 instruction.
2. Change the argument n to constant. When a label is set to the argument n, change the
class of the label to "VAR_CONSTANT" or "VAR_GLOBAL_CONSTANT" on the label setting editor.
App - 218
Appendix 19.4 Changing arguments to constants
Appendix 19 Modifying Instructions of Projects in Other Formats
Appendix 19.5 Changing label data types to double-precision real
17
number
MONITORING
When using any of the following GX IEC Developer instruction, replace the instruction with the GX Works2 instruction, and change the data type of argument to double-precision real number.
Instruction to be modified GX IEC Developer instruction
GX Works2 instruction
Argument to which double-precision real number is to be set
LD_EDEQ_M
LDED=*1
LD_EDGE_M
LDED>=*1
LD_EDGT_M
LDED>*1
LD_EDLE_M
LDED<=*1
LD_EDLT_M
LDED<*1
LD_EDNE_M
LDED<>*1
AND_EDEQ_M
ANDED=*1
AND_EDGE_M
ANDED>=*1
AND_EDGT_M AND_EDLE_M
ANDED>*1 ANDED<=*1
s1, s2
AND_EDLT_M
ANDED<*1
AND_EDNE_M
ANDED<>*1
OR_EDEQ_M
ORED=*1
OR_EDGE_M
ORED>=*1
OR_EDGT_M
ORED>*1
OR_EDLE_M
ORED<=*1
OR_EDLT_M
ORED<*1
OR_EDNE_M
ORED<>*1
EDPLUS_M
�*2
EDPLUSP_M
�*2
s1, s2
EDPLUS_3_M EDPLUSP_3_M
ED+*1 ED+P*1
s1, s2, d
EDMINUS_M
�*2
s, d
EDMINUSP_M
�*2
EDMINUS_3_M EDMINUSP_3_M
ED-*1 ED-P*1
s1, s2, d
EDDIV_M
ED/*1
EDDIVP_M EDMUL_M
ED/P*1 ED*1
s1, s2, d
EDMULP_M
ED*P*1
FLTD_M
FLTD
FLTDP_M
FLTDP
DFLTD_M
DFLTD
d
DFLTDP_M
DFLTDP
EDNEG_M
EDNEG
EDNEGP_M
EDNEGP
EDMOV_M
EDMOV
s, d
EDMOVP_M
EDMOVP
*1 : For ST program, the instruction does not need to be changed to a GX Works2 instruction. *2 : The instruction does not need to be changed to a GX Works2 instruction.
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
APPENDIX
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
18 19 20 21 22 A I
INDEX
Appendix 19.5 Changing label data types to double-precision real number
App - 219
APPENDIX
Modifying an instruction in Structured Ladder/FBD program
Operation
1. Replace the instruction with the GX Works2 instruction. (Appendix 19.1)
2. Change the class of the label to "FLOAT (Double Precision)" on the label setting editor.
Modifying an instruction in ST program
Operation
1. Replace the instruction with the GX Works2 instruction. 2. Change the class of the label to "FLOAT (Double Precision)" on the label setting editor.
App - 220
Appendix 19.5 Changing label data types to double-precision real number
Appendix 19 Modifying Instructions of Projects in Other Formats
Appendix 19.6 Changing label data types
17
MONITORING
When using any of the following GX IEC Developer instruction, replace the instruction with the GX Works2 instruction, and change the data type according to the data type of the argument.
Instruction to be modified GX IEC Developer instruction
GX Works2 instruction
Argument whose data type is to be
changed
Argument data type
Before change
After change
18
FLTD_M
FLTD
s
ANY16
Word [signed]
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
FLTDP_M
FLTDP
s
ANY16
Word [signed]
DFLTD_M
DFLTD
s
ANY32
Double word [signed]
DFLTDP_M
DFLTDP
s
ANY32
Double word [signed]
OUT_M
OUT
d
ANY_SIMPLE
Bit
19
Modifying an instruction in Structured Ladder/FBD program
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
Operation
1. Replace the instruction with the GX Works2 instruction. (Appendix 19.1)
20
2. Change the data type of the label to the corresponding data type on the label setting
editor.
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
Modifying an instruction in ST program
21
Operation
1. Replace the instruction with the GX Works2 instruction.
2. Change the data type of the label to the corresponding data type on the label setting
22
editor.
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
Appendix 19.6 Changing label data types
App - 221
APPENDIX
Appendix 19.7 Changing number of array elements of array data type labels
When using any of the following GX IEC Developer instruction, replace the instruction with the GX Works2 instruction, and change the number of array elements according to the data type of the argument.
Instruction to be modified GX IEC Developer instruction
GX Works2 instruction
Argument whose number of array elements is to be
changed
Argument data type
Before change
After change
REQ_JP_M REQ_UP_M
JP_REQ
s2
JP_REQ
d1
GP_REQ
s2
GP_REQ
d1
ARRAY[1..7] OF ANY16 ARRAY[1..4] OF ANY16 ARRAY[1..7] OF ANY16 ARRAY[1..4] OF ANY16
ANY16(0..5)*1
*1 : The index of the array does not need to be started from 0 if the number of array elements matches. A change of the program is not necessary when the index of the array is set to 1 to match with the previous index.
Modifying an instruction in Structured Ladder/FBD program
Operation
1. Replace the instruction with the GX Works2 instruction. (Appendix 19.1)
2. Change the number of array element of the array data type label on the label setting
editor.
Modifying an instruction in ST program
Operation
1. Replace the instruction with the GX Works2 instruction.
2. Change the number of array element of the array data type label on the label setting
editor.
Considerations when changing the number of array elements When the number of array elements is reduced by the modification, the program needs to be modified according to the change. Example: For the argument d of REQ_JP_M, the program which accesses the 7th array element needs to be modified.
App - 222
Appendix 19.7 Changing number of array elements of array data type labels
Appendix 19 Modifying Instructions of Projects in Other Formats
Appendix 19.8 Changing label data type to array data type
17
MONITORING
When using any of the following GX IEC Developer instruction, replace the instruction with the GX Works2 instruction, and change the data type of the argument to the array data type.
Instruction to be modified GX IEC Developer instruction
GX Works2 instruction
Argument whose data type is to be changed
to array data type
Argument data type
Before change
After change
TEACH1_P_M
ZP_TEACH1
s
TEACH2_P_M TEACH3_P_M
ZP_TEACH2
s
ZP_TEACH3
s
ANY16
ANY16(0..3)
TEACH4_P_M
ZP_TEACH4
s
PSTRT1_P_M
ZP_PSTRT1
s
PSTRT2_P_M PSTRT3_P_M
ZP_PSTRT2
s
ZP_PSTRT3
s
ANY16
ARRAY[0..2] OF ANY16
PSTRT4_P_M
ZP_PSTRT4
s
BIDIN_M
G_BIDIN
d2
BIDINP_M
GP_BIDIN
d2
BIDOUT_M
G_BIDOUT
d
BIDOUTP_M
GP_BIDOUT
d
INPUT_M
G_INPUT
d2
ONDEMAND_M
G_ONDEMAND d
ONDEMANDP_M
GP_ONDEMAND d
OUTPUT_M
G_OUTPUT
d
OUTPUTP_M
GP_OUTPUT
d
PRR_M
G_PRR
d
PRRP_M
GP_PRR
d
PUTE_M
G_PUTE
d
PUTEP_M
GP_PUTE
d
READ_JP_M
JP_READ
d2
READ_UP_M
GP_READ
d2
RECV_JP_M
JP_RECV
d2
RECV_UP_M
GP_RECV
d2
REMFR_MD
Z_REMFR
d2
BOOL
ARRAY[0..1] OF BOOL
REMFR_P_MD
ZP_REMFR
d2
REMTO_MD
Z_REMTO
d2
REMTO_P_MD
ZP_REMTO
d2
REQ_JP_M
JP_REQ
d2
REQ_UP_M
GP_REQ
d2
SEND_JP_M
JP_SEND
d
SEND_UP_M
GP_SEND
d
SREAD_JP_M
JP_SREAD
d2
SREAD_UP_M
GP_SREAD
d2
SWRITE_JP_M
JP_SWRITE
d2
SWRITE_UP_M
GP_SWRITE
d2
WRITE_JP_M
JP_WRITE
d2
WRITE_UP_M
GP_WRITE
d2
ZNRD_J_M
J_ZNRD
d2
ZNRD_JP_M
JP_ZNRD
d2
ZNWR_J_M
J_ZNWR
d2
ZNWR_JP_M
JP_ZNWR
d2
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
APPENDIX
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
18 19 20 21 22 A I
INDEX
Appendix 19.8 Changing label data type to array data type
App - 223
APPENDIX
Modifying an instruction in Structured Ladder/FBD program
Operation
1. Replace the instruction with the GX Works2 instruction. (Appendix 19.1)
2. Change the label data type to array data type on the label setting editor.
Modifying an instruction in ST program
Operation
1. Replace the instruction with the GX Works2 instruction.
2. Change the label data type to array data type on the label setting editor.
Considerations when changing data type Since the label data type is changed to array data type, labels used in the program needs to be modified according to the array data type.
App - 224
Appendix 19.8 Changing label data type to array data type
Appendix 20 Considerations When Using Projects Created in PX Developer
Appendix 20 Considerations When Using Projects Created in PX Developer 17
MONITORING
*1
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
*1 : Process CPU and Redundant CPU only
This section explains the considerations when using projects created in PX Developer in GX Works2. 18
When starting GX Works2 from PX Developer
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
1) The following menus cannot be selected.
� [Project] [New]
� [Project] [Open] � [Project] [Close]
19
� [Project] [Save As]
� [Project] [Change PLC Type]
� [Project] [Open Other Data] [Open Other Project]
� [Project] [(Recently used files 1 to 4)]
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
2) Global labels and programs whose name starts with '#FBDQ' cannot be edited.
20
When starting GX Works2 independently
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
1) For PX Developer incorporated projects, the following menu cannot be selected. � [Project] [Change PLC Type]
2) Global labels and programs whose name starts with '#FBDQ' cannot be edited.
21
Project files incorporated with PX Developer
1) For PX Developer incorporated projects, the projects are always in the single file format.
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
Automatically assigned devices
22
1) For PX Developer incorporated projects, do not specify the device range used as the system resource of PX Developer as the device range for devices automatically assigned to labels of GX Works2.
Redundant parameters
A
1) For PX Developer incorporated projects, consider the following restrictions. Register the user devices which require the tracking to the tracking blocks No. 1 to 32. � The tracking device setting is fixed to "Device Detail Setting". � The tracking block No. 33 to 64 cannot be changed.
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
App - 225
APPENDIX Security
1) When setting security to the GX Works2 project, register the user name and the password same as the security level name and the password set in PX Developer. The security level name of PX Developer can be copied on the Set Login Password screen of PX Developer. When the security level name and the password of PX Developer is not registered as the same security level in the security setting of GX Works2, the compilation and the online operation cannot be performed.
2) Do not register block passwords for programs whose name starts with '#FBDQ'.
Simulation function
1) For PX Developer incorporated projects, file registers are written to the simulator by the PLC Write function when the simulation is started.
2) When executing the step execution of the simulation, execute the simulation from GX Works2.
App - 226
Appendix 21 Troubleshooting
Appendix 21 Troubleshooting
17
MONITORING
Q CPU L CPU Remote Head FX
This section shows the errors which may occur when using GX Works2 and their corrective actions.
Symptom
Check point
Corrective action
Contents in the screen may not be
displayed properly. (For example, overlapping of icons, text overflowing from the flame of a button, etc.)
Is the size of the text and other items in the screen set to a value other than 100% (96 DPI, 9 pt etc.) in Windows settings?
� Set the value to 100% (96 DPI, 9 pt etc.).
� For Windows 10 (version 1703 or later)*1, the display of GX Works2 can be displayed with high DPI scaling by using
a Windows 10 function.*2
(Example)
Select and right-click 'GD2.exe'*3, and
select [Properties] from the shortcut menu.
Click
in the
<<Compatibility>> tab.
Select the checkbox of "Override high
DPI scaling behavior. Scaling performed
by:", then select "System" from the pull-
down list.
Click the
button.
*1 : The Windows version can be checked by the following procedure. (Example) Press Windows key + , or select [Windows System] [Run] from Windows Start. Enter 'winver' in the "Run" screen. Check the version in the displayed screen.
*2 : The display of GX Works2 will be blurred by enlarging. Additionally, when a window size such as a docked window size is changed, a part of the display may be distorted. The following lists the setting values for "Change the size of text, apps, and other items" and the recommended display resolution for each setting value in Windows 10. Setting value: 100%, display resolution: 1024 � 768 dots or more Setting value: 125%, display resolution: 1900 � 1200 dots or more Setting value: 150%, display resolution: 1900 � 1200 dots or more Setting value: 175%, display resolution: 2880 � 1620 dots or more Setting value: 200%, display resolution: 2880 � 1620 dots or more Setting value: 225%, display resolution: 3840 � 2160 dots or more Setting value: 250%, display resolution: 3840 � 2160 dots or more
*3 : 'GD2.exe' is stored in the folder where GX Works2 has been installed. The following is an example of a storage location. 64-bit version operating system: C:\Program Files (x86)\MELSOFT\GPPW2\GD2.exe 32-bit version operating system: C:\Program Files\MELSOFT\GPPW2\GD2.exe
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
18 19 20 21 22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
A
APPENDIX
I
INDEX
App - 227
APPENDIX
MEMO
App - 228
17 18 19 20 21 22 A I
Index - 1
INDEX
APPENDIX
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
MONITORING
INDEX
INDEX
[A]
access authority ............................................................. 4-70 Access levels ................................................................. 4-62 accessing a programmable controller CPU ................... 14-2 accessing a programmable controller CPU via GOT ... 14-40
FXCPU .................................................................. 14-42 QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU ..............................14-43, 14-45 Accessing Programmable Controller CPU via Phone Line .............................................................................. 14-50 accessing the programmable controller CPU on the host station ............................................................................ 14-8 FXCPU .................................................................. 14-10 QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU ........................................... 14-9 Acknowledge XY Assignment ..............6-3, 6-18, 6-37, 6-39 Administrators ................................................................ 4-62 All Find ......................................................................... 10-16 All Replace ................................................................... 10-16 Allocating memory for Online program change .............. 15-7 Always ON ................................................................... 22-30 ASCII Code ................................................................App-61 ATA card ...........................................................15-36, 15-74
[B]
backup ........................................................................... 4-47 backup device memory .................................................. 18-6 block password .....................................................4-80, 4-81 buffer memory .....................................................12-13, 17-8 Build ................................................................................. 5-9
[C]
Cable test ..................................................................... 21-45 Canceling keyword ....................................................... 16-16 canceling password ............................................16-6, 16-11 CC IE Field Configuration window ................................. 6-46 CC-Link Configuration window ....................................... 6-59 CC-Link IE ............................................................ A-36, 6-37 CC-Link IEF Basic Diagnostics .................................... 21-51 change ......................................................................... 22-21 Change Project Type ..................................................... 4-46 Change to General CC-Link Module .............................. 6-63 Changing colors ............................................................. 3-24 Changing fonts ............................................................... 3-24 Changing Modules Online .......................................... 21-104 Changing project data names ........................................ 4-38 Characters for password ................................................ 6-74 Check Parameter ........................................................... 6-75 Clear All Parameters ...................................................... 6-78 Clear All (All Devices) .................................................... 9-15 Closing projects ............................................................. 4-20 Command Execution of Slave Station ........................... 6-66 Comment verify type .................................................... 15-33 comments by program ..................................................... 9-4 common comments .......................................................... 9-4
communication head module ............................... A-36, 6-12 Communication test .............................. 21-22, 21-32, 21-43 compare source ........................................................... 22-11 Compatibility .................................................App-78, App-81 Compile .................................................................5-9, 12-16 Compile Condition ........................................................ 12-17 compression ................................................................... 4-16 condition ......................................................................... 22-4 Configurations for USB connection .................................. 2-4 connecting station information ..........................21-52, 21-54 Connection Channel List ................................................ 14-4 Connection Destination view .......................................... 3-20 Connection from an I/F Boards ...................................... 2-14 Connection test .............................................................. 14-5 conventional debugging ................................................. 22-2 Copy ......................................................................4-36, 4-37 COS curve .................................................................... 22-21 Creating check sheets .................................................. 21-63 Creating projects .............................................................. 4-9 Cross Reference ............................................................ 10-2 cycle scan .................................................................... 22-21
[D]
data entry method for direct data entry ........................ 22-14 Data Names .............................................................App-110 Data Paste ..................................................................... 4-36 Data Security Setting ..................................................... 4-70 debugging ...................................................................... 18-2 debugging with I/O system setting function .................... 22-2 decompressing ......................................................4-16, 4-17 decompressing divided compressed files ...................... 4-18 Delete ............................................................................. 4-38 Delete PLC Data .......................................................... 15-34 Delete PLC User Data .................................................. 15-36 Deleting Device Comments ............................................ 9-15 Deleting projects ............................................................ 4-19 Deleting revision information .......................................... 4-51 Developers (Level 1) ...................................................... 4-62 Developers (Level 2) ...................................................... 4-62 Developers (Level 3) ...................................................... 4-62 device batch replace .................................................... 10-28 Device Comment .....................................................9-2, 12-8 Device Comment Display Format .................................. 12-9 device comment editing mode ....................................... 9-13 device comment to be referenced .................................... 9-6 Device Initial Values ......................................................... 8-2 device list ..................................................................... 10-13 device memory .................................................. 7-2, 8-4, 8-5 device memory editor ..................................................... 7-14 device of which a value is to be changed ..................... 22-14 Device Specification screen ......................................... 22-11 device test with execution condition ............................. 19-10 device value input .......................................................... 22-8 devices that can be replaced or batch replaced ........... 10-20
Index - 2
diagnosing bridge modules ..........................................21-56 GX LogViewer format CSV file .....................................19-26
17
Diagnosing CC-Link and CC-Link/LT ...........................21-53 GX Simulator ........................................... 22-9, 22-23, 22-30
Diagnosing CC-Link IE Controller Network ..................21-28 GX Simulator2 ............................................................... A-35
MONITORING
Diagnosing CC-Link IE Field Network .............. 21-38, 21-51 GX Works2 format CSV file ..........................................19-26
Diagnosing Ethernet .....................................................21-66
Diagnosing Programmable Controller CPU ....................21-2
[I]
Digit ..............................................................................10-17 direct data entry ............................................................22-11
inline structured text .....................................................10-16 instruction conversion list ........................................ App-162
18
disabled scans ..............................................................22-22
intelligent function module .................................. 4-45, 15-15
Display Format .............................................................12-13
invalid character .............................................................4-58
Display Lines of Monitored Current Value ....................12-13
IP communication test ...................................... 21-33, 21-44
display size ........................................................... 7-10, 7-13
I/O system setting file ....................................... 22-27, 22-30
Displaying editing screens with the toolbar ....................3-10
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
dockable windows ..........................................................3-17
[K]
duplicated coil .................................................................12-8
19
keep ..............................................................................22-15
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
[E] [L]
edit timing chart format ..................................... 22-15, 22-17
enabling high-speed monitoring from another station ....20-9
L series .......................................................................... A-35
enabling Online program change of multiple blocks .......20-9
Label Names ........................................................... App-110
English Version of GX Works2 ................................ App-204 Enter Device screen .....................................................22-17
label programming ............................................................1-5 ladder editing mode ........................................................9-14
20
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
Error History .................................................................21-68
Latch Data Backup .......................................................15-40
error history monitoring ................................................21-24
LED status ....................................................................21-69
Error icons ........................................................ 21-10, 21-98
Libraries ..........................................................................13-2
Error Information ............................................................21-4
link direct device ............................................... 12-12, 12-13
Ethernet adapter ............................................................ A-36
Link start/stop ...............................................................21-34
Ethernet adapter module ............................................... A-36 Ethernet Adapter Module Configuration Tool ...............20-18
List of link devices ..........................................................6-69 List of slave stations .......................................................6-69
21
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
examples of device search ...........................................10-19
Logging .........................................................................21-36
examples of instruction search .....................................10-23
Logging in projects .........................................................4-69
execution type .......................................................... 4-5, 4-8
logs ................................................................... 10-30, 10-32
Export CSV Data ..........................................................19-26
Loop test .......................................................................21-18
Export to GX Developer Format File ..............................4-60
loop test/transmission speed test .................................21-59
Export to ROM Format .................................................15-35 Extending Number of Points of Device Comment ..........9-16
Loopback test ...............................................................21-84
[M]
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
[F]
Managing block passwords ............................................4-81
FB libraries .....................................................................13-3
MELSECNET Diagnostics ............................................21-14
File Password 32 ............................................................16-8
Merge Data .....................................................................4-39
file under editing .............................................................22-8
module error history ......................................... 21-95, 21-96
file under execution ........................................................22-8 Filtering condition .........................................................10-12
module error history collection function ..............................................................21-95, 21-96, 21-102
A
Filtering display ............................................................10-11
Monitoring Intelligent Function Modules .......................17-26
Format types ..................................................................20-9
Monitoring Interrupt Program List .................................17-15
APPENDIX
Formatting a memory card .............................................20-9
Monitoring line (host station) ........................................21-53
Functions to Protect Data ...............................................16-2
Monitoring Program List ...............................................17-12
FX manuals ....................................................................3-32
Monitoring Value ..........................................................12-13
FX series ....................................................................... A-35
Multiple word ................................................................10-17
I
[G]
[N]
global device comment .....................................................9-2 GOT transparent function .............................................14-40
Navigation window ................................................. 3-4, 3-20 Network event history ...................................................21-47
INDEX
Index - 3
INDEX
network parameter ......................................................... 6-37 CC-Link ..........................................................6-44, 6-45 CC-Link IE .............................................................. 6-41 Ethernet .................................................................. 6-43 MELSECNET/10 ..................................................... 6-42 MELSECNET/H ...................................................... 6-42 Remote I/O ............................................................. 6-43
Network route ................................................................. 14-4 Network test ................................................................. 21-16 New ................................................................................ 4-34 New project creation with data read from programmable controller CPU ................................................................ 4-11 number of contacts ........................................................ 12-9 number of scans .......................................................... 22-17 number of scans of timing chart ................................... 22-22
[O]
obtain transmission speed setting ................................ 21-60 Online Program Change ...... 5-9, 15-45, 15-46, 15-48, 20-9 ON/OFF cycle .............................................................. 22-20 Opening existing projects ............................................... 4-12 Opening projects in other formats .................................. 4-56 operation histories .......................................................... 21-7 option (find/replace) ..........................................10-17, 10-24 Options ........................................................................... 12-2 Other station .................................................................. 14-4 other station information .............................................. 21-26 Other Station (Co-existence Network) ........................... 14-4 Other Station (Single Network) ...................................... 14-4
[P]
Parameter Processing of Slave Station ................6-54, 6-64 parameter status ...............................................21-67, 21-73 Parameter Verify Level ................................................ 15-32 Password ..............................................................16-3, 16-8 paste .....................................................................4-36, 4-37 PC side I/F ..................................................................... 14-3 PING test ..................................................................... 21-79 PLC Diagnostics ...................................................21-2, 21-9 PLC Direct Coupled Setting ........................................... 14-5 PLC Memory Operation ....................................20-10, 20-13 PLC parameter ................................................................. 6-2
communication head module .................................. 6-12 FXCPU .................................................................... 6-15 QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU ............................................. 6-5 remote I/O module .................................................. 6-13 PLC Status Information .................................................. 21-4 Precautions on replacing ............................................. 10-23 Print Preview ................................................................ 11-38 Print Window Preview .................................................. 11-43 Profile ............................................................................. 4-88 Program Memory Batch Download .............................. 15-38 programming languages ................................................ 2-21 Project .............................................................................. 4-5
Project view .................................................................... 3-20 properties ....................................................................... 4-42 protocol status .............................................................. 21-78 Push Button .................................................................. 22-30 PX Developer ...........................................................App-225
[Q]
Q series ..........................................................................A-35 QnH -> QnU Conversion Support Tool .......................... 4-32
[R]
Read Device Memory from PLC .................................... 7-16 Read from CSV File ....................................................... 9-20 Read from PLC .............................................................. 15-2 Read from PLC (trace data) ......................................... 19-29 Read PLC Data .............................................................. 6-14 Read PLC User Data ................................................... 15-36 Rebuild All ........................................................................ 5-9 received e-mail information .......................................... 21-70 Redundant Operation ..................................................... 20-6 redundant parameter ...................................................... 6-36 Registering and Monitoring Devices ............................ 17-16 Registering Keyword .................................................... 16-14 Registering Password ...........................................16-4, 16-9 registering/canceling forced input/output ..............19-7, 19-9 remote I/O module ............................ A-36, 6-13, 19-9, 21-2 Remote Operation .................................................20-2, 20-8 Remote Password .......................................................... 6-73 remove memory card ..................................................... 20-3 Replace General CC-Link Module ................................. 6-62 Reserved station function enable ................................. 21-49 Resetting security ........................................................... 4-66 Restoring projects .......................................................... 4-49 Restrictions when Changing Programmable Controller Types .......................................................................App-113 Result ................................................................10-30, 10-32 RS-232 cables
QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU ............................................. 2-6 RS-422 ............................................................................. 2-7
[S]
sample comment ............................................................ 9-17 Sampling Trace ............................................................ 19-14 Sampling Trace Setting ................................................ 19-15 Saving projects ......................................................4-14, 4-15 Saving the selection status of the files ........................... 15-6 SD memory card ................................... 15-36, 15-74, 15-77 Security .......................................................................... 4-62 Security key .................................................................... 4-72 Select station network device status display ................ 21-31 selected station communication status monitor ...........................................................................21-39, 21-42 selected station error information ................................. 21-54
Index - 4
selected station information ..........................................21-54 unlocking password temporarily ......................... 16-7, 16-12
17
send e-mail information ................................................21-71 USB cables
sequence action .............................................................22-4
FX3U/FX3UC ...............................................................2-5
MONITORING
Set Clock ......................................................................20-14
QCPU (Q mode)/LCPU .............................................2-4
Setting character strings .................................................7-11 USB Driver .............................................................. App-203
Setting conditions .........................................................22-11 USB/Serial Port ................................................................2-2
Setting Connection Destinations ....................................14-2 Setting device values by setting device range .................7-8
User Libraries .................................................................13-4 User Library view ............................................................3-20
18
Setting device values in units of points ............................7-7
User Management ................................................ 4-65, 4-66
Setting Printer ....................................................... 11-4, 11-7
Users ..............................................................................4-62
SIMULATING PROGRAMS
Setting verification test .................................................21-19 Utilizing Data ..................................................................4-53
Setting/changing block passwords .................................4-82
Utilizing existing data to set parameters of multiple CPU
shortcut keys ............................................................... App-2
.........................................................................................6-14
simulation function ............................................ 18-2, App-22 SIN curve ......................................................................22-21 Sorting data ....................................................................3-21
Utilizing Projects .............................................................4-53
[V]
19
DEBUGGING PROGRAMS
special debugging sequence program ...........................22-2 Split into volumes of the following size ...........................4-16 SRAM card ...................................................................15-74 standard ROM ..............................................................15-36
Verify with PLC .............................................................15-29 Verifying project data ......................................................4-20 Verifying project level .....................................................4-23 Verifying revisions ..........................................................4-51
Start Monitoring ..............................................................17-7
Start Trace ....................................................................19-22
[W]
20
Station order check test ................................................21-21 status bar ........................................................................3-23 status logging ...............................................................21-61 status of each connection ................................. 21-68, 21-74 status of each protocol .................................................21-69 Switch Chart/Detail .......................................................19-24 Switching display format .................................................7-13 Symbolic information ....................................................15-19 System Configuration .....................................................6-63 System error history ...................................................21-102 System image(s) ............................................................14-5 System Monitor ............................................................21-89
Warning ........................................................................12-16 warning codes ..............................................................12-16 Watch ...........................................................................17-16 windows ..........................................................................3-16 Word Device Setting screen .........................................22-14 work window ...................................................................3-11 Write Device Memory to PLC ............................... 7-16, 7-17 Write PLC User Data ....................................................15-36 Write to CSV File ............................................................9-19 Write to PLC ...................................................................15-2 Write to PLC (trace data) .................................. 19-29, 19-32 written in units of files with Online program change .....15-54
DIAGNOSING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER STATUS
OPERATING PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER CPU
21
[T]
[Extension]
22
SIMULATING OPERATIONS OF EXTERNAL DEVICES
target simulator setting ...................................................22-9 template ................................................................ 3-28, 3-29 temporary error invalid station setting/restore ..............21-50
*.DAT ............................................................................22-23 *.IOS ................................................................. 22-27, 22-30
timing chart ...................................................................22-15
timing chart data file .....................................................22-23
timing chart input ................................................ 22-8, 22-15 timing of bit devices ......................................................22-20
A
timing of word devices ..................................................22-21
timing setting ................................................................22-20
APPENDIX
toolbars ................................................................. 3-5, App-2
Tooltip .............................................................................3-11
Trace Setting .................................................... 19-15, 19-16
trigonometric function ...................................................22-21
I
[U]
Unlocking a remote password ........................................15-5 Unlocking block passwords .................................. 4-83, 4-84 unlocking keyword temporarily .....................................16-17
INDEX
Index - 5
TRADEMARKS
Adobe and Reader are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries. Microsoft, Excel, Windows, Windows Vista, and Windows XP are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. The company names, system names and product names mentioned in this manual are either registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective companies. In some cases, trademark symbols such as 'TM' or '�' are not specified in this manual. SPREAD Copyright (C) 2004 FarPoint Technologies, Inc.
SH(NA)-080779ENG-AM(2012)KWIX MODEL:GXW2-VER1-O-KY-E MODEL CODE: 13JU63
HEAD OFFICE : TOKYO BUILDING, 2-7-3 MARUNOUCHI, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO 100-8310, JAPAN NAGOYA WORKS : 1-14 , YADA-MINAMI 5-CHOME , HIGASHI-KU, NAGOYA , JAPAN
When exported from Japan, this manual does not require application to the Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry for service transaction permission.
Specifications subject to change without notice.